Hi Vision 6500

Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner
Model EUB-6500
TECHNICAL GUIDE
--- Principle of Operation ---
HITACHI MEDICAL CORPORATION

Tokyo, Japan
LlE-EA0207-0
CONFIDENTIALITY This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi

Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to any third party or reproduced
without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright 0 Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2002. All rights reserved.
CONTENTS
Page
Section 1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ l- 1
1.1 Product Overview ......................................................................................................... l- 1

1.2 System Specification .................................................................................................... l- 2
1.3 Environmental conditions.. ........................................................................................... 1. 2
1.4 System Organization.. ................................................................................. .................. 1. 3
Section 2 Safety .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. ... 2 - 1

2.1 Classification of the Equipment .................................................................................. 2- 1
2.2 Cautions in Operating the Equipment ...................................................................... .2 . 1
2.3 Cautions in Maintaining the Equipment ................................................................... 2- 1
2.4 Symbols ...................................................................................................................... .2 . 2
Section 3 Operation .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . ... . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. 3 - 1

3.1 General Operation ....................................................................................................... .3 . 1
3.2 Special Operation for Service Personnel ................................................................... .3- 1
3.2.1 Initialization of system environment ................................................................. .3 . 1
3.2.2 Contents of backup data ....................................................................................... 3- 3
3.2.3 Saving backup data .............................................................................................. .3- 7
3.2.4 Loading backup data ............................................................................................. 3. 8
3.2.5 Displaying software and hardware versions.. .................................................... .3 . 9
3.2.6 Action to be taken when the hard disk crashes.. ............................................... .3 . 11
3.2.7 Other functions of “Service Tools” ....................................................................... .3 . 30
3.2.8 Cautions in replacing PCB ................................................................................... 3. 31
3.2.9 Backup battery.. ................................................................................................... .3 . 32
3.2.10 Version-up installation of Software ..................................................................... 3. 34
Section 4 Principle of Operation.. ............................................................................................. .4 . 1

4.1 System Block of EUB-6500 ......................................................................................... .4 . 1
4.2 Basic Composition of EUB-6500.. ............................................................................... .4 . 1
4.2.1 General and board description.. .......................................................................... .4 . 1
4.2.2 PRBSW PCB circuit description .......................................................................... 4 . 5
4.2.3 DBF PCB circuit description ............................................................................... .4 . 7
4.2.4 DVP PCB circuit description.. ............................................................................. .4 . 9
4.2.5 DSCP PCB circuit description.. ........................................................................... .4 . 11
4.2.6 BWDSC PCB circuit description.. ....................................................................... .4 . 15
4.2.7 CFMDSC PCB circuit description.. ..................................................................... .4 . 17
4.2.8 CONT PCB circuit description.. ........................................................................... 4 . 19
4.2.9 KB & KBIF PCB circuit description.. ................................................................. .4 . 21
4.3 BIO Unit EZU-EK23 ................................................................................................. 4 . 23

4.3.1 General and board description.. ........................................................................... 4 . 23
4.3.2 BIO PCB circuit description.. .............................................................................. .4 . 23
1 LlE-EA0207
(1)
4.4 Steerable Doppler CW Unit EZUST4 .................................................................... .4 . 27
4.4.2 CWBUF PCB circuit description.. ....................................................................... .4 . 27
4.4.3 CWREC PCB circuit description.. ....................................................................... .4 . 27
4.5 CW Doppler Unit EZU-CW2 ..................................................................................... 4 . 28
4.52 CWREC PCB circuit description.. ....................................................................... .4 . 28
4.6 Cine Memory unit EZU-MM16, MM17.. .................................................................... .4 . 30

4.6.2 CINE PCB circuit description.. ........................................................................... .4 . 30
Section 5 Power Unit.. ................................................................................................................ 5. 1
5.1 General and Circuit Description ................................................................................. 5. 1

5.2 Power Unit Connectors ............................................................................................... .5 . 4
Section 6 Monitor Unit.. ............................................................................................................ .6 . 1
6.1 Composition .................................................................................................................. 6. 1

6.2 Specification.. ............................................................................................................... .6 . 1
6.3 Installation.. ................................................................................................................. ,6 . 4
6.3.1 Cautions in installing the monitor.. .................................................................... .6 . 4
6.3.2 Cautions for safety.. .............................................................................................. 6 . 5
6.3.3 Replacing the fuse ................................................................................................. 6- 5
6.3.4 Degaussing.. .......................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.4 Description of Operation.. ........................................................................................... .6 . 5

6.4.1 General.. ................................................................................................................. 6 . 5
6.4.2 Brown tube (CRT) ................................................................................................. 6 . 5
6.4.3 Main board (AVB401). ........................................................................................... 6 . 6
6.4.4 VIDEO board (AvB411). ....................................................................................... 6 . 7
6.4.5 Socket board (AvB421). ........................................................................................ 6 . 8
6.4.6 Control board (AVB431). ....................................................................................... 6 . 8
6.4.7 Front control (AVB431). ........................................................................................ 6 . 8
6.4.8 Block diagram.. ...................................................................................................... 6 . 9
6.5 Adjustment.. .................................................................................................................. 6 . 10

6.5.1 List of adjusters.. ................................................................................................... 6 . 10
6.5.2 VR adjuster layout.. .............................................................................................. 6 . 12
6.6 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... .6 . 16

6.7 Removing the Cover ..................................................................................................... 6 . 17
6.8 Detaching and Attaching the Filter.. ......................................................................... .6 . 18
6.8.1 Detaching the filter.. ........................................................................................... .6 . 18
6.8.2 Attaching the filter.. ............................................................................................ .6 . 19
Section 7 Connector Arrangement.. .......................................................................................... 7. 1
7.1 Connector Arrangement.. ............................................................................................. 7. 1

7.2 Connection of CN Panel Connectors ........................................................................... 7. 1
7.3 Termination of Video Signals.. ..................................................................................... 7. 4
2 LlE-EA0207
(2)
Section 8 Signal List .................................................................................................................. 8. 1
8.1 EUB-6500 Basic Unit ................................................................................................... 8- 1
8.1.1 PRBSW (PRB, AWP) PCB.. ................................................................................... 8 . 1
8.1.2 DBF PCB ............................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.1.3 DVP PCB ................................................................................................................ 8- 9
8.1.4 DSCP PCB ............................................................................................................. 8. 11
8.1.5 BWDSC PCB ........................................................................................................ .8 . 13
8.1.6 CFMDSC PCB ....................................................................................................... 8. 17
8.1.7 CONT PCB ........................................................................................................... .8 . 19
8.2 BIO Unit EZU-EK23 ................................................................................................. .8 . 26
8.2.1 BIO PCB ................................................................................................................ 8 . 26
8.3 CW Unit EZU-ST4, EZU-CW2 .................................................................................. 8 -27
8.3.1 CW PCB ................................................................................................................ .8 . 27
8.4 CINE Unit EZU-MM16, MM17 ................................................................................... 8 . 28
8.4.1 CINE PCB.. ............................................................................................................ .8 . 28
Section 9 Maintenance ............................................................................................... . .............. .9 . 1

9.1 Fan Filter ...................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.2 Other Maintenance Items.. .......................................................................................... 9 . 1
Section 10 Parts List . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . lo- 1

10.1 CART1 . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . ... . . .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. lo- 1
10.2 CART2 . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. lo- 4
10.3 KEYBOARD . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. 10 - 6
10.4 PC UNIT.... .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. 10. 8
10.5 COVER ._._. _.. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . ... . .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. 10 - 10
10.6 PCB . . . . .. . .. . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. . ... . .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. . ...... 10 - 12
10.7 ACCESSORIES . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . 10 - 14
10.8 MONITOR . . .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . ... . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . 10 - 16
(3) 3 LlE-EA0207
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 Product Overview

Overview
EUB-6500 is a compact ultrasound scanner with multiple functions equipped with Doppler,
color flow mapping function and so on, which circuits related to image quality are totally
digitized. It can be connected with phased array probes as well as linear and convex probes,
and applicable to any type of use.
Also, it is fully equipped with various functions such as tine memory, cardiac function
measurement, patient report function and so on. In addition, EUB-6500 runs on Window&T
allowing it to be easily connected with various interfaces such as DICOM3.0 and so on.
Features
0) True Digital Architecture

All sorts of ultrasound image processing for not only the beam former as a crucial point of
image quality but also all mode of B, M, DOP, CFM and CFA are totally digitized, and ,
they are controlled by software.
(2) Improved resolution
Weighting of transmission and reception waves together with digital processing mentioned
above realizes high spatial resolution, wide dynamic range and high contrast resolution.
(3) Improved color frame rate and image quality

Parallel beam and latest image processing technologies realize the Quadra beam process of
color image. It achieves substantial improvement of frame rate compared with
conventional techniques, as well as provides color images with high definition and high
resolution.
(4) Applicable to multiple uses

Not only linear and convex probes but also phased array probes can be connected. Thus it
is applicable to uses from abdomen and obstetrics to circulatory organ.
(5) Non-interlaced monitor as a standard
The RGB non-interlaced monitor adopted allows clear images without flickering to be
viewed.
(6) WindowsNT is adopted as an OS.

WindowsNT is adopted for the basic operating system (OS). It allows DICOM3.0 and
various interfaces to be easily connected.
(7) Easy-to-use keyboard

Key layout considering frequency of uses improves operability.
l- 1 LlE-EA0205
1.2 System Specification
1. Probe
(1) Convex type : 2.0- 7.5MHz

(2) Linear type : 3.0 - 13MHz
(3) Phased array type : 2.0 - 7.5MHz
2. Image examination mode
(1) Standard configuration : B, B/B, B/M, M

: BiPW, BIMIPW, PW, MJPW,
: CFM-B, CFM-B/CFM-B, CFM-B/CFM-M, CFM-M,
CFM-B/PW, CFM-B/CFM-MIPW, CFM-M/PW
(2) Biplane probe connected : Real time B/B (Real time biplane)
NOTE: Refer to Instruction Manual for details
1.3 Environmental conditions

Observe the following environmental conditions for safe and correct operation of the
equipment.
(1) Environmental conditions in operation
* Ambient temperature : +lO”C- +35”c

. Relative humidity : 30-85% (subject to no condensation)
* Atmospheric pressure : 700 - 1060hPa
(2) Daily storage conditions
* Ambient temperature : -lO”C- +40°c

* Relative humidity : 10 - 90%(subject to no condensation)
e Atmospheric pressure : 700 5 1060hPa
(3) Environmental conditions for transportation (in packing)
* Ambient temperature : -lO”C- +6O”C

* Relative humidity : 10 - 95%(subject to no condensation)
* Atmospheric pressure : 500- 1060hPa
1-2 LlE-EA0207
1.4 System Organization
c Mai
l EU
I Microphone
Phonocardiac
of
I
NOTICE: 1) ECG cable and electrodes are included in the BIO unit EZU-EK23.
ECG electrode clamps are TE-43A(for arm) lpcs and TE-43B (for legs) 2 PCS.
ECG cable is CP-50G.
2) Secure the peripheral devices to the equipment. If using the equipment

without securing the peripheral devices, they may drop down due to vibration or
inclination when moving the equipment.
For securing the peripheral devices, refer to TECHNICAL GUIDE
(Installation).
1-3 LlE-EA0207
Table 1.4-1 Peripheral Devices
Manufacturer’s
model, type
Peripheral device Manufacturer
NTSC (EIA)’ PAL (CCIR)”
UP-890MD UP-890CE
SONY
Black & white UP-895MD UP-895CE
printer P9OU P90E
MITSUBISHI
I I P91E
I UP-l 800MD ! UP-1800EPM 1
UP-28OOP/UP-2850P
SONY
UP-2900MD/UP-2950MD
UP-D2600S
Color printer
CP7OOU I
CP700E
MITSUBISHI CPSOOE
CP770DW with SB77O(SCSI IF)
Polaroid (UK) Ltd. TX1 300SE
SONY SVO-9500MD SVO-9500MDP
S-VHS VCR
PANASONIC AG-MD830 AG-MD830E
* For the scanner unit of NTSC(EUA) W display system

** For the scanner unit of PAL (CCIR) W display system.
These devices meet IEC60601-1 compliance.
NOTICE: To use UP-D2600S and C770DW, the SCSI card interface unit EZIJ-Pi1 is
required.
<WARNING>
1:) Other than the devices listed in Table 1.4-1 are not Allowed to use.
2) Use peripheral devices as fixed with the scanner unit. Using the peripheral devices
without fixing with the scanner unit may cause dropping the peripheral device due
to vibration or inclination of the mobile cart during carrying around the system.
1-4 7 LlE-EA0207
Section 2 Safety
2.1 Classification of the Equipment

Classification of this ultrasound scanner by IEC60601- 1 and UL260 l- 1 is as follows:
l Classification by type of protection against electric shock : Class I equipment
l Classification by grade of protection against electric shock : Type B and BF equipment
(General requirements of medical equipment safety by IEC and UL)
2.2 Cautions in Operating the Equipment

(1) For maintenance inspection, refer to [Section 14 Maintenance and Checkup] of the
Instruction Manual.
(2) In moving the equipment, refer to [Section 13 Movement] of the Instruction Manual.
(3) For starting up and shutting down the system, refer to the Instruction Manual [Section 4
Use of system].
2.3 Cautions in Maintaining the Equipment

(1) Do not use fuses other than rating and type
(2) For rating and type of fuses, refer to labels and marks around the fuse holder.
(3) When removing PCB or connector, turn off ON/STANDBY switch and the breaker switch
and wait more than 10 seconds before entering into the work.
(4) When adjusting the monitor, care should be taken for high voltage.
Table 2.3- 1 Fuses of Equipment
AC1 OOV-
, 2ov 6.3A I AC250V
Fl
External Fuse - AC220V-
240v 3.15A I AC250V
F2 1.6A I AC250V
Fl on Filter board in HM-071C 0.5A I AC250V
F2 on Filter board in HM-071 C 0.5A I AC250V
Fl on Main converter AC/DC
Power Supply 6.3A I AC250V
in HM-071 C
Internal Fuse
F2 on Main converter AC/DC
6.3A I AC250V
in HM-071 C
Monitor 1 FlOO 3.OA I AC250V I
2-1 LlE-EA020’i
2.4 Symbols
IEC establishes symbols to be used for the equipment. The following symbols are used
outside and inside the equipment.
Protective earth (ground)
Equipotentiality
Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS
Off (power disconnection from the mains)
On (power connection to the mains)
TYPE B APPLIED PART
TYPE BF APPLIED PART
Defibrillator-roof TYPE BF APPLIED PART
Dangerous voltage
2-2 9 LlE-EA0207
Section 3 Operation
3.1 General Operation

Refer to the Instruction Manual.
3.2 Special Operation for Service Personnel

NOTICE: 11 In the following sentences, “click” means placing the arrow pointer onto the
object and pressing the ENTER key.
2) Operations described below are special ones exclusive for the service personnel.
Be sure not to open to the users.
3.2.1 Initialization of system environment

(1) Press Ctrl + Alt + S key to display the “Special Function” dialog.
(2) Select “Service Tools” from the Select item.
(3) After entering “SERVICETOOL” for Password, click the “OK” button to start “Service
Tools”.
NOTICE: 3) For entering Password, make sure to type it in capital letters. (With the state of
Caps Lock key located on the keyboard being lit in orange color.)
3-1 LlE-EA0207
(4) Click the “Reset” button in “Service Tools”.
3-l-l LlE-EA0207
6-A) If selecting ‘Yes” from “Reset Menu” and clicking the “OK” button, all the setup data
is reset to those when shipped from the factory and the system is rebooted.
NOTICE: Time data and Filing Images in HDD are retained.
(5- A)
(5-B) If selecting “No” from “Reset Menu” and clicking the “OK” button, the system is
rebooted only. The setup data is not reset.
6-C) If clicking “Cancel” or “Check box” in “Reset Menu”, “Reset Menu” ends and the
process returns to “Service Tools”.
3-2 LlE-EA0207
3-4 LlE-EA0207
(1) VCR
Select the type of VCR to be connected.
(2) Printer
Select print time of the black/white video printer to be connected.
(3) Application
Set application data.
(4) Measure
Set a measurement method, measurement item and so on.
(5) Annotation
Register the hospital name.
(6) Print/REC
Select the recorder to be remotely controlled when clicking the print key and REC key.
(7) US Power
Select the initial value of US power when booting the system.
(8) Image Filing

Set data transfer related items.
(9) Peripherals
Set the connection related to the network and others.
(101 Auto Freeze

Select auto freeze or not.
(11) 3D
Set parameters to capture 3D images
(When EZU-3D2 or EZU3D2S is mounted.)
(12) Image Print

Set format for multi-screen printer output.
(13) User Keys
Set user defined function keys.
(14) Date/Time
Set clock data.
(15) Hosp. Name

Register hospital name.
(16) Char. Clear

Select automatic clearing comments entered onto the screen or not when freeze OFF
and changing application.
(17) Key click
Select sounding a beep or not when clicking a key.
(18) Logo Mark

Select displaying characters of “HITACHI” at the upper left of screen or not.
(19) Foot SW
Select the foot SW.
3-5 LlE-EA0207
(20) Screen Saver
Set the screen saver functions.
(21) Guide Line
Register any data to displayed for the puncture guide line.
(22) Stress
Settings for Stress - Echo function.
NOTICE: When version-up software. the backun data above is maintained. It is not reset
to that when shinned from the factor%
3-6 LlE-EA0207
3.2.3 Saving backup data
(1) Select “Backup data” in “Setup” of “Main Menu”.
(2) Select “Copy” in “Backup data”.
+ (2)
oatmme --
Hosp. Name...
Measure...
#lrwKttation... ;
Char. Clear v
PrintK8y v
15;K3y Click
USPawer *
FLogo#ark
Data Trans...
Peripherals v
BIltkup d&a V(l)
F Auto Fweze
Entry opt
(3) The following message appears. Set the MO disk to the MO drive and click the “OK”
button. This saves backup data and returns to “Backup data” menu display. Backup
data is saved in the MO disk as a folder titled “EUBBackup” in the MO disk.
* Error message when saving backup data *
Displayed when the MO disk is not prepared due

to any of the following reasons:
l The MO disk is not set to the MO drive.
l The MO disk is write protected.
l The MO disk has no sufficient free space.
*Clicking the “OK” button returns to the
“Backup data” menu.
3-7 LlE-EA0207
3.2.4 Loading backup data
* Note that this operation deletes backup data saved in the system.
(1) Select “Backup data” in “Setup” of “Main Menu”.
(2) Select “Install” in “Backup data”.
Hosp. Name...
Measure,..
AnMa&m..,
Char. Clear w
~Printl&y v
I? IQy Click
USPower ”
P toga Mark
Data Trans...
Peripherals, t
Backup data - Wl)
rjAUfCtFWE8
EnttyQpt
(3) The following message appears. If the backup data is to be installed, click the ‘Yes”
button.
(4) The following message appears. Set the MO disk containing the backup data to the
MO drive and click the “OK” button. This installs the backup data and returns to
“Backup data” menu display.
3-8 LlE-EA0207
* Error message when installing backup data *
Displayed when the MO disk is not prepared for

backup data due to any of the following reasons:
l The MO disk is not set to the MO drive.
l The MO disk has no backup data.
* Clicking the “OK” button returns to the
“Backup data” menu.
3.2.5 Displaying software and hardware versions

(1) Start “Service Tools”. Refer to 3.2.1 cl), (2) and (3).
(2) Click the “Version” button in “Service Tools”.
3-9 LlE-EA0207
(3) Versions are displayed as shown below:
Software
fversion
Hardware MB
Hardware KB 0
Hardware KBIF A@0
Hardware AWP NO
Hardware PRB #O
Hardware DRFI NO
Hardware DBF2 NO
Hardware CWREC Not Connected
Hardware 810 NO
Hardware CONT Am 00-I 2
Hardware DVP NO 01-I 1
Hardware CINE Ml 00~00
Hardware DCSP NO 00~01140
Hardware CFMDSC Not Available 00-04
Hardware BWDSC Not Available 00-06 A
I Hardware :
version t,:
,
NOTICE: “Not connected” in hardware version indicates no board installed in the

equipment. Also, “Not available” means any board not applicable to the
version.
3 - 10 LlE-EA0207
3.2.6 Action to be taken when the hard disk crashes
The following describes an action to be taken when the hard disk crashes at the customer
site.
3.2.6.1 Crash of HDD

Crash of HDD is divided into the following two cases:
1) Hardware crash : Ultrasound scanner does not start up because the HDD cannot be
driven due to degradation of HDD hardware.
2) Software crash : The ultrasound scanner does not start because some tile written in
HDD is broken.
These two crashes may not be simply identified. In case of H-DD crash, take the action
described below for software crash first. If the state is not improved, take the action for
hardware crash.
In either case, the action initializes user setting information. To prevent this
initialization, it is helpful to use “Backup data” of “Main Menu” to backup user setting
information periodically. By restoring this backup to the equipment after taking the
action, user setting information can be protected (Refer to 3.2.3 and 3.2.4 for details).
The action to be taken in the two cases mentioned above will be described in the following
subsections.
3.2.6.2 Preparation before the action

Prepare the following media supplemented to EUB-6500.
1) EUB-6500 Boot Disk1 (FD)

Needs to start Recovery Medium. Hereafter described as Diskl.
2) EUB-6500 Boot Disk2 (FD)

Needs to initialize HDD start information. Hereafter described as Disk2.
3) EUB-6500 Authentic Disk (FD)
Required when the system is provided with any onerous option.
Required for releasing protection of onerous optional functions.
Hereafter described as A-Disk.
4) EUB-6500 System MO (MO)
Includes HDD recovery tools. Also, by combining with Diskl, it can run the
ultrasound scanner in place of HDD.
A set of these media is supplemented to a system and exclusive to it. If these media
supplemented to the system for which an action is to be taken cannot be prepared, stop
HDD recovery.
NOTICE: If using any media of the other system, the unauthorized copy protection
function makes the media unusable after that.
3 - 11 LlE-EA0207
3.2.6.3 Action to be taken when software crashes
In case of software crash, the system can be recovered by reinstalling the ultrasound
scanner software to HDD.
The following describes a method to recover from software crash.
If the system cannot be recovered by this method, hardware crash is suspected. In such
case, proceed to 3.2.6.4.5
Note that the user information will be totally initialized.
(1) Insert Disk3 into the ultrasound scanner.
(2) Insert System MO into the ultrasound scanner and turn on the power.
Point: Confirm that the write-protect of System MO is not locked. If locked, the
system will not be booted normally.
Point: When turning on the power, the following dialog may appear. If this appears,
press the OK button. The system will be rebooted automatically.
(3) When the Hitachi logo screen appears, depress “Ctrl+ Alt + E” key on the keyboard
of ultrasound scanner.
This operation needs to be executed while the Hitachi logo screen is displayed. If
not executed, the ultrasound scanner will be booted from System MO. In such case,
turn OFF the system power by standby SW and retry from the beginning.
Point: Be sure to press “E” after pressing “Ctrl + Ah” key. Simultaneously pressing
it has no effect.
Point: Pressing “Ctrl+ Alt” + “E” starts the Explorer, but it may take some time until
starting the Explorer. Do not press them in succession.
NOTICE: Except the case using the “Standby” switch does not turn off the system
power, do not use the Breaker switch to turn off the system power.
3 - 12 LlE-EA0207
(4) The Explofer of WindowsNT is started and the file directory in System MO is
displayed.
, HDD
lcompress 218KB
I Extract 221 KB
nemovawe csk ID:] ab32.dll 204KB
!a$-2 Daosdk F-
I!+2 Eub-us
Contents of the Install folder
.-
q -+=j Install
F&a Program Files System MO
According to the state of breakage of
El ~-~ Recvo ler
be C: Drive. In such case HDD will be D: Drive.
3 1
Point: After the Explorer is displayed, the cursor can be a sandglass mark. In such
case, wait for the next operation until this mark turns to the normal arrow
cursor.
3 - 13 LlE-EA0207
(5) Open the “Install” folder from the file directory and double click “Shortcut of
windisk.exe” (See the figure above).
Point: At this time, either of the following dialogs may appear. In such case, press
the OK or Yes button respectively to proceed to the next step.
(6) A dialog “Disk Administrator” appears.
3- 14 LlEEA0207
(7) On this “Disk Administrator”, change HDD drive from “C:drive” to “E:drive”. The
following describes the changing procedure.
1) Click the location shown in the figure below. When clicked it, the selected area
is framed with black frame line.
Disk Administrator
Partition Tools View Option Help
Disk 0
Removable Disk
2) Select “Tools” of the Menu Bar to display the pull-down menu. Select “Assign
Drive Letter” from the pull-down menu displayed.
Disk Administrator
3- 15 LlE-EA0207
3) The dialog “Assign Drive Letter” is displayed. Select “E:” as shown in the figure
below.
Assign Drive Letter
-** MB NTFS Patition disk0
@ Assign drive letter
0 Do not assign a dri
4) After confirming that “Assign drive letter” is “E:“, press the “OK” button.
5) The following dialog is displayed. Press the “OK” button. (An ERROR dialog is
displayed but neglect it.)
6) Then, the following dialog is displayed. Select the “Yes” button.
3 - 16 LlE-EA0207
7) Select “Partition” of the Menu Bar and select “Commit Change Now” from the
pull-down menu displayed
8) Furthermore, the following dialog is displayed. Select the “OK” button.
3.17 LlE-EA0207
9) After the above, the dialog for contirming the restart of the system is displayed.
Select the “OK” button.
Point: After pressing the OK button, the following dialog may be displayed and
rebooting process interrupted. In such case, press the End Task button.
Rebooting process will be continued.
10) The system begins rebooting, After this, the Hitachi logo screen of the software
is displayed again. Press “Ctrl+ Alt” + “E” keys.
11) The Explorer of WindowsNT starts and the file directory in the System MO is -9
displayed.
3 - 18 LlE-EA0207
(8) Confirm with the “Explorer” that the System MO is “C: drive” and HDD is “E: drive”.
(9) Select the “Install” holder of System MO and double click the file “Extract” within
the holder.
(10) The dialog “EUB System Extractor” is displayed.
EUB System Extractor 1
0 Version Up
File Name(*.cab) C:\EUBsys.cab
Extract Path E:\
(11) Confirm that the check of “Version Up” is released (No “A”’ is attached in Cl.), and
select the “Extract” button.
NOTICE: Be sure to remove the check mark. If the check is attached, click Cl again
to remove the mark.
(12) The format dialog is displayed. Confirm that the “File System” is “NTFS” and the
check of the “Quick Format” of “Format Option” is released (No “@ is attached in q .),
and then, select the “Start” button.
Format E:\ clcl

Capacity
File System
NTFS v
Allocation Unit Size
v
I
Volume Label
Iv
3- 19 LlE-EA0207
If selecting the “Start” button, the following dialog appears to confirm whether
formatting is to be carried out or not. Select the “OK” button. After this,
formatting starts.
3-19-1 LlE-EA0207
(13) The formatting starts. Wait until the following dialog “Formatting” is displayed.
Formatting E:\ cl
i Format Complete
0
(14) Select the “OK” button of dialog “Formatting”. The dialog “Formatting” is
automatically erased and the screen returns to the step (10) The dialog “EUB System
Extractor” displaying the letters of “Extractor” button in gray color. At this time,
the software installation starts automatically.
(15) Wait until the letters of “Extractor” change from gray to black display.
(16) Press “Ctrlf Ah + Del” key to display the dialog “WindowsNT Security”.
(17) Click the “Shutdown” button displayed on the dialog.
(18) The dialog “Shutdown Computer” appears. Select “Shutdown” and click the “OK”
button.
Shutdown Computer q.
0@ Shutdown
0 Shutdown and Restart
Point: This dialog may have three options. Even in such case, select “Shutdown”.
3 - 20 LlE-EA0207
(19) Wait until the following dialog “Shutdown Computer” appears.
Shutdown Computer
It is now safe to turn off your computer
(‘20) Upon the dialog appears, eject Disk1 and System MO from the ultrasound scanner
and turn the breaker switch OFF (at the side of scanner).
(21) Insert Disk2 into the ultrasound scanner and turn the breaker switch ON.
(22) MS-DOS boots up from Disk2 and the FDISK command is automatically executed.
After the prompt& is displayed, use the Breaker switch to turn off the system
power.
(23) Eject Disk2 from the ultrasound scanner.
Procedure to recover HDD has been completed now. After this, the ultrasound scanner
can be started as usual.
For the ultrasound scanner software in HDD just after recovery, protection is applied to
onerous options. This protection needs to be released using A-Disk. For the method to
release it, refer to 3.2.6.5 (6) - (8).
3 - 21 LlE-EA0207
3.2.6.4 Procedure to create additional partition
Follow the steps below to add a partition to the ultrasound scanner applied with the hard
disk write work.
(1) Boot the ultrasound scanner.
(2) In the first starting, since the following dialog is displayed, press the OK button.
(3) When the logo screen appears, press the “Ctrl + Ah” + “E” keys on the keyboard.
NOTICE: This operation needs to be performed while the logo screen is displayed.
If not performed, turn off the power and retry from the beginning.
(4) The Explorer of WindowsNT starts and the file directory is displayed.
(5) Start “DMA-ON” in the drive CA Install.

(6) Since the following dialog is displayed, press the OK button.
(7) Start “Shortcut to windisk.exe” in the drive C:\Eub-us\Tools.

NOTICE: If not started, display the Property dialog of “Shortcut to windisk.exe”.
When the Property dialog appears, set the link to the target as shown
below and press the OK button.
3 - 22 LIE-EA0207
(8) Then the following dialog is displayed, press the “OK” button.
(9) When the following dialog is displayed in addition to the above, press the ‘Yes” button.
3-22- 1 LlE-EA0207
(10) The dialog Disk Administrator appears.
Click the part shown in the figure below. If clicked, the selected part is framed in
black.
Partition Tools View ODtion

q BB
Disk 0
Removable Disk
(11) Select Partition of the menu bar and select Create from the pull-down menu displayed.
(1.2) The following dialog appears. Press the Yes button.
3 - 23 LLE-EA0207
(13) The dialog Create Primary Partition is displayed.
Differ depending on
capacity of the hard
(14) Set the size same as that displayed in “Maximum size for the partition is” to “Create
partition of size” and select the OK button.
NOTICE: The size displayed in “Minimum size for the partition is” and “Maximum size
for the partition is” differs depending on capacity of the hard disk.
(15) When the following dialog is displayed, select the ‘Yes” button
(16) Select Partition of the menu bar and select Commit from the pull-down menu
displayed.
3 - 24 LlE-EA0207
(17) The following dialog appears. Press the Yes button.
(18) Further, the following dialog is displayed. Press the OK button.
(19) Select Tools of the menu bar, and select Format from the pull-down menu displayed.
Disk Administrator q mm
Partition Tools View ODtion
s m m Format...
:
:
Disk 0
Remova
ti
3 - 25 LlE-EA0207
(20) The Format dialog is displayed. Confirm that File System is NTFS and the check of
Quick Format of Format Option is removed (No “@ in 0) and select the Start button.
If selecting the Start button, a dialog appears asking formatting is to be carried out.
Press the OK button.
Format E: \ q ILI
Capacity
v
File System
NTFS ‘I
Allocation Unit Size
1024Byte v
Volume Label
v
I
(21) Pressing the “Start” button displays the following dialog to confirm whether
formatting is to be carried out or not. Press the “OK” button. After this, formatting
starts.
(22) Formatting starts. Wait until the following dialog Formatting appears.
1 Formatting E:\ 01
Q i Format Complete
3 - 26 LlE-EM207
(23) Select Tools of the menu bar and select Assign Drive Letter from the pull-down menu
displayed.
Disk Administrator q mH
(24) The dialog Assign Drive Letter is displayed. Select F: as shown below.
I I
@ Assinn drive E: V
E:
0 Do not assictn F: -A
G:
H:
(25) Confirm that Assign drive letter is F: and press the OK button.
(26) After this, follow the steps of 3.2.6.3 (7) 5) - 10).

(27) The Explorer of Window&IT is started, check if the F drive has been created.
3 - 27 LlE-EA0207
(28) Press “Ctrl+ Alt” + “Del” to display the dialog Window&T Security.
r Logon Information -1
(29) Select Shutdown displayed on the dialog.

(30) The dialog Shutdown Computer is displayed. Select “Shutdown” and press the OK
button.
Shutdown and Restart
NOTE: This dialog may have three options. Even in such case, select “Shutdown”.
(31) Wait until the following dialog Shutdown Computer appears.
1 Shutdown Computer I
I Restart
(32) When the dialog is displayed, turn OFF the breaker switch (at the side of ultrasound
scanner).
3 - 28 LlE-EA0207
3.2.6.5 Action to be taken when hardware crashes
In case of hardware crash, HDD itself needs to be replaced. Order a new HDD from the
factory for replacement.
System MO supplemented to the ultrasound scanner may be substituted for HDD. Until
the new HDD is obtained, the ultrasound scanner may be used with System MO. The
following describes the method how to use it.
(1) Insert Disk1 into the ultrasound scanner.

(2) Insert System MO into the ultrasound scanner.
(3) Turn the system power ON.
(4) The start screen appears and the ultrasound scanner starts.
When starting the ultrasound scanner using System MO for the first time, onerous
optional functions are applied with protection. To release protection, follow the steps
below.
After starting the ultrasound scanner,
(5) Eject Disk1 from the ultrasound scanner.

(6) Insert A-Disk into the ultrasound scanner.
(7) Select “Main Menu” + “Setup” + “Entry Opt”.
(8) Eject A-Disk and insert Disk1 into the ultrasound scanner.
Thus protection of onerous optional functions is released.
Also, even if releasing protection of optional functions, some may not be effected. See the
Instruction Manual of each optional function for details.
NOTICE: When the ultrasound scanner being started up from System MO, use of the
following functions is restricted.
+ Transfer of live images to MO (Refer to the Instruction Manual, Section 9.)
- Formatting of MO (Refer to the Instruction Manual, Appendix D.)
- Ejection of MO
* 3D, Stress, Wide View
3 - 29 LlE-EA020’i
3.2.7 Other functions of “Service Tools”
Functions of (1) - (10) of “Service Tools” shown in the figure below:
(1) “Guide Line” : Refer to the TECHNICAL GUIDE (Installation)
Ultrasound Scanner Probe Registration of Needle
Guide Line.
(2) “Color Bar” : Displays Color Bar.
(3) “G-Scale” : Displays Gray Scale.
(4) “I/O Port Access Tool” : Unusable
(5) “Diagnostic Test” : Carry out the check program. (Refer to the 3.2.7.2)
(6) “Connectable Probe List” : Displays the list of connectable probes.
(7) “Event Viewer” : Displays the event viewer of Window&T. (Refer to the
3.2.7.1)
(8) “User Event Log” : Unusable
(9) “Ctrl+ Alt + Del” : Enables “Ctrl+ Alt + Del”.
(10) “WIDE VIEW : Refer to the TECHNICAL GUIDE (Installation of
Options)
Wide View Software Model EZU-WS2
(11) “Option” : Impossible to use
’ (6)
(8)
w-0
3 - 30 LlE-EA0207
3.2.7.1 Displaying error log
(1) Start “Service Tools”. --- See 3.2.1 cl), (2) and (3).
(2) Click the “Event Viewer” button in “Service Tools”.
(3) The event log is displayed as shown below:
9:36:46 PM EUB&p None 15 WA :.z

9:36:46 PM EUWP None 4097 N/A
9 36:47 PM EUsApp None 14 N/A
9.36:47 PM EUBPpp None 4097 N/A
9.36:47 PM E’JsApp None 4097 N/A
9:36:46 PM EUBApp None 4097 N/A
9:36:46 PM EUBApp None 4097 N/A ‘+
9:36.45 PM EUWP None 4097 N/A
9:36:44 PM None 12 N/A I:
EUBApp
9.36:43 PM EUsApp None 13 N/A
9:36:42 PM EUBApp None 11 N/A .I
9:36:42 PM EUeApp None 4097 N/A
9.36:41 PM EUaApp None 10 N/A i.
9:36.41 PM EUBApp None 4097 N/A
9:36-41 PM EUWP None 9 N/A ,
9:36.41 PM EUsApp None 4097 N/A e
(4) The following table shows types of the log displayed.
Event ID Tve Event log

1 Information Booting started.
2 Information Data check started.
5 I
Information I
Bootine: comaleted.
I A
6 1 Information 1 BackUpDB setup started.

7 1 Information 1 ADDlicationDB setup started.
8 1 Information 1 AppIicationResourceDB setup started.
9 1 Information 1 BodvMarkDB setup started. --I
10 Information AnnotationDB setup started.
11 Information FiIingDB setup started.
12 Information MeasureemtnDB setup started.
13 1 Information I ProbeDB setup started.
14 I Information I 3DDB setup started.
15 I Information I PrinterList setup started. I
16 1 Information 1WVDB setup started.
17 I Information I PatientMenuDB setup started. --i
18 Error Software error occurred.
4097 Information Backup started.
4098 Information Backup completed.
4099 Error Backup error.
12289 Error No Dus file of the probe selected.
12290 Error Dus file decompression failed.
12291 Error Dus file error.
3-30-l LlE-EA0207
12292 Error BWDSC fTile loading error.
12293 Error CFMDSC file loading error.
12294 Error DCFM file loading error.
12295 Error DDOP file loading error.
12296 Error Smoothing file loading error.
12297 Warning Probe cannot be selected.
12298 Error Probe ID error.
3-30-Z LlE-EA0207
3.2.7.2 Executing check program
(1) Start “Service Tools”. --- See 3.2.1 (l), (2) and (3).
(2) Click the “Diagnostic Tests” button in “Service Tools”.
(3) The following functions are available as check programs.
1) RAM Test
A function to check if the memory that is an important component of each PCB
works normally.
2) Pattern Test
A function to check if any PCB is faulty by inserting test patterns into plural
points in the signal processing line.
3) Channel Test
A function to check if analog circuits of transmission and reception waves work
normally by channel.
NOTICE: When 3D is started, turn OFF the power and reboot the ultrasound scanner.
Execute the check program after that.
3-30-3 LlE-EA0207
1) RAM Test
Click the “Execute” button to check the memory. Boards to be checked are DBF, CONT,
DVP, CFMDSC and BWDSC PCB. The result of memory check is displayed as
“SUCCESS” or “FAILURE”.
I-. DBF SUCCESS

@ CONT SUCCESS
q DVP SUCCESS
$J CFMDSC SUCCESS
q msc FXUURFI
;.. Y RAM FlULURE
:...w m SUCCESS
i, IN-r Fu.M SUCCESS
--DEPTH RAM SUCCESS
AFIN RAM SUCCESS
After executing memory check, if clicking each button in “Diagnostic Tests” and “Close”
button in “Service Tools”, the following message is displayed. To return to any normal
imaging mode, the system needs to be shut down. Also, after executing memory check,
the other check programs (Pattern Test and Channel Test) cannot be used.
3-30-4 LlEEA0207
2) Pattern Test
Press each button in the dialog to perform the following operation. Each button has an
image mode recommendable; therefore, the Test Pattern dialog needs to be displayed after
selecting the image mode in advance.
Button Operation Image mode recommendable
DVP Outputs the test pattern from the B mode

midcourse of BW signal processing
line in DVP PCB
DCSP-Dop Outputs the test pattern from the B/PW mode

midcourse of Doppler signal
processing line in DCSP PCB.
DSCP-CFM Outputs the test pattern from the CFM-B mode

midcourse of CFM signal
processing line in DCSP PCB.
CFMDSC-Fixed Outputs the fixed test pattern CFM-B mode

from CFMDSC PCB.
CFMDSC-Moving Outputs the moving test pattern CFM-B mode

from CFMDSC PCB.
BWDSC-BW Outputs the test pattern from the B mode

midcourse of BW signal processing
line in BWDSC PCB.
BWDSC-CFM Outputs the test pattern from the CFM-B mode

midcourse of CFM signal
processing line in BWDSC PCB. ’
Pattern OFF Stops output of all test patterns

and returns to the normal state.
DONE Ends outputting the test pattern

and closes the test pattern dialog.
3 - 30 - 5 LlE-EA0207
The following is a signal connection diagram for your reference. (Shaded box shows that can
output a test pattern.)
DVP BWDSC
DBF Video
3-30-6 LlE-EA0207
3) Channel Test
The dialog above allows you to depict a B-image with the transmission wave at the
center lch and aperture lch. Since aperture of the transmission wave is lch, if the
transmission wave circuit is missing by even lch, it can be observed as a dark line in the
B-image. Further in the M-image, an image can be depicted using a specific lch, so any
missing channel may be identified. As well as for the reception wave, any missing
channel can be checked.
To implement this test:
@ Connect any probe with no missing channel and select the B/M real mode.
@ Click “Channel Test” from “diagnostic Tests”. Display Channel Test and set the
transmission wave or reception wave to lch, and check any missing channel by
operating the slide bar at the top of dialog. At this time, if the M-image shows any
dark line, it means a missing channel. Note that, however, an element of the probe
itself can be faulted.
@ After completing the check, close the dialog and click the “Close” button in “Service
Tools” to display the following message. To return to the normal imaging mode, the
system needs to be freeze ON/OFF.
NOTICE: After completing the check, close the dialog and click the “Close” button in “Service
Tools” to display the following message. To return to the normal imaging mode, the
system needs to be freeze ON/OFF.
3 - 30 - 7 LlE-EA0207
The following details display and operations:
7 ( @ Status display 1
I@ Transmission lch button 1
@ Reception lch button
(Ol
‘8 128 system button
q 8 64 system button
Item Description
3 CH slide bar Selects No. of any element to be checked. No. of the element
thus selected is displayed as the Elem. item of @ Status display.
3 Status display let item (Elem.): Represents No. of the element for check selected
with the CH slide bar.
2nd item (DBF, ch): Represents DBMC corresponding to element
No. and CH No. in DBF. DBF No. is from 1 to 4, while CH No. is
from 0 to 31.
3rd item (System): Represents the number of channels in the
system.
4th item: None/No check mode, T lch/‘l!ransmission wave check
mode, R l&/Reception wave check mode, T&R l&/Transmission
and reception wave check mode
3 Transmission lch button Sets the transmission wave to lch. The last item of Status
display changes to “T lch” or “T&R lch”. Pressing this button
allows any missing channel of transmission or reception wave to
be checked.
$ Reception lch button Sets the reception wave to lch. The last item of Status display
changes to “R lch” or “T&R lch”. Pressing this button allows
any missing channel of reception wave to be checked.
3 Close button Closes this dialog.
a 64 system button Not used.
3 128 system button Not used.
3-30-S LlE-EA0207
3.2.8 Cautions in replacing PCB
(1) When replacing the PCB, be sure to turn off the breaker switch located at left side of the
system.
(2) EUB-6500 is numbered as individual ID number for each system, and this ID number is
recorded in ID chip that is equipped on the CONT PCB. (Location on the PCB CNl:
Refer to the figure below.)
In case no ID chip is equipped or an incorrect ID chip for different system is equipped,
the system does not operate correctly. When replacing CONT PCB, make sure to
re-equip this ID chip onto the new PCB to be replaced.
::.
0:.I.’
CNl
CONT PCB Parts side
3 - 31 LlE-EA0207
3.2.9 Backup battery
EUB-6500 is provided with the backup battery inside the equipment, which backs up
data such as date and time and so on.
The life of this battery is about three years, but it may differ according to usage of the
equipment.
When this backup battery reaches its life, booting stops with the following message
when powered on. Follow the steps below to replace the backup battery.
CMOS checksum error - Defaults loaded

Warning! CPU has been changed.
Please Enter CPU Speed CMOS Setup and
Remember to Save Before Exit!
(1) Turn the breaker switch OFF at the left side of the equipment.
(2) Refer to i3.2.9.1 Replacing the backup battery] for replacing it with a new one.
(3) If booting the equipment after replacing the backup battery, booting stops with the
above message again.
Press “Ctrl+ Alt + Shift” key and then “1” key to continue booting.
(4) After booting the equipment, refer to Section 4.6 of the instruction manual for setting
date and time.
(5) See the instruction manual to check if the equipment works normally.
This completes replacing the backup battery
3 - 32 LlEqEA0207
3.2.9.1 Replacing backup battery
(1) Remove the covers.
(2) Disconnect cables, loose M4 screws and withdraw the PC unit.
(3) Replace the battery and restore the cables and covers to their original positions.
(The battery may be replaced without removing the monitor.)
- va tyl4 screw
-’ Battery
8
PC unit
Fig. 3.2.9- 1
LlE-EA020i
3 - 33
3.2.10 Version-up installation of software
The following describes procedures of version-up installation of software at the customer’s
site.
3.2.10.1 Preparation of version-up installation

Prepare the following media supplemented to EUB-6500
1) EUB-6500 Boot Disk 1 (FD)

Needs to boot the Recover Medium. Hereafter referred to as Disk 1.
Needs to initialize HDD booting information. Hereafter referred to as Disk 2.
Needs if the system is provided with any onerous optional function.

Needs to release protection of onerous optional functions.
Hereafter referred to as A-Disk.

System MO newly provided for version-up.
If all of these media cannot be prepared for the system, please give up version-up.
3 - 34 LlE-EA0207
3.2.10.2 Confirming Drive Letter
When carrying out version-up installation, Drive Letters needs to have been set as
follows :
First Partition of HDD C:

Second Partition of HDD F:
MO D:
Use the Disk Administrator to check settings.

Follow the steps below to check settings:
(1) Confirm that the system power to ultrasound scanner is turned off.
(2) Insert the Boot Disk 1 to the ultrasound scanner.
(3) Insert the System MO to the ultrasound scanner.

NOTICE: Check if Write Protect of System MO is not locked. If locked, the MO
will not start normally.
(4) Turn on the system power to ultrasound scanner. When the Logo screen appears
after booting the WindowsNT (OS), press “Ctrl + Alt” + “E” from the keyboard of
ultrasound scanner.
NOTICE: 1) This operation needs to be carried out while the Logo screen is
displayed. If not carried out, the ultrasound scanner will boot from
the System MO. Turn off the system power and retry from the
beginning.
2) Be sure to press “E” after pressing “Ctrl + Ah.” key.
3) Pressing “Ctrl + Alt” + “E” starts the Explorer, but it may take some
time. Do not press them in succession.
(5) If the following dialog appears at the first booting, press the “OK” button. The
system will be rebooted.
3 - 35 LlE-EA0207
(6) The Explorer of Window&T starts and displays the file directory in the System MO.
NOTICE: After the file directory is displayed, the cursor may be a sandglass mark. -9
In such case, keep from the following operations until this mark turns to
the normal arrow cursor.
(7) Open the Install folder in the file directory and double click “Shortcut to
windisk.exe”.
NOTICE: At this time, the following dialog may appear. In such case, press the
“OK” button and Yes button respectively to proceed to the next step.
3 - 36 LlE-EA0207
(8) The dialog “Disk Administrator” appears.
If the settings of HDD and MO drives are as shown bellow,
1) First Partition of HDD C:
2) Second Partition of HDD F:
3) MO D:
close the Disk Administrator and proceed to (3.2.10.3.6 Shutdown].
If settings are different from the above, proceed to L3.2.10.3 Assign Drive Letter].
artition
DD First Partition
3 - 37 LlE-EA0207
3.2.10.3 Assign Drive Letter
When displaying the Explorer at the first booting with the BOOT DISK 1 and SYSTEM
MO, confirm that the Second partition of HDD is F: and the MO drive is D:. If this is
not the case, follow the steps below to change the Drive Letter so that the Second
partition of HDD is F: and the MO drive is D:.
Procedures are classified to the following patters according to the Drive Letter of Second
Partition and that of MO drive. According to each pattern, change the Drive Letters
before starting Version-up.
Pattern 1
First Partition of HDD :c
Second Partition of HDD :F
MO drive : Except D
Pattern 2
Second Partition of HDD : Except F
MO drive :D
Pattern 3
Second Partition of HDD :D
MO drive : Except F and D
Pattern 4
Second Partition of HDD : Except F and D
MO drive :F
Pattern 5
MO drive :F
3 - 38 LlE-EA0207
3.2.10.3.1 Pattern 1
First Partition of HDD :c!
MO Drive : X (Except D>
The Drive Letter of MO drive needs to be changed to D. Suppose the Drive Letter of
the current MO drive is X (Substitute any actual drive letter for X1. Follow the steps
below to change the Drive Letter.
(1) Select “Shortcut to windisk.exe” in the Install folder of X drive and select
“Property” from the menu displayed by pressing the “Cancel” button.
(2) Select “Shortcut” from the “Property” dialog displayed.
Enter “X:\WINNT\system32\WIND1SK.EXE7’ into the “Target” field and press
the “OK” button.
3 - 39 LlE-EA0207
(3) Double click “Shortcut to windisk.exe”.
NOTICE: At this time, the following dialog may appear. In such case, press
the “OK” button or ‘Yes” button respectively to proceed to the next
step.
3 - 40 LlE-EA0207
(5) In this Disk Administrator, change the MO drive from X: to D:. Follow the
steps below to change the Drive Letters.
1) Select MO. The part selected is fringed by a black frame.
HDD First Partition
2) Select “Tools” of Menu Bar and select “Assign Drive Letter” from the
pull-down menu displayed.
3) The dialog “Assign Drive Letter “ appears. Select D: and press the “OK’
button.
3 - 41 LIE-EA0207
4) If the following dialog is displayed, press the “OK” button.
(This is an error dialog, but neglect it.)
5) If the following dialog appears, select ‘Yes” button.
6) Select “Partition” of Menu Bar and select “Commit Chances Now” from the
3 - 42 LIE-EA0207
7) The following dialog appears. Press the “OK” button.
8) Then the following dialog appears. Press the “OK” button.
9) After this, a dialog is displayed to confirm system rebooting. Press the “OK”
button.
NOTICE: After pressing the “OK” button, the following dialog may appear
interrupting the rebooting process. In such case, select the “End
Task” button to continue the rebooting process.
3 - 43 LlE-EA0207
I
(6) If rebooting is completed and the starting logo screen is displayed, press “Ctrl+
Alt” + “E” to display Explorer.
(7) Confirm that the Drive Letters are as follows:
MO drive :D
(8) Proceed to [3.2.10.3.6 Shutdown].
3 - 44 LlE-EA0207
3.2.10.3.2 Pattern 2
Second Partition of HDD : X (Except F)
MO Drive :D
The Drive Letter of Second Partition of HDD needs to be changed to F. Suppose the
current Drive Letter of the Second Partition of HDD is X (Substitute any actual Drive
Letter for X). Follow the steps below to change the Drive Letter.
(1) Select “Shortcut to windisk.exe” in the Install folder of D: drive and select
“Property” from the menu displayed by pressing the “v button.
(2) Select “Shortcut” from the Property dialog displayed. ’

Enter “X:\WINNT\system32\WINDISK.EXE” into the “Target” field and press
3 - 45 LlE-EA0207
step.
3 - 46 LlE-EA0207
(5) On this Disk Administrator dialog, change the drive of Second Partition of HDD
(the right partition of Disk 0) to the F: drive. Follow the steps below for this
change.
1) Select the Second Partition of HDD. The part selected is fringed by a black
frame.
Disk Administrator
Eartition Tools View @tion Help
- Disk0
= Disk1
DD First Partition
2) Select “Tools” of the Menu Bar and select “Assign Drive Letter” from the
Disk Administrator 11111

Partition Tools View O&on Help
****MB 1 I
3) The dialog “Assign Drive Letter “ appears. Select F: and press the “OK”
button.
3 - 47 LlE-EA0207
4) If the following dialog is displayed, press the ‘Yes” button.
(6) Proceed to L3.2.10.3.6 Shutdown].
3 - 48 LlE-EA0207
3.2.10.3.3 Pattern 3

MO Drive : X (Except F and D)
The Drive Letter of Second Partition of HDD needs to be changed to F. Also, the
Drive Letter of MO drive needs to be changed to D. Follow the steps below to change
Drive Letters. Suppose the Drive Letter of the current MO drive is X.
C-2) Select “Shortcut” from the Property dialog displayed.
Enter “X:\WINNT\system32\WINDISK.EXE7’ into the “Target” field and press
3 - 49 LlE-EA0207
(3) Double click “Shortcut to windisk.exe”. _.._
NOTICE: At this time, the following dialog may appear. In such case, press the Jo
“OK” button or ‘Yes” button respectively to proceed to the next step.
3 - 50 LlE-EA0207
(5) On this Disk Administrator, change the drive of Second Partition of HDD (the
right partition of Disk 0) to the F: drive. Follow the steps below for this change.
frame.
= Disk0
****MB
artition
Disk 1
****MB DD First Partition
3) The dialog “Assign Drive Letter “ appears. Select F: and press the “OK”
button.
3 - 51 LlE-EA0207
4) The following dialog is displayed. Press the ‘Yes” button.
(6) Then on the Disk Administrator, carry out Steps (5)-C/) of [3.2.10.3.1 Pattern 11
to change the MO drive from the X: drive to D: drive.
(7) Proceed to L3.2.10.3.6 Shutdown].
3 - 52 LlE-EA020T
3.2.10.3.4 Pattern 4
Second Partition of HDD : X (Except F and D)
MO Drive :F
Drive Letters.
(1) Select “Shortcut to windisk.exe” in the Install folder of F drive and select
(2) Select “Shortcut” from the “Property” dialog displayed.
3 - 53 LlE-EA0207
step.
3 - 54 LlE-EA0207
(5) On this Disk Administrator, carry out Step (5) of [3.2.10.3.1 Pattern 11 to change
the MO drive from the F: drive to D: drive.
(6) Rebooting is carried out. When the starting logo appears, press “Ctrl + Alt” +
“E” to display the Explorer.
(7) Select “Shortcut to windisk.exe” in the Install folder of D drive and select
“Property” ti-om the menu displayed by pressing the “Cancel” button.
(8) Select “Shortcut” from the Property dialog displayed.
3 - 55 LlE-EA0207
NOTICE: At this time, the following dialog may appear. In such case, press -1
step.

(11) Carry out Steps (5)-(6) of 13.2.10.3.2 Pattern 21 to change the drive of Second
Partition (the right partition of Disk 0) to the F:drive on the Disk Administrator.
(12) Proceed to f3.2.10.3.6 Shutdown].
3 - 56 LlE-EA0207
3.2.10.3.5 Pattern 5
First Partition of HDD :C
MO Drive :F
Drive Letters.
(2) Select “Shortcut” from the Property dialog displayed.
3 - 57 LlE-EA0207
NOTICE: At this time, the following dialog may appear. In such case, press the
“OK” button or ‘Yes” button respectively to proceed to the next step.
3 - 58 LLE-EA0207
(5) On this Disk Administrator, change the drive of Second Partition of HDD (the
right partition of Disk 0) to any drive Except C:, F: and D:. Follow the steps
below to change the Drive Letter.
frame.
Disk Administrator q
partition Tools View Ogtion
= Disk0
****MB
s\a r t i t ion
= Diik 1
****MB HDD First Partition
MO
3) The dialog “Assign Drive Letter “ appears. Select any drive except C:, F: and
D: and press the “OK” button.
3 - 59 LlE-EA0207
4) If the following dialog is displayed, press the ‘Yes” button.
(6) Press “Ctrl + Alt + Del” and select “Shutdown” to reboot the system. When the
starting logo screen appears, press “Ctrlf Alt” + “E” to display the Explorer.
(7) Carry out Steps W-(11) of L3.2.10.3.4.Pattern 41.
(8) Proceed to 13.2.10.3.6 Shutdown].
3 - 60 LlE-EA0207
3.2.10.3.6 Shutdown
(1) Press “Ctrl+ Alt” + “Del” to display the dialog ‘WindowsNT Security”.
WindowsNT Security
1 Logon Information -1
~lpiiizg
(2) Select “Shutdown” button displayed on the dialog.

(3) The dialog “Shutdown Computer” is displayed. Select “Shutdown” and press the ‘Yes”
button.
Shutdown Computer 1
@ Shutdown
NOTICE: This dialog may have three options. Even in such case, select “Shutdown”.
3 - 61 LlE-EA0207
Shutdown Computer
(5) When this dialog appears, take out the Boot Disk 1 and System MO from the
ultrasound scanner and turn off the breaker switch (located at the side of ultrasound
scanner).
3 * 62 LlE-EA0207
3.2.10.5 Version-up installation
User information will be entirely initialized. Before starting version-up installation, make
a backup data.
(1) Carry out 13.2.6.3 Action to be taken when software crashes]

(2) Turn on the power to ultrasound scanner. As soon as the starting logo screen appears
in succession after booting Window&T (OS), press “Ctrl+ AN” + “E” from the keyboard
NOTICE: 1) This operation needs to be carried out while the starting logo screen is
displayed. If it is not carried out, the system will boot from the System
MO. In such case, use the Standby switch to turn off the system power
and retry from the beginning.
2) Be sure to press “E” after pressing “Ctrl+ Alt” key.
3) Pressing “Ctrl + Ah” + “E” starts the Explorer, but it takes some time
until starting the Explorer. Do not press them in succession.
(3) If the following dialog appears at the first booting, press the “OK” button. The system
will be rebooted.
(4) The Explorer of WindowsNT starts and displays the file directory in the System MO.
NOTICE: After the file directory is displayed, the cursor may be a sandglass mark. In
such case, keep from the following operations until this mark turns to the
normal arrow cursor.
(5) Select the Install folder of C: drive and double click “DMA-ON” in the folder.
(6) The following dialog appears. Press the “OK” button.
3 - 63 LIE-EA0207
(7) Double clock “Shortcut to windisk.exe” in C:\Eub-us\Tools to start it.
NOTICE: If it does not start, display the Property dialog of “Shortcut to windisk.exe”.
When the Property window is displayed, set the “Target” as shown below and
press the “OK” button.
3 - 64 LlE-EA0207
(8) The “Disk Administrator” is displayed.
(9) Select the Second Partition of HDD.
Disk Administrator III

@rtition Tools view Ogtion Help
mm
= Disk0
****MB
a&ion
HDD First Partition
(10) Select “Tools” from the Menu Bar and select “Assign Drive Letter”.
HDD First Partition
3 - 65 LlE-EA0207
(11) The dialog “Assign Drive Letter” is displayed. After selecting the option “Assign Drive
Letter”, select F: for the drive name and press the “OK” button.
Assign Drive Letter
****MB NTFS Partition Disk0
IOKj pGq piiiq
(12) The following dialog is displayed. Press the ‘Yes” button.
(13) Press “Ctrl+ Alt” + “Del” to display the dialog “WindowsNT Security”.
3 - 66 LlE-EA020T
(14) Select the “Shutdown” button displayed on the dialog.
(15) The dialog “Shutdown” appears. Select “Shutdown” and press the ‘Yes” button.
Shutdown Computer I
@ Shutdown
NOTICE: This dialog may have three options. Even in such case, select “Shutdown”.
Shutdown Computer
r Restart I
(17) When this dialog appears, take out the Boot Disk 1 and System MO from the
ultrasound scanner, and turn off the breaker switch (located at the side of ultrasound
scanner).
(18) Reboot the system. After con~ming rebooting, use the Standby switch to turn off the
system power.
3 - 67 87 LlE-EA0207
Section 4 Principle of Operation
4.1 System Block of EUB-6500

Fig. 4.1.1 shows the system block diagram of EUB-6500.
* EUB-6500 uses many hardware parts configurable (programmable) by the configuration

data (program data) such as FPGA and DSP on each PCB.
These configuration data (program data) is not stored in ROM but flash memory or RAM
mounted on PCB, and FPGA or DSP is configured (programmed) during reset period after
booting the system.
4.2 Basic Composition of EUB-6500

4.2.1 General and board description
Composition: PCBs and units composing the basic part of EUB-6500 are listed below:
1. PC unit
2. PRBSW (PRB & AWP)
3. DBF
4. DVP
5. DCSP
6. BWDSC
7. CFMDSC
8. CONT
9. KB & KBIF
Overview of units and PCBs:
1. PC unit
With WindowsNT as OS, the PC unit runs a variety of application software to
control the ultrasound scanner as well as interfaces with various media.
A standard PC structure is added with the following two PC1 bus add-in boards in
EUB-6500.
Video board : Displays ultrasound image data entered from BWDSC PCB
overlaid on the computer screen. Also, outputs and inputs TV
signals for VCR playback and recording.
CPI-VME bridge : Connects the PC1 bus inside the PC unit and the VME bus for
controlling the ultrasound scanner. Interaction of data between
the PC unit and each board of the ultrasound scanner is
performed through this bridge.
SCSI Card (Option: EZU-Pil)
: Used to connect with SCSI accessory units. This is necessary
for the connection with SCSI printer.
Net Card (Option: EZU-Pi2)

: Used to connect with the network. This is necessary for the
DICOM transfer and others.
4-1 LlE-EA0207
Digital Capture Card (Option: EZU-Pi31
: Used for PC to capture ultrasound image data.
The Wide View function and so on need this function.
4-l-l LIE-EA0207
2. PRBSW
A section to interface with the probe, which corresponds to the transmitter/receiver

PRBSW gives high voltage pulse to the transducer for driving it, as well as amplifies
echo returned from body tissue.
Also, PRBSW is composed of the following two boards:
(1) PRB PCB

(2) AWP PCB
3. DBF
Outputs transmit signals delayed for each channel to PRBSW PCB, beam-forms the
received wave signals and sums for channels, and outputs it to DVP PCB.
4. DVP
Processes each beam-formed signal of B, M, D and CFM mode from DBF, and
outputs to BWDSC and DOP.
5. DCSP
Composed of DOP unit and CFM unit.

(1) DOP unit
Utilizes the FFT method to perform frequency analysis of Doppler signal at free
depth of pulsed Doppler receive signal demodulated on DVP PCB and
continuous Doppler signal demodulated on CW PCB and outputs analysis data
to BWDSC PCB. Also it separates the forward and reverse Doppler signals
and outputs them to the loud speaker.
(2) CFM unit
Thins out the demodulated signals for CMF that is the output of DVP PCB
down to the number of data to be calculated by DSP, and calculates blood
velocity, flow velocity variance and flow reflection intensity.
Further, it interpolates this calculated output in the scan line direction to
suppress CFM artifacts and outputs the result to the CFMDSC PCB.
6. BW’DSC
After applying smoothing, enhancement and so on to image data from DVP, DCSP,
CFMDSC and Digital Capture Card, it converts them to TV synchronized signals to
output them to the Video Board together with ECG and heart sounds waveform data
from BIO PCB.
7. CFMDSC
Applies frame correlation process and smoothing process to flow velocity, flow
variance and flow reflection intensity outputted from the DCSP PCB, and converts
the results from ultrasound scan (R, 8 ) to TV scan (x, y> to output to the BWDSC
PCB.
4-2 LlE-EA0207
8. CONT
Controls ultrasound transmit/receive focusing and generates various control signals

for ultrasound scan.
9. KE! & KBIF
Interfaces each key and switch on the control panel with the PC unit.
Also controls turning on LED.
4-3 LlE-EA0207
PRBSW DBF DVP
(PRB.AWP) ++
BWDSC +- CFMDSC
........
VME BUS
1
PC UNIT
-CPU
.HDD KB +
I
-FDD
SEIUAL +
-MOD
PROBE +YindowclNT MOUSE +
PC1
I-, DICOM
Fig. 4.1.1 EUB-6600 Block Diagram

4.2.2 PRBSW PCB circuit description
PRBSW PCB is divided into the following 7 blocks.
1. PROBE CONNECT (Probe connector block) (PRB)
Interfaces with the probe.
EUB-6500 can connect three probes.

2. SEL-SW & RELAY (High voltage SW and relay block to switch the vibrator) @!!a
A circuit to connect 64CH of transducer elements for transmit/receive out of maximum

192CH of transducer elements with the transmit/receive circuit system.
One system is provided for PROBE1 and 2, and one for PRBSW3. Connection with
PROBE 1 and PROBE2 is switched by a relay.
3. T-AMP (Transmit AMP block) (AlK8
A circuit to amplify transmit signals sent from DBF PCB.

Amplified signals drive the transducer as transmit signal.
4. T/R-DIV (Transmit/Receive separating circuit block) (AI+@
A circuit to separate extremely fine receive signal from high voltage transmit signal.
Also, it is mounted with an attenuation circuit to prevent waveform of receive signals
adjacent to those of high level from distorted due to amplification by PreAMP and gain
control AMP.
5. PREAMP (Primary stage amplifier block) (AWR
A circuit to amplify receive signals by 26dB.

6. TGCAMP (Gain control amplifier block) (AWP,
An amplifier to amplify receive signals according to setting of B-Gain in order to create

optimum image by setting receive signal to appropriate input voltage level for the AD
converter,
It realizes uniform images by varying amplification factor in the depth direction.
7. R-FIL (Reception wave filter block) &llK?~

A filter circuit to remove a phenomenon called aliasing that occurs when the AD
converter (Analog to Digital) converts receive signal.
*) ( > shows the name of PCB on which each block is mounted.

@!RB is PRB PCB
(AWF? is AWP PCB.
4-5 LlE-EA0207
I
PROBE
CONNECT
L
h Receive Line
PROBE
CONNECT
PROBE2
LzISEL-SW
---, PREAMP _Ir TGC

AMP
rp
cn
PROBE3
Transmit Line
“,T
Transmit wave signal
From DBF
Fig. 42.1 PRBSW PCB Block Diagram

4.2.3 DBF PCB circuit description
DBF PCB is divided into the following 4 blocks.
1. Digital Beam Former ASIC (Transmit/Receive beam forming block l l l ASIC!)
Generates transmit wave signals based on ultrasound transmit focus data.
Also, beam-forms received signals based on receive focus data then demodulates them
and outputs to DVP PCB as complex signal of I and Q.
Transmit and receive wave focus data is stored in SRAM.

2. AMP (Transmit signal output block)
Amplifies an analog signal (transmit signal) outputted from ASIC by about twofold and
outputs to AWP PCB.
3. ADC (A/D converter block)
Converts receive signal (analog signal) outputted from PRBSW PCB to digital signal
and outputs to ASIC.
4. Controller (Control block)
Controls interface to VME BUS and each ASIC and SRAM.
4-7 LlE-EA0207
I
LIE-EA0207
4-a
4.2.4 DVP PCB circuit description
DVP PCB is divided into the following 6 blocks.
I. LPF (Low pass filter block)
This low pass filter filters complex data from DBF.

Image data of Doppler and CFM mode is outputted to DCSP. Image data of B (M)
mode is outputted to the following GAIN.
2. GAIN (Gain control block)

Controls gain in the B (M) mode.
3. ENVELOPE (Envelope detector block)

Detects envelope by orthogonal detection for gain controlled complex data.
4. LOG (Logarithmic compression block)
Applies logarithmic compression to image data that is now intensity information.

5. GAMMA (Gamma correction block)
Applies gamma correction to image data applied with logarithmic compression.
6. CONTROL (DVP control block)

Controls each block of LPF, GAIN, ENVELOPE, LOG and GAMMA.
Also controls input and output of various data between the VME bus and DVP internal
bus.
4-9 LlE-EA0207
+
4- 10 LlE-EA0207
4.2.5 DSCP PCB circuit description
DCSP PCB is composed of the DOP unit and CFM unit.
(1) The DOP unit is divided into the following 15 blocks.
1. INPUT-SEL & BUF (Input signal selector & buffer memory)

Switches over the PW signal from DVP PCB and the CW signal from CW A/D, and
stores in the buffer memory.
2. CW A/D 0 converter for CW)

Converts the analog continuous wave Doppler receive signal demodulated in CW PCB
to the digital signal.
3. DATA-SAMPLING (Data sampling block)
In the PW mode, samples Doppler signal data at the depth corresponding to the sample
point from the buffer memory.
In the CW mode, thins out data after LPF (low pass filter).
4. WALL FILTER (Wall filter block)
High pass filter: Removes signal components of low hequency from the Doppler signal.
5. GAIN (Gain process block)

Amplifies/attenuates the Doppler signal.
6. SP-D/A (D/A converter block for loud speaker output)

D/A converts the Doppler signal for loud speaker output.
7. F/R-SEL (Forward/Reverse separator block)

Forward/Reverse Separator: Separates forward and reverse signals from I, Q Doppler
signals of which phase is shifted by 90”.
8. SIG SEL & AMP (Speaker signal select & Audio amplifier block)
Switches FW’D and REV signals inside PCB and FWD/REV signals from the outside,
and power amplifies them to drive the loud speaker.
9. DOP-CONTROL (DOP control)
Includes VME bus I/F. Controls input buffer, sample point setting, WALL FILTER
setting, gain setting, FFT, image processing, output buffer and so on.
10. WINDOW-PROCESS (Window processing block)
Applies the window function to the Doppler signal.
ii. FFT (FFT block)

Frequency analyzes the Doppler signal by the high speed Fourier transformation
algorithm (FFT).
12. POWER-CALC (Power calculation block)
Calculates brightness in each frequency component from the I/Q Doppler signal applied
with frequency analysis.
13. IMAGE-PROCESS (Image processing block)

Applies image processing such as MAX sampling to the analysis data.
4- 11 LlE-EA0207
14. y -PROCESS ( y processing block)
Applies y correction to the analysis data.
15. OUTPUT-BUF (Output buffer)
Saves analysis data for the BWDSC PCB output.
(2) The CFM unit is divided into the following 9 blocks.
1. Beam Separate (Beam data separation circuit)

Separates the Dual Beam receive demodulated signal (CFM-I, CFM-Q) Erom DVF’ PCB
by Beam (BeamO, Beaml).
2. Decimation (Data decimation circuit)

Thins out the receive demodulated signals separated down to the number of data for
calculation.
The number of decimation depends on the size of CFM ROI.

3. MT1 Filter (MT1 filter: DSPl)
Removes unnecessary low speed signal components from living body structure such as
the cardiac wall interlocked with CFM FIL key of Function menu.
4. Blood Flow Calculator (Blood flow information calculating block: DSP 1)
Calculates flow velocity (real and imaginary), flow velocity variance, flow reflection
intensity from blood flow components extracted by the MT1 Filter. Also, calculates real
and imaginary parts of motion velocity of living body tissue from signals not applied
with the MT1 Filter.
5. Interpolation (Interpolation block: DSPZ)
Interpolates flow velocity (real and imaginary), living body motion velocity (real and
imaginary), flow velocity variance, flow reflection intensity data in the transmit line
direction to make double density line data..
6. Arc Tangent (Velocity calculation block)
Calculates arc tangent of real and imaginary parts of flow velocity and living body
motion velocity respectively to obtain velocity value.
7. Artifact Suppression (Body motion suppression calculating block: DSPB)
Suppresses CFM artifacts interlocked with the A.S. key of Function menu.
8. Gain (CFM Digital Gain calculation block:DSPB)
Calculates Digital Gain interlocked with the CFM Gain knob on the control panel.
9. CFA DYN (CFA dynamic range calculation block)
Calculates DFA dynamic range interlocked with the CFA DYN key of Function menu.
4 - 12 LlE-EA0207
SP_FWD
(From CNPNL) SP-REV
9 I FWD
me-m,.,
t-w-vv- I1
) INPUT --, DATA- + WALL + b SP- + F/R --, SIG SEL --, FWD
RFPW-Q -SEL GAIN
+ SAMPLIN --, FILTER + b D/A -b SEP -b & AMP --b REV
(From DVP)
l BZF (To SP)
I 4 4 4 Q REV 4
I I I I
VME BUS
I I
RFCW- I I CONTROL H I I b
RFCW-Cl
(From CW)
WINDOW- + POWER IMAGE- Y J’RO OUTPUT FFTIMG

FFT --,
__, PROCESS -b + -CALC ---, PROCES --, CESS --) J3UF (To BWDSC)
I-+
1
4 4 4 4 4
I I
DOP-
b
CONTROL1 ’
Fig. 4.2.4.1 DCSP PCB Block Diagram (DOP Part)

DSPl
,_-__-_--_____--_-__----------------------------------
II
I
I
I
MT1 Blood Flow Vmain-Real I
1I
Beam Beam 0 Decimate I
I filter Calculator
Separate :I Q
Cm-1 <23:0>
b II
:
I Vali -1
CM-Q <23:0> I
I
Decimate I
b Beam I Abs 1
I 1 I I
From. DVP
DSP2
Interpolation !I VELO-OUT <7:0>

Vmain-Real Artifact veto
Arc Vmain I
Vmain-lmg
Suppression :
Tangent I
Vmain-Real
Vsub
Vmain-lmg
Abs
__-_________-___--__-----------------------------------------------------------------------------,
Fig. 4.2.4.2 DCSP PCB Block Diagram @FM Part)
c
4.2.6 BWDSC PCB circuit description
BWDSC PCB is divided into the following 6 blocks.
1. SEL, AVE, AXIAL, ENH and BUFMEM (Selector, Averaging, Axial Enhance and Buffer
memory block)
Switches over the B-image and M-image data from DVF PCB and the D-image from
DDOP PCB, and takes data in the buffer memory after applying the averaging process
in the sampling interval corresponding to display depth and the enhance process in the
beam direction.
2. PRESCC, POSTSCC, CINE I/F and MAIN MEM (PRESCC, POST-SCC, Cine I/F and
Main Memory block)
Applies PRE-SCC and POST-SCC to image data read from the.buffer memory, and takes
data in the Main Memory. In Cine playback, takes image data sent from the Cine into
the Main Memory. Three came memories each exist at the R and L sides.
3. LATERAL ENH and SOURCE MEM (Lateral Enhance and Source Memory block)
Reads a frame of data each for the R and L sides from the frame memory, applies
enhance process in the TV horizontal direction and takes data into the source memory.
4. BI-LINEAR INTPOL @-linear Interpolation block)
The source memory address (R, 19) corresponding to TV scan address (x, y) is calculated
by the affine transformation (performing image rotation, enlargement and contraction)
and the polar coordinate transformation (transforming from orthogonal coordinate
system to polar coordinate system).
The address (R, 8 ) thus transformed is not necessarily agreed with that where real data
of the source memory exists. Therefore, 4-point interpolation process is applied based
on real data of the four point existing around it to calculate data corresponding to TV
scan address (x, y).
5. YUV TRANS (YUV transformation block)
Transforms 4-point interpolated image data to Y (brightness data), U(Cb)V(Cr)(color

data), and outputs it together with color image data from CFMDSC PCB and data (ECG
wave, etc.) from BIO PCB to the VIDEO board.
Priority of black/white or color image and black/white y correction are performed in

this block.
6. CALC RAM (Calculation RAM block)
R.AM to store image data to be used for various measurements. Image data being
displayed is always written in it.
4 - 15 LlE-EA0207
(From DVP)
BW DATA +
(From DCSP)
iIOP DATAi
-I
1
I
SEL
L-4
I
I+ --I
II
I
AVE
+
I
a-
+-
BUFMEM 1
(From DCSP) I I(-, I -
MARK DATA(ZER0. MSAMP. PEAK. MEAN1
tI
+ I1 II-9
I
I
MAIN
MEM
0% L,
Mark)
+-
rLATERAL
ENH
hi-i-i hOLiCE [ . r
d
(to VIDEO
+JV(CbCr)
board)
(from BIO)
BIO DATACECG. PCG)
.
R-TRIG +
(from CFMDSC)
CFMA(VEL0)
-+
CFMB(VARl+rrBS)
Fig. 4.2.5 BWDSC PCB Block Diagram

4.2.7 CFMDSC PCB circuit description
CFMDSC PCB is divided into the following 8 blocks.
1. VME BUS I/F (VME bus interface block)
Interfaces with VME-BUS.

2. INPUT DATA (Calculation data input block)
Input data is composed of

Flow velocity signal (VELO) 8-bit
Flow variance signal WARI) 8-bit
Flow reflection intensity signal (ABSL) 8-bit
and transferred from DCFMB PCB in 15.6MHz.
3. SCC (Frame correlation process block)
SCC is composed of Pre-SCC, Post-SCC and SCC memory.
Pre-SCC performs the frame correlation process using the current frame data and data
of the previous frame fed back from SCC-Memory.
Output of Pre-SCC will be the input to Post-SCC and also saved in the SCC-Memory.
Post-SCC performs the frame correlation process using the current frame data of
Pre-SCC output and data of the previous frame and two frames before fed back from
the SCC-Memory.
4. CINE I/F (CINE PCB interface block)

Interfaces with CINE PCB for CINE replay.
5. FRAME MEMORY (Frame memory block)
The frame memory consists of three frames in a form of 256 (R-directionjx 512 (0
-direction) X 3 WELO, VARI, ABSL).
The frame memory interface stores frame data independently to the L-side and R-side
of frame memory in ultrasound synchronization and transfers to the later stage in TV
synchronization.
6. SMOOTHING (Smoothing process block)
Applies the smoothing process to make data look smooth.

7. SELECT DATA (Display data selection block)
Selects two out of three WELO, V’I and ABSL) by the color mapping.
ACH (A Channel) is always VELO, while BCH (B Channel) is VARI or ABSL.
8. SCAN CONVERT (Scan convert [Coordinate conversion] block)
Source memory address (R, B > corresponding to TV scan address (x,y) is calculated by
affine conversion (rotates, enlarges/contracts an image) and polar coordinate system
conversion (converts from rectangular coordinate system to polar coordinate system).
(R, 8 ) address thus calculated does not necessarily agree with the address where the
actual data of source memory exists: therefore, it applies 4-point interpolation to actual
data of four points existing in the periphery to calculate data corresponding to TV scan
address (x,y>
4-point interpolation output is transferred to BWDSC PCB.
4- 17 LlE-EA0207
I
I I VELOPLY ;
2 From DCSP I I OLD m I
u I(/ II I II VARIPLY :
I VFI I-I / c II
I I
ABSLPLY :
1 VARI / I I ‘i
I
I R/ I rom CINE !
I ABSL / I
I, I I
(15.6MHz) I I NEW - I
I 1 I++ VELOREC i
I
I
I WVARIREC :
I
I
I 3 Frame x 3CH I
._____--------_--_----------
I
I
I
I
I i ~----------I
..-. I I
CFMA (VELO)
t/t
I
i I
I
VFI fl R
R Side ; R Side Select Data
by CFM MAP
Frame Memory I Smoothing ACN : VELO
I/F BCH : VARI

I I -
I
I
I I- ,- _------ or ABSL
I
I I ,--------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
13 Frame x 3 CH
‘i: SYNC
~~~~H~~ j
I I
I
-______-_-_______-________________
I
-_--me__-___
Fig. 4.2.6 CFMDSC PCB Block Diagram
c
4.2.8 CONT PCB circuit description
CONT PCB is divided into the following 7 blocks.
1. CLOCK GENERATOR (Clock generation block)
Generates clocks of 32ns, 64ns, 128ns and frequency 4-times of transmit frequency
from 125.000MHz crystal oscillator. For 32ns, 64ns and 12&s, one buffer and one line
are provided for each board to restrain degradation of waveform.
2. VME IiF &ME interface block)

Outputs the VME signal from the PCI-VME bridge to VME of MB. The VME bus of
DBF is provided with a gate to minimize VME access to DBF.
3. SCAN CONTROL (Scan control block)

The DMA sequencer controls the type of ultrasound beam, shot direction and data
take-in timing of DSC PCB. Also it controls Sync Scan (ECG) and CINE PCB.
4. DUS CONTROL (Digital US control block)
Following instructions on the type of ultrasound beam and shot direction outputted
from SCAN CONTROL, it controls PRBSW PCB and DBF PCB. Digital control to
PRBSW PCB is through serial communication.
5. US-SYNC GENERATOR (US sync signal generation block)
Generates signals synchronized with ultrasound shot such as Y-SYNC* in response to
PRF.
6. TV-SYNC GENERATOR (TV sync signal generation block)
Generates vertical and horizontal sync signals for DSC control in synchronized with
external vertical sync signal (EXTVS) inputted from VIDEO PCB via BWDSC PCB.
7. SYSTEM ID (System ID block)
Uses an ID chip to give the system ID readable by software to the system.
4 - 19 LlE-EA0207
0
32,64,128ns x9+ To other PCBs
CLK
SYSTEM ID
GENERATOR 410 & To DBF
DBF VME BUS
To PCI-VME-I/F VME BUS

VME I/F
4 k
(CN2
DATA BUS
Q” HFRZ (From KBIF) BEAM ADDRESS PRBSW SERIAL I/O

* k * +
SCANCONTROL DUS CONTROL To PRBSW
L,RSYNC (From BIO) ATGC CONTROL
l
l
1
I
I SCAN CONTROL SIGNALS
SYNCERR,To KBIF
US-SYNC
. US-SYNC SIGNALS
* GENERATOR
EXTVS (From BWDSC) TV-SYNC TV-SYNC SIGNALS

l GENERATOR CFMDSC
BIO
Fig. 4.2.7 CONT PCB Block Diagram

4.2.9 KB & KBIF PCB description
4.2.9.1 KB
Provides appropriate keystroke, key click and illumination by backlight LED as a control
panel of rubber sheet.
(1) LED
Two types of red and green LED. Turned ON/OFF according to the key status
(2) Key switch

Depressing the key switch outputs ON and releasing it outputs OFF signal.
(3) Toggle switch

Pressing upward or downward the toggle switch outputs ON signal and returning to
the center outputs OFF signal.
(4) Rotary encoder

Depressing the rotary encoder outputs ON signal and releasing it outputs OFF signal.
Turning the rotary encoder clockwise outputs positive value and counterclockwise
negative value.
(5) Slide variable resistor

Variation of resistance outputs variation of data value.
4.2.9.2 KBIF PCB

Controls overall keyboard unit for communication with the main unit (RS232C, PC/2
keyboard, PS/2 mouse) and processes corresponding to each command.
(1) Key scan
Depressing the key obtains a key scan data from the scan line output.
(2) Rotary switch and rotary encoder scan
Depressing the rotary switch detects signals and recognizes the rotary switch selected
to make it ON. Releasing it makes it OFF.
Setting data to any specific address selects a rotary encoder to obtain data from the
specific address.
(3) Slide variable resistor scan
Periodically obtains data of the slide variable resistor converted by the A/D converter
built in CPU.
(4) Interruption process by each signal
Depressing the FREEZE key obtains data from IRQG.
SYNC-ERR signal acquires data from IRQ5 based on data sent from the system.
R-wave trigger signal acquires data from IRQ7 based on data sent from the ECG unit.
SPARE0 and 1 signals acquire data from the data bus based on data sent from the
system.
(5) PSI2 keyboard interface
Acquires a control command for the OADG standard section of the keyboard by
communicating with the system via the PS/2 keyboard interface.
Transmits data detected by key scan (OADG standard keys) to the system.
4 * 21 LlE-EA0207
(6) RS232C serial interface
Communicates with the system via the RS232C serial interface to acquire a control
command for the supplementary function section.
Transmits data detected by key scan (exclusive keys for EUB), rotary switch scan,
rotary encoder scan, slide variable resistor scan, etc.
(7) Version signal readout

Acquires data from a specific address when turning ON the power.
(8) ON/OFF control of key switch LED

Controls backlight LED (green and red) of keys on request from the system.
(9) Buzzer output control

Sounds the buzzer when detecting key ON.
4.2.9.3 TR unit
Turning the ball acquires relative coordinates in the X and Y directions and outputs data.
In addition, takes in signals corresponding to 2 buttons and outputs them.
(1) Receiving data

Communicates in the serial interface of clock sync to set transmission parameters
based on commands from the main unit.
(2) Transmitting data

Communicates in the serial interface of clock sync to transmit button, XY sign and
XY overflow data in the 1st byte, and relative coordinate data in the X direction in the
2nd byte and relative coordinate data in the Y direction in the 3rd byte.
n1
J4
CNKl
-
CNKl 13
CN62
-b COMl
-, CN62
RS232C
KEYBOARD
21
+ CN63 MOUSE
0
- CN63
-, CN80
17
CNK2 CNK2 CN80
KB KBIF PCB
Fig. 4.2.8 Keyboard Unit Block Diagram
4 - 22 LlE-EA0207
4.3 BIO Unit EZU-EK23
4.3.1 General and board Description
Comnosition: EZU-EK23 is an option of EUB-6500 and consists of the following PCB.
1. BIO PCB
PCB overview: Amplifies and filters ECG signal and PCG signal, and controls monitor
display.
4.3.2 BIO PCB circuit description

BIO PCB is divided into the following 22 blocks:
1. Isolation Amp
Amplifies signals obtained from three cardiac electrodes isolated.
2. Amplifier
Amplifies ECG signals.
3. Volume control
Adjusts the ECG signal to an appropriate level.

4. Filter 1
Cuts higher frequency by the filter.
5. Analog switch
Switches over two types of signals (ECG and PCG) by the analog switch in turn.
6. R-WAVE
A comparator to pick up R-wave from cardiac signals.
7. PCG Amplifier
Amplifies signals obtained by the phonocariographic transducer.
8. Band pass filter
A filter to pass frequencies from about 70 to 200Hz among signal components inputted
from the phonocardiographic transducer.
9. Amp
Changes gain according to the manufactures of phonocardiographic transducer.
10. A/D converter

A/D converts signals outputted form the analog block.
11. Digital filter
Applies digital processes such as low pass filter, high pass filter, position variable filter,
notch filter to the A/D converted data
12. Peak hold detection

Samples data applied with the filter process in an equal interval, and detects the
maximum and the minimum data in the interval of acquisition to the peak hold
memory at the later stage, and keeps them.
4 - 23 LlE-EA0207
13. Peak hold memory
Writes the maximum and minimum values of wave data detected in the previous peak
and hold detection stage into this memory in synchronization with acquisition of US
image to the memory at the main unit side, and reads it in synchronization with write
timing to the display PCB.
14. Display data generation
Creates data signal from the maximum and minimum values of wave data that were
read horn the peak and hold memory.
Uses the counter to obtain the position of monitor display scan line and creates display
waveform by comparing the maximum and minimum values and turning on the display
dots of scan line existing between the maximum and minimum values.
15. R-TRIG control
Outputs the R-Trig signal in synchronization with ECGON and OFF.

16. Memory write address counter
Controls the address to load data into the memory. Sweep Speed is referred to control
output interval of the BIO WR signal from the main unit, and the system uses this
signal to count up the counter to create the address for memory write.
17. Display address counter
Controls the read address to display wave data loaded into the memory on the monitor.
Scroll display system is used for displaying biological waveform, so the read address is
created by presetting the read start address based on the write address to the memory
and counting up it. Also, according to the image display mode, the preset value of
read address is selected.
18. Clock generation circuit
Creates standard clock (10msec) and so on for L-Sync, R-Sync and heart rate
measurement.
19. Delay counter
Counts down the value given by CPU to create L-Sync and R-Sync.
20. L/R Sync circuit
Uses US signals as control signals when scanning in the Sync mode as well as creates
control data to display Sync mark on the biological waveform to be displayed on the
monitor.
2 1. Monitor display control

Treats data in synchronization with monitor sync signal from the main unit.
22. Heat rate counter
Counting the time from R to R of cardiac waveform, CPU reads the count value to
measure the heart rate.
4 - 24 LIE-E.40207
u
‘C
k
[r
i-”
I---.
I I
L- I’
L
4 - 25 LlE-EA0207
4 - 26 LlE-EA0207
4.4 Steerable Doppler CW Unit EZU-ST4
4.4.1 General and board Description
Composition : EZU-ST4 is an option of EUB-6500 and consists of the following PCB:
1. CWBUF PCB
2. CWREC PCB
PCB overview : For the steerable CW Doppler by the sector probe. CWBUF PCB sends CW
Doppler signal to CWREC PCB, and CWREC PCB carries out phasing,
addition, demodulation, and filter process of each channel.
4.4.2 CWBUF PCB circuit description
CWBUF PCB is composed of the BUFFER circuit.

This sends the receive signals from the PREAMP block of PRBSW PCB to CWREC PCB in
the differential mode.
4.4.3 CWREC PCB circuit description
CWREC PCB is divided into the following 9 blocks:

1. PHASE SHIFTER (Phasing block)
Shifts receive signals by the delay different for each channel to make them in phase.
2. ADD (Adder block)
Adds the receive signals phased.

3. NOTCH FILTER (Notch filter block)
Use the notch filter circuit to remove the carrier component leaked from the transmit
system so as not to saturate the receive signals.
5. DEMODULATOR (Demodulation circuit block)
Detects a Doppler shift component by mixing it with the reference wave.

6. ANALOG WALL FILTER (High pass filter block)
Remove unnecessary low frequency components included in the Doppler signal due to
body motion.
7. CW FILTER (Low pass filter block)
Reduces saturation due to the AID converter at the later stage.
8. ANTI ALIASING FILTER (Anti aliasing filter block)
Removes unnecessary high frequency components to remove aliasing due to the AID
converter at the later stage.
9. CW CONTROL (CW control block)
Sets the reference frequency and controls gain setting and so on.
4 - 27 LlE-EA0207
4.5 CW Doppler Unit EZU-CW2
Composition : EZU-CW2 is an option of EUB-6500 and consists of the following PCB:
1. CWREC PCB
PCB overview : For the CW Doppler by the single element probe.

CWREC PCB perfomx sending/receiving CW Doppler signals, demodulation
and filter process.
4.5.2 CWREC PCB circuit description

CWREC PCB is divided into the following 10 blocks.
1. REFERENCE CLOVK GENERATOR (Reference wave clock generation circuit block)

Generates transmit wave signal clock for CW and reference wave signal with phase
difference of 90”.
2. TRANMITTING VITVUIT (Transmitting circuit.block)
Outputs the transmitting wave signal clock to the CW probe via the tuned amplifier
circuit and driver circuit.
3. PRE AMP (Preamplifier circuit block)
Tuned amplifies the receive signal from the single element CW probe.
4. NOTCH FILTER (Notch filter block)
Use the notch filter circuit to remove the carrier component leaked from the transmit
system so as not to saturate the receive signals.

6. DEMODULATOR (Demodulation circuit block)
Detects a Doppler shift component by mixing it with the reference wave.

7. ANALG WALL FILTER (High pass filter block)
Remove unnecessary low frequency components included in the Doppler signal due to
body motion.
8. CW FILTER (Low pass filter block)
Reduces saturation due to the AID converter at the later stage.

9. ANTI ALIASING FILTER (Anti aliasing filter block)
Removes unnecessary high frequency components to remove aliasing due to the A/D
converter at the later stage.
10. CW-CONTROL (CW control block)

Sets the reference frequency and controls gain setting and so on.
4 - 28 LlE-EA0207
REFERENCE
CLOCK-
(From CONT)
.._... ,,,,,,.,.., ._,. .,.,,.,..,.........,........................................................................................................................................................................................

I
CWBUF P.C.6 CWREC P.C.B
I ,
PREOUTUS
I PHASE
-, BUFFER ADD ! b-
+ cw ANTI
/ b SHIFTER NOTCH
-3 I ..o> I GAIN + + ALlASING -+
+ FILTER -+ + FILTER + FILTER
(From AWP)
~...................
~~mcw-.................................................
PROBE) r ........................... p
cw
CONTROL
REFERENCE -
TRANSMlTTlNG
CWTR CLOCK
p CIRCUIT 4
(To CW-PROBE) I
EZU-CW2
EZU-ST4
Fig. 4.4.1 EZU-STWCW2 PCB Block Diagram

4.6 Cine Memory unit EZU-MM16, EZU-MM17
Comoosition : Cine Memory Unit consists of the following PCB.
1. CINE PCB
PCB overview : In recording, stores each image data of B, M and D mode from BWDSC
and CFMDSC, while in playback, outputs each image data having been
stored to BWDSC and CFMDSC.
4.6.2 CINE PCB circuit description
CINE PCB is divided into the following 11 blocks.

1. BW INPUT BUF (Buffer memory for BW input)
Image data from BWDSC is stored in the image memory via this buffer memory.
2. BW IMAGE MEM (Image memory for BW)
Image data from BWDSC is stored in this memory

3. BW OUTPUT BUF (Buffer memory for BW output)
Image data from the image memory is outputted to BWDSC via this buffer memory.
4. BW MEM CONTROL (BW memory control)
Carries out read/write operation and address control of BW buffer memory and BW
image memory and address control
Also includes VME bus IF and carries out input/output of various data through the bus
line from CONT PCB via this IF.
5. CFM INPUT BUF (Buffer memory for CFM input)
Image data from CFMDSC is stored in the image memory via this buffer memory.
6. CFM IMAGE MEM (Image memory for CFM)

Stores image data from CFMDSC.
7. CFM OUTPUT BUF (Buffer memory for CFM output)
Image data from the image memory is outputted to CFMDSC via this buffer memory.
8. CFM MEM CONTROL (CFM memory control)
Carries out read/write operation and address control of CFM buffer memory and CFM
image memory and address control
Also includes VME bus IF and carries out input/output of various data through the bus
line from CONT PCB via this IF.
9. R-TRIG MEM (R-TRIG memory)
Stores address of image memory when detecting R-TRIG.
10. R-TRIG MEM CONTROL (R-TRIG memory control)

Controls R-TRIG memory. Includes VME bus IF, and uses the VME bus to output
address stored in the R-TRIG memory as well as carries out input/output of various
data.
4 - 30 LIE-EAOZOT
11. ODM (ODM function) *) Only EZU-MM17
Performs the ODM function.
4 * 31 LlE-EAOZOT
(Only EZU-MM17)
VME BUS
L
BW RECA
BW BW BW
BW RECB BW PLAY DATA
(From BWDSC) Input Buffer IMAGE MEM Output Buffer - + (To BWDSC)
t t t
VELOREC
P
ABSLREC CPM (VELO CFM (CFM(VELOI VELOPLAY
ABSLPLAY
k.2 VARIREC (VERO~VARIIABSL)
b /VARI
(From CFMDSC)
/ABSL)
-
t t r
R-TRIG M EM +I R-TRIG M EM
CONTROL
/
Fig. 4.6.1 CINE P.C.B. Block Diagram
c
Section 5 Power Unit
5.1 General and Circuit Description

Composition: EUB-6500 power is composed of the following units.
1. HM-071C : Main power unit of the system, which is a multi-output

switching regulator built in with an isolating transformer and
power-factor improvement circuit. It mainly supplies AC for
the monitor and service outlet and DC for the analog high
voltage system and analog low voltage system.
2. HM-071K : DC/DC converter unit provided at the secondary side of the
main power unit HM-071C. Its input is the DC output of
main power unit. It supplies DC mainly for the SELV
system to the DSC and PC units.
Power unit circuit descrintion:
1. LINE FILTER (Line filter block)
Removes noise on the AC line.

2. TRANS (Transformer block)
Switches over voltage so that each circuit can operate in optimum voltage as well as
isolates the primary and secondary circuits.
A temperature fuse is built in the unit. (120°C)
3. PFC CIRCUIT (PFC circuit block)

Consists of the PFC circuit and protection circuit. The PFC circuit suppresses
harmonics as well as improves distortion of voltage waveform and current wave
height value to realize power-factor improvement.
The protection circuit shuts off input by a signal from the overvoltage protection
circuit.
4. MAIN CONVERTER CIRCUIT (Main converter circuit block)
The switching conversion system converts power to AC and supplies it to each DC
converter via the transformer to isolate the primary and secondary circuits.
The main converter DC PCB outputs SOVDC and the main converter AC PCB outputs
4OOVpp trapezoid waveform.
5. RECTIFICATION AND SMOOTHING CIRCUIT (Rectification and smoothing circuit
block)
After rectifying by the diode, the power is smoothed by the capacitor to get DC source
6. REGULATOR CIRCUIT (Regulator circuit block)
The series type regulator system stabilizes DC output and reduces output ripples.
7. OVER CURRENT PROTECTION CIRCUIT (Overcurrent protection circuit block)

When the load is short-circuited or overcurrent occurs, this circuit protects the load or
power circuit.
5-1 LlE-EA0207
8. OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION CIRCUIT (Overvoltage protection circuit block)
Protects the load and power circuit when output voltage exceeds over the rating.
9. FILTER (Filter block)
Removes noise from the main converter circuit block.
10. CHOPPER CIRCUIT (Chopper circuit block)

The chopper type circuit stabilizes DC output and reduces output ripples.
5-2 LlE-EA0207
Analog HV Unit I
. .. . .. . .. . ....*. . .. .. . . .. . .. .. . . Analog LV Unit
, HM-071 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-
:.
t ;
r-l
:
: :
FILTER :. RECTIFICATION AND :
: SMOOTHING :
CIRCUIT :
: :
: :
:. :
CHOPPER : :
7 CIRCUIT : :
TRANS : :
:. :
: :
1 1 Analog HV Unit k I 1 :
:
I
OVERCURRENT OVERCURRENT :
PROTECTION : PROTECTION :
CIRCUIT : CIRCUIT :
: :
: :
: :
:
OVER VOLTAGE
P R~l&;TECT;O N
:
: I OVER VOLTAGE
PROTECTION I
:
:
:.
:
:. I CIRCUIT
I :
:
: :.
:. . . . . . 4 DC OUTPUT C. . ...+
4 AC OUTPUT I- A DC OUTPUT I
Fig. 5.1 Power Unit Block Diagram

5.2 Power Unit Connectors
Jj.M-071C : CNl : Connector for the circuit breaker.
CN2 : DC output connector for the analog high voltage.
CN3 : DC output connector for the analog low voltage.
CN4 : DC output connector for digital system.
CN5 : Connector for AC input voltage switching.
NTSC : Switches over AC100/110/120V
PAL : Switches over AC220/230/240V.
CN6 : AC output connector for the outlet
CN7 : AC output connector for the monitor.
HM-071K : Edge connector : SOVDC input (Digital system DC output of HM-07 1C)
Edge connector : Digital system DC output
HM-071c
Connector No. Pin No. Signal name Remarks
1 OUT L
Input of the circuit breaker.
2 OUT N
CNl
3 INL
Output of the circuit breaker.
4 IN N
Connector No. Pin No. Signal name Output voltage Remarks

Al +6.0 +6V Outputs to AWP PCB.
A2 -6.0 -6V Outputs to AWP PCB.
A3 +12vp +12v Outputs to PRB and AWP PCB.
A4 -12vp -12v Outputs to AWP PCB.
A5 NC
A6 +75V +75v Outputs to AWP PCB.
A7 +75-GND
A8 +lZVar +4.5-+12V Outputs to AWP PCB controlled
by STVC @-bit) of CN3.
A9 -lOOV-GND
CN2 A10 -loov -loov Outputs to PRB PCB.
Bl +6.0-GND
B2 -6.O-GND
B3 +lBVp-GND
B4 -12Vp-GND
B6 -75v -75v Outputs to AWP PCB.

B7 -‘75V-GND
B8 +12Var-GND
B9 +lOOV-GND
BlO +1oov +1oov Outputs to PRB PCB.
5-4 LlE-EA0207
Connector No.1 Pin No. 1 Signal name ) Output voltage 1 Remarks I
Al STVCO +lBVar control signal controls
A2 STVCl - +12Var voltage from 4.5V(lFh) to
A3 sTVc2 12V(lOh) in 0.5V step by means of
sTVc4-0.
A4 1 NC
A5 1 +5Vc-GND 1 I
A6 +5vc +5v Output to DBF PCB.
A7 -12Vb-GND
Output to CWREC, CONT and
-12v
CN3 DBF PCB..
B3 GND (STVC)
B4 NC
B5 +5Vc-GND
B6 +5vc +5v Output to DBF PCB.
B7 +lBVb--GND
B8 +12Vb +12v Output to CWREC, CONT and
Connector No. Pin No. Signal name Output voltage Remarks
Output to HM-071K.
+3ov
A4, B2, B4 +30V-GND
A5 +5VSB +5v Output to PC and HM-071K.
CN4
Standby power supply of PC.
B5 GND
A6 P-CONT - Controls ON/OFF of secondary
voltage.
B6 1 PROTECT 1 - 1 Protection signal. I
Connector No. Input voltage Remarks

1oov/2oov Al-B2, A2-Bl shorted.
CN5 llovl22ov Al-A3, A2-Bl shorted.
12OVl24OV Al-B3. A2-Bl shorted.
Connector No. Pin No. Output voltage Remarks

1 ov
I 5 GND
5-5 LlE-EA020’i
Connector No. Pin No. Output Remarlcs
voltage
1 1
2
! ov I
1oov For the monitor.
3 GND
HM-071K
Signal output
Connector NC Remarks GND connector
name voltage
la-le
+12VJVi I 1
2a-2e
3a-3e 12a- 12e
5a-5e 14a-14e
1 +30V-GND - 16a- 16e
7a-7e I 18a- 18e
9a-9e 20a-20e
1 1
lla-lle 26a-26e
13a-13e 31a-31e
15e 1
17e 38a-38e
19e 43a-43e
27a-27e 1
1 +5Va I +5v 1 Power supply for 52a-52e
29a-29e 59a-59e
39a-39e 1
62a-62e
4la+*le 68a-68e
53a-53e 1
+2.5V +2.5v 80a-80e
57at57e I 65a-65e
63a-63e 1
+3.3Va 99a-99e
66a:29e I +3.3v I 103a-103e
81a-81e 1
113a-113e
83a-83e
lOOa- 1OOe
1
+3.3b
I -3-3v
I 1
116a-116e
+12Va +12V
lOla-101e I
I
llla-llle -12Va 1 -12V
5-6 LlE-EA0207
HM-071C PC-MB
1 LINE INPUT 1
HM-071 K
II
From/To
1 CN4 D CN4
Circuit Breaker
+ ‘lb US-UNIT
Input Voltage
CN5 1
Select
-To iq I CN2 b AWP PCB

AC OUTLET
CWREC PCB
To MINOTOR CN7I I
Fig. 5.2 Power Unit Connection Diagram

Table 6.1 Table of Power Supplies by Unit and PCB
lololololololol
I I I I I I
Section 6 Monitor Unit
6.1 Composition
The EUB-6500 monitor consists of the following unit.
EZU-MT24-S 1
6.2 Specification
(1) Signal input impedance : 75R terminated
(2) Maximum gain : 32dB or more (with maximum contrast)
(3) Frequency characteristic : 60Hz - 30MHz (+ 3dB)

(When clicking the center of both contrast VR and
brightness VR)
(4) Power input : Ac ioov+ 15% (50/60Hd
(5) Power consumption : About 9OVA
(6) Environmental requirements : Temperature 0 - 40°C

Relative humidity 10 - 90% (No condensation)
(7) Weight : About 18kg
(8) Signal interface
a> Connector : Mini D-Sub 15-pin

b) Connections : See below:
c) StandardtjExternal switchover signal : . Signal level TTL level

. Specification Standard : H level
External : L level
6-1 LlE-EA0207
(9) Display : See below
Standard When displayj

TV signal
1 640x480 1 800X600 1 NTSC -F ‘AL
Horizontal 1 260+4mm 1 258+4mm 1 26Ok4mm 1 2571 t 4mm
Vertical I 195+3mm I 193.5f3mm I 195+3mm I 193: t 3mm
(10) Input signal level: See below. (Refer to Fig. 6.1.)
a) Standard
Level
Input signal 640 x 480
1 800X600
R 0.7vp-p
G 0.7vp-p
B o.‘Ivp-p
H-SYNC TTL
V-SYNC TTL
b) When displaying external TV signal

Level
Input signal
NTSC PAL
R 0.716Vp-p 0.698Vp-p
G O.?16Vp-p 0.698Vp-p
G + SYNC
SYNC 0.286Vp-p 0.3OlVp-p
B 0.716Vp-p 0.698Vp-p
(11) Input signal timing: See below. (Refer to Fig. 6.2.)
Item Formula
640 X 48 10 800X
Standard
Displaying external
TV signal
600 1 NTSC 1 PAI, 1
Unit 1
a Display time 25.94 25.7r 6 1 52.04 ) 51.52 1 p s
I I
b I-1Blank time I c+d+e 5.84 6.24 1 11.50 1 12.48 ,u s
-^
c 1r‘ront porch 1 ) 0.38 ) 1.06 1 1.78 1
’ I-..76 ,u s
d 1Pulse width of horizontal] 1 3.92 1 3.32 1 4.70 1 4:.68 ,us
sync signal
e Back porch 1.54 1.86 5.02 6.04 ,u s
f Cycle of horizontal sync a+b 31.78 32.00 63.54 64.00 ps
signal
g Frequency of horizontal l/f 31.47 31.25 15.735
sync signal
h Display time (480H) (6 1) I (240H) 1 (289H) I ms
i Blank time j+k+l (45HI (:
j Front porch (lOHI (
k Pulse width of vertical (2H) (3H) I (t
sync signal 1‘1 II
1 Back porch (33H) (:!lH) I (15H) 1 (19H) 1 ms ’
n Cycle of vertical sync h+i (525H) (625~) I (262~) I (314~) ms
signal
n Frequency of vertical l/m 59.94 50.00 60 50 Hz
sync signal
Non-inter1 Non-inter1
Scan system Interlaced Interlaced -
aced aced
6-2 LIE-EA020'i
Standard
l&glayina external TV sianal
Fig. 6.1 Input Signal Level
HORIZONTAI
b a
4 .4 l
II
c
VERTICAL
I’ ’
Fig. 6.2 Input Signal Timing
LlE-EA0207
6-3
6.3 installation
6.3.1 Cautions in installing the monitor
Convergence of the color monitor is affected horn external induction magnetic field. Avoid
installing the equipment in any region where induction magnetic field exists. Also observe
the following cautions to obtain stable performance for a long period of time.
(1) Ventilation
To obtain stable performance for a long period of time, keep temperature inside the
cabinet below 50°C.
Especially fully ventilate in the vertical direction.
(2) Leakage magnetic field

Do not install the monitor in any region near the transformer; fan or the other leakage
magnetic field sources as far as possible. Alternating current leakage magnetic flux
causes fluctuation of images, and direct current magnetic flux (magnet or the like) causes
raster distortion or degradation of image color purity. If it is necessary to install this
equipment in such environment, satisfy the following conditions.
That is, for the transformer, attach the shielding ring and shorting ring to minimize
leakage flux and design its winding of a balanced type. For devices other than the
transformer, use magnetic shielding or non-inductive winding to minimize leakage
magnetic flux. Effect to the monitor may appear in a magnetic field of 0.01 Gauss or
more.
(3) Humidity
This monitor may be operated in a range of lo-90% relative humidity; however, it is
recommended to operate it in a range of 30-70% relative humidity since life of connecting
points of connectors, switches, variable resistors, etc. could become shorter.
(4) Ambient illumination
This monitor uses the black matrix tube showing excellent performance against glare or
reflection in a bright room.
However, to reduce fatigue of operator’s eyes, install it so as to avoid any light source that
may directly illuminate the tube face of CRT.
(5) Dust
This monitor has been designed to minimize accumulation of dust; however, high static
electric field extracts dust through the ventilation holes of cabinet. Therefore, take care
to minimize dust around the monitor.
(6) Power supply voltage

This monitor is built in with the voltage stabilizer circuit, so images are not affected from
voltage fluctuation within the specification.
However, avoid operation exceeding *lo% to prevent excessive heat inside the monitor
and reduced life of the monitor.
Either of 50Hz and 60Hz can be used without modification of the equipment.
(7) Dust on CRT face

Applied high voltage has tendency to collect dust on the tube face of CRT, and it
deteriorates brightness and focusing quality.
6-4 LlE-EA0207
To remove this dust periodically, use soft cloth moistened with silicone type glass cleaner.
Never use thinner or the like instead of the cleaner.
6.3.2 Cautions for safety

NOTE: Observe all the cautions and notices concerning safety labeled on the chassis or CRT.
(1) Hazardous voltage exists in the monitor. When removing the cover to work in the
equipment, be sure to observe general electrical cautions.
(2) Before removing or replacing PCB (module) and parts, turn OFF the power.
(3) Residual charge may remain in the anode cap. Greatest care should be taken for
replacement or inspection maintenance of CRT.
(4) Do not replace any parts at your discretion. Fire, X-ray or other hazard may result.
6.3.3 Replacing the fuse

When the fuse is to be replaced, use that supplemented to the monitor or the same type and
capacity.
The fuse is mounted on the main board (AVB401) inside the monitor. Be sure to turn OFF
the power before removing the cover and replacing the fuse.
6.3.4 Degaussing
This monitor is equipped with the automatic and manual degaussing function.
When turning ON the power, it is automatically degaussed. If the monitor is magnetized in
any reason and color purity of the image is deteriorated, remove the cover and press the
DEGAUSS switch on the VIDEO board (AVB411) to manually degauss.
If this action cannot fully degauss the monitor, use the degaussing coil commercially
available to do so externally.
6.4 Description of Operation

6.4.1 General
This monitor is composed roughly of the following 6 modules:
@ Brown tube
@ Main board
0 VIDEO board
@ Socket board
0 Control board
@ Front control board
6.4.2 Brown tube (CRT)

CRT is designed to make a light spot on the fluorescent screen by electron beam emitted
from the electron gun, deflect the electron beam with the deflection coil in a constant cycle,
and display an image by a locus of this light spot.
CRT is composed of the fluorescent screen coated in three colors, shadow mask and electron
gun to emit three electron beams. The electron gun is composed of metal coil heater,
cathode and grid arranged on a line.
6-5 LIE-EA0207
The 3-beam electron gun is arranged in line, so section of three electron beams is arranged
in line horizontally.
Three electron beams emitted from the electron gun are deflected to scan whole fluorescent
screen. Electron beam is blocked off by the shadow mask and hits fluorescent material
only corresponding to each color when it passes through the hole.
A set of dots emits light of red, green and blue depending on color signal intensity to
reproduce every possible color.
6.4.3 Main board (AVmOl)

The main board is composed of the following:
0 Power supply circuit
0 Horizontal deflection and high voltage circuit
@ Vertical deflection circuit
6.4.3.1 Power supply circuit

(1) Main circuit
Input voltage is supplied via the filter and rush current limit circuit. This is rectified
and smoothed by the rectifier diode (DlOO) and input capacitor (C103) to obtain DC
coarse rectified voltage. This is switched by the main transistor (QlOl) and
transformer (TlOO) to produce each voltage of P120 (+12Ov), P70 (+7OV), P24 (+24v),
P12 (+12V), HEATER (+6.3V) and P5 (+5V).
(2) Control circuit
P120 output voltage is compared with the reference voltage by the detector circuit.
Signal from the detector circuit is fed back to the control circuit via the photo-coupler
(PClOO).
The control circuit controls ON time of the main transistor (QlOO) to generate
appropriate drive pulse to stabilize the output P120. Switching frequency is
controlled so as to synchronize with the horizontal deflection signal.
(3) Overvoltage and overcurrent protection

In case of overvoltage and overcurrent, this protection circuit keeps the state by IC 100
when switching of QlOO stops. To restart it, turn OFF the power for 30 seconds or
more and turn ON again.
(4) +B power circuit

The +B power circuit controls +B voltage including SPCC and horizontal size
adjustment function. Output is adjusted by JR101 (for TV timing) and VR102 (for
PC timing) and stabilized by the control circuit (IC106) and switching of the transistor
(Q122). Switching frequency is controlled so as to synchronize with horizontal
deflection signal.
6.4.3.2 Horizontal deflection and high voltage circuits

In the horizontal and high voltage drive circuit, horizontal AFC circuit ICllO and drive
transistor Q119 drive the deflection coil to flow the horizontal deflection current, and also
drive the flyback transformer (FBT) to supply high voltage of about 24kV to the anode of
CRT.
6-6 LlE-EA0207
High voltage is adjusted by VR105, and stabilized by switching of transistor (Q120) and
control circuit (IClOS).
If high voltage increases abnormally in any trouble, the high voltage protection circuit
(IC107) controls high voltage to reduce +B voltage, and stops switching of the horizontal
AFC circuit (ICllO) to stop output. To release stop of the protection mode, the power
needs to be turned OFF and then ON.
6.4.3.3 Vertical deflection circuit

In the vertical deflection circuit, the vertical oscillation circuit (ICllO) and the drive
circuit (IC109) drive the deflection coil to flow vertical deflection current.
6.4.4 VIDEO board (AVB411)

The VIDEO board is consists of the following circuits:
0 Amplifiers for each channel of red, green and blue (VIDEO Amp)
0 Sync separation circuit
0 NTSUPAL signal detection circuit
8 Degauss control circuit
6.4.4.1 VIDEO Amp

(1) Image preamplifier circuit
Image input signal is supplied to the input of image preamplifier (IC300) via the AC
coupling capacitors (C318, C320 and C317).
(2) Contrast control and image post-amplifier circuit
Varying bias voltage of 24-pin of IC300 controls contrast.
Red (VR304), green (VR305) and blue (VR306) adjust gain of image amplifier channels
for a white balance of image.
Also VR308 adjusts brightness of the contrast center.
IC304 is a final stage of image amplifier to output a signal to the cathode of CRT via
the red (Q303, Q304), green (Q305, Q306) and blue (Q307, Q308).
(3) Bias control
The red (Q303, Q304), green (Q305, Q306) and blue (Q307, Q308) controls DC bias to
control brightness and white balance of raster.
The red (VR302), green (VR301) and blue (VR300) adjust white balance, while VR303
adjusts brightness of the brightness center.
6.4.4.2 Sync separation circuit

IC305 automatically separates H. SYNC and V. SYNC for following 3 modes of sync
signal input:
@ Composite sync
@ H IV mixed sync
@ H IV separated sync
IC305 also generates a cramp pulse in the horizontal back porch period to regenerate DC
level of the image circuit.
LlE-EA0207
6-7
6.4.4.3 NTSC/PAL signal detection circuit
Converts frequency of NTSC (fv: 60Hz) and PAL (fv: 50Hz) to voltage by the F/V converter
(IC301), and compares the voltage by the comparator (IC302) to output switchover
signals.
6.4.4.4 Degauss control circuit
The degauss switch is a momentary type. Once it is pressed, degaussing is kept for
about 10 seconds. It needs not to press continuously.
Also, when turning ON the power, degaussing is automatically effected.
6.4.5 Socket board (AVB421)

This board is mounted with CRT socket and supplies image signal, heater voltage, 1st and
2nd grid voltage and focus voltage to CRT.
6.4.6 Control board (AVB451)

Depending on each timing switchover signal, adjustment variable resistors are switched
over as shown in Table below.
Once it is set, images of respective timing can be displayed without readjustment.
Timing
Name
640x480 800x600 NTSC PAL
HEIGHT vR21 vR20 VR19 VR18
H-PHASE VR17 VR16 vR15 vR14
V-CENT V-R13 VR12 VRll VRlO
6.4.7 Front control (AVB431)

The front control includes the brightness and contrast variable resistors.
The brightness variable resistor adjusts brightness of raster, while the contrast variable
resistor adjusts brightness of image.
Either variable resistor is provided with the center click to obtain standard brightness when
centered.
6-8 LlE-EA0207
VIDEO BWRO
HEATER .x
G”0
NC
Gl I
CNI CNO
w
0)
CONIROL BOAR0
w ’ AVB451
s
00 COIL
N.&IN BOIJlO
I I
IV8401
6.5 Adjustment
6.5.1 List of adjusters
(1) Front controller (AVB431)
Function / (izErrie) / Position /
BRIGHTNESS Brightness of back Front With center click

1 VRl Brighter
VR raster (Center default)
CONTRAST With center click
2 vR2 Brightness of image Brighter
VR Front (Center default)
(2) Main board
Name Polarity
No. Function Position Remarks
Device No. Symbol (clockwise)
Higher
1 VRlOO P120 DC output voltage Upper Unchangeable
voltage
Horizontal screen size
2 mu01 WIDTH 1 Wider Upper
(For TV timing)
Horizontal screen size
3 v-R102 WIDTH 2 Wider Upper
(For PC timing)
High voltage trip
TRIP
4 vR103 point to protect Higher Upper Unchangeable
(I-IV TRIP)
abnormal high voltage
Correction of side
5 vR104 SPC e Upper
pinction
High voltage (Anode
6 vR105 HVADJ Higher Upper Unchangeable
voltage)
Horizontal frequency Higher
7 VR106 H-HOLD Upper Unchangeable
sync frequency
8 FBT FOCUS Focus - Side
SCREEN
9 FBT Screen voltage (VGZ) Brighter Side
(VQ4
6- 10 LlE-EA0207
(3) VIDEO board (AVB411)
White balance of back
SUB BRIGHTNESS
White balance of
color purity) (Non-lock)
(4) Control board (AVB451)
Polarity
Function Position Remarks
(clockwise)
I Lower 1 Side 1 PAL timing 1
Vertical screen Lower Side NTSC timing
Ei V-CENT position
l~6Tg$e&-~
I To the left I Side I PAL timing I

To the left Side NTSC timing
p!+J H-PHASE Horizontal screen
position To the left Side 800x600 timing
To the left Side 640x480 timing
Wider Side PAL timing
Wider Side NTSC timing
1-1 HEIGHT Vertical screen size
Wider Side 800x600 timing
12 1 VFt21 1 Wider Side 640x480 timing
LlE-EA0207
6- 11
6.5.2 VR adjuster layout
(1) Front controls
POWER ON LE CONTRAST VR
BRIGHTNESS VR
byout of Front Control VR
6 - 12 LlE-EA0207
(2) Upper controls
PI20 (VRIOO) H-HOLD (VR106)

(Fixed with adhesive) (Fixed with adhesive)
MAIN BOARD HV. ADJ (VR105)

(AVB401) (Fixed with adhesive)
FUSE (FlOO)
1 WIDTH 2 (VR102)
TRIP (VRl03) ’ \IVIDTH 1 (VRlOl)

(Fixed with adhesive)
byout of Upper Control VR
6- 13 LlE-EA0207
(3) Rear controls
R DRIV
(VR304)
I -7 / n
SUB BRT
(VR303)
R CUT OFF
(VR302)
G CUT OFF
(VR301)
B CUT OFF
(VR300)
VIDEO board / \
(AVB411) SUB CONT
(VR308)
F/V. ADJ (VR307)

(Fixed with adhesive)
bYOUt of Rear Control VR
6- 14 LlE-EA0207
(4) Side controls
HEIGHT
H-PHASE
V-CENT
(VRlO) (VRll) (vR12) (VRlS) -

CONTROL board
(AVB451) \
c@
i
FBT
FOCUS
SCREEN
byout of Side Control VR
6- 15 LlE-EA020i
6.7 Removing the Cover
L
,
T.
1) Remove M4xlO screws 0 (4 locations).

2) Withdraw the cover@ backward to detach it.
6- 17 LlE-EA0207
6.8 Detaching and Attaching the Filter
Bezel Filter
/ /
J &-
, Slot (small\
Slot (small)
<
, Slot (laroe\
I
Y
4 To protect the filter
from wrong insertion
‘
I
6.8.1 Detaching the filter

(1) Slide the filter to the right
---.
-_ ....... - -....---
....... _
6- 18 LlE-EA0207
(2) While curving the filter, take the projections (2 locations) at the right side of filter out of
the slots of bezel to detach the filter,
6.8.2 Attaching the filter

(1) Set the filter so that the projections of filter (large) come to the lower right facing to the
bezel.
(2) Insert the projections into the slots at the right side facing to the bezel.
(3) Curve the filter and fit the projections into the slots at the left side of bezel.
Slot and
projection (small)
/
Slot and
‘projection (large)
6 - 19 147 LlE-EA0207
Section 7 Connector Arrangement
. . ”
7.1 Connector Arrangement

Fig. 7.1.1 shows connector arrangement of the overall system.
Fig. 7.1.2 shows external appearance of the CN panel.
0 0 @
-OUT
Fig. 7.1.1 CN Panel
7.2 Connection of CN Panel Connector
7-1 LlE-EA0207
CN No. PIN No.1 Sign lalName 1 From/lb Remarks
1 IGND I I I
2 F-FREEZE
To KBIF FOOT SW
J0 F-SHUTTER
4 GND
6 FWD DOP out

nI From DCSP
REV DOP out
8 GND
9 GND
10 VCR-FWD DOP in I
To DCSP nnp in r
11 ,Vf?R
. v’“-*“uRli!V
24 GND
25 GND
26 CIN
“lb VIDEO Y/C-IN
27 YIN
28 (GND I I
29 IGND
30 IGND I
31 IGND
l-/From CONT 1
jjsp.
43 GGD -
J
.811UA control
44 SP-USTRIG-G From CONT

45 GND
46 GND
47 SP SPARE21 lb CONT
48 GND
49 GND
50 SP OFFSET3 From CONT
7-2 LIE-EA0207
CN No. PIN No. Signal Name From/% Remarks
51 SP-OFFSET2
52 SP-OFFSET1 From CONT
53 SP-OFFSET0
54 IGND I
I 55 I GND I 1
56 SP-RENC
57 SP-RENCZ
58 SP-LEC To CONT
59 SP-PULL SP- 711UA control
60 SPLAREA
61 GND
62 GND
63 SP-FRQl
To CONT
64 SP-FRQO
65 SP-SPEED1
66 SP-SPEED0 From CONT
67 SPpUNITON*
I 68 I&D I I
69 GND
70 VCR-VSELl*
To OCNT
71 VCR-VSELO*
72 VCR-SM2*
73 VCR-SM 1”
74 VCR-SMO” From CONT
VCR-STOP”
CN13 ;;
VCR-FSFT*
91 GND
92 COLORSHT*
From CONT Printer shutter
93 BWSHT* I
94 GND
95 GND
96 EXTSYNC TO CONT TC sync
97 GND
98 GND
99 +5.OB
‘From CONT DC power (5.OV)
100 +5.OB
7-3 LlE-EA0207
7.3 Termination of Video Signals
In EUB-6500, video terminals for the monitor and printer are independent each other.
Therefore, every terminal should be terminated when connecting the video device.
Fig. 7.1.2 Connector Arrangement
7-4 151 LlE-EA0207

Section 8 Signal List
8.1 EUB-6500 Basic Unit

8.1.1 PRBSW (PRB, AWP) PCB
.
62A,61D,61B,60E,
60C,60A,59D,59B,
58E,58C,58A,57D,
57B,56E,56C,56A,
55D,55B,54E,54C,
54A,53D,53B,52E,
52C,52A,51D,51B,
50E,50C,50A,49D,
49B,48E,48C,48A,
47D,47B,46E,46C,
46A,45D,45B,44E,
44C,44A,43D,43B,
42E,42C,42A,41D,
41B,40E,40C,40A
2 ADIN-N-=63..0> 114D-114A, OUT DBFl- Ultrasound Reception Signal
112E- 112A, 36B,36A, (Differential voltage output)
llOE-llOA, 33E-33A,
108E- 108A, 30E-30A,
106E- 106A, 27E-27A,
104E- 104A, 24E-24A,
102E- 102C 21E-21A,
102B-102A, 18E- 18A
lOOE- lOOA, DBFB-
98E-98A, 36B,36A,
96E -96A, 33E-33A,
94E-94A, 30E-3OA,
92E-92A, 27E-27A,
90E-90A 24E-24A,
21E-21A,
18E- 18A
3 ADIN-P<63..0> 115D-115A, OUT DBFl- Ultrasound Reception Signal

113E-113A, 37B,37A, (Differential voltage output)
lllE- lllA, 34E-34A,
109E - 109A, 31E-31A,
107E- 107A, 28E-28A,
105E - 105A, 25E-25A,
103E- 103C 22E-22A,
103B- 103A, 19E-19A
lOlE-lOlA, DBFZ-
99E-99A, 37B,37A,
97E-97A, 34E- 34A,
95E-95A, 31E-31A,
93E-93A, 28E-28A,
91E-91A 25E-25A,
22E-22A,
19E- 19A
8-l LlE-EA0207
z=L Signal Name Terminal No. :IN/OUT 1 From/To -r Description
4 ;TCW<31..0> 30C,30A,29D,29B, IN DBFZ- JItrasound transmit signal
15D-15A, or steerable CW
14E-14A,
13E-13A,
12E- 12A,
llE--IlA,
IOE-lOA,
-!-
9E-9C
5 ,TCW-N<Sl..O> 86B,86A, 3uT cw- teerable CW Reception Signal

83E-83A, 35B,35A,
80E-8OA, 32E-32A,
77E-77A, 29E-29A,
74E- 74A, 26E-26A,
71E-7lA, 23E-23A,
68E-68A 19E- 19A,
I16E-16A
6 TCW-P<31..0> 87B,87A IUT Icw- teerable CW Reception Signal
84E-84A, 36B,36A,
SlE--8lA, 33E-33A,
78E- 78A, 30E-30A,
75E- 75A, 27E-27A,
72E-72A, 24E-24A,
69E-69A 20E- ZOA,
17E- 17A
7 SNSRT 33c IN COhT- 10E Thermal voltage for MPTEE.
3 ANGLE 32C IN CONT-10D Angle voltage for MPTEE.
3 THERM 35c IN CONT-1oc Thermal voltage for MPTEE.
0 MP5V 34c OUT CONT-IOB 5V supply voltage for MPTEE.
1 ADfiJST-RET 35A OUT CONT-GE Return voltage of TGC, ATT
4 PCD 37E /OUT ICONT-87

5 PCK 37A
6 TRDIV-N 34A )IN SCENT-GA IT/R switch control (LVDS Net
IPole). Not used.
7 TRDIV-P 135D /IN jC0NT-6~ T/R switch control (LVDS Positive
Pole). Not used.
8 BCLK-N 31E IN CONT.4A 128ns PRBSW clock (LVDS Negative
Pole). This stops at reception timing.
.9 BCLK-P 32E IN CONT-4B 128ns PRBSW clock (LVDS Positive
Pole).
10 PYSYNC-N 34E IN CONT-2A Y-SYNC* (LVDS Negative Pole).
!I PYSYNC-P 35E IN CONT-2B Y-SYNC* &SDS Positive Pole).
12 PTGCCNT-Nl 34B IN CONT.4D Pre-attenuator control (1OV
Differential Negative Pole).
13
t PTGCCNT-Pl 35B IN CONT-4E Pre-attenuator control (1OV
/Differential Positive Pole).
8-2 LlE-EAOZO’i
8-3 LlE-EAOZOi
8.1.2 DBF PCB
DBFl
Signal Name Terminal No. IN/OUT Fro&l’0 Description
iVO.
1 T<31..0> 9B-3A IN AWP- Ultrasound transmit signal
52C,52A,51D,51B,
50E,50C,50A,49D,
49B,48E,48C,48A,
47D,47B,46E,46C,
46A,45D,45B,44E,
44C,44A,43D,43B,
42E,42C,42A,41D,
41B,40E,40C,40A
2 ADIN-N<Sl..O> 36B,36A, IN AWP- Ukrasound reception signal
33E-33A, 102B- 102A,
30E-3OA, lOOE-lOOA,
27E-27A, 98E-98A,
24E-24A, 96E-96A,
21E-21A, 94E-94A,
18E- 18A 92E-92A,
90E-90A
3 ADIN-P<Sl..O> 37B,37A, IN AWP- Ultrasound reception signal
34E-34A, 103B- 103A,
31E-31A, lOlE-lOlA,
28E-28A, 99E-99A,
25E-25A, 97E-97A,
22E-22A, 95E-95A,
19E- 19A 93E-93A,
91E-91A
4 CML<31..0> 38B,38A, IN MB Not Used
35E-35A,
32E- 32A,
29E-29A,
26E-26A,
23E-23A,
20E-20A
5 DBFOJ24-00 82C,84B,84A,83B, OUT DBFZ- Beam-formed signal (COS)
83A,82B,82A,81B, 114E-114A,
81A,BOB,BOA,79B, 113E-113A,
79A,78B,78A,77B, 112E- 112A,
77A,76B,76A,75B. LllE-lllA,
75A,74B,74A,73B, llOE-1lOA
73A
6 DBFO-Q24- 00 84C,96B,96A,95B, OUT DBFZ- Beam-formed signal (SIN)
95A,94B,94A,93B, 109E- 109A,
93A,92B,92A,glB, 108E- lOSA,
91A,90B,90A,89B, 107E- 107A,
89A,88B,88A,87B, 106E- 106A,
87A,86B,86A,85B, 105E- 105A
85A
8-4 LlE-EA0207
IN/OUT From/To Description
IN/OUT CONT- VME Data Bus
BFA23-01 85E,86E,87E,88E,
89E,90E,91E,92E, 93E,94E,95E,96E,
93E,94E,95E,96E, 97E,98E,99E,lOOE,
97E,98E,99E, lOOE, lOlE,102E,l03E,
94D,95D,96D,97D, 104E, 105E, 106E,
98D,99D,lOOD 107E, 108E,102D,
103D,104D,105D,
106D, 107D, 108D
3F-AM5-0 84E,93D,92D,91D, [N CONT- VME AM code
90D,89D 93E,lOlD,lOOD,
99D,98D,97D
iCI<4..0> 91C,9OC,89C, !N DBFZ- Adaptive Data (Not Used)
88C,87C 98B,98A,
197C,97B,97A I
sI<4..0> 96C,95C,94C, :N IDBFS- IAdaptive Data (Not Used)
93c,92c lOOA,
99C,99B,99A,
98C
\CO<4..0> 98B,98A, )uT DBF2- Adaptive Data (Not Used)
97C,97B,97A 91C,9OC,89C,
88C,87C
iSO14..0> lOOA, IUT DBF2- Adaptive Data (Not Used)
99C,99B,99A, 96C,95C,94C,
98C 93c,92c
SF-AS* 188~ N CONT-96D VME Address Strobe
IUT CONT-95D VME Data Acknowledge
N CONT-94D VME Write signal
N lCONT82A,83A IVME Data Strobe
N CONT-9lE System Reset
N CONT-83D Latch Clock
N CONT-82E Transmission / Reception timing
N CONT-102A FPGA Reset
N MB Board control signal
N CONT-74D Transmission 4 times reference
I 1Clock
FO-PO 71E N CONT-74E Transmission 4 times reference
Clock
#2NS-NO 170D N CONT.7OD System Clock
N CONT.70E System Clock
N CONT-54E STAG signal.
)UT CONT-54C JTAG signal.
:OM-TDI I103A N COh’T- 104B STAG signal.
:OM-TMS j102c N CONT. 102C JTAG signal.
8-5 LlE-EA0207
DBF2
GO. Signal Name Terminal No. IN/OUT FlUIlflh Description
1 Tc63..32> 9B-3A OUT AWP- Ultrasound transmit signal
65B,64E,64C,64A,
63D,63B,62E,62C,
62A,61D,61B,60E,
60C,60A,59D,59B,
58E,58C,58A,57D,
57B,56E,56C,56A,
55D,55B,54E,54C,
54A,53D,53B,52E
2 STCW<Sl..O> 15D- 15A, OUT AWP- Ultrasound transmit signal
14E- 14A, 30C,30A,29D,29B, for steerable CW
13E- 13A, 28E,28C,28A,27D,
12E- 12A, 27B,26E,26C,26A,
llE-llA, 25D,25B,24E,24C,
lOE- lOA, 2&23D,23B,22E,
9E-9C 22C,22A,21D,21B,
20E,20C,20A, 19D,
19B,18E, 18C, 18A
3 ADIN-N<63..32> 36B,36A, OUT AWP- Ultrasound reception signal
33E-33A, 114D-114A,
30E-3OA, 112E- 112A,
27E-27A, llOE-HOA,
24E-24A, 108E- 108A,
21E-21A, 106E- 106A,
18E- 18A 104E-104A,
102E-102C
4 ADIN-P<63..32> 37B,37A, OUT AWP- Ultrasound reception signal
34E-34A, 115D- 115A,
31E-31A, 113E- 113A,
28E-28A, lllE- lllA,
25E-25A, 109E- 109A.
22E-22A, 107E- 107A,
19E- 19A 105E- 105A,
103E- 103C
5 CML<:63..32> 38B,38A, OUT MB Not Used
35E-35A,
32E-32A,
29E-29A,
26E-26A,
23E-23A,
20E-20A
6 DBFlJ24-00 82C,84B&A,83B, OUT DVP- Beam-formed signal (COS)
83A,82B,82A,81B, 45E-45A,
81A,80B,80A,79B, 44E-44A,
79A,78B,78A,77B, 43E-43A,
77A,76B,76A,75B, 42E-42A,
75A,74B,74A,73B, 41E-41A
73A
7 DBFl-Q24-00 84C,96B,96A,95B, OUT DVP- Beam-formed signal (SIN)
95A,94B,94A,93B, 50E-50A,
93A,92B,92A,91B, 49E-49A,
91A,90B,90A,89B, 48E-48A,
89A,88B,88A,87B, 47E-47A,
87A,86B,86A,85B, 46E-46A
85A
8-6 LIE-EA0207
95A,94B,94A,93B,
93A,92B,92A,91B,
91A,90B,90A,89B,
89A,88B,88A,87B,
87A,86B,86A,85B,
85A
10 BF-D15-00 82E,81E,80E,79E, IN/OUT CONT- VME Data Bus
78E,77E,76E,75E, 90E,89E,88E,87E,
83D,82D,81D,80D, 86E,85E,84E,83E,
79D,78D,77D,76D 91D,gOD,89D,88D,
87D,86D,85D,84D
11 BF-A23-01 85E,86E,87E,88E, IN CONT- VME Address Bus
89E.90E,91E,92E, 93E,94E,95E,96E,
93E,94E,95E,96E, 97E,98E,99E,lOOE,
97E,98E,99E,lOOE, lOlE,102E, 103E,
94D,95D,96D,97D, 104E, 105E, 106E,
98D,99D, 1OOD 107E.l08E,102D,
103D, 104D,105D,
106D, 107D, 108D
12 BF-AMS-0 84E,93D,92D,91D, IN CONT- VhfE AM code
90D,89D 93E,lOlD,lOOD,
99D,98D,97D
13 ACIc4..0> 91C,9OC,89C, IN DBFl- Adaptive Data (Not Used )
88C,87C 98B,98A,
97C,97B,97A
14 ASI<4..0> 96C,95C,94C, IN DBFl- Adaptive Data (Not Used )
93c,92c lOOA,
99C,99B,99A,
98C
15 AC0<4..0> 98B,98A. OUT DBFl- Adaptive Data (Not Used )
97C,97B,97A 91C,9OC,89C,
88C,87C
16 ASO<4..0> lOOA, OUT DBFI- Adaptive Data (Not Used )
99C,99B,99A, 96C,95C,94C,
98C 93c,92c
I? Dl7 nc* eon T?.LT /lAXEm nf.r\ <?-Km A, I~-- n. I
8-7 LlE-EA020i
No. Signal Name 1 Terminal No. 1 IN/OUT 1 From/To Description
.- --. --_. I--- I---- I
. 18 BFJ.ITACK* )87U IOUT ICONT-95D IVME Data &knowledge
19 @-WRITE* 186~ IN CONT-94D VME Write signal
20 pF-D~i-0* /84D,85D IN CONT.82A,83A VME Data Strobe
21 (USRESET* 183~ IIN CONT-91E &stem Reset
I I I 1Clock
30 4FOJ’l (71E IIN ICONT-75E Transmission 4times reference
Clock
31 32NSpNl 70D IN CONT-7 1D System Clock
32 32NS-Pl 70E IN CONT-71E Svstem Clock
33 DBF2-TCK 102B IN CONT.53E JTAG signal.
34 DBFZ-TDO 103B OUT CONT-53c JTAG signal.
35 C0M.eTDI 103A IN CONT-104B JTAG signal.
36 C0M.eTMS 102c IN CONT- 102c STAG signal.
8-8 LlE-EA0207
8.1.3 DVP PC8
74C,73C,72C,71C, 86,85,88,87,90,89,
78A,77A,76A,75A, 92,91,94,93,96,95,
74A,73A,72A,71A
89C,9OC,91C,92C, 75,76,73,74,71,72,
93C,94C,95C,96C, 69,70,67,68,63,64,
97C,98C,99C, 61,62,59,60,57,58,
lOOC,94A,95A, 55,56,53,54,51
96A,97A,98A,99A,
1OOA
7 AM5-0 84C,93A,89B,88B, IN CN60. VME AM code.

87B,86B 78,77,80,79,82,81 Mainly used for PCB selection.
8 AS* 88A IN CN60-42 ?%lE Address Strobe.

9 DTACK* 86A OUT CN60-24 VME Data Acknowledge.
10 WRITE* 84A IN CN60-38 VME Write signal
11 DSl-0* 82A,83A IN CN60-39,40 VME Data Strobe.
12 SYSRESET* 82C IN CN60-16,45 System Reset. Asserted at power on
5 and software boot.
13 FPGARESET* 102A IN CON’P 102A FPGA reset,
FPGA configuration begins after
FPGARESET* positive edge.
14 32NS-1 67E IN CONT-46A 31.2MHz (32nS) System Clock.
15 64NS.J 67D IN CONT-43A 15.6MHz (64nS) System Clock.
(Not Used)
16 128NS-1 67C IN CONT-40A 7.8MHz (128nSl System Clock.
17 LCK 83D IN CONT-83D Latch Clock
18 Y-SYNC* 82E IN CONT-82E Transmission/Reception timing.
Transmission occurs at Y-SYNC*
LOW section. Basically, Y-SYNC*
positive edge is synchronous to body
surface signal reception.
8-9 LlE-EA0207
17 BEAMl,O 51CJlB IN DBF2-72B,72A Receiving beam control signal
28 RSTART 51A IN DBF2-71B Reception start signal
!9 CFMBEAMl,O 28C,28B OUT DCSP-44C,44B BEAM 0.1 Reception Signal
30 CFMRSTART 28A OUT DCSP-44A Timing Signal for CFM
31 PWRSTART 16A OUT DCSP-45A Reception Timing Slgnal
for Doppler
32 BWBEAM1,O 4C,4B OUT BWDSC- 14B, 14A B, M Timing Signal
$3 BWRSTART 4A OUT DCSP-45B B, M Timing Signal
BWDSC-14D
. . --- ----.. _^_T-. ->. C.-I- -,. *- -.-r. ,-.. .
8- 10 LIE-EA020'i
8.1.4 DSCP PC6
Signal Name 1 %rminalNo. IN/OUT
DCSP-TCK 102B r
COM-TMS 102c IN
COM-TDI 103A IN
DCSP-TDO 103B OUT CONT-49c ]JTAG Signal
D15-00 78C,77C,76C,75C, IN/OUT CN60- IVME Data bus.
74C,73C,72C,71C, 86,85,88,87,90,89,
78A,77A,76A,75A, 92,91,94,93,96,95,
74A,73A,72A,71A 98,97,100,99
-ii- 423-01 85C,86C,87C,88C, IN CN60- VME Address bus.

89C,9OC,91C,92C, 75,76,73,74,71,72,
93C,94C,95C,96C, 69,70,67,68,63,64,
97C,98C,99C, 61,62,59,60,57,58,
lOOC,94A,95A, 55,56,53,54,51
96A,97A,98A,99A,
1OOA
?- 2M5-0 84C,93A,89B,88B, [N ZN60- VME AM code.

I 87B,86B 78,77,80,79,82,81 Mainly used for PCB selection.
Is* 188~ IN =N60-42 VME Address Strobe.

3uT :N60-24 VME Data Acknowledge.
:N ZN60-38 VME Write signal
IN 2N60-39,40 VME Data Strobe.
:N :N60-16,45 System Reset. Asserted at power on
and software boot.
?PGARESET* 102A :N :OIW 102A FPGAreset.
I FPGA configuration begins after
FPGARESET* positive edge.
-N :ONT-46B 3 1.2MHz (32n.S) System Clock.
N :ONT-43B 15.6MHz (64nS) System Clock.
‘N :ONT-40B 7.8MHzc128nS) System Clock.
N IVP- CFM I Data from DVP P.C.B
!2E-21A
!OD - 18A
N WP- CFM Q Data from DVP P.C.B
!7E-26A I
I !5D - 23A
:FMBEAMl,o 44C,44B N )VP-28C,28B BEAM 0,l Reception Signal (Not
E-
-!4 N
N
!5
- N
!6 N
- I (Same with BWSYNC)
!7
- )SCLCK 146~ N :ONT-21B Latch Clock for DSC (Not Used)
!8
- DS* 146~ N :oNT- 16D CFM Calculation Area Signal
!9
- :NAD* (46~ N I :ONT- 16C CFM Calculation Start Signal I
8- 11 LlE-E-40207
No. 1 Signal Name 1 Terminal No. 1 IN/OUT 1 From
I (VELO,VARI,ABS
34 IPW-.I<23..0> /52D-48A ]IN ]DVP-IOD--GA IPW I Data
1 35 IPW_Qc23..0> )57D--53A IIN (DVP-ISD- 11A PW Q Data
1 36 ICW-I-SIG [115D /IN ISTCW-13D CW I Signal
37 CW-Q-SIG 115E IN STCW-13E CW 8 . Sienal
“~-
38 PWRSTART 45A IN DVP-16A Reception Timing Signal for Doppler
39 BWRSTART 45B IN DVP-4A Reception Timing Signal for BW
40 SCRCK 44D IN CONT. 14c Scroll Clock for M and D Mode
4 1 DDOPINT* 97D OUT CONT-2lE Interrupt Signal of Doppler Auto
I I I ICalculation mot Used)
42 LJlT* 79E IN IC0m- 16~ (Reception Signal of PW,CW
43 REWR-B* 79D IN JCOm- 16~ ISignal Stopping Doppler Sound 1
44 FFTSTART* 44E IN CONT-22E FFT Calculation Start Signal
45 FYSYNC* 45c IN CONT-22B Y-SYNC* for FFT
46 DYSYNC* 46C IN CONT-22c Y-SYNC* for Doppler
47 c ‘WADSYNC* )77E IIN (CONT-22D CW A/D clock.
IaFT-IMG<7..0> I105C---O4A IOUT (BWDSC- Doppler Image
36E,36D,36B,36A,
35E.35D.35B.35A I I
49 ZERO 98D OLJT IBWDSC-37A IZero Line Signal
1 50 (PEAK 199D IOLJT IBWDSC-38A IPeak Line Signal
51 MEAN 99E OUT IBWDSC-38B IMean Line Signal I
52 MSAMP-MK 97E OUT IBWDSC-37B ISamole-Marker Sienal I
53 DOP-A* 98E OUT BWDSC-37D Doppler Timing Signal
54 2DYSYNC* 95E IN CONT-2OE Y-SYNC* for Doppler (Not use)
55 VCR-FWD 113D IN MB-CNS-67 FWD Signal from VCR
56 VCR-REV 113E IN MB-CN8-66 REV Signal from VCR
57 FWD 113A OUT MB-CN8-71 FWD Signal to VCR
58 REV 113B OUT MB-CN8-70 REV Signal to VCR
59 SPl 115A OUT MB-CNS l- 1 SP 1 Signal to Speaker
60 SP2 115B OUT MB_CNS2- 1 SP2 Signal to Speaker
8- 12 LlE-EA0207
8.1.5 BWDSC PCB
JTAG Signal
JTAG Signal
5 D15-00 78C,77C,76C,75C, IN/OUT CN60- VME Data bus.
74C,73C,72C,7lC, 86,85,88,87,90,89,
78A,77A,76A,75A, 92,91,94,93,96,95,
74A,73A,72A,71A 98,97,100,99
6 A23-01 85C,86C,87C,88C, IN CN60- VME Address bus.

89C,9OC,91C,92C, 75,76,73,74,71,72,
93C,94C,9%,96C, 69,70,67,68,63,64,
97C,98C,99C, 61,62,59,60,57,58,
lOOC,94A,95A, 55,56,53,54,51
96A,97A,98A,99A,
1OOA
7 AM5-0 84C,93A,89B,88B, IN CN60- iTME AM code.

87B,86B 78,77,80,79,82,81 tiainly used for PCB selection.
8 AS* 88A IN CN60-42 JME Address Strobe.

9 DTACK* 86A OUT CN60-24 JME Data Acknowledge.
10 WRITE* 84A IN CN60-38 i’ME Write signal
11 DSl-0* 82A,83A IN CN60-39,40 m Data Strobe.
12 SYSRESET* 82C IN CN60-16.45 iystem Reset. Asserted at power on
md software boot.
13 FPGARESET* 102A IN CONT-102A ?PGA reset.
?PGA configuration begins after
‘PGARESET* positive edge.
14 32NS-5 67E IN CONT-46E ;1.2MHz (32nS) System Clock.
L5 64NS-5 67D IN CONT-43E 5.6MHz (64nS) System Clock.
16 128NS-5 67C IN CONTm40E .SMHz (128nS) System Clock.
17 BWc7..0> 13E, 13D, 13B, 13A, IN DVP-3C-2A I, M Image Data from DVP
12E, 12D, 12B,12A I
.8 FFT-IMGc7..0> 36E,36D,36B,36A, IN DCSP-36C-35A Doppler Image Data
35E,35D,35B,35A
.9 BWRECA<‘I..O> 16E, 16D, 16B,16A, OUT CINE- I, M, D Image Data to CINE
15E,15D, 15B,15A 16E, 16D, 16B, 16A,
15E, 15D, 15B,15A
10 BWRECB<7..0> 18E, 18D. 18B. 18A. OUT CINE- I, M, D Image Data to CINE
17E,17D.l7B,17A 18E,18D,18B,18A,
17E,17D,17B,17A
I1 BWPLAYA<7..0> 20E,20D,20B,20A, IN CINE- B, M, D Image Data from CINE
19E, 19D, 19B, 19A 20E,20D,20B,20A,
19E, 19D, 19B,19A
12 BWPLAYB<7..0> 22E,22D,22B,22A, IN CINE- B, M, D Image Data from CINE
21E,21D,21B,21A 22E,22D,22B,22A,
21E,21D,21B,21A
8- 13 LlE-EA0207
No. Signal Name Terminal No. IN/OUT FlYim/ro Deacrip tion
23 CFMA<7..0> 24E,24D,24B,24A, IN CFMDSC- Velocity Data from CFMDSC
23E,23D,23B,23A 25C,25B,25A,24E,
24D,24C,24B,24A
24 CFMB<7..0> 26E,26D,26B,26A, IN CFMDSC- Variance or Absolute Data from
25E,25D,25B,25A 27C,27B,27A,26E, CFMDSC
26D,26C,26B26A
25 BWRSTART 14D IN DVP-4A B, M Timing Signal
26 BWBEAM1,O 14B, 14A IN DVP-4C,4B B, M Timing Signal
27 DOP-A* 37D IN DCSP-37D Doppler Timing Signal
28 MSAMP-MK 37B IN DCSP-37B Doppler Sampling Mark Signal
29 ZERO 37A IN DCSP-37A Doppler Zero Line Signal
BW-B and BW-M
37 FMEND* 45A IN CONT-13B US Frame End Signal
38 DUAL 45E IN CONT-14E Selection Signal of Frame Memory

both L and R Side
39 R/L* 45D IN CONT-14D Selection Signal of Frame Memory L
or R Side
40 WXINC 45B IN CONT-14A Increment Signal of Beam Address
(Write) for Frame Memory
41 MlON* 10E IN CONT- 13D Reception Signal of BW-M (For DSC)
42 SCRCK 10D IN CONT- 14c Scroll Clock for M and D Mode
43 R-TRIG 10B IN BIO-1OB ECG R-Wave Trig Signal
44 DlON* 11A IN CONT-13E Reception Signal of PW and CW (For

DSC)
45 LONGM-F/R* 10A IN CINE-27A Signal Meaning Forward or Reverse
Play at Long M Mode
46 O/E* 8D IN CONT- 12E TV Odd/Even Field Signal
~
47 HD* 8B IN CONT-12C TV Horizontal Drive Signal
48 VD* 8A IN CONT-12D TV Vertical Drive
S- 14 LI E-E.40207
measurement for ret
60 PEAKRECB 40D OUT CINE-4 1D Peak data of doppler real time
measurement for ret
61 MEANRECA 39E OUT CINE-40E Mean data of doppler real time
I measurement for ret
62 (MEANRECB 40E ICINE-41E Mean data of doppler real time
measurement for play

70 MEANPLAYB 42E IN CIhX44E Mean data of doppler real time
measurement for play
8- 15 LlE-EA0207
No Signal Name
-Tl BIOcl..O>
72 vsYNc+
CN36-47
73 VSYNC- 83E IN Video Board External Vsync
CN36-48
14 HS+ 86E OUT Video Board TV Horizontal Drive Signal
CN36-45
75 HS- 85E OUT Video Board TV Horizontal Drive Signal
CN36-46
88E OUT Video Board TV Vertical Drive Signal
CN36-43
87E OUT Video Board TV Vertical Drive Signal
CN36-44
90E OUT Video Board 31.2MHz (32nS) System Clock.
I h36-4 i I
i
89E OUT Video Board 31.2MHz (32nS) System Clock.
CN36-42
80 LLC+ 92E OUT Video Board 15.6MHz (64n.S) System Clock.
I (~~36-37
81 LLC- 91E IOUT IVideo Board 115.6MHz (64nS) System Clock.
CN36-38
82 CBCR’i-0+ lOOE,99E,98E, OUT Video Board Digital Video Data
97E,96E,95E,94E, CN36-33,31,29,27,
93E 25,23,21,19
Ei CBCR’I-O- lOOD,99D,98D, OUT Video Board Digital Video Data
97D,96D,95D,94D, CN36-34,32,30,28,
93D 26,24,22,20
84 Y7--0-f 105E. 105D, 105C, OUT Video Board Digital Video Data
105B, 105A. 103E, CN36-17,15,13,11,
103C,lOlE 9, 7, 5,
I 13
85 Y7-o- 104E,104D,104C, IOUT IVideo Board /Digital Video Data
104B,104A,102E, CN36-18.16,14,12, -
102D, 1OlD 10, 8, 6,
4
8- 16 LlE-EA0207
8.1.6 CFMDSC PCB
74C,73C,72C,71C, 86,85,88,87,90,89,
78A,77A,%A,XiA, 92,91,94,93,96,95,
74A,73A,72A,71A
89C,9OC,91C,92C, 75,76,73,74,71,72,
93C,94C,95C,96C, 69,70,67,68,63,64,
61,62,59,60,57,58,
96A,97A,98A,99A,
78,77,80,79,82,81 r PCB selection.
8- 17 LlE-EA0207
ignal of TV Horizontal
B- 18 LiE-EAOZOT
8.1.7 CONT PCB
8i’D,86D,85D,84D 83D 82D 81D 80D,
85E,86E,87E,88E,
lOlE, 102E, 103E, 89E,gOE,glE,92E,
104E. 105E, 106E, 93E,94E,95E,96E,
107E, 108E. 102D, 97E,98E,99E,lOOE,
103D,104D,105D, 94D,95D,96D,97D,
86,85,88,87,90,89,
78A,77A,76A,75A, 92,91,94,93,96,95,
89C,9OC,91C,92C, 75,76,73,74,71,72,
93C,94C,95C,96C, 69,70,67,68,63,64,
61,62,59,60,57,58,
96A,97A,98A.99A,
78,77 80,79,82,81 Mainly used for PCB selection.
VME SYSFAIL*.
23 IBBSY* 171B IIN/OUT ICN60-12 IVME Bus Busy.
S- 19 LlE-EA0207
98B,99B, 1OOB Not used by I&-SOOb.
26 SYSRESET* 82C CN60.16,45 System Reset. Asserted at power
on and software boot.
27 USRESET* 91E DBF1,2-83E, System Reset for DBF and
AWP-38B PRBSW.
28 FPGARESET* 102A OUT DBFl,DBFB,DVP, FPGA reset.
DCSP,BWDSC, FPGA configuration begins after
CFMDSC,CINE,BIO FPGARESET* positive edge.
102A, CWREC-100A
29 LCK 83D OUT DBF1,2-75D. Latch Clock. US beam parameters
DVP-83D is latched previous to Y-SYNC*
assertion.
30 Y-SYNC* 82E OUT DBF1,2-74E, Transmission/Reception timing.
DVP-82E Transmission occurs at Y-SYNC*
LOW section. Basically, Y-SYNC*
,positive edge is synchronous to ,
I I
I I I
body surface signal reception.
-
31 I------
CWULCJ-K-c 1109B IOUT CWREC-91E CWREC control data latch clock.
32 CWXPALD-C* 109c OUT CWREC-94E Not used.
33 CWD-C 1llB OUT CWREC-94D CWREC control data serial signal.
34 CWXPAC”-fl ,,,I-. rrTTm ““‘““,C.g7,, CWREC focus data address clock.
35 CWXPRES-C 1llD OUT CWREC-1OOD
36 CWSYNC-C” 1llE OUT C’WREC-103E
37 CWDCK-C 113B OUT CWREC-91D ~CWREC control data serial clock.
k ~1
38 CWXPSTRB-C 113c OUT CWRE C-97E
39 CWXPD-C 113D OUT CWREC- 1OOE CWREC focus data serial signal.
40 CWADCK-C 113E OUT CWREC-105E
k
41 STBY+ 114c IN CN51-1
42 RPWSW+ 115c OUT CNlZ- 1
43 .+5SB 114E IN POWER-13E,
CN4-5, CNlO-9
44 SPARE0 115B OUT CN80-7 Power off interruption to EUB
software through KBIF.
45 CWBFCK-N 77D OUT CWREC-104A 4 times reference clock for CWREC
(LVDS Negative pole).
46 CW4FCK-P 77E OUT CWREC- 105A 4 times reference clock for CWREC
(LVDS Positive pole).
47 4FO-N1,2 74D,75D,76D OUT DBF1,2-71D Transmission 4 times reference
clock for DBF (Negative pole)
48 4FO-P1,2 74E,75E,76E OUT DBFl,Z-71E Transmission 4 times reference
clock for DBF (Positive pole)
49 32NS-N1,2 70D,71D,72D OUT DBFl,Z-70D DBF 3 1.2MHz (32nS) Clock
(Negative Pole)
50 32NSP1,2 70E,71E,72E OUT DBF1.2.70E DBF 3 1.2MHz (32nS) Clock
(Positive Pole)
8 - 20 LlE-EA0207
I I I I ICFMDSC, BWDSC,~ I
DCSP, DVP
.67E
52 64NS6-1 44D-43A BIO, CINE, 15.6MHz (64nS) System Clock.
CFMDSC. BWDSC,
31E,30E,29E 28E
CINE-26D
67 BWSYNC 21c OUT BWDSC-46E Latch Clock for BWDSC
CINE-26C (Same with CFMSYNC)
68 DSCLCK 21B OUT DCSP-46D Latch Clock for DSC
BWDSC-46D
CFMDSC-21B
CFM-M (For Cine)

78 EXTVS 18E IN BWDSC-27D External Vsync
79 LONGM-F/R* 18D IN CINE-27A Signal Meaning Forward or
Reverse Play at Long M Mode
80 MMDEN* 18C OUT CINE-25D Reception Signal of BW-B and
BW-M (For Cine)
8 - 21 LlE-EA0207
82 MMWRADRLD* 1OUT ICINE-25A ISignal Loading Write Address of
I I I Cme Memory
17E (OUT IBWDSC-44E IL Side SCC Off Signal
CFMDSC- 17E
17D OUT BWDSC-44D R Side SCC Off Signal
CFMDSC- 17D
85 CFMMlON* 17c OUT DCSP-45D Reception Signal of CFM-M
CFMDSC-17C
CINE-24C
86 CFMDEN* 17B OUT DCSP-45E Reception Signal of CFM-B
CFMDSC-17B
CINE-25C
87 ZDS* 16D OUT DCSP-46B CFM Calculation Area Signal
88 CNAD* 16C OUT DCSP2-46A CFM Calculation Start Signal
89 UlT* 16B OUT DCSP-79E Reception Signal of PW,CW
90 U2T* 15D OUT DCSP-80E Reception Signal of PW,CW
91 REWR-B* 16A OUT DCSP-79D Signal Stopping Doppler Sound
92 DUAL 14E OUT BWDSC-45E Selection Signal of Frame Memory
ICFMDSC-14E Iboth L and R Side
93 R/L* 14D IOUT IBWDSC-45D (Selection Signal of Frame Memory
CFMDSC-14D L or R Side
94 SCRCK L4C OUT DCSP-44D Scroll Clock for hl and D Mode
BWDSC- 10D
CFMDSC-14C
GIN-E-24D
BIO- 10D
95 SCCFMEh’D* 14B OUT BWDSC-46A JS Frame End Signal for SCC
CFMDSC- 14B
I ICINE-14B
96 WXINC L4A BWDSC-45B IIncrement Signal of Beam Address
IouT I i(Write) for Frame Memory
97 DlON* 13E OUT BWDSC-11A Reception Signal of PW and CW
CINE-24A (For DSC)
98 DZON* 15E OUT BWDSC- 11D Reception Signal of PW and CW
I CINE-23A (For DSC)
13D OUT BWDSC- 10E Reception Signal of BW-M (For
CINE-24B DSC)
L6E OUT BWDSC-11B Reception Signal of BW-M (For
CINE-23B DSC)
13c OUT BWDSC-46B Reception Signal of BW-B and
BW-M (For DSC)
L3B OUT BWDSC-45A US Frame End Signal
CFMDSC-13B
I ICINE-13B
103 FMSTART* 13A OUT BWDSC-47A US Frame Start Signal
CFMDSC- 13A
CINE-13A
BI0.13A
8 - 22 LlE-EA0207
CFMDSC12E
BIO-12E
BWDSC-BA TV Vertical Drive Signal
CFMDSC-12D
IBIO- 12D !
106 HD* 12c OUT BWDSC-BB TV Horizontal Drive Signal
CFMDSC12C
BIO-12B
107 2HD* 12B OUT I CFMDSC- 12B Half Period Signal of TV
Horizontal Drive
108 SNSRT 10E IN AWP-33C Thermal voltage for MPTEE.
109 ANGLE 10D IN AWP-32C Angle voltage for MPTEE.
110 THERM 1oc IN AWP-35C Thermal voltage for MPTEE.
111 MP5V 10B IN IAWP-34C 5V supply voltage for MPTEE.
AWP-35A Return voltage of TGC, ATT
adjustment.
L4-2(CND6-6) PEN-CW connection status.
Ll-2(CND6- 1) PEN-CW connection status.
AWP-37C CONT to PRBSW serial data.
AWP-38D PRBSW I/O latch clock.
120 PCD AWP-37E PRBSW to CONT serial data.
121 PCK AWP-37A PRBSW I/O serial clock.
122 TRDIV-N AWP-34A T/R switch control (LVDS Negative
I I I Pole). Not used.
123 TRDIV-P 6B OUT AWP-35D T/R switch control (LVDS Positive
Pole). Not used.
124 BCLK-N 4A OUT AWP-3 1E 128ns PRBSW clock (LVDS
Negative Pole). This stops at
reception timing.
125 BCLK-P 4B OUT AWP-32E 128ns PRBSW clock (LVDS
Positive Pole).
126 PYSYNC-N 2A OUT AWP-34E Y-SYNC* (LVTX Negative Pole).
127 PYSYNC-P 2B OUT AWP-35E Y-SYNC* (LVDS Positive Pole).
128 PTGCCNT-N1 4D
_:r
OUT AWP-34B Pre-attenuator control (1OV
I I I
129 PTGCCNT-P1 4E OUT
130 ATGCCNT-Nl 2D OUT

Differential Negative Pole).
lo.:5.ooV.
131 ATGCCNTPl 2E OUT 4WP-33A (Analog-TGC control (1OV
Differential Positive Pole).
0.. +5.oov.
8 - 23 LlE-EA0207
JTJ- Fromfl’o 1 Description
134 IVCR-RREW* 130D (IN (~~8-58 ]VCR Control Signal

135 IVCR-RFF* 129D JIN ICN8-57 IVCR Control Sienal
136 ]vCR-RREC* 128~ /IN 1~~8-55 /VCR Control Signal
137 /VCR-RPAuSE* 127~ IIN (CN8-59 IVCR Control Signal
138 VCR-RPLAY* l26D IN CN8-56 IVCR Control Signal
139 VCR-VSELl* 138C IN CN8-6 1 /VCR Control Signal
140 VCR-VSELO* 137c IN CN8-60 VCR Control Signal
141 VCR-SM2* 36C OUT CN8-51 VCR Control Signal
142 VCR-SMl* 35c OUT CN8-50 VCR Control Signal
143 VCR-SMO* 34c OUT CN8-49 VCR Control Signal
144 VCR-STOP* 33c OUT CN8-52 /VCR Control Signal
145 VCR-FSFT* 32C OUT CN8-63 IVCR Control Sienal I
146 VCR-FEW/‘REW* 31c OUT CN8-53 IVCR Control Signal I
147 VCR REW* 3oc OUT CN8-46 VCR Control Signal
148 VCR-FF* 29c OUT CN8-45 VCR Control Signal
149 VCR-REC* 28C OUT CN8-44 VCR Control Signal
150 VC.R-PAUSE* 27C OUT CN8-48 VCR Control Signal
15 1 VC.R-PLAY* 26C OUT CN8-47 VCR Control Signal
152 COLORSHT* 25C OUT CN8-42 Color Printer Control Signal
153 BWSHT* 24C OUT CN8-4 1 BW Printer Control Signal
154 SP-SPARE21 38B IN/OUT CN8-36 Fujinon mini probe
155 SP_.OFFSET3-0 37B-34B IN CN8-16,17,18.19 Fujinon mini probe
8 - 24 LlE-EA0207
Terminal No.
- -3
54E (
53E (
50E (
49E (IIJT IDCSP-~OZB
48E (IUT IBWDSC-102B JTAG signal.
54D ( JTAG signal.
53D ( STAG signal.
179 DBFl-TDO 54c I STAG signal.
180 DBFZ-TDO 53c I J’I’AG signal.
181 DVP-TDO 5OC I STAG signal.
182 DGSP-TDO 49c I JTAG signal.
183 BWDSC-TDO 18C I mAG signal.
184 CFMDSC-TDO ion I STAG signal.
185 CINE-TDO 19D I JTAG sienal.
186 COM-TDI 104B ( JTAG signal.
ICINE-103A
187 COM-TMS 102c C)UT IDBF1,2, DVP, DCSP, JTAG signal.
188 FIL-TRST 104c C ITAG signal.

189 STVCO-4 iOB-54B C)UT CN3-1, 2, 3, 9. lo Joltage control signal for Steerabl
:W transmission.
8 - 25 LlE-EA020.i
8.2 BIO Unit EZU-EK23
8.2.1 BIO PCB
VME Data bus.

86,85,88,87,90,89,
92.91,94,93,96,95,
61,62,59,60,57,58,
r PCB selection.
8 - 26 LlE-EA0207
8.3 CW Unit EZU-ST4, EZU-CW2
8.3.1 CW PCB
32E-32A, 83E-83A,
29E- 29A, 80E-8OA,
26E-26A, 77E-77A,
23E-23A, 74E-74A,
19E- 19A, 71E-71A,
16E - 16A 58E-58A
4 STCW-P<31..0> 36B,36A, IN AWP-87B,87A Steerable CW Reception Signal
33E-33A, 84E-84A,
30E -3OA, 81E-81A,
27E- 27A, 78E-78A,
24E-24A, 75E-75A,
20E-2OA, 72E-72A,
17E-17A 59E-59A
5 VERCK 103c IN CONT-33D CW Version read out clock.
6 VERLD* 104c IN CONT.34D CW Version mode control.
7 CWVERD 105c OUT CONT-35D CW Version Data (serial
8 CW4FCK-N 104A IN CONT-77D 4 times reference clock for CWREC
I I l(LVDS Negative pole).
9 (CW4FCK-P I105A [ IN (CONT.77E 14 times reference clock for CWREC
(LVDS Positive pole).
10 ICWD-C IN ICONT-1llB Control data (serial)
11 CWDCK-C 91D IN [CONT-113B IShift register clock for control data
12 CWDLCK-C 91E IN ICOh’T 109B IClock to set control data
13 CWXPD-C 1OOE IN ICONT-113D /Beam form data (serial)
I ICWXPSTRB-C 197E IN ICONTl13C Shift register clock for beam form
~3 IcWD-A 193D TN
--. k!ONT-1lnR
---.- -*“-
!4 CWXPALD-A* 93E IN CONT-108C Not used.

!5 CWXPACK-A 96D IN CONT. 1lOC Not used.
!6 CWXPSTRB-A 96E IN CONT.112c Not used.
5 r ICWXPRES-A 199D 1 IN ICONT-HOD INot used.
!8 CWXPD-A 199E 1 IN ICONTl12D INot used.
!9 CWSYNC-A* I102E 1 IN ICONT-1lOE INot used.
8 - 27 LIE-EA0207
8.4 CINE Unit EZU-MM16, MM17
8.4.1 CINE PCB
89C,9OC,91C,92C, 75,76,73,14,71,72,
69,70,67,68,63,64,
61,62,59,60,57,58,
96A,97A,98A,99A,
r PCB selection.
20 VARIPLAY7-0 lOC!-9A OUT CFMDSC- Variance Data for PLAY

lOC-9A
21 ABSREC7-0 32C-31A IN CFMDSC- Absolute Data for REC
32C-31A
22 ABSPIAY7-0 36C-35A OUT CFMDSC- Absolute Data for PLAY
36C-35A
23 CBEAMCHGREC 37A IN CFMDSC-37A Data Enable Signal of
VELOREC,VARIREC, ABSREC
24 CBEAMCHGPLAY 37B OUT CFMDSC-37B Data Enable Signal of
VELOPLAY,VARIPLAY, ABSPLAY
8 - 28 LlE-EA0207
19E, 19D, 19B, 19A
B,M,D Image Data for PLAY

21E 21D 21B 2
8 - 29 LlE-EAOZOi
, ay at Long M Mode
I I I IBI0- 10~ I
64 IR-TRIG 127B IIN IBIO- IOB IECG R-Wave Trig Signal
8 - 30 181 LlE-EA0207
Section 9 Maintenance
. 9.1 Fan Filter Every day 1 Once a week Once a month Others
Clean the dust-proof air filter at the air inlet of power unit located at the bottom front of
equipment. If the filter is choked, the breaker may be cut off or the power unit may possibly
be damaged.
NOTE: l Be sure to turn OFF the power before cleaning the filter.
l Never turn ON the power unless mounting the filter. Dust around the power unit
may enter into it causing a fire.
9.2 Other Maintenance Items

1. Probe Every day Once a week Once a month Others
(1) After using the equipment, use any tissue or soft cloth to completely wipe off jelly stuck
to the probe.
(2) When wiping off the probe, do not use hard paper or cloth.
(3) Put the probe in the probe holder or probe case, and keep it carefully.
(4) Care should be taken not to give strong shock to the probe or drop it.
2. Control Panel Every day 1 Once a week Once a month Others

(1) After using the equipment, turn OFF the power and completely wipe off jelly stuck to the
surface of control panel.
3. System Cabinet Every day Once a week Once a month Others

(1) Before cleaning the system cabinet, turn OFF the power and extract the power cable
from the power outlet.
(2) Use cloth moistened with a neutral detergent to remove stains, and then wipe off it with
soft dry cloth.
NOTE: l Never use organic solvent such as thinner.

l Care should be taken for any liquid such as a detergent not to directly drop on the
equipment.
l When cleaning the equipment, care should be taken no to drop any liquid on the
inside of equipment, probe, probe connector or control panel.
9- 1 LlE-EA0207
4. Monitor
(1) Before cleaning the monitor, turn OFF the power to the main unit and extract the power
cable from the power outlet.
(2) Use cloth supplemented to the equipment to clean the surface of monitor. Use soft
cloth and glass cleaner to wipe off any sticky stains. Use cloth moistened with a
neutral detergent to clean the top and side faces of monitor cover, and then wipe off
them with soft cloth.
NOTE: l Never use organic solvent such as thinner.
l Care should be taken for any liquid such as a detergent not to directly drop on the
equipment.
l Do not use a glass cleaner made of hydrocarbon.
5. VCR
(1) Before cleaning VCR, turn OFF the power to the main unit and extract the power cable
from the power outlet.
(2) Use dry cloth to clean the surface of VCR. Use soft cloth and glass cleaner to wipe off
any sticky stains. Do not use moistened cloth or detergent.
(3) Follow the instruction manual provided by the manufacturer to clean the record/
playback head with the head cleaner specified. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of VCR.
6. Video Printer
(1) Before cleaning the video printer, turn OFF the power to the main unit and extract the
power cable from the power outlet.
(2) Use dry cloth to clean the surface of video printer. Use soft cloth and glass cleaner to
wipe off any sticky stains. Do not use moistened cloth or detergent.
(3) Put the cleaning sheet supplemented to the device, which is specified by the printer
manufacturer, through the printer head to clean it. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of the video printer.
9-2 183 LlE-EA0207

Section 10 Parts List
. 10.1 CART1
%---
I-2
50
49
0%
1 : 51
on
---
lo- 1 LIE-EA0207
10.1 CART1
10 - 2 LlE-EA0207
.---.-_ -
t 1 7320729D
62 17415755A 1 SPEAKER CABLE/6500

I 1 I I
I I
I I I I
10 - 3 LlE-EA0207
10.2 CART1
10 - 4 LlE-EA0207
Table 10.2 CART2
PO’ PARTS NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS

1’ 7319017A TOP SHERED/ 1
2 J839A106 FG CLAMP16500 1
1 3 t 7319215E 1 CORE/6500 I 1 I
4 1 7510155A 1 MB PCB/6500 1
1 5 1 7319013A 1 TOP SHAdIS/ 1
6 1 7319014A 1 BOTTOM SHASSIS16500 1
I I CAD nl3lT
1 7 1 1481564B 1 RALL GUIDE 3.5MM
8 J8991105 RALL GUIDE 50-6030 22
9 7416598A SHEILED PLATE/6500 2
10 7319015A PCB COVER6500 1
11 7416827A PCB COVER FAN SET/6500 1
12 1475231A FAN NET/6500 1
I
1 13 i7415787A i FCB RUB&%/6500 1 1 1
14 ) 7319016A 1 BOTTOM FAN PLATE/6500 I 1 1 1

15 7416828A BOTTOM-FAN SET/6500 1
16 74 16604A PS COVER/6500 1
17 J836AO48 GND TERMJNAL 1 I
18 7416602A MT PANEL/6500 1
19 58320206 OUTLET 82 1O-I 1
20 J839A124 CABLE CLIP 1
22 1 7215984B 1REAR COVER/U%900
29 1 7415963A 1 PRB BOTTOM SUPPORT/65tipI
I 1
1
lo- 5 LlE-EA0207
10.3 KEYBOARD
lo- 6 LlE-EA0207
Table 10.3 KEYBOARD
LIE-EA0207
10.4 PC UNIT
10 - 8 LIE-EA0207
Table 10.4 PC UNIT
LlE-EA0207
10.5 COVER
10 - 10 LlE.EA0207
Table 10.5 COVER
LlE-EA0207
10.6 PCB
8-
Q 0 21
10 - 12 LlE-EA0207
Table 10.6 PCB
LlE-EA0207
10.7 ACCESSORIES
l $9.
[ is?,
!
10 - 14 LlE-EA0207
Table 10.7 ACCESSORIES
10 - 15 LlE-EA0207
10.8 MONITOR
10 - 16 LlE-EAOzoi
Table 10.8 MONITOR
10 - 17 200 LlE-EA0207
Model EUB-6500
TECHNICAL GUIDE
--- Installation ---

Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EA02 12- 1
CON??IDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi

Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or reproduced
without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation
Copyright Hitachi medical Corporation 2002. All rights reserved.
Note to users EUB-6500mstallation
This technical guide is a manual to install the EUB-6500 ultrasound scanner and its peripheral
devices top tion) .
Since the authorized service engineer will carry out installation of this system, please hand over
this Technical Guide to him.
Contents
Section 1 InstallationofStandardComposition . . . . . . . ..-.......‘.I............. 1-1
Section 2 *nstallationofPCPrinter ‘.‘.l.~~‘~~.‘.~(ll~.~~....._~II.~_~.._~.I~ll 2-1
3-1
Section 3 Installation ofvideo Printer . . . . I. ). . . . I, . . . . . . . I. _, . 1.. , _. I.
Section 4 Installation of Analog Color Printer 4-1
Section 5 Installation of Digital Color Printer 5-1
Section 6 Installation of Video Cassette Recorder--- .’ .’ ‘. “‘. .” .‘. 6-1
Section 7 Installation of MINI-PROBE Interface Unit (EZU-MS6) ~~~~.~~~

~~~.~~~
.~~.~..~~~.~..
7-l
Section 8 Cable Connection with Scanner Unit in Combination with Options’...........’ 8-l
Section 9 Installation of Steerable CW Doppler Unit (EZUST4) ....... ‘... .. ....‘. ... 9-1
Section 10 Installation of Single element CW Doppler Unit (EZU-C!WZ> .. 10-l
Section 1.1 Installation of Cine Memory Unit (EZU-MM16,17) 11-l
Section 12 Installation of Biosignal Gating Unit (EZU-EK23) .‘.. 12-1
Section 13 Installation of SCSI card (EZU-Pi0 “’ ““. ., 13-l
Section 14 Installation of Probe hanger Unit (EZU-TH4) .. ‘....-... 14-1
Section 15 Release of Option protect on payment 15-1
Appendix..- Appendix- 1
Section 1 Installation of Standard Composition
1.1 Packing list
(1) Main unit . . . . . . . . . . I . . . . . . . . . . , . , l
(2) Display monitor (EZU-MT24-Sl) . I I . ’j . 1

(3) Probe hanger. . . . . I , . . . L . .. . . .. . 1
(4)Ultrasoundjelly.~~~ ... ._... .........._.. _..I_, ._.. 2
(5) Dustcover I....... I ., r . . . . . . .,.I. ., ..,, . . . .. 1
(6) Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . t lset
(7) 3.5 inch MO disk . . ., r . . . t . _ 1

(8) VCR caSe . I. I. I.. . . . ..I . . . . . . .. . . . . . 1
(9) V(-iR caSe plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._........... 1
(10) M3 screw (for video printer) ~ ’ . ’ . . . 1. ’ 4

(11) urea Screw.. . . . I.. . . .. .. 4
(12) Belt . . . I . . . . . , ^ . . 6
(13) Option fiving rubber . ’ . . . I . I II .*4

(14) Cable chp . . . . . . . . . I. . . . . 4
(15) (Toad band . I ... . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . 5
(16) Cabletie .. ‘, _-_. . . (_.._.._....I.. .,._,__I ___ 10
(17) Hexagon wrench (M6) (for monitor fixation) . f . 1

(18) Hexagon wrench (M4) (for power unit cover removal). 1
l-l L2E-EA0212
1.2 installation of Monitor display
1.2.1 Detaching Covers
(1) Remove the probe hanger knob, the top cover and the rear cover.
Probe,hanger knob
n/
Urea screw Top cover
I
KL M4 screw
.
Rear cover
Fig.l-1
l-2 L2E-EA0212
1.2.2 Mounting the monitor display
(1) Loosen four hexagon socket head bolts with the supplied hexagon wrench.
(2) Put the monitor and tied with the hexagon wrench.
(3) It is wired for the power cable and the signal cable.
(4) Two cables are passed through the core, and the FG clamp is wound around the signal cable
and fixed.
(5) Install the cover in the same way.
(6) Mount the Probe hanger.
Monitor display
Core
[ @&&& FGclamp
\ Signal cable
Hexagon socke
head bolt
Signal cable
Power cable
Fig. l-2
l-3 LZE-EA0212
1.3 Installation of the cable clip
(1) The probe cable can be fixed when a cable clip is installed on the back of the panel base.
Install it after you ask a customer the existence of the necessity.
(But, the space disappears by the construction of option loading, and it may not be able to be
installed.)
Cab 1
Pane 1 base
3robe cable
1.4 Entry procedure of needle guide line data
Registration of the needle guideline is essential to patient safety.

Therefore, the registration data is not disclosed to the user and the registration must be
carried out by a Hitachi engineer or authorized dealer’s engineer at installation of the
equipment or when the user obtains the probe.
[For registration of needle guideline, refer to Technical Guide (Installation) (LZE-FPO 128)l
1.5 Operation Check
After completion of the mounting work, referring to the instruction manual checks that the
function can be normally operated.
1.6 Necessary Tools

(1) Screwdriver . , . . . . . . . . 1
(2) Hexagon wrench (M6) . * . . . 1 (EUB-6500 accessory)
1-4 L2E-EA0212
Section 2 Installation of PC Printer
2.1 Detaching Covers

(1) Remove the rear cover, rear plate and connector cover.
Conn ector cove

“M4 screw
Fig.2- 1
2.2 Cable connection with main unit
(1) PC printer and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.2-2.
Front panel
,I
Fig.2-2
Cable Connection of PC printer cables
7
Main unit PC printer Cable name
LINE OUTPUT
Power cable
(Front panel)
CN91
Printer cable
(Rear panel)
2-l L2E-EA0212
2.3 Setting place of the PC printer
(1) When connecting the PC printer with EUB-6500, the PC printer must be
placed out side of the Patient Environment to avoid an electrical shock .
Regarding the Patient Environment, IEC 60601-l-l Safety requirements for
medical electrical systems describes for the area which is shown in Fig.2-3.
Fig. 2-3
<CAUTION>
Make sure to use the PC printer wnicn complies with IEC Publication
60950 Standard (Safety of information processing equipment including the
equipment for office use> or IEC Publication 60601-l Standard (Safety of
medical electrical equipment).
<WARNING>
To avoid a danger of electrical shock, never place the PC printer to be
connected with EUB-6500 within the area of the Patient Environment.
2-2 L?E-EA0212
2.4 Installing Printer Driver
(1) Overview
To install the printer driver, the explorer needs to be displayed on the system.
(2) Installing the printer driver

Q After checking if the power to the main unit is OFF, turn on the power to the main
unit.
@ The booting screen of the main unit appears after starting OS.
At this time, press the “E” key while pressing the “Ctrl” key and “Ah” key. This
displays the Explorer dialog
NOTICE: This operation needs to carry out while the booting screen is displayed. If it
could not be carried out, turn off the power to main unit and turn on again,
and then retry the same procedure.
@ After the Explorer dialog is displayed, insert FD having the printer driver into the
FD drive.
NOTICE: Refer to the instruction manual supplemented to the PC printer for installing
the printer driver.
@ For installation procedure of the printer driver, refer to the instruction manual of the
PC printer purchased.
j @a Cl
: E! @ Removable Disk [D:]
: 43 Control Panel
aaalia
& Network Neighborhood
c
7.d Recycle Bin
I?opiidfs)., ’
Fig.2.4
2.5 Checking Operation *

(1) When completing all steps, check if functions work normally while referring to the
instruction manual (Appendix AA) of EUB-6500.
(2) Make sure that the PC printer can print image by pressing button on the
scanner unit.
2-3 LZE-EA0212
Section 3 Installation of Video Printer
3.1 Installation of Video Printer

(1) Remove three fixing screws of the video printer.
(2) Remove the connector cover.
(3) Fix a video printer on the option base with M3 screws which are accessories ofthe
main unit.
(4) Connect the cables to the main unit as shown in Fig.3-2.
(5) Bundle the cables and put the covers back.
Printer fixing screw
or cover
Fig.3- 1
3-l L2E-EA0212
(1) Video printer and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.3-2.
Setting 75 QZimpedance) selection switch to ON.
Rear panel of Video printer Front panel
Fig.3-2
Cable Connection of Video printer cables
Main unit Video printer Cable name

LINE OUTPUT AC IN Power cable
PRINTER VIDEO IN BNC cable
PRINTER B/W REMOTE Stereo mini cable
3-2 LZE-EA02 12
Section 4 Installation of Analog Color Printer
4.1 Installation of Analog Color Printer

(2) Connect the cables to the main unit. (Refer to 4.3 chapter)
(3) Fix the analog color printer on the option base with the belt which are accessories of the
main unit.
Analog color printer
Connector cover
Fig.4- 1
4-l LZE-EA02 12
x<A H SONY : UP- 1800MD/EPM, 1850MD/EPM, 28OOP, 285OP, 2900MD, 2950MD
(1) Analog color printer and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.4-2 .
(For the printer to be installed in combination with video cassette recorder, refer to Section 8.)
Rear panel of Analog color printer
(UP-18OOMr!!pM, 185OMD/?CFM)

(UP-28OOP, 285OP. 2900MD. 295Oh4D)
Front panel
Fig.4-2
Cable Connection of Analog color printer cables
Main unit Option unit Cable name
LINE OUTPUT Power cable
VCR-Y/C (IN) OUT (S-VIDEO) Video signal cable
G terminal- S terminal
VCR-Y/C (OUT) INPUT (S-VIDEO) cable for S-VHS)
PRINTER-COLOR REMOTE Print remote cable
4-2 L2E-EAO212
(( B )) Mitsubishi: CP700U/700E
(For the printer to be installed in combination with video cassette recorder, refer to Section 8.)

(CP-700UJ700E)
1 IN OUT I
F&.4-3

LINE OUTPUT AC LINE Power cable
VCR -Y/C (IN) S-VIDEO (OUT) Video signal cable
(S terminal-S terminal
VCR-Y/C (OUT) S-VIDEO (IN) cable for S-VHS)
I PRINTER-COLOR I REMOTE I Print remote cord I
4-3 L2E-EA02 12
(( C )) Polaroid (UK) Ltd.: TX1300SE
(For the printer to be installed in combination with video cassette recorder, refer to Section 8.1

(TX1300SE)
VI DED
IN
RS-232C PARALLEL
INTERFACE
Fig.4-4
I I
c LINE OUTPUT
VCR-Y/C (IN)
I
S-VIDEO(Y/C)
AC IN
(OUT)
I Power cable
Video signal cable
(S terminal - S terminal
VCR-Y/C (OUT) S-VIDEO(Y/C) (IN)
cable for S-VFW
Grounding terminal Grounding cable

I I
PRINTER-COLOR REMOTE Remote cable I
4-4 L2E-EA0212
Section 5 Installation of Digital Color Printer
Install SCSI card (EZU-Pill, before install Digital color printer. (( Refer to Section 13 1)
And in the case that the SCSI card is install at the time of shipment, do not install
the printer driver because it as already been install.
5.1 Installation of Digital Color Printer

(3) Fix the digital color printer on the option base with the belt which are accessories of the
main unit.
Digital color printer
Belt \
Option base \\\
Con 7ector cover
Fig.5.1
5-l L2E-EA0212
((A H SONY : D2600S
(1) Digital color printer and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.52 .
/ ’ ON 4
~SCSCSI
2 1
1
ID
0
Rear panel of \ OFF 0 0 0
Digital color printer\
(UP-D2600S) -i--l
Rear pane 1
18qzz
Front pane 1
Fig.52
Cable Connection of Digital color printer cables

LINE OUTPUT
AC LINE Power cable
( Front panel 1
SCSI card ( EZU-Pi1 > SCSI cable
SCSI
( Rear panel 1 ( EZU-Pi1 )
I / I I
5-2 L2E-EA0212
(( B 1) Mitsubishi: CP770DW with SB770
(1) Digital color printer and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.53 .
Rear panel
Front panel
Fig.5-3
Cable Connection of Digital color printer cables
Power cable
L.2E-EA0212
5.3 Install of SCSI printer driver
To the scanner unit has the SCSI card(EZU-Pil), start the SCSI card driver, install of SCSI printer
driver, release of option protect for SCSI printer.
Prepare “Authentic Dick”:FD(supplied with the scanner unit) and “SCSI printer
driver”:FD(MitsubishiCP770DW with SB770 or SONYXJP-D2600S&upplied with the SCSI card),
and make sure installation of SCSI card(EZU-Pil).
53.1 Start the SCSI card driver.

(1) Start the scanner unit.
(2) Push “Ctrl”key,“Alt”key and “E”key when express the logobitmap, and start the
0 Explore.
(3) Select “Control Panel “ on the Explore.
(4) Select “Devices “ on the Control Panel.
(5) Express “Devices” on dialog box.(Refer to Fig 5-4).
‘3Com Diagnostic Communication MI ‘Started Manual

,Abiosdsk Disabled
AFD Networking Support Environm~ Started Automatic
Ahal 54x DisaMed
Aha174x Disabled
aic78xx Boot
‘Always Disabled
amiOnt Disabled
amsint Disabled
qp?:,T’”
1
.T,l/&,;,%‘
Fig 5-4
(6)Change “Startup Type(@)” on dialog box.
Show “Device(O)” requires modification and “Startup Type(a)”
(Refer to table 5-l).
Table 5- 1 Startup Type of each Device

Device Startup type
aic78xx Boot
Aspi Automatic 1
5-4 LZE-EA0212
(7)How to establish the Startup ‘lope on “Device”.
l&elect “Device (@I” required modification on “Device”.
2)Click “Startup(@)“, express “Device” on dialog box(Refer to Fig 5-5).
Dcyicg.. 3Gnn3C3OxAdapkBCD&ei
_, ‘:..” .
1
Refer to table
8-3.
3)Refer to table 5- 1, and select “Startup Type “ on each Device.

4)Click “OK”.
5) Repeat l)-4) until selecting “Startup me” on each Device.
6)Click “Close” on “Devices” of dialog box (Refer to Fig 5-4).
(8)Push “Ctrl”key, “Alt”key and “Del”key, express “WindowsNT Security”
on dialogbox.
WindowsNT Security 1‘!:
1 Logon Information .-I
m 7) 1 Shutdod
l’lg S-b
(9)Click “Shotdown” on dialog box (Refer to Fig 5-6).
S-5 LZE-EA0212
(10)Express “Shutdown Computer” on dialog box. Select “Shutdown”
,and click “OK”.(Refer to Fig 5-7).
Shutdown Computer c
@ Shutdown
I
Fig 5-7
(ll>Wait to express “Shutdown Computer”.
Shutdown Computer
:
., ,,’
-,, It is now safe to turn off your computer

~
I
Fig 5-8
(12)After express “Shotdown Computer”,switch OFF on left side ofthe scanner unit.
5-6 L2E-EA02 12
5.3.2 Install of SCSI printer driver
* If connect degital color printer (MitsubishiCP770DW with SB770),

refer to section 5.3.2.1.
* If connect degitalcolor printer (SONYUP-D2600S), refer to sction 5.3.2.2.
Note : Use the SCSI printer driver supplied with the SCSI card(EZU-Pil).
5.3.2.1 Install SCSI printer driver(MitsubishiCP77ODW with SB770)
(1)Make sure connect digital color printer(MitsubishiCP77ODW with SB770) to

the scanner unit, switch ON on the digital color printer (MitsubishiCP770DW
with SB770).
(2)Switch ON, start the scanner unit.
(3)Express the logobitmap, and push “Ctrl’key, “Alt”key and “E”key soon.
Start “Explore”(Refer to Fig 5-9).
Accessibility Options @?0DBC

My Computer Add/Remove Programs *PC Card (PCMCIA)
1
: B GZI 3% Floppy [A:] Console
Select ; i3.a [C:] Date/Time
4. ;’ ;;yy;isk tDd Devices

Display e SCSI Adapters
Fonts & Server
2 Network Neighborhood
Internet #IS ekes
Recycle Btn
Keyboard g sounds
..w My Briefcase
Modems &J system
Mouse s Tape Devices
Multimedia 4 Telephony
Network g3 UPS
Fig 5-9
5-7 L2E-EA0212
(4)Select “Printers” on “Explore”, express “window of Printers” .
Select “Add Printer”.
Select
I
jl ob+ct(sj .^. 2
Fig 5 10
6)Express “Add Printer Wizard” on dialog box.

Make sure select “My computer”,and select “Next>“.
Fig 5-11
5-8 L2E-EA0212
(6)Select “LPTI” on Port of “Available ports” listbox.
ISelect port.
-1
fD-&,-‘_ I
_ _--- Local Port
‘,’ ‘. @ LPT2 Local Port
q LPT3: Local Port
,I, fi COMl: Local Port
0 COM2: Local Port
I
lion
Fig 5 12
(7)Set the SCSI printer driver(MitsubishiCP77ODW with SB770).

select “Have Disk.. . ” _
*
4a
fu
‘I’
AGFA+IccuS~~ ~523
Apple AGFAAccuSetSF 62.3
APS-PS AGFAAccuSet 800
AST AGFAAccuSet 800SF ~52.3
AT&T AGFAAccuSet 800s F ~2013.108
-’ Brother AGFA-AccuSet 1000
~yll, ‘ ,.. =I
Fig 5- 13
5-9 L2E-EA0212
(8) Click “OK”.
I
Fig 5- 14
(9)Make sure select “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)” on list of “Printers”, and select “Next>“.
Fig 5- 15
5- 10 L2E-EA0212
(10)Make sure select “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)” on Printer name, and select “Next>“.
.‘. _’ _. ,‘“_ ‘. .“, I
.’
,’
Fig 5-16
5-11 UEXA0212
(11)Make sure select “Not shared”,and select “Next>“.
IT '.I
,,"i
I
Fig 5- 17
(12) 'C:t “No” , and click “Finish” .
I “,::“,.*
Fig 5- 18
5 - 12 L2E-EA02 12
(13)Finish “Add Printer Wizard” on dialog box.
Wait to express icon of “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI >”
on the “window of Printers”. Then select that icon.
Fig 5 19
(14)Express “window of MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)” .
Select “Properties “ on the menu.
Fig 5-20
5- 13 LZE-EA0212
(15)Express “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI) Properties” on dialog box.
Select “Ports tab”, select “CP770D(2:03)” on the list and click “OK”.
iI LPT2: Local Port

0 LPT3: Local Port
q COMl: Local Port
1q COM2: Local Port
Fig 5-21
(16)Select icon of “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)”

_____
.._.____._..__ _____ - .._..-. . .._ - ..-...
Fig 5-22
5- 14 L2E-EA0212
(17)Make sure click “Print Test Page” , and print.
_.
t4lTSUBlSHIcPrmo(SCSi)
_: .’
_., .^
.” : ..I ” , r:
MITSUBISHI CP770D[SCSl)
“..
Fig 5-23
5- 15 L2E-EA0212
(18)Express fig 8-25,cIick ‘Yes”.
Fig 5-24
(19)Put out the SCSI printer driver(MitsubishiCP77ODW with SB770).

(2O)Push “Ctrl”key, “Alf’key and “DeI”key, express “Window&T Security”
on the dialog box.
WindowsNT Security 1
Fig 5-25
(2 1)Click “Shutdown” on dialog box.
5 - 16 L2E-EA0212
(22)Express “Shutdown Computer” on dialog box.
Select “Shutdown”,click “OK”.
Shutdown Computer m
@ Shutdown
pg pi-j
Fig 5-26
(23)Wait to express “Shutdown Computer” on dialog box.
1 Shutdown Computer
I Restart 1
Fig 5-27
(24)Express the dialog box, and switch OFF on the left side of the scanner unit.
5- 17 L2E-EA0212
5.3.2.2 Install SCSI printer driver(SONYUP-D2600S)
( 1) Make sure connect digital color printer(SONYUP-D2600S) to the scanner unit, switch ON
on the digital color printer (SONYUP-D26OOS).
(2)Switch ON, start the scanner unit .
(3lExpress the logobitmap, and push “Ctrl”key, “Alt”key and “E”key soon.
Start “Explore’TRefer to Fig 5-28 )
Control Panel
QFddUS
,z E? 3% Floppy (A:]
I Select : zl a
E .a
(C:]
Removable Disk [D:]
G @!J Network Neighborhood

4
b& Recycle Bin
-a My Briefcase
Fig 5-28
(4)Select “Printers” on “Explore”, express “window of Printers” .

Select “Add Printer”.
Fig 5-29
S- 18 L2E-EA0212
(5)Express “Add Printer Wizard” on dialog box.
Make sure select “My computer”,and select “Next>“.
/
I
_-%i:
1 ,. <:.,
;_” ‘.’
.,L ‘1
Fig 5-30
(G&elect “Add Port...” .
;Desaiption if+&
Local Port
0 LPT2: Local Port
0 L,,T3: Local Port
q COMl: Local Port
0 COM2: Local Port
5 COM3: Local Port ZJ)
Fig 5-3 1
5 - 19 L2E-EA0212
(7)Express “Printer Ports” on dialog box.
Set the SCSI printer driver(SONY : UP-D2600S), select “New Monitor.. .” .
Fig 5-32
@Express “Installing Print Monitor” oti dialog box.

Input “a:\” in “Copy file fi-om:” (Refer to Fig 5-33).
Click “OK”.
“i
,+.,,, . .
I.
’ ;, ‘: ‘, ; _.^
,‘: ‘_, “ ‘,,
*j&&iesffarr
;
I
‘_. a:\
, r
Fig 5-33
5 - 20 L2E-EA0212
(9)Express “Printer Port” on dialog box,select “New Port” .
Fig 5-34
(10)Express “Add Port - UP-D2600S Moniter” on dialog box.
Input “UPD2600S” in “Prot Name’TRefer to Fig 5-35).
Click “OK”.
-.. -_ _. -. ._ _... _. -. __ ..^ _~., .._._ _...
” ., ,. _ _
. .‘
Fig 5-35
5 -21 L2E-EA0212
(11)Express “Printer Ports” on dialog box, select”Close” .
Make sure check “Port “UPD2600S” ” on “Available Prots” ,and click “Next>” .
pat *I : D~&&J,,
E Updir;oos:a UP-D260OS ..,
E LPTl: Local Port
0 LPT2: Local Port
0 LPT3: Local Port
0 COMl: Local Port
n COMZ: Local Port
5 - 22 L2E-EA0212
(13)Click “Have Disk...” .
AGFA-Acarset ~523
AGFA-AccuSetSF ~52.3
I
APS -PS AG FA-AccuS et 800
AST AGFAAccuSet 800SF ~52.3
AT&T AGFAAccuSet 800SF ~2013.108
AG FA-AccuS et 1000
Fig 5-38
(14)Express “Install From Disk” on dialog box.

Make sure of be “A:\” in “Copy manufacturer’s files from:” (Refer to Fig 5-39)
Click “OK”.
4
Fig 5-39
5 -23 L2E-EA0212
(15)Select “Sony UP-D2600S” on “Printers:” of “Add Printer Wizard” dialog
box, click “Next>” .
Fig 5-40
(16)Express “Sony UP-D2600S” on “Printer Name:” , click “Next>” .
Fig 5-41
5 - 24 L2E-EA0212
(17)Make sure select “Not shared” , click “Next>” .
“. .
,. ,, , .’ ’ ‘.
,
Fig 5-42
(18)Make sure select “Yes(recommended)” ,click “Finish” .
5 - 25 L2E-EA0212
(19)Action test printing.
Express Fig 544,click ‘Yes”.
Fig 5-44
(20)Put
~~ out the SCSI printer driver(SONYUP-D2600S).
(2 1)Push “Ctrl”key, “Alt”key and “Del”key, express “WindowsNT Security”
on the dialog box.
WindowsNT Security El
1 Logon information ,-I
Fig 5-45
(22)Click “Shutdown” on dialog box.(Refer to Fig 5-45 >
5 - 26 LZE-EA0212
(23)Express “Shutdown Computer” on dialog box.
Select “Shutdown”,click “OK”.
Shutdown Computer a
@ Shutdown
Fig 5-46
(24)Wait to express “Shutdown Computer” on dialog box.
Shutdown Computer
I
EliI It is now safe to turn off your computer
Fig 5-47
(25)Express the dialog box, and switch OFF on the left side of the scanner unit.
5.3.3 Release of option protect.
(11Refer to section 15 release option protect, release protect.

(2)After release of option protect,wait to start the scanner unit automatrically.
(3)Push “Main Menu’key on keyboard, and select menu(“Setup”+“Print Key”)
,make sure express “PrinterGCSI)” on menu of “Print Key”.
(4)Switch OFF to the scanner unit.
5 - 27 L2E-EA0212
5.4 Establishment SCSI printer
5.4.1 Establishment Print Key
(1)Push “Main Menu”key on the keyboard.

(2)Select “Setup” +“Print/REC Key” on “Main Menu”,express “Print/REC Assignment” menu
(3)Select “SCSI Printer” on “Print/REC Assignment”menu.
Ppplicabion...
,,@.#._1
,‘.i ?Afwf. .JI .
system 7
3cp r.“eni: f Measure...
*LEf? :.*:;:I; v Annotation...
Display v
Measure...
lmapeMem. w
ImageFiling...
Recorder :
Physiology 7
7 I ImageFiling...
Peripherals v
BackupData 7
F Auto Freeze r- RECl :.. _ _. :
3D...
imagePrint,. The scanner unit has
UserKeys... . SCSI Card(EZU-PiI)
-I
Fig 5-48
5 - 28 L2E-EAOZ 12
5.42 Select SCSI printer and regulate quality of image
It is necessary to select SCSI printer and printer.
WPush “Main Menu” on the keyboard.

(2)Select menu(“Setup”+” Peripherals”+” Printer&XI)“) on “Main Menu”.
The scanner unit has

SCSI Card(EZU-Pi 1)
Fig 5-49
(3)Express the dialog box of “Printer(SCSI1”.

(4)Click the listbox on “Select Printer”.
(5)Select SCSI printer for connection.
(6)After select, click “OK”.
, I.i ^.
; ;. ._ ,: 2; : 7.’ ,_ .:
:-. . _, >‘.‘) : j
, “;l,
.. ,I- “j
- .. ’
I”j
Green I”j ; _. . 1 1 .Btighttness .
1 _” :
Fig 5-50
5 - 29 L2E-EA0212
5.4.3 Requlate
quality of image for digital color printer
(Mitsubishi : CP770DW with SB770)
Select TAB on dialog box of “Printer(SCSI)“, requlate quality of image.
(l&elect TAB” MITSUBISHI CP’i’iOD(SCSI)” on the dialog box of “Printer(SCS1)“.

Express head regulate quality of image in the digital color printer(Mitsubishi :
CP770DW with SB770).
(2)Select this head, be able to change .
:.. ; *_
. 3.
>‘
i /
Fig 5-51
l)Red, Green, Blue :

Regulate Level of RGB(limits:+ 128- - 128).
2)Contrast :
Regulate Level of contrast(limits: -I- 128- - 128).
3)Brightness :
Regulate Level of brightness(limits: + 128- - 128).
(3)Regulate quality of image by each printer.
(Example : If red is in deep color, select “-“ side on red).
(4)If click “Reset”, reset (in early level).
(5lIf click “Cancel”,cancel the level until clicking “OK”.
(6)If select all head, click “OK”. Keep all head.
5.5 Operating check
(1) After completion of all the worksreferring to the instruction manual of

the EUB-6500, check that all the functions can be normally operated.
5 - 30 L2E-EA0212
Section 6 installation of Video Cassette Recorder
6.1 Detaching Covers

(1) Remove the connector cover and the bumper.
(2) Connect the cables to the main unit. (Refer to 6.3 chapter)
(3) Case plate is fixed, and the belt is passed through the main unit.
Connector cover
screw
Fig.G- 1
6-l L2E-EA0212
6.2 Installation of Video Cassette Recorder
(1) Video Cassette Recorder is fixed with the belt, and a cable is connected. (Refer to 6.3 chapter)
(2) Fix the connector cover and the VCR case.
r cover
ase
0 Urea scTew
Fig.6-2
6-2 LZE-EAOZ 12
(( A )) SONY : SVO-9500MDMDP
(1) Video Cassette Recorder and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.6-3 .
(For the Video Cassette Recorder printer to be installed in combination with Analog color printer,
refer to Section 8.1 Rear panel of VCR
(SVO-95OOMD/MDP)
- 0‘” EZU-RO 1
I VCR remote
m control ca ble
Jl * (00 t i on)
Front pane 1
Fig.6-3
Cable Connection of Video Cassette Recorder (SONY : SVO-9500MDMDP)
VCR-Y/C (OUT) VIDEO IN-S VIDEO Video signal cable

VCR-Y/C ( IN) VIDEO OUT-S VIDEO cable for S-VHS)
EZU-ROl cable
VCR-CONT REMOTE t34P) (option) *
I I
DOP-F (IN) I AUDIO OUT (CH-l/L) t
DOP-F (OUT) AUDIO IN (CH- l/L) Stereo AUDIO

cable
DOP-R (IN) AUDIO OUT @H-2/R)
DOP-R (OUT) I AUDIO IN (CH-2/R) I
NOTE: The cable marked with * is required for remote control from the keyboard on the
main unit.
6-3 L2E-EA0212
(<B )) PANASONIC : AG-MD830/E
(1) Video Cassette Recorder and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.6-4 .
(For the Video Cassette Recorder printer to be installed in combination with Analog color printer,
refer to Section 8.) Rear panel of VCR
(AG-MD830/E)
EZU -ROl
VCR remote
con trol ca ble
(op tion)
Front panel
Fig.6-4
Cable Connection of Video Cassette Recorder (PANASONIC : AG-MD830/E)

VCR-Y/C (OUT) INPUT-S VIDEO Video signal cable
VCR-Y/C ( IN) OUTPUT-S VIDEO cable for S-VI-IS)
EZU-RO 1 cable
VCR-CONT REMOTE (34P)
(option) *
DOP-F (IN) OUTPUT-AUDIO-CHl
DOP-F (OUT) INPUT-AUDIO-CH 1 Stereo AUDIO
DOP-R (IN) OUTPUT-AUDIO-CH2 cable
DOP-R (OUT) INPUT-AUDIOCH2
NOTE: The cable marked with * is required for remote control from the keyboard on the
main unit.
6-4 L2E-EA0212
Section 7 Installation of MINI-PROBE Interface Unit (EZU-MS6)
7.1 Packing list (from EUB-6500 packing lists)

(1) *~rJl~Ji-yI~ DISK ., , 1
(Protection release work is to use DISK which is surely being packed in this unit.)
(( Refer to Section 15 ))
(2) Signal cable . 11, ,I , ... , 1. I . I . 1
(3) Block cOre I I. .I. .. .1
. . . . . . . ..‘.........I,..,...,.. 1
(4) M4 screw
p$) FG clamp .. . . 1
7.1 Mounting the block core and the FG clamp
(1) The block core is installed in the power cable, and the FG clamp is installed in the signal cable.
Mini-probe eystemSP-711
(manufactured by FUJINON@)
Mini-probe system
SP-711
(manufactured by
FUJ INON@ )
M4 screw
(Suppliedwith
PO
Block core
(Supplied wit
Fig.‘i- 1
7-l L2E-EA02 I2
7.2 Installation of MINI-PROBE system (SP-711 UA)
(3) Fix the MINI-PROBE system on the tray with the belt which are accessories of the main unit.
Mini-probe systemSP-711
(manufactured by FUJINON@
taccsessory
Connector cover
Fig.7-2
7-2 LZE-EA0212
(1) MINI-PROBE system and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.7-3.
Mini-probe syst.emSP-711
(manufactured by FUJINON@)
Front pane 1
Fig.7-3
Cable Connection of MINI-PROBE system

MPIF I/O connector Signal cable
7-3 LZE-EA0212
7.4 Confirming MINI-PROBE system
Follow the steps below to confirm that the MINI-PROBE software has been successfully installed.
If not installed correctly, execute working of release. (Refer to section 15)
(1) Press the Main Menu key, and select Setup + Application from the Main Menu. When a
dialog appears, press the “Edit Data” button.
(2) Select “Other” from the left box and click V at the right side of “Probe Selection”.
(3) If “MINI-PROBE” can be seen in the list box displayed, MINI-PROBE application
software has been correctly installed.
bMenu
.i MMenu
/ DMenu
’ CFM Menu
j Display
; Annotate
i Measure
“i BodyMark
--..I-
!I : ‘s,.,...u,,.. -.+f: t.-’ 1,-a- .___
Fig.‘i-4
7-4 L2E-EA0212
Section 8 Cable Connection with Scanner Unit in Combination with
Options
8.1 Cable concoction of analog color printer (SONY: UP-1 800MD/EPM 1850MD/EPM)
and video cassette recorder (SONY: SVO-9500MD/MDP) with scanner unit
(1) Connect the cables to the front panel according to Table 8-1,2 and 3.
Table 8- 1 Cable Connection between Scanner Unit and

Video Cassette Recorder (VSO-9500MDMDP)
Video cassette recorder

Scanner unit Cable name
(SVO-950MDMDP)

VCR-Y/C ( IN) VIDEO OUTS VIDEO cable for S-VHS)
EZU-RO 1 cable
(option) *
DOP-F (IN) AUDIO OUT (CH-l/L)
DOP-F (OUT) AUDIO IN (CH-l/L> Stereo AUDIO
DOP-R (IN) AUDIO OUT (CH-2/R) cable
DOP-R (OUT) AUDIO IN (CH-2/R)
NOTICE: The cable marked with * is required for remote control from the keyboard
on the scanner unit.
Table 8-2 Cable Connection between Video Cassette Recorder (SVO-9500MDMDP)

and Analog Color Printer (UP- 1800MD/EPM, 1850MD/EPMl
Video cassette recorder Analog color printer

Cable name
(SVO-9500MD/-MDP) (UP- 1800MD/EPM, 1850MD/EPM)
Video signal cable
VIDEO IN-S VIDEO INPUT-S-VIDEO (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VHS) _
Table 8-3 Cable Connection between Scanner Unit and

Analog Color Printer (UP- 1800MD/EPM, 1850MD/EPM)

(UP-1800MD/EPM, 1850MD/EPM)

PRINTER-COLOR REMOTE Print remote cord
8- 1 L2E-EA02 12
RearpanelofAnalog color printer
(UP-180OMD/EPM, 185OMD/EPM)
Rear pane1ofVCR
(sv0--9500MD/MDP)
EZU-RO1
/ VCR remote
control CB ble
(option)
Front panel
Fig.8- 1
8- 2 LJE-EA0212
8.2 Cable connection of analog color printer (SONY: UP-28OOP, 285OP, 2900MD, 2950MD)
(1) Connect the cables to the front panel according to Table 8-4, 5 and 6.

Video Cassette Recorder (SVO-9500MDMDP)

(SVO-SFiC)MWMl-lP‘)
LINE OUTPUT AC IN Power cable _

VCR-Y/C ( IN) VIDEO OUT-S VIDEO cable for S-VHS) _
EZU-ROl cable I
(option) *
DOP-F (IN) AUDIO OUT (CH- l/L)
DOP-R (IN) AUDIO OUT (CH-Z/R) cable
DOP-R (OUT) AUDIO IN (CH-2/R)

and Analog Color Printer (UP-2800P 2850P 2900MD 2950MD)

Cable name
(SVO-9500MDMDP) (UP-2800P 2850P 2900MD 2950MD)
Video signal cable

VIDEO IN-S VIDEO INPUT-S-VIDEO (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VI-IS)

Analog Color Printer (UP-2800P 2850P 2900MD 2950MD)

(UP-2800P 2850P 2900MD 2950MD)

8- 3 UE-EA0212
Rearpanelof Analog color printer
(UP-28OOP, 285OP, 29OOMD, 2950MD)
RearpanelofVCR
(SW-9500MD/MDP)
I
VCR remote
control cable
Front panel
Fig.&2
8- 4 L2E-EA02 12
8.3 Cable connection of analog color printer (Mitsubishi: CP-700UjE)
and video cassette recorder (SONY SVO-9500MD/MDP) with scanner unit
Video Cassette Recorder (SVO-9500MD/MDP)

(SVO-9500MDMDP)
I I I
VCR-Y/C (OUT) 7JIDEO INSmE Video signal cable
I (S terminal - S terminal
VCR-Y/C ( IN) VIDEO OUT-S VIDEO cable for S-VI-IS) _
I
EZU-ROl cable I
(option) *
DOP-F (IN) AUDIO OUT @H-l/L)
DOP-F (OUT) AUDIO IN (CH- l/L> Stereo AUDIO
DOP-R (IN) AUDIO OUT @H-Z/R) cable
DOP-R (OUT) AUDIO IN @H-B/R)

and Analog Color Printer (CP-7OOU/E)
Video cassette recorder Color printer

Cable name
(SVO-9500MDNDP) (CP-7OOUIE) 4
Video signal cable
VIDEO IN-S VIDEO S-VIDEO (IN) (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VI-IS)

Analog Color Printer (CP-7OOU/E)

(CP-7OOU/E)
8- 5 L2E-EA0212
(CP-700U/700E)
Rear panel ofVCR

(SW-95OOMD/MDP)
r
.EZU-RO 1
VCR remote
control cable
(opt ion)
.ne 1
Fig.B-3
8- 6 L2E-EA02 12
8.4 Cable connection of analog color printer (Polaroid (UK) Ltd.: TX1 300SE)

Video Cassette Recorder (SVO-9500MDMDP)

(SVO-9500MDMDP)

VCR-Y/C ( IN) VIDEO OUT-S VIDEO
cable for S-VHS)
VCR-CONT REMOTE (34P) EZU-ROl cable

(option) *
DOP-F (IN) AUDIO OUT (CH- l/L)
DOP-R (IN) AUDIO OUT @H-B/R) cable
DOP-R (OUT) AUDIO IN @H-Z/R)
Table 8-11 Cable Connection between Video Cassette Recorder (SVO-95OOMDMDP)

and Analog Color Printer (TX1300SE)
I I I I
Cableb name
(SVO-9500MDMDP) (TX1300SE)
Video signal cable

VIDEO IN-S VIDEO S-VIDEO (Y/C)(IN) (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VHS)
Grounding terminal Grounding cable

Analog Color Printer (TX1300SE)
I I I I
(TX 1300SE)

I
1 PRINTER-COLOR j REMOTE Remote cable
a- 7 LZE-EA0212
(TX1300SE)
, I
PA111111
IYTKlPACl
Rear panel ofVCR

(SVO-95OOMD/h4DP)
I
r
EZU-ROl
VCR remote
control ca ble
(option)
I L t this
-ditch
J
//
\ I
1 to OFF.
750
Front panel
Fig.B-4
8- 8 LZE-EA021 2
8.5 Cable concoction of analog color printer (SONY UP-1 800MD/EPM 1850MD/EPM)
and video cassette recorder (PANASONIC: AG-MD830/E) with scanner unit

Video Cassette Recorder (AG-MD830/E)

(AG-MD830/E)
Video signal cable
VCR-Y/C (OUT) INPUTS VIDEO (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VHS)
EZU-ROl cable
(option) *
DOP-F (OUT) INPUT-AUDIO-CHl Stereo AUDIO
DOP-R (IN) OUTPUT-AUDIOCH2 cable
DOP-R (OUT) INPUT-AUDIO-CH2
Table 8-14 Cable Connection between Video Cassette Recorder &G-MD83009

and Analog Color Printer (UP- 1800MD/EPM, 1850MD/EPM)

Cable name
(AG-MD830/E) (UP- 1800MD/EPM, 1850MD/EPM)
Video signal cable

OUTPUT-S VIDEO INPUT-S-VIDEO (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-W-IS)

Analog Color Printer (UP- 1800MD/EPM, 1850MD/EPM))

(UP-lBOOMD/EPM, 1850MD/EPM)

Video signal cable
VCR-Y/C (IN) i OUTPUTS-VIDEO (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VHS)
s- 9 L2E-EA0212
Rear panel ofAnalog color printer
(UP--i800~/EPh~, 1850h412/md)
Rs-23x
n ON
a Ill/IIII
I
OFF
AC IN
Set this switch to ON.
Rear panel of VCR

(AC-MD830/E)
EZU -ROl
VCR *emote
con trol cable
Cop tion)
Front pane 1
Fig.85
8- 10 L2E-EA02 12
8.6 Cable connection of analog color printer (SONY UP-2800P 2850P 2900MD 2950MD)

Video Cassette Recorder
(AG-MD830/E)
I I I
(AG-MD830/E) ,
cable for S-VHS)
EZU-ROl cable
(option) *

Table 8- 17 Cable Connection between Video Cassette Recorder (AG-MD830/E)

and Analog Color Printer (UP-28OOP 285OP 2900MD 2950MD)

Cable name
(AG-MD830/E) (UP-2800P 2850P 2900MD 2950MD)
Video signal cable
OUTPUT-S VIDEO INPUT-S-VIDEO (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VFW

Color Printer (UP-2800P 2850P 2900MD 2950MD)

(UP-2800P 2850P 2900MD 2950MD)

Video signal cable
VCR-Y/C (IN) OUTPUT-S-VIDEO (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VI%)
8- 11 L2E-EA0212
Rearpanelof Analog color printer
(UP-28OOP, 285OP. 29OOMD, 2950MD)
4 IN
Rear panelofVCR
(AG--MD83O/E)
EZU-ROL
VCR remote
control cable
(option)
\
Front pane 1
Fig.8-6
8- 12 L2E-EA02 I2
8.7 Cable connection of analog color printer (Mitsubishi: CP-700U/E)
(1) Connect the cables to the f?ont panel according to Table 8-19, 20 and 21.


(AG-MD830/E)

Video signal cable
VCR-Y/C (OUT) INPUTS VIDEO (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VHS)
EZLT-RO 1 cable
(option) *
DOP:F (OUT) INPUT-AUDIO-CHl Stereo AUDIO
Table 8-20 Cable Connection between Video Cassette Recorder (AG-MD830/E)

and Analog Color Printer (CP7OOU/E)

Cable name
(AG-MD830/El (CP7OOWE1
Video signal cable

OUTPUTS VIDEO S-VIDEO (IN) (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VHS)
Table 8-21 Cable Connection between Scanner Unit and Color Printer (CP7OOU/E)

(CP7OOU/E)

Video signal cable
VCR-Y/C (IN) S-VIDEO (OUT) tS terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VHS)
8- 13 L2E-EA0212
(CP-700U/700E)
Rear panel of VCR

(AG-MD83O/E)
EZU-RO
VCR remote
r
control cable
(opt ion)
\
Fig.8-7
8- 14 L2E-EAO212
/
8.8 Cable connection of analog color printer (Polaroid (UK) Ltd.: TX1 300SE)
(1) Connect the cables to the front panel according to Table 8-22,23 and 24.


(AG-MD830/E)
cable for S-VHS)
EZTJ-RO 1 cable
(option) *
DOP-R (IN) OUTPUTAUDIOCH2 cable
Table 8-23 Cable Connection between Video Cassette Recorder (AG-MD830/E)

and Analog Color Printer (TX1300SE)

Cable name
(AG-MD830/E) (TX 1300SE)
I
Video signal cable
OUTPUT-S VIDEO S-VIDEO (Y/C)(IN) (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VI-W

Color Printer (TX1300SE)
II
- (TX 1300SEJ

Video signal cable
VCR-Y/C (IN) S-VIDEO (Y/C)(OUT) (S terminal - S terminal
cable for S-VHS)
8- 15 L2E-EA0212
Rear panel of Analog c olorprinter
HI,
(TX1300SE)
Rear panelofVCR
(AGMD830,‘E)
EZU
VCR remote
con trol cable
COP
Fig.8.8
S- 16 LZE-EA0212
Section 9 Installation of Steerable CW Doppler Unit (EZU-ST4)
9.1 Packing list

(1) (-4WEC P(-TB , , 1. ‘ . . ,1
(2) (-lWBUF p(l-j . 1
9.2 Mounting Steerable CW Doppler Unit
(1) Remove the PCB fixing plate. (Refer to Appendix 1.)

(2) Remove the Probe unit and remove the Probe shield R.
(3) The CWBUF PCB IS
’ installed in the AWP PCB and mount the Probe unit.
(4) Mount the CWREC PCB. 1 SLOT No.3 1
(5) Mount the PCB fxing plate (Refer to Appendix 1.)
Probe Shield R
Fig.S- I
9-l L2E-EA02 I2
Section 10 Installation of Single element CW Doppler Unit (EZU-CW2)
10.1 Packing list

(1) Cw-REC P(lB .. .., . . . I I ‘ , . 1. I l
10.2 Mounting CWREC PCB

(2) Mount the CWREC PCB. 1 SLOT No.3 I
(3) Mount the PCB fix’ mg plate (Refer to Appendix 1.1
CWREC PCB
Fig.lO-I
10 - 1 L2E-EA0212
Section 11 Installation of Cine Memory Unit (EZU-MM16,17)
11 .l Packing list
(1) (lIW P(-lB . .. . . . .. .I. ‘. . 1
11.2 Mounting CINE PCB
(2) Mount the CINE PCB. [ SLOT No.11 1

(3) Mount the PCB fixing plate (Refer to Appendix 1.)
PCB
Fig.ll-I
11-1 L2E-EA02 12
Section 12 Installation of Biosignal Gating Unit (EZU-EK23)
12.1 Packing list

(1) ECG connector box . 1. . . 1~I . . . . *. ‘. 1
(2) BIO P(lB . . . . . . I . .. 1
(3) *CG cable . . . . .. . 1
(4) ECG clip I . I .I . . . .. . .. , , . . . .. . . 3
12.2 Mounting Biosignal Gating Unit
(1) Remove the PCB &ing plate. (Refer to Appendix 1.)

(2) Mount the BIO PCB and CNBL cable is connected. [ SLOT No.12 I
(3) CNB3 cable is connected to the ECG connector box, and it is installed in the main unit.
(4) Mount the PCB fixing plate (Refer to Appendix 1.)
ECG blind plate/k/ \

I !
BIO PCB
ECGconnector box
Fig.lZ-1
12- 1 L2E-EA0212
Section 13 Installation of SCSI card (EZU-Pil)
13.1 Packing list (from EUB-6500 packing lists)

(1) SCSI card , , . , . , > , ‘ . , . , I , . I . . 1
(2) SCSI cable ‘ , . 1
(3) SCSI printer driver (Mitsubishi : CP770DW with SB770) 1
(4) SCSI printer driver (SONY : UP-D2600S) .’ . . 1 . . 1I 1

,.~....‘,.....,‘..~I....,,,.,.,.,,..,.
(5) M 3 screw 1
13.2 Mounting SCSI card
(1) Remove the Top cover. (Refer to Appendix 2.)
(2) Mount the SCSI card. [ SLOT No.“A” 1

(3) Connect the SISI cable.
(4) Mount the Top cover. (Refer to Appendix 2.)
* Installation of printer driver. <(:Refer to Section 5 ))

w
SCSI card
It ismoved through
‘the core to this position.
Front blind
SCSI cable Fig.13.1
13 - 1 UE-EA0212
Section 14 Installation of Probe hanger unit (EZU-TH4)
14.2 Mounting Probe hanger unit
(1) Remove the Probe hanger knob.
(2) Probe hanger base of Probe hanger unit is installed in the main unit.
(3) Remove the Probe hanger.
Probe hanger knob

( It isn’t used. )-
lit
Probehangerunit
L2E-EA0212
Section 15 Release of Option protect on payment
Be able to release option protect on payment.

Be able to release plural option protect on the scanner unit.
15.1 Parts of setting

(1)
15.2 Working of release

(1) Start up the scanner unit.
(21 Set the AUTHENTIC DISK to the scanner unit.
(3) Push “Main Menu” key on keyboard and select menu(“Setup”+“System”” -+ Entry Opt.“)in
“Main Menu”
(4) Release option protect automatically and express IConfirmationJ on success.
(Refer to Fig 15-l).
If not express IConGrmationJ . Make sure of the AUTHENTIC DISK.
Fig. 15- 1
(5) Put out the AUTHENTIC DISK to the scanner unit.
(6) Click “OK” in rConfirmationj .
(7) Restart the scanner unit automatically.
(8) Make sure movement of each option with the scanner unit.
NOTICE: Keep the latest AUTHENTIC DISK. When software is to be reinstalled,

all options are inhibited. To enable options, execute the latest AUTHENTIC DISK again.
15- 1 L2E-EA0212
Appendix
1. Assmbling PCB fixing plate
M4
\
f
PCB fix “9 P late
4
pd
)1:“..I
Rear cover
2. Assmbling Top cover

4
AUrea scr ew
PC unit
Top cover
Connector cover
\
screw
cover
Appendix - 1 76 L2E-EA0212
Three-Dimensional Display Software
EZU-3D2, 3D2S
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EZ0216-3
CONFIDENTIALITY: This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi Medical

Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or reproduced without the prior
written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2002. All rights reserved.
Preface
Our service personnel shall install this software. Please hand over this technical guide to our service personnel.
CONTENTS
Page
Section 1 Installing 3D software................................................................................................................. 1 - 1
1.1 Installing Windows NT network service ......................................................................................... 1 - 1

1.2 Installing Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a ................................................................................... 1 - 7
1.3 Installing 3D software ..................................................................................................................... 1 - 10
1.4 Starting Device and Service ............................................................................................................ 1 - 13
1.5 Unprotecting options for pay and confirmation............................................................................... 1 - 18
1.6 Updating 3D software...................................................................................................................... 1 - 19
Section 2 Installation of Three-Dimensional Display Software(EZU-3D2S).......................................... 2 - 1
2.1 Necessary tools................................................................................................................................ 2 - 1

2.2 Packing list ...................................................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.3 Setting DIP SWITCH of Flock of Bird unit .................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.4 Assembling magnetic transmitter stand........................................................................................... 2 - 4
2.5 Wiring CRT SYNC cable ................................................................................................................ 2 - 4
2.6 Removing cover .............................................................................................................................. 2 - 5
2.7 Wiring cables................................................................................................................................... 2 - 6
2.8 Installing Flock of Birds unit........................................................................................................... 2 - 7
2.9 Installing magnetic sensor ............................................................................................................... 2 - 8
(1) 1 L2E-EZ0216
Section 1 Installing 3D Software
If this software has been already installed when delivered, skip this work of installation.
To install EZU-3D2 or EZU-3D2S software, EZU-Pi3 must have been installed in advance.
If the additional option is only EZU-3D2 or both EZU-3D2 and EZU-3D2S, perform the work from Paragraph 1.1
to 1.5. If the additional option is only EZU-3D2S, perform the work in Paragraph 1.5, omitting Paragraph 1.1 ～
1.4.
When installing EZU-Pi2 into the system in which EZU-3D2 has been installed, carry out its installation work
first, and then perform the work in paragraphs 1.1, 1.2, 1.4 and (8) in Paragraph 1.5 (Unprotecting options for pay
and confirmation).
When you update EZU-3D2 and EZU-3D2S, the work in paragraph 1.6 must be performed. Then, since the data
files are saved in F drive, you don’t need to shelter them in case of version-up.
Necessary parts
EZU-3D2 INSTALL MO ................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Installing Windows NT network service

TCP/IP is used to transfer data between the main unit software and 3D software. This needs to setup the
network service.
(1) Turn on the power to the ultrasound scanner. When booting Windows NT (OS) is followed by the
software start screen, press the E key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt key to open the Explorer.
(2) Insert the EZU-3D2 INSTALL MO into the MO drive.
1-1 L2E-EZ0216
(3) Open “Control Panel” from the Explorer and double click “Network”.
Fig. 1-1
(4) When the “Network” dialog box opens, select the Service tag and press the Add button. The dialog
“Select Network Service” appears.
Fig. 1-2
1-2 L2E-EZ0216
(5) Select Remote Access Service from the Network Service box in dialog “Select Network Service” and
press the OK button to display the “Windows NT Setup” dialog box.
Fig. 1-3
(6) In case of the main system being English version, enter “D:\English I386\” into the Edit box in “Windows
NT Setup” dialog and press the Continue. In case of the main system being French version, enter
“D:\French I386\” into the Edit box in “Installation de Windows NT” dialog and press the Continuer
button.
English version French version

Fig. 1-4
(7) Then if the dialog “Remote Access Service Setup” is displayed, select the Yes button.
Fig. 1-5
1-3 L2E-EZ0216
(8) When the dialog “Install New Modem” is displayed, check the check box of “Don’t detect my modem…”
and press the Next button.
Fig. 1-6
(9) Select “Standard Modem Types” from “Manufacturers:” and “Standard 14400 bps Modem” from
“Models” then press the Next button.
Fig. 1-7
1-4 L2E-EZ0216
(10) Check “Selected ports” of “On which ports do you want to install it?” and select “COM2” from the box
then press the Next button.
Fig. 1-8
(11) Press the Finish button to close the dialog.
Fig. 1-9
(12) The dialog “Add RAS Device” is displayed. Confirm that “COM2 Standard 14400 bps Modem” has
been selected for RAS Capable Devices: and press the OK button to close the dialog.
Fig. 1-10
(13) Confirm that Port is “COM2”, Device is “Standard 14400 bps Modem” and Type is “Modem
1-5 L2E-EZ0216
[unimodem]” then press the Continue button.
Fig. 1-11
(14) Confirm that “Remote Access Service” has been added to Network Service in the dialog “Network” and
press the Close button to close the dialog.
Fig. 1-12
(15) The dialog “Network Settings Change” is displayed. Press the No button not to reboot the system.
Fig. 1-13
1.2 Installing WindowsNT 4.0 Service Pack 6a
(1) In case of the main system being English version, open Removable Disk [D:] of My Computer on the
1-6 L2E-EZ0216
explorer and double click “NTServicePack” in “English Service Pack” folder.
Fig. 1-14
In case of the main system being French version, open Disque amovible [D:] of Poste de travail and
double click “Sp6i386” in “French Service Pack” folder.
Fig. 1-15
1-7 L2E-EZ0216
(2) A dialog “Extracting Files” is displayed. Wait a while until “WindowsNT Service Pack Setup” opens.
Fig. 1-16
(3) Press the OK button when the dialog “WindowsNT Service Pack Setup” opens.
Fig. 1-17
(4) Check “Accept the License Agreement [must accept before installing the service pack]” and press the
Install button.
Fig. 1-18
1-8 L2E-EZ0216
(5) A dialog in which two progress bars are displayed appears. Wait until the progress bar of “Overall
Progress” is completed. In process of installation, the dialog “Windows NT Service Pack Setup” which
means that Service Pack 6 overwrites Service Pack 4 appears. Then, proceed to press Yes button.
Fig 1-19
(6) When the progress bar of “Overall Progress” is completed, the Restart button appears. Press the button
to reboot the system.
Fig 1-20
(7) After rebooting Windows NT (OS), the dialog ” Service Control Manager” shown in Fig. 1-21 is
displayed. Wait till displaying the software start screen without operating the dialog “Service Control
Manager”. If the software start screen is displayed, press Enter key on the start screen. Then press the E
key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt key to open the Explorer. Press OK button in dialog “Service
Control Manager”.
Fig. 1-21
1-9 L2E-EZ0216
1.3 Installing 3D software
(1) Open Removable Disk [D:] of My Computer in the Explorer and execute Setup in it.
Fig. 1-22
(2) When the dialog “Welcome” appears, press the Next button.
Fig. 1-23
1 - 10 L2E-EZ0216
(3) When the dialog “Software License Agreement” is displayed, press the Yes button.
Fig. 1-24
(4) When the dialog “Choose Destination Location” is displayed, confirm that Destination Folder is
“C:\3d\L3Di” and press the Next button. The system starts copying files. Wait while the system
copies files.
Fig. 1-25
1 - 11 L2E-EZ0216
(5) As soon as completing copy, the dialog “Setup Complete” is displayed. Check “No, I will restart
computer later.” and press the Finish button.
Fig. 1-26
(6) Open Removable Disk [D:] of My Computer in the Explorer. If “Tool for 3D” exists, execute it. If it
doesn’t exist, proceed to 1.4.
Fig. 1-27
(7) When The dialog ”Tool for 3D” is appeared, press OK button and wait till the dialog is closed
automatically.
1 - 12 L2E-EZ0216
1.4 Starting Device and Service
The following work may have been already performed when installing software such as EZU-Pi2. If no
setting needs to be changed, proceed to the next step.
(1) Open “Control Panel” from the Explorer and double click “Devices”.
Fig. 1-28
(2) The dialog “Devices” is displayed.
② ①
Fig. 1-29
1 - 13 L2E-EZ0216
(3) Change Startup Type (①) displayed in this dialog. Table 1-1 shows Device (②) need to change and its
Startup Type.
Table 1-1 Startup Type of Each Device
Device Startup Type

AFD Networking Support Environmer Automatic
TCP/IP Service Automatic
(4) The following shows how to set Startup Type.
a) Select Device (②) to be changed from the dialog “Devices”.
b) Press the Startup button (③). The dialog “Device” is displayed (See Fig. 1-30).
Select according to
Startup Type
Fig. 1-30
c) Select Startup Type according to Startup Type in Table 1-1 [Startup Type of Each Device].
d) Press the OK button.
e) Repeat steps a) ~ d) for all Devices shown in Table 1-1 [Startup Type of Each Device].
f) Press the Close button of the dialog “Devices” (See Fig. 1-29).
(5) Double click “Services” from “Control Panel”.
1 - 14 L2E-EZ0216
(6) The dialog “Services” is displayed.
②
③
Fig. 1-31
(7) Change Startup Type (①) displayed in the dialog “Services”. Table 1-2 shows Service (②) need to
change and its Startup Type.
Table 1-2 Startup Type of Each Service
Service Startup Type

Server Automatic
Workstation Automatic
(8) The following shows how to set Startup Type of Service.
a) Select Service (②) to be changed from the dialog “Services”.
b) Press the Startup button (③). The dialog “Service” (See Fig. 1-32) is displayed.
1 - 15 L2E-EZ0216
Select according to
Startup Type
Fig. 1-32
c) Select Startup Type according to Startup Type of Table 1-2 [Startup Type of Each Service].
d) Press the OK button.
e) Repeat steps a) ~ d) for all Services shown in Table 1-2 [Startup Type of Each Service].
f) Press the Close button of the dialog “Services” (See Fig. 1-31).
(9) Press the Del key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt key to display the dialog “WindowsNT Security”.
WindowsNT Security
Logon Information
Shutdown
Fig. 1-33
(10) Press the Shutdown button displayed on the dialog.
1 - 16 L2E-EZ0216
(11) The dialog “Shutdown Computer” is displayed. Select “Shutdown” and press the OK button.
Shutdown Computer
Shutdown
Shutdown and Power off
OK Cancel
Fig. 1-34
(12) Wait until the dialog “Shutdown Computer” appears.
Shutdown Computer
Restart
Fig. 1-35
(13) When the dialog appears, remove the MO disk and turn the breaker switch OFF (at the side of main unit).
1 - 17 L2E-EZ0216
1.5 Unprotecting options for pay and confirmation
This work unprotects the EZU-3D2 option and EZU-3D2S option incorporated into main unit.
Parts to be prepared
AUTHENTIC DISK (Accessory EZU-3D2, EZU-3D2S) ......................................１
Unprotecting work
(1) Boot the main unit.
(2) Insert the AUTHENTIC DISK.
(3) Press the Main Menu key and select Setup Æ System Æ Entry Opt. from the Main Menu.
(4) Options are automatically unprotected. If succeeded, the dialog “Confirmation” is displayed as
shown in Fig. 1-36. If not displayed, the AUTHENTIC DISK could not be the accessory to the main
unit. Check the product ID of the system in AUTHENTIC DISK.
The dialog confirmation
Fig. 1-36
(5) Take out the AUTHENTIC DISK.

(6) Press the “OK” button of the dialog “Confirmation”.
(7) The system is rebooted automatically.
(8) Press the Main Menu key and confirm that “3D” is displayed in black letters on the Setup Menu of
Main Menu.
(9) Turn off the power of main unit.
1 - 18 L2E-EZ0216
1.6 Updating 3D software
(1) Turn on the power to the ultrasound scanner. When booting Windows NT (OS) is followed by the
software start screen, press the E key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt key to open the Explorer.
(2) Insert the EZU-3D2 INSTALL MO into the MO drive.
(3) Open Removable Disk [D:] of My Computer in the Explorer. Execute “Tool for 3D” in it.
Fig. 1-37
(4) When The dialog ”Tool for 3D” is appeared, press OK button and wait till the dialog is closed
automatically.
(5) Press the Del key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt key to display the dialog “WindowsNT Security”.
WindowsNT Security
Logon Information
Shutdown
Fig. 1-38
(6) Press the Shutdown button displayed on the dialog.
(7) The dialog “Shutdown Computer” is displayed. Select “Shutdown” and press the OK button.
1 - 19 L2E-EZ0216
Shutdown Computer
Shutdown
OK Cancel
Fig. 1-39
(8) Wait until the dialog “Shutdown Computer” appears.
Shutdown Computer
Restart
Fig. 1-40
(9) When the dialog appears, remove the MO disk and turn the breaker switch OFF (at the side of main unit).
21
1 - 20 L2E-EZ0216
Section 2 Installation of Three-Dimensional Display Software (EZU-3D2S)
When only EZU-3D2 is added, you don’t need to perform the work in this section. After installing the Digital Capture
Card (EZU-Pi3), install the Three-Dimensional Display Software (EZU-3D2S).
2.1 Necessary tools
(1) Screwdriver for cross recessed head screw.......................................................... １
(2) Screwdriver for slotted head screw...................................................................... １
2.2 Packing list
(1) Flock of Birds unit .................................................... １
(2) RS232C cable ........................................................... １ Flock of Birds unit
(3) Magnetic transmitter
(for magnetic transmitter stand) ............................... １
RS232C cable
(4) Magnetic sensor (for probe)...................................... １
(5) Power cable (for 100V～)......................................... １
(6) Power cable (for 200V～)......................................... １ Magnetic transmitter
for magnetic transmitter stand

(7) AC adapter ................................................................ １
(8) CRT SYNC cable...................................................... １
(9) Magnetic sensor attachment...................................... ５
Magnetic sensor
(10) Magic tape ................................................................ ４
for probe
(11) Flock of Birds User Disk .......................................... ２
Power cable (for 100V～)
Power cable (for 200V～)
2-1 L2E-EZ0216
Magnetic sensor attachment
AC adapter
Magic tape
CRT SYNC cable
Flock of Birds User Disk
2-2 L2E-EZ0216
(12) Magnetic transmitter stand.................................................１set
・Magnetic transmitter stand base.....................................１
・Magnetic transmitter stand fixing plate .........................１
・Magnetic transmitter stand mounting plate........... １
Magnetic transmitter stand(1set)

・Screw (44mm long) .......................................................３
・Screw (25mm long) .......................................................２
・Nut .................................................................................３
・Rubber bumper ..............................................................２
・Fixing rubber .................................................................２ Magnetic transmitter stand base
・Nylon screw ...................................................................４
・Thumb-screw .................................................................２
(13) Cable tie .............................................................................５ Magnetic transmitter stand
fixing plate
(14) Wire tie ...............................................................................５
(15) INSTALLATION AND OPERATION GUIDE..................１
Magnetic transmitter stand
mounting plate
Cable tie
Screw (44mm long)
Wire tie
Screw (25mm long)
2-3 Nut
L2E-EZ0216
Thumb-screw
Nylon screw
Fig 2-1
2-4 L2E-EZ0216
2.3 Setting DIP SWITCH of Flock of Birds unit
Confirm that DIP SWITCH of Flock of

Birds unit has been set as in the “When
shipped” column.
Table 2-1 DIP SWITCH FUNCTION TABLE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Remarks
on on on off off off off off When shipped
off off off NOT USED
off off on 2400
off on off 4800
off on on 9600
RS232C data transfer rate
on off off 19200
on off on 38400
on on off 57600
on on on 115200
57142(Band:32MHz), RS485 data transfer rate
off off off 57600(Band:40MHz) Host CPU Band may differ from
values in the left table.
117647(Band:32MHz),
See INSTALLATION AND
off off on 113636(Band:40MHz)
OPERATION GUIDE
250000(Band:32MHz),
(Accessories to
off on off 250000(Band:40MHz)
Three-Dimensional Display
333333(Band:32MHz), Software (EZU-3D2S)) for
off on on 500000(Band:40MHz) details.
off off off off 0
off off off on 1
FBB address
↓ ↓
(FLY mode)
on on on off 14
on on on on invalid
off off off off 1

off off off on 3 TEST number
↓ ↓ （TEST mode）
on on on on 31
2-5 L2E-EZ0216
on TEST mode
off FLY mode
2.4 Assembling magnetic transmitter stand

(1) As shown in Fig. 2-2, assemble the magnetic transmitter stand.
(See Fig. 2-6 for cable wiring.)
Magnetic transmitter stand mounting plate
Magnetic transmitter
(For magnetic transmitter stand) Thumb-screw
Fixing rubber
Nylon screw Magnetic transmitter stand fixing plate
Rubber bumper
Nut
Screw (25mm long)
Screw (44mm long)

Magnetic transmitter stand base
Fig 2-2
2.5 Wiring CRT SYNC cable

(1) Follow Fig 2-3 to stick the CRT SYNC cable to the monitor.
2-6 L2E-EZ0216
Fig 2-3
2-7 L2E-EZ0216
2.6 Removing covers
(1) Remove the connector cover and the rear cover.
Fig 2-4
2-8 L2E-EZ0216
2.7 Wiring cables
(1) Remove the Front blind plate,and wire the RS232C cable.
Fig 2-5
Fig 2-6
Cautions in laying out each component

・ When laying out components, refer to Chapter 2 System configuration and
installation (2.3 Preliminary work for magnetic sensor unit) in the Instruction
Manual of 3D Display Software (EZU-3D2,3D2S).
2-9 L2E-EZ0216
2.8 Installing Flock of Birds unit
（1） Wind the belt(main unit accessory) around the Flock of Birds unit to fix it.
（2） Attach the covers to the original positions.
（3） Stick the magic tape to AC adapter and the Flock of Birds unit to fix AC adapter.
Fig 2-7
2 - 10 L2E-EZ0216
2.9 Installing magnetic sensor
(1) As shown in Fig 2-8, install the magnetic sensor attachment and magnetic sensor to each probe.
(2) Use the wire tie (Accessory of the Three-Dimensional Display unit: EZU-3D2S) to fix the cable of probe and
the magnetic sensor.)
NOTE1: Confirm that the hole of magnetic sensor attachment is hooked by the index mark.
NOTE2: Care should be taken for orientation of the magnetic sensor.
(See Fig 2-6 for cable wiring.)
Probe
Index mark
Probe
(EUP -C314G
Probe (EUP-L53, C318T) -C514)
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Probe (EUP-C524)
Magnetic sensor
Probe (EUP-V53W)
Magnetic sensor Magnetic sensor attachment
Wire tie
(Accessory of the Three-Dimensional
Display unit: EZU-3D2S)
Probe (EUP-L53S)
Magnetic sensor
Fig 2-8
29
2 - 11 L2E-EZ0216
Software Specified for Contrast Agents
Model EZU-CH3
TECHNICAL GUIDE
--- Installation of Options ---
Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EZ0209-3
CONFIDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of

Hitachi Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or reproduced
without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation. Copyright © Hitachi
Medical Corporation. 2001, 2003. All rights reserved.
NOTE to USER
Installation of this software is carried out by the authorized service engineer.
Please hand this booklet to the engineer.
CONTENTS
Page
Chapter 1 Installation of Software Specified for Contrast Agents (EZU–CH3) ･･････････････････････ 1-1
1.1 Preparation ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1

1.2 Unprotection Procedure ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1
1.3 Confirmation of Unprotection ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-2
(1) 1 L2E-EZ0209
Chapter 1 Installation of Software Specified for Contrast Agents (EZU-CH3)
1.1 Preparation
Prepare the AUTHENTIC DISK which is able to authenticate the EZU-CH3.
1.2 Unprotection Procedure

The operation procedures for unprotection are shown below.
(1) Boot the system.

(3) Press Main Menu key, click “Setup”, “system” and then “Entry Opt.” sequentially.
(4) The software is automatically unprotected. When the unprotection is successfully completed, the dialog
“Successful unprotection dialog” is displayed as shown in Fig.1-1.
If it is not displayed, check to see if AUTHENTIC DISK is compatible with the system and make sure of
the AUTHENTIC DISK label.
Successful unprotection dialog
Fig.1-1

(6) Click “OK” button on “Successful unprotection dialog”.
(7) The system is automatically rebooted.
(8) Execute the following procedure (1.3 Confirmation of unprotection) and confirm the unprotection
succeeded.
1-1 L2E-EZ0209
1.3 Confirmation of Unprotection
<When a convex probe for contrast imaging (EUP-C514 etc.) is selected. >
(1) Press PROBE key to display “Select Probe with Application”. And then select Contrast-Abd-High
(Application for abdominal contrast imaging ).
Fig.1-2 Select Probe with Application
(2) Press CONTRAST key. The function menu related to contrast imaging mode is displayed as shown in
Fig.1-3
(3) Operate the toggle switch F1 in the function menu (Page 1) to ON (highlighted display) . Make sure that
contrast imaging mode is started and the function menu changes as shown in Fig.1-4 .
Fig.1-3 Function menu (contrast imaging mode OFF)
Fig.1-4 Function menu (contrast imaging mode ON)
1-2 L2E-EZ0209
<When a phased array probe for contrast imaging (EUP-S50) is selected.>
(1) Press PROBE key to display “Select Select Probe with Application”. And then select Application for
cardiac contrast imaging (Contrast-Crd-Low).
Fig.1-5 Select Probe with Application
(2) Press CONTRAST key. The function menu related to contrast imaging mode is displayed as shown in
Fig.1-6
contrast imaging mode is started and the function menu changes as shown in Fig.1-7.
Fig.1-6 Function menu (contrast imaging mode OFF)
Fig.1-7 Function menu (contrast imaging mode ON)
E
1-3 L2E-EZ0209
DICOM Software
EZU-FC5, EZU-FC5P, EZU-FC5W
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EZ0211-3
CONFIDENTIALITY: This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi Medical Corporation

and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or reproduced without the prior written permission of
Hitachi Medical Corporation. Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2001. All rights reserved.
Preface
Our service personnel shall install this software. Please hand over this technical guide to our service personnel.
Contents
Page
Chapter 1 Installation of DICOM FILES .................................................................................................... 1 - 1
1.1 Packing list................................................................................................................................ 1 - 1
1.2 Installation................................................................................................................................. 1 - 1
Chapter 2 Option protection release work................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.1 Preparation ................................................................................................................................ 2 - 1
2.2 Packing list................................................................................................................................ 2 - 1
2.3 Release work ............................................................................................................................. 2 - 1
Chapter 3 Check work ................................................................................................................................... 3 - 1
3.1 The display check of EZU-FC5 ................................................................................................ 3 - 1
3.2 The display check of EZU-FC5P .............................................................................................. 3 - 1
3.3 The display check of EZU-FC5W............................................................................................. 3 - 2
3.4 Operation check (Common to a DICOM software option) ....................................................... 3 - 2
Chapter 4 Setup file of the printer ................................................................................................................ 4 - 1
4.1 Modify of the setup file............................................................................................................. 4 - 1
4.2 Importing setup files ................................................................................................................. 4 - 4
Chapter 5 Error code ..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 1
5.1 Error code list............................................................................................................................ 5 - 1
5.2 Glossary .................................................................................................................................... 5-15
(1) 1 L2J-EZ0211
Chapter 1 Installation of DICOM FILES
This work is not required the Chapter1 when performing installation of only EZU-FC5P and EZU-FC5W.
EZU-FC5 is needed.
1.1 Packing list
(1) DICOM FILES (FD) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････１
1.2 Installation
(1) Please turn ON the power supply of the ultrasound scanner device after checking that the power supply of
the ultrasound scanner device turns off.
(2) After the completion of starting of OS, immediately after the starting screen of the ultra- -sound scanner
device is displayed, please press “Ctrl” key, ”Alt” key and “E” key.
NOTE: It is necessary to operate during screen of starting. When it is not able to perform, switch OFF the
scanner unit, and switch ON over again.
(3) Insert FD of DICOM FILES in the ultrasound scanner device.
(4) Click "3.5 inch FD" (A:) currently displayed on the left side of Explorer, and display the file in FD on the
right side of Explorer.
(5) Double click the “install” file in FD. Fig. 1-1 starts.
Fig. 1-1
(6) The message of "Are you sure?" is displayed. Please input "Y", when you continue install -ation. Please
choose "N", when you cancel installation.
When "Y" is inputted, installation is performed automatically.
(7) If a message “Press any key to continue…” appears (Fig 1-2), press the ENTER key at the side of
keyboard.
Fig. 1-2
(8) Please confirm whether to fulfill the following conditions.
1） The size of the CSPDicom2.dll file in an EUB-us folder is 60KB or more.
1-1 L2E-EZ0211
2） The size of the Mc3adv.dll file in an EUB-us folder is 298KB or more.
(9) Eject FD from FD drive.
(10) When press “Ctrl” key, ”Alt” key and “DEL” key, ”Windows NT security” dialog is displayed. (Refer to
Fig. 1-3).
WindowsNT Security
Logon Information
Shutdown
Fig 1-3
(11) Click [Shutdown] button on “Windows NT Security”.
(12) "Shutdown Computer" dialog is displayed.（Refer to Fig. 1-4） Choose "Shutdown" and click the [OK]
button.
Shutdown Computer
Shutdown
OK Cancel
Fig. 1-4
(13) Wait until the following “shutdown of computer” dialogs is displayed.
Shutdown Computer
Restart
Fig. 1-5
(14) If a dialog is displayed, please turn OFF a breaker switch (the ultrasound scanner device side).
The installation work of DICOM FILES is an end.

However, it is not in the state that can still use the DICOM option. Please cancel protection with reference
to Chapter 2 "Option protection release work."
1-2 L2E-EZ0211
3
1-3 L2E-EZ0211
Chapter 2 Option protection release work
2.1 Preparation
Protection of not only the DICOM option (EZU-FC5, EZU-FC5P, and EZU-FC5W) but also two or more
options combined with the ultrasound scanner device is released collectively.
Please perform the display check shown in the following table before doing protection release work. If a
display check can be performed, as for the purpose option, protection is released normally. Please do not do
the protection release work of this Chapter, but carry out the check of Section 3.3 of operation.
Table 2-1
Installation option Display check work
EZU-FC5 Section 3.1 Display Check of EZU-FC5
EZU-FC5P Section 3.2 Display Check of EZU-FC5P
EZU-FC5W Section 3.3 Display Check of EZU-FC5W
2.2 Packing list
(1) AUTHENTIC DISK ･････････････････････････････････････････････････１
2.3 Release work

(1) Turn ON the power supply of the ultrasound scanner device.
(3) Press the Main Menu key and select Setup Æ Entry Opt. from the Main Menu.
(4) The disk is automatically unprotected. When it succeeds, the message shown in Fig 2-1 is displayed. If
no dialog appears, check the AUTHENTIC DISK.
(5) Eject the AUTHENTIC DISK.
(6) Click the [OK] button of the message of Fig 2-1.
(7) The system automatically restarts.
Fig 2-1
Option protection release work is an end.

After a restart should do the check work of Chapter 3.
2-1 4 L2E-EZ0211
Chapter 3 Check work
3.1 The display check of EZU-FC5

Press the Main Menu key and select Setup Æ Image Filing from the Main Menu.
Select “DICOM Server” on the “Set Up Filing” dialog and confirm that the DICOM Set up dialog (Fig 3-1)
is displayed.
Fig. 3-1
3.2 The display check of EZU-FC5P

(1) Press the Main Menu key and select Setup Æ Image Filing from the Main Menu.
Select “DICOM Server” on the “Set Up Filing” dialog and confirm that the DICOM Set up dialog (Fig.
3-1) is displayed.
(2) Then confirm that “DICOMPrinter(Grayscale)” and “DICOMPrinter(Color)” exist among options of
ServiceList in the DICOM Setup dialog (Fig. 3-2 [A]).
[A]
Fig. 3-2
3 -1 L2E-EZ0211
3.3 The display check of EZU-FC5W
(1) Press the Main Menu key and select Setup Æ Image Filing from the Main Menu.
Select “DICOM Server” on the “Set Up Filing” dialog and confirm that the DICOM Set up dialog (Fig.
3-3) is displayed.
(2) Then confirm that “Modality WorkList” and “MPPS” exist among options of ServiceList in the DICOM
Setup dialog (Fig. 3-3[A]).
[A]
Fig. 3-3
3.4 Operation check (Common to a DICOM software option)

After all the installation procedures are completed, referring to the instruction manual of DICOM software,
make settings related to the DICOM functions, and then make sure the system can be normally operated.
NOTE: Save the latest AUTHENTIC DISK. When reinstallation of the software is required, use of all of the
option software is prohibited.
To make options usable, reinstall the latest AUTHENTIC DISK.
3 -2 L2E-EZ0211
Chapter 4 Setup file of the printer
4.1 Modify of the setup file

In the following case, you need to modify setup file.
- Test print was failed.
- You want to print to non-supported printer.
You follow the procedure, please modify it.
(1) Click the "Detail" button in SetUp Image Print menu displayed by selecting MainMenu → Setup →
ImagePrinter.。
(2) The Configuration Text File shown in Fig 4-1 is displayed. Following Table 4-1, modify the parts you
wish to edit.
Note: When editing, keep the rules given below. If the Setup File is not correctly setup, printing may
be impossible.
"Rules"
(i) Never edit the left-hand-side of " = " (the equal sign).
(ii) Always enter a semicolon (;) at the end of a sentence.
(iii) When editing data on the right-hand-side of " = " (the equal sign), do so referring to the DICOM printer
Conformance Statement.
4 -1 L2E-EZ0211
[PrinterName]
Name = NEW_PRN_V1; The name displayed in the Printer List in the DICOM Setup
menu (refer to Fig. 3-1)
[Setting item]
N_Action = SESSION;
Copies = 1;
Print_Priority = MED; Setup values for DICOM printer output. Refer to
Medium_Type = PAPER; Table 4-1 for setup information.
Destination = PROCESSOR;
Session_Label = ;
Display_Format = STANDARD¥2,3;
Orientation = PORTRAIT;
Size = 8INX10IN;
Config_Information = ;
Magnification = NONE;
Smoothing_Type = ;
Border_Density = WHITE;
Min_Density = ; This is the selection range available in "Setting Item".
Max_Density = ;
Editing of this part is not necessary.
Trim = ;
Timeout = 60;
N_Event_Rep = No;
[Select item]
Max_Copies = 10;
Sel_Print_Priority = {HIGH,MED,LOW};
Sel_Medium_Type = {PAPER,BLUE FILM,CLEAR FILM};
Sel_Destination = {MAGAZINE,PROCESSOR};
Sel_Magnification = {REPLICATE,BILINEAR,CUBIC,NONE};
{ Sel_Size,Sel_Display_Format,Sel_Orientation } =
{{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥1,1,PORTRAIT},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥1,1,LANDSCAPE},{8INX10IN,STAN
DARD¥1,2,PORTRAIT},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥2,1,LANDSCAPE},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥2,2,PORTR
AIT},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥2,2,LANDSCAPE},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥2,3,PORTRAIT},{8INX10IN,S
TANDARD¥3,2,LANDSCAPE},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥3,3,PORTRAIT},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥3,3,LA
NDSCAPE},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥3,4,PORTRAIT},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥4,3,LANDSCAPE},{8INX
10IN,STANDARD¥4,4,LANDSCAPE}}
Fig. 4-1
4 -2 L2J-EZ0211
Table 4-1 Setup File (setting item) details
Name Information Setup Data
N_Action N-ACTION The communication method is set up.
technique Either "SESSION" or "BOX" can be setup, but there are normally
no problems with using "SESSION" as it is.
Copies Number of Films Setup the number of film copies.
Print_Priority Print Priority Setup the print priority order
Order
Medium_Type Film Type Setup the film type.
Destination Film Destination Setup the film destination.
Normally, setup is done in Set Up Image Print menu, so editing is
not necessary.
Session_Label Film Session Setup the Film Session Label
Label
Display_Format Image Output Setup the Image Output Format.
Format Normally, setup is done in the Set Up Image Print menu, so editing
is not necessary.
Orientation Film Orientation Setup the film orientation.
Normally, setup is done in the Set Up Image Print menu, so editing
is not necessary.
Size Film Size Setup the film size.
Normally, setup is done in the Set Up Image Print menu, so editing
is not necessary.
Config_Information Configuration Setup the configuration information.
Information
Magnification Magnification Setup the magnification method.
Method
Smoothing_Type Smoothing Method Setup the smoothing method.
Depending upon the magnification method, it may be necessary to
specify the smoothing processing method. Please check the printer
conformance statement.
Border_Density Border Density Setup the image boundary brightness value.
Min_Density Minimum Density Setup the minimum density brightness value.
Max_Density Maximum Density Setup the maximum density brightness value.
Trim Trim Setup the state of the trim.
(state, decoration)
Timeout Timeout Time Setup the Print Timeout
N_Event_Req N-Event Req Setup the DICOM communication (N-Event Req Processing)
Processing Exec. execution option.
Option Normally there are no problem if “No” is setup.
4 -3 L2J-EZ0211
4.2 Importing setup files
(1) Insert the floppy disk (FD) containing the Printer Setup file into the drive.
(2) Click the “DICOM Server” button in the menu displayed by selecting Main Menu → Setup → Image
Filing. The DICOM Setup menu shown in Fig. 4-2 is displayed.

(3) Press [Import] button [A].
[A]
Fig. 4-2
(4) If there is in the device a Setup File for the same printer, and the same version, the message shown
in Fig. 4-3 is displayed. To overwrite the Setup File in the device, click the [Yes] button, to cancel
import of the Setup File, click [No].
Fig. 4-3
4 -4 L2J-EZ0211
10
Chapter 5 Error code
The error code of the following figure message is specified in 5.1 Error code list. Moreover, explanation of the
term used by error code list is specified in 5.2 Glossary.
Error code
Fig 5.1 DICOM error message
5.1 Error code list

(1) At the time of transfer to a DICOM server, FD and MO
Error code Factor
#0101 Although data is received, it cannot take in as image data.
#0102 The data set of a SOP class is not in agreement.
#0103 The exchange of a protocol goes wrong.
#0104 Header data is inconsistency.
#0105 The data set of a SOP class is not in agreement.
#0106 The error occurred in the header file.
#0001 The association has been aborted.
#0002 The association has been closed.
#0003 The remote system rejected the open association request.
#0004 Buffer size was too small to contain the data.
#0005 The size of data is not even number.
#0006 The size of data is odd number. Or there is no data.
#0007 An error is in the information set up in the DICOM Set up dialog.
#0009 A CSPDicom.ini file cannot be opened. Or the contents are unacquirable.
#0011 Abnormalities are in a DICOMDIR file.
#0012 The contents of DICOMDIR are unusual.
#0013 DICODMIR cannot be created.
#0014 The contents of DICOMDIR are unacquirable.
#0015 DICOMDIR cannot be created to media.
#0016 Abnormalities are in a DICOM file.
#0017 A DICOM file cannot be saved to media.
#0018 A DICOM file is unmovable to the folder of DICOMDIR.
#0019 A drive property can’t acquire. (There is no availability of a drive)
#0021 The attribute has no value assigned to it.
#0022 Entity of DICOMDIR cannot be deleted.
#0023 A file cannot be deleted from media.
#0024 A file cannot be opened.
#0025 Data cannot be read from a file.
#0026 A file property can’t acquire.
#0027 It cannot write in a file.
#0028 File ID can’t acquire.
#0029 A DICOM file name cannot be created.
5-1 L2E-EZ0211
Error code Factor
#0031 The error is in Image Directory Record information.
#0034 The error is in Patient Directory Record information.
#0035 The error is in Series Directory Record information.
#0036 The error is in Study Directory Record information.
#0039 File Meta information cannot be set as a data set.
#0040 The information on Patient ID (Tag number [0010,0020]), Study Instance UID (Tag
number [0020,000D]) or Series Instance UID (Tag number [0020,000E]) can’t acquire
from a data set.
#0041 Image Entity or Image Record cannot be created to DICOMDIR.
#0042 The image pixel module can’t acquire
#0043 A timeout occurred in the middle of receiving a message.
#0044 Value representation of data is wrong.
#0045 AE name is not registered normally.
#0046 A value for this attribute does not contain valid characters for its value representation.
#0047 The Entity ID value is not a valid entity object ID.
#0048 Entity ID or Record ID is invalid.
#0049 A data set is unusual. Or it is not built normally.
#0050 The DICOM message of an unsuitable format was received.
#0051 UID does not contain the Merge library support SOP class UID.
#0052 The value of a tag is unusual.
#0053 The value is invalid to Value representation.
#0054 The next Entity does not exist.
#0056 The error occurred in the file for DICOM at the time of access.
#0057 The network connect unexpectedly dropped.
#0058 The next Record does not exist.
#0059 A parameter is NULL.
#0060 The attribute's value was set to NULL. Value.
#0062 A parameter is unusual.
#0063 Patient Entity or Patient Record cannot be created to DICOMDIR.
#0064 Pixel data can’t acquire.
#0065 Record of DICOMDIR cannot be deleted.
#0067 Series Entity or Series Record cannot be created to DICOMDIR.
#0068 Study Entity or Study Record cannot be created to DICOMDIR.
#0069 An unexpected, potentially serious, problem was detected in the operating
environment.
#0070 If the attribute's value is large, it may be stored in a temporary file. If a file I/O error
occurs, this status is returned.
#0071 The Timeout period expired.
#0072 MergeCOM-3 found a corrupted record ID in a directory record offset attribute while
trying to traverse the DICOMDIR object pointed to by DirID.
#0073 The service related to Message ID has not been successfully negotiated for this
association.
#0075 A numeric Value was larger than could be accommodated by the attribute.
#0077 The remote system could not be connected to at the TCP/IP level. Check that the
remote host name and port number have been configured properly.
#0078 Remote Host Name was not NULL and it was not 1-39 bytes long.
#0079 The path value of DICOMDIR is NULL.
#0080 A SOP common module cannot be added.
#0081 An error has occurred while trying to access the MergeCOM-3 data dictionary. A
message describing the error has been written to the MergeCOM-3 log file.
#0082 An application title with this name has already been registered.
#0083 Application Title must be 1 to 16 bytes long.
5-2 L2E-EZ0211
Error code Factor
#0084 The license number specified in the MergeCOM-3 configuration file was invalid.
#0085 The library has already been initialized.
#0086 The library has not been properly initialized.
#0087 This error occurs when the DICOM library can not obtain the name of the data
dictionary.
#0088 The error occurred during DICOM library initialization.

#0089 A license number was not specified in the MergeCOM-3 configuration file.
#0090 There is no Merge.ini file.
#0091 The response from a server is not normal.
5-3 L2E-EZ0211
(2) At the time of printing
Error code Factor
#0201 The association failed.
#0202 SCP has not corresponded to PRINT_JOB service.
#0203 Acquisition of PRINT_JOB service failed.
#0204 Reservation of an N-GET message domain failed.
#0205 A setup of the SOP class UID (tag number [0000, 0003]) failed.
#0206 A setup of the SOP instance UID (tag number [0000, 1001]) failed.
#0207 Creation of an N-GET tag list failed.
#0208 Transferring of N-GET request failed.
#0209 Release of an N-GET message domain failed.
#0210 N-GET response state code acquisition failed.
#0211 It is in the state in which the N-GET response failed.
#0212 Release of an N-GET response domain failed.
#0215 It is association ID injustice.
#0216 The network connects unexpectedly dropped.
#0221 The error, which cannot be understood, occurred.
#0222 Opening of an N-EVENT-REPORT message domain failed.
#0223 Transferring of an N-EVENT-REPORT response failed.
#0224 Release of an N-EVENT-REPORT response domain failed.
#0226 Opening of an N-EVENT-REPORT message domain failed.
#0227 Transferring of an N-EVENT-REPORT response failed.
#0230 Preparation of an N-CREATE (Film session) domain failed.
#0231 A setup of the Number of Copies (tag number [2000, 0010]) failed.
#0232 A setup of the Print Priority (tag number [2000, 0020]) failed.
#0233 A setup of the Medium Type (tag number [2000, 0030]) failed.
#0234 A setup of the Film Destination (tag number [2000, 0040]) failed.
#0235 A setup of the Film Session Label (tag number [2000, 0050]) failed.
#0236 N-CREATE (Film Session) message transferring failed.
#0237 Acquisition of the Affected SOP class UID failed.
#0238 Release of an N-CREATE (Film Session) domain failed.
#0239 Acquisition of an N-CREATE (Film Session) response failed.
#0240 Processing of N-CREATE (Film Session) failed.
#0241 Restriction of a resource was exceeded.
#0242 It is an invalid object instance.
#0243 An N-CREATE (Film session) response is unusual.
#0244 Acquisition of the Affected SOP instance UID failed.
#0245 Domain release of an N-CREATE (Film Session) response failed.
#0246 Preparation of an N-CREATE (Film Box) domain failed.
#0247 A setup of the Image Display Format (tag number [2010, 0010]) failed.
#0248 Image Display Format (tag number [2010, 0010]) has not been set up.
#0249 A setup of the Film Orientation (tag number [2010, 0040]) failed.
#0250 The character sequence of Film Orientation (tag number [2010, 0040]) is inaccurate.
5-4 L2E-EZ0211
Error code Factor
#0251 A setup of the Film Size ID (tag number [2010, 0050]) failed.
#0252 A setup of the Magnification Type (tag number [2010, 0060]) failed.
#0253 A setup of the Smoothing Type (tag number [2010, 0080]) failed.
#0254 A setup of the Border Density (tag number [2010, 0100]) failed.
#0255 A setup of the Min Density (tag number [2010, 0120]) failed.
#0256 A setup of the Max Density (tag number [2010, 0130]) failed.
#0257 A setup of the Trim (tag number [2010, 0140]) failed.
#0258 A setup of the Configuration Information (tag number [2010, 0150]) failed.
#0259 ITEM reservation of the Referenced Film Session Sequence (tag number [2010, 0500])
failed.
#0260 A setup of the Referenced Film Session Sequence (tag number [2010,0500]) failed.
#0261 A setup of the Referenced SOP Class UID (tag number [0008,1150]) failed.
#0262 A setup of the Referenced SOP Instance UID (tag number [0008,1155]) failed.
#0263 N-CREATE (Film Box) message transferring failed.
#0264 N-CREATE (Film Box) domain release failed.
#0265 Acquisition of an N-CREATE response (Film Box) failed.
#0266 The information on the set-up tag is inaccurate.
#0267 Processing of N-CREATE (Film Box) failed.
#0268 A SOP instance is copy ending.
#0269 It is an invalid object instance.
#0270 A tag attribute is inaccurate.
#0271 The response of N-CREATE (Film Box) is unusual.
#0272 The response of N-CREATE (Film Session) is unusual.
#0273 Release of a N-CREATE (Film Box) response domain failed.
#0274 Reservation of the N-SET (Image Box) domain of monochrome failed.
#0275 ITEM reservation of a monochrome image failed.
#0276 A setup of the sequence of a monochrome image failed.
#0277 Reservation of the N-SET (Image Box) domain of a color failed.
#0278 ITEM reservation of a related color image failed.
#0279 A setup of the sequence of a color image failed.
#0280 This SOP class has not corresponded.
#0281 Header opening of a print image failed.
#0282 A setup of the X Pixel Aspect Ratio (tag number [0028,0034]) failed.
#0283 A setup of the Y Pixel Aspect Ratio (tag number [0028,0034]) failed.
#0284 It is the reading error of an image file.
#0285 It is the reading error of an image file.
#0286 Acquisition of a DICOM message failed.
#0287 Opening of a print image failed.
#0288 Acquisition of a DICOM message failed.
#0289 A setup of an image position failed.
#0290 A setup of the Request SOP instance UID failed.
#0291 Transferring of an image message failed.
#0292 Release of an N-SET (Image Box) message domain failed.
#0293 Acquisition of an N-SET (Image Box) response failed.
#0294 An N-SET (Image Box) attribute value is inaccurate.
#0295 Processing of N-SET (Image Box) failed.
#0296 A class instance is inconsistency.
#0297 An N-SET (Image Box) tag attribute is inaccurate.
#0298 Printer memories are insufficient.
#0299 It is a strange N-SET (Image Box) response.
#0300 Release of an N-SET (Image Box) response domain failed.
#0301 Reservation of an N-ACTION (Film Box) domain failed.
5-5 L2E-EZ0211
Error code Factor
#0303 An N-ACTION (Film Box) type ID setup failed.
#0304 Transferring of an N-ACTION (Film Box) message failed.
#0305 Release of an N-ACTION (Film Box) message domain failed.
#0306 Acquisition of an N-ACTION (Film Box) response failed.
#0307 Processing of N-ACTION (Film Box) failed.
#0308 The SOP instance UID of N-ACTION (Film Box) is inaccurate.
#0309 A theoretical value is inaccurate.
#0311 The film SOP instance UID is inaccurate.
#0312 (Session) A print queue is full.
#0313 (Box) A print queue is full.
#0314 A image is larger than BOX size.
#0316 It is a strange N-ACTION (Film Box) response.
#0317 Acquisition of the N-ACTION (Film Box) Reference SOP instance UID failed.
#0318 The addition of PRINT_JOB pending failed.
#0319 Release of an N-ACTION (Film Box) response domain failed.
#0320 Reservation of an N-ACTION (Film Session) domain failed.
#0322 An N-ACTION (Film Session) type ID setup failed.
#0323 Transferring of an N-ACTION (Film Session) message failed.
#0324 Release of an N-ACTION (Film Session) message domain failed.
#0325 Acquisition of an N-ACTION (Film Session) response failed.
#0326 Processing of N-ACTION (Film Session) failed.
#0327 The N-ACTION SOP instance UID is inaccurate.
#0328 A theoretical value is inaccurate.
#0330 The film SOP instance UID is inaccurate.
#0331 (Session) A print queue is full.
#0332 (Box) A print queue is full.
#0333 A image is larger than BOX size.
#0335 It is a strange N-ACTION (Film Session) response.
#0336 Acquisition of the N-ACTION reference SOP instance UID failed.
#0337 The addition of PRINT_JOB pending failed.
#0338 Release of an N-ACTION (Film Session) response domain failed.
#0339 Reservation of an N-DELETE (Film Session) domain failed.
#0341 Transferring of an N-DELETE (Film Session) message failed.
#0342 Domain release of an N-DELETE (Film Session) demand failed.
#0343 Acquisition of an N-DELETE (Film Session) response failed.
#0344 Processing of N-ACTION (Film Session) failed.
#0346 It is a strange N-DELETE (Film Session) response.
#0347 Release of an N-DELETE (Film Session) response domain failed.
#0348 Close of an association failed.
5-6 L2E-EZ0211
(3) At the time of communication with a Worklist server
Error code Factor
#0402 Modality work list request message opening failed.
#0403 Modality work list ITEM message opening failed.
#0404 A setup of the Specific Character Set （tag number [0008,0005]） failed.
#0405 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Sequence （tag number [0040,0100]） failed.
#0406 A setup of the Modality （tag number [0008,0060]） failed.
#0407 A setup of the Scheduled Station AE Title （tag number [0040,0001]） failed.
#0408 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date （tag number [0040,0002]）failed.
#0409 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Time （tag number [0040,0003]） failed.
#0410 A setup of the Scheduled Performing Physician’s Name （tag number [0040,0006]）
failed.
#0411 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step ID（tag number [0040,0009]） failed.
#0412 A setup of the Study Instance UID（tag number [0020,000D]） failed.
#0413 A setup of the Requested Contrast Agent （tag number [0032,1070]） failed.
#0414 A setup of the Requesting Physician （tag number [0032,1032]） failed.
#0415 A setup of the Referring Physician’s Name （tag number [0008,0090]）failed.
#0416 A setup of the Patients Birth Date （tag number [0010,0030]）failed.
#0417 A setup of the Patient’s Sex （tag number [0010,0040]）failed.
#0418 A setup of the Requested Procedure ID （tag number [0040,1001]）failed.
#0419 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Description （tag number [0040,0007]）
failed.
#0420 A setup of the Scheduled Station Name （tag number [0040,0010]）failed.
#0421 A setup of the Scheduled Station Name （tag number [0040,0010]）failed. (Value
Multiplicity n)
Multiplicity n+1)
Multiplicity 1)
#0424 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Location （tag number [0040,0011]）failed.
#0425 A setup of the Accession Number （tag number [0008,0050]）failed.
#0426 A setup of the Patient’s Name （tag number [0010,0010]）failed.
#0427 A setup of the Patient ID （tag number [0010,0020]）failed.
#0428 A setup of the Requesting Service （tag number [0032,1033]）acquisition propriety
failed.
#0429 A setup of the Requested Procedure Description（tag number [0032,1060]）acquisition
propriety failed.
5-7 L2E-EZ0211
Error code Factor
#0430 A setup of the Reason for the Requested Procedure （tag number [0040,1002]）
acquisition propriety failed.
#0431 A setup of the Requested Procedure Comments （tag number [0040,1400]）acquisition
propriety failed.
#0432 A setup of the Reason for the Imaging Service Request （tag number [0040,2001]）
#0433 A setup of the Imaging Service Request Comments（tag number [0040,2400]）
#0434 A setup of the Admitting Diagnoses Description （tag number [0008,1080]）acquisition
propriety failed.
#0435 A setup of the Other Patient IDs （tag number [0010,1000]） acquisition propriety
failed.
#0436 A setup of the Patient’s Size （tag number [0010,1020]） acquisition propriety failed.
#0437 A setup of the Patient’s Weight （tag number [0010,1030]） acquisition propriety
failed.
#0438 A setup of the Ethnic Group （tag number [0010,2160]） acquisition propriety failed.
#0439 A setup of the Additional Patient History （tag number [0010,21B0]） acquisition
propriety failed.
#0440 A setup of the Pregnancy Status （tag number [0010,21C0]）acquisition propriety
failed.
#0441 A setup of the Last Menstrual Date （tag number [0010,21D0]）acquisition propriety
failed.
#0442 A setup of the Patient Comments （tag number [0010,4000]）acquisition propriety
failed.
#0443 A setup of the Names of Intended Recipients of Results （tag number [0040,1010]）
#0444 C-FIND work list request transferring failed.
#0445 Message domain opening failed.
#0449 The network connects unexpectedly dropped.
#0454 The error, which cannot be understood, occurred.
#0455 Acquisition of Response Status (tag number [0000, 0900]) failed.
#0456 Response message domain opening failed after the reference normal end.
#0457 Acquisition of Scheduled Procedure Step Sequence （tag number [0040,0100]）failed.
#0458 Acquisition of Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date （tag number [0040,0002]）failed.
#0459 Acquisition of Scheduled Procedure Step Start Time （tag number [0040,0003]）failed.
#0460 Acquisition of Modality （tag number [0008,0060]）failed.
5-8 L2E-EZ0211
Error code Factor
#0461 Acquisition of Scheduled Performing Physician’s Name （tag number [0040,0006]）
failed.
#0462 Acquisition of Scheduled Procedure Step ID （tag number [0040,0009]）failed.
#0463 Acquisition of Requested Procedure ID （tag number [0040,1001]）failed.
#0464 Acquisition of Study Instance UID （tag number [0020,000D]）failed.
#0465 Acquisition of Patient’s Name （tag number [0010,0010]）failed.
#0466 Acquisition of Patient ID （tag number [0010,0020]）failed.
#0467 Acquisition of Accession Number （tag number [0008,0050]）failed.
#0468 Acquisition of Requesting Physician （tag number [0032,1032]）failed.
#0469 Acquisition of Referring Physician’s Name （tag number [0008,0090]）failed.
#0470 Acquisition of Patient’s Birth Date （tag number [0010,0030]）failed.
#0471 Acquisition of Patient’s Sex （tag number [0010,0040]）failed.
#0472 Acquisition of Scheduled Station Name （tag number [0040,0010]）failed.
#0473 Acquisition of Scheduled Station Name （tag number [0040,0010]）failed. (Value
Multiplicity =1)
Multiplicity n=1)
Multiplicity n=n+1)
#0476 Acquisition of Scheduled Procedure Step Location （tag number [0040,0011]）failed.
#0477 Acquisition of Requested Contrast Agent （tag number [0032,1070]）failed.
#0478 Acquisition of Requesting Service （tag number [0032,1033]）failed.
#0479 Acquisition of Requested Procedure Description （tag number [0032,1060]）failed.
#0480 Acquisition of Reason for the Requested Procedure （tag number [0040,1002]）failed.
#0481 Acquisition of Requested Procedure Comments （tag number [0040,1400]）failed.
#0482 Acquisition of Reason for the Imaging Service Request （tag number [0040,2001]）
failed.
#0483 Acquisition of Imaging Service Request Comments （tag number [0040,2400]）failed.
#0484 Acquisition of Admitting Diagnoses Description （tag number [0008,1080]）failed.
#0485 Acquisition of Other Patient IDs （tag number [0010,1000]）failed.
#0486 Acquisition of Patient’s Size （tag number [0010,1020]）failed.
#0487 Acquisition of Patient’s Weight （tag number [0010,1030]）failed.
#0488 Acquisition of Ethnic Group （tag number [0010,2160]）failed.
#0489 Acquisition of Additional Patient History （tag number [0010,21B0]）failed.
#0490 Acquisition of Pregnancy Status （tag number [0010,21C0]）failed.
#0491 Acquisition of Last Menstrual Date （tag number [0010,21D0]）failed.
5-9 L2E-EZ0211
Error code Factor
#0492 Acquisition of Patient Comments （tag number [0010,4000]）failed.
#0493 Acquisition of Names of Intended Recipients of Results （tag number [0040,1010]）
failed.
#0494 Response message domain release failed. (Usual）
#0495 Response message domain release failed. (Cancellation response reception）
#0496 Since resources are insufficient, it is the refused response.
#0497 The data set is not in agreement.
#0498 It is the response that cannot be processed.
#0499 It is the response that cannot be understood.
#0500 Cancellation demand message opening failed.
#0501 Cancellation demand message transferring failed.
#0502 Cancellation demand message release failed.
#0503 Association closing failed.
5 - 10 L2E-EZ0211
(4) At the time of communication with a MPPS server
Error code Factor
#0601 The N-CREATE message open demand failed.
#0602 A setup of the Affected SOP instance UID （tag number [0000,1000]） failed.
#0603 Carried out step attribute ITEM domain opening failed.
#0604 A setup of the Specific Character Set （tag number [0008,0005]） failed.
#0605 A setup of the Scheduled Step Attributes Sequence （tag number [0040,0270]） failed.
#0606 A setup of the Study Instance UID （tag number [0020,000D]）failed.
#0607 Study Instance UID （tag number [0020,000D]）has not been set up.
#0608 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step ID （tag number [0040,0253]） failed.
#0609 Performed Procedure Step ID （tag number [0040,0253]）has not been set up.
#0610 A setup of the Performed Station AE Title （tag number [0040,0241]） failed.
#0611 Performed Station AE Title （tag number [0040,0241]） has not been set up.
#0612 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step Start Date （tag number [0040,0244]） failed.
#0613 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step Start Time （tag number [0040,0245]）
failed.
#0614 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step Status （tag number [0040,0252]） failed.
#0615 A setup of the Modality （tag number [0008,0060]） failed.
#0616 Modality （tag number [0008,0060]） has not been set up.
#0617 A setup of the Patient ID （tag number [0010,0020]） failed.
#0618 A setup of the Patient’s Name （tag number [0010,0010]） failed.
#0619 A setup of the Requested Procedure ID （tag number [0040,1001]） failed.
#0620 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step ID （tag number [0040,0009]） failed.
#0621 A setup of the Accession Number （tag number [0008,0050]） failed.
#0622 A setup of the Requested Procedure Description （tag number [0032,1060]） failed.
#0623 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Description （tag number [0040,0007]）
failed.
#0624 A setup of the Patient’s Birth Date （tag number [0010,0030]） failed.
#0625 A setup of the Patient’s Sex （tag number [0010,0040]） failed.
#0626 A setup of the Performed Station Name （tag number [0040,0242]） failed.
#0627 A setup of the Performed Location （tag number [0040,0243]） failed.
#0628 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step Description （tag number [0040,0254]）
failed.
#0629 A setup of the Performed Procedure Type Description （tag number [0040,0255]）
failed.
#0630 Study ID （tag number （[0020,0010]） failed.
#0631 A setup of the Placer Order Number / Imaging Service Request （tag number
[0040,2016]） failed.
5 - 11 L2E-EZ0211
Error code Factor
#0632 A setup of the Filler Order Number / Imaging Service Request （ tag number
[0040,2017]） failed.
#0633 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step End Date （tag number [0040,0250]） failed.
#0634 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step End Time （tag number [0040,0251]） failed.
#0635 A setup of the Referenced Study Sequence （tag number [0008,1110]） failed.
#0636 A setup of the Scheduled Action Item Code Sequence （tag number [0040,0008]）
failed.
#0637 A setup of the Referenced Patient Sequence （tag number [0008,1120]） failed.
#0638 A setup of the Procedure Code Sequence （tag number [0008,1032]） failed.
#0639 A setup of the Performed Action Item Sequence （tag number [0040,0260]） failed.
#0640 A setup of the Performed Series Sequence （tag number [0040,0340]） failed.
#0642 Transferring of a N-CREATE message failed.
#0643 Release of a N-CREATE message failed.
#0647 The networks connect unexpectedly dropped.
#0652 The error that cannot be understood occurred.
#0653 Acquisition of Affected SOP Instance UID（tag number [0000,1000]） failed.
#0654 Acquisition of Performed Procedure Step Status（tag number [0040,0252]）failed.
#0655 Release of a response message domain failed.
#0656 Association closing failed.
#0657 The N-SET message open demand failed.
#0658 A setup of the Requested SOP Instance UID （tag number [0000,1001]） failed.
#0659 ITEM opening for Performed Series Sequence (tag number [0040, 0340]) failed.
#0660 A setup of the Performed Series Sequence （tag number [0040,0340]） failed.
#0661 A setup of the Performing Physician's Name （tag number [0008,1050]） failed.
#0662 A setup of the Protocol Name （tag number [0018,1030]） failed.
#0663 A setup of the Operators' Name （tag number [0008,1070]） failed.
#0664 A setup of the Series Instance UID （tag number [0020,000E]） failed.
#0665 A setup of the Series Description （tag number [0008,103E]） failed.
#0666 A setup of the Retrieve AE Title （tag number [0008,0054]） failed.
#0667 Opening of ITEM for Referenced Image Sequence (tag number [0008, 1140]) failed.
#0668 A setup of the Referenced Image Sequence （tag number [0008,1140]） failed.
#0669 A setup of the Referenced SOP Class UID （tag number [0008,1150]） failed.
5 - 12 L2E-EZ0211
Error code Factor
#0670 A setup of the Referenced SOP Instance UID （tag number [0008,1155]） failed.
#0671 A setup of the Referenced Image Sequence （tag number [0008,1140]） failed.
#0672 A setup of the Referenced Standalone SOP Instance Sequence （ tag number
[0040,0220]） failed.
#0704 Transferring of an N-SET message failed.
#0705 Release of an N-SET message failed.
#0706 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step End Date （tag number [0040,0250]） failed.
#0707 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step End Time （tag number [0040,0251]） failed.
5 - 13 L2E-EZ0211
5.2 Glossary
Term Explanation
SOP ‘Service Object Pair’
The group of a service (function) object
SOP class Service of the transfer function (Storage Service) to a server etc. is pointed
out. For details, refer to a Conformance Statement statement.
SCP ‘Service Class Provider’
It is a server.
SCU ‘Service Class User’
It is a client.
Association The exchange (communication) by DICOM
It is called the start of an association when starting DICOM
communication.
DICOMDIR The directory file for managing a file within media, such as MO.
DICOM ‘Digital Image and Communications in Medicine’
Entity What is used when expressing DICOM data.
AE ‘Application Entity’
Study Entity The entity of study
Series Entity The entity of series
Image Entity The entity of image
Patient Directory Record The data set which consists of following tag information
information Patient’s Name[0010,0010],
Patient ID[0010,0020],
Patient’s Birth Date[0010,0030],
Patient’s Sex[0010, 0040],
Patient Comments[0010,4000]
Study Directory Record The data set which consists of following tag information
information Study Date[0008,0020],
Study Time[0008,0030],
Study Description[0008, 1030],
Study Instance UID[0020, 000D],
Study ID[0020, 0010],
Accession Number[0008, 0050]
Series Directory Record The data set which consists of following tag information
information Modality[0008, 0060],
Series Instance UID[0020, 000E],
Series Number[0020, 0011],
Series Date[0008, 0021],
Series Time[0008, 0031]
Image Directory Record The data set which consists of following tag information
information Image Number[0020,0013],
Image Date[0008,0023],
Image Time[0008,0033]
UID ‘Unique Identifier’
Merge.ini It is the initial-setting file of DICOM in an Eub-us folder.
CSPDicom.ini It is a file in an Eub-us folder. UID of DICOM etc. is registered.
File Meta information The data set which consists of following tag information
Media Storage SOP Class UID[0002,0002],
Media Storage SOP Instance UID[0002,0003],
Transfer Syntax UID[0002,0010],
Implementation Class UID[0002,0012],
Implementation Version Name[0002,0013],
Source Application Entity Title[0002,0016]
N-GET Retrieve object instance(s) from a remote AE whose attributes match a
specified set of attributes.
N-EVENT-REPORT Report an event to a remote AE.
5 - 14 L2E-EZ0211
Term Explanation
N-CREATE Request that a remote AE create a new object instance.
N-SET Request modification of attribute on a remote AE.
N-ACTION Request an action by a remote AE.
C-FIND Match a set of attributes to the attributes of a set of object instances on a
remote AE.
Film session One of the SOP classes of print service
Film Box One of the SOP classes of print service
E
26
5 - 15 L2E-EZ0211
Digital Capture Card
Model EZU-Pi3
TECHNICAL GUIDE

Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EZ0215-1
CONFIDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of

Hitachi Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or
reproduced without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright 0 Hitachi Medical Corporation. 200 1. All rights reserved.
NOTE to USER
CONTENTS
Page
Chapter 1. Installation of Digital Capture Board (EZU-Pi3) ............................... l-l
1.1 PackageList....~....~.........*........................~ ..................... l-1
1.2 InstallationofDigitalCaptureCard...........- ................................. l-1
Chapter2 ChapterZ,InstallationofDriver . ..-...........-....................”......... 2-l
1.1 preparation. amme amm...a a a........ e e a s me.. . a.. . s e a ass e m*. . mm.. . a.. . . . “..... . . . . 2-1
1.2 Installation of Driver for Digital Capture Card - - - * - - - - - - - - - - - - - . * - - - - - - . - - - - - * * - - 2-2
Chapter3 ChapterSReleaseofOptionProtection...-..............-..................... 3-1
1.1 preparations. m. * .a. mmm-. e a e---se mv. - s nm-.a s -. se me--me-m -. * m.. .emvern m-mma* mm..P 3-l
1.2 procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-.....*..... 3-l
(1) L2E-EZ0215
Chapter1 Installation of Digital Capture Card
1 .l Package List
(1) Digital Capture Card e ee . e. a. e. . v ee ae . 3 aa . . . . s s e 1

(2) Capture Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(3) Install MO for Digital Capture Card - * - . - * . * . . * . . 1
(4) AUTHENTIC DISK . .. . .. . .. ,. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. 1
(5) M3 Screw . . . . .. . .. . .. . ... ., .. ... . .. . .. . ... . .. . 2
(6) FG (-‘lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Installation of Digital Capture Card
1.2.1 Removal of Cover
(1) Remove Probe hanger knob, Top cover, Rear cover and the Top Shield
(2) Loosen the M4 screw and pull out the PC-Unit.
Top cover
Probe hang
\Rear cover
L2E-EZ0215
1-l
1.2.2 Storage of Capture Card
(1) Store the digital capture card in the system.

(The insertion slot for the digital capture card is different depending on the PC-
motherboard. Please refer to the following figure)
(2) Wire the capture card and the connector on the backside of the ultrasound system
with the capture cable.(Fix the cable with the uncovered part)
(3) Install the cover which was removed in “1.2.1 Removal of Cover”.
Note : Before installing the PC-Unit, please confirm if the connectors are properly set.
if t’ne connector exists,

PC-Motherboard set the capture card into SLOT No.E
i the connector does not exists,

set the capture card into SLOT No. C
Capture card
M3 screw(long)
apture cabie
\
M3 screw (short)
LZE-EZ02 15
1-2
Chapter2 Installation of Driver
The driver for digital capture card (EZU-Pi3) must be installed after EUB-System is
completely installed.
2.1 Preparation
The necessary parts for the installation of EZU-Pi3 are as follows:
- Install MO
2-1 L2E-EZ0215
2.2 Installation of Driver for Digital Capture Card
The procedure to install the driver is as follows:
(1) Turn on the power to the ultrasound scanner. When booting Windows NT (OS) is
followed by the software start screen, press the E key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt
key to open the Explorer.
(2) Insert the Install MO into MO drive.
(3) Select Removable Disk (D drive) and double click “Setup.exe” in it.
I+: 3H Floppy la:)
:+; ,J Daosdk
Eubas
7’ JJ’- Network Neighborhood

-SY
‘$f Recycle Bin
:> My Briefcase
2.2 LZE-EZ02 15
(4) Select “ML” in the Installation frame of the installer. Then “Intellicam” is also selected
automatically.
Select the products you want to install. .
Installation
MIL
# ActiveMlL
Select the products you
I lntell@m want to install or move the
.II.
...
. .‘.
: J mouse pointer over the
buttons on the left to obtain
a short description.
(5) Select “Proceed” in the bottom left of the menu.
Select the products you want to install. :; :

I-
Select the products you

want to install or move the
mouse pointer over the
buttons on the left to obtain
a short description.
2-3 LZE-EZ0215
(6) Press “Next” button in the dialog below.
(7) Press ‘Yes” button in the dialog according to the license agreement.
HE PAW&E AE%.XMPANMNG THIS

F CDHWTER SWTWARE AND ASSOCfATED
AND MAY lN,Q.UDE “ON-LINE”
N fSOFTWAFfE”j. f f YOU DO NOT AGREE TO
THIS AGREEMENT; PROMPTLY RETUFiN THE 13
Doyouaccapl&thetemrsdthsp’ecsdingLicen#,Agssmsnt? IfyoutiNo. S&up

wildoso. ToirMlMatrozlmagingRoducfs.youmustacceptIhk:agsernent.
2-4 LZE:-EZo215
(8) The dialog to specify the install folder appears. Press “Next” button.
(9) Press “OK” button in the following message.
__--_---x” ._-- -.-- ^_ _l.--^----l- _._I_... -.-,^ ~,..lX,, ,... ” .......,.I. .,,,. “__.” ,... ---.__x_.“”
2-5 LZE-EZ0215
(10) Press “Next” button in the dialog below.
(11) The following message appears. Press “NO” button.
2-6 LZE-EZ0215
(12) The dialog to select driver appears. Check ‘VGA” Off and Check only “Meteor-II/Digital”
ON, then press “Next” Button.
(13) The Instal confiramtion dialog appears. Press “OK” button.
2-7 L2E-EZ0215
(14) The dialog of license agreement appears. Press ‘Yes” button.
.-
SOFIWARE LJCENS~AGREEMENT
I
(15) The dialog to specify the install folder appears. Press “Next” button.
~OeshtiiFokler ------i
_ ..- .“._._
_._.....-
- ..-... . . . --.--.. .-. ..- --... .^.“..__.^_^
“.”.-..“_..“_
.
< Back
2-8 L2E-EZ0215
(16) “Select Program Folder” dialog appears. Press “Next” button.
Note : Contents of “Program Folders” should be “Meteor-II Digital 2.1” as shown below:
(17) “Choose variables location” dialog appears. Confirm that “Registry” is selected and press
“Next” button.
2-9 LZE-EZ0215
(18) “DCF Path selection” dialog appears. Press “SelectAll” button.
(19) Press “Next” button.
atsu
Z-10 L2E-EZ0215
(20) “Genesis digitizer format” dialog appears. Press “Next” button.
idalsa\cbl I .I ld2040.dcf 1
1
1dalsaktel 1 ld2080a.dcf I
dalsa\cterl
dalsahtpl
I dalsa\sDl2 I I
(21) “Start Copying Files” dialog appears. Press “Next” button.
IF&&
Using the default DCF: kQOlO.dcf
NothWirtg DMA buffet

::
When “Next” button is pressed, the necessary files are copied to the system.
2-11 LZE-EZ0215
(22) Copy being ended, the following “Readme file” dialog appears. Press “No” button.
(23) “Setup Complete” dialog appears. Press “Finish” button.
2-12 L2E-EZ0215
(24) “Meteor-II /Digital setup” dialog appears. Confirm that “No” is selected then press “Next”
button.
(25) “Matrox DMA manager” dialog appears. Select “Other”.
1 t- l.O’MB
f 2.OHB I
1 T$%hthenwnbwdMB: -MB
The maximumsize you con allocate is 242 MB. I 1
2-13 L2E-EZ02 15
(26) “Type in the number of MB” edit box appears. Enter “32” in the edit box and Press “Next”
button.
I
i-’ l.OMB
r 2OME
r COMB
c BOMB
(27) “Matrox Imaging Products setup” dialog appears. Press “OK” button.
I I
Use the Mcteo~~l /Dii Natiwdbruy i I
Space RaqLlirsd: 44 MB. Space Available: 2fX7 MB. j

_--I--
------.------..-m ----~- ._---__-_.J
When “OK” button is pressed, the necessary files are copied.
2-14 LZE-EZ0215
While the files are being copied to the system, the following message appears. Do nothing
about this message.
(28) “Acrobat Reader setup” dialog appears. Press “OK” button.
2-15 L2E-EZ0215
(29) “Matrox Imaging Library help” dialog appears. Press “OK” button.
(30) “Setup complete” dialog appears. Press “Finish” button to reboot the system.
By the above steps, the installation of driver has been completed.
2-16 L2E-EZ0215
Chapter3 Release of Option Protection
3.1 Preparation
The necessary parts for the release of option protection are as follows:
- AUTHENTIC DISK
3.2 Procedure

(3) Press the Main Menu key, select Setup, select System, then press “Entry Opt.“.
(4) The disk is automatically unprotected. When it succeeds, the message shown in the
figure below is displayed. If no dialog appears, check it the AUTHENTIC DISK
properly corresponds to the system.
(6) Click the [OI(l button on the message shown below.
;.
OpUons are recognized.

Execute Reset
The release of Option protection has been completed.
3-1 LZE-EZ0215
Stress-Echo Software
. Model EZU-SE1
TECHNICAL GUIDE

Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EZ0214-2
1
CONF’IDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of
Hitachi Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or
reproduced without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
NOTE to USER
CONTENTS
Page
Section 1 Installation of Stress-Echo Software (EZU-SEI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-l
1.1 Preparation ................................................................... l-l

1.2 Installation of MDAC (Microsoft Data Access Components) - - - - - - - - - - * - - - - - - - - - * - - - l-1
1.3 Installation of Echo-Corn (Stress-Echo Software) ................................. l-5
Section 2 Release of Option Protection ................................................. 2-1
Section 3 Remarks for Installation - * - - - - - - - - - - - * - - - - - - - - - - - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...*..... 3-1
Section4 VersionUpofSoftware..........-...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
(1) L2E-EZ0214
Chapter 1 Installation of Stress-Echo Software
The option of EZU-SE1 must be installed after EUB-System and Digital Capture Card
(EZU-Pi3) are completely installed.
.
1.1 Preparation
The necessary parts are as follows:
- Install MO for Stress-Echo Software

.
The Installation of EZU-SE1 should be done in the following procedure

(1) To install MDAC (Microsoft Data Access Component)
(2) To install Echo-Corn (Stress-Echo Software) a
The details are described from next page.
1-l L2E-EZ0214
1.2 Installation of MDAC (Microsoft Data Access Components)
The procedure to install MDAC(Microsoft Data Access Components) are described.
(1) Turn on the power to the ultrasound scanner. When booting Windows NT (OS) is
followed by the software start screen, press the E key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt
key to open the Explorer.
. (2) Insert the Install MO into the MO drive.
(3) Select Removable Disk@ drive) in WindowsNT Explorer, then double click the
“MDAC.exe” icon.
(4) The installer starts up. Please select ‘Yes” button in the following dialog.
L2E-EZ0214
(5) Confirmation dialog appears. Please press “Continue” button.
(6) In install dialog below, press the button next to “Complete”
1-3 L2E-EZ02 14
(7) Installation is completed. Press “OK” button. I
By the above procedure, the installation of MDAC has been completed.
When “OK” button is pressed, the Windows NT Explorer again appears. Please go ahead to
“1.3 Installation of Echo-Corn (Stress-Echo Software)“.
1-4 L2E-EZ0214
1.3 Installation of Echo-Corn (Stress-Echo Software)
The Echo-Com(Stress-Echo Software) should be installed in the following steps.
(1) Select “Removable Disk” @ drive) in Windows NT Explore, then double-click the
“StressSetup.exe” as follows:
Desktop
(2) The installer starts up. Press “Install Echo-Corn” button.
The software is automatically installed depending on the System status (NTSUPAL).
1-5 LZE-EZ02 14
(3) When Installation is completed, the message dialog appears. Press “OK” button.
(4) Press “Close” button to close the installer.
By the above procedure, the Echo-Corn (Stress-Echo Software) has been installed.
1-6 L2E-EZ0214
Chapter 2 Release of Option Protection
2.1 Preparation
- AUTHENTIC DISK
2.2 Procedure

(3) Press the Main Menu key, select Setup, select System, then press “Entry Opt.“.
(4) The disk is automatically unprotected. When it succeeds, the message shown in the
figure below is displayed. If no dialog appears, check it the AUTHENTIC DISK
properly corresponds to the system.
(6) Click the [OK] button on the message shown below.
2-l L2E-EZ0214
Chapter 3 Remarks for Installation
- If the option of Digital Capture Card (EZU-Pi3) is installed after the option of Stress-
Echo Software (EZU-SEl), there is a possibility that Stress-Echo software will not
work properly. In that case, do the following procedures.
(1) Install MDAC (Refer to 1.2)

(2) In WindowsNT Explorer, double-click the “AppReg.bat” in “C:VI’omTec” folder of the
ultrasound scanner.
If the Stress-Echo software still does not work properly after applying the above steps, it
is necessary to re-install the Echo-Com(Stress-Echo Software) in the following procedure.
- Echo-Com(Stress-Echo Software) can be re-installed in the following steps:
(1) While the system is working, make backup MO of files to manage the data of Stress-
Echo Examinations by selecting “Backup List” in the sub menu of “Main Menu” /
“Setup” / “Stress”
(2) Install Echo-Corn (Refer to 1.3).
(3) After Installation has been finished, turn on the system and load again the backup files
which was stored in the MO by selecting “Load List” in the sub menu of “Main Menu” /
“Setup” / “Stress”
NOTE: As per the way to invoke WindowsNT Explorer, please refer to 1.2 (1).
3-l LZE-EZ0214
C
Chapter 4 Version Up of Software
4.1 Preparation
;
Since Stress-Echo software works together with EUB software (EUB software means the
main software of the ultrasound system), please be sure to upgrade the both EUB software
and Stress-Echo software at the same time so that the combination of software versions *
between Stress-Echo software and EUB Software should be correct.
.
The correct combination of EUB software and Stress-Echo software is as follows:
(Please refer to the label of install MO for the software versions)
4.2 Version-up Procedure
Stress-Echo software should be upgraded at the same time when EUB software is upgraded. j
The procedure to upgrade Stress-Echo software is as follows:
(1) Save the setup data for stress-echo as backup in accordance with the chapter 3 of
Technical Guide for EUB software.
(2) After installation of EUB software, install the new version of Stress-Echo software in
accordance with “Chapter 1 Installation of Stress-Echo Software” of this technical guide.
(3) Restore the backup data for stress-echo in accordance with the chapter 3 of Technical *
Guide for EUB software.
. i
4-1 L2E-EZ0214
Start-Up Stress echo Examination
a key displays Base Menu to select the optional functions.
To start stress-echo examination, enter Patient ID and Patient Name.
New Examination
[F2 : NewExam] key displays the following dialog. By pressing mew] button,
The Patient ID and Patient Name are registered in Stress-echo databaseas new patient.
.. ‘.. -^ it. 1 - i
I
Next, Protocol selection dialog appears. Select a protocol for examination
ROI-Setting
Size : Put the trackball on the comer of the yellow frame (ROI) and
pressENTER key, then the size of ROI canbe changed.
Position : Put the trackball on the centerof ROI andpressENTER key,
then the ROI can be moved.
By pressingENTER key, the size or the positionis fixed.
Capturing: Image
SelectAcquire button on the tool bar, the capturingimageis started.
The acquisitionis performedin accordancewith the protocol.
2
Selecting Best-loop Images
Best loop of acquired images is selected for each stage and view.
The all loops for a view of the selected stage are displayed. Select the best
loop by pressing ENTER key.
Repeat the selection against all views of all stages.
3
I
Wall Motion Scoring (WMS) Mode
I
I Wall Motion is evaluated by scoring each segment. The each segment is colored
in the score window at the uooer left of a screen. I
To score the segments, select color Corn the top-left part of the screen,
then click the segment to score.
Basis of WMS(wall-motion scoring)

Stress-echo Software applies 16segmment model which is
recommended by ASE (American Society of Echocardiography)
to evaluate wall motion.
Cannot evaluate
. Grey
Normal Green
Hypokinetic
Akinetic Blue
1nvnkinatir Red
4
4
Volume Measurement of Left Ventricle
LV tool measures the volume of Left Ventricle from the images acquired on
4 chamber and 2 chamber in Stress-echo examination.
WMS Report LV measurement Report
5
Creation and Edit of Protocol
[Protocol Editor] button on the tool bar invokes Protocol Editor.
Levels and Views are added or modified on the editor.
Archive Module
Archive Module consists of Work Archive, Buffer Archive and Long Term Arch ive.
The acquired images are stored into Work Archive. The Buffer Archive is set for the
outside media (MO).
Caphlred Image Data
6
6
WideView image
Original Image
WideView Image
Select WideView image option

When m key is pressed, selectable optional functions
(base menu) are displayed.
When B 1s selected, a function menu related to

WideVie: is dis
Display WideView function
Image capturing is started by pressing the function menu(start).

When below mentioned operations are performed, the status
turns to this mode.
- Function menu(stop)
- Freeze ON
<CAUTION>
1. At first the moving direction of probe is automatically recognized.

So, if you start to produce the wide view image after you start to move
the probe, it is possible to display the wide view image smoothly.
2. If it becomes difficult to keep the producing accuracy of wide view

image, a warning display “REV’ blinks at lower right part of image.
To avoid this move the probe slowly.
3. When you move the probe, be careful not to shift it to short axis
‘direction
2
8
ICine memory display
It is possible to display the wide view image and original image simultaneously.
l.By pressing the function menu (toggle 3) the wide view image is displayedat
left side and the original image is displayed at right side on the monitor.
2. Yellow frame displayed on the wide view image indicates the position of the
original image within the wide view image.
* When the trackball is used, the position can be moved freely.
- When the function menu (toggle 4) is pressed, the yellow frame moves
automatically from present position to the last position.
Wide View function

In STOP mode it is possible to change the display status of wide view
image.
1. Rotating display
It is possible to rotate the wide view image by utilizing Angle encoder.
2. Image enlarging/reducing display

It is possible to display the wide view image in enlarged or reduced
manner.
3. ,Change of body mark display position

It is possible to change its position.
4. Image saving
Wide view images can be saved in BMP,TIFF or JPEG type.
3
9
Feb.& 2002 EUB-6500 Technical Training
. .
EUB-6500Onm
(EZU-MM17 = EZUMM16(Cine) + ODM)
1 . Operation
( 1) Start Real-time ODM
If the following all conditions are satisfied, then “ODM” can be selected F3 of “Mode
Depended” function menu.
# Either Sector or 10R convex probe is selected
# B/W- B/M mode
# Freeze Off
(2) Adjust beam line

-Move with track ball
. =Rotate 1 deg. with Angle encoder, 45 deg. with Angle s/w
(3) Dual ODM

=Select F2”Dual ODM” of “Mode Depended”.
-Beam line center control mode (a) Common (b) Independent
Switch the mode with F4”Independent” of “Mode Depended”.
-Switch controlled beam line with Enter button beside track ball.
(4) ODM image quality

-Invoke “Image Process” function. F5:“ODM- r “(5 steps), F6:“ODM-Enh.“(4 steps)
(5) Cine memory ODM

If the following all conditions are satisfied, then “ODM” can be selected F3 of “Mode
Depended”.
# Either Sector or 10R convex probe is selected
# B/W- B mode
# Density 1, Single focus etc
##Freeze On
Feb.& 2002 EUB-6500 Technical Training
EUB-6500 3D option EZU-3D2 (Untracked)/ 3D2S (Maenetic tracked)
1. Difference to EUB-6000
(1) Component
-Both Capture board and Twin peddle foot s/w are treated as other options.
Capture board (Analog -> Digital) EZU-Pi3 (necessary)
Twin peddle foot s/w EZU-FS2
(2) Improvements
*High image quality with Digital capture
=CFI is supported in addition to CFA
l SCSI Color Video Printer is supported
(“Print”, “RECl”,“BEC2” can be used when 2D software is displayed)
2. Notification for EZU-3D2S Magnetic sensor ( same as EZU3DlS)
(1) Switch of M agnetic sensor unit (FLY <-> STBY >

If you use magnetic sensor, then select “FLY” after system starts up completely. When you
finish to use magnetic sensor, select “STBY”.
(2) Probe scan movement

Pls use Parallel scan. We support neither rotation nor fan scan.
WideView Software
Model EZU-WS2
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EZ0210-2
CONFIDENTIALITY: This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi Medical Corporation

and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or reproduced without the prior written permission of
Hitachi Medical Corporation. Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2002. All rights reserved.
NOTE to USER
Contents
Page
Chapter 1 Installation of WideView Software (EZU–WS2) ･････････････････････････ 1-1
1.1 Preparation ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1

1.2 Unprotection Procedure ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1
(1) L2E-EZ0210
Chapter 1 Installation of Wide View Software (EZU-WS2)
1.1 Preparation
1) Prepare the AUTHENTIC DISK which is able to authenticate the EZU-WS2.
2) When the system is not equipped with the digital capture card (EZU-Pi3), it is necessary to install it
previously.
1.2 Unprotection Procedure

The operation procedures for unprotection are shown below.
(1) Boot the system.

(3) Press Main Menu key, click “Setup”, “system” and then “Entry Opt.” sequentially.
(4) The software is automatically unprotected. When the unprotection is successfully completed, the dialog
“Successful unprotection dialog” is displayed as shown in Fig.1-1.
If it is not displayed, check to see if AUTHENTIC DISK is compatible with the system and make sure of
the AUTHENTIC DISK label.
Successful unprotection dialog
Fig.1-1

(6) Click “OK” button on “Successful unprotection dialog”.
(7) The system is automatically rebooted.
(8) Select the probe for Wide View Software, linear or convex.
(9) Freeze OFF.
(10) Press OPTION key. The function menu related to WideView mode is displayed as shown in Fig.1-2.
1-1 L2E-EZ0210
WideView mode is started and the function menu chagnes as shown in Fig.1-3.
Fig.1-2 Function menu (WideView mode OFF)
Fig.1-3 Function menu (WideView mode ON)
1-2 L2E-EZ0210
Chapter 2 The change method of an option value
This setup is in the state optimal at the time of factory shipments. I ask you not to change a setup except for the
case of being special.
A setting item is shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 setting item

item details range
Width of paste region Width which actually sticks. 1 ～ width of an
analysis domain
(pixel)
Threshold of signal The threshold of the signal 0 ～ 255 (level)
detection luminosity it is considered that is a
noise.
Threshold of signal for The threshold of a signal which 0 ～ 255 (level)
rotation judges effective depth.
If the [WIDE VIEW] button is pushed in a Service Tools dialog, the dialog of Fig. 2-1 will be displayed.
A Probe list connectable with equipment in use is displayed on the [Probe] list.
（１）Choose probe from the [Probe] list and change a value with a spin button (or it changes directly with a
keyboard).
（２）Repeat 1. to change a setup to two or more probe.
（３）When returning to a factory setting value, choose probe to return and push the [Default] button.
（４）If it avoids, the [OK] button will be pushed and a dialog will be closed.
（５）When canceling change, push the [Cancel] button.
Fig. 2-1 WideView dialog
1-1 L2E-EZ0210
Network Card
Model EZU-Pi 2
TECHNICAL GUIDE
--- Installation of Options---

Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EZ0219- 1
CONFIDENTIALITY : This niaterial including drawings contains proprietaq

information of Hitachi Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third
party or reproduced without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
I I
NOTE to USER
CONTENTS
Page
Chapter 1 Installation of Network Card (EZU-Pi2) ....................................... l-l
1.1 Package List I................................; ................................ 1-1
1.2 InstallationofDigitalCaptureCard.. ........................................... 1-1
Chapter 2 Chapter2 Installation of Driver ............................................... 2-l
2.1 Preparation ................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Installation of Network Capture Card ............................................ 2-l
Chapter 3 Chapter3 Release of Option Protection ........................................ 3-1
3.1 Preparation ................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Procedure ..................................................................... 3-1
(1) 1 LZE-EZ.0219
Chapter1 installation of Network Card
1.1 Package List

(1) Network card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ],
(2) ~3S~~Sscrew.‘..‘..“‘..‘.‘..“‘...’...”’..’... ,........* s.... 1.
(3) Mcable . . ..“..“....“........................................].
1.2 Installation of ,Digital Capture Card
(1) Remove the cover

(2) Insert the network card. [ SLOT No. “B” I
(3) Attach the cover.
(4) Wire the LAN cable.
H 1-2-1
TOP cover
Hanger knob for probe

I
unit
l-l LIE-E20219
Network card
Rear cover
/g l-2--2
l-2 3 LlEXZ0219
Chanter2 Installation of Driver
Hereinafter, an installation of network card driver to the scanner and unlock of option
by certification key will be performed.
2.1 Preparation
1) NET DRIVER1 (3.5” FD)
2) NET DRIVER2 (3.5” FD)
3) SYSTEM MO (3.5” MO)
2.2 Installation of Network Capture Card

(1) Put ON the power of the scanner.
(2) Press “Ctrl+Alt” + “E” immediately after a logo-bit map is displayed. Explore is
booted up.
(3) From Explorer of WindowsNT select Eub-us folder in C drive, then double click a file
EUBResetReg in the folder.
&$zzJ (C:)
:’ @.a Daosdk
: q.a Eub-us
i i $I 0 Bitmap
i f CflLLl Data
i ;. m FilingText
i j
: j ;, Cl mc3msg
l f
i ; i, Q MergedFolder
i i
i : Q ,m MultiPrint
t ;
i [ I&Q Tools
i \-..a Install
i @.m Program Files
2-l L2EX.20219
(4) Since a dialog as shown below is displayed, press OK button.
(5) Press “Ctrl+Alt” + “Del” to display WindowsNT Security.
1 Logon Information ,pi
II
IIIll
(6) Select “Shutdown” button displayed in the dialog.

(7) A dialog “Shutdown Computer” is displayed. Select “Shutdown” and press OK
button.
Notice : In this dialog there may be a case that there are three choices. Even in that
case select “Shutdown”
2-2 L2E-EZQ2 I9
(8) Await till a dialog “Shutdown Computer” as shown below is displayed.
Shutdown Computer
(9) When the dialog is displayed, put OFF a breaker at the side of the scanner.
(10) Put ON again the power of the scanner. Now the scanner restarts as a
WindowsNT machine.
(11) As “Begin Logon” is displayed, press “Ctrl+Alt” + “Del”.
(12) When “Logon Information” is displayed, confirm that User name is set to
“Administrator”.
Enter a Password “hmc” and select OK button.
(13) Desk top of Window&T is displayed. From Control Panel in My Computer select
Network.
Options Programs
: Display Fonts Internet Keyboard
2-3 L2E-Em219
(14) A dialog “Network” is displayed.
(15) Select Adapters tab. Delete an item displayed in Network Adapters by Remove
button.
(16) When the Remove button is pressed, a dialog as shown below is displayed, then
select Yes button.
2-4 L2E-EZ0219
(17) Select Protocols tab. Delete the item displayed in by Remove button.
(18) When Remove is pressed, a dialog as shown below is displayed, then select Yes
button.
(19) Similarly, delete all items displayed in Network Protocols by Remove button.
2-5 L2E-EZ0219
(20) Select Services .tab. Select Workstation from displayed Network Services and
press Remove button.
I
(21) When Remove is pressed, a dialog as shown below is displayed, then select Yes
button.
(22) Similarly, delete all items displayed in Network Services by Remove button.
(23) Press Close button in the dialog “Network” in order to close the dialog.
2-6 L2E-IT0219
(24) As a dialog as shown below is displayed, select Yes button to restart the scanner.
(25) When a desktop of Window&R is displayed, select Network from Control Panel.
(26) As a dialog as shown below is displayed, select Yes button.
(27) A dialog “Network Setup Wizard” is displayed. Confirm that “Wired to the
network” is selected, then select Next > button.
2-l L2E-EZ.02 I9
(28) Press Select from list button.
(29) A dialog “Select Network Adapter” is displayed. Insert NET DRIVERl(FD),

then press Have Disk button
3Com Etherlink III ISA/PCMCIA Adapter
C __
2-8 L2E-EM219
(30) A dialog “Insert Disk” is displayed. Confirm that the dialog is as shown below,
then select OK button.
(31) A dialog “Select OEM Option” is displayed. Confirm that the dialog is as shown
below, then select OK button.
2-9 L2E-EZO219
(32) A dialog “Network Setup Wizard” is displayed. Confirm that the dialog is as
shown below, then select Next > button.
(33) Select all items displayed in Network Protocols, then select Next > button.
ompatible Transport 1Select all.
2- 10 L2E-EZ0219
(34) Confirm that the dialog is as shown below, then select Next > button.
(35) Select Next > bqttqq.
2- 11 L2E-EZ0219
(36) A dialog “Windows NT Setup” is displayed. Insert SYSTEM MO. Change the
setting to D drive, then select Continue button.
1 Change A+ D
(37) The installation is automatically started.
(38) When a dialog “Setup Message” is displayed, take out NET DRIVERl(FD) from
the scanner and insert NET DRIVER2(FD), then select OK button.
2- 12 L2E-Em219
(40) As a dialog “TCP/IP Setup ” is displayed, select No button.

Notice: Select No without fail.
Select without fail
(41) When a dialog “Microsoft TCP/IP Properties” is displayed, set IP Address and
Subnet Masks shown in below figure respectively, then press OK button.
2- 13 L2E-F‘zoz 19
(42) Confirm the dialog is as shown below, then select Next > button.
2- 14 L2E-ES3219
(43) Select Next > button.
(44) After a while, a dialog as shown below is displayed. Confirm that Computer
Name is set to the scanner model name, then select Next > button.
2- 15 L2E-EZO219
(45) Select Finish button.
(46) A dialog “Network Settings Change” is displayed. Take out NET

DRIVERB(FD) from the scanner, then select Yes button.
.. .
(47) The scanner is restarted. Similarly, display the desktop of Window&U.

Note: Refer to the procedures (11) and (12). /l’i c3
/- Ix< L-i-
(48) After a while, a’dialog as shown below is displayed, then press OK button.
” /
c,;r>; fi‘,lk4 />c.$d
2- 16 L2E-EZ0219
(49) Select Servicepack folder in SYSTEM MO and double click Sp6i386 in that folder.
&a [F:]
i .-@j Control Panel
‘--Q Printers
ti Network Neighborhood
‘TJ
-f& Recycle Bin
2- 17 L2E-FZ0219
61) A s a dialog “WindowsNT
’ Service Pack Setup” is displayed, select OK button.
(52) Check “Accept the License Agreement” , then select Install button.
Check.
2- 18
(53) The installation’is automatically started.
(54) After the installation is finished, a dialog as shown below is displayed, then press
Restart button.
(55) Reboot of the scanner is started. Display the desktop of WindowsNT, by carrying otit the
procedure (11) and (12), then select Devices from Control Panel.
Note: Refer to the procedures (11) and (12).
2- 19 L2E-EZ0219
(56) A dialog “Devices” is displayed.
(57) Change Startup Type (ref. to 0) displayed in this dialog. The Device (ref. to 0)
needed to be changed and its Startup Type is shown in the table below.
Table: Startup Type of each Device

Device Startup Type
AFD Networking Support Environmer Automatic
tcaicchg Manual
(58) Setting method for Startup Type is described below.

1) Using the dialog “Devices” , select the Device to be changed (ref. to 0)
2) Press Startup button (ref. to @I) . A dialog “Device” as shown below is displayed.
! j!,
According to the Startup Type,

select an appropriate one.
3) According to the Startup Type in [Table: Startup Type of each deviceJ select Startup Type.
4) Select OK button.
5) To all the Devices shown in rTable: Startup Type of each DeviceJ repeat the
procedure l)-4).
6) Select Close button of the dialog Devices.
2 - 20 L2E-EZ0219
(59) Select Services from Control Panel.
(60) A dialog “Services” is displayed.
ClipBook Server
15 Computer Browser Started
;j DHCP Client
ji Directory Replicator
$
ia
EventLog
Messenger
-0 Started
Started
;b Net Logon
ii Network DDE
(61) Change the Startup type (ref. to 0) shown in this dialog. The service (ref.
to @> needed to be changed and its Startup Type is shown in the table below.
Table: Startup ‘&pe of each Service

Service Startup type
Computer Browser Manual
Remote Procedure Call(RPC) Locater Automatic
2-21 L2EXZ0219
(62) Setting method, for Startup Type of Service is described below.
1) Select a service (ref. to 0) to be changed in the dialog Services.
2) Press Startup button (@I. A dialog “Service” is displayed.
According to the Startup Type,

select an appropriate one.
3) According to the Startup Type in [Table: Startup Type of each Service] select
Startup Type.
4) Press OK button.
5) To all the Devices shown in [Table: Startup Type of each Device] repeat the
procedure l)-4).
6) Press Close button of the dialog Devices.
2 - 22 L2E-EZ0219
(63) Perform under mentioned work at every OS of WindowsNT. If this work is
performed wrongly, the scanner can not be booted up. So, be careful of the work.
( 1) In case of English OS and Japanese OS
Select Eub-us folder in C drive, then double click a file EN-EUBSetReg in that folder.
( 2 ) In case of French OS
Select Eub-us folder in C drive, then double click a file FR EUBSetReg in that folder.
When doubie clicked, a dialog of message as indicated below is displayed,
then press OK button.
“Setup Display mode is failure.”
(64) Press “Ctrl+Alt” + “Del” to display a dialog “WindowsNTSecurit” , then select the Shutdown
button displayed in the dialog.
(65) A dialog “Shutdown Computer” is displayed. Select “Shutdown” , then press

OK button.
Notice: In this dialog there may be a case that there are choices. Even in that case
select “Shutdown” without fail.
2 - 23 L2E-EZ0219
(66) Await until a dialog “Shutdown Computer” as shown below is displayed.
I Shutdown Computer I
(67) When the dialog is displayed, take out SYSTEM MO from the scanner, then put
OFF the breaker at the side of the scanner.
(68) Making reference to a separate specification [Protection releasing operation for
paid options] , release the protection.
(69) After the release, the scanner is automatically restarted. So, wait for it.
(70) Press Main Menu key. Select Setup-Image Filing. . . from Main menu. Confirm
that in the displayed dialog “Set Up” button of “Network Folder” is displayed
in black letter
(71) Put OFF the power source of the scanner.
2 - 24 27 L2E-EZO2f9
Chapter3 Release of Option Protection
3.1 Preparation
- AUTHENTIC DISK
3.2 Procedure
(1:) Turn ON the power supply of the ultrasound scanner device.

(2:) Insert the AUTHENTIC DISK.
(31 Press the Main Menu key, select Setup, select System, then press “Entry Opt.“.
(4) The disk is automatically unprotected. When it succeeds, the message shown in the figure
below is displayed. If no dialog appears, check it the AUTHENTIC DISK properly
corresponds to the system.
(6) Click the [OKI button on the message shown below.
(8) Press Main Menu key. Select Setup-+Image Filing... from Main menu. Confirm
that in the displayed dialog “Set Up” button of “Network Folder” is displayed
in black letter
(9) Put OFF the power source of the scanner.
3-1 28 L2E-EZO219
EUB-6500/8500
Flash Memory
Version-up Procedure

* “A.,“1” uyu..
ElE-EA1392-1

This manual describes version-up procedure of Flash Memory on each board.
Operate when the system has been normally booted.
1. Follow Step (1) to (6) to enable “Ctrl + Alt + Del” keys.

(1) Press Ctrl + Alt + S keys. The following screen appears.
(2) Select “Service Tools” from Select.
(3) After entering “SERVICETOOL” for Password, click the “OK” button.
NOTE: For entering Password, make sure to type it in capital letters. (With the state
of Caps Lock key located on the keyboard being lit in orange color.)
+ i3j
(4) The following screen (Service Tools) appears. Click the “Ctrl + Alt + Del” button.
-b (4)
-b (6)
(5) The following screen appears. Click “Valid” then the “Close” button.
(5)
(6) Click the “OK” button to close the Service Tools screen.
.
2. Follow Step (1) to (4) below to terminate the EUB software.

(1) Press the Ctrl + Alt + Del keys.
(2) The following screen appears. Click the ‘Task Manager” button.
Windows NT Securjty w
Logon Information
................... ............................... ...................
................... ............................... ...................
Use the Task Manager to .........
(3) The following screen appears. Click the “Processes” tag, and select “EUB-US. exe”,
then click the “End Process” button.
2 00 0:00:20 200K
20 00 0:oo: 00 200K
24 00 o:oo:oo 252K
34 00 0:00:01
SERVICES.EXE 40 00 0:00:01
43 00 o:oo:oo
67 00 0:00:00
80 00 o:oo:oo
83 00 0:00:01
97 00 0:00:03
NDDEAGNT.EXE 101 00 o:oo:oo
105 01 0:00:08
106 00 0:00:03
112 00 o:oo:oo
114 00 D:oo:oo
116 00 o:oo:oo
136 00 0:00:00
142 00 0:00:31
. ,
(4) The following screen appears. Click the “Yes” button (EUB-US.exe is terminated).
3. Follow Step (1) to (6) to start the software for flash memory write.
(1) Select the “Applications” tag in the following screen, and click the “New Task” button.
(2) The following screen appears. Click the “Browse” button,

(3) The following screen appears. Select the drive C from “Look in”.
,_ .“.“.
Hemovable Disk [E:]
&J Network Neighborhood
(4) Select (double click) Flash Prog. *.*.exe in the folder “C:\EUB-US\Tools”.
SystemParameter.exe
TestPattern .O.exe
VerCheck8.1 .exc
(5) Click the “OK” button in the following screen (Flash Prog.*.*.exe starts).
MFlashProa3.2.exr
.
6) Click the check box in the following screen (Windows NT Task Manager ends).
L
4. Follow Step (1) to (9) to version-up the flash memory.

(1) Click “Sysreset” in the following screen.
1
.
(2) Insert “Flash Memory FD” or “Flash Memory MO” into the floppy disk drive or MO
drive.
(3) Click “Load Flash-file” in the following screen.
(4) The following screen appears. Select “Floppy” or “Removable Disk” from “Look in”.
(5) Files in the floppy disk or MO are displayed. Select (double click) any one of them.
Flash-file” appears as shown

, location, version, and check
File name
PCB name
Location
Version
’ Check sum
. *
(7) Click “Program”. “You are going to program Flash-ROM” and “OK/Cancel” are
displayed as shown below. Click “OK”. Flash memory write will be automatically
carried out.
(8) When flash memory write is completed, “Program completed” is displayed as shown
below.
(9) When multiple files exist in “Flash Memory FD” or “Flash Memory MO”, return to (3)
and select the other file to load and write flash memory (no particular order). Repeal.
this steu. and if all files write is comnleted Droceed to Item 5.
. l
5. Follow Step (1) to (3) below to shut down the system.

(1) Press the CM+ Alt + Del keys.
(2) The following screen appears. Click the “Shut Down” button.
Windows NT Security w
Logon Information
I . ... ... ... .. .. .. ... . ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... . ... ... .. ....
................... ............................... ...................
I
Use the Task Manager to . . . . . . . . .
/II)]
II1
(3) The following screen appears. Click “Shutdown and power off” and then click the
“OK” button (the system power is shut off). Contents of version-up will be reflected
after Power ON.
Shutdown Computer w
Shutting down will .. ... . ..... .... ........ ... ..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
0 Shutdown

@ ‘ shuta,~~:~~.,~~~~~:;b;ff.:’ :‘_/
,_. ._ I
E
DICOM Conformance Statement
EUB-6500
Tokyo, Japan
E1E-EZ1402-2
Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2002, 2003. All rights reserved.

Definitions
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine

FSC File-set Creator
FSU File-set Updator
MPPS Modality Performed Procedure Step
PDU Protocol Data Unit
SCP Service Class Provider
SCU Service Class User
SOP Service Object Pair
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
UID Unique Identifier
VR Value Representation
-i-
- ii -
Contents
Definitions ............................................................................................................................................. ⅰ
1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Purpose of This Document ............................................................................................................1
2 Implementation Model.........................................................................................................................2
2.1 Application Data Flow Diagram ...................................................................................................2
3 Application Entity Title (AE) Specifications ....................................................................................3
3.1 Storage AE specification................................................................................................................3
3.1.1 Association Establishment Policies ........................................................................................3
3.1.2 Association initiation by Real-World Activity ........................................................................4
3.1.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files ...............................................................................5
3.2 Media Storage AE specification ....................................................................................................7
3.2.2 Association initiation by Real-World Activity ........................................................................8
3.2.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files ...............................................................................8
3.3 Printing AE specification ..............................................................................................................9
3.3.2 Association initiation by Real-World Activity ......................................................................10
3.3.3 Basic Film Session SOP Class..............................................................................................10
3.3.4 Basic Film Box SOP Class ....................................................................................................11
3.3.5 Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class ................................................................................12
3.3.6 Basic Color Image Box SOP Class........................................................................................12
3.3.7 Printer SOP Class.................................................................................................................13
3.4 Modality WorkList AE specification ...........................................................................................14
3.4.1 Association Establishment Policies ......................................................................................14
3.4.2 Association initiation by Real-world Activity.......................................................................14
3.4.3 AE Attributes ........................................................................................................................15
3.5 Modality Performed Procedure Step AE specification ...............................................................18
3.5.1 Association Establishment Policies ......................................................................................18
3.5.2 Association initiation by Real-World Activity ......................................................................18
3.5.3 AE Attributes ........................................................................................................................19
4 Communication Profile ......................................................................................................................22
4.1 TCP/IP Stack ...............................................................................................................................22
5 Extensions/Specializations/Privatizations ........................................................................................22
5.1 Standard Extended/Specialized/Private SOPs...........................................................................22
5.2 Private Transfer Syntaxes ..........................................................................................................22
6 Configuration .....................................................................................................................................22
7 Support of extended character sets ...................................................................................................22
Index......................................................................................................................................................23
- iii -
- iv -
1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of This Document
This document is DICOM Conformance Statement for DICOM software.
DICOM Transferring software is a service class user (SCU) for the transferring of DICOM
images to a remote DICOM Service class provider (SCP). DICOM Transferring software can
store image on the magneto-optical disk (MO disk) and Floppy Disk (FD).
DICOM Image Printing software can be a service class user (SCU) for the printing of DICOM
Images to a remote DICOM SCP.
DICOM WorkList software can be a service class user (SCU) for the Modality WorkList and
Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS).
1
2 Implementation Model
The DICOM Transferring software can transfer the images with DICOM 3.0 standard format.
DICOM Transferring software can store image on the magneto-optical disk (MO disk) and
Floppy Disk (FD).
DICOM Image Printing software can print the image with DICOM 3.0 standard format.
The DICOM WorkList software can query Modality WorkList Server and Modality Performed
Procedure Step (MPPS) Server.
2.1 Application Data Flow Diagram

DICOM 3.0 standard format Application Entity (AE) flow is following.
DICOM
Images Transferring
software Images stored
store DICOM
Storage SCU on Remote
System
DICOM Image
Image Printing
software Remote
print DICOM
Print SCU basic print
DICOM WorkList
User software Remote
Modality WorkList Modality
Query SCU
WorkList
DICOM WorkList
software Remote
User
Modality Performed
Procedure Step Modality Performed
Query
SCU
Procedure Step
DICOM Standard Interface

SCP
Images
store to
media DICOM Transferring FSC
DICOM media
FSU MO or FD
Storage FSC, FSU
Images
delete in
media
Fig. 2.1-1 Application Data Flow Diagram

2
3 Application Entity Title (AE) Specifications
3.1 Storage AE specification
The DICOM Transferring software provides the standard conformance for the following
DICOM3.0 Modality WorkList SOP classes as an SCU.
Table 3.1-1 Storage SOP Class

SOP Class SOP Class UID
Verification SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.1.1
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage (Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage (New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1
Ultrasound Image storage (Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6
Ultrasound Image storage (New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1
3.1.1 Association Establishment Policies
3.1.1.1 General
Maximum PDU size offered : 16,384 bytes

Minimum PDU size accepted : 1,024 bytes
Note: Must be 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K or 16K or > 16K. (bytes)
3.1.1.2 Number of associations

The number of simultaneous associations : 1
3.1.1.3 Asynchronous Nature

Storage AE will not use asynchronous operations.
3.1.1.4 Implementation Identifying Information
The DICOM Transferring software will respond with the following implementation
identifying parameters.
Implementation class UID : 2.16.840.1.113669.2.931128
Implementation version name : MergeCOM3_242
Note: MergeCOM3 is the trademark of Merge Technology Inc., U.S.A.
This software uses libraries of Merge Technology Inc. and includes the license to
obtain the right to use it.
For detail, refer to the Internet address: http://www.merge.com.
3
3.1.2 Association initiation by Real-World Activity
3.1.2.1 Real-World Activity

Storage AE will open an association at the time of a transferring start in Real-World
Activity.
3.1.2.1.1 Associated Real-World Activity
In Real-World Activity, an association is started at the time of the following operation.

- At the time of press S-WRITE key or M-WRITE key
- At the time of start to transfer from Transfer dialog
3.1.2.1.2 Proposed Presentation Contexts

Presentation Contexts is the composition shown in the following table.
Table 3.1-2 Presentation Context

Presentation Context Table
Abstract Syntax Transfer Syntax Role Extended
Name UID Name List UID List Negotiation
Verification SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.1.1 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Little Endian Syntax
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
Storage (Retired)
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
Storage (New)
Ultrasound Image storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
(Retired)
Ultrasound Image storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
(New)
Table 3.1-3 Transfer Syntax

Name List UID List
DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian Syntax 1.2.840.10008.1.2
JPEG Baseline(Process 1): 1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.50
Default Transfer Syntax for Lossy JPEG 8 Bit Image Compression
4
3.1.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files
Table 3.1-4 Image Tag Elements (1)
Name Tag VR Contents
File Meta Information Version 0002, 0001 OB “0001”
Media Storage SOP Class UID 0002, 0002 UI Single new : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1”
Single retired : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6”
Multi new : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1”
Multi retired : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3”
Media Storage SOP Instance 0002, 0003 UI 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.yyyym
UID mdd.1hhmmss.i
Transfer Syntax UID 0002, 0010 UI DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian Syntax
: “1.2.840.10008.1.2”
JPEG Baseline(Process 1)
: “1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.50”
Implementation Class UID 0002, 0012 UI “2.16.840.1.113669.2.931128”
Implementation Version Name 0002, 0013 SH “MergeCOM3_232”
Source Application Entity Title 0002, 0016 AE SCU Name (AE title of ultrasound device)
Specific Character Set 0008, 0005 CS At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
acquired from WorkList server.
Instance Creation Date 0008, 0012 DA yyyymmdd
Instance Creation Time 0008, 0013 TM hhmmss
Instance Creator UID 0008, 0014 UI “1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14”
SOP Class UID 0008, 0016 UI Single new : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1”
Single retired : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6”
Multi new : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1”
Multi retired : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3”
SOP Instance UID 0008, 0018 UI 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.yyyym
mdd.1hhmmss.i
Study Date 0008, 0020 DA yyyymmdd
Series Date 0008, 0021 DA yyyymmdd
Content Date 0008, 0023 DA yyyymmdd
Study Time 0008, 0030 TM hhmmss
Series Time 0008, 0031 TM hhmmss
Content Time 0008, 0033 TM hhmmss
Accession Number 0008, 0050 SH “Accession #” for Patient Menu dialog
Modality 0008, 0060 CS “US”
Manufacturer 0008, 0070 LO Ultrasound equipment maker
Institution Name 0008, 0080 LO Hospital name
Referring Physician's Name 0008, 0090 PN At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Study Description 0008, 1030 LO
Operator's Name 0008, 1070 PN “Sonographer” for Patient Menu dialog
Admitting Diagnoses 0008, 1080 LO At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Description acquired from WorkList server.
Manufacturer's Model Name 0008, 1090 LO The model name of ultrasound equipment
Patient's Name 0010, 0010 PN “Name(Last Name, First Name)” for Patient
Menu dialog
Patient ID 0010, 0020 LO “ID” for Patient Menu dialog
Patient's Birth Date 0010, 0030 DA “Birth Date(YYYY/MM/DD)” for Patient Menu
dialog
Patient's Sex 0010, 0040 CS “Sex” for Patient Menu dialog
Other Patient IDs 0010, 1000 LO At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Patient's Age 0010, 1010 AS “Age” for Patient Menu dialog
5
Table 3.1-5 Image Tag Elements (2)
Name Tag VR Contents
Patient's Size 0010, 1020 DS “Height” for Patient Menu dialog
Patient's Weight 0010, 1030 DS “Weight” for Patient Menu dialog
Ethnic Group 0010, 2160 SH At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Additional Patient History 0010, 21B0 LT At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Last Menstrual Date 0010, 21D0 DA At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Patient Comments 0010, 4000 LT At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Software Version(s) 0018, 1020 LO The software version of ultrasound equipment
Frame Time 0018, 1063 DS
Heart Rate 0018, 1088 IS
Depth of Scan Field 0018, 5050 IS
Study Instance UID 0020, 000D UI 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.yyyym
mdd.1hhmmss
At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Series Instance UID 0020, 000E UI 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.yyyym
mdd.1hhmmss.n
Study ID 0020, 0010 SH yyyymmddn
Series Number 0020, 0011 IS 1
Instance Number 0020, 0013 IS n
Samples per Pixel 0028, 0002 US MONOCHROME2 : “1”
RGB, YBR_FULL_422 : “3”
Photometric Interpretation 0028, 0004 CS DICOM(B/W image) : “MONOCHROME2”
DICOM(Full color image) : “RGB”
DICOM(JPEG)(B/W) : “MONOCHROME2”
DICOM(JPEG)(Full color image) :
“YBR_FULL_422”
Planar Configuration 0028, 0006 US “0”
Number of Frames 0028, 0008 IS In the case of a Multi frame image, it sets up.
Frame Increment Pointer 0028, 0009 AT “0002 C347”
In the case of a Multi frame image, it sets up.
Rows 0028, 0010 US NTSC : “480”, PAL : “574”
Columns 0028, 0011 US NTSC : “640”, PAL : “760”
Bits Allocated 0028, 0100 US “8”
Bits Stored 0028, 0101 US “8”
High Bit 0028, 0102 US “7”
Pixel Representation 0028, 0103 US “0”
Window Center 0028, 1050 DS “128”
Window Width 0028, 1051 DS “256”
Lossy Image Compression 0028, 2110 CS No compression : “00”
Compression : “01”
Request Attributes Sequence 0040,0275 SQ
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0007 LO “Exam. Typ” for Patient Menu dialog
Description
>Scheduled Procedure Step ID 0040, 0009 SH At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
>Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001 SH At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
6
3.2 Media Storage AE specification
The DICOM Transferring software provides the standard conformance for the following
Table 3.2-1 Media Storage SOP Class

Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1
Ultrasound Image storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1
DICOM Media Storage Directory 10008.1.3.10
3.2.1.1 General



Media Storage AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The DICOM Transferring software will respond with the following implementation
7
Media Storage AE will open an association at the time of a transferring start in

Real-World Activity.


Abstract Syntax Transfer Syntax Extended
Role
Storage (New)
(New)
Table 3.2-3 Transfer Syntax

Name List UID List
3.2.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files
Please refer to Table 3.1-4~5.
8
3.3 Printing AE specification
The DICOM Image Printing software provides the standard conformance for the following
Table 3.3-1 Printing SOP Class

Basic Grayscale Print Management Meta SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9
Basic Color Print Management Meta SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18
3.3.1.1 General



Printing AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The DICOM Image Printing software will respond with the following implementation
9
Storage AE will open an association at the time of a printing start in Real-World Activity.

- At the time of press PRINT key
- At the time of click [Image Print] button in Filing dialog


Role
Basic Gray Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Management Meta Little Endian Syntax
SOP Class
Basic Color Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
SOP Class
This implies standard conformance for the following SOP Classes:

- Basic Film Session SOP Class
- Basic Film Box SOP Class
- Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class
- Basic Color Image Box SOP Class
- Printer SOP Class
Each of there SOP classes is described in the paragraphs to follow.
3.3.3 Basic Film Session SOP Class
Table 3.3-3 Basic Film Session Presentation Module

Name Tag Range Description
Number of Copies (2000, 0010) 1 to many
Print Priority (2000, 0020) HIGH
MED
LOW
Medium Type (2000, 0030) PAPER
CLEAR FILM
BLUE FILM
Film Destination (2000, 0040) MAGAZINE
PROCESSOR
BIN_i : 'i' is number.
Film Session Label (2000, 0050) Used
Memory Allocation (2000, 0060) ---- Not used
10
3.3.4 Basic Film Box SOP Class
Table 3.3-4 Basic Film Box Presentation Module

Image Display Format (2010, 0010) STANDARD\1,1
STANDARD\1,2
STANDARD\2,1
STANDARD\2,2
STANDARD\2,3
STANDARD\3,2
STANDARD\3,3
STANDARD\3,4
STANDARD\4,3
STANDARD\4,4
Annotation Display Format ID (2010, 0030) ---- Not used
Film Orientation (2010, 0040) PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Film Size ID (2010, 0050) 8INX10IN
10INX12IN
10INX14IN
11INX14IN
14INX14IN
14INX17IN
24CMX24CM
24CMX30CM
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) REPLICATE Configurable
BILINEAR
CUBIC
NONE
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) CUBIC
Border Density (2010, 0100) BLACK
WHITE
i : 'i' is number.
Empty Image Density (2010, 0110) ---- Not used
Min Density (2010, 0120) Limited by printer
Max Density (2010, 0130) Limited by printer
Trim (2010, 0140) YES
NO
Configuration Information (2010, 0150) used
11
3.3.5 Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class
Table 3.3-5 Basic Grayscale Image Box Pixel Presentation Modules

Image Position (2020, 0010) 1-n
Preformatted Grayscale Image (2020, 0110) used
Sequence
>Samples Per Pixel (0028, 0002) 1
>Photometric Interpretation (0028, 0004) MONOCHROME2
>Rows (0028, 0010) NTSC:480, PAL:574
>Columns (0028, 0011) NTSC:640, PAL:760
>Pixel Aspect Ratio (0028, 0034) 1/1
>Bits Allocated (0028, 0100) 8
>Bits Stored (0028, 0101) 8
>High Bit (0028, 0102) 7
>Pixel Representation (0028, 0103) 0
>Pixel Data (7FE0, 0010) used
Polarity (2020, 0020) ---- Not used
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) ---- Not used
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) ---- Not used
Requested Image Size (2020, 0030) ---- Not used
3.3.6 Basic Color Image Box SOP Class
Table 3.3-6 Basic Color Image Box Pixel Presentation Modules

Preformatted Color Image (2020, 0111) used
Sequence
>Photometric Interpretation (0028, 0004) RGB
>Planar Configuration (0028, 0006) 0
>Rows (0028, 0010) NTSC:480, PAL:574
>Columns (0028, 0011) NTSC:640, PAL:760
>Bits Stored (0028, 0101) 8
>High Bit (0028, 0102) 7
Polarity (2020, 0020) ---- not used
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) ---- not used
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) ---- not used
Requested Image Size (2020, 0030) ---- not used
12
3.3.7 Printer SOP Class
Table 3.3-7 Printer Modules

Printer Status (2110, 0010) ---- not used
Printer Status Info (2110, 0020) ---- not used
Printer Name (2110, 0030) ---- not used
Manufacturer (0008, 0070) ---- not used
Manufacturer Model Name (0008, 1090) ---- not used
Device Serial Number (0018, 1000) ---- not used
Software Versions (0018, 1020) ---- not used
Calibration Date (0018, 1200) ---- not used
Calibration Time (0018, 1201) ---- not used
13
3.4 Modality WorkList AE specification
The DICOM WorkList software provides the standard conformance for the following
Table 3.4-1 Modality WorkList SOP Class

Modality WorkList Information Model-FIND 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.31
3.4.1.1 General

The Modality WorkList will not use asynchronous operations.
The DICOM WorkList software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.


This software uses libraries of Merge Technology Inc. and includes the license to obtain
the right to use it.
3.4.2 Association initiation by Real-world Activity
Modality WorkList AE will open an association at the time of New Patient execution start
in Real-World Activity.

- At the time of click [New Patient] button in Patient Menu
14

Verification SOP 1.2.840.10008.1.1 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Class Little Endian Syntax
Modality WorkList 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4. DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Information Model-FIND 31 Little Endian Syntax
3.4.3 AE Attributes
The DICOM WorkList software queries Modality WorkList Server to use following
Matching keys.
Table 3.4-3 Inquiry Corresponding Keys

Description/Module Tag Key type Remarks
Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0100 R
Sequence
Modality 0008, 0060 R "US"
>Scheduled Station AE Title 0040, 0001 R AE title of Ultrasound scanner
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0002 R YYYYMMDD (today) or
Start Date YYYYMMDD-YYYYMMDD
(yesterday, today and tomorrow)
Patient ID 0010, 0020 R
The DICOM WorkList software can be accepted following tags except for tags that specifies
Remark "Not used".
Table 3.4-4 Response Attribute (1)

Description/Module Tag Key Type Remarks
SOP Common
Specific Character Set 0008, 0005 1C
Scheduled Procedure Step
Scheduled Procedure Step Sequence 0040, 0100 1
>Scheduled Station AE Title 0040, 0001 1
>Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date 0040, 0002 1
>Scheduled Procedure Step Time 0040, 0003 1
Modality 0008, 0060 1 "US"
>Scheduled Performing Physician's 0040, 0006 2 Set to "Sonographer" on
Name Patient menu.
>Scheduled Procedure Step Description 0040, 0007 1C Set to "Exam.typ" on
Patient menu.
>Scheduled Station Name 0040, 0010 2
>Scheduled Procedure Step Location 0040, 0011 2
>Scheduled Protocol Code Sequence 0040, 0008 1C Not used
>>Code Value 0008, 0100 1C Not used
>>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 3 Not used
15
>>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 1C Not used
>>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 3 Not used
>Pre-Medication 0040, 0012 2C Not used
>Scheduled Procedure Step ID 0040, 0009 1
>Requested Contrast Agent 0032, 1070 2C
>Scheduled Procedure step Status 0040, 0020 3 Not used
Requested Procedure
Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001 1
Requested Procedure Description 0032, 1060 1C
Requested Procedure Code Sequence 0032, 1064 1C Not used
>Code Value 0008, 0100 1C Not used
>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 1C Not used
>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 3 Not used
>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 3 Not used
Study Instance UID 0020, 000D 1
Referenced Study Sequence 0008, 1110 2 Not used
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 1C Not used
>Referenced SOP Instance UID 0008, 1155 1C Not used
Requested Procedure Priority 0040, 1003 2 Not used
Patient Transport Arrangements 0040, 1004 2 Not used
Name of Intended Recipients of Results 0040, 1010 3
Imaging Service Request
Accession Number 0008, 0050 2 Set to "Accession#" on
Patient menu.
Requesting Physician 0032, 1032 2 I Set to "Ordering
Physician" on
Patient menu.
Referring Physician's Name 0008, 0090 2
Visit Identification
Admission ID 0038, 0010 2 Not used
Visit Status
Current Patient Location 0038, 0300 2 Not used
Referenced Patient Sequence 0008, 1120 2 Not used
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 2 Not used
>Referenced SOP Instance UID 0008, 1155 2 Not used
Visit Admission
Admitting Diagnosis Description 0008, 1080 3
Patient Identification
Patient's Name 0010, 0010 1 Set to "Name" on Patient
menu.
Patient ID 0010, 0020 1 Set to "ID" on Patient menu.
Other Patient IDs 0010, 1000 3
Patient Demographic
Patients Birth Date 0010, 0030 2 Set to "Birth Date" on Patient
menu.
Patient's Sex 0010, 0040 2 Set to "Sex" on Patient menu.
Patient’s Primary Language Code 0010, 0101 3 Not used
Sequence
16
>Code Value 0008,0100 1 Not used
>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 1 Not used
>Patient’s Primary Language Code 0010, 0102 3 Not used
Modifier Sequence
>Code Value 0008,0100 1 Not used
>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 1 Not used
Patient's Weight 0010, 1030 2 Set to "Weight" on
Patient menu.
Confidentiality constraint on patient 0040, 3001 2 Not used
data
Patient's Size 0010, 1020 3 Set to "Height" on
Patient menu.
Ethnic Group 0010, 2160 3
Patient Comments 0010, 4000 3
Patient Medical
Patient State 0038, 0500 2 Not used
Pregnancy Status 0010, 21C0 2
Medical Alerts 0010, 2000 2 Not used
Contrast Allergies 0010, 2110 2 Not used
Special Needs 0038, 0050 2 Not used
Additional Patient History 0010, 21B0 3
Last Menstrual Date 0010, 21D0 3
17
3.5 Modality Performed Procedure Step AE specification
The DICOM WorkList software provides the standard conformance for the following
Table 3.5-1 Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class

Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.3.1.2.3.3
3.5.1.1 General

Modality Performed Procedure Step AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The DICOM WorkList software will respond with the following implementation

the right to use it.
Modality WorkList AE will open an association at the time of selecting of patient or End
Exam execution in Real-World Activity.

- At the time of select patient in Patient List
- At the time of press End Exam key
18

Role
Modality Performed 1.2.840.10008.3.1.2.3.3 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Procedure Step SOP Little Endian Syntax
Class
3.5.3 AE Attributes
The DICOM WORKLIST software supports the following tag that specifies Remark "Not
used".
Table 3.5-3 SOP Class N-Create and Final State Attribute

of Modality Performed Procedure Step (1)
Requirement Requirement
Description/Module Tag Type N-Create Type Final Remarks
(Type) State (Type)
Specific Character Set 0008, 0005 (1C) (1C) Not use
Performed Procedure Step Relationship
Scheduled Step Attributes 0040, 0270 (1) (1)
Sequence
>Study Instance UID 0020, 000D Set data of (1)
Modality
WorkList.(1)
>Referenced Study 0008, 1110 (2) (2) Not used
Sequence
>>Referenced SOP Class 0008, 1150 (1C) (1C) Not used
UID
>>Referenced SOP Instance 0008, 1155 (1C) (1C) Not used
UID
>Accession Number 0008, 0050 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.(2)
>Placer Order 0040, 2016 NULL(3) (3) Not used
Number/Imaging Service
Request
>Filler Order 0040, 2017 NULL(3) (3) Not used
Number/Imaging Service
Request
>Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.(2)
>Requested Procedure 0032, 1060 Set data of (2)
Description Modality
WorkList.(2)
19
(Type) State (Type)
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0009 Set data of (2)
ID Modality
WorkList.
(2)
WorkList.
(2)
>Scheduled Protocol Code 0040, 0008 Set data of (2) Not used
Sequence Modality
WorkList.
(2)
>>Code Value 0008, 0100 (1C) (1C) Not used
>>Coding Scheme 0008, 0102 (1C) (1C) Not used
Designator
>>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 (3) (3) Not used
>>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 (3) (3) Not used
Patient's Name 0010, 0010 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient ID 0010, 0020 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient's Birth Date 0010, 0030 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient's Sex 0010, 0040 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Referenced Patient 0008, 1120 (2) (2) Not used
Sequence
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 (1C) (1C) Not used
>Referenced Instance UID 0008, 1155 (1C) (1C) Not used
Performed Procedure Step Information
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0253 (1) (1)
ID
Performed Station AE Title 0040, 0241 Set AE title of (1)
ultrasound
device (1)
Performed Station Name 0040, 0242 NULL(2) (2)
Performed Location 0040, 0243 NULL(2) (2)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0244 Set Start date. (1)
Start Date (1)
20
(Type) State (Type)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0245 Set Start time. (1)
Start Time (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0252 "In "COMPLETED"
Status PRGRESS"(1) (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0254 NULL(2) (2)
Description
Performed Procedure Type 0040, 0255 NULL(2) (2)
Description
Procedure Code Sequence 0008, 1032 (2) (2) Not used
>Code Value 0008, 0100 (1C) (1C) Not used
>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 (1C) (1C) Not used
>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 (3) (3) Not used
>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 (3) (3) Not used
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0250 (2) Set End date.
End Date (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0251 (2) Set End time.
End Time (1)
Comments on the Performed 0040, 0280 (3) (3) Not used
Procedure Step
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0281 (3) (3) Not used
Discontinuation Reason
Code Sequence
Image Acquisition Results
Modality 0008, 0060 "US"(1) (1)
Study ID 0020, 0010 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Performed Protocol Code 0040, 0260 (2) (2) Not used
Sequence
Performed Series Sequence 0040, 0340 (2) (1) Not used
>Performing Physician's 0008, 1050 (2C) (2) Not used
Name
>Protocol Name 0018, 1030 (1C) (1) Not used
>Operator's Name 0008, 1070 (2C) (2) Not used
>Series Instance UID 0020, 000E (1C) (1) Not used
>Series Description 0008, 103E (2C) (2) Not used
>Retrieve AE Title 0008, 0054 (2C) (2C) Not used
21
(Type) State (Type)
>Referenced Image 0008, 1140 (2C) (2C) Not used
Sequence
UID
UID
>Referenced Non-Image 0040, 0220 (2C) (2C) Not used
Composite SOP Instance
Sequence
UID
UID
The requirement for the final state is that which applies at the time that the performed Procedure
Step Status (0040, 0252) is N-SET to a value of COMPLETED or DISCONTINUED. It is only
described if it is different from the SOP requirement for the N-CREATE.
4 Communication Profile
4.1 TCP/IP Stack
This software interfaces TCP/IP stack of the computer system to be executed.
5 Extensions/Specializations/Privatizations
5.1 Standard Extended/Specialized/Private SOPs
Not applicable
5.2 Private Transfer Syntaxes
Not applicable
6 Configuration
DICOM software obtains configuration information from the followings.

- AE name
- Host name
- Port Number
7 Support of extended character sets

An extended character set is not supported.
22
Index
A Modality Performed Procedure Step AE

Application Data Flow Diagram.................... 2 specification ...............................................18
Application Entity Title (AE) Specifications. 3 Modality WorkList AE specification.............14
C P
Communication Profile ................................ 22 Printing AE specification................................9
Configuration ............................................... 22 Private Transfer Syntaxes............................22
E Purpose of This Document..............................1
Extensions/Specializations/Privatizations .. 22 S
I Standard Extended/Specialized/Private SOPs22
Implementation Model................................... 2 Storage AE specification .................................3
Introduction.................................................... 1 Support of extended character sets ..............22
M T
Media Storage AE specification..................... 7 TCP/IP Stack.................................................22
E
23
Model EUB-6500
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Tokyo, Japan
Q1E-EA0466-2
Dec. 2001 Ver. 1
Copyright C Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2001. All right reserved.
EC - CONFORMITY DECLARATION
Manufacturer European
Representative
Hitachi Medical Corporation Hitachi Medical System
Europe
GmbH
1-1-14, Uchi-Kanda,Chiyoda-Ku Niederkasseler Lohweg
185
J 101-0047 Tokyo Japan D-40547 Düsseldorf
Germany
Medical Device
Model Name: Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner
Model Number: EUB-6500
MDD Classification: IIa
The undersigned hereby declares that the medical device

as specified above and related options comply with the
essential requirements of Annex I of the EC-Directive 93/42
EEC.
The declaration of conformity is based on a assessment

procedure in compliance with the EC Directive 93/42 EEC,
Annex II for a
Full Quality Assurance System
issued by : TÜV Rheinland Product

Safety GmbH
Am Grauen Stein D-51105
Köln
Germany
CE Ident No. : 0197
(0) 0 Q1E-EA0466
Manufacturer ： HITACHI MEDICAL CORPORATION
1-1-14 Uchi-kanda
Chiyoda-ku
Tokyo, Japan
Representative : HITACHI Medical Systems Europe

Niederkasseler Lohweg 185
D-40547 Düsseldorf
Germany
Tel. : +49 (0) 211 166510

Fax. : +49 (0) 211 1665169
Local Distributor :
(1) 1 Q1E-EA0466
To safely and correctly use this equipment and to maintain its
performance for a long time, the operator must fully understand safe
operation procedure of the equipment, its performance, function and
maintenance service. Before using the equipment, carefully read
"Precautions in safe operation" and this "Instruction Manual" to fully
understand the described contents.
NOTICE
The contents of this instruction manual are subject to change
without prior notice for improvement of the equipment performance.
(2) 2 Q1E-EA0466
Safety Consideration on Operation
Observe the following for safe operation of the equipment
1. Authorized personnel for operation of this equipment

This equipment must be used by the authorized personnel such as doctor
and sonographer.
2. Definition of words and symbols
2.1 Types and definition of precautionary notices
Type of precautionary
Meaning (Definition)
notice
DANGER This note indicates any condition or action
which, if not strictly observed, could result
in direct danger such as serious personal
injury or possible death, or serious property
damage such as total loss of equipment or fire.
WARNING This note indicates any condition or action
in indirect danger such as possible death,
serious personal injury or light or
medium-degree personal injury, or serious
property damage such as total loss of
equipment or fire.
CAUTION This note indicates any condition or action
in possible danger such as partial equipment
damage or data loss of computer.
NOTICE This note indicates important precautions
which are not related to danger but are to
be taken against operation, installation and
maintenance.
(3) 3 Q1E-EA0466
2.2 Type and definition of symbol
Protective earth (ground)
Equipotentiality
Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS
Off (Power disconnection from the mains)
On (Power connection to the mains)
Dangerous voltage
TYPE B APPLIED PART

Probe
connector
TYPE BF APPLIED PART
ECG
Defibrillator-roof TYPE BF APPLIED PART
connector
3. User's responsibility on equipment management

It is the responsibility of the user (hospital or clinic) to manage
use and maintenance of the equipment.
4. Prohibition of remodeling
Do not remodel the equipment without the consent of Hitachi.
If the equipment would be remodeled without the consent, the guarantee
service will not be applied to the equipment.
If any modification is required on the equipment, consult with Hitachi
or our authorized dealer.
(4) 4 Q1E-EA0466
5. Liability limitation
5.1 Hitachi shall not be liable for any failure or damage on the
equipment cased due to the installation, transfer, modification,
maintenance or repair that has been carried out by the party
other than Hitachi or our authorized dealer.
equipment caused due to trouble of other maker's equipment.
equipment caused due to modification, maintenance or repair
carried out by using repair parts other than the genuine part
specified by Hitachi.
equipment caused as the result that precaution or operation
procedure described in this instruction manual was not observed
by the user.
5.5 Hitachi shall not be liable for any consequential damage or loss
caused due to the diagnostic result or data obtained with this
equipment by any person other than the personnel authorized to
use this equipment.
equipment caused due to use of the equipment in the environmental
conditions such as power requirements or siting requirements
which are not in compliance with the conditions specified in
this instruction manual.
equipment caused due to force majeure such as fire, earthquake,
flood, lightning or acts of God.
(5) 5 Q1E-EA0466
6. Necessity of periodical maintenance service
6.1 From a viewpoint of the purpose and importance of medical

equipment, it is essential to maintain safety and reliability
of the equipment always in the best condition.
Hitachi has been doing our best to assure the persistent product
quality of the equipment during manufacturing and installation
works so that the equipment can be used by users with the best
conditions for safety and reliability of the equipment. However,
safety and reliability of the equipment after delivered shall
be maintained by the user on his own responsibility.
6.2 Carry on the daily checkup and periodical maintenance service

for the equipment according to the procedures described in
"Maintenance serve" of this Instruction Manual.
6.3 Maintenance service for the equipment of which warranty period

has expired can be carried out by Hitachi or our authorized dealer
under maintenance service contract.
Contact Hitachi or our authorized dealer for this maintenance
service contract.
6.4 When daily checkup and periodical maintenance service were
carried out, keep and retain records of executed date, person
and serviced contents.
(6) 6 Q1E-EA0466
7. Precautions in Operation of Ultrasound Scanner System
Observe the following to protect safety of the patient and operator.
7.1 Precautions in operation
1. Should any abnormality occur on the equipment, immediately

turn off the power switch, disconnect the power cable and
contact Hitachi's Service Division or our authorized dealer.
2. Do not operate the power switch with hand contaminated with

jelly. If the power switch is contaminated with jelly,
immediately wipe it off.
3. Do not use and connect any recording device other than the
ones specified by Hitachi.
4. Contents in the memory such as hospital name, set parameters

and various measurement data may be erased by expiration of
the built-in battery or temporary power failure. Keep and
retain records of hospital name, set parameters and various
measurement data in the printer or VCR.
5. Carry out the periodical checkup of the dust filter located

on the air inlet window of the power supply unit once a week,
and clean it if dust is found in it.
6. Clean dirt on the covers and panel of the equipment by using

cloth soaked with neutral detergent and wipe it off with dry,
soft cloth. Never use organic solvent such as thinner.
(7) 7 Q1E-EA0466
7.2 Precaution on installation environmental conditions
1. This equipment is not CATEGORY AP/APG EQUIPMENT.

This equipment is not explosion-proof type. Never use it
in the atmosphere where explosive gas, toxic gas, inflammable
gas or flammable gas.
1. This equipment is not drip-proof or water-proof type. Never

use it at the following place:
· The equipment is exposed to water or other liquid.
· Humidity is excessively high.
· The equipment is exposed to steam.
· The equipment is exposed to saline air.
NOTICE:Probe head ,probe cable and footswitch is drip-
proof and water-proof type by the IP protection.
2. Be sure to install the equipment on the horizontal floor.

If the equipment is placed on the floor inclining more than
10°, it may fall down. Securely lock the stoppers of the
casters at the place where the equipment is operated.
3. In addition to the above places, do not use the equipment

at the following places
· There is much dust or sand dust.
· The equipment is applied with excessive vibration or shock.
· The power line voltage fluctuates abnormally.
· The power line voltage excessively drops while the
equipment being operated under a load.
· The equipment is exposed to a direct sunlight.
4. Do not block the opening for air ventilation located on the

rear, top and side covers of the equipment, or the equipment
failure may be caused.
5. Neither incline the equipment more than 10° nor give an

abnormal shock when moving it. When moving the equipment
weighing more than 200kg, be sure to move it by two persons.
(8) 8 Q1E-EA0466
7.3 Precautions for Electrical Safety
1. This ultrasound scanner has been designed as a class 1

equipment classified according to the type of protection
against electric shock, and Type B/BF equipment classified
according to the degree of protection against electric shock
in accordance with the IEC60601-1 (General Requirements for
safety of Medical Electrical Equipment by International
Electrotechnical Commission).
To prevent electric shock, be sure to directly connect the
power cable of the equipment to the 3-wire power outlet which
has a protective earth terminal (with less than 10W grounding
resistance) of the grounding facility.
2. Do not detach the covers fixed with screws. Detaching the

cover and contacting with electrical component inside may
cause electric shock. For repair and checkup of the inside
of the equipment, be sure to call service from Hitachi or
our authorized dealer.
3. All ECG leads must be removed from patient to use with

high-frequency (HF) surgical equitment.
4. Do not use the ECG function to patient which uses cardiac

pacemaker or other electrical stimulators.
7.4 Precautions in use of probe
1. Do not use the probe of which the head surface is scratched

or the cable cover is damaged. If the probe is used as damaged,
it may cause electric shock.
2. The needle guide line to be displayed on the screen when biopsy

is performed with the probe connected to this equipment is
just a guide for direction of needle puncture. When operating
the biopsy needle, do it as checking the actual position of
the needle on the ultrasound image.
(9) 9 Q1E-EA0466
1. Handle the probes with great care. Be careful neither to
hit the probe to any hard object nor drop it, otherwise trouble
may be caused.
2. As the probe connector is not water-proof type (IP40), do

not apply any liquid or dip it in liquid. If this precaution
is not observed, it may be damaged.
3. Be sure to connect or disconnect the probe under the following

conditions. If it is done under the conditions other than
the specified below, the equipment may malfunction or be failed.
Therefore, strictly observe the procedures described below.
· Turn off the power switch.
· If the equipment is provided with more than two probe
connectors, using the probe selection key select the other
probe connector than the one to which the probe is connected
or disconnected and set FREEZE ON.
4. The probes to which pressurized or depressurized gas

sterilization can be applied are described in the Instruction
Manual of each probe. Sterilize probe according to the method
described in the Instruction Manual.
5. In case of the probes to which pressurized or depressurized

gas sterilization cannot be applied, never put them in the
following atmosphere. If this is not observed, the probe
may be damaged.
· At temperature higher than 40°C
· In the pressurized gas
· In the depressurized gas
· Disinfection or sterilization other than the specified
(10) 10 Q1E-EA0466
7.5 Precautions against ultrasound output power
When the equipment is used for the patient with high susceptibility
such as fetus, pay attention to the following:
· Set the ultrasound output power to the level as low as possible
and adjust sensitivity with the gain control.
· To prevent unnecessary ultrasound output power, try to set FREEZE
to ON whenever depiction of ultrasound image is not necessary.
· Because effect by ultrasound power on the imaging area in the
M, PW, CW and CFM-modes is greater than in the B-mode, try to
use it at the level as minimum as possible.
(11) 11 Q1E-EA0466
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Outline of EUB-6500 .............................. 1- 1

1.1 General .............................................. 1- 1
1.2 Features ............................................. 1- 1
1.3 Intended Use ......................................... 1- 4
1.4 Environmental Conditions ............................. 1- 5
1.5 Power Requirements ................................... 1- 6
1.6 Installation ......................................... 1- 7
1.7 Precautions in handling .............................. 1- 9
1.7.1 Handling probes ................................ 1- 9
1.7.2 Precautions in operation and use ............... 1- 9
1.8 Precautions regarding ultrasound output ............. 1- 11
1.9 Label location ....................................... 1- 12
Chapter 2 Equipment Composition ............................ 2- 1

2.1 Standard Components .................................. 2- 1
2.2 Optional Components .................................. 2- 1
Chapter 3 Components and Functions ......................... 3- 1

3.1 Component Description ................................ 3- 1
3.2 Keyboard Panel ....................................... 3- 3
Chapter 4 Operation Procedures ............................. 4- 1
4.1 Preparation before Use ............................... 4- 1

4.1.1 Connecting the probe ........................... 4- 1
4.1.2 Positioning the viewing monitor ................ 4- 2
4.1.3 Check before power ON .......................... 4- 2
4.2 Starting the Equipment ............................... 4- 4
4.2.1 Power ON ....................................... 4- 4
4.2.2 Releasing Freeze ............................... 4- 5
4.2.3 Adjusting brightness of the monitor ............ 4- 5
4.2.4 Selecting a probe and application .............. 4- 6
(12) 12 Q1E-EA0466
4.3 Setting Auto Freeze Function ......................... 4- 8
4.4 Patient ............................................. 4- 9
4.4.1 Entry of Standard ID (Entry of Standard Menu) .. 4- 10
4.4.2 Entry of OB measurement ID
(Entry of Obstetric measurement menu) ........... 4- 14
4.5 Entering Hospital Name ............................... 4- 18
4.6 Changing Time ........................................ 4- 18
4.7 Controls Affecting the Acoustic Output ............... 4- 18
4.7.1 Acoustic output level .......................... 4- 19
4.7.2 ULTRASOUND POWER Control ....................... 4- 20
4.8 Ending Use ........................................... 4- 22
4.9 The caution of connecting with Multiplane
Transesophageal Probe EUP-ES52M ...................... 4- 23
4.10 Operation of transesophageal probe EUP-ES322/EUP-ES533 4- 24
Chapter 5 Operation Modes .................................. 5- 1

5.1 Over View ............................................ 5- 1
5.1.1 Keyboard operation ............................. 5- 1
5.1.2 TRACKBALL PRIORITY ............................. 5- 2
5.1.3 Function menu operation ........................ 5- 2
5.1.4 MAIN MENU operation ............................ 5- 5
5.2 B mode ............................................... 5- 8
5.2.1 Display of B mode .............................. 5- 8
5.2.2 Gain adjustment ................................ 5- 8
5.2.3 Switching over electronic focus ................ 5- 9
5.2.4 Switching over electronic focus steps .......... 5- 9
5.2.5 Switching over trans,it frequency .............. 5- 10
5.2.6 Moving display position ........................ 5- 10
5.2.7 Pan zooming function ........................... 5- 12
5.2.8 Twin screen display of B mode images ........... 5- 13
5.2.9 Advanced dTHI(dynamic Tissue Harmonic Imaging) . 5- 13
5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu ............................ 5- 14
5.2.11 IMAGE PROCESS menu ............................ 5- 19
(13) 13 Q1E-EA0466
5.2.12 B MENU of MAIN MENU ........................... 5- 24
5.3 M-mode ............................................... 5- 31
5.3.1 Displaying B/M mode image ..................... 5- 31
5.3.2 Adjusting Gain(brightness) .................... 5- 31
5.3.3 Single screen display of M-mode image ......... 5- 32
5.3.4 Moving display position ....................... 5- 32
5.3.5 Switching electronic focus .................... 5- 33
5.3.6 Freeze of M-mode image ........................ 5- 33
5.3.7 Switching over sweep speed .................... 5- 34
5.3.10 M MENU of MAIN MENU ........................... 5- 38
5.4 PW Mode .............................................. 5- 40
5.4.1 Display of B/PW mode .......................... 5- 40
5.4.3 Adjusting Doppler angle ....................... 5- 41
5.4.4 Various adjustment functions .................. 5- 42
5.4.5 Switching over reference frequencies (REF FREQ) 5- 42
5.4.6 Moving base line .............................. 5- 42
5.4.7 Switching over velocity range(PRF) ............ 5- 43
5.4.8 Adjusting Doppler volume ...................... 5- 43
5.4.9 Oblique function(Exclusive for linear probe) .. 5- 43
5.4.10 Switching over sample gate width .............. 5- 44
5.4.13 DOP. MENU of MAIN MENU ........................ 5- 49
5.5 Steerable CW mode .................................... 5- 54
5.5.1 Display of steerable CW-mode image ............ 5- 54
5.5.2 Gain adjustment ............................... 5- 55
5.5.3 Selection of reference frequency (REF FREQ) ... 5- 55
5.5.4 Adjustment functions .......................... 5- 56
(14) 14 Q1E-EA0466
5.5.7 DOP. Menu of Main Menu ........................ 5- 58
5.6 Single Element CW-Mode ............................... 5- 59
5.6.1 Displaying single element CW-mode image ....... 5- 59
5.6.6 DOP. MENU of MAIN MENU ........................ 5- 63
5.7 CFM Mode ............................................. 5- 64
5.7.1 Displaying CFM-mode image ..................... 5- 64
5.7.2 Setting COLOR BOX range ....................... 5- 66
5.7.5 Reference frequency (REF FREQ) ................ 5- 68
5.7.6 Velocity range(PRF) ........................... 5- 68
5.7.7 Base line ..................................... 5- 69
5.7.8 Oblique function(Exclusive for linear probe) .. 5- 70
5.7.9 Zooming image: ZOOM ........................... 5- 71
5.7.11 IMAGE STATUS menu ............................. 5- 80
5.7.12 CFM MENU of MAIN MENU ......................... 5- 83
5.8 ECG Function ......................................... 5- 88
5.8.1 Connecting cords .............................. 5- 88
5.8.2 Displaying physiological signal waveform ...... 5- 89
5.8.3 ECG synchronization (ECG SYNC) ................ 5- 92
5.8.4 ECG MENU of MAIN MENU ......................... 5- 96
5.9 Needle Guide Line .................................... 5- 97
5.10 Omni Directional M mode .............................. 5- 102
5.10.1 General ....................................... 5- 102
(15) 15 Q1E-EA0466
5.10.2 Features ...................................... 5- 102
5.10.3 Operating requirements of ODM function ........ 5- 103
5.10.4 Real-time ODM mode ............................ 5- 104
5.10.5 ODM beam line operation ....................... 5- 106
5.10.6 Single/Dual ODM modes ......................... 5- 107
5.10.7 Beam line center control in dual ODM mode ..... 5- 108
5.10.8 Image quality adjustment function ............. 5- 110
5.10.9 Cine memory ODM mode .......................... 5- 111
5.10.10 Application parameter setup ................... 5- 113
Chapter 6 Character, Annotation and Body Mark .............. 6- 1

6.1 Entering Characters .................................. 6- 1
6.1.1 Character input menu .......................... 6- 1
6.1.2 Deleting characters ........................... 6- 3
6.1.3 Ending entry .................................. 6- 3
6.2 Entering Characters with Annotation .................. 6- 3
6.2.1 Calling Annotation menu ....................... 6- 3
6.2.2 ANNOTATION function menu ...................... 6- 4
6.2.3 Display setting of ANNOTATION menu ............ 6- 6
6.2.4 Ending ANNOTATION menu ........................ 6- 6
6.2.5 List of ANNOTATION ............................ 6- 7
6.2.6 Registration of user defined annotation ....... 6- 14
6.3 Entering Body Mark .................................. 6- 15
6.3.1 Displaying body mark .......................... 6- 15
6.3.2 Moving body mark ............................. 6- 16
6.3.3 Deleting body mark ............................ 6- 16
6.3.4 Moving position of probe mark ................. 6- 16
6.3.5 Adjusting angle of probe mark ................. 6- 16
6.3.6 Displaying upright position mark .............. 6- 17
Chapter 7 Main Menu ..................................... 7- 1

7.1 Starting Main Menu ................................... 7- 1
(16) 16 Q1E-EA0466
7.2 Main Menu of each Ultrasound Mode .................... 7- 1
7.3 Display Menu ......................................... 7- 2
7.4 Meas.Menu ............................................ 7- 3
7.5 Image Mem. ........................................... 7- 3
7.6 Data Trans<Optional> ................................. 7- 4
7.7 Recorder ............................................. 7- 4
7.8 Physiology ........................................... 7- 5
7.9 Setup Menu ........................................... 7- 5
7.10 Disk Menu ............................................ 7- 17
Chapter 8 APPLICATION Function ............................. 8- 1

8.1 Switching over APPLICATION ........................... 8- 1
8.2 Editing APPLICATION Function ......................... 8- 2
8.2.1 Current Condition ............................. 8- 3
8.2.2 Edit Data ..................................... 8- 3
8.2.3 Copy & Paste .................................. 8- 3
8.2.4 Delete ........................................ 8- 4
8.2.5 Edit Name ..................................... 8- 4
8.2.6 Default application setting ................... 8- 4
8.2.7 Ending edit ................................... 8- 5
8.3 Edit Data < APPLICATION parameter setting menu> ..... 8- 6
8.3.1 APPLICATION parameter setting menu ........... 8- 6
8.3.2 B-Mode Menu ................................... 8- 7
8.3.3 M-Mode Menu ................................... 8- 10
8.3.4 D-Mode Menu ................................... 8- 11
8.3.5 CFM-Mode Menu ................................. 8- 14
8.3.6 Display ....................................... 8- 19
8.3.7 Annotation Menu ............................... 8- 21
8.3.8 Measurement menu .............................. 8- 22
8.3.9 Body mark ..................................... 8- 25
8.3.10 Others Menu ................................... 8- 28
Chapter 9 Image memory unit ................................ 9- 1
(17) 17 Q1E-EA0466
9.1 Image memory ......................................... 9- 1
9.2 Image filing function ................................ 9- 3
9.2.1 Store to Hard Disk function ................... 9- 3
9.2.2 Set up filing ................................. 9- 5
9.2.3 Transfer of Image ............................. 9- 9
9.2.4 Filing dialog ................................. 9- 10
9.2.5 Transfer ...................................... 9- 15
9.2.6 Retrieve of Images ............................ 9- 16
9.2.7 Edit of image file: Merged Folder ............. 9- 24
9.3 Cine memory mode ..................................... 9- 26
9.3.1 Record of image ............................... 9- 26
9.3.2 Memory capacity setting ....................... 9- 27
9.3.3 Continuous record mode and Continuous record
of heart beat automatic detection mode ....... 9- 29
9.3.4 Image replay .................................. 9- 29
9.3.5 Color Hold function ........................... 9- 32
Chapter 10 VCR (option) ..................................... 10- 1

10.1 Remote control of VCR ................................ 10- 1
10.1.1 Image Recording ............................... 10- 1
10.1.2 Selection of VCR/EXT mode and remote control of VCR . 10- 1
10.2 Measurement on review image .......................... 10- 4
10.2.1 Measurement procedure ......................... 10- 4
10.2.2 Registration of review image mode ............. 10- 8
10.2.3 Mode adjustment function ...................... 10- 15
Chapter 11 Measuring Functions .............................. 11- 1

11.1 Outline .............................................. 11- 1
11.2 Starting up Measurements ............................. 11- 5
11.3 Basic Procedures ..................................... 11- 6
11.3.1 Functions of Keys ............................. 11- 6
11.3.2 Measurement Procedures ........................ 11- 10
[1] Distance ..................................... 11- 11
(18) 18 Q1E-EA0466
[2] Area ......................................... 11- 12
[3] Volume ....................................... 11- 18
[4] SVolume Measurement .......................... 11- 20
[5] Instantaneous Flow Velocity .................. 11- 21
[6] Trace ........................................ 11- 23
11.4 Contents of Measuring Functions ...................... 11- 27
11.4.1 Basic Measurements ............................ 11- 27
[1] Calip Measurement ............................ 11- 27
[2] Trace Measurement ............................ 11- 28
[3] Area-E(Area-Ellipse) ......................... 11- 29
[4] Volume Measurement ........................... 11- 29
[5] SVolume Measurement .......................... 11- 30
[6] Velocity Measurement ......................... 11- 31
[7] Acceleration Measurement ..................... 11- 32
[8] D-Profile .................................... 11- 34
[9] Ratio-Dis,Ratio-Area, Ratio-Time, and Ratio-Velo
Measurement ................................... 11- 35
[10] HR Measurement .............................. 11- 37
[11] Velocity Average Measurement ................ 11- 38
[12] CFM Velo Measurement ........................ 11- 39
[13] PHT Measurement ............................. 11- 41
[14] Histogram Measurement ...................... 11- 43
[15] Time Measurement ............................ 11- 46
[16] Decel.(Deceleration) Measurement ............ 11- 47
[17] dP/dt Measurement ........................... 11- 48
11.4.2 Measuring Cross-Chapteral Images .............. 11- 50
[1] %STENO(Percent Stenosis) Measurement ......... 11- 50
[2] LV/Ao Measurement (B-LV/Ao, M-LV/Ao) ......... 11- 52
11.4.3 Schema-Guided M-Mode Measurement .............. 11- 54
[1] LV(Left Ventricular) Measurement ............ 11- 54
[2] MV(Mitral Valve) Measurement ................ 11- 60
[3] Ao(Aortic Valve) Measurement ................. 11- 61
(19) 19 Q1E-EA0466
[4] TV(Tricuspid Valve) Measurement ............. 11- 62
[5] PV(Pulmonary Valve) Measurement .............. 11- 63
11.4.4 Doppler Measurement ........................... 11- 64
[1] LVOT Measurement ............................. 11- 64
[2] LV inflow Measurement ........................ 11- 71
[3] RVOT Measurement ............................. 11- 74
[4] RV inflow Measurement ........................ 11- 78
[5] VASC1/VASC2 Measurement ...................... 11- 81
[6] AV-Area Measurement .......................... 11- 86
[7] Qp/Qs Measurement ............................ 11- 89
11.4.5 Left Ventricle Cardiac Function Measurement ... 11- 92
[1] Pombo, Gibson, and Teichholz Measurement ..... 11- 92
[2] Area-Length Measurement ...................... 11- 94
[3] BI-Plane Measurement ......................... 11- 97
[4] Simpson Measurement .......................... 11- 98
[5] M. Simpson Measurement ....................... 11- 99
[6] Bullet Measurement ........................... 11- 107
[7] MV Regurg. Measurement ....................... 11- 108
[8] TV Regurg. Measurement ....................... 11- 110
11.4.6 Obstetric Measurement ......................... 11- 112
11.4.7 Other Measurement ............................. 11- 148
[1] Angle Measurement ............................ 11- 148
[2] Urology Measurement .......................... 11- 151
[3] Gynecology Measurement ....................... 11- 154
[4] Follicular Measurement ....................... 11- 155
[5] CAROTID Measurement .......................... 11- 156
[6] LEG A. Measurement ........................... 11- 157
[7] ARM A. Measurement ........................... 11- 157
11.5 Real-time Doppler measurement ........................ 11- 158
11.5.1 Real-time Doppler measurement start ........... 11- 158
11.5.2 Real-time Doppler measurement function menu ... 11- 159
(20) 20 Q1E-EA0466
11.5.3 Freeze on operation in Real time Doppler measurement
.............................................. 11- 162
11.5.4 End of Real-time Doppler measurement .......... 11- 163
11.5.5 Cautions to be observed during the use of Real-time
Doppler measurement ........................... 11- 164
11.6 Measurement Setup .................................... 11- 165
11.6.1 Configuration of Measurement Setup ............ 11- 165
11.6.2 Measurement Setup menu ........................ 11- 168
11.6.3 Measurement Edit Menu ......................... 11- 181
11.6.4 Special menu .................................. 11- 212
11.6.5 Examples of measurement edition ............... 11- 218
11.6.6 Measurement Export/Import function ............ 11- 244
11.7 Measurement Report Function .......................... 11- 247
11.7.1 Measurement selection window .................. 11- 247
11.7.2 Measurement results display window ............ 11- 248
11.7.3 Graphic display of obstetric measurement ...... 11- 256
11.7.4 Input and output of measurement result ........ 11- 267
11.7.5 Correction of measurement result .............. 11- 272
11.8 Measurement on review image from image memory ........ 11- 273
11.9 Measurement Tool ..................................... 11- 274
11.9.1 Outline of measurement tool ................... 11- 274
11.9.2 Setting Measurement tool ...................... 11- 279
Chapter 12 Precaution in Combination with Peripheral Devices 12- 1

12.1 Peripheral equipment ................................. 12- 1
12.2 Precautions in connection of Peripheral devices ...... 12- 2
12.3 Peripheral devices possible to use on outside
commercial power supply outlet ....................... 12- 2
12.4 Operation of Peripheral devices ...................... 12- 3
12.5 Connection of Peripheral devices ..................... 12- 3
12.6 Connection of PC printer and the HUB for Network function
................................................. 12- 5
Chapter 13 Movement ......................................... 13- 1
(21) 21 Q1E-EA0466
13.1 Movement of equipment ................................ 13- 1
13.1.1 Preparation before movement ................... 13- 1
13.1.2 Precautions in movement ....................... 13- 1
13.2 Transportation of equipment .......................... 13- 4
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Checkup .......................... 14- 1

14.1 Check before use ..................................... 14- 1
14.2 Checkup while using the scanner unit ................. 14- 2
14.3 Periodical Checkup ................................... 14- 3
14.4 Backup of system setting data ........................ 14- 3
14.5 Periodical test of system safety ..................... 14- 3
14.6 Periodical inspection of system performance .......... 14- 4
14.7 Checkup after storage for a long time ................ 14- 4
14.8 Cleaning of equipment ................................ 14- 4
14.9 Functional checkup ................................... 14- 8
14.10 Waste Products ...................................... 14- 9
Chapter 15 Repair,Readjustment and Disposa .................. 15- 1
Chapter 16 Specifications ................................... 16- 1

16.1 Ultrasound Transmitter/Receiver ...................... 16- 1
16.2 Digital Scan Converter ............................... 16- 3
16.3 Doppler .............................................. 16- 7
16.4 Color Flow Mapping ................................... 16- 9
16.5 Image Filling Software ............................... 16- 11
16.6 Option ............................................... 16- 12
16.7 Other ................................................ 16- 15
(22) 22 Q1E-EA0466
Appendix
Appendix A Message List................................... A- 1
Appendix B Start of ultrasound scanner system by system MO B- 1
Appendix C Recommended MO................................. C- 1
Appendix D How to use MO Formatter........................ D- 1
Appendix E SCSI Printer................................... E- 1
Appendix F How to use a log file.......................... F- 1
Appendix G Precautions to display on Mac OS............... G- 1
Appendix AAUsing the PC Printer (Option).................. AA- 1
Note: Please be noted that in some cases there are differences between
displays of ultrasound scanner quoted in this instruction manual and actual
displays. (ex.: “MI”, “TIS”, “TIB”, “TIC” and so on.)
(23) 23 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 1 Outline of EUB-6500
1.1 General
Model EUB-6500 is a multi-functional ultrasound scanner in which
Doppler, Color Flow Mapping, etc. are provided and all circuits
related to image quality are fully digitalized.
As not only linear scan type and convex scan type probes, but also
phased array scan type probe can be operated with EUB-6500, it is
possible to use it for any field of application.
Furthermore, cine memory, cardiac measurement, patient report
functions and so on are provided. Since Windows NT is used as a basic
OS and MOD and FDD units are incorporated, it is easily compatible
with various kinds of interface including an image filing function
and DICOM 3.0, etc.
1.2 Features
(1) True digital architecture
Beamformer which is decisively concerned to the image quality
can process B/M/DOP/CFM/CFA images in digital and it is
controlled by software.
(2) Quick response
Change-over of modes, imaging conditions setting,
switching-over of probes and applications are performed fast
so that an operator can concentrate his attention on the patient.
(3) Usable for wide field of application
Besides the linear scan type and convex scan type probes the
phased array scan type probe is also usable. So, it is possible
to cover from abdominal and obstetric to cardiovascular fields.
(4) Improved resolution
Together with the ditalization as stated above, because of
2-dimensional beam emission weighting a focusing zone of beam
emission focus is largely improved. As the result of it, even
in the single focus a homogeneous image can be obtained from
near to far field and also an image observation with high frame
rate is achieved.
Due to wide band probes, dynamic focusing in echo receiving
and low cross talk following three features, high spatial
resolution, wide dynamic range and high contrast resolution
are realized.
1−1 Q1E-EA0466
(5) Improved color frame rate and image quality
Because of Quadra beam processing system provided as standard
in echo receiving and the latest image processing technology,
the frame rate is improved much more comparing with conventional
system, resulting in color images of high definition and high
resolution.
(6) User definable measuring function
Regarding measuring function users can reduce or add items for
measurement. Also, it is possible to make a new measuring
item(s) making use of basic tool prepared in advance.
(7) Non-interlaced monitor, standard provision
As a R&B non-interlaced monitor is used, it is possible to observe
flickerless images.
(8) Windows NT as OS
Windows NT is adopted as a basic OS so that the scanner system
is compatible with various kinds of interface including DICOM
3.0
(9) Versatile image filing functions – image record
For image filing a digital image recording system which provides
recording without quality distortion is adopted. As a hard
disk recording method is used for multi memory function, images
are not erased even if the power is put off. Also MOD and FDD
incorporated in the scanner are available as other recording
media.
In addition, not only still images, but also live images from
the cine memory can be recorded to MOD. It is also compatible
with DICOM 3.0 (option).
(10) Contrast harmonic imaging function
With this function enabling to produce images further
effectively from signal coming out of the contrast agent it
is possible to improve to diagnose the existence of tumor with
ease.
(11) Panoramic display function
The panoramic display function is to show a wide ranged panoramic
image up to 60 cm length at maximum by abstracting feature from
the image changing due to scanning probe so that it is possible
to display a very wide image information on a single image.
1−2 Q1E-EA0466
(12) Omni-Directional M mode (ODM function)
Usually the normal M-mode image is controlled by the beam
direction.
With this function, however, it is possible to display the M-mode
image on an optional line in the tomographic image, so it enables
to perform more accurate left ventricle volume measurement.
(13) Real time Doppler measurement function
Automatic tracing function and measuring function in
Doppler-mode have been allowed to apply only to freeze-images,
but with this function it is possible to perform it to real
time images which contributes to shorten the time for
examination.
(14) Image filing function, offering easier handling – image replay
function-
Image retrieval display controls all the driving units. A care
for easy routine operation is duly paid, which enable users
to resort data by patient ID or name and retrieve data by keywords.
(15) Easily operable keyboard
As key arrangement is taken in consideration of frequency of
use, an operation efficiency is improved. Since alphanumeric
keyboard is provided with back-light, it is possible to input
patient ID and name in a dark examination room.
(16) Excellent mobility with four swivel casters
As all the four casters are of swivel type, it is easy to move
in narrow space. Due to reduced friction force to floor it
is easy to move from ward to ward.
1−3 Q1E-EA0466
1.3 Intended Use
This equipment is a compact multifunction ultrasound scanner system
equipped with Doppler and color flow mapping functions. This
equipment can be applied to examinations in a wide clinical fields
(Abdominal, Cardiac, Intra-operative, Fetal, Pediatric, Small Organ,
Peripheral Vessel, Biopsy, Trans-rectal, Trans-vaginal, Neonatal
Cephalic, Adult Cephalic, Endoscopy, Gynecology, Urology,
Laparoscopic) in combination with various kinds of convex, linear
and phased array high definition probes from 2.5MHz to 10MHz. Every
types of convex,linear and phased array high definition probes are
developed and designed to display in B,B/M,or M-mode image.
Furthermore usable for Doppler,Color Doppler and Color Flow Angio
methods depending on the used equipment model. And pencil type probe
(EUP-TC3) is developed and designed to display in CW Doppler mode
image. Please read the clause of safety Consideration on Operation
before using it. Then,it is possible to connect several kind of
peripherals (e.g. Image printer,VCR). In details, see the section
of Precaution in Combination with Peripheral Devices.
1−4 Q1E-EA0466
1.4 Environmental conditions
Observe the following environmental conditions for safe and correct
operation of the equipment.
(1) Environmental conditions in operation

・ Ambient temperature : +10°C∼ +35°C
・ Relative humidity : 30∼85% (subject to no condensation)
・ Atmospheric pressure : 700∼1060hPa
(2) Daily storage conditions

・Ambient temperature : -10°C∼ +40°C
・Relative humidity : 10∼90%(subject to no condensation)
・Atmospheric pressure : 700∼1060hPa
(3) Environmental conditions for transportation (in packing)

・Ambient temperature : -10°C∼ +60°C
・Relative humidity : 10∼95%(subject to no condensation)
・Atmospheric pressure : 500∼1060hPa
1−5 Q1E-EA0466
1.5 Power Requirements
This equipment esquires the following power supply. Never use the
equipment with the power conditions other than these specifications,
otherwise the equipment may be damaged.
(1) Main voltage : AC230V ± 10% (internally selectable to 100

／110／120／220／240VAC)
Be sure to use the power supply of which fluctuation against
the rated voltage is within 10%. If the equipment is used with
the voltage other than the specified range, the performance
of the equipment may not be fully obtained.
(2) Mains phase : Single phase
(3) Mains frequency : 50/60Hz
(4) Power supply capacity : More than 1.2kVA
(5) Replacement of fuse
For replacement of fuse, use the supplied fuse according to
the following table. Never use any fuse other than the specified,
otherwise damage to the equipment will result.
Table 1.5.1 List of Usable Fuses
Fuse No. Label name Rating
AC100∼120V T 6.3AL/250V
F1 LINE OUTPUT
AC220∼240V T3.15AL/250V
F2 LINE OUTPUT T 1.6AL/250V
Use the slow-blow type fuse. Do not use fast-blow type fuse.
Remove fuse holder as fig1.5.1,and exchange a fuse when a fuse
blows.
Fig 1.5.1 replacement of fuse
1−6 Q1E-EA0466
1.6 Installation
Use the equipment in the facilities which is equipment to the hospital
or research organ.
To safeguard the patient and operator and to ensure correct
functioning of the equipment, observe the following installation
requirements.
(1) Environmental requirements

Use the equipment within the range of the environmental
conditions specified in Specifications.
This equipment is not protected against explosion-proof. Never

use the equipment in an atmosphere where inflammable or
combustible gas such as explosive gas, toxic gas and oil vapor
is present.
This equipment is not a drip-proof or water-proof type. Avoid

use of the equipment in the following environments, or equipment
failure may be caused.
· Place where the equipment is exposed to direct sunlight.
· Place close to heat generating equipment such as heating
apparatus and dehumidifier.
· Place where the equipment is exposed to water spray or splash.
· Place here much dust is present.
(2) Power supply facility

Use the equipment within the range of the power requirements
specified in Specifications.
(3) Floor conditions
Be sure to use the equipment on the horizontal, flat floor.
If the equipment is used on the floor inclining more the 10°,
it may fall down.
Also surely lock the stoppers of the casters before operation
of the equipment.
1−7 Q1E-EA0466
(4) Space requirements for operation
The physical dimensions of this equipment is 500(W) × 800(D)
× 1400(H) mm. Keep a space of at least 10cm in the surrounding
area of the equipment.
(5) Space requirements for ventilation
This equipment is equipped with a ventilation fan on the rear
side. Keep a space of more than 10cm from the rear side of the
equipment. Also a vent is located each at the lower part of
the front and rear sides. Be careful not to block the vents.
(6) Protection against electromagnetic disturbance
Strong radiation or electromagnetic wave can cause malfunction
of the equipment or noise on image. Therefore, care should
be taken not to allow those devices to come closer to this
equipment.
(This ultrasound scanner has been designed as GroupⅠ,Class A
equipment classified according to the type of electromagnetic
compatibility in accordance with the IEC60601-1-2)
The probes for internal use might not comply with

electromagnetic compatibility requirement when misused for
external applications.
1−8 Q1E-EA0466
1.7 Precautions in handling
1.7.1 Handling probes

(1) Probes can be damaged even by a light impact. Great care
should, therefore, be exercised not to apply any shock
to them, allow them to hit or drop them.
(2) Be sure to turn off the power switch or to select another
probe connector by the probe selection key before
connecting or disconnecting a probe. Connecting or
disconnecting a probe without turning off the power switch
or as selecting the corresponding probe connector can cause
equipment failure or malfunction.
(3) Use all possible care not to scratch the surface of the
probe head (surface of the transducer). When any scratch
on the probe head or damage on the cable cover is found,
do not use the probe. If such probe is used, it may cause
electric shock.
(4) After use of probe, the probe shall be cleaned with the
gauze moistened for disinfection or alcohol. Never use
organic solvent such as thinner for this purpose.
(5) Do not use any probes other than those specified for
intra-operation for the purpose of intra-operation.
(6) The needle guide line displayed on the screen when
performing biopsy by using the probe connected to this
equipment gives only a guide to puncture the needle. For
needle puncturing operation, perform it as assuring the
actual position of the needle on the ultrasound image.
(7) Do not water-soak the probe connecter.
1.7.2 Precautions in operation and use

(1) When any abnormality occurs on the equipment, immediately
turn off the power switch and stop it operation. Then,
contact Hitachi Technical Service Division or our
authorized dealer.
(2) When the equipment is not used for a long time, be sure
to turn off the power switch and put a dust cover on it.
(3) Set the equipment to the FREEZE mode while examination
is not being performed. This will prevent the probe from
1−9 Q1E-EA0466
being deteriorated.
1−10 Q1E-EA0466
(4) Turning on the power switch of the equipment must securely
be done. Quick repetition of switching on and off may
result in erasing the memorized data such as date and
hospital name or malfunctioning of switches on the
equipment. In such event, turn off the power switch again,
and after more than 10 seconds turn on the power switch
again.
(5) Do not operate the power switch with the fingers stuck
with ultrasound jelly. If the power switch is
contaminated with jelly, immediately wipe it off.
(6) Hospital name, set imaging parameters and data for
measurements have been backed up with the built-in memory,
but expiration of the life of the battery in the equipment
or temporary power failure may cause deletion of the data
in the memory. The entered parameters and data should
be recorded and archived through the printer or VCR so
that they can be reset later.
(7) Never remodel the equipment or probe.
(8) Some of the image display formats described in this
instruction manual are subject to change without prior
notice for improvement of the equipment.
(9) When power break occur in facility, turn off the power
switch and disconnect the power cable. In the result of
it, ID, Patient information, last image and memorized image
will disappear
(10) When you want to press an ejecting button of MOD drive
and FD drive, confirm without fail that an access lamp
of drive is put off. After that press the ejecting button.
If the button is pressed while the access lamp is put on
or blinking, there may be a case that the drive or the
disk or contents in the disk is destroyed.
(11) When the unit is locked up, put the power OFF by pressing
ON/STANDBY switch. If the power can not be OFF even though
ON/STANDBY is pressed, shut down the power by pressing
the breaker switch locating at left side of the unit to
OFF side. After that restart the unit.
(12) We shall have no liability for any loss of data saved in
this device, caused by miss operation, accident, system
malfunction and so on. Be sure to check contents of any
important data and make backup copies of them.
1−11 Q1E-EA0466
1.8 Precautions regarding ultrasound output
Although biological hazard of the ultrasound power used in this
equipment is considered almost negligible because it is small,
observe the following precautions to minimize the effect by the
ultrasound as the fetus in the early stage of gestation specially
has a sensitive susceptibility against physical energies such as
X-rays.
(1) Set the ultrasound output power to the level as low as possible
and adjust the sensitivity by the gain control.
(2) To avoid unnecessary ultrasound output, freeze image while
acquiring image is not needed for diagnosis.
(3) As the effect of ultrasound power on the examination region
becomes higher in M, PW, CW and CFM-modes as compared with B-mode,
try to minimize use of the ultrasound exposure on fetus to the
least level as required.
1−12 Q1E-EA0466
1.9 Label location
DANGER/WARNING/CAUTION label is located as following figure.
Label location
Fig. 1.9.1 Label Location
DANGER POSSIBLE EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT USE IN THE PRESENCE OF

FLAMMABLE GAS.
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

WARNING REPLACE FUSES ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING.
FRONT REAR
CAUTION TO BE OPENED BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY.
FILTERS HAVE TO BE CLEANED FREQUENTLY.
STRONG RADIATION OR ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
! CAN CAUSE MALFUNCTION OF THE EQUIPMENT.
BE CAREFUL NOT TO CATCH YOUR FINGERS THE

CASTERS PLEASE REFER TO THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. FILTER
KB416931A
Fig. 1.9.2 DANGER/WARNING/CAUTION Label
1−13 Q1E-EA0466
Information
DANGER POSSIBLE EXPLOSION HAZARD

IF USED IN THE PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE OR NONFLAMMABLE
ANESTHETICS：
This equipment is not explosion-proof type. Never use it in

the atmosphere where explosive gas, toxic gas, inflammable
gas or flammable gas.
WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

REPLACE FUSES ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING :
For replacement of fuse, use the supplied fuse. Never use any
fuse other than the specified, otherwise damage to the equipment
will result. Use the slow-blow type fuse. Do not use fast-blow
type fuse.
CAUTION TO BE OPENED BY AUTHORIZED PERSON ONLY :
Do not detach the covers fixed with screws. Detaching the cover
and contacting with electrical component iside may cause
electric shock. For repair and checkup of the inside of the
equipment, be sure to call service from Hitachi or our authorized
dealer.
CAUTION FILTER HAS TO BE CLEANED FREQUENTLY :
Carry out the periodical checkup of the dust filter located

on the air inlet window of the power supply unit once a week,
and clean it if dust is found in it.
CAUTION STRONG RADIATION OR ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE CAN CAUSE

MALFUNCTION OF EQUIPMENT :
Equipment may fail to function normally due to radio wave

generated from apparatus such as portable telephone.
Never use any apparatus such as “portable telephone”

“transceiver” “portable radio” and “radio-controlled toy”
nearby the equipment. Be sure to power down those apparatus.
1−14 30 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 2 Equipment Composition
2.1 Standard Components

(1) Main unit (integrated on a cart) 1 set
(2) Accessories 1 set
• Probe hanger 1
• Ultrasound jelly 1
• Dust-proof cover 1
• Floppy Disks for Reset up (3.5in,2pcs) 1 set
• MO disk for System set up (3.5in 640MB type) 1
• Hexagonal wrench bar 1
• Spare fuses 1 set
• Cords 1 set
• Instruction manual 1
2.2 Optional Components

(1) Probes
• Phased array probe 2.5MHz EUP-S30T
This probe is suitable for cardiac and small organ exams.
• Phased array probe 4-2MHz EUP-S50
• Phased array probe 7-3MHz EUP-S52
• Convex type probe 3.5MHz 10R EUP-C511
This probe is suitable for abdominal and cardiac exams.
• Convex type probe 3.5MHz 20R EUP-C312T
This probe is suitable for abdominal and small organ exams.
• Convex type probe 5-2MHz 40R EUP-C514
• Convex type probe 3.5MHz 40R EUP-C314G
2−1 Q1E-EA0466
• Convex type probe 8-4MHz 20R EUP-C532
• Linear type probe 7.5MHz EUP-L53
This probe is suitable for vascular and small organ exams.
• Linear type probe 7.5MHz EUP-L33
• Linear type probe 7.5MHz EUP-L53S
• Linear type probe 10MHz EUP-L34T
• Linear type probe 7.5MHz EUP-L33ST
• Linear type probe 13-6.5MHz EUP-L54M
• Transvaginal probe (Wide view type) 6.5MHz 10R EUP-V53W
This probe is suitable for transvaginal exams.
• Transvaginal probe (Wide view type) 6.5MHz 10R EUP-V33W
This probe is suitable for transvaginal exams.
• Intracavital probe(Convex/Convex type)
6.5MHz 10R/6.5MHz 10R
EUP-CC331
This probe is suitable for transrectal and transvaginal exams.
• Intracavital probe (Linear type) 7.5MHz EUP-U33
• Transrectal probe (Convex type) 6.5MHz 10R EUP-R53W
2−2 Q1E-EA0466
• Transrectal probe (7.5MHz Linear/6.5MHz Convex)
EUP-U533
This probe is suitable for transrectal exams.
• Transrectal probe (5.0MHz Linear/5.0MHz Convex)
EUP-U322
This probe is suitable for transrectal exams.
• Puncture probe (Convex type) 3.5MHz 40R EUP-B314
This probe is suitable for abdominal and biopsy exams.
• Puncture probe (Linear type) 3.5MHz EUP-B31
This probe is suitable for abdominal and biopsy exams.
• Intraoperative probe (7.5MHz Linear) EUP-O53T
This probe is suitable for intra-operative exams.
• Intraoperative probe (Linear type) 7.5MHz EUP-O33J
This probe is suitable for intra-operative exams.
• Single Element CW Doppler probe 2.5MHz EUP-TC3
• Finger top probe 7.5MHz 40R EUP-F334
• Finger top probe 8-4MHz 10R EUP-F531
• Trans esophageal probe (Phased array biplane type)
5.0MHz/5.0MHz EUP-ES322
• Trans esophageal probe (Phased array biplane type)
7.5MHz/7.5MHz EUP-ES533
• Trans esophageal probe (Phased array multi plane type)
5.0MHz EUP-ES52M
• Laparoscopic probe 7.5MHz 40R EUP-OL334
2−3 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Ultrasound endoscopic probe(Convex type)
7.5MHz 10R
Made by Pentax Corp. FG-34UX
Made by Pentax Corp. EG3630U
These endoscopic and laparoscopic probe are not protected

against discharge of defibrillator. Do not use them with
defibrillator.
(3) Biomedical waveform display unit EZU-EK23

(4) Cine memory unit EZU-MM16
(5) Omni Directional M mode unit EZU-MM17
(6) Steerable CW Doppler unit EZU-ST4
(7) Single Element CW Doppler unit EZU-CW2
(8) Software Specified for Contrast Agents(for Abdominal) EZU-CH3
(9) DICOM transfer software EZU-FC5
(10)DICOM Image Printing software EZU-FC5P
(11)DICOM WorkList Software EZU-FC5W
(12)SCSI card interface unit EZU-Pi1
(13)Net card interface unit EZU-Pi2
(14)Digital capture card interface unit EZU-Pi3
(15)3D Display unit EZU-3D2
(16)3D Display unit (Magnetic Sensor) EZU-3D2S
(17)Panoramic Display Software EZU-WS2
(18)Stress Echo Software EZU-SE1
(19)15-inch color monitor display unit EZU-MT24-S1
(20)Foot switch (For freeze) EZU-FS1
(Degrees of protection provided by enclosures:IP31）
(21)Foot switch (For EZU-3D2(S),EZU-WS1,EZU-SE1) EZU-FS2
2−4 Q1E-EA0466
(Degrees of protection provided by enclosures:IP31）
(22)VCR remote control cable EZU-RO1
(23)Mini-Probe Interface
- Mini-Probe Interface Unit EZU-MS6
- Ultrasonic Probe Connecting Unit (by FUJINON®) SP-711UA
- Translator (by FUJINON®) TL-1A
(24)Mini Probes
- Sonoprobe System PL Series (by FUJINON®)
PL1720-12,15,20
PL1920-12,15,20
PL2220-12,15,20
PL1726-12,15,20
PL1926-12,15,20
PL2226-12,15,20
- Front Loading Probe PL26-7.5 Series (by FUJINON®)
PL1726-7.5
PL1926-7.5
PL2226-7.5
PL1726B-7.5
PL1926B-7.5
PL2226B-7.5
For accessories of equipment, please refer to Technical guide with

Hitachi Medical Corporation or its authorized agent.
For combination with optional components, consult with Hitachi

Medical Corporation or its authorized agent.
2−5 34 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 3 Components and Functions
3.1 Component Description
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[7] [8]
Fig. 3.1-1 General View of EUB-6500
[1] Monitor [6] Probe connector

[2] ON/STANDBY switch [7] ECG connector
[3] Keyboard panel (PCG option is not supported)
[4] Caster [8] OPTION connector

[5]Steering handle
3−1 Q1E-EA0466
[11]
[10] [12]
[9]
[14]
[13]
Fig. 3.1-2 Right and front side of Equipment
[9] MOD [12] FDD

[10] Eject button and access lamp of MOD [13] Access lamp of FDD
[11] Breaker switch [14] Eject button of FDD
3−2 Q1E-EA0466
3.2 Keyboard Panel
[40] [39] [38] [37] [36]
[1] [35]
∼ ! @ # $ % & * ( ) ￣ + Back
Esc ＾ _ Space Del MAIN VCR
｀ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MENU ORIG
↑
｛
UP
｛
↑
Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P [
[ Enter Ins DEPTH GAIN [34]
↑
GS :
--
HC
AC FL
”
Caps Lock A S D F G H J K L ; ´ ＼ [33]
CRL ← → BPD
〈〉
B↑ N↓
?
Shift Z X C V M , . Shift
/
Ctrl Alt Space Anno− Character Character Ctrl

[2] Patient tation Clear
End
Exam
[32]
FUNCTION
[3] GUIDE
PREV
[31]
NEXT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OBLIQUE SWEEP
SPEED
[30]
[4] PROBE PHYSIO 3D USER USER
OPTION CONTRAST
IMAGE
PROCESS
MODE
DEPENDED 1 2 [28]
SAMPLE BASELINE
LENGTH
[5] [51] [29] [27]
[41-48] ZOOM
REF FREQ F-STEPS

[6]
M - WRITE READ S - WRITE V-SCALE
[26]
M
CW PW
dTHI
[25]
[7] [52] FOCUS DEPTH/MAG
SOUND VOL US POWER CFI CFA [54] IMAGE SELECT
[8] [50][55] [56] DUAL
REPORT MEAS MENU
. [53] SINGLE
[24]
[9] 1 B
L（U） R（D）
[23]
[10] CLEAR TRACE POINTER
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
[11] [49] [57] [58] PRINT [22]

[12] REC CALIP
FREEZE [21]
2 UNDO ENTER REC
1
COLOR
Full Digital POSI／SIZE
Architecture
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16] [17] [18] [19] [20]
Fig. 3.2-1 Keyboard Panel
3−3 Q1E-EA0466
[1] Alpha-numeric keyboard
Esc ∼ ! @ # $ % ＾ & * ( ) ￣ + Back
｀ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 _
Space
De
↑ ｛｛
I↑
UP
Ta Q W E R T Y U O P Enter Ins
[ [
AC FL GS HC : ”
Caps Lock A S D F G H J K↑ L↑ ;
--
´ ＼
CRL ← → 〈〉
B↑ N↓
BP ?
Shift Z X C V M , . / Shift
Ctrl Alt Patient Space Anno-

tationn Character Characte Ctrl
Clear
n
Enters a comment
The Patient key,Annotation key,Charcter key and Character clear
key are not included in Aloha numeeric keys.
End
[2] Exam End Exam key
A function to force any images not yet printed to be printed in

the multi image printer output setting. This also functions to
send the End Exam notification in the system incorporated with
the DICOM worklist EZU-FC5W.
GUIDE
[3] Guide key
Displays/Cancels the biopsy guide line.
PROBE
[4] PROBE key
Select a probe and application.
[5] Image filing key

M-WRITE READ S-WRITE
Stores the image being displayed on the screen to the image memory
(Multi-image : M-WRITE key, Single image : S-WRITE key) and Reads
(displays) an image stored in the image memory.
[6] SOUND VOL toggle

SOUND VOL
Switches over speaker volume levels in Doppler mode.
[7] US POWER toggle

US POWER
Switches over ultrasound power levels.
3−4 Q1E-EA0466
[8] Angle encorder toggle switch
When the toggle switch at the right of know in pressed and angle
encorder is rotated, an incidental angle bar with an angle
registered in APPLICATION also rotated on Doppler line when the
toggle switch at the left of know is pressed and angle encorder
is rotated, prove mark also rotated.
REPORT
[9] REPORT key
Switches over to patient report function.
MEAS MENU
[10] MEAS MENU key
Displays the measurement name selection menu.
CLEAR
[11] CLEAR key
[Clears] any in functions of the measurement, Main Menu and so

on.
TRACE
[12] TRACE key
Carries out TRACE measurement.
CALIP
[13] CALIP key
Carries out caliper measurement.
REC
[14] REC 2 key
Output image to storage device for setting image record function

of user definition.
[15−17] Trackball related keys
UNDO ENTER
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
3−5 Q1E-EA0466
[15]Trackball cancel button (UNDO)
Acts as [Cancel] for functions of the Measurement, Main Menu,
Full Screen Menu and so on.
[16]Trackball
Used for various functions to operate 2-dimentionally.
[17]ENTER Key (Trackball settled button)

Acts as [Set or Enter] for functions of the Measurement, Main
Menu, Full Screen Menu so on.
REC
[18] REC 1 key
Output image to storage device for setting image record function

of user definition.
PRINT
[19] PRINT key
Carries out printing for the scanner selected by user.
FREEZE
[20] FREEZE key
Freezes an image.
L(U) R(D)
[21] L / (U), R / (D) key (Left / Right image selection
key)
Switches over the screen selected in the memory select function.
MULTI
[22] SINGLE
MULTI / SINGLE key
Switches over multi/single screen to be selected in the memory

select function.
[23] Focus depth setting toggle switch

FOCUS
3−6 Q1E-EA0466
Switches over positions of focus of transmit wave.
[24] DEPTH /MAG toggle switch

DEPTH / MAG
When running pan zoom switches over display magnification factor

(MAGNIFICATION).
Other cases Switches over display depth (moving display range
up/down)
[25] REF FREQ toggle switch

REF FREQ
Switches over prove Frequency and REF.
[26] V-SCALE (PRF) toggle switch

V-SCALE
(PRF)
Switches over speed range doppler or CFM image
[27] F-STEP toggle switch

F-STEPS
Switches over step of multi-focus.
ZOOM
[28] ZOOM key
Turn ON / OFF pan zoom function.
[29] SAMPLE LENGTH toggle switch

SAMPLE
LENGTH
Adjustment width of sample gate.
[30] BASELINE toggle switch

BASELINE
Move baseline to doppler image.
[31] OBLIQUE toggle switch

OBLIQUE
Switches over angle of oblique scan.
3−7 Q1E-EA0466
[32] SWEEP SPEED toggle switch
SWEEP
SPEED
Switches over sweep speed for doppler or M-mode image.
DEPTH GAIN
[33] DEPTH GAIN slide volume
Switches over the gain for each depth of the B (M)-mode image.
[34] MAIN
MENU MAIN MENU key
Arrange functions not operable in the control panel and function

menus (except MODE DEPENDED MENU)
VCR
[35] ORIG VCR / ORG key
Switches over contents to be displayed on the monitor screen.
[36] Character
Clear CHARACTER CLEAR key
It clears all the characters entered.
[37] Character CHARCTER key
Switches over to character input mode from the character keyboard.
Anno-
[38] tation ANNOTATION key
Selects abbreviation related to diagnos is from the list and

displays it on the screen.
[39] Patient Patient key
Input and modify patient information.
[40] FUNCTION
Function menu selection toggle switch
PREV
NEXT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3−8 Q1E-EA0466
Selects any of function menus (F1∼F7) displayed at the bottom
of screen.
PHYSIO USER USER

[41-48] OPTION CONTRAST
IMAGE
PROCESS
MODE
DEPENDED Function menu starting keys
1) PHYSIO key
Select Bio wave display function menu.
2) OPTION key
Select the option menu.
3) 3D key
Select the 3D display function menu.
4) CONTRAST key
Select the CONTRAST function menu.
5) IMAGE PROCCESS key
Select the adjustment of image post process function.
6) MODE DEPENDED key
Operates any function used especially frequently among
various functions to be operated in the main menu.
7) USER 1 key
Select user definition menu.
8) USER 2 key
Select user definition menu.
[49] ANGLE key encoder
• When the switch at the center of know is pressed, an incidental

angle items with an angle registered in toggle selection is
displayed or not.
• If outer circle part of the know is rotated, the incidental
item also rotates.
[50] M mode selection key and Gain encorder
• Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the M mode.

• Turning the periphery of knob switches over gain correction
values of the M mode image.
3−9 Q1E-EA0466
[51] Doppler mode selection key and encoder
• Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the doppler

mode.
• Turning the periphery of knob switches over again correction
values of the doppler image.
[52] Color mode selection key and GAIN encoder

CFI CFA
• Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the color

mode.
values of the color image.
[53] B mode selection key and encorder
• Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the B mode.

value of the B mode image.
[54] d THI key
Select from basic wave image of B, M mode to d THI image.
CW
[55] CW key
Select the CW mode when doppler mode.
PW
[56] PW key
Select the PW mode when doppler mode.
[57] POINTER key

POINTER
Display or not the arrow mark on image.
[58] TRACK BALL PRIOLITY Toggle switch

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
Manually switches over trackball priority when multiple

functions using the trackball are running.
3−10 43 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 4 Operation Procedures
4.1 Preparation before Use

4.1.1 Connecting the probe
(1) Connect the probe cable with
the probe connector at the
side panel of main unit. Be
sure to connect it to the
bottom with the cord leading
section at the right side.
Fig. 4.1.1-1 Connecting the Probe
Be sure to turn OFF the

ON/STANDBY switch or select
the other probe before
connecting/disconnecting the
probe connector.
Never connect/disconnect the
probe while selecting the
probe. Doing so will cause
trouble or malfunction of the
equipment.
Also, securely turn the

handle to the “LOCK”
position labeled on the
probe connector.
“LOCK” position “OPEN” position
Fig. 4.1.1-2 Locking connector
4−1 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Put the probe cord on the
probe hanger.
Fig. 4.1.1-3 Cord Hanger
4.1.2 Positioning the viewing monitor

Adjust the monitor face to appropriate angle at which the screen
is easily observed.
Fig. 4.1.2-1 Positioning the Monitor
4.1.3 Check before power ON

Check the following before inserting the power plug into the
fixed power outlet.
(1) Checking periodical inspection

Check if periodical inspection and cleaning described in
Section 14 Maintenance Check and Cleaning are periodically
carried out.
If specified check interval has elapsed, carry out
periodical check and cleaning first.
When using the equipment again after long storage, carry
out in the same way.
4−2 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Checking the equipotential terminal
When using this equipment with other equipments (for
example, in operating room), connect the equipotential
terminal of this equipment with the equipotential
terminals of other equipments.
Fig. 4.1.3-1 Equipotential terminal
(3) Checking power capacity

Check if the power outlet and power wiring connected with
it have a capacity of 1.2kVA or more
Also, if using this equipment and the other device at the
same time with the same power outlet used together, power
wiring capacity may be exceeded. It is recommended to
connect this equipment with an independent power outlet.
4−3 Q1E-EA0466
4.2 Starting the Equipment
4.2.1 Power ON
After turning ON the breaker
switch at the side of equipment,
ON/STANDBY
turn ON the ON/STANDBY switch at switch
the upper left of control panel.
This turns on the power lamps of Breaker
switch
control panel and TV monitor and
starts setup of the equipment.
Fig. 4.2.1-1 Location of Switches
1) ON/OFF of the ON/STANDBY switch

Do not perform ON/OFF operation while the unit is on the
way of starting/ finishing operation. The equipment may
be damaged.
2) When the equipment does not start
When all of the lamps of control panel and TV monitor doe
not light and the fan does not rotate even if turning ON
the ON/STANDBY switch, check the power cord and breaker
switch.
If the power cord is normally connected and the breaker
switch is ON, turn OFF the breaker switch and have a contact
with the service personnel.
3) Breaker switch
Normally use the equipment while setting the switch to
ON ( ).
Do not put it OFF except such emergent cases as the unit
makes fire or smoke, generates stink, or any abnormality
occurs in the unit.
The starting time is about three minutes.

（The starting time varies by system setting and
configuration.)
4−4 Q1E-EA0466
4.2.2 Releasing Freeze
If the equipment started normally, it is necessarily in the
B-mode stationary image state (Freeze ON)
FREEZE
When using the equipment, press the key to release Freeze.
4.2.3 Adjusting brightness of the monitor

Use the BRIGHT and CONTRAST knobs at the bottom of TV monitor
to adjust brightness of TV monitor.
Fig. 4.2.3-1 Adjusting Brightness of the Monitor
4−5 Q1E-EA0466
4.2.4 Selecting a probe and application
When a probe key is pressed, a dialogue for switching over
the probe is displayed.
Connected probe menu Default application menu Application menu
Check box for “keep Non-Active image in dual B-mode”
Fig. 4.2.4-1 Probe Selection Menu

In the dialogue three menus are shown.
(1) Connected probe menu
Item numbers from 1 to 3 in the probe menu correspond to
the probe connector numbers from probe 1 to 3 respectively.
Item number 4 functions when a single element probe for
CW mode is connected to that connector.
The probe of which button is in the pressed status is
selected currently.
(2) Default application menu
4−6 Q1E-EA0466
In the scanner it is possible to assign the best suited
application setting to every probe.
In this menu the application setting frequently used is
registered.
(3) Application menu
In the scanner it is possible to register to every probe
22 kinds of application at maximum provided by HMC and
also 10 kinds of user defined application when it is
delivered from the factory. In this menu all the
applications registered for currently selected probe are
displayed.
Font color of each application shows the meaning as
mentioned below.
Blue letters mean that application is assigned to the
default application.
Bold letters mean the application being selected now.
Other letters mean selectable applications.
(4) Check box for “keep Non-Active image in dual B-mode”
Incase of “cheked” , Non active image in dual B-mode
display is not cleared by switching over the probe.
Incase of “no checked” display mode go to single B-mode
display by switching over the probe.
There are two procedures for switching over the probe.

Procedure 1:
1) Move the cursor to the default application switch of the
probe intended for selection, then click (Enter) key.
→ The application is switched over and the probe is
selected.
Procedure 2:
1) Move the cursor to the item in the probe menu, click (Enter)
key. → The display is changed to show the status of button
pressed.
2) In the next move the cursor to intending application in
4−7 Q1E-EA0466
the application menu, then click (Enter) key.
→ The application is changed and the probe is selected.
In case only the application is to be changed, perform either

the above procedure 1) or 2) of the procedure 2 directly.
4.3 Setting Auto Freeze Function
The auto freeze function automatically
freezes the image when no panel
operation is performed for more than
10 minutes with freeze released.
To prevent the equipment and probe from
degradation, it is ON when started.
Use the equipment with the auto

freeze function set to ON unless
necessary. If using the equipment Fig. 4.3-1 Setting Auto Freeze
for a long time with it OFF or
leaving it while doing nothing,
temperature on the surface of probe
lens increases and it may cause low
temperature burn.
[To set the auto freeze function to OFF]

(1) Press the key to display the main menu.
(2) Select the Setup item.
(3) Set the check box of Auto Freeze item to Off.
[To set the auto freeze function to ON]

• Turn the ON/STANDBY switch to OFF, wait for 10 seconds and turn
the power ON again.
• Or, set the check box of Auto Freeze item above to On.
4−8 Q1E-EA0466
4.4 Patient
When operator press the Patient key, Patient menu dialog is
displayed .In that sitiation, if selecting the NEW PATIENT,
the scanner is going to the following state.
• Initializing of patient information
• Initializing of measurement report data
• Automatic execution of APPLICATION
• Automatic execution of measurement report recording
4−9 Q1E-EA0466
4.4.1 Entry of Standard ID (Entry of Standard Menu)
When Patient key is pressed, a dialogue for entering Patient
Menu is displayed. Following to the operating method shown
on each of below mentioned items from (1) to (17) enter or
change data. When entering or changing all the data is finished,
confirm the contents, then click button.
In case NEW Patient is selected in the entry an automatic
execution of Application and an initialization of patient
information are performed.
When it is needed to change contents of new data or contents
of modification of existing data on the way of the entry, click
button.
(2)
(1)
(3) (5)
(4)
(6)
(10)
(11) (7)
(12)
(8)
(13)
(9)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
Fig. 4.4.1-1 Patient Menu（Standard Menu）
4−10 Q1E-EA0466
(1) Selection of New data entry or modification of existing
data
Select the entry is either for new patient information
or for modification of existing information.
(2) Selection of Standard Menu entry or OB Menu entry
Select the entry is either for Standard Patient information
(Standard) or for Obstetric Patient information
(Obstetric).
According to this selection items for the entry after that
are to be different.
Fig. 4.4.1-1 shows the entry of Standard Patient
information.
(3) Enter [ID]
Enter patient ID from the keyboard.
Number of characters for entry is about 15 as a standard.
(4) Enter [Name]
Enter patient name from the keyboard.
(5) Select [Input Order]
Select patient’s ID-Name or Name-ID inputting in turn.
(6) Select [Sex]
Press “ ” to select “M” (Male) , “F” (Female) or “O” (Other)
from the list displayed.
(7) Enter [Height]
(a) Enter numeric value
Enter body height using numeric of the keyboard.
Number of characters is 3.Select unit
Press “ ” to select “cm” or “in” from the list displayed.
(8) Enter [Weight]
(a) Enter numeric value
Use numeric keys and “.” to enter body weight value.
Number of characters is 4.
4−11 Q1E-EA0466
(b) Select unit
Press “ ” to select “kg”, “g” or “lbs” (pound) from the
list displayed.
(9) Display [BSA]
[BSA] value is automatically calculated from [Height] and
[Weight].
Select ON/OFF of “□” (Check box) for display or
non-display.
(10) Enter [Birth Date]
Enter birth date as follows:
(a) Enter [Year](YYYY)
Enter a value (Christian Era) of four digits
using the numeric keys of keyboard.
(b) Enter [Month](MM)
Enter a value of “1” ~ “12” using the numeric keys
of keyboard.
(c) Enter [Day](dd)
Enter a value of ”1” ~ “31” using the numeric keys
of keyboard.
(d) Check [Age]
(i) Check value
Age is automatically calculated and displayed in
the order of [Year], [Month] and [Day].
(ii) Correct unit
Press “ ” to select “yr.”(year), “mo.”(month),
“wk.”(week) or “day” from the list displayed.
After selection, age is automatically recalculated
and displayed as (i).
(11) Enter [Clinical History]

Enter clinical history from the keyboard.
characters.
(12) Enter [Ordering Physician]
Enter the name of physician from the keyboard.
Maximum number of characters for entry is 15 in numeric
4−12 Q1E-EA0466
characters. This item can have 10 histories. (Maximum)
(13) Enter [Sonographer]
Enter the name of examination technologist from the
keyboard.
(14) Enter [Purpose of U/S]
Enter purpose of clinical examination from the keyboard.
(15) Entry of keyword
This is to enter Keyword for easy retrieval of Measuring
report or Image filing. This item can have 10 histories.
(Maximum)
(16) Enter ACCESSION# from the keyboard if necessary.
(This can be set when the optionally available Net Card
Interface unit EZU-Pi2 and DICOM Transfer Software EZU-FC5
are incorporated.)
(17) Enter EXAM.TYP(examination type) from the keyboard if
necessary.
are incorporated.)
(18) Change setting of [US Power]
Turning “□” (Check box) ON suppresses US power.(Refer to
4.7.2)
4−13 Q1E-EA0466
4.4.2 Entry of OB measurement ID (Entry of Obstetric measurement
menu)
When Patient key is pressed, a dialogue for entering Patient
Menu is displayed. Following to the operating method shown
on each of below mentioned items from (1) to (17) enter or
change data. When entering or changing all the data is finished,
confirm the contents, then click button.
In case NEW Patient is selected in the entry an automatic
execution of Application and an initialization of patient
information are performed.
When it is needed to change contents of new data or modification
of existing data on the way of the entry, click button.
(1) (2)
(3) (5)
(4)
(6 (15)
(7) (16)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12) (17)
(13)
(14)
Fig. 4.4.2-1 Patient Menu（Obsteric Menu）
4−14 Q1E-EA0466
(1) Selection of New data entry or modification of existing
data
Select the entry is either for new patient information
or for modification of existing information.
(2) Selection of Standard Menu entry or OB Menu entry
Select the entry is either for Standard Patient information
(Standard)
or for Obstetric Patient information (Obstetric).
According to this selection items for the entry after that
are to be different.
Figure 4.4.2-1 shows the entry of Obstetric measurement
information.
(3) Enter [ID]
Enter patient ID from the keyboard.
(4) Enter [Name]
Enter patient name from the keyboard.
(5) Select [Input Order]
Select patient’s ID-Name or Name-ID inputting in turn.
(6) Enter [Birth Date]
For entry of birth date and age, refer to the standard
ID dialog (4.4.1 (10)).
(7) Enter [Clinical History]
Enter clinical history from the keyboard.
characters.
(8) Enter [Ordering Physician]
Enter the name of physician from the keyboard.
(9) Enter [Sonographer]
Enter the name of examination technologist from the
keyboard.
characters.
4−15 Q1E-EA0466
This item can have 10 histories. (Maximum)
(10) Enter [Purpose of U/S]

Enter purpose of clinical examination from the keyboard.
(11) Entry of keyword
This is to enter Keyword for easy retrieval of Measuring
report or Image filing.
This item can have 10 histories. (Maximum)
(12) Enter ACCESSION# from the keyboard if necessary.
are incorporated.)
(13) Enter EXAM.TYP(examination type) from the keyboard if
necessary.
are incorporated.)
(14) Change setting of [US Power]
Turning “ ” (Check box) ON suppresses US power.(Refer to
4.7.2)
(15) Enter [LMP]
Entry of the last menstrual period is shown below:
(a) Enter [Year]
Enter a value of four digits (Christian Era) from the
keyboard.
(b) Enter[Month]
Enter a figure of “1” ~ “12” from the keyboard.
(c) Enter [Day]
Enter a figure of “1” ~ “31” from the keyboard.
(16) Enter [DGA]
(a) Select a method to calculate gestational age
4−16 Q1E-EA0466
Select a method for calculation from [LMP], [EDC] and
[FIRST DGA].
Difference of calculation methods is shown in the table
below:
Table 4.5.2-1 Selection of Method to Calculate Gestational Age
Today's
LMP EDC FIRST DGA
DGA
Date of the 1st
Date Date of LMP Date of EDC or past —
examination
Gestational Today's
Week — —
age at that date DGA
Date of
Method Date of Date of
examination +
tocalcula examinatio examination Week
Gestational
te DGA n – Date – Date + Week
period – Date
(b)Enter [Date]
For entry of date, refer to the method to enter [LMP].
(c)Enter [Week]
If selecting [FIRST DGA] in selecting the method for
calculation, gestational age may be entered.
(i) Enter [Week]
Enter a value of week using the numeric keys of keyboard.
Maximum number of characters for entry is 2.
(ii)Enter [Day]
Enter a figure of “0” ~ “6” using the numeric keys of
keyboard.
(17) Enter [Obstetric history]

A method to input pregnant history is mentioned below.
(a)The number of pregnancies (GRAV)
(b)The number of births (PARA)
(c)The number of abortions / stillbirths (AB)
Input figures from “0” ~ “99” using numeric keys of key board.
4−17 Q1E-EA0466
4.5 Entering Hospital Name
Selecting [Main Menu] → [Setup] →
[Hosp. Name] displays a dialog box for
entering hospital name
Enter the hospital name from the
keyboard.
Number of characters for entry is Fig. 4.5-1 Entering
Hospital Name
about 29 as a standard.
Upon completing all entries and
changes, check contents of entry and
click the button.
If any of entries and changes is to
be canceled, click the
button.
4.6 Changing Time

Selecting [Main Menu] → [Setup] →
[System] → [Date/Time] then submenu
[Set Date/Time] displays a dialog for
entering time.
(Refer to 7.9(2))
Fig. 4.6-1 Changing Time
4.7 Controls Affecting the Acoustic Output

Generally the ultrasound scanner said to be “harmless and
non-invasive”; however, it is not “perfectly harmless” so long as
irradiating ultrasound vibration to human body.
It is strongly recommended to operate the equipment with the US power
as low as possible.
4−18 Q1E-EA0466
4.7.1 Acoustic output level
The ULTRASOUND POWER control allows choice among three
different levels.
The selected output level is indicated on the screen.
l) “PWR : H” : High
2) “PWR : M” : Medium
3) “PWR : L” : Low
Fig. 4.7.1-1 Where the Level Displayed
The derated spatial-peak temporal-average intensity

level in all settings is less than 720mW/cm2.
4−19 Q1E-EA0466
4.7.2 ULTRASOUND POWER Control
(1) Procedure to change ultrasound power by toggle

US POWER
switch.
The procedure to change the ultrasound power by the
US POWER
toggle switch differs depending on the specified

diagnostic application.
(a) In case the set diagnostic application is fetal use in

Obstetric Measurement ID input, in the case that the
higher ultrasound power setting is desired, do the
following procedure.
Operate the toggle switch to upward and then the window

US POWER
shouwn in Fig. 4.7.2-1 is displayed.

Use the trackball to move the cursor to the Yes button.
Press “Trackball settled button”.
Then, the ultrasound power level may be increased by one stage.
Use the trackball to move the cursor to the No button.
Press “Trackball settled button”.
The ultrasound power level is kept current stage.
Fig. 4.7.2-1 US Power Message Window
(b) In case the set diagnostic application is not Fetal use.

Operating the US POWER toggle switch immediately changes
over the ultrasound power output level without displaying
the above screen shown in Fig. 4.7.2-1.
4−20 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Default of ULTRASOUND POWER
The scanners to be shipped from the factory are set as
follows :
- The default ULTRASOUND POWER output level for all
applications is "High" level.
- The application of the default is not "Fetal Use".
Notice: When the unit is restarted after once it was shutdown,

the ultrasound power is returned to the level set
at the time of delivery from the factory.
4−21 Q1E-EA0466
4.8 Ending Use
If pressing the ON/STANDBY Switch at the
front of equipment again, the system
shuts down after executing the system
shut down process.
ON/STANDBY
After confirming the system switch
shuts down, turn off the Breaker

switch
Breaker switch.
Fig. 4.8-1
Position of Power Switch
1) Breaker Switch
Normally use the equipment with this switch ON ( ).
Do not press OFF ( ) in any case other than an emergency such
that fire, smoke or abnormal smell from the equipment or any
abnormality occurs in the equipment
2) ON/STANDBY Switch
When pressing the ON/STANDBY switch once and then restarting
the system, check if the system shut down process has been
completed and then power ON again.
If turning ON/OFF the switch while starting or shutting down
the system, the system may possibly be damaged.
3) In some cases a system ending action can not be performed as
intended even if you try to shut down the power by pressing
ON/STAND BY switch.
In that case shut off the power by operating a breaker switch.
4−22 Q1E-EA0466
4.9 The caution of connecting with Multiplane Transesophageal Probe
EUP-ES52M
(1) Connection of EUP-ES52M for EUB-6500
In case of connecting Multiplane Transesophageal EUP-ES52M to
EUB-6500, it is possible to connect to the probe 3 connector
only. If you connected to the other probe connector, “NO PROBE”
is indicated on the monitor of ultrasound scanner, and the
equipment does not work.
Probe3 Connecter
(2) Indication of warning under using EUP-ES52M

Under using EUP-ES52M, the temperature of the tip in acoustic
power does not exceed 41deg. When it exceeds 41deg, a following
message is indicated on the monitor of the ultrasound scanner,
“NEAR THERMAL LIMIT ADVISE LOWER POWER”.
Take the measure of lowering ultrasound power of finishing a
diagnosis and so on when this message is indicated.
When the temperature of the tip continues to rise beyond 41deg,
following message is indicated;
“MAXIMUM THERMAL LIMIT EXCEEDED.
CHANGE TRANSDUCERS OR RESET TO CONTINUE.
FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE USER’S MANUAL.”.
At the same time, EUB-6500 becomes in FREEZE-ON mode and stops
transmission of ultrasound by a function of a safety device
which prevents the temperature of the tip from exceeding 45deg.
If the ultrasound scanner becomes in FREEZE-ON mode, change
the probe or stop diagnosis, and wait until the message disappears.
Afterward, if the message disappeared, the ultrasound scanner
can be used in FREEZE-OFF mode and diagnosing become possible.
4−23 Q1E-EA0466
4.10 Operation of transesophageal probe EUP-ES322/EUP-ES533
As shown in Fig. 4.11-1, the transesophageal probe EUP-ES322
incorporates two electronic sector type transducers in the top
of the probe for longitudinal plane and transverse plane.
Selection of either longitudinal image or transverse image to be
displayed on the screen can be made by the probe selection menu
key corresponding to the connected probe. In this case, however,
B-mode single image display mode is automatically set. On the screen
is displayed a recognition mark of either T: Transverse) or L:
Longitudinal corresponding to the image plane displayed on the
screen. To show the positional relation with other sectional image,
the intersection arrow mark is also displayed on the sectional
image as shown in Fig. 4.11-2.
The intersection mark is displayed at the top and bottom on the
longitudinal image, while it is displayed only at the bottom of
the transverse image.
It is also possible to simultaneously display both the sectional
images in cine mode when this probe is used (refer to 5.2.10 MODE
DEPENDED mode (2nd page) Paragraph F3).
Longitudinal section
Transverse section
Fig. 4.11-1 Top Part of Transesophageal Probe EUP-ES322
4−24 Q1E-EA0466
Probe selection
menu key
Intersection
Intersection Transverse mark
mark Longitudinal section
section
Longitudinal
section
Transverse
section
Fig. 4.11-2 Selection of Longitudinal Section and

Transverse Section
4−25 61 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 5 Operation Modes
5.1 Overview
Operation of this equipment can be roughly divided into the
following four sections.
• Keyboard operation Functions to be controlled with switches
on the keyboard panel.
• TRACKBALL PRIORITY Function to switch over the use of
operation trackball.With this, the trackball is
used for various functions.
• Function menu Function to select and control menus
operation displayed at the bottom of monitor
screen.
• MAIN MENU Function to select menus displayed at
operation the left side of monitor screen.Its
major functions are adjustment of entire
system, adjustment items of lower
frequency, selection to allow
professional functions to be displayed.
5.1.1 Keyboard operation

Operates switches on the keyboard.
However, keys and switches listed below will be
described in the other subsections or sections
- TRACKBALL PRIORITY toggle switch (Refer to 5.1.2)
- Function menu key group and function toggle switch
group (Refer to 5.1.3)
- MAIN MENU keys (Refer to 5.1.4)
- Measurement key group: CALIP, TRACE, MEAS MENU, REPORT
and ERASE MENU (Refer to 11.2)
- Image memory keys: READ, S-WRITE and M-WRITE (Refer to
9.2)
- Recording related keys: PRINT, and VCR/ORIG (Refer to
Chapter 10)
- Character input keyboard: PATIENT (Refer to Chapter 4),
ANNOTATION, CHARACTER, CHARACTER CLEAR and Cursors.
(Refer to Chapter 6)
5−1 Q1E-EA0466
5.1.2 TRACKBALL PRIORITY
TRACKBALL PRIORITY is a function to switch over
functions that the trackball occupies when multiple
functions are available for the trackball. Clicking the
TRACKBALL PRIORITY toggle switch displayed on the upper
right of screen to the left and right switches over the
functions that the trackball occupies.
The TRACKBALL PRIORITY switches over occupancy by the
trackball on the following functions:
• B (M) image up/down • Measurement caliper
move • VCR playback angle
sample point setting
• Image steering • Probe mark
• Pan zoom ROI setting • Character input
• M mode beam line • Image filing function

box cursor
• Doppler mode sample • Main menu
point • Measurement menu
• CFM-ROI setting • Annotation menu etc.
• Image memory playback • No selection

by frame
• VCR playback by frame
• Image filing playback
by frame
Fig. 5.1.2-1 Trackball Priority Marks
5.1.3 Function menu operation

The function menu allows functions used frequently to be
accessed as menu. Contents of menu are displayed at the
bottom of screen, and toggle switches are used to access
to respective function. Also any grayed key such as F3
Biplane key indicates that it is not accessible in the
current setting.
FUNCTION
PREV
NEXT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5−2 Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 5.1.3-1 Correspondence of Menu and Toggle Switch
5−3 Q1E-EA0466
PREV
NEXT
: Scrolls the function menu pages. Clicking the
bottom displays the next page, while clicking
the top displays the previous page.
At the right end of the function menu at the
bottom of screen, marks are displayed to
indicate pages available.
Indicates the previous page is available.
Indicates the next page is available.
Fig.5.1.3-2 Scrolling Symbol
(1) Starting by exclusive key

Selecting the function menu key on the control panel
starts the menu. Also, when the menu is to be removed
from the screen, press that key again.
PHYSIO IMAGE MODE USER USER

OPTION CONTRAST PROCESS DEPENDED
Fig. 5.1.3-3 Function Menu Key Menu
PHYSIO
: The menu for PHYSIO functions is displayed.
(Refer to 5.8)
OPTION : Displays option functions.
Wide View :
Displays a wide view display function menu
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of the EZU-
WS2.)
Stress :
Displays a stress function menu.
SE1.)
: The menu for 3D display function is displayed.

3D2/3D2S.)
5−4 Q1E-EA0466
CONTRAST : The menu for contrast imaging function is
displayed. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of
the EZU-CH3.)
The following key display any menus corresponding to

each mode when switching over examination modes such as
B-mode, M-mode, etc.
IMAGE
PROCESS : Displays the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
Adjust image process functions.
MODE
DEPENDED : Displays the MODE DEPENDED menu.
Select any function frequently used.
The following keys are used to display an entry dialogue

when it is desired to previously enter user defined
functions.
A function can be entered by each key, so that user can
define max. 2 functions.
USER USER
, : Displays a user defined function menu
dialogue.
(2) Starting by the other exclusive key

PROBE
: Displays a connected probe to select the probe
(Refer to Chapter 4)
: Displays a fine image by receiving a frequency

equivalent to twice the transmitting frequency
5−5 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Starting by specific key
Starting any specific function displays the function
menu corresponding to the function.
- Character function
- Annotation function
- Measurement function
- VCR playback function
- Image filing continuous image recording function
- Image filing playback function
5.1.4 MAIN MENU operation

Menus related to settings and conditions of the
equipment.
If changing setting of these menus, keys to be activated
and function menu to be displayed may be changed.
Press the MAIN

MENU key to display the menu at the left side
of screen.
Use the trackball to move the cursor to any item and
press the ENTER button. The lower level window (Sub-
window) of the relevant item is newly opened.
Fig. 5.1.4-1 Sub-window
5−6 Q1E-EA0466
i) Item selection 1
Items with “ □ ” at the left in the menu indicates
[currently not selected].
When it is to be selected, move the cursor to “ □ ”
and press the ENTER button.
If selected, it changes to “□” with (“ ”) entered
in it.
Also the selection is to be canceled, use the same
steps as that for selection to switch to “ □ ” with
nothing in it.
ii) Item selection 2
Any item with “○” indicates
[selecting any one of them].
To select the item, move the
cursor to “○” and press the
ENTER key.
Also, if newly selecting any
item currently not selected,
the item previously selected
is deselected.
Fig. 5.1.4-2 Date/Time Menu
iii) Non-selectable items
For any item that cannot be selected, “□” or “○”
is not white but grayed.
iv) ▼ symbol
Any item with “▼” mark at the right indicates that
it has a lower level menu.
Move the cursor to an item with “ ▼ ” and press the
ENTER key. The new menu opens overlaid on the
current menu.
v) Input
For any items to which a character string or figure
are to be entered, an input menu opens at the center
of screen to allow characters to be entered.
After entering characters, press the ENTER key to
close the menu.
5−7 Q1E-EA0466
vi) End of MAIN Menu
Press the MAIN

MENU key again to close the menu and return
to the original menu. All menus close.
Or, move the cursor to

the “×” mark at the upper
right corner and press
the ENTER key to close
the menu screen.
Only Setup
If pressing “×” of the closes.
MAIN MENU, all menus are

closed.
Fig. 5.1.4-3 End of MAIN Menu
5−8 Q1E-EA0466
5.2 B mode
5.2.1 Display of B mode
If pressing the button at the center of with Freeze

OFF, a M-mode image is displayed.
The CFM mode is released if pressing the knob center
button when selecting the CFM mode in this state.
Hospital name Ultrasound power Right/Left orientation
Patient neme Patient ID Date Trackball priority
HITACHI Logo
Frame rate Time
Moving value of in
axial direction
Measurement menu Image display area

and Measurement marker
Result Frame
Gray scale
Body mark
Display area for

Post-process
value
B-mode gain Function menu

PROBE name
PDC Depth/MAG
Transmission SCC Application name
wave frequency Reception dynamic filter
B-mode AGC
B-mode enhancement in lateral direction
B-mode enhancement in axial direction
B-mode dynamic range
Fig. 5.2.1-1 Basic Screen Layout of B-Mode
5.2.2 Gain adjustment

(1) Adjusting brightness of whole image
Use the periphery of B gain
knob to adjust gain of B-
mode image as a whole. Dark
Turning to the right makes
the whole image brighter, Bright
and turning to the left
makes the whole image darker.
Fig. 5.2.2-1 B GAIN
5−9 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Adjusting sensitivity (brightness) at specific depth
<Common to all modes>
Shallow area
DEPTH GAIN
Use DEPTH GAIN CONTROL to

adjust gain for each depth.
Dark Bright
Sliding to the right makes
an area of specific depth
brighter, and sliding to
the left makes it darker.
Deep area
Fig. 5.2.2-2 DEPTH GAIN
5.2.3 Switching over electronic focus <Common to all modes>

The focus point can be switched
Focus position
over among 8 steps. Click the
toggle switch upward to make
the focus shallower, while Shallow
downward to make it deeper.
FOCUS
Deep
Fig. 5.2.3-1 Focus Depth
5.2.4 Switching over electronic focus steps

<Common to all modes>
Selecting the number of focal zone
The stage of focus may be Increasing

switched over from 1 to 4. number of stages
As the stage of focus increases,

an image focused in a wide
range may be displayed F-STEPS
Decreasing
number of stages
Fig. 5.2.4-1 Selecting the number

of focal zone
5−10 Q1E-EA0466
5.2.5 Switching over transmit frequency
US transmit frequency can be switched in 5 steps. Select
lower frequency side to obtain image of better
penetration (depth sensitivity), while higher frequency
side to obtain images of better distance resolution.
Table 5.2.4-1 Transmit Frequency (B mode)
Probe frequency(Labeled Frequency)
2.5MHz 3.5MHz 5.0MHz 6.5MHz 10.0MHz
7.5MHz
4-2 5-2 6-3 8-4 13-6
T-frequency 4.0 5.0 7.5 7.5 10.0 13.0
UP
REF FREQ
DOWN 2.0 2.5 3.5 5.0 5.0 6.5

NOTICE:All probe do not have 5 step frequncy.
Forexample EUP-CC331 has only 3 step .
5.2.6 Moving display position <Common to all modes>

(1) Switching display depth
Clicking the toggle switch upward makes display depth
wider, while clicking down makes it deeper.
NOTICE:
Range of display depth varies depending on the probe.
It has been set in a range of min 20mm ~ max 240mm
according to use of the probe.
Larger display depth
DEPTH / MAG
Smaller display depth
Fig. 5.2.6-1 Display Depth
5−11 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Steering an image
Use to select at the upper right of screen

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
and move the trackball to the left and right to move

the image displayed to the left and right in a range
of max display angle of the probe being selected or
in a range of max display width.
And press the UNDO key, the steering position is
returned to the center position.
Fig. 5.2.6-2 Steering Image
(3) Moving FOV (Field Of View) in depth direction
Use to select at the right of screen and move

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
the display start position of B-mode image with the

trackball.
Also, travel is displayed at the upper right of the
image.
And press the UNDO key, the travel is returned to 0mm.
Shallow
Deep
Fig. 5.2.6-3 Moving FOV in Depth Direction
5−12 Q1E-EA0466
5.2.7 Pan zooming function
Magnifies any region in the B, B/M, B/PW and B/CW-mode.
This operation differs from that in the CFM-mode.
ZOOM
(1) Pressing ZOOM displays a
rectangular frame indicating a ZOOM
region of interest (ROI) on

the image.
(2) When the trackball is not set

for moving ROI, use the
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
toggle switch to select ZOOM

at the upper right of screen.
Use the trackball to move ROI
to any intended region.
(3) Clicking the toggle DEPTH / MAG

DEPTH / MAG
switch downward enlarges the

ROI, while clicking upward
ENTER
contracts the ROI.
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
(4) Press the ENTER key to display

the region surrounded by ROI
enlarged.
Use the trackball to move ROI
up/down or to the left/right,
ZOOM
or use the toggle switch

DEPTH / MAG
to change magnification factor.
(5) Pressing ZOOM key again ends

the Pan Zoom function.
Fig. 5.2.7-1 Black/white Pan Zoom
5−13 73 Q1E-EA0466
5.2.8 Twin screen display of B mode images
MULTI
MULTI
Pressing the SINGLE
button Live
SINGLE
Live Freeze
switches the screen to B-mode
dual screen display one of
L(U)
which displays real time

Live Freeze Freeze Live
image (Live) and the other
R(D)
displays still image (Freeze).
L(U) R(D)
At this time, the L(U)
buttons select an image to be Live Live

a real time image. R(D)
MULTI
Pressing the SINGLE

button Fig. 5.2.8-1
again switches the screen to Dual Screen Display
L(U) R(D)
single screen display, and the buttons select
an image to be displayed.
5.2.9 Advanced dTHI (dynamic Tissue Harmonic Image)
Receives signals in double
dTHI-F: Fine mode
frequency against transmit
frequency to display a high
contrast image. dTHI-R: Resolution mode
Especially it is effective REF FREQ

dTHI-G: Generic mode
for a difficult patient.
To select dTHI mode, press
dTHI-P: Penetration mode
dTHI button . The type
Fig. 5.2.9-1 Advanced dTHI
of dTHI mode is displayed in
the transmission wave frequency display area at the
lower of the screen. (Refer to Fig.5.2.1-1)
You can select advanced dTHI in 4 steps. You can set to
select it automatically when selecting any probe in the
application menu.
(Refer to Section 8 APPLICATION Function.)
1)This function is effective only for some sort of

probes. When selecting any probe not applicable, dTHI
button is switched off.
2)To select the transmission wave frequency in the
fundamental imaging mode, switch off dTHI button .
5−13 Q1E-EA0466
3)Selecting dTHI-F or dTHI-R, it can be selected only 1
or 2 of focus point, and the density is fixed 1 of
high flame late.
4)Out of B mode(B/M, B/PW and CFM)can not be selected
dTHI-F and dTHI-R.
5)Sector probe can be selected only 3 step of dTHI-R,
dTHI-G and dTHI-P. Then, the number of focus point,
density and mode do not have limit of specification.
5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu

MODE
Pressing switches over the function menu at the
DEPENDED
bottom of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu. Also, when

selecting B mode, this mode is automatically selected.
(1) FREEZE OFF
1st page
2nd page
(2) FREEZE ON
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.2.10-1 MODE DEPENDED Menu
[FREEZE OFF]
− 1st page −
F3 Biplane display
Simultaneous real time display of dual sections is
realized by using the biplane probe or two probes with the
same name.
Indication of center position

(White arrow)
Longitudinal
Transverse
Fig. 5.2.10-2 Biplane Display
5−14 Q1E-EA0466
(1) Probe requirements
To make this function usable, connect either of the
following probes.
· Biplane probe: Convex type probe EUP-CC331
(Connect this probe to the probe
connectors PROBE 1 and 3 or 2 and 3.)
· Probe with the same model name:
2 probes
(Connect these probes to the probe
connectors PROBE 1 and 3 or 2 and 3.)
(2) Operation
If selecting the probe listed in (1) and clicking the
F3 toggle on the 2nd page with Freeze OFF, the dual
B-mode screen appears and ready for simultaneous real
time display.
If clicking the same toggle again, the simultaneous
real time display ends and the single screen viewed
before selecting the simultaneous real time display
is restored.
Also, if pressing the probe selection menu key during
the simultaneous real time display, it ends and
single screen of the image of the probe corresponding
to the key selected is displayed.
(3) Image display
On the screen, the identification mark of T:
Transverse or L: Longitudinal is displayed.
Also, as shown in Fig. 5.2.10-2, an arrow mark
indicating intersection is displayed on the tomogram.
5−15 Q1E-EA0466
F4 Horizontal reversal of image <Common to all modes>
Allows a B-mode image to be
revered horizontally.
Horizontal
reversal
Horizontal
reversal
Fig. 5.2.10-3
Horizontal Reversal of Image
F5 Image display angle

In case of the sector and convex
probes, display angle of B-mode
image is switched over in 6 Wider angle
steps.
For the linear probe, display 5
width is switched over in 6

steps. Narrower
angle
Fig. 5.2.10-4
Image Display Angle
F6 Switching line density

Allows number of scan lines of
B-mode image to be switched over. High frame rate
(1) High frame rate mode: 1

Scans in high frame rate. It
is appropriate for viewing a 6
region that moves. Frame rate

is high, but on the other hand,
Low frame rate
density of scan lines is kept
low.
(2) High density mode : 2 Fig. 5.2.10-5
Switching Density of
Obtains high definition image Scan lines
5−16 Q1E-EA0466
with double density of scan
lines. However, frame rate is
kept low.
F7 Dop Cursor display

A Doppler beam is displayed in the B image by checking [ ]
Displays Doppler Cursor in the
B image.
If pressing or during
cursor display, M image or

Doppler image of the cursor is
depicted.
Also, when selecting the 7
linear probe, B-mode Oblique

(F4 OBLIQUE of MODE DEPENDED
menu (2nd page)) may be
started, Doppler Cursor can be Doppler sample point
tilted.
Fig. 5.2.10-6 Cursor Display
− 2nd page −
F3 90º rotation of image <Common to all modes>
Allows a B-mode image to
be rotated by 90º.
• Upward click for left
rotation
3
• Downward click for right

rotation
Fig. 5.2.10-7
90o Rotation of Image
5−17 Q1E-EA0466
F4 Up/down reversal of image <Common to all modes>
Allows a B-mode image to
be reversed vertically. Vertical
reversal
Vertical
reversal
Fig. 5.2.10-8
Vertical Reversal of Image
F5 Mark move
The body mark can be moved to an optional place by
operating the track ball after selecting a body mark by F5
toggle switch. The body mark can be reset to its original
place by F6 toggle switch
F6 B color function
By utilizing the B-color function,
delicate brightness difference may OFF
be easily recognized.
This turns B-color On/Off.
6
ON
Fig. 5.2.10-9 B-Color

F7 B-color: Selecting colors
In the B-color, color of B/W,
SEPIA, PURPLE, BLUE and RAINBOW
can be selected.
Select each color from “B-color
map selection” (2nd page) of the
7
function menu in a rotation manner.
Color setting can be independently
selected for each of B, M and
Doppler-modes.
Color of B-mode is changed in the Fig. 5.2.10-10
Changing B-Color
5−18 Q1E-EA0466
B-mode, color of M-mode in M-mode
and color of Doppler-mode in
B/M/PW-mode.
[FREEZE ON]
− 1st page −
F1 REVIEW: Cine memory playback (Displayed only when cine
memory is available)
F2 SPD: Switches over playback speed (Displayed only when
selecting REVIEW)
(Refer to Section 9 Image Memory Unit)
F3, ODM: ODM PLAY
F5, F6, F7: Measurement functions assigned in Setup menu.
(Refer to 8.3.8)
− 2nd page −
F3, F4, F5, F6, F7: Same as [FREEZE OFF]
5.2.11 IMAGE PROCESS menu

Pressing IMAGE
PROCESS switches over the function menu at the
bottom of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.2.11-1 IMAGE PROCESS Menu
5−19 Q1E-EA0466
− 1st page −
F1 Dynamic range
Controls a tone of image.
It may be switched over in a range of 45dB~80dB in 5dB
step.
45dB: Tone with black/white
clearly separated.
1
80dB: Tone with fine shades of

Fig. 5.2.11-2
gray Dynamic Range
F2 Depth direction enhancement

F3 Horizontal direction enhancement
Selects the grade of image
edge enhancement by combining
depth direction (AXIAL) and 2
horizontal direction (LATERAL).

Each item may be switched over
in 4 steps of 1~4.
1: Edge enhancement Weak
3
4: Edge enhancement Strong

Fig. 5.2.11-3
Depth/Horizontal
Direction Enhancement
5−20 Q1E-EA0466
F4 AGC (Automatic gain control)
Allows an image to be
displayed with its prominent
echo level suppressed for
viewing the region that is apt
4
to be highly bright.
0: AGC OFF
1: AGC level low Fig. 5.2.11-4
Switching AGC
3: AGC level high
F5 Receive dynamic filter

Allows image quality to be
adjusted in 3 seps.
A: High resolution mode
B: Standard mode 5
C: Depth viewing mode

Selected mode is displayed at
the upper center of screen. Fig. 5.2.11-5
Receive Dynamic Filter
F6 SCC (Scan Correlation)

Correlates image frames.
This allows a smooth and soft
image to be obtained.
6
0: SCC OFF
1: SCC level low
Fig. 5.2.11-6 SCC
7: SCC level high
F7 Gray Map
Set an image adjustment. From
among 8 kinds of gray maps
select the map to obtain the 7
image adjustment you like best.
Fig. 5.2.11-7 Gray Map
5−21 Q1E-EA0466
− 2nd page −
F1 Control screen selection
The γ-CURVE menu is provided for
each of B-mode, M-mode, D-mode
and CFM-mode. If the function
menu is not “Control:B”, press
to select “B”.
1
PREV
NEXT
The γ -CURVE currently set for B-

mode is displayed at the lower
left of screen. γ-curve
Fig. 5.2.11-8
Control Screen Selection
F3γ-CURVE selection
Allowsγ-CURVE to be switched
over.
Also, γ-coefficient (F4) and
Center position (F5) are
displayed depending on theγ-
CURVE selected.
3
Fig. 5.2.11-9
γ-CURVE Selection
5−22 Q1E-EA0466
F4γ-coefficient
Allows γ-coefficient to be
switched over.
γ=small
It may be changed from 1.0 γ= large
4
to 4.0 in 0.1 step.
It is displayed depending on
theγ-CURVE selected.
γ= large
γ=small
γ=small
γ= large
Fig. 5.2.11-10 γ-coefficient
F5 Center value of S-shape curve

Displayed when the S-shape
curve is selected.
The position of center of S-
5
shape curve may be switched
over in a range of 0~255.
Fig. 5.2.11-11
Position of Center of Curve
F6 Rejection
Output signal
Adjusts shades of gray to

remove lower level echoes.
256 shades
Switches over in a range of Rejection

of gray
0~255. 6
Input signal
Fig. 5.2.11-12 Rejection
F7 Saturation
Output signal
Adjusts shades of gray to

256 shades
saturate high level echoes

of gray
to the maximum brightness.

7
Saturation
Input signal
Fig. 5.2.11-13 Saturation
5−23 Q1E-EA0466
5.2.12 B MENU of MAIN MENU
Press the MAIN

MENU key to display
MAIN MENU and select B MENU
if the B-mode has started.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.2.12-1
Starting B MENU
(1) FOCUS
Position : Switches over setting
of focus layout.
Auto : Automatically arranges.
Manual : Use the toggle on

FOCUS
the Keyboard to change

arrangement.
Stand-Off: When using the coupler
for surface probe,
this shifts the focus
point downward for the
coupler.
(Selectable only in
Position-Auto)
Fig. 5.2.12-2
FOCUS MENU
5−24 Q1E-EA0466
(2) View Angle
Switches view angle and view width
of ultrasound image.
NOTICE: The same as F5 ANGLE of

MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.2.12-3
View Angle Menu
(3) Scan Dens.

Switches over line density.

MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.2.12-4
Scan Dens. Menu
(4) Inv & Rot

Inverts or rotates an ultrasound
image
Invert R/L: Left/Right inversion
Invert U/D: Up/Down inversion
Rotate +90º: Counterclockwise
rotation
Rotate -90º: Clockwise rotation
NOTICE:The same function as F3,F4

of the MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.2.12-5
Inv & Rot Menu
5−25 Q1E-EA0466
(5) Dop.Cursor
Checking in displays Doppler
Cursor in the B-mode image.

MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.2.12-6
Scan Dens. Menu
(6) DEPTH GAIN
Display Curve
Fig. 5.2.12-7 Depth Gain Menu
GAIN values : Display values of each DEPTH GAIN.

Display Curve : Displays distribution corresponding
to GAIN value in depth direction at
the right side of screen.
MODE : Fixed) To every selector of Depth
Gain an area of depth is
fixed. Even if a display
5−26 Q1E-EA0466
depth is changed, the gain
at each depth is not
changed.
Variable) To every selector of Depth
Gain a fixed area of depth
is allocated by dividing
equally the entire depth of
image. When the display
depth is changed,
accordingly the gain of
each depth is changed.
(7) Steering Mark

This is the steering mark that is displayed at the
lower right of the window and indicates the relation
between the display on the screen and scan region.
This is displayed only when a probe having a wide
view such as EUP-V53W is connected.
Steering Mark
Fig. 5.2.12-8 Steer.Mark Menu
5−27 Q1E-EA0466
(8) Combine
This is the function to Dual image display
combine two images displayed
on the dual image display
mode to produce an image
combined at the center of the
screen.
Displayed Displayed
image A image B
Unless scan conditions such
as probe type, focus, display
depth, up-down shifted
distance and orientation are
same, Combine function cannot
be selected. Scan two images
with the same parameters. Combined image display
Fig. 5.2.12-9
Cautions in the application
1) When you want to perform measurements like a
distance and so on crossing over the border of two
images, depict and synthesize two images so that
there is no discrepancy between Right side image
and Left side image of ROI at the border line as
shown in Fig. 5.2.12-10.
In synthesizing the image in Combine mode two

images are met visually, so keep in mind that, for
this reason, an error may be caused in the result
of measurement.
L side R side
ROI
Fig. 5.2.12-10
5−28 Q1E-EA0466
2) In order to meet lines of ROI at the border of two
images operate the system under below mentioned
conditions.
• When the system is set to Combine mode, select a
depth display in which there is no gap between two
image. In the case as shown in Fig. 5.2.12-11 it
is impossible to get a correct result of
measurement.
Fig. 5.2.12-11
· If any of the following probes is used, a part of

the display area becomes ineffective.
EUP-O53T,B31,L33ST
In Combine mode, select the depth display with

which ineffective display is not produced between
the two images. In the case shown in Fig. 5.2.12-
12, a correct measurement result cannot be obtained.
Ineffective
display area
Fig. 5.2.12-12
5−29 Q1E-EA0466
(8) Biplane
This function can be selected when biplane operation
is enabled.
Checking in displays the Biplane display screen.
(Refer to F3 of 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED Mode (second
page)).
(9) PDC (Patient Dependent Compensation)

Acoustic parameters of fat,
muscle, organs are different
in every examinee. With PDC
function it is possible to
change acoustic parameter
setting of the equipment in
order to obtain optimum
images.
Fig. 5.2.12-13 PDC
5−30 Q1E-EA0466
5.3 M-mode
5.3.1 Displaying B/M-mode image
Pressing with B Freeze OFF displays B/M-mode.
Fig. 5.3.1-1 Basic Screen Layout of B/M mode
Beam line in this mode is displayed in yellow showing

that it is active. When active, the beam line can be
moved left and right with the trackball.
Also, if switching over the symbol at the upper right
corner of screen with to select any one other than
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
, the beam line changes to blue and inactive.
5.3.2 Adjusting gain (brightness)

Dark
Turn the M gain knob to
adjust overall gain of M-mode
image. Also in the B/M-mode,
DEPTH GAIN CONTROL adjusts
gain of both B and M-mode at
the same time. This allows Bright
gain for each depth to be Fig. 5.3.2-1

adjusted as well (See 5.2.2). Adjusting Gain
(Brightness)
5−31 Q1E-EA0466
5.3.3 Single screen display of M-mode Image
MULTI
If pressing SINGLE
while displaying a B/M-mode image,
single screen display of M-mode image appears.
MULTI
If pressing SINGLE
again, B/M-mode is displayed.
L(U)
Also, if pressing while displaying M-mode single
screen display, B-mode single screen is displayed, and
R(D)
if pressing again, M-mode single screen is
displayed.
Select
MULTI
L(U) SINGLE
R(D)
MULTI
SINGLE
Select
Fig. 5.3.3-1 SINGLE/MULTI
5.3.4 Moving display position

(1) Switching over display depth of M-mode image
Display depth of M-mode image may be switched over.
Larger display depth
DEPTH / MAG
Smaller display depth
Fig. 5.3.4-1 Switching Display Depth of M-mode
5−32 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Moving a view in depth direction
When M-mode image display depth is smaller than that
of B-mode, the position to start display M-mode image
may be moved within the display depth of
B-mode image if selecting on the upper right of
screen with the toggle switch.
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
And press the UNDO key, the travel is returned to 0mm.
Deep
Shallow
Fig. 5.3.4-2 Moving View in Depth Direction of M-mode
5.3.5 Switching electronic focus

Operation is the same as that of the B-mode.
Refer to 5.2.3 Switching electronic focus
5.3.6 Freeze of M-mode image B-FREEZE ; OFF
If pressing while
Live Live
displaying the B/M-mode
image, the B-mode image
only can be frozen.
B-FREEZE ; ON
Pressing once again

Freeze
returns to real time Live
image.
Fig. 5.3.6-1 Freeze of M-mode Image
5−33 Q1E-EA0466
5.3.7 Switching over sweep speed
Sweep speed (time for the image
Fast
to flow from the right edge to
left edge) can be switched over
in 4 steps of 1.25s~10.0s.
SWEEP
If clicking upward, sweep SPEED
becomes, faster (shorter time)

while clicking downward makes Slow
sweep slower (longer time).
Fig. 5.3.7-1
Scan Speed

MODE
Press DEPENDED to switch the function menu at the bottom of
screen to the MODE DEPENDED.
1st page
2nd page
Also when selecting the B/M mode, this Menu is

automatically selected.
F5 Image display angle (Width)
F6 Scan line density

Operation is the same as that of B-mode.
Refer to F5 Display angle (Width) and F6 Scan line
density of 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu (1st page).
F7 M blank width
A not displayed area (BLANK AREA) may be provided at
the bottom of M-image to allow ECG waveform and so on
to be easily observed. Also, not displayed area can
be adjusted in 8 steps of 0~7.
NOTICE:This function is not displayed when FREEZE.
5−34 Q1E-EA0466
7
Fig. 5.3.8-2 Blank Width
(2nd page)
F2 Screen division
Longitudinal division display B-mode image is
displayed in the upper screen, and M-mode image is
displayed in the lower screen.
Lateral division display B-mode image is displayed in
the left screen and M-mode image is displayed in the
right screen.
F5 Mark move
F6 Selecting B color function
F7 B color
Operation of these functions is the same as that of
the B-mode.
Refer to 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu (2nd page).

Pressing IMAGE
PROCESS changes the function menu at the bottom of
screen to the IMAGE STATUS menu.
1st page
2nd page
5−35 Q1E-EA0466
(1st page)
F1 Dynamic range
F2 Enhancement in depth direction
F3 Enhancement in horizontal direction
F4 AGC (Automatic gain control)
Function to adjust image quality of B-image.
Operation is the same as that of the B-mode.
Refer to 5.2.11 IMAGE PROCESS menu.
F5 Dynamic range
F6 Enhancement
F7 Switching over AGC (Automatic gain control)
Functions to adjust image quality of M-image.
Select any step where the image can be most easily viewed.
Contents of the process are the same as those of B-mode.
5 6 7
Fig.5.3.9-2 Adjusting M-mode Image
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting an image subject to control.
Switches over images subject to
control for which various
functions are applied.
1
Fig. 5.3.9-3 Images Subject to Control
5−36 Q1E-EA0466
F3 Switches over γ-CURVE
F4 Switches over γ-coefficient
F5 Center value of S-shape curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation
Operation of these functions is the same as that of
the B-mode.
5−37 Q1E-EA0466
5.3.10 M MENU of MAIN MENU
When MAIN MENU is displayed
by the MAIN
MENU key and M-mode has
started, M MENU can be
selected.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.3.10-1 M MENU
(1) M BLANK
Provides not displayed area at
the bottom of M-image. ECG
waveform and so on can be easily
observed.
Refer to 5.3.8MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.3 10-2

M BLANK Menu
(2) Range Ctrl.

By selecting [B + M], the display
depth of both B and M images can
be controlled at the same time.
By selecting [M], the display
depth of the M image only can be
controlled.
5−38 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Split
Switches split format of B/M display.
Refer to 5.3.8 MODE DEPENDED manu.
U/D:
Up/down
layout
L/R:
Left/right
layout
Fig. 5.3.10-3 Split Menu
5−39 Q1E-EA0466
5.4 PW Mode
5.4.1 Display of B/PW-mode
If pressing with B Freeze OFF, the B/PW-mode
appears.
Max. detectable flow velocity

in forward direction
(Approaching toward probe)
Doppler
beam
line Angle bar Velocity marker
Max. detectable flow velocity

Doppler in backward direction
sampling (Leaving from probe)
gate Incident angle
γ-FFT value
Wall filter
Doppler mode gain
Doppler mode
Doppler frequency (PRF/REF)

Sample width
Fig. 5.4.1-1 Basic Screen Layout of B/PW-Mode
Beam line in this case is displayed in yellow showing

that it is active. When active, the beam line can be
moved left and right with the trackball.
Also, if switching over the symbol at the upper right
corner
of screen with to select anyone other than , the

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
beam line changes to blue and inactive.
Notice:Set the Doppler sampling gate to the center of

blood vessel as accurate as possible. If it is
set to the part of high brightness, noises may
contaminate the image.
5−40 Q1E-EA0466
Darker
Turn the Doppler gain knob to
adjust overall gain of PW-mode
image.
Brighter
Fig. 5.4.2-1
Adjusting Gain
(Brightness)
5.4.3 Adjusting Doppler angle

Counter-
(1) When the center of angle clockwise
key is pushed, an incident
angle bar is displayed on
Doppler line with an angle
registered in Application.
(Refer to Application Clockwise
function, 8.3.4(2))
(1-a) When the angle key
is pushed under a
condition (1), the
incident angle bar
is displayed with
the Angle at
opposite side across
Doppler beam line.
(1-b) When the angle key
is pushed under the
condition (1-a), the
incident angle bar Fig. 5.4.3-1 Doppler Angle
is erased.
(2) If an angle encoder is rotated, the incident angle
bar rotates. So, it is possible to adjust the
incident angle to blood flow direction.
Simultaneous with the change of tilting angle of
incident angle bar a angle display (compensating
angle) shown in right lower position of Doppler
image is also changed. In case the compensating
angle is set to 0 ° , the indident angle bar is
erased. As shown in the figure the angle is to the
beam line and it is displayed in the range of 0 °∼
90°.
5−41 Q1E-EA0466
5.4.4 Various adjustment functions
The same as those of the M-mode (Refer to 5.3.3~5.3.6).
・ Single screen display of PW-mode image
・ Moving display position
・ Switching over electronic focus
・ Freezing PW-mode image
・ Sweep speed
5.4.5 Switching over reference frequencies (REF FREQ)

Depending on probe frequency, two different reference
frequencies (REF) can be selected.
Table 5.4.5-1 Reference Frequencies

Probe frequency
7.5MHz
4-2 5-2 6-3 8-4 13-6
Reference
frequency 2.5MHz 3.5MHz 5.0MHz 7.5MHz 10MHz
UP
5.0MHz
REF FREQ
DOWN
NOTICE:EUP-ES52M has 4.5MHz only.

EUP-L54M has 10MHz and 6.5MHz.
5.4.6 Moving base line
Shifts Doppler base line(0ms
PW image
level) up and down to allow any
waveform displayed shifted up
and down to be easily viewed.
The initial position of base BASELINE
line can be set in the
application menu.
(See Chapter 8 APPLICATION
Function.)
Fig. 5.4.6-1
Adjusting BASE LINE
5−42 Q1E-EA0466
5.4.7 Switching over velocity range (PRF)
Allows repetitive frequency (PRF)
to be switched over in a range of
High
1~50kHz. However, allowable range
FREEZE
may differ according to the
position of sample point. V-SCALE
Low
Click the toggle switch upward to
select higher frequency and make
Fig. 5.4.7-1
max detection speed faster. Repetitive
Click the toggle switch downward to Frequency (PRF)
select lower frequency and enlarge
the Doppler image.
Loud
5.4.8 Adjusting Doppler sound volume
Doppler sound may be switched in
silence + 15 steps. SOUND VOL
Quiet
Fig. 5.4.8-1
SOUND VOLUME
5.4.9 Oblique function <Exclusive for linear probe>

Doppler of the linear probe, which allows blood flow in
oblique direction to be measured.
Clicking upward swings to the right (+ direction), while
clicking downward swings to the left (- direction).
Single click swings 5 ° at a time and up to 20 ° to the
left or right.
+
- +
OBLIQUE
Fig. 5.4.9-1 Oblique Function
5−43 Q1E-EA0466
5.4.10 Switching over sample gate width
Allows sample gate width to
be switched over.
Wider
Can be switched in a range
of 0.5mm (min) ~ 5.0mm in
0.5mm step, while up to 15mm SAMPLE
LENGTH
(max) in 1mm step over the
range above.
Narrower
Fig. 5.4.10-1
Sample Gate

MODE
Pressing DEPENDED switches over the function menu at the
bottom of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu.
1st page
2nd page
Also when selecting the B/PW-mode, this menu is

5−44 Q1E-EA0466
(1st page)
F1 Selecting B-mode
image Refresh mode
In B/PW mode there are
two modes, a
simultaneous rewrite
mode in which B-mode
image and PW-mode image 1
are simultaneously
displayed in real time
and an interval mode in
which B-mode image is
rewritten at a certain
period of time interval. Fig. 5.4.11-2
In addition when PW key B-image Refresh Mode
is pushed, B-mode image
is frozen.
If PW key is pushed
again, the freeze of B-
mode image is released.
Also it is possible to
change the time interval
with DOP Menu of Main
Menu. (Refer to item
5.4.13 in Main Menu.)
F4 Switching over polarity display of Doppler mode image

Allows forward/backward of
Doppler display to be
OFF
reversed.
If not selected, the upper
screen is the side
approaching to the probe,
4
while the lower screen is
the side leaving from the
probe. ON
If selected, the upper
screen is the side leaving
from the probe, while the Fig. 5.4.11-3
lower screen is the side FLOW INVERT
approaching to the probe.
5−45 Q1E-EA0466
F5 Display angle (Width)
F6 Scan line density
Operation is the same as that in the B-mode and M-
mode.
Refer to F5 Display angle (Width) and F6 Scan line
density of 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu (1st page).
F7 Oblique invert <Exclusive for linear probe>
4 4
Fig. 5.4.11-4 OBLIQUE-FLOW INVERT
Oblique function is effective only when the linear probe

is connected, and selectable only when oblique is
selected (Refer to F4 of this menu (2nd page)).
Oblique invert is a function to invert left/right of
Doppler beam tilted. Doppler image is also inverted at
the same time, so flow invert applies.
5−46 Q1E-EA0466
(2nd page)
F2 Screen division
The operation method is the same as in M mode.
F3 M/PW display
An M image is also displayed at the same time when
M/PW is selected
F5 Moving of Body-mark
F6 Selecting B-color function
F7 B-color
These operations are the same as those in the B-
mode. (Refer to 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu.)

Pressing IMAGE
PROCESS switches the function menu at the bottom
of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
1st page
2nd page
(1st page)
F1 Dynamic range
F2 Depth direction enhancement
F3 Horizontal direction enhancement
F4 Switching over ACG (Automatic Gain Control)
A function to adjust image quality for the B-mode
image. Operation is the same as that in the B-mode
(Refer to 5.2.11 IMAGE PROCESS menu).
5−47 Q1E-EA0466
F5 Switching over wall filter
Removes unnecessary signals
due to wall motion in order to
display blood flow signal only. 5
50Hz ~ 1600Hz in 12 steps.
Fig. 5.4.12-2
Wall Filter
F6 Switching over FFT analysis mode

Allows FFT analysis mode
(number of analysis point for
detecting Doppler image) to be
switched over. 6
When RESPONSE selected:

Doppler image detection Fig. 5.4.12-3
response speed becomes faster FFT Analysis Mode
and Doppler image of better
response may be obtained.
When HI-RESO selected:
Doppler image of high
resolution may be obtained.
F7 Switching over FFT-γ

γ-curve of Doppler image (FFT-
γ) is switched over in 8 steps. 7
Set it where the image looks

best.
Fig. 5.4.12-4
FFT-γ
5−48 Q1E-EA0466
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting screen subject to B/PW
control
Switches over screens to be
controlled to which various 1
function apply.
B/M/PW
Fig. 5.4.12-5
Screens Subject to
Control
F3 Switching over γ-CURVE

F4 Switching over γ-coefficient
F5 Center position of S-shape curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation Operation of these functions is the
same as those in the B-mode (Refer to
5.2.11 IMAGE PROCESS menu).
5.4.13 DOP. MENU of MAIN MENU

DOP. MENU can be selected
when the MAIN MENU is
displayed with the MAIN
MENU key
pressed and the PW-mode is
selected.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.4.13-1
DOP. MENU
5−49 Q1E-EA0466
(1) B-REFRESH
Rewriting method for B-mode image.
Simult. :This is to rewrite B-
mode image and
Doppler-mode image.
Interval :This is to rewrite B-
mode image at a
certain period of
time interval.
(Interval mode)
Interval :This is one of
interval
[Sync. Off] modes in which ECG
Fig. 5.4.13-2
synchronous function B-REFRESH Menu
is not used. (Refer
to item 5.4.11 in
MODE DEPENDED menu)
Interval :This mode can be used only
[Sync. On] when ECG synchronous function is used.
Rewriting interval of B-mode image is
set based on heart beats frequency.
(Refer to item 5.8.3 ECG
synchronization)
(2) DOP.Expand
An expanded Doppler image is displayed by clicking
(“ checking”) □
5−50 Q1E-EA0466
(3) PW Mode
Switches over image spilit mode when selecting the
PW-mode. (Refer to 5.4.11 MODE DEPENDED menu)
PW
PW : B/PW-mode
M/PW : B/M/PW-mode
M/PW
Fig. 5.4.13-3 PW Mode Menu
(4) Flow Invert

Click □ and "check" it to invert doppler image.
(Refer to F4 of 5.4.11.)
(5) Auto PRF
Click □ and "check" it to start Auto PRF.
This function starts only when B-Refresh is
Interval and B-image is frozen.
PRF is automatically set for fast blood flow
detection according to the depth of Doppler
sampling gate.
(6) Set Cursor

By clicking (“checking”) □ , a
Doppler image is displayed
together with a Doppler tone
output even if the Doppler cursor
is moving
(Refer to 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu)
Fig. 5.4.13-4
Set Cursor Menu
5−51 Q1E-EA0466
(7) Split
Switches over the
spilit format of B/PW
display.
L/R : Arranged left and
right
U/D : Arranged up and
down
(Refer to 5.4.11
MODE DEPENDED menu)
Fig. 5.4.13-5
Split Menu
(8) Scale
Displays a velocity
scale at the center
of Doppler image.
Fig. 5.4.13-6 Scale
(9) Unit
Switches over unit of Doppler image.
・ m/s
・ cm/s
・ kHz
5−52 Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 5.4.13-7 Unit
(10) Oblique Inv.
Same as in F7 Oblique scan inversion in Mode
Depended menu (1st page)
(Refer to 5.4.11 MODE DEPENDED menu)
5−53 Q1E-EA0466
5.5 Steerable CW Mode
5.5.1 Display of steerable CW-mode image
With the steerable CW-mode probe connected, steerable
CW-mode image is displayed by the following operation
procedures.
(1) With Freeze set to OFF, press to set Doppler
mode.
CW
(2) Select Steerable CW-mode by pressing .
(3) Pressing once again freezes B-mode image and
displays CW-mode image.
With Steerable CW-mode selected, every time
is pressed, B-real mode (mode to scan only B-image)

and steerable CW-mode (mode to scan only CW-image)
can be switched over.
B-mode image CW-mode image
Doppler beam line
Angle bar
Doppler sampling
Max. detectable flow

velocity in forward Incident angle
direction
γ-FFT
Velocity Wall filter
Max. detectable flow
Doppler-mode gain
velocity in backward
direction
Doppler-mode
Doppler Frequency (PRF/REF)
Fig. 5.5.1-1 Basic Screen layout of B/CW-Mode
5−54 Q1E-EA0466
The beam line in this mode is shown in yellow
indicating that it is in active status.
When it is active, the beam line can be moved left
and right by the trackball.
By changing the symbol at the upper right of the

screen by and selecting other display than ,
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
the beam line is displayed in blue and it cannot be
moved.
NOTE: Set the Doppler sampling gate at the center of

blood vessel as accurately as possible.
Setting it at the region with high brightness
may cause mixing of noise.
5.5.2 Gain adjustment

The operation procedure is same as Darker
that of PW-mode.
(Refer to 5.4.2.) Brighter
5.5.3 Selection of reference frequency (REF FREQ)

With Steerable CW-mode selected, as shown in Table
5.5.3-1, reference frequency (REF) is fixed for each
probe.
Table 5.5.3-1 Reference Frequency

Probe frequency
2.5MHz 3.5MHz 5.0MHz
4-2 5-2 6-3
Reference frequency 2.0MHz 2.5MHz 3.5MHz
5−55 Q1E-EA0466
5.5.4 Adjustment functions
The same adjustment functions as those of PW-mode are
available.
・ Base line shift (Refer to 5.4.6.)
・ Repetition (Refer to 5.4.7. : Selection
frequency (PRF) range of PRF n CW-mode is from 4
to 50kHz.)
・ Adjustment of (Refer to 5.4.8.)
Doppler sound
volume
・ Sweep speed

MODE
Pressing button substitutes the function menu at the
DEPENDED
bottom of the screen with MODE DEPENDED menu.

1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.5.5-1 MODE DEPENDED Menus
-1st page -
F1 Selects B mode image substitution mode
F4 Selection of polarity display of Doppler-mode image
F5 Display angle (width)
F6 Scan line density Operation procedures are
same as those in PW-mode.
- 2nd page -
F2 Screen division
F6 Selection B-color function
F7 B-color These operation procedures
are same as those in B-mode.
(Refer to 5.2.10 MODE
DEPENDED menu.)
5−56 Q1E-EA0466
IMAGE
Pressing button substitutes the function menu at the
PROCESS
bottom of the screen with IMAGE PROCESS menu.

1st page
2nd page
-1st page -
F1 Dynamic range
F2 Enhancement in depth direction
F3 Enhancement in horizontal direction
F4 Selection of AGC (Auto Gain correction)
Image quality adjustment
function for B-mode image.
The operation procedures are
same as those in B-mode.
(Refer to 5.2.11 IMAGE
PROCESS menu.)
F5 Selection of wall filter
F6 Selection of FFT analysis mode
F7 Selection of FFT-γ The operation procedures are
same as those in PW-mode.
-2nd page -
F1 Selection of screen to be controlled
The screen to be controlled
for execution of various
functions are selected.
F3 Selection ofγ-Curve
F4 Selection ofγ-coefficient
F5 Value at center point of S-Curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation The operation procedures are
same as those in B-mode.
(Refer to 5.2.11.)
5−57 Q1E-EA0466
5.5.7 Dop. Menu of Main Menu
By displaying Main Menu by
MAIN
MENU key, Dop. Menu can be
selected when Steerable CW-
mode is opened.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.5.7-1 Dop. Menu
For Main Menu for modes other than Doppler-mode, refer

to Paragraph 5.4.12 Dop. Menu of Main Menu.
With Steerable CW-mode selected, the following items in
Dop. Menu are disabled.
・ B-Refresh
・ Dop. Expand
・ PW Mode
・ Auto PRF
・ Set Cursor
・ Oblique Inv.
5−58 Q1E-EA0466
5.6 Single Element CW-Mode
5.6.1 Displaying single element CW-mode image
This function is effected only when connecting the
Continuous Doppler probe EUP-TC3 or exclusive probes
similar to that.
Operation of the single element CW-mode is the same as
that of the B/PW-mode except the following four points:
(1) Simultaneous mode is not selectable.
(2) Reference frequency (REF) cannot be switched over.
(3) Selectable range of repetitive frequency (PRF) is
4k~50kHz.
(a) Connecting the probe
Connect EUP-TC3 or any exclusive probe similar
to that with the exclusive receptacle located
at the lower right of main unit.
Receptacle of single element

probe is located here
Fig. 5.6.1-1 Single Element Probe Receptacle

NOTICE:When the single element probe is connected,
there may be cases where it cannot be recognized
by the ultrasound scanner. In such case,
disconnect the single element probe and connect
it again.
5−59 Q1E-EA0466
(b) Starting CW-mode
PROBE
Simply press to start the probe menu and
select TC3 to start the CW-mode.
Fig. 5.6.1-2 Probe Menu
Max. detectable flow speed

infoward direction
Max. detectable Incident angle

flow speed
backward direction FFT-γ value
Wall filter
Doppler mode frequency(PRF REF)
Doppler mode gain
Fig. 5.6.1-3 Basic Screen Layout of single element CW Mode
5−60 Q1E-EA0466
Darke
Turn the Doppler gain knob to
adjust overall gain of CW-mode
image. Brighter
Fig. 5.6.2-1
Gain (Brightness)
Adjustment

These are the same as those in PW-mode.
・ Moving Base line (Refer to 5.4.6).
・ Repetitive frequency (PRF) (Refer to 5.4.7).
・ Adjusting of Doppler sound volume (Refer to 5.4.8).
・ Sweep speed.

MODE
Pressing DEPENDED switches the function menu at the bottom
of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu.
1st page
2nd page
(1st page)
F4 Switching over Doppler mode polarity display
Operation of these functions is
the same as that in PW-mode.
(2nd page)
F6 Selecting B-color function
F7 B-color Operation of these functions is
the same as that in the B mode.
5−61 Q1E-EA0466
Pressing IMAGE
PROCESS switches the function menu at the bottom
of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.6.5-1 IMAGE PROCESS menu
(1st page)
F5 Switching over the wall filter
F6 Switching over FFT analysis mode
F7 Switching over FFT-γ Operation of these functions
is the same as that in the
PW mode.
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting image subject to control
Switches images subject to
control to which various
functions apply.
F3 Switching over γ-CURVE
F4 Switching over γ-Coefficient
F5 Center position of S-shape curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation Operation of these functions
is the same as that in the B
mode.
5−62 Q1E-EA0466
5.6.6 Dop. MENU of MAIN MENU
Dop. MENU may be selected when the MAIN MENU is
displayed with the MAIN
MENU key pressed and the CW mode runs.
This function is the same as that of the PW mode. Refer

to 5.4.12.
In Single Element CW mode, the following functions in
Dop. MENU are disabled.
・ B-Refresh ・ Set Cursor
・ Dop. Expand ・ Split
・ PW Mode ・ Oblique Inv.
・ Auto PRF
5−63 Q1E-EA0466
5.7 CFM Mode
Mainly displays blood flow information by color display.
This equipment is provided with two types of CFM-mode of CFI
(Color Flow Image) indicating flow velocity and CFA (Color Flow
Angio) showing blood flow power.
5.7.1 Displaying CFM-mode image
(1) CFI image
Pressing with B Freeze OFF displays the

CFI CFA
B/CFM-mode.
B-mode color MAX. detective flow

velocity in positive direction
Color scale
B-mode color MAX. detective flow
velocity in negative direction
Smoothing
Packet size
Motion archfact CFM ROI
Suppression
level
CFM filter
CFM gain
Persistence
Velocity
variance
CFM mode frequency (PRF/REF)
Fig. 5.7.1-1 Basic Screen layout of CFM mode
When starting the equipment, CFI is displayed. By
pressing , CFI is switched to CFA.

CFI CFA
5−64 Q1E-EA0466
(2) CFA image
In CFA, subject for display changes to the power of
Doppler signal.
Color map is changed and flow velocity is removed.
Fig. 5.7.1-2 CFA Image

(3) Using together with the other mode
Both CFI and CFA may be simultaneously displayed
together with M image and PW image (M/PW image).
MAX. detective
flow velocity on
M-mode image
M PW
Fig. 5.7.1-3 Fig. 5.7.1-4

CFI-M Basic Screen Layout CFI-PW Basic Screen Layout
5−65 Q1E-EA0466
5.7.2 Setting COLOR BOX range
Adjusts the size and position of COLOR BOX (Region Of
Interest) for displaying the CFM image.
(1) Switching over trackball priority
Use the toggle

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
switch to turn the

trackball
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
priority display
to .
Fig. 5.7.2-1
Switching Trackball
Priority
(2) Moving position
Moving the trackball
moves the COLOR BOX
frame.
For the sector or
convex type, moving
upward narrows width
and moving downward
widens it.
Fig. 5.7.2-2
Moving COLOR BOX
Position
5−66 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Setting range
Pressing the ENTER key
displays " ● " at the ENTER
lower right of COLOR COLOR

POSI / SIZE
BOX.
This "●" indicates the

position of trackball.
Moving the trackball
widens (narrows) the
COLOR BOX frame
left/right and up/down.
If the color box range

is determined, press the
ENTER key again. "●"
disappears and returns ENTER
to the state of (1) COLOR

POSI / SIZE
Moving position.
Fig. 5.7.2-3 Setting COLOR BOX Range
(4) Ending setting
Move the toggle to switch the trackball

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
priority to that other than .
5.7.3 Adjusting gain (Brightness)

Darker
Turn the CFM gain knob to adjust
the overall gain of CFM-mode image.
Brighter
CFI CFA
Fig. 5.7.3-1
Adjusting Gain
(Brightness)
5−67 Q1E-EA0466
The same as those of each mode.
・ Adjusting gain (Refer to 5.2.2, 5.3.2 and 5.4.2)
・ Moving display position (Refer to 5.2.5)
・ Switching over electronic focus (Refer to 5.2.3)
・ Switching over screen display (Refer to 5.3.3)
・ Switching over PRF (Refer to 5.4.7)
5.7.5 Reference frequency (REF FREQ)

According to frequency of the probe, two types of
different reference frequency (REF) can be selected.
Table 5.7.5-1 Reference Frequencies
Probe frequency
2.5MHz 3.5MHz 5.0MHz 6.5MHz 10MHz
7.5MHz
4-2 5-2 6-3 8-4 13-6
Reference
frequency 2.5MHz 3.5MH 5.0MHz 5.0MHz 7.5MHz 10MHz
UP
REF FREQ
DOWN
5.7.6 Velocity Range (PRF)

Switches over PRF. <Common to CFI and CFA>
For CFM-PW, PRF of both modes is
switched over. Up
If clicking the toggle switch upward,
high frequency is selected and the max V-SCALE
(PRF)
detection velocity becomes larger. Down
If clicking the toggle switch downward, Fig. 5.7.6–1

low frequency is selected and Doppler Velocity Range
image is enlarged.
5−68 Q1E-EA0466
5.7.7 Baseline
(1) CFM
BASELINE
BASELINE
Allows detection
velocity range to be
switched over by
increasing/decreasing
Baseline of color
scale.
Fig. 5.7.7-1 Baseline

(CFM)
(2) CFM-D
Operation of these
functions is basically
the same as that in the
CFM (CFM-B) and CFM-M-
modes.
Since the PW image
varies due to BASELINE
increase/decrease of the
color scale, PW waveform
that should be at the
upper part of screen may Fig. 5.7.7-2 Baseline
happen to be at the (CFM-D)
lower part of screen
(Aliasing).
5−69 Q1E-EA0466
5.7.8 Oblique <Exclusive for linear probes>
(1) CFM
Allows the deep region to be widely examined by
tilting COLOR BOX to the left and right.
OBLIQUE -θ° 0° +θ°
Fig. 5.7.8-1 CFM Oblique

(2) CFM-M
CFM COLOR BOX is tilted.
At this time, Flow Invert may be effected
M
CFM ROI
M Beam Line
Fig. 5.7.8-2 Oblique

(3) CFM-D
CFM COLOR BOX is tilted as well as Doppler beam
line (D Beam Line).
This function may also be operated with "Left
arrow" and "Right arrow" keys of the alphanumeric
keyboard.
θ°
OBLIQUE
PW
CFM ROI
D Beam Line
Fig. 5.7.8-3 Oblique Function
5−70 Q1E-EA0466
5.7.9 Zooming image: ZOOM
ZOOM of CFM-mode differs from
that of the other mode.
ZOOM
The rectangular frame which
indicates the ROI is not
displayed.
ZOOM
Pressing zooms the image
and
Symbol appears at the upper
right
corner of screen.
DEPTH / MAG
Clicking the toggle switch

DEPTH / MAG
downward
raises screen magnification
ratio, while clicking upward
lowers it.
Move the trackball to move the

image to view any region to be
observed.
If moving to the right, the
screen moves to the right.
ZOOM
Press again to end ZOOM.
ZOOM
Fig. 5.7.9-1
ZOOM of CFM

MODE
Pressing DEPENDED switches the function menu at the bottom
of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu.
(1) CFM-B mode
1st page
2nd page
5−71 Q1E-EA0466
Also, when selecting the CFM-B mode, this menu is
(1st page)
F2 CFM Preference
CFM image and B mode image are Green
displayed overlaid on the same

screen. This function 2
switches display preference of

BW image
two mode in 16 steps.
Current CFM Preference setting
Green
is displayed in a green line li
on the gray scale at the left 2
side of screen. CFM image
For the gray scale exceeding

the position of green line in
COLOR BOX range (within the Green line
broken line on the screen) the

B image is displayed, while
Fig. 5.7.10-2
the color image is displayed CFM Preference
for the part below the green
line.
As CFM Preference No is
smaller, the B image is
brighter, and as No is larger,
CFM becomes brighter.
NOTICE: This function may also be switched over in the MAIN

MENU. If the setting is "ATUO", it cannot be
switched over (Refer to 5.7.12 MAIN MENU).
F3 Color map
Switches variation of color scale.
(Ⅰ) CFI: When selecting CARDIAC region
When selecting CARDIAC in the 3
APPLICATION menu, operate as follows;
Fig. 5.7.10-3
Color Map
5−72 Q1E-EA0466
(a) Velocity - Velocity variance (Color Map 1 to 4)
The direction of blood and velocity is
displayed in brightness of red and blue, and
add in brightness of green, light blue and
yellow in the place of velocity variance.
Red, Yellow:
Blood flow in the normal direction
Red is small velocity variance.
Yellow is large velocity variance.
Blue, Green:
Blood flow in the reverse direction
Blue is small velocity variance.
Green is large velocity variance.
Blue, Light blue:
Light blue is large velocity variance.
(b) Velocity (Color Map 5 to 7)
The direction of blood and difference of
velocity is displayed in contrast of variation.
Red, Yellow:
Red is lately velocity.
Yellow (or white) is fast velocity.
Blue, Light blue:
Blue is lately velocity.
Light blue (or white) is fast velocity.
(c) Velocity variance (Color Map 8)
The size of and velocity variance is displayed
in brightness of yellow.
Yellow: Part of confused blood flow
Brightness: Size of velocity variance
5−73 Q1E-EA0466
(Ⅱ) CFI: When selecting other region
When selecting CFI except in
CARDIAC;
(a) Velocity (Color Map 1 to 7)

Red, Yellow:
Red is lately velocity.
Yellow (or white) is fast velocity.
Blue, Light blue:
Blue is lately velocity.
Light blue (or white) is fast velocity.
(b) Velocity - Velocity variance (Color Map 8)
The direction of blood and velocity is
displayed in brightness of red and blue, and
add in brightness of green and yellow in the
place of velocity variance.
Red, Yellow:
Red is small velocity variance.
Yellow is large velocity variance.
Blue, Green:
Green is large velocity variance.
(Ⅲ) CFA: When selecting CFA;

Color flow angio;
Displays power information of blood flow for
using brightness and variation of contrast
5−74 Q1E-EA0466
F4 Flow Invert (For CFM)
Inverts color map.
It is Flow Invert for CFM and
differs from that for Doppler.
Fig. 5.7.10-4
Flow Invert (For CFM)
F5 Dop. Cursor
Display/Non-display of beam : Non-display
for Doppler measurement is of Beam
selected.
5
(Refer to 5.2.12 (5).) : Display of

Beam
F6 Scan line density Operation is the same as

that in the B-mode and M-
mode.
Refer to F6 Scan line
density of 5.2.10 MODE
DEPENDED menu (1st page)
F7 Oblique invert <Exclusive for linear probes>
The oblique function is effected only when connecting
the linear probe, and this function is available only
when selecting the oblique function (Refer to F4 of Main
Menu (2nd page)).
As well as 5.4.9 (Oblique Inver of Doppler), switched as
shown below in CFM. Color scale is inverted upside down,
so velocity display is not changed as it is different
from Doppler.
5−75 Q1E-EA0466
7
Color scale is
4 4
Fig. 5.7.10-5 Oblique-Flow Inver (CFM)
(2nd page)
F1 Peak Hold
F2 Switching over CFM refresh interval (Only for PEAK
HOLD operation)
Displays an image which part of high brightness
remains by stopping refresh in CFM COLOR BOX for
specified time (interval).
If starting PEAK HOLD, F2 toggle becomes refresh
interval selection allowing it to be switched over
1 ~ 8 sec and eternity (no refresh). Also, when
starting SYNC, it is refreshed by heartbeat. (Refer
to PEAK HOLD of 5.7.12 MAIN MENU).
(SYNC ON)
2 2
Fig. 5.7.10-6 PEAK HOLD
5−76 Q1E-EA0466
F2 Fixed-B
Displays B image as it was
designated in B-mode
regardless of width of CFM
image.
Frame rate is lowered as the
2
screen is widened, but the

image can be viewed as a
whole.
Fig. 5.7.10-7 Fixed -B
F3 Biplane Refer to B Biplane of 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED

mode (2nd page).
F4 Lateral inversion of image
(F4 and F5 keys can be operated in the same way
as in B mode.)
F7 Dual CFM
Depict two CFM images and use two types of color
scale to compare them.
Switch over the color scale in the MAIN MENU (Refer
to 5.7.12).
5−77 Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 5.7.10-8 Dual CFM
(2) CFM/M mode

page1
page2
Also when selecting the CFM/M-mode, this mode is

selected.
(1st page)
F1 Selecting B mode refresh mode
The CFM-M-mode includes the
simultaneous mode in which CFM
image (B-CFM) and M image are
displayed, and the mode that
normally depicts a CFM image
only.
1
Further pressing the M mode

switch activates B freeze
allowing these modes to be
switched over.
Fig. 5.7.10-10 B-image Refresh Mode
F3 Switching over color map

Refer to 5.7.10 (1)
CFM (B-CFM)-mode (1st page)
F4 Flow Invert Refer to 5.7.10 (1)
CFM (B-CFM)-mode (1st page)
F6 Switching over line density
Refer to 5.2.10
MODE DEPENDED mode (1st page)
F7 M blank width Refer to 5.3.8
MODE DEPENDED mode (1st page)
(2nd page)
5−78 Q1E-EA0466
F2 Screen division
(3) CFM/(M/)D mode

page1
page2
Fig. 5.7.10-11 MODE DEPENDED Mode
(1st page)
The same as those of CFM/(M/)D-mode and CFM-M-mode.
F1 Simult
The CFM-D mode includes the
simultaneous mode in which CFM
image (B-CFM) and a D image is
displayed, and the mode that
normally depicts a CFM image
1
only.
Further pressing the PW mode
switch activates B freeze
allowing these modes to be
switched over.
Fig. 5.7.10-12 B Image Refresh Mode (CFM-D)
F2 Screen division
F3 M/PW display
5−79 Q1E-EA0466
Pressing IMAGE
PROCESS switches over the function menu at the
bottom of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
(1) CFM-B/CFM-M
page1
page2
Fig. 5.7.11-1 IMAGE PROCESS Menu (CFM-B/CFM-M)
F1 CFM filter
Switches over the color
filter for CFM in 3 steps of
L, M and H. 1
Fig. 5.7.11-2
CFM Filter
5−80 Q1E-EA0466
F2 Function to remove body motion
Reduces an effect from body
motion and improves color 2
display performance. Effect of

removing body motion can be
switched over in 4 steps Fig. 5.7.11-3
A. SUPPRESS
according to intensity of body
motion. It becomes larger in
the order of 0-1-2-3.
F3 Switching Packet size

Every time selecting "PACKET",
it is switched over in 3 steps 3
of L, M and S.
Fig. 5.7.11-4 Packet
Varies frame rate in CFM-mode.
L : Frame rate decreases but a CFM image of higher
quality is obtained.
M : Usually set this level for use.
S : Frame rate increases allowing a better real
time CFM image to be obtained but image quality
becomes a little bit worse.
F4 Switching over CFM interpolation level

Applies the interpolation
process to CFM image to display
CFM images of better
4
continuity. Interpolation
level is divided into 3 levels.
Fig. 5.7.11-5 Smooth

F5 Switching over persistence
Applies the correlation process
to CFM image to display CFM
images of better continuity. 5
Correlation level is divided

into 8 levels of 0~7.
Fig. 5.7.11-6
Persistence
5−81 Q1E-EA0466
F6 Switching over velocity variance
Allows the grade of displaying
velocity variance to be 6
selected in 8 steps of 1~8.
Fig. 5.7.11-7
Velocity Variance
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting screen subject to control
Switches over the screen CFM-B
subject to control to which
various functions apply. CFM dual screen
・ In the CFM-B-mode, the

screen subject to
control may be
switched over the 1
whole B image or
inside COLOR BOX of CFM-PW
CFM image.
・ In the dual CFM screen CFM-M-PW screen
mode, the whole B
image and left and
right CFM images are
switched over
individually. Fig. 5.7.11-8
If adding screens as Screen Subject to Control
・
CFM-PW-mode and CFM-M-
PW-mode and so on,
screens that can be
switched automatically
increase.
5−82 Q1E-EA0466
F2 Selecting Velocity Tagging
Allows any specific level
of color scale to be
extracted for obtaining a
CFM image.
Also, F3~F5 can not be
selected unless selecting
F2.
Fig. 5.7.11-9
Velocity Tagging
F3 Switching over lower limit

F4 Switching over upper limit
Switches the upper and lower limits of tagging.
F5 Moving tagging width in parallel
Allows entire range of tagging to be moved up/down.
Setting of F3~F5 moves if moving the CFM zero
level.
F6 Rejection
Sets a region rejected equally above and below the
CFM base line.
5.7.12 CFM MENU of MAIN MENU

CFM MENU can be selected when
displaying the MAIN MENU with
the MAIN
MENU key pressed and CFM
mode has started.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.7.12-1 CFM MENU
5−83 Q1E-EA0466
(1) Scan Density (CFM)
Switches over scan density of
the CFM image in 4 steps.
Fig. 5.7.12-2
Scan Density
(2) B-Refresh
Switches over the screen mode
of CFM.
By clicking (“checking”)
□ ,both B and Doppler images
are refreshed at the same
time.
Fig. 5.7.12-3
B-Refresh
(3) Flow Invert

Click □ and "check" it to invert direction of
Doppler detection (Refer to 5.4.11).
5−84 Q1E-EA0466
(4) Color Map
Switches over Color Map.
(Selectable items are
automatically switched over
according to the mode.)
Fig. 5.7.12-4
Color Map
(5) Dual CFM
Click □ and "check" it to
start Dual CFM .
Also this allows Color Map of
left and right CFM images to
be set independently.
Move the cursor to " " and
click it to display a list of
Map that can be currently
selected.
Fig. 5.7.12-5 Dual CFM
(6) Fixed-B
Click □ for "Checking", then B-mode image is
displayed with the width as designated in B mode
setting regardless the width of CFM image.
5−85 Q1E-EA0466
(7) COLOR ROI
Switches over the shape of
COLOR ROI
Fig. 5.7.12-6
COLOR ROI
(8) Peak Hold
Stops refreshing the image
for predetermined time and
leaves spots of high
brightness.
Temporal refresh
(In Sync Off):ECG OFF
・ 1s ~ 8s: Refreshes the
image every predetermined
time.
・ ∞: No refresh.
Heartbeat refresh
(In Sync On):ECG ON
・ 1 beat ~ 8 beat:
Refreshes every beat.
・ ∞: No refresh.
Fig. 5.7.12-7
Peak Hold
5−86 Q1E-EA0466
(9) CFM Pref.
Switches over display
reference of B image and CFM
image.
If selecting Auto mode, this
operation is disabled on the
function menu.
Fig. 5.7.12-8
CFM Pref.
(10) Marker
Click □ and "check" it to display the COLOR ROI
frame of CFM image.
Fig. 5.7.12-9 Marker
(11) Color cale

Click □ for "checking" then COLOR SCALE display.
(12) Unit
Switches the unit system of Doppler image (Refer to
5.4.13).
5−87 Q1E-EA0466
5.8 ECG Function (Optional accessory of Biomedical waveform
display unit Model EZU-EK23 is additionally required.)
5.8.1 Connecting cords
(1) Connecting with main unit
Securely connect the ECG cord on the side of
keyboard support frame located at the right side of
main unit.
ECG connector
ECG connector is the defibrillator-roof TYPE BF APPLIED PART.

Don’t contact the electrode of TYPE BF APPLIED PART to earth
(ground).
Fig. 5.8.1-1 Connector Layout
(2) Attaching the ECG cord to human body

*1) Before attach the ECG cord to human body, check
the each function of ECG referring to section
5.7.2.
*2) When using the defibrillator,don’t touch the
patient.
After checking if the ECG induction cord is
connected with the main unit, apply jelly for
ECG grip to the electrode inside the grip and
use the second induction (see the figure to the
left) to mount it on the patient.
Red (R) - Right hand
Black (F) - Right foot
Green (LF) - Left foot
5−88 Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 5.8.1-2 Attaching ECG Cable
5.8.2 Displaying physiological signal waveform

PHYSIO
Pressing key displays the selectable option menu
(Base menu). (Fig. 5.8.2-1)
(1st page)
(2nd page)
Fig. 5.8.2-1 Physio Menu
The optional function Base menu can be restored by F7

Function button on Page 2.
It is also possible to make the default setting on the
application menu so that Physio menu (Fig. 8.3.10(2)) is
directly displayed by
PHYSIO
pressing key. (Refer to Fig. 5.8.2-1.)
By selecting F5 ECG on page 1 of Physio menu, the

related function can be selected.
(1) Waveform display (F5 of 1st page)
If turning the toggle switch of function menu

5
(1st page) ON (highlighted), physiological signal
5−89 Q1E-EA0466
waveform appears on the screen in green.
ECG WAVE FORM
Fig. 5.8.2-2 Starting ECG
In displaying the ECG waveform, if the system

recognizes ECG waveform, auto measurement of
heartbeat is displayed at the upper right.
When recording mode of ECG sync or image memory is
the continuous recording heartbeat auto detection
mode, R-wave on the ECG waveform needs to be
recognized.
When the R-wave is recognized, the trigger mark at
the right side of screen flickers.
Fig. 5.8.2-3 Trigger Mark and Beat Display
5−90 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Adjusting position of waveform (POSITION: Adjusting
height)
Allows the toggle switch

7
of function menu (1st page)

to adjust vertical position
of waveform display. 7
Fig. 5.8.2-4
Adjusting Display Position
(3) Switching over sweep speed

Refer to 5.3.7 Switching
over sweep speed.
SWEEP
SPEED
Fig. 5.8.2-5
Switching over Scan Speed
(4) Adjusting amplitude of waveform (GAIN)
Allows the toggle

6
switch of function menu

(1st page) to adjust
amplitude of waveform
in a range of 0 ~ 30.
Fig. 5.8.2-6
Adjusting Amplitude of
Waveform
5−91 Q1E-EA0466
5.8.3 ECG synchronization (ECG SYNC)
Applying ECG SYNC while ECG is activated, B-mode image
is refreshed in a timing of any phase from the R-wave
and Freeze image is displayed switched intermittently.
With the R-wave as a starting point, Freeze image is
rewritten after a predetermined time (Delay Time). This
allows any beat related region to be easily observed at
a specific phase.
(1) Single synchronization

This function starts only either one of two SYNC
functions.
It rewrites the image at any time within a
heartbeat and displays it.
Delay Time R-wave

Trigger
Mark
SYNC image
R-wave
Fig. 5.8.3-1 ECG SYNC Basic Screen Layout
5−92 Q1E-EA0466
Clicking the toggle switch of
1
function menu (1st page)

1
starts SYNC1, highlights the menu
and allows the B image to be
switched intermittently.
Also, delay time display is added
to the upper right corner.
It shows that the image is
rewritten after this delay time
from the R-wave.
Also the toggle switch (1st

3
page) starts SYNC2.

Function is completely the same as 3
that of SYNC1.
Fig.5.8.3-2
SYNC Switch
(2) Delay time setting
and of the function

2 4
menu
(1st page) switch over
delay time settings of
SYNC1 and SYNC2
respectively.
Either of these shows
delay-time from the R
point.
(This function is common 2 4
to dual sync.)
Fig. 5.8.3-3
Delay Time
5−93 Q1E-EA0466
In dual sync, when two ECG synchronizations are
occurred during one image scan, a message as shown
in the left picture is displayed. In that case
change the delay time.
Fig.5.8.3-4 Confirmation
(3) Dual synchronization (Dual SYNC)

Dual SYNC obtains SYNC images at two timing points
utilizing two SYNC systems. If starting dual SYNC,
two vertical lines appear on ECG waveform. These
show rewrite timing of SYNC image and are
recognized by temporal positions.
MULTI
SINGLE
T1/T2
T1 T2 SYNC1
R(D) T1 T2
SYNC1 SYNC2
T1 T2 L(U)
T1/T2
SYNC2
Real Real R(D) MULTI
SINGLE
T1 T2
Fig. 5.8.3-5 Dual SYNC
5−94 Q1E-EA0466
If ECG waveform has started, pressing the toggle
2
switch
(2nd page) starts Dual SYNC.
Image display mode at that time depends on the
screen currently selected (L, R or dual screen).
As for R-wave delay time, set delay time by using
the and toggle keys (1st page). If pressing
2 4
the toggle (2nd page) again, Dual SYNC is

2
terminated.
(4) Using together with the other mode

B-mode single SYNC may be used together with any
other mode.
Sync timing is displayed as a vertical bright line
on the PW or M/D-mode image.
Setting of B/M, B/D and B/M/D-modes is the same as
that of B-mode; however, Dual SYNC is not available.
Sync Timing
Line
SYNC-B
M Image
ECG wave
Fig. 5.8.3-6 ECG in B/M Image
5−95 Q1E-EA0466
5.8.4 ECG MENU of MAIN MENU
Press MAIN
MENU to display the
MAIN MENU then select the
Physiology menu.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.8.4-1 MAIN MENU
(1) Setting ECG

Switches over 2-step setting of
L/H of HPF (DC variation filter)
for ECG.
Fig. 5.8.4-2
Setting ECG
5−96 Q1E-EA0466
5.9 Needle Guide Line
GUIDE
Pressing displays the needle guide line in a dot line.
Guide Line
Fig. 5.9-1 Guide Line for Convex Probe
1) Displaying the needle guideline needs probes to be

registered individually.
Order the installation agent for registration of needle
guideline.
2) While displaying the needle guideline, pan zoom and moving
view are not effected.
3) Displaying the guideline gives a guide of direction.
Be sure to perform biopsy operation while confirming the
actual position of needle on the ultrasound image.
4) Refer to the instruction manual of each probe for
attaching the needle and support bracket to the probe.
5−97 Q1E-EA0466
The needle guideline differs depending on the probe used.
Display data needs to be registered in advance.
GUIDE
If selecting the probe already registered, the key
lights half indicating that the guideline may be
displayed.
Also, the probe which needle angle can be switched over
and the adapter for probe are available.
In such case, turn the periphery of knob to switch
over angle.
NOTICE: In case you want to display a biopsy needle guide

line, perform it as much as possible under a
single image display mode.
5−98 Q1E-EA0466
−POST SCRIPT−
In case of using EUP-U533 with Brachystepper manufactured by

Barzell-Whitemore Maroon Bells, Inc., EUB-6500 can show the
following needle guide template grid display when biopsy guide
line is registered, the convex array of the EUP-U533 is
activated, and “GUIDE” key is pressed.
- The needle guide template is a 13×13 grid (shown in Figure

1) with needle slots displayed at 5-mm intervals in the
vertical and horizontal axis.
- Coordinate values labeled from A to G (the center is D)
are displayed at the top of the template with a pitch of
1mm.
- No readjustment of the grid is necessary if the image is
inverted top/bottom, or right/left.
- The template display can be adjusted in 1-mm increments in
the vertical direction and 1-degree increments in the
lateral (rotational) direction.
This function is meant for use only as a guide. Hitachi

Medical Corporation makes no claim, not accepts liability
for, products manufactured by other companies used in
conjunction with EUB-6500.
5−99 Q1E-EA0466
1) There are several needle gauge sizes used for the
brachytherapy procedure. The different needle gauges have
different diameters. In order to accommodate the
different needle diameters the stepper/needle guide
template hardware may have template needle guide slot
diameters larger than the needle slot represented by the
software. This results in “needle play” in the stepper
template and may cause an alignment problem with the
needle guide template software display in the range of 1
to 1.2 mm. To avoid this potential problem use needles
with diameter of 1 to 1.2-mm. Do not use needles outside
of this range.
2) Before performing a brachytherapy procedure, the needle
guide template grid software display, the EUP-U533 and the
stepper/needle guide template hardware must be calibrated
by the following procedure:
- Mount the transducer (EUP-U533) on the stepper/template
- Activate the convex array of the transducer and press the
GUIDE key.
- Place the transducer in a tank of saline and insert a
needle through one of the needle guide template needle
slots.
- The puncture needle reference point and the software
reference point should be aligned within a tolerance of
±1-mm.
To perform this calibration, please contact with Hitachi
Medical Corporation or its authorized agent.
5−100 Q1E-EA0466
Confirmed model of the brachytherapy products:
Company : Barzell-Whitmore Maroon Bells, Inc.
1121 Lewis Ave., Sarasota, FL 34237 USA
Phone: 941-955-7700 Fax: 941-955-7735
E-mail: lewis1121@aol.com
Products : Refer to the following list

PRODUCT
TYPE PRODUCT NAME
NUMBER
Brachystand® 6 Ultra (for Table-mount or floor-based
1000 procedures)
(Includes floor fixation stand)
Brachystand® 6 Ultra-S (for Table-mount procedures
® 1000S only)
BRACHYSTAND
(Includes set-up and storage stand only)
(STABILIZERS)
Brachystand® 4 Compact (for Table-mount procedures
1100 only)
(Includes set-up and storage stand only)
Micro-TouchTM Brachystand® (for Table-mount procedures
6200
only)
BRACHYSTEPPER® 5800 Brachystepper® - For Hitachi
NEEDLE GRIDS 1454 Template Grid - 18 gauge (Generic – fits Hitachi)
2200 Dust Cover for Brachystand®
Brachyclamp® Kit for Brachystand® 6 Ultra – for OR table
3600 with Rails (Includes a right clamp, left clamp and clamp
ACCESSORIES rack)
Brachyclamp® Kit for Brachystand® 4 Compact – for OR
3700 table with Rails (Includes a right clamp, left clamp and
clamp rack)
Brachystand® 6 Ultra Bundle – Includes Brachystand® 6
Ultra – 1000S Model (for Table-mount procedures only),
1000SB
Brachystepper® of choice (except P/N 8500), template
grid, and Brachyclamp® Kit.
Brachystand® 6 Ultra Bundle – Includes Brachystand® 6
BRACHYBUNDLE OFFER Ultra (1000 Model for Table-mount or floor-mount
1000B
for HITACHI procedures), Brachystepper® of choice (except P/N 8500),
template grid and Brachyclamp® Kit.
Micro-TouchTM Brachystand® Bundle – Includes Micro-Touch
Brachystand® (6200 Model) (for Table-mount procedures
6200B
only), Brachystepper® of choice (except P/N 8500) and
needle template grid.
BRACHYWARE USER ORDERING GUIDE
The Brachystand® 6 Ultra (Product 1000) can be used either in a fully table mounted
configuration, or in a combination of a floor-based and table-mounted set-up. The
Brachystand® 4 Compact (Product 1100) includes a set-up, storage, and transportation
stand and, as such, can only be used for fully table-mounted procedures. The Micro-
TouchTM is also for table-mounted procedures.
Do not use the other products except as stated above.
5−101 Q1E-EA0466
5.10 Omni-Directional M mode
(Optional accessory of cine unit Model EZU-MM17 is
additionally required.)
5.10.1 General
By combining optional cine unit EZU-MM17 with the
ultrasonic equipment, <ODM (Omni-Directional M mode)
function> can be utilized to display an M mode image on
an any axis of a B image.
5.10.2 Features
(1) Real-time ODM mode
ODM image is produced from the B image
scanned i n real time.
(2) Cine memory ODM mode
After freezing the image, ODM imag e is
produced by reading the B images from the
cine memo ry.
(3) Single /dual ODM mode switching function
Single ODM mode (mode of displaying an ODM image to
the single beam line) and dual ODM mode (mode of
displaying an ODM image to the dual beam line) can
be switched from each other.
(4) ODM beam line center control switching function
The beam line center control method can be switched
to either center common mode (where the beam line
center is controlled commonly) or center
independent mode (where the beam line center is
controlled independently) in dual ODM mode.
5−102 Q1E-EA0466
5.10.3 Operating requirements of ODM function
The following setting and requirements are required for
starting the ODM function
In order to operate the ODM function, it is necessary to
satisfy the conditions as follows.
(1) Correspondence to option
Optional cine unit EZU-MM17 shall be combined.
(2) Probe selection
Phased array probe or EUP-C321T or EUP-C511 shall
be selected.
(3) Other requirements
<Setting in real-time ODM mode>
・ B/M simultaneous mode shall be selected
・ CFM mode shall not be selected
・ ECG SYNC mode shall not be selected.
<Setting in cine memory ODM mode>
・ B mode shall be selected
・ CFM mode shall not be selected
・ Cine review can be done
・ Scan line density shall be “1”.
・ Single focus
・ Image memory shall not be B:B Split mode
・ ECG SYNC mode shall not be selected.
5−103 Q1E-EA0466
5.10.4 Real-time ODM mode
ODM image is produced from the B image scanned
in real time.
(1) Start
Real-time ODM mode can be started by the following
procedure.
(a) Select B/M mode by pressing .
(b) Display the function menu (Fig.5.10.4.1) by

MODE
pressing .
DEPENDED
Fig. 5.10.4.1 Function menu (MODE DEPENDED menu)
(c) Real-time ODM mode is selected OFF

by turning on the toggle switch
F3 of the function menu (page
1) to ON (highlighted display).
3
ON
The scan line density becomes “1” automatically in
real-time ODM mode.
5−104 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Display of ODM mode
The screen display changes as shown in Fig.5.10.4.2
in ODM mode.
ODM beam line :
ODM beam line (Beam line tips are displayed by
an arrow, while the beam line center is
displayed by a circle) is displayed.
Image quality adjusting parameter:
Image quality parameter is displayed as ODM γ
value/ODM enhanced value/-.
(Example If display is 1/3/-, ODM γ value is 1
and ODM enhanced value is 3)
C C’
Beam center
ODM-γ/ ODM-Enhance/-
ODM beam line
Fig. 5.10.4.2 Display of ODM mode
The center (C) of the beam line is set to the

center (C’) of the ODM image.
5−105 Q1E-EA0466
5.10.5 ODM beam line operation
The operation method of the ODM beam line is shown below.
(1) Beam line angle selection
By turning , the ODM beam line angle is
switched. (The ODM beam line rotates around the

beam line center as a reference.)
The beam line rotation can be operated over a range
from -90 ° to +90 ° as shown in Fig.5.10.5.1 The
angle is switched sequentially in the order of 45 °
→90°→-45°→0°→45°by pushing .
90° -90°
Rotatory range
45° -45°
0°
Fig. 5.10.5.1 Rotatory range of beam line.
If the track ball priority display is at the

upper right of the screen, set to the sample
mark side to make sure that the track ball priority

display has been switched to , and then, operate
key
5−106 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Beam line move
The beam line can be moved by the track ball.
This function can be operated only when the track

ball priority display is at the upper right of
the screen In other cases, switch the track ball
priority display to by the track ball priority
toggle switch before operating the track ball.
5.10.6 Single /Dual ODM modes

<Single ODM mode>
This mode is provided to display an ODM mode to the
single beam line.
<Dual ODM mode>

This mode is provided to display an ODM mode to the dual
beam line.
Single ODM mode and dual ODM mode can Single ODM mode
be switched from each other by toggle
switch F2 of the function menu (Page 1).
2
Dual ODM mode
5−107 Q1E-EA0466
In the dual ODM mode, the screen display becomes as
shown in Fig.5.10.6.1.
ODM beam line 1: Arrow mark shows beam line 1, and its
corresponding ODM image is displayed on the upper side.
ODM beam line 2: Arrow mark shows beam line 2, and its
corresponding ODM image is displayed on the lower side.
The ODM image to the beam line 1
The ODM image to the beam line 2

ODM beam line 1
ODM beam line 2
Fig.5.10.6.1 Dual ODM image
5.10.7 Beam line center control in dual ODM mode

In dual ODM mode, the ODM beam line center control
method can be switched to either common center mode or
independent center mode by toggle switch F4 of function
menu (Page 1).
<Common center mode>

Common Center mode
The beam line centers are common to
each other in this mode.
<Independent center mode>
4
The beam line centers are

independent of each other in this
Independent Center mode
mode.
5−108 Q1E-EA0466
By pressing ENTER
when the track ball priority is set to
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
, the beam line to be operated is switched. (The beam

line being displayed yellow can be operated )
Each time ENTER

is pressed once, the beam line to be
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
operated is switched as shown in Fig.5.10.7.1 in the

common center mode or as shown in Fig.5.10.7.2 in the
independent center mode.
Both beam line 1 and 2 Only beam line 1 Onli beam line 2
Fig.5.10.7.1 Common center mode
Only beam line 1 Only beam line 2
Fig.5.10.7.2 Independent center mode
5−109 Q1E-EA0466
5.10.8 Image quality adjustment function (IMAGE PROCESS menu)
By pressing IMAGE
PROCESS in ODM mode, the function menu for
adjusting the image quality (Fig.5.10.8.1) is displayed
(The image quality adjustment menu for ODM is displayed
in F5 and F6 of the function menu)
Fig.5.10.8.1 Function menu (IMAGE PROCESS menu)
F5 ODM-γswitching
An ODM image gamma curve is
switched in 5 steps Select a
gamma curve where the image 5
quality can be monitored most

easily.
F6 ODM enhancement switching

The image edge enhancement
degree is switched in 4 steps.
4: Edge enhancement Strong 6
∼
1: Edge enhancement Weak
5−110 Q1E-EA0466
5.10.9 Cine memory ODM mode
After freezin g the image, ODM image is pro duced
by reading the B images from the cine memory.
(1) Start
The cine memory ODM mode can be started by the
following procedure.
(a) Select B mode by pressing
FREEZE
(b) Freeze the B image by pressing to be able
to review the cine memory

(c) Display the function menu (Fig.5.10.9.1) by
MODE
pressing .
DEPENDED
(d) The cine memory ODM mode is selected by turning

on toggle switch F3 of function menu (page 1)
to ON(highlighted display).
Fig.5.10.9.1 Function menu (MODE DEPENDED menu)
Bright lines are displayed the ODM image as shown in

Fig.5.10.9.2 These bright lines show both ends of the
cine memory. Don’t perform any measurement crossing
these bright lines.
5−111 Q1E-EA0466
Bright line
Fig.5.10.9.2 Cine memory ODM
(2) Display of ODM mode

Same as in real-time ODM mode Refer to 5.10.4 (2).
(3) ODM beam line operation
Same as in real-time ODM mode Refer to 5.10.5
(4) Single /dual ODM mode
(5) Beam line center control in dual ODM mode
(6) Image quality adjustment function
By pressing IMAGE
PROCESS during ODM image review, the
function menu for adjusting the image quality
(Fig.5.10.9.3) is displayed. (The image quality
adjustment menu for ODM is displayed in F5 and F6
of the function menu)
Fig.5.10.9.3 Function menu (IMAGE PROCESS Menu)
F5 ODM-γswitching
F6 ODM enhancement switching
5−112 Q1E-EA0466
5.10.10 Application parameter setup
This function is provided to edit various application
parameters for ODM mode.
(1) Application parameter setup menu
For editing various parameters in ODM mode, display
“Edit Application” of application menu by pressing
Main menu → Setup → Application → ”Edit Data”
button, and then, select “ODM Menu” of “M Menu” of
“Item View” (For details of the application
function, refer to Chapter 8)
(2) ODM menu
Initial mode Sets whether ODM mode is selected or

not when pressing M mode key first
after application switching (M mode
/ ODM mode)
ODM mode Selects single ODM/dual ODM modes
Beam Center Control
Selects the control methods
(common/independent) at the beam
line center in dual ODM mode
Image Process
Enhancement Enhancement value for ODM image
ODM-γ Gamma value for ODM image.
5−113 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 6 Character, Annotation and Body Mark
6.1 Entering Characters

Displays characters entered from the keyboard on the ultrasound image.
Pressing the Character key switches
over the function menu to the menu

for entering characters and a yellow
cursor line is displayed on the
screen.
A comment may be entered from the
position of cursor to the right.
Also, if the trackball priority on
Fig. 6.1-1 the upper right of screen is ,
Entering Characters
the cursor may be moved with the
trackball or arrow keys
.
Characters may be entered from the
alphanumeric keyboard.
Press the Shift key and character
keys to enter small characters and
symbols.
Also it is possible to enter an arrow
mark by pressing Ctrl key, Alt key
and a character key simultaneously.
6.1.1 Character input menu
Fig. 6.1.1-1 Character Input Menu
F1 SIZE
Pressing the toggle switch

1
1
switches the size of characters to be

entered in 4 steps.
Fig. 6.1.1-2 Character Size
6-1 Q1E-EA0466
F2, F3 FONT
Pressing the toggle switch

2 3
switches over the font of characters

to be entered in 4 types.
Fig. 6.1.1-3 Character Fonts

F4 Correcting characters
Pressing the toggle switch to

4
switch over Overwrite and Insert

characters to be entered.
• (Insert)
After entering [ABCDE], move the
cursor behind [B] and enter [cde] to
change to [ABcdeCDE].
• (Overwrite)
Fig. 6.1.1-4 After entering [ABCDE], move the
Correcting Characters cursor behind [B] and enter [cde] to
change to [ABcde].
F5 Moving character string

Place the cursor at the tail of
character string or in the middle of
character string and press the [ENTER]
key to put a yellow frame onto the
character string (F5 of the function
menu changes to white characters).
In this state, the character string may
be moved within the screen. Use the
trackball or arrow keys to move the
string.
Fig. 6.1.1-5
Moving Character String If pressing the [ENTER] key again after
moving the string, the frame disappears
and F5 of the menu changes to gray
characters.
6-2 Q1E-EA0466
F6 Home position
By pressing toggle switch, the present cursor position is stored

6
into memory so that the cursor line is displayed from the position
when the character input mode was selected next.
NOTICE：When “HOME POSI” is selected in the function menu, the frame

is set to the selected condition momentarily.
6.1.2 Deleting characters

(1) Deleting characters
Select a character string as well as moving a character string
and press the Del key.
(2) Clearing all characters being displayed
Pressing Character
Clear all clears the character string being displayed.
6.1.3 Ending entry

Character input function ends when one of below mentioned operation
is selected.
• When Character key is off.
• When current function is changed to another function menu.

• When the mode except CFM is changed.
• When Patient key is pushed.
• When the function is changed to VCR.
6.2 Entering Characters with Annotation

6.2.1 Calling ANNOTATION menu
Pressing Anno−
tation displays the character
cursor and ANNOTATION menu on the
screen.
The menu includes menus to designate
the position to display ANNOTATION by
region and type, and arrow mark menu.
Use the trackball or arrow keys to move
the cursor to any place where
ANNOTATION is to be located.
Selecting ANNOTATION page
Select “Prev. Page” or “Next Page” and
press [ENTER] key to change the menu
displayed. Select any ANNOTATION to
Fig. 6.2.1-1 ANNOTATION Cursor
6-3 Q1E-EA0466
be called.
(1) Entering ANNOTATION

Use the [ENTER] key to select
ANNOTATION highlighted in the menu,
it is displayed on the screen with
a frame.
In this state, use the trackball
to move ANNOTATION to any location.
Fig. 6.2.1-2 Input & Move
(2) Fixing ANNOTATION

Press the [ENTER] key again at the
location desired. It turns to white
and the frame disappears.
Then the icon on the upper right
of screen changes from
to .
Fig. 6.2.1-3 ANNOTATION Fixed
(3) Arrow symbol

May be selected as well as the other ANNOTATION.
6.2.2 ANNOTATION function menu

Selecting the ANNOTATION mode displays the function menu as shown
below:
1st page
If selecting F1 SORT
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 6.2.2-1 Function Menu
6-4 Q1E-EA0466
F1 SORT: Sorting MAIN MENU (F2~F4)
Menu layout of default setting is in the order of alphabet. This
may be changed over to SORT by layout or clinical region.
Fig. 6.2.2-2 SORT
(2nd page)
F1 Character size
F2, F3 Character font
F4 Correcting characters
The same as those of the character mode
(See 6.1.1).
F7 Arrow menu
Switches over display/not display of
the ARROW menu.
7
Fig. 6.2.2-3 Arrow Menu
6-5 Q1E-EA0466
6.2.3 Display setting of ANNOTATION menu
Set display of the ANNOTATION menu by application in the Application
menu of Main Menu.
If starting the Application menu in Main Menu, a list of Application
is displayed.
Double click the name of Application selected or click EDIT DATA
at the right side to edit setting of the Application selected.
If opening the ANNOTATION menu, default of the ANNOTATION entry
menu may be switched over to alphabetical order or purposeful order,
and display of the Arrow menu may be switched over.
Fig. 6.2.3-1 Display Setting
6.2.4 Ending ANNOTATION menu

Press the Anno−
tation key again or click the × mark at the upper right
corner of sub-window to clear all windows being displayed.
6-6 Q1E-EA0466
6.2.5 List of ANNOTATION
ANNOTATION registered to each diagnostic region differs by
APPLICATION. Fixed registrations are 232 items.
Table 6.2.5-1 ANNOTATION LIST-1

Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Abdominal Location LIVER Liver
RHV Right Hepatic Vein
MHV Middle Hepatic Vein
LHV Left Hepatic Vein
PV Portal Vein
IVC Inferior Vera Cava
Ao Aorta
GB Gallbladder
CBD Common File Duct
BD Bile Duct
SMA Superior Mesenteric Artery
SMV Superior Mesenteric Vein
CA Celiac Artery
PANCREAS Pancreas
MPD Main Pancreatic Duct
SPLEEN Spleen
SPA Splenic Artery
SPV Splenic Vein
KIDNEY Kidney
BLADDER Bladder
PROSTATE Prostate
UTERUS Uterus
STOMACH Stomach
Clinical CYST Cyst
MASS Mass
TUMOR Tumor
META Metastasis
HCC Hepatocellular Carcinoma
FATTY Fatty
ABSCESS Abscess
ASCITES Ascites
POLYP Polyp
SHADOW Acoustic Shadow
STONE Stone
Common R- Right-
L- Left-
SITTING Sitting
[Note 1] ( ) shows a name to be displayed in a menu.
6-7 Q1E-EA0466
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Cardiac Location LA Left Atrium
LV Left Ventricle
IVS Interventricular Septum
LVPW Posterior Wall of Left Ventricle
RA Right Atrium
RV Right Ventricle
MV Mitral Valve
AML Anterior Mitral Leaflet
PML Posterior Mitral Leaflet
AV Aortic Valve
Ao Aorta
AAo Ascending Aorta
DAo Descending Aorta
ARCH Aortic Arch
RCA Right Coronary Artery
LCA Left Coronary Artery
LMT Left Main Truck Coronary Artery
LAD Left Anterior Descending
LCX Left Circumflex
PA Pulmonary Artery
PV Pulmonary Valve
TV Tricuspid Valve
LVOT Left Ventricular Outflow Tract
LVIT Left Ventricular Inflow Tract
RVOT Right Ventricular Outflow Tract
RVIT Right Ventricular Inflow Tract
NCC Non-Coronary Cusp
LCC Left Coronary Cusp
RCC Right Coronary Cusp
LAA Left Atrial Appendage
SVC Superior Vena Cava
IVC Inferior Vena Cava
6-8 Q1E-EA0466
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Cardiac Clinical EFFUSION Effusion
VEC Vegetation
SAM Systolic Anterior Motion
THROMBUS Thrombus
MYXOMA Myxoma
VSD Ventricular Septal Defect
ASD Atrial Septal Defect
PDA Patent Ductus Arteriosus
HYPO Hypo
AKINESIS Akinesis
ANEURYSM Aneurysm
ENTRY Entry
REENTRY Reentry
TL True Lumen
FL False Lumen
IF Intimal Flap
TUMOR Tumor
Stress REST Rest
EXERCISE Exercise
L-DOSE Low Dose
H-DOSE High Dose
PEAK Peak Dose
POST Post Dose
RECOVERY Recovery
Common DIASTOLE Diastole
SYSTOLE Systole
TRANS Transverse
LONGI Longitudinal
AWAY Away
TOWARD Toward
PRE-OPE Pre Operation
POST-OPE Post Operation
6-9 Q1E-EA0466
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Vascular Location RCCA Right Common Carotid Artery
LCCA Left Common Carotid Artery
ICA Internal Carotid Artery
ECA External Carotid Artery
BIF Bifurcation
RCCV Right Common Carotid Vein
LCCV Left Common Carotid Vein
ICV Internal Carotid Vein
ECV External Carotid Vein
JUG-V Jugular Vein
VERT-A Vertebra Artery
S-TH-A Superior Thyroid Artery
I-TH-A Inferior Thyroid Artery
SUBCL-A Subclavian Artery
SUBCL-V Subclavian Vein
AX-A Axillery Artery
AX-V Axillery Vein
BRACH-A Brachial Artery
BRACH-V Brachial Vein
CEPH-V Cephalic Vein
BAS-V Basilic Vein
RAD-A Radial Artery
UL-A Ulner Artery
DIGITAL Digital
FEMORAL Femoral
CFA Common Femoral Artery
CFV Common Femoral Vein
GSV Greater Saphenous Vein
POP-A Popliteal Artery
POP-V Popliteal Vein
PER-A Peroneal Artery
PER-V Peroneal Vein
ATA Anterior Tibial Artery
ATV Anterior Tibial Vein
PTA Posterior Tibial Artery
PTV Posterior Tibial Vein
Clinical PLAQUE Plaque
ATHEROMA Atheroma
THROMBUS Thrombus
6 - 10 Q1E-EA0466
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Vascular Common R- Right-
L- Left-
ARTERY Artery
VEIN Vein
SUPERIOR Superior
INFERIOR Inferior
ANTERIOR Anterior
POSTERIOR Posterior
COMMON Common
INTERNAL Internal
EXTERNAL External
DISTAL Distal
DIASTOLE Diastole
SYSTOLE Systole
Ob/Gyn Location UTERUS Uterus
DOUGLAS Douglas
OVARY Ovary
FOLLICLE Follicle
GS Gestational Sac
YOLK-SAC Yolk Sac
FETUS Fetus
PLACENTA Placenta
BLADDER Bladder
UM-ARTERY Umbilical Artery
UM-VEIN Umbilical Vein
UT-ARTERY Uterine Artery
SPINE Spine
STOMACH Stomach
KIDNEY Kidney
CORD Umbilical Cord
Clinical CYST Cyst
TUMOR Tumor
MYOMA Myoma
CHOCOLATE Chocolate Cyst
DERMOID Dermoid
IUD Intrauterine Device
MOLE Mole
ECTOPIC Ectopic Pregnancy
IUGR Intrauterine Growth Retardation
TWINA Twin A
TWINB Twin B
Common R- Right-
L- Left-
ANTERIOR Anterior
POSTERIOR Posterior
CERVIX Cervix
FUNDUS Fundus
6 - 11 Q1E-EA0466
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Urology Location PROSTATE Prostate
DUCT Duct
SV Seminal Vesicle
EJ-DUCT Ejaculation Duct
TESTIS TESTIS
SCROTUM Scrotum
PENIS penis
URETHRA Urethra
BLADDER Bladder
PB Public Bone
Clinical PC Prostatic Cancer
BPH Benign Prostate Hypertrophy
TUMOR Tumor
MASS Mass
CYST Cyst
AMYLOID Amyloid
Common R- Right-
L- Left-
ANTERIOR Anterior
POSTERIOR Posterior
SAG Sagittal
TRANS Transverse
POST-OPE Post Operation
6 - 12 Q1E-EA0466
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Breast Location MAMMA Mammary Gland
COOPER Suspensory Of Cooper
SKIN Skin
FAT Fat
RIB Rib
NIPPLE Nipple
LN Lymph Node
DUCT Duct
PM Pectoral Muscle
Clinical TUMOR Tumor
MASS mass
CYST Cyst
MASTOPATHY Mastopahy
FA Fibroadenoma
PAPILLOMA Papolloma
LYMPHOMA Lymphoma
LIPOMA Lipoma
Common R- Right
L- Left
POST-OPE Post operation
Thyroid Location THYROID Thyroid
TRACHEA Trachea
THYROID-A Thyroid Artery
THYROID-V Thyroid Vein
RCCA Right Common Carotid Artery
LCCA Left Common Carotid Artery
ICV Internal Carotid Artery
ESOPHAGUS Esophagus
Clinical TUMOR Tumor
MASS Mass
CYST Cyst
BASEDOW Basedow disease
HASHIMOTO Hashimoto disease
GOITER Goiter
AMYLOID Amyloid Goiter
Common R- Right
L- Left
SUPERIOR Superior
MIDDLE Middle
INFERIOR Inferior
LOBE Lobe
6 - 13 Q1E-EA0466
6.2.6 Registration of user defined annotation
User defined annotation may be registered up to 20 words for 8
diagnostic regions (Max 160 items per preset).
(1) Starting registration menu
Press MAIN
MENU key to select “ANNOTATION”
in the SET UP submenu of MAIN MENU.
Fig. 6.2.6-1 Setup

(2) Selecting diagnostic region
When the User Def menu is displayed,
select diagnostic region of
ANNOTATION at the upper most field.
If clicking with the cursor, the
window of diagnostic region list is
extended downward. Click the name
of region to be designated to
display it in the field.
(3) Designating registration frame
Designate to which frame it is to
be registered. If not specified,
it is registered to the frame
highlighted in blue.
(4) Entering ANNOTATION
Enter any character string from the
Fig. 6.2.6-2 User Def.
alphanumeric keyboard.
(5)Registering ANNOTATION
Click the Register button to
register ANNOTATION.
6 - 14 Q1E-EA0466
(6)Example display
If the user registers, they are
displayed on the ANNOTATION menu as
follows:
• Listed in the alphabetical order:
Described in the alphabetical
order.
• Listed in the layout or clinical
order:
User Def page is added.
Fig. 6.2.6-3 User Def.
6.3 Entering Body Mark

6.3.1 Displaying body mark
(1) Initial display
Any body mark to be displayed by default when starting the
ultrasound scanner may be set in APPLICATION. Refer to Section
8 for details.
(2) Selecting a body mark with
displays 4 types of mark registered in APPLICATION every
time pressed.
Fig. 6.3-1 Order of Display
6 - 15 Q1E-EA0466
6.3.2 Moving body mark
MODE
When pressing the DEPENDEDkey and
selecting the “Move B.Mrk” in the second
page of function menu, use the trackball
to move the body mark to any location.
Fig. 6.3.2 Moving Body Mark
6.3.3 Deleting body mark
The body mark is deleted by pressing several times.
6.3.4 Moving position of probe mark

When selecting in the trackball
priority, use the trackball to move the
probe mark to any location.
Fig. 6.3.4-1 Moving Probe Mark
6.3.5 Adjusting angle of probe mark
Use to adjust angle of the probe
mark in the body mark.
And when selecting in the

trackball priority, it is possible to
adjust angle of the probe mark by moving
a trackball, pushing the ENTER key.
Fig. 6.3.5-1 Rotating Probe Mark
NOTICE: It is not displayed in the
body mark for heart.
6 - 16 Q1E-EA0466
6.3.6 Displaying upright position mark
Pressing while a body mark being
displayed, the characters “UP” is
UP displayed on the upper left of the body
mark.
Pressing again clears the upright
position mark.
Fig. 6.3.6-1 Upright Position Mark
6 - 17 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 7 Main Menu
The main menu allows any function having no exclusive key on the main
unit panel to be set and consists of multiple menus.
Items settable on the menu varies according to conditions of mode
and freeze.
Items displayed in gray on the menu can not be set under the current
condition of the equipment.
This section describes functions other than US related menus described
in Section 5 and contents related to mainly system setting and display
function.
7.1 Starting Main Menu
Press the key to display the menu at the left side of screen.
Use the trackball to move the cursor to any item and press the ENTER
button to newly open the lower level window (Sub-window) of the relevant
item. (Refer to 5.1.4)
Fig.7.1-1 Sub-menu
7.2 Main Menu of each Ultrasound Mode

Refer to each ultrasound mode.
• B Menu : 5.2.12
• M Menu : 5.3.10
• Dop. Menu : 5.4.13
• CFM Menu : 5.7.12
• Physiology : 5.8.4
7-1 Q1E-EA0466
7.3 Display Menu
Switches over settings of image display
related items.
Fig. 7.3-1 Display Menu

(1) B-Color (2) Gray Invert
Allows basic Inverts
colors to be set black/white of an
for each mode. image.
Also, items not
settable in the
mode at that time
are displayed in
gray (Refer to F7
of 5.2.10 MODE
DEPENDED (2nd
page)).
Fig. 7.3-2 B-Color Fig. 7.3-3 Gray Invert
(3) Background level

Switches over
bright-ness of
the background of
B image.
Fig. 7.3-4 Background level
7-2 Q1E-EA0466
7.4 Meas.Menu
Allows measurement functions to be selected.
Also, these functions are those to be selected after
Freeze; therefore, they cannot be selected when Freeze
Off.
Refer to the instruction manual of measurement for
details.
Fig. 7.4.1 Measurement Menu
7.5 Image Mem. Menu

A menu related (1) B:B_Split
to the cine memory.
Normally records with
capacity of the cine memory as
for one screen. If checking
this box, the screen is split
into two parts and they are
recorded at the same time.
Fig.7.5-1 Image Memory Menu
(2) B:M/D_Split (4) Review

Changes occupation Switches over the
ratio of the cine auto playback
memory for B image on/off and
and that for M/D playback speed.
image.
Fig.7.5-2 B:B/D_Split
Fig.7.5-3 Review
(3) Frame No. (5) Color Hold

Displays the frame number Starts color Hold mode by
of cine memory by checking checking this box.
this box.
7-3 Q1E-EA0466
7.6 Image Data Transfer Menu
Refer to 9.2.2 of 9.2.3 for the setting method of an item.
7.7 Recorder Menu

(1)VCR
A menu to Switches over video
switches over signal to S-VHS or
recording VHS.
methods.
Fig.7.7-2 Switching VCR
(2)Printer
Switches over print
waiting time.
Set it according to
Fig.7.7-1 Recorder Menu the printer.
Fig.7.7-3 Switching over Printer
7-4 Q1E-EA0466
7.8 Physiology Menu(See 5.8.4 Main Menu.)
7.9 Setup Menu

A menu for various system setups
Fig.7.9-1 Setup Menu
(1) Application Menu

(See Section 8 Application.)
(2) System Menu

A menu for system setups of the ultrasound
scanner
Fig.7.9-2 System Menu
7-5 Q1E-EA0466
(2-1) Data/Time
Date
• Year: Enter Year from the keyboard
or change it with “▲” or “▼”
on the screen.
• Month:Press “▼” to display a window.
Use the trackball to specify
month.
• Day: Use the trackball to move the
cursor to any appropriate
day.
Fig.7.9-3 Date/Time
Time
Use the cursor to specify each item of
“Hour”, “Minute”, “Second” and “AM/PM”
to highlight it and increment or
decrement with “▲” or “▼”.
Time zone
Click the Time zone tag with the cursor
for time zone setting.
After setting, use the cursor to click
the OK button, or Cancel button if
previous setting is acceptable.
CAUTION
If “Automatically adjust clock for
daylight saving changes” is
available for selection, be sure to
Fig.7.9-4 Time Zone
set it to OFF.
If it is ON, gestational age and
estimated delivery date may be
displayed in error in the obstetrics
measurement.
(2-2) Hosp. Name (See 4.6 Entering hospital name.)

(2-3) Char. Clear (See Chapter 6.)
(2-4) Key Click
Sets ON/OFF of the buzzer that beeps by pressing the keyboard
switches.
7-6 Q1E-EA0466
(2-5) Logo Mark
Changes display/non display of
“HITACHI” logo.
Fig.7.9-5 Logo Mark
(2-6) Entry Opt.

Available for emergency use by the MO disk drive when the system
is in trouble. In such case, option software is re-set.
Do not use it except in an emergency.
(2-7) Foot SW
The pedal of the twin foot switch marked as USER (hereafter
referred to as the USER pedal) can be used to do “Print”(record
to a printing device), “Capture Start Stop”(start/stop 3D image
capture , wide view image capture and stress echo image capture)
or “Probe Select”(change between probe 1 and probe 2).
＜CAUTION＞
Now, This function can be used, when option EZU-3D2/3D2S,
EZU-WS2 and EZU-SE1 is purchased.
And EZU-FS2 is needed for this function.
Fig.7.9-6 Foot SW
7-7 Q1E-EA0466
a) Print/Capture Start Stop
The USER pedal is assigned to “Print” function. But, in 3D mode,
it is assigned to Start/Stop 3D, Wide View and Stress image capture.
When option EZU-3D2/3D2S, EZU-SE1 and EZU-WS2 is not purchased,
this is grayed out.
b) Probe Select/Capture Start Stop

The USER pedal is assigned to “Probe Select” function. But, in
3D mode, it is assigned to Start/Stop 3D, Wide View and Stress
image capture. When option EZU-3D2/3D2S, EZU-SE1 and EZU-WS2
is not purchased, this is grayed out.
c) Only “Capture Start Stop”

The USER pedal is always assigned to “Capture Start Stop” function.
Except for 3D, Wide View and Stress mode, it is disabled. When
option EZU-3D2/3D2S, EZU-SE1 and EZU-WS2 is not purchased, this
is grayed out.
d) Only “Print”
The USER pedal is always assigned to “Print” function.
e) Only “Probe Select”

The USER pedal is always assigned to “Probe Select” function.
If you click the OK button, the change is saved. Clicking the Cancel
button restores the original setting.
7-8 Q1E-EA0466
(2-8) ScreenSaver
Screen saver function can be set.
a) Setting screen saver function
Fig.7.9-7 ScreenSaver
• Active: Changes over ON/OFF of the screen saver function.

Checking it OFF makes the screen saver function OFF
and disables time setting until starting the screen
saver and the Preview button for selection.
• Wait (minutes):
Enter time until starting the screen saver (1~60
minutes) from the keyboard, or use the ▲ and ▼ buttons
on the screen to select time.
• Preview: Starts the screen saver immediately. To end the
screen saver, press the UNDO key.
• OK: Saves contents edited on the ScreenSaver dialog.
• Cancel: Ends the screen saver without saving contents edited.
b) Starting screen saver
To start the screen saver, set Active on the Screen Saver dialog
to ON. Then set time until starting the screen saver and use
the OK button to save contents edited. The screen saver starts
when no panel operation is performed within the set time after
pressing the Freeze button. Also, pressing the Preview button
starts the screen saver.
c) When starting screen saver
When the screen saver starts, the UNDO key only is lit and enabled.
Other panel operations are disabled.
d) Ending screen saver
When the screen saver starts, pressing the UNDO key ends it and
returns to the screen before starting the screen saver.
(2-9) Software option
7-9 Q1E-EA0466
The list of optional software installed in the system is
displayed.
Contents of the list of optional software:
• Type : Type of optional software
• Content : Name of optional software
• Software Version :
Software version
Fig. 7.9-8 Software Option List
7 - 10 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Measurement Menu (See Section 11.)
(4) Annotation Menu(See Section 6.)
(5) Print / REC Key Menu (6) US Power Menu
Output Ultrasound power can be switched
signal can be over in three levels.
switched
over
according to L：Low
the printer M：Middle
being H：High
connected. (See 4.8.2)
Fig.7.9-9 Print REC Key Menu Fig.7.9-10 US Power Menu
(7) Image Filing Menu(See Section 9.2.)

(8) Peripherals Menu
Set connection with the network and so on.
Network… : Set network connection.
(Available if the optional NETCARD
interface unit EZU-Pi2 is installed.)
Printer (SCSI) : Set connection with the SCSI
printer.
(Available if the optional SCSI
interface unit EZU-Pi1 is installed.)
Fig.7.9-13 Peripherals Menu
7 - 11 Q1E-EA0466
(9) Backup data Menu
Use for system data management.
Copy : Saves current settings to the MO
disk.
Install : Loads the backup data if saved in the
MO disk.
CAUTION
Any data saved by this function will
be helpful for troubleshooting. Make
backup copies at least once a month and
keep them for later use.
Fig.7.9-14 Backup Data Menu
(10) Auto Freeze (See 4.3 Setting Automatic Freeze function.)
(11) Image Print Menu

Set any format for multi image printer output.
(See Appendix AA)
(12) User 1,2 keys

USER USER
Two kinds of function menus ( 1 , 2 ) can be defined freely.
The definable menu is only one item in USER1 and USER2. It can
be set independently of each other in freeze off mode and freeze
on mode.The first, select the function, and then execute by
pressing assign button.
Incase of un-selectable function, ASSIGN button is ghost
display.
Entry method
The function can be entered by
pressing ASSIGN button after
selecting a desired assignment
position to be defined, and then, a
desired sort and function to be
entered. The set condition is stored
into memory by pressing OK button.
After setting ,settled function menu
Fig. 7.9-15 User defined
function menu is displayed by pressing the
USER USER
1 2 .
Also the entered function can be
reset by DELETE or DELETE ALL button.
7 - 12 Q1E-EA0466
7.10 Disk Menu
Disk Menu is used for starting various kinds of
function of memory disk connected to the main unit.
Fig. 7.10-1 Disk Menu
(1) MO Eject
With this function it is possible to remove the MO in MO drive.
NOTICE: When the system MO is being inserted, do not try to
remove the MO.
(2) Disk View

This is to display files in the memory
disk.
a) When a disk name is clicked,
contents in sub level are displayed.
b) If a folder is selected, data in the
folder are displayed.
Fig. 7.10-2 Disk View
7 - 13 Q1E-EA0466
(3) FD Format
This is for formatting a floppy disk.
• Enter the name of floppy disk into
Volume Label.
• Press Start button.
Fig. 7.10-3 FD Format
(4) MO Format
This is for formatting MO. (Refer to Appendix D.)
NOTICE: When the MO available in the market is to be used for
image recording and so on, use it without fail
compatible with Windows NT.
In case the MO not compatible with Windows NT, use
it after formatting MO by observing Appendix D.
Fig. 7.10-4 MO Format
7 - 14 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 8 APPLICATION Function
APPLICATION is a function to register initial state of the equipment

in advance for easy use. Max 10 kinds of initial states may be registered.
PROBE
Use the key to select it.
8.1 Switching over APPLICATION

PROBE
First of all, press the key to display the Select Probe with
Application menu.
Fig. 8.1-1 Select Probe with Application
Even when starting for the first time, basic APPLICATION (see above)
has been already registered. When the diagnostic region is to be
changed, Click a corresponding item in the application selection
column.
8-1 Q1E-EA0466
8.2 Editing APPLICATION Function
APPLICATION functions may be edited, added and deleted in accordance
with diagnostic uses.
MAIN
MENU
Fig.8.2-1 APPLICATION Menu
Use the MAIN

MENU key to open the main menu and select APPLICATION of the
Set menu. APPLICATION Menu opens.
By selecting a probe to be edited from Probe menu ,the present entry

application is displayed in Application View.
For various operations, use the cursor to click the switch at the
right side. Some functions open its window or directly runs.
8-2 Q1E-EA0466
8.2.1 Current Condition
APPLICATION is made based on the
current conditions of equipment.
It is possible to overwrite on
existing APPLICATION or to make
a new APPLICATION. In case of
overwriting on the existing
APPLICATION a message for
confirmation as shown in left
figure is displayed.
Max. 10 application items can be
newly added every probe.
Fig.8.2.1-1 Current Condition
8.2.2 Edit Data

Allows each mode and each item to be set in details (Refer to 8.3).
8.2.3 Copy & Paste

Allows already set items to be copied. By editing each APPLICATION
copied, more flexible APPLICATION may be used.
(1) Copying items
Move the cursor to any item to
be copied (Ex: Adult Abdomen),
and click the Copy button in
the screen.
Contents is copied and
temporally stored in the
memory in equipment.
(Until the item to be copied
is selected, Paste cannot be
selected).
Fig.8.2.3-1 Copy
8-3 Q1E-EA0466
Select a copy destination by
clicking [ ] mark in
Application View.
Then click Paste button.
Copied item is registered in
Application View.
As for item name, similar name
is automatically attached to
avoid duplication with the
item to be copied.
Fig.8.2.3-2 Paste
8.2.4 Delete
It is possible to delete APPLICATION data newly made or the group.
APPLICATION data registered at the delivery time from factory can
not be deleted.
Move the cursor to the target for deletion and click the Delete
button, then the deletion is conducted.
8.2.5 Edit Name

Move the cursor to any name to be edited and click the Edit Name
button. The name frame opens and characters are highlighted.
At this time, use the alphanumeric keys to edit the name.
8.2.6 Default application setting

Select APPLICATION to be executed when the power ON. Click Set
default Application button after selecting an application name
from Application View. The selected application name is displayed
blue.
8-4 Q1E-EA0466
8.2.7 Ending edit
(1) Save
Saves contents edited.
(2) Close
Ends (returns to the Setup menu) without recording.
Click the NO button in following dialog.
Fig 8.2.7-1 Confirmation dialog
8-5 Q1E-EA0466
8.3 Edit Data <APPLICATION parameter setting menu>
Selecting “Edit Data” in the Application menu allows parameters to
be set in detail by diagnostic area or diagnostic region.
8.3.1 APPLICATION parameter setting menu
Fig. 8.3.1-1 Edit Application (Example: B Menu)
Current: (At the left bottom of screen) Name of Probe and

Application being edited
Item View: (At the left side of screen) Switches over items
that can be edited.
Move the cursor with the trackball to highlight
the item name, and then press the Enter key.
Sheet change: Some items may be divided into several sheets.

Click any tag at the top of sheet to switch over
the sheet.
End of setting: Click the Prev. Command Menu button (at the right
bottom of screen) to return to the Command Menu
screen.
8-6 Q1E-EA0466
8.3.2 B-Mode Menu
(1) B Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.2-1 B Menu 1

Display Depth Size
Initial Display depth of B-mode in the probe
frequency
Frequency Initial frequency setting and dTHI mode selection
(Fine/Reso./Gene./Pene.)
View Angle View angle of B-mode image in the probe (6 steps
of 1 ~ 6)
Vertical Shift Initial value of vertical display position on the
B-mode image (-20 ~ 190mm)
Focus
Position Method to control focus setting of the B-mode image
Step Number of steps for focus region (1 ~ 4)
Execute Stand-Off
Designates focus depth correction with the
observation coupler mounted to the linear probe
for body surface organ
Initial Focal Zone
Initial focus region in each probe (F1 ~ F8)
Initial Mode Initial setting when selecting the dTHI
compatible probe.
8-7 Q1E-EA0466
(2) B Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.2-2 B Menu 2

Scan Line Density
Initial setting of Scan line Density of B-mode
image.
IMAGE PROCESS
Dynamic Range Dynamic range for B-mode image
Enhance Axial Setting of image enhancement in axial
direction for B-mode (1~ 4)
Enhance Lateral
Setting of image enhancement in lateral
direction for B-mode (1 ~ 4)
AGC (Auto Gain Control)
Grade of reducing high brightness echo level
(0 ~ 3)
SCC (Scan Correlation)
Grade of frame interpolation in mode image
(0 ~ 7)
Receiving Filter
Selection of image quality control function
(A ~ C)
Gray Map Selects the gray map for B mode image
Patient Depended Compensation
Function to adjust parameters due to
difference by patients. (1 ~ 7)
Region Diagnostic region for IMAGE PROCESS
8-8 Q1E-EA0466
(3) B Menu 3
Fig. 8.3.2-3 B Menu 3
Initial Gain Initial gain for B-mode

Fundamental Normal use
dTHI offset dTHI use (Fundamental gain + dTHI offset )
Scan Orientation
Normal Orientation of B-mode image in the normal probe
BIPLANE-T Orientation of B-mode image in transaxial plane of
the biplane probe
BIPLANE-L Orientation of B-mode image in transaxial plane of
the biplane probe
Depth Gain Control
MODE Control method (Fixed/Variable) on the DEPTH GAIN
CONTROL bar
Display Curve
Selects display of graphic curve for setting DGC
on the screen
Steering Mark Display
Selects display of steering mark showing scan range
when setting the normal display in the wide view
display probe.
Combine Mode Selects execution of image connecting function to
8-9 Q1E-EA0466
intentionally obtain wide view with gap between
images eliminated in the B image dual screen display.
ECG SYNC Delay Time
Setting to recognize SYNC1 and SYNC2 by
intentionally providing ECG delay time.
Initial Display Number of screen initially displayed in the
B-mode image
8.3.3 M-Mode Menu
Fig. 8.3.3-1 M Menu

Image Split Switches over display layout of B/M image.
L/R: Left/right layout, U/D: Up/down layout
Depth Range Control
Switches over display depth of M-mode image
Simultaneous: B+M, Independent: M
Sweep Speed Screen sweep speed in the M-mode image and D-mode
image
Image Process
Dynamic Range
Dynamic range for M-mode image
Enhance Setting of enhancement for M-mode image
AGC Grade of reduction of high brightness echo level
Initial Gain Initial gain for M-mode
8 - 10 Q1E-EA0466
Fundamental Normal use
dTHI offset dTHI use (Fundamental gain(M) + dTHI offset )
M Blanking Setting of display width of M-mode image or D-mode
image in the vertical direction
8.3.4 D-Mode Menu
(1) D Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.4-1 D Menu 1

Doppler Mode Initial setting of PW or CW mode when pressing
the PW key
PW Mode PW mode display format to display when pressing
the PW key
REF PW Reference frequency to detect PW Doppler in each
probe
PRF Control
Auto PRF Sets repetitive frequency in the PW Doppler mode
(Auto/manual)
Initial Doppler pulse repetitive frequency in the PW/CW
Doppler image or max detection frequency in the
PW/CW Doppler mode image
Sample Length Width (detection area) of Doppler sample points
Initial Gain Initial gain value for D-mode (PW/CW)
B-Refresh B-mode image refresh
mode(Simultaneous/Interval)
(2)D Menu 2
8 - 11 Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 8.3.4-2 D Menu 2
Image Process
Wall Filter (PW)
Initial setting for PW-mode of low pass filter
frequency to remove unnecessary Doppler
components due to wall motion and so on
Wall Filter (CW)
Initial setting for CW-mode of low pass filter
frequency to remove unnecessary Doppler
components due to wall motion and so on
ANALYSIS Number of FFT analysis point in D-mode image
(Hi-Resolution/Hi-Response)
FFT-γ Dynamic range for D-mode
Doppler Expand Displays
D-mode image expanded in PW-mode Simultaneous
scan
Interval Time ECG On Refresh time in PW-mode B image refresh
scan mode when displaying ECG waveform
ECG Off Refresh time in PW-mode B image refresh
scan mode when not displaying ECG
waveform
Flow Invert Inverts waveform display in D-mode image
Angle Bar
Bar Angle to Doppler Line of the angle correction bar
in the Doppler mode (just after switchover)
Display Designates on/off of displaying the angle
8 - 12 Q1E-EA0466
correction bar in the Doppler mode (Just after
switch over)
Oblique Scan Angle
Sets oblique scan angle of D-mode image in the
linear probe.
Scale Designates displaying a (flow) marker in D-mode
image
（３）D Menu 3
Fig. 8.3.4-3 D Menu 3

Unit Selects a unit for Doppler waveform display.
Angle On Selects a unit for Doppler waveform display when
displaying the angle correction bar in D-mode
image display from m/s and cm/s.
Angle Off Selects a unit for Doppler waveform display when
not displaying the angle correction bar in D-mode
image display from m/s and cm/s.
Setting Cursor Selects output of Doppler sound while moving
Doppler sample point.
Base Line Position
Sets position to display the base line when
selecting Doppler mode.
CFM ROI Moves CFM ROI following the Doppler sample point
in CFM mode.
8 - 13 Q1E-EA0466
8.3.5 CFM-Mode Menu
(1)CFM-Mode Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.5-1 CFM Menu 1
Color Map
Region Designates color map combination by diagnostic
region (Cardiac/Others) in CFM-mode image.
Cardiac Mode Selects to start which of CFI or CFA when starting
color map setting in Cardiac (when Cardiac is
selected in Region).
Others Mode Selects which of CFI and CFA is to be started when
starting color map setting other than Cardiac (when
selecting Others in Region item).
Color Scale Selects display of color scale in CFM-mode image
display.
Dual CFM (CFI/CFA)
A function to display dual screen simultaneous CFM
mode display.
Allows color map to be designated individually for
each L/R screen.
8 - 14 Q1E-EA0466
(2)CFM-Mode Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.5-2 CFM-Mode Menu 2
REF Reference frequency in the CFI/CFA mode

PRF Repetitive frequency of Doppler pulse in CFI/CFA
separate mode image
Priority
Frame Rate Priority is given to CFM frame rate
Sensitivity Priority is given to CFM sensitivity.
Restricts PRF of CFM not to exceed PRF set in Max.
Operating PRF when CFM B image scan.
With this, CFM sensitivity can be kept unchanged
even if shifting ROI up/down.
Scan Line Density
Scan line density of CFI/CFA separate mode image.
Color ROI
Marker Switches over display/non-display of frame
showing a range for CFM-mode image display
Shape Switches over shapes of display frame (CFM ROI)
showing a range for CFM-mode image display.
Box Sector trapezoid for Convex and Sector, and
rectangle for Linear.
Standard Sector from arc center for Convex and Sector, and
rectangle touching body surface for Linear
8 - 15 Q1E-EA0466
(3) CFM-Mode Menu 3
Color Box
Fixed-B A function to acquire more precise CFM image by
making display angle of B/W image the same width
as that of CFM region.
Width Initial range of color display in CFM image display
(angle and width)
Height Initial range of color display in CFM image display
(Height)
Initial Gain
Initial gain value for CFM-mode (CFI/CFA)
8 - 16 Q1E-EA0466
(4)CFM-Mode Menu 4
IMAGE PROCESS Allows image details to be adjusted separately for

CFI and CFA
CFM Filter Level of low cut filter to remove frequency
components unnecessary for viewing in CFM-mode
image
Packet Size Minimum unit size to detect color information in
CFM-mode image
A. Suppress. Grade of removing body motion in CFM-mode image
display
Smoothing Designates smoothing process level in CFM-mode
image display
Persistence Designates persistence (Color SCC) process level
in CFM-mode image display
Variance Grade (emphasis) of velocity variance when
displaying CFM-mode image with the color map as
velocity-velocity variance or variance
Dynamic Range Dynamic Range for CFA-mode image
8 - 17 Q1E-EA0466
(5)CFM-Mode Menu 5
B-Refresh Sets refresh scan mode of B-mode image in dual screen

simultaneous display of CFM-mode image and M-mode
image or Doppler mode.
Preference Sets CFI and CFA individually.
Mode Designates method of preference to display color
display image or B/W display image (Auto/Manual)
Level Brightness level of B/W display image to be a reference
threshold when giving preference to display color
display image in executing PRIORITY function in the
CFM-mode.
Peak Hold
Interval Time
ECG On Time to add color display component in the peak hold
function when displays ECG waveform in the CFM-mode.
ECG Off Time to add color display component in the peak hold
function when displays no ECG waveform in the CFM-mode.
8 - 18 Q1E-EA0466
8.3.6 Display
(1)Display Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.6-1 Display Menu 2
Color Rejection
Lower limit to reject velocity in color display
velocity of CFM image
B Color
Execute Selects execution of pseudo color against B/W image
B Mode γ table map for pseudo color against B-mode image
M Mode γ table map for pseudo color against M-mode image
D Mode γ table map for pseudo color against D-mode image
Gray Insert
B Mode Selects polarity of screen display of B-mode image
M,D Mode Selects polarity of screen display of M and D-mode
image
Background Level
Switches over brightness of background of B-mode
image.
8 - 19 Q1E-EA0466
(2)Display Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.6-2 Display Menu 1
B Post Processing
Curve Shape of the correction curve in γ correction of
displayed image
γ γ coefficient in γ correction of displayed image
Sat. Upper limit of brightness to be saturated in γ
correction of displayed image
Rej. Lower limit of brightness to be rejected in γ
Cent. Level of inflection point in γ correction of the
S-shape curve
M/D Post Processing
Curve Shape of the correction curve in γ correction of
displayed image
γ γ coefficient in γ correction of displayed image
Sat. Upper limit of brightness to be saturated in γ
Rej. Lower limit of brightness to be rejected in γ
Cent. Level of inflection point in γ correction of the
S-shape curve
γ-Curve
Display On
Designates to display γ–curve on the image.
8 - 20 Q1E-EA0466
8.3.7 Annotation Menu
Fig. 8.3.7-1 Annotation Menu 1
Region Designates a terminology set by diagnostic field

to be used in the annotation function
Ordering Order to display terminology in the initial
terminology screen when starting the annotation
menu.
Alphabetical
Order of alphabet: Arranges terms in the spelled
order.
Purposeful Order of contents: Arranges terms in the order of
contents such as region or clinical terms in
respective diagnostic area.
Arrow Menu Selects displaying the arrow menu.
8 - 21 Q1E-EA0466
8.3.8 Measurement menu
MEAS MENU
Set the measurement menu starting from the key.
(1) Measurement Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.8-1 Measurement Menu 1
Region Designates a set of measurement functions to be

displayed when pressing the Measurement menu key.
Keep Locus In Freeze-Off
Designates to automatically clear measurement
result being displayed at Freeze OFF.
Continue Calip., Trace in Freeze-Off
Designates to continue Calip, Trace measurement
at Freeze OFF
8 - 22 Q1E-EA0466
Allows measurement functions used frequently to be assigned to
the function keys (F5 ~ F7) of the Mode Depended menu.
Region Not effective on this page but on the 1st page

B Mode/M Mode/ D Mode
Indicates items to be displayed with the function
menu of each mode.
Measurement Lists names of measurement equation
When contents of setting are to be changed, select any name of

measurement equation after selecting (clicking ○) the function
key to be changed.
Upon changing the contents of setting, the function key selection
proceeds to the next item.
8 - 23 Q1E-EA0466
Initial Location of Result Menu

Sets location for measurement results.
Result Frame Lines
Switches over longitudinal length (number of lines) of
display area. If the display area at the bottom of screen
is switched over, number of lines corresponding to it
is displayed.
Fig. 8.3.8-4
Setting of Result
Frame Lines
8 - 24 Q1E-EA0466
Move Pressing the Move key turns inside the display frame
blue showing that the moving mode is effective.
Move the mouse to move the measurement display area.
If pressing ENTER key again, it is restored where it
moved.
Fig. 8.3.8-5 Moving Result Area
8.3.9 Body mark
Sets the Body mark being switched by button
(1) Body Mark menu 1
Fig. 8.3.9-1 Body Mark Menu 1
8 - 25 Q1E-EA0466
Body Mark key
Region Menu of Body Mark to be selected by region. Select
to highlight any of them for displaying the mark
corresponding to the Body Mark menu to the right.
Body Mark Menu
Displays marks registered for a diagnostic region.
These may be displayed and selected in the Body Mark
menu of function menu.
If there are more body
marks, clicking the
triangles at the lower
right corner to scroll
pages, next body marks
are displayed.
Fig. 8.3.9-2 Next
Rotation Press the center of button to display Body
Mark in the order of Rotation
Set Probe Mark Sets the Probe Mark (arrow mark) on Body Mark
to be displayed for each Rotation. The mark
selected with a black dot in Rotation is
displayed.
Move Sets where the Probe Mark is to be located.

Click the button and use the trackball to move
it. As soon as pressing ENTER
key after
POSI／SIZE
setting, display is changed and selection moves

to the next mark.
Rotate Sets in which direction the Probe Mark is to
be rotated. Click Rotate button and use the
trackball to rotate it. As soon as pressing
ENTER
key after setting, display is changed
POSI／SIZE
and selection moves to the next mark.

Initial Switches over setting of the Body Mark when
starting the system or changing Application.
Display On Displays the Body Mark when starting the scanner
(not displayed if not selected).
8 - 26 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Body Mark Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.9-3 Initial Location of Body mark
Initial Location of Body Mark

Sets location to display the Body Mark.
B Sets location to display the Body Mark in the B-mode
image 1 screen.
B/B-L Sets location to display the Body Mark at the L screen
side in the B-mode image 2 screen.
B/B-R Sets location to display the Body Mark at the R side
screen in the B-mode image 2 screen.
B/MD Sets location to display the Body Mark in the
simultaneous dual screen display of B-mode image
and M(D)-mode image.
8 - 27 Q1E-EA0466
8.3.10 Others Menu
(1) Others Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.10-1 Others Menu 1
Cine Memory
Memory Allocation
Designates recording mode of the cine memory
function.
B Mode
B:B_Split Sets cine memories left/right
independent in the B image dual screen display
B:M/D Mode Designates allotment for B-mode image
and MD-mode image in the cine memory.
Frame no. Display
Displays frame No. at the right side of screen.
8 - 28 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Others Menu 2
（This menu is displayed when EZU-EK23 is installed.）
Physiology
Sweep Speed Sets sweep speed of various physiological signal
waveforms.
ECG
Display Displays ECG waveform.
Position Vertical position to display waveform
Gain Amplitude of waveform
HPF Designates level of the High Pass Filter (DC variance
filter) in the ECG waveform display function
NOTICE:PCG is not supporting.
8 - 29 Q1E-EA0466
(1) Others Menu 3
New Patient Key

Execute Application
Designates whether to execute calling the
Application set item when New Patient key ON
or not
Save Measurement Result Automatically.
This sets whether the measurement result is
saved or not with New Patient key pressed.
Trackball Priority
Track ball priority for Real time, Freeze (B/W)
and Freeeze (CFM) is set respectively.
Realtime Freeze OFF
Freeze (B/W) Freeze ON with B/W-mode
Freeze (CFM) Freeze ON with CFM-mode
V.SHIFT Sets it to the function for moving an image

vertically
Steering Sets it to the function for steering an image
Probe mark Sets it to the function for moving a probe mark.
Cine Sets it to the function for playing back of image
memory
No Select Sets it to the no selection
8 - 30 Q1E-EA0466
Function Menu Selects the initial display menu of function
menu.
Off Displays no function menu.
Mode Depended Mode depended menu
Image Process Image Process menu
Physio The menu for ECG functions is displayed.
3D The menu fro 3D function is displayed.
Contrast The menu for contrast imaging function is
displayed.
Option Option menu
USER1 The function key that user define.
USER2 The function key that user define.

Assign Option Key
Selection of the function to be allocated to
the Function menu by pressing OPTION key.
Base The menu (base menu) for selection of option
is displayed.
Wide View Displays the Wide View function menu
Stress Displays the Stress Echo function menu
If the option that is not allowed to use is selected by Assign

Option key, the Base menu is displayed.
Speaker Sets functions of the Speaker

Volume Initial setting of Speaker Volume
8 - 31 218 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 9 Image memory unit
9.1 Image memory

As a large capacity image memory unit is incorporated in the scanner,
it is possible to store and replay easily image information acquired
during the examination without distortion of image quality.
(1) Cine-memory function

This is for storing live images and it is possible to store images
of designated mode.
• Continuous record mode
With this mode live images can be recorded continuously without
any gap． In the time of replay it is possible to replay all the
recorded images in continuous loop (speed variable), in forward
or reverse frame by frame.
• Automatic heart beat detection mode (ECG on).
ECG wave is recorded together with live images.
In replaying time the continuous loop between the first R-wave and
the last wave is replayed. So, it is possible to observe replay
images with good continuity between both ends of loop. In addition
forward feed or reverse feed of every frame is allowed so that all
the recorded images can be displayed．
• M (D) image record mode
In B/M or B/D(B/M/D) mode it is possible to record M-mode image
or Doppler image in Cine memory for long period of time.
Also, by splitting Cine memory it is possible to record and replay
B-mode image or M(D)-mode image individually.
(2) Image filing function

• Store to Hard Disk function
It is possible to store images being displayed on the monitor as BMP
(bit map) images up to 300 images. Retrieve of stored images is easy
so that this is best suited for a temporal record during the examination.
This mode can be used in B/M, B/(M) D, 1 image of M-mode and D-mode,
and 2 display images (one freeze image or two live images).
• Image Transfer function

Images are converted into single image in BMP, TIFF and JPEG, or live
images of AVI format, and those can be transferred in MO Drive and
Floppy Disk Drive. It is also possible to convert and transfer the
9-1 Q1E-EA0466
image stored at the hard disk.
• Filing function
This function is to retrieve and manage image and it functions to
read stored images freely and to delete unnecessary images and replace
them with new ones.
<CAUTION>
1. In the time of image retrieve, do not remove the probe being
selected from the probe connector. If it is removed, there
may be a case that scanner unit may function erroneously.
2. Do not eject the media while MO or FD is transferring image
data, or the device may functions erroneously.
9-2 Q1E-EA0466
9.2 Image filing function
9.2.1 Store to Hard Disk function
(1) Record of image
When is pressed, an ultrasound image at that moment is recorded

S-WRITE
in the Hard Disk.

NOTICE:
• Max．300 images can be stored in the Hard Disk.
• Recorded data do not include Main menu, Annotation menu, etc.,
but do only ultrasound image and graphics.
• Memory is hold even if the power is put off.
While image is being recorded, mark is displayed at upper right

position in the display.
<CAUTION>
When attempting to record images exceeding 300, the following
message appears and the images cannot be stored in the Hard
Disk. Delete files in the Hard Disk or transfer them to the
other media.
Fig. 9.2-1 Hard Disk full message

The following message is displayed, when ID or name of Patient
is not inputted and being stored. Please choose [Yes], when
you store then. Please choose [No], when you store after
inputting ID or Name.
Fig. 9.2-2 No patient name message
9-3 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Filing dialog
When is pressed during freeze ON, Filing dialog for retrieving

READ
recorded images is displayed.
Selected (blue frame)
Fig. 9.2.3 Filing dialog

NOTICE: Incase of many image files are recorded,filing dialog
displaying need Long time.
(1)Selection of image
In the center of Filing dialog reduced images (thumbnail) of
recorded images are displayed. In case there are more than 10
images, operate “▲”“▼” at right side or a cursor (scroll bar)
to switch images.
When the image to be replayed is clicked, it is surrounded by blue
frame.
Next, if another thumbnail is clicked, the selected thumbnail is
surrounded with blue frame. If click it again, the blue frame is
erased and the selection is released.
If Select all button at lower left is clicked, all images are
selected.
(2) Image retrieve

When the Retrieve button is clicked, only the selected images are
displayed (refer to 9.2.6).
9-4 Q1E-EA0466
9.2.2 Set up filing
The address of the image transferring by the S-WRITE key or the M-WRITE
key, a file format, etc. are set up.
Image Filing in Main Menu/Set up is chosen and “Set up Filing” dialog
is started.
Fig. 9.2-4 Set Up Filing dialog

(1) S-Write assignment(Single Image Transfer)
With key the address of image record is set.

S-WRITE
a) Hard Disk
Images are recorded in the incorporated Hard Disk.
b) External Device
This is to set up a recording format of single image and address
of recording drive.
• File format: When “▼” is clicked, a selection window is opened
and it is possible to convert data into BMP, TIFF, JPEG. In TIFF
format the compressing method are selectable among None
(no-compression) and Pack Bitz.
• Address (Destination): With this it is possible to record single
images to Floppy Disk Drive and MO Drive.
Only a selectable drive unit is displayed in the window.
NOTICE:The JPEG and AVI format does not have compatible on EUB-6000.
9-5 Q1E-EA0466
(2) M-WRITE assignment(Multi Image transfer)
This is to set up a recording format of live images and address of
recording device.
• Mode: When “▼”is clicked, a selection window is opened and
it is possible to select a mode among F-Fout, R-Rout and All.
F-F out set up is effective only in the cine memory mode and
R-R out set up is effective only in the ECG mode.
F-F out ···· Function to transfer frame: This is to record a
series of continued frames selected in discretion
as one file.
R-R out ···· Function to transfer heart beat: This is to record
a series of frames in R-wave time phase selected
in discretion as one file.
All ········ Function to transfer all of cine memory: This is
to record all the cine image as one file.
Items tool and Number can not be selected.
• Tool: This is to change over the start – end setting of live
image.
Auto ······· Frames selected in next item, number, are
automatically recorded.
Manual ····· Designate starting and ending points for
transferring images in the cine memory.
• Number:
In F-F out · This is to record as same numbers of frame as images
selected.
(All/10/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100)
In R-R out · This is to record as same numbers of images as
heart beats selected.
(All/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10)
• File Format: When “▼” is clicked, a selection window is opened
and it is possible to convert data into AVI,
AVI(Compression).
• Address (designation of recording device): Only the drive which
can be selected is displayed in the window.
9-6 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Network Folder
• When Set Up button is clicked, Network set up window is opened.
(This can be set when the optionally available Net Card Interface
unit EZU-Pi2 is loading.)
Choose the folder of a transferring place and click the Register
button.
Then, a click of the OK button displays the folder name registered
into Address of Filing Setup Dialog.
When you delete the registered folder, click the Delete button.
When you cancel the changed contents, click Cancel button.
Fig. 9.2-5 Network Folder dialog
(4) DICOM
• DICOM server: When Set Up button is clicked, DICOM server set
up Dialog is opened.
(This can be set when the optionally available Net
Card Interface unit EZU-Pi2 and DICOM Transfer
Software EZU-FC5 are loading.)
• Modality WorkList: Clicking Set Up button opens the DICOM Modality
WorkList Setup menu. (This can be set in the system
loading with the DICOM WorkList EZU-FC5W in
addition to the option to set up the above DICOM
Server.)
9-7 Q1E-EA0466
(5) Color Select for Filing Image:
Color set up at the time of image output is changed.
• B/W Image: For B-mode, M-mode and Doppler-mode image
• Color Image: For image in color mode, and B-color mode.
Images can be recorded either by B/W mode or Color mode.
(6) Set Up Log File: This is a set up menu for Log File which records
the history of image transfer.
It works to set up, edit and delete the Log File.
If Log information is not selected, the display of
this menu can not be opened.
See Appendix-G for details.
Fig. 9.2-6 Log File set up menu
(7) Slide show: Time for automatic change of image display is set in
retrieving time of image file.
9-8 Q1E-EA0466
9.2.3 Transfer of Image
(1) Single Image Transfer
Set up the Transferring place of the S-WRITE key with reference to 9.2.2
Set up Filing. When the S-WRITE key is pressed, a display image is transferred
to the set-up place.
(2) Multi Image Transfer

Set up the Transferring place of the M-WRITE key with reference to 9.2.2
Set up Filing. When the M-WRITE key is pressed, Multi Image Transfer starts.
(3) Change temporarily address of transferring

Image Filing just below Main Menu: This is a menu to change temporarily
address of transferring. When the OK button is clicked, transferring is
started. Refer to 9.2.2 Set up Filing for the change method of an item.
Fig. 9.2-7 Image Filing dialog

<CAUTION>
The following message is displayed, when ID or name of Patient is
not inputted and being stored. Please choose [Yes], when you store
then. Please choose [No], when you store after inputting ID or Name.
Fig. 9.2-8 No patient name message
9-9 Q1E-EA0466
9.2.4 Filing daialog
When is pressed during freeze ON, Filing dialog for retrieving recorded
READ
images is displayed.
<CAUTION>
If the READ key is puressed for the first time after a power supply
injection when a setup of the S-WRITE key is a network folder, connection
may go wrong. This phenomenon occurs by the performance of PC of a
connection place, and setup. Once, Close a filing dialig and press
the READ key again.
Fig. 9.2-9 Filing dialog
(1) Drive
This switches the read drive of the image.
When“▼” button is clicked, a sub-window
is opened to show the drive from which
images can be read at present.
9 - 10 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Search
This is to retrieve recorded image by a patient information or
date. This search narrows down. When you research from the
beginning, click the Show all button.
a) Item
It is possible to switch the search item.
When “▼”button is clicked, a sub-window
is opened to display the item which can
be selected at present.
ID, Name: Search by the patient ID,Name
Date(YYYYMMDD): Search by
Fig. 9.2-11 Search Item Date(YYYYMMDD)
Date(Today): Search by Date(Today)
Keyword: Search by Keyword
Application: Search by Application
All: Search by the patient ID and Name
and so on.
b) Keyword
Input the name and ID etc. for search from the keyboard.
When these are input, characters of Search button is clearly
displayed which shows the search is in an active status.
When the Search button is clicked, the search in the designated
drive is started. Corresponding search data are displayed on
right side of dialog and at same time Thumbnails are also displayed.
When there are no corresponding data, a message as shown below
is displayed. (Fig.9.2-13). Try to search again.
Fig. 9.2-13 Search no

match message
Fig. 9.2.12 Search of Images
9 - 11 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Show all
All thumbnails of recorded images can be displayed, but at first
10 images only are to be displayed. In case images more than 10
are recorded, renew thumbnails using the cursor at right side.
(4) Browse on Net

This can be operated when the optionally available Net Card Interface
unit EZU-Pi2 is loading. When an image file on the network is
temporarily to be retrieved, click this button to select the display
folder.
(5) Select all/Select clear

This is to select all thumbnails being displayed (including other
ones not displayed than 10 images displayed) and to release the
selection of selected thumbnails.
(6) Retrieve
Images data of selected thumbnails are retrieved.
When tow or more images are selected at the same time, the display
is different according to the selected number.
2~4 images selected: 4-image display
5~9 images selected: 9-image display
More than 10 images selected: 16-image display
(7) Merge
This is to copy selected thumbnails image to Merge Folder.
If it is necessary in editing image data, hold the data temporarily
in Merge Folder.
(8) Transfer
This is to transfer image data to another disk. Refer to 9.2.5
Transfer F7.
9 - 12 Q1E-EA0466
(9) Log Info
This function is used for recording information regarding devices
for data transfer as a Log file.
After the Log Info. button is clicked, by operating according to
the messages, Fig.9.2-14 Log search menu is displayed.
See Appendix-G for details.
Fig.9.2-14 Log search menu
(a) Drive
This switches the read drive of the Log file.
(b) Search
This is to search Log information by patient name and so on.
(b-1) Item
This is to change the search item.
(b-2) Keyword
This is to input the Keyword for search from the keyboard.
When the Search button is clicked after inputting the Keyword,
the search in the designated drive is started.
(c) Show all Log file

This is to display all Log information.
9 - 13 Q1E-EA0466
(10) Delete
Images of selected thumbnails can be deleted.
If the Delete button is clicked after clicking the Select All
button, it can all delete.
(11) Modify ID
Modify ID and Name of Patient.
[The procedure of modification]

- Choose Patient to modification by ID and Name list.
- Click the Modify ID button.
- Make modification of ID or name on ID Modify ID dialog.
- Click the Update button.
Fig.9.2-15 Modify ID dialog
(12) Image print

The selected image is printed to PC printer or a DICOM printer.
In order to print to PC printer, refer to "Appendix AA Using the
PC Printer”.
DICOM Printing Software EZU-FC5P of an option is required in order
to print to a DICOM printer.
(13) Close
Filing dialog is closed and returns to the original display.
9 - 14 Q1E-EA0466
9.2.5 Transfer
When the Transfer button of Filing dialog is clicked, Transfer
dialog can start and can transfer the selected image to other drives.
The image chosen when the OK button was clicked is transferred
to a designated drive.
Fig.9.2-16 Transfer dialog
Drive: This switches the transferring drive of the image.

When “▼” is clicked, recording devices to which images
can be transferred are displayed.
File Convert:
With this function it is possible to transfer data
by converting them into other formats than BMP and
AVI. For that click “ □ ”, then below mentioned
converting formats column is displayed.
From BMP to: TIFF format or JPEG format is selectable other
than BMP format. In case of TIFF format 2 kinds
of data compressing methods, NON (no-compression)
or Pack Bitz are selectable.
From AVI to: AVI [No compression] and AVI (Compression)
[Microsoft Video 1 system] can be chosen.
Browse on Net: This can be operated when the optionally available
Net Card Interface unit EZU-Pi2 is loading. When
an image is temporarily to be transferred to the
network server, the destination to be transferred
can be set by selecting this button.
9 - 15 Q1E-EA0466
9.2.6 Retrieve of Images
If thumbnail images are selected in Filing dialog and click [Retrieve]
button, it will be in an image retrieve state.
If a thumbnail picture is chosen by Filing dialog and the [Retrieve]

button is clicked, it will be in a Retrieve state.
(To return to Filing dialog, select F4 Home menu of Function menu
(page 1)).
In case a single image is selected and in case multi images are selected
at the same time, the display style and function menu display are
different respectively.
Single image selected: 1-image display
2~4 images selected : 4-image display
5~9 images selected : 9-image display
Selected of 10 or more images: 16-image display.
1-image 4-image
9-image 16-image
Fig. 9.2-17 Multi-image display
9 - 16 Q1E-EA0466
(1) Function menu
(Page 1)
a) 4~16-image display
b) 1-image display
(Page 2)
a) F1 Slide Show off selection
b) F1 Slide Show on selection
Fig. 9.2-18 Function menu
(a) Review
Select F1 in Page 1 of a function menu
This is started only when live image file is selected. Live

file is reviewed.
When the review of live images suspended, it is possible to
select the track ball priority of mark. Then it is possible
to retrieve images either in feed-frame-forward or –backward
mode by operating the track ball right- or leftward, or by
key operation.
Select F2(speed) in page 2 of a function menu to change Review

speed.
NOTICE In the case frame rate is high in review of images,

some error in review speed may be caused due to
CPU power.
The error of review speed may also be caused by
live image of 200 or more frames in color image
and 600 or more frame in B/W image.
9 - 17 Q1E-EA0466
(b) To Mulit/To Single(Selection in display image mode)
Multi image display can be changed to single image display.

When multi images are selected and retrieved, select one image
with yellow frame, after that by pushing the toggle switch,

2
the display turns to a single image display.

In the single image display in multi images selection mode
mark is displayed at upper right position of display, then
the single image displayed can be changed to another one by
operating the track ball right-or-leftward.
(c) Page shift

In single image display in case of

multi images selection it is
1step Backward 1step Forward
possible to change the image for
3 3 display to another one by operating
F3. When the toggle switch is up,
the frame is reversed. When it is
down, the frame is forwarded and it
1step Backward 1step Forward is renewed to next image. Also, it
is possible to reverse or renew the
image by the trackball or , on
the alphanumeric keyboard.
1step Backward 1step Forward Furthermore, images that could not
Fig 9.2-19 Page Shift displayed in the time of multi image
display can be displayed with this
Page shift.
(d) Home menu
This is to return to Filing dialog.
9 - 18 Q1E-EA0466
(e) Division
4~16-image display : Select F5 in Page 1 of a function menu
1- image display : Select F5 in Page 2 of a function menu
A live image is divided into multiple freeze images and displayed.

Division becomes effective only when live image is chosen.
Fig. 9.2-20 Division display of live image
(f) Images
16 image displays, 9 image displays, and 4 image displays are

switched.
6 6
Fig. 9.2-21 Select of display
9 - 19 Q1E-EA0466
(g) Transfer
This is to transfer images selected with a yellow frame to

recording device outside of the Hard Disk (ref. to 9.2.5
Transfer).
(h) Slide show(Automatic changing function of image display)

In single image display in multi image selection mode, a display

images can be changed to another one at intervals of fixed time.
Select F2(update) in page 2 of a function menu to change update
time.
(i) Select start/Select end

1-image display : Select F3/F4 in Page 2 of a function menu
It is the function to review only the

required portion of live image.
Display live image as single image

display. By operating the trackball
the frame can be switched in order
to search the necessary one.
3 4
Click the first frame (Start frame)

1
of necessary frames with toggle.

3
Fig. 9.2.-22 Click the last frames (End frame) of

Select Start/Select End
necessary frames with toggle.
4
9 - 20 Q1E-EA0466
With F1 (Review) in page 1 in function menu only the designated section
is repeatedly replayed.
NOTICE
• Either Start or End can be selected first for setting order.
• It is impossible to select the setting such that Start frame comes
after the End frame.
• It is also impossible to select the same frame as Start and End
image.
9 - 21 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Measurement with retrieved images
In a single image display mode it is possible to perform various
kinds of measurement.
(a) Measuring method
Performing the measurement
[1] Start the measurement as done in the case of routine examination.
CAUTION
Under some conditions setups as mentioned below are required or
there are items as mentioned below can not be implemented.
1) Mode registration of images for retrieve (Mode Adj.)
Under below mentioned cases menu as shown in item 10.2.2 is
displayed at starting time of measurement by which it may be
required to register the mode of retrieved images. Regarding
the registration method refer to item 10.2.2.
• A case where images written with other scanners are to be
retrieved.
• A case where images written by a deleted measurement region
is to be retrieved.
• A case where images saved in EUB-6000 is to be retrieved.
2) Measurements unable to perform on retrieved images
It is impossible to perform following measurements: D-Profile,
CFM-Velo and Histogram
3) Exceptional items which are unable to perform the calculation.
･ In VASC1 and VASC2 measurements it is impossible to calculate
items of %W (%WINDOWS) and Sys-W(SYSTOLIC WINDOWS).
･ Auto-trace of Doppler waveform in Doppler measurement cannot
be executed.
[2] In performing the measurement on Doppler images set 0m/s line

and Doppler incident angle as required. Regarding the setting method
refer to item 10.2.1(5)(6).
(b) Mode registration of images for retrieve

Regarding the registration method refer to item 10.2.2.
NOTICE: Entered mode information is cleared in below mentioned

cases.
• A case where the image displayed is to be changed.
• A case where the mode is switched from a single image display
to multi image display.
9 - 22 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Other functions
(a) Re-write function for retrieve image

Measurement is made on the retrieved image and graphic data such
as comments are input, and then to transfer the image with graphic
data to MO or others, press [S-WRITE] key for a single image display.
However, because the image is transferred to the preset address
(for setting procedures refer to 9.2.2), if the transferring
destination is to be temporarily changed, change it by selecting
Main Menu → Image Filing… (refer to subsection 9.2.3).
(b) Simultaneous review function of two or more live images

In the case two or more live images are reviewed by Retrieved function,
double click on the same image to select all imaged in image selection
operation (with all images selected, all images are displayed in
a blue frame). And then, by selecting [Review] on the Function menu,
two or more live images are simultaneously reviewed.
NOTICE: Under some conditions a live image review may be delayed. The
review speed of live image may become slow depending on
conditions.
In this case, please Review after copying live image to a merge
folder.
9.2.7 Edit of image file: Merged Folder
9 - 23 Q1E-EA0466
There is an item “Merged Folder” among the selection tree of Drive
in Filing window. This is a recording area to retreat temporarily
image data for editing.
Fig. 9.2-23 Merged Folder
(1) Data record

In order to record data in the Merged Folder select the image in
the Filing dialog and click [Merge] button.
(2) Data delete

Select the image in the Filing dialog and click [Delete] button.
(3) Example of data edit

There is a case that a series of image of a patient was recorded
in MO in the past and other images of the same patient have been
obtained and recorded in the Hard Disk in this month.
If necessary, such image data can be recorded in total in MO exclusive
for that patient.
In this case all the data are once transferred to the Merged Folder.
After that total data of that patient are recorded in a single
or multiple MO(s).
ＭＯ１ Hard Disk

⋮
ＭＯｎ Patient
Merged Folder
Fig. 9.2-24 Example of Editing Data
9 - 24 Q1E-EA0466
(4) Ending display
Merged Folder can be closed by clicking Close button, but if there
left data, even a single image, in the Folder, a window for
confirmation as shown below is displayed.
Fig. 9.2-25 Confirmation message of image file delete
In case you want to leave data in the Folder, click No button.

If you want to delete data in the Folder, click Yes button.
NOTICE: If ON/STAND BY switch is put off while displaying a

retrieval image out of image file, an error massage may
be displayed.
After a while the dialogue is automatically closed and
the power is shut off normally.
9 - 25 Q1E-EA0466
9.3 Cine memory mode
9.3.1 Record of image
(l) Recording into Cine memory

Images displayed on the monitor are always recorded in Cine memory
without a special designation. In case imaging conditions like
display depth and display angle are changed, information in the
memory are once cleared off and restarts the recording under changed
conditions. Therefore, contents of record are always image
information under the same conditions. When FREEZE key is put ON,
the record is interrupted.
(2) Image quantity in recording
Image quantity to be recorded in the memory is different according
to the display angle (display width).
When the display angle becomes narrower, the quantity of record
increases.
Also when different probe is used, the quantity of record is
different.
Image memory area

Display angle: Wide
Display angle: Narrow
Fig. 9.3.1-1 Difference in recording quantity
9 - 26 Q1E-EA0466
9.3.2 Memory capacity setting
According to the purpose, you can switch the cine memory division ratio
in equipment.
(1) No memory split mode

You can record one B mode image
continuously for a long time.
According to the purpose, you can switch
the cine memory division ratio in
equipment.
(2) B:B_Split mode

You can record two independent B mode
images in divided cine memory.
L Freeze R Freeze
To select no memory split mode, don’t check
“B:B_Split” in Main Menu.
To select B:B split mode, check “B:B_Split”
in Main Menu.
Fig.9.3.2-1 B:B_Split
When a picture is recorded on the conditions from which the

following differs at the time of B:B_Split mode, it becomes
impossible to review the cine memory image of the direction which
is not chosen.
- When the scan modes (CFM mode / B/W mode) differ.
- When the sweep speeds of ECG differ.
- When the probes differ.
- When applications differ.
The images recorded on the cine memory is cleared when it switches

to the following modes in B:B_Split mode
- When it switches to Dual CFM mode.
- When it switches to the B/* mode (B/M, B/PW, etc.).
9 - 27 Q1E-EA0466
(3) B:M/D_Split mode
Cine memory incorporated in the equipment can

be split into two divisions, one for B-mode
image (to be displayed left side) and another
for M/D-mode image (to be displayed right
side). The occupying capacity ratio of each
division is variable so that if necessary it
is possible to record images of intended mode
for longer time than another mode.
Fig.9.3.2-2 By B:D/D Split of Image Memory menu in Main

B:M/D plit Menu it is possible to switch over the memory
respectively. (In case M/D mode is not
selected and also in case Freeze on, it is
impossible to select this function in
Main Menu.)
• B:M/D=1:0 Only B-mode image is recorded

(No memory split mode).
• B:M/D=3:1 B-mode image is recorded for relatively long time.
In replay time
• B:M/D=1:1 Ratio between B-mode image and M/D-mode image is
equal.
• B:M/D=3:1 M/D-mode image is recorded for relatively long
time.
• B:M/D=0:1 Only M/D-mode image is recorded
(No memory split mode).
Only the images of the same conditions is recorded on cine memory.

Therefore, keep in mind that cine memory will be cleared if record
conditions, such as display mode and depth, are switched.
9 - 28 Q1E-EA0466
9.3.3 Continuous record mode and continuous record of heart beat automatic
detection mode
Continuous replay mode : In case of regular image record (ECG wave

not displayed) it is possible to replay
continuously all the frame in the Cine
memory with continuous record mode.
Continuous replay and hear beat automatic detection mode:

In case ECG wave is displayed in the image,
the replay mode is automatically changed
to Continuous reply and heart beat
detection mode.
In this case the first and the last R-wave
time phase frame are automatically
detected so that well continued images
between R-waves can be replayed.
NOTICE:
Even if ECG wave is displayed, there may be a case that R wave on
ECG wave is not recognized by the scanner. In that case the mode
is changed to the continuous record mode. For the correct recognition
of the R wave adjust the shape of ECG wave and so on.
9.3.4 Image replay
At the time FREEZE
is pushed, the mode enters to the image replay
mode. In the replay time, it is possible to control the display of

recorded image as mentioned below.
(1) Continuous loop replay
When “Review” is selected by toggle switch, images in the cine

1
memory are displayed repeatedly.

At this time, if it is in the continuous replay mode, all the images
in the memory are replayed in loop, and if it is in the continuous
replay of heart beat automatic detection mode, only images in which
the first R wave and the last R wave are connected are replayed in
loop.
9 - 29 Q1E-EA0466
Replay speed can be changed with
“ SPEED (SPD)” by selecting 2
toggle switch. Also, the replay

2 speed is displayed at lower right
corner of the image.
Replay speed
Fig. 9.3.4-1 Replay speed
When toggle switch is pushed again, the continuous replay of

1
loop is interrupted.
(2) Replay by feeding the frame forward or backward

In a normal freezing condition (no continuous loop replay selected),
the recorded image can be advanced or reversed one frame by one frame
by operating the trackball left or right, or , keys.
In case the image with ECG wave display is recorded (continuous record
of heart beat automatic detection mode), a time phase bar showing
the time phase at recording time is displayed on the ECG wave. It
can be a reference for image observation.
9 - 30 Q1E-EA0466
The caution of relationship between Image and time phase bar on ECG.
Hitachi ultrasound scanner display the time phase bar on ECG to

identify the time phase of image from cine memory.
The each time phase bar is displayed at each imaging start time.(Refer
to Fig.9.3.4-2)
And general ultrasound scanner system needs “1/Frame rate (sec)”
to acquire a ultrasound image.
Therefore time phase of image No.1 is area which is indicate as heavy
line.
Also set the sweeping speed of ECG waveform as fast as possible.

If the speed is too slow, there may be a case that a positional accuracy
of time phase bar of cine memory can not be kept.
Fig. 9.3.4-2
(3) Display of image number

When the image replay speed is “0” speed (Freeze condition), the
number of image is displayed. The number is fit in the order of
record of B-mode image into the image memory. When the recording
is finished, the last image is fit with the largest number. It can
be a reference for image observation. Image number display/no
display is set either by Main Menu or Application.
9 - 31 Q1E-EA0466
9.3.5 Color Hold function
Color Hold function is to display a simulated angiographic image.

It is performed by selecting multiple CFM-B image at discretion and
overlaying CFM parts of them. With this function not only the running
situation of blood vessels and, but also the direction of blood flow
can be observed.
(1) Preparation for Color Hold mode

Start the CFM and record necessary
images in the cine memory.
CFI CFA
FREEZE Push button and depict CFM-mode

CFI CFA
image. Take in image data into the cine
memory and push FREEZE
key to freeze the
image.
Fig. 9.3.5-1 Preparation
for Color Hold mode
(2) Start of Color Hold mode
At first push MAIN

MENU to open Main Menu and open Image Mem. in it.
Click Color Hold, then checking [□] mark to start the Color Hold
mode.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 9.3.5-2 Start Fig. 9.3.5-3 Starting image

of Color Hold mode of Color Hold mode
9 - 32 Q1E-EA0466
At this time the image turns automatically to 2-image display.
At left side an overlaying image is displayed and at right side
a cine angiographic image is displayed.
MULTI
Also, by pushing SINGLE

it is possible to display a single image of
left side image (overlaid image).
You cannot use Color Hold mode in B:B_Split mode.

To use Color Hold mode, select no memory split mode,refer to 9.3.2.
(3) Selection of overlaying images

The image at right side is Cine memory
image. Select by the trackball images
for overlaying and push ENTER, then on
the left side image the right side image
is overlaid and displayed.
To cancel the overlay designation done

ENTER
just before push UNDO key.
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
In order to obtain a clear Color Hold

ENTER
image repeat several times the
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
overlaying operation.
ENTER
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
Fig. 9.3.5-4 Overlaying Images
(4) End of Color Hold mode
By pushing MAIN
MENU open again the menu, then release Color Hold mode
CLEAR
or return to the normal display by pushing Key.
Also it is possible to end Color Hold mode by releasing Freeze with

FREEZE
key.
9 - 33 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 10 VCR (option)
10.1 Remote control of VCR

The VCR connected to the scanner unit can be remotely controlled
from the operation panel of the scanner unit.
To record and review CFM image, an encoder/decoder unit is required.
10.1.1 Image recording
REC REC
Pressing or key starts image recording.*1)
REC REC
Pressing or key again pauses image recording.*1)
Every time this key is pressed, starting and pausing image

recording are alternately selected.
When the pause status of image recording remains more than the
specified period, the image recording status is automatically
canceled.
To forcibly cancel the image recording status, press the stop key
on the VCR unit.
REC REC
By pressing or key, the data necessary for playback
measurement on image reviewed from VCR are recorded together

with the image on tape.*1)
If the VCR is controlled for image recording on the control panel
of the VCR, these data are not recorded on tape.
Be sure to control the image recording operation from the keyboard
panel of the scanner.
NOTICE: When a remote control cable is not used, perform the
recording operation at VCR side.
REC REC
*1) Assignment of or keys can be changed by
Print/REC key setting menu.
10.1.2 Selection of VCR/EXT mode and remote control of VCR
VCR
Using ORIG key located at the left center of the main keyboard,
VCR-mode or ORIG-mode can be selected.

When ORIG-mode is selected, the key is lit dim and ultrasound
image is displayed.
10 - 1 Q1E-EA0466
(1) VCR REVIEW mode
VCR
By pressing ORIG in ORIG-mode, VCR REVIEW mode is selected and
the key is lit clearly.

In this VCR-mode, the toggle switches for the following FUNCTION
menu can be used to remotely control VCR.
STOP PREWIND • REVIEW QUICK • PAUSE

REWIND FORWARD
RESEARCH RESEARCH
Fig.10.1.2-1 PAUSE OFF
By using the remote controller supplied together with the VCR,

instant access to a specific image is possible. For detailed
operation procedures, refer to Instruction Manual of the VCR.
(2) ORIG-mode: Normal image display
VCR
By pressing ORIG key after the operation of (1) VCR REVIEW
mode, operation mode returns to the mode to display normal

ultrasound image. The key lights up dim, and "ORG" is temporarily
displayed at the center of the screen, then the ORIG-mode is
selected.
10 - 2 Q1E-EA0466
CAUTION
• During pause or review at slow speed, body mark and
physiological signal, if displayed, may appear
interrupted, however, this is not a sign of equipment
malfunction.
• Color recording in CFM mode only. In other mode,
limited to B/W recording because to keep the
resolution of the image.
• When display of VCR review image is paused by remote
control from the operation panel of the scanner unit,
some response delay until the image comes to still
display may be produced. In case a faster response
is required, do pause operation using the remote
controller supplied with VCR unit.
If much faster response is required, it is recommended
to review VCR image at slow speed and pause image
display.
Note that Doppler sound in normal examination is not
generated when the VCR power switch is turned off.
• REC status and REC-PAUSE status may not agree each
other between display on the screen and VCR panel.
Therefore, confirm the VCR operation status referring
to the status on the VCR panel.
• There may be cases where the image being displayed
on the monitor is distorted when the scanner unit
is set to VCR Replay mode with the VCR not set to
Replay mode, but it is not a trouble.
• The ENDEXAM Key does not work during VCR playback.
10 - 3 Q1E-EA0466
10.2 Measurement on review image
Various measurements can be carried out on review image from VCR.
NOTICE:Note that measurement may not be carried out depending on
type of VCR.
10.2.1 Measurement procedure
(1) Review of VCR image
VCR
Pressing ORIG key sets VCR REVIEW mode.
(2) Image freeze ▲
By pressing " " of the toggle switch, VCR image can be

3
reviewed.
Using " " of the toggle switch or the remote controller
5
of the VCR, freeze the image to be measured.

(3) Selection of NEW PATIENT.
VCR
Even if VCR REVIEW mode is selected by using ORIG key, measured
data such as report function are saved.
When patient ID to be measured is changed on VCR image, press
Patient key to clear the measurement data.
(4) Execution of measurement

(a) Carry out measurements in the same procedures as those in
usual examination.
10 - 4 Q1E-EA0466
CAUTION
1) In the following cases, a menu as shown in Fig. 10.2.2-1
is displayed on the right of the screen when the
measurement function is started and registration of
VCR REVIEW image display mode is required.
For registration procedure, refer to Paragraph 10.2.2
Registration of VCR review image mode.
• No data for Measurements has been written on image
• Data codes cannot be read due to the reasons such
as unstable image or noise in image.
2) D-Profile,CFM-Velo and Histgram measurements cannot
be executed.
3) %W (%WINDOW) and Sys-W (SYSTOLIC WINDOW) among the
measurement items in Vasc1 and Vasc2 measurements
cannot be calculated.
･ Auto-trace of Doppler waveform in Doppler
measurement cannot be executed.
4) When you want to replay images stored in VCR for
performing any measurement without using a remote
control cable, set the base line and angle of Doppler
image without fail after starting the measurement.
(b) When measurement is made on Doppler-mode image, set a base

line and Doppler incident angle following the procedures (5)
and (6).
(c) Carry out measurement in the same procedure as that for usual
examination.
10 - 5 Q1E-EA0466
(5) Adjustment of baseline (only for Doppler-mode)
Doppler-mode When the measurement function is started
image
on the Doppler-mode image screen, a base
SHIFT LINE
line is displayed on the Doppler-mode
image. Operating the BASELINE control,
overlap the displayed base line on the
base line of the Doppler waveform in the
Base line in VCR review image by using .

BASELINE
replay image
Base line displayed on

VCR replay image.
Fig.10.2.1-1 Setting base line
(6) Adjustment of Doppler entry angle

(only for Doppler-mode)
In measurement on Doppler-mode image, if
Doppler sampling point
Doppler entry angle has not been set on
the review image or information data have
not been written in the image, the Doppler
entry angle is recognized as 0°.
If setting Doppler entry angle is
necessary, do it following the next steps.
Caliper “ + “
Fig.10.2.1-2 Adjustment of
Doppler entry angle
[In B/PW, B/M/PW and B/CW-mode display]
(a) Start the measurement function.
(b) Turning displays a message "Set angle bar in the flow
direction ", and the "+" mark appears on the B-mode image.
Operating the trackball, move the "+" mark to the center of
the Doppler sampling point and press ENTER key.
(c)Then, a message "Set angle bar in the flow direction" is
10 - 6 Q1E-EA0466
Beam Line Alignment Bar displayed and a bar for setting a beam line
is displayed. Operating the ANGLE ROTATION
control, set the beam line setting bar in the
direction of the Doppler beam line and press
ENTER key.
(d) Finally, "Set angle bar in the flow direction"

Fig.10.2.1-3 message is displayed and the entry angle
Operating the ANGLE measurement bar is displayed. Operating the
ROTATION control ANGLE ROTATION control, set the entry angle
measurement bar in the blood flow direction.
[In PW, M/PW and CW-mode display]
Calibration Angle (a) Start the measurement function.

Readout
(b) Turning displays "θ: 0°" on the right
bottom of the screen.

Operating the ANGLE ROTATION control, set the
displayed θ value to the θ value of the VCR
θ : 0° review image.
θ : 30°
Incidence Angle for

Reproduced Image
Fig.10.2.1-4
Operating the ANGLE
ROTATION control
10 - 7 Q1E-EA0466
10.2.2 Registration of review image mode
If information data in the review image cannot be accurately
recognized when the measurement function is started, the mode
must be registered before starting the measurement. According
to the menu displayed on the center of the screen, enter each
mode data. Finally, click the OK button.
MAIN
MENU
Fig.10.2.2-1 Mode Adjust
NOTICE:
The entered mode data is cleared when the following operation
is done:
In case the VCR is connected:
• When PAUSE status is switched off.
10 - 8 Q1E-EA0466
(1) Entry of display mode (Mode)
In case of setting Mode, click “▼”
in Mode item and select a correct Mode
from displayed menu, then push
ENTER key.
POSI／SIZE
Fig.10.2.2-2 Mode setting
(2) Entry of Split type(Split)
In case of setting Image splitting

method, click “▼” in Split item and
select a correct splitting method,
Fig.10.2.2-3
Split setting then push ENTER key. (Selectable
POSI／SIZE
in B/M,B/PW, B/CW, or B/M/PW mode)
(3) Entry of sweep speed (Sweep Speed)

In case of setting Sweep speed, click
“▼” in Sweep Speed item and select
a correct Sweep Speed, then push
ENTER key. (Refer to Table 10.1)
Fig.10.2.2-4 POSI／SIZE
Sweep Speed setting (Selectable in

M,PW,CW,M/PW,B/M,B/PW,B/CW, or
B/M/PW mode)
10 - 9 Q1E-EA0466
Table 10.1 VCR Review Image and Sweep Speed
Example of VCR review image Sweep

Speed
10 - 10 Q1E-EA0466
(4)Entry of repetitive frequency (PRF)
In case of setting PRF, click “▼” in
PRF item and select a correct PRF,
then push ENTER key. (Selectable

POSI／SIZE
in PW,CW,B/PW,M/PW,B/CW, or B/M/PW
mode)
Fig.10.2.2-5 PRF setting
(5)Entry REF
In case of setting REF, click “▼” in
REF item and select a correct REF,
then push ENTER
key. (Selectable in
POSI／SIZE
PW,CW,B/PW,B/CW,M/PW or B/M/PW mode)
Fig.10.2.2-6
REF setting
(6)Entry of Doppler-image display polarity (POLARITY)
In case of setting Polarity of Doppler,

click “▼” in Polarity item and select
a correct Polarity, then
Fig.10.2.2-7
push ENTER
key. (Selectable in
Polarity setting POSI／SIZE
PW,CW,B/PW,B/CW, M/PW or B/M/PW
mode)
10 - 11 Q1E-EA0466
Direction of POSITIVE or NEGATIVE can be known from the sign
of the maximum detectable flow velocity display shown at the
left edge of the VCR review Doppler-image.
When the upper end is + and the lower end is -, the polarity
is POSITIVE, while the opposite polarity is NEGATIVE.
(7)Entry of unit of flow velocity (UNIT)

In case of setting DopplerUnit, click
“▼” in Doppler Unit item and select
a correct Unit, then push
Fig.10.2.2-8 ENTER
key. (Selectable in
Doppler Unit setting POSI／SIZE
PW,CW,B/PW,M/PW or B/M/PW mode)
NOTICE: In case the adjustment of Doppler entry angle has

been made, "kHz" is not displayed on the menu.
(8)Entry of Doppler-image display mode (DOP. EXPAND)

In case of setting Doppler Expand,
click “▼” in doppler Expand item and
select a correct method, then push
ENTER
key. (Selectable in
POSI／SIZE
Fig.10.2.2-9 PW,CW,B/PW,M/PW or B/M/PW mode)
Doppler Expand
setting
(9)Combine
Fig.10.2.2-10
10 - 12 Q1E-EA0466
(9)Entry of Annotation Region
In replay mode of VCR, Character and Annotation can be input similar
to the usual examination. For detail refer to Paragraph 6.1
and 6.2.
Clicking the “▼” of the Annotation

Region index、Opened sub-window.
Read the display region of image, and
select the region to read the display.
Then, press ENTER
.
POSI／SIZE
Fig.10.2.2-10
Annotation Region
setting
(10)Entry of Measurement Region

Clicking the “▼” of the Measurement
Region index、Opened sub-window.
Read the display region of image, and
Fig.10.2.2-11 select the region to read the display.
Annotation Region Then, press ENTER .
setting POSI／SIZE
10 - 13 Q1E-EA0466
(11)Entry of display depth (RANGE)
When letters of “Adjust” on the button
(for Range R/U or Range L/D )are
written clearly , input the depth
range of the VCR image in the following
procedures.
1 Click ADJUST button on the Mode
Adjust window by operating the
trackball, and Ruler window are
opened.
2 Input the base length between two
points. Bring the yellow cursor to
the first point, and press ENTER
key. And once again the same
action to the second point. (In
this example, two points are based
Fig.12.2.2-12 Setting RANGE-1
on the scale of right side on VCR
image).
3 The index of the bottom of the Ruler

window changes to white (able to
input number). In this case, the
distance between two points are
100mm. Bring it to the second point
and input “100” (distance value of
two points)to the index.
4 Press Register button, return to
Mode adjust window, and displayed
the distance below the Adjust
button.
Fig.12.2.2-13 Setting RANGE-2
10 - 14 Q1E-EA0466
10.2.3 Mode adjustment function
Greatest attention has been paid to recognition of information
data and not to make incorrect recognition by applying the special
calculation. However, there may be a case that the scanner unit
takes in erroneous information data due to incidental noise or
deterioration of the tape quality. The MODE ADJUST is the function
to correct such case.
Press MAIN
MENU key to display MAIN MENU, and operating the trackball
move the cursor to "MODE ADJ.". Then, press ENTER key.

The menu for registration of display mode is displayed at the
right side of the VCR review image.
Enter the VCR review image information in accordance with
“10.2.2 Registration of review image mode”.
10.2.4 Entering the comment

In VCR playback mode , entering the comment is available.
(Refer to 6.1)
10-15 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 11 Measuring Functions
11.1 Outline
Table 11.1-1 Summarizes the measuring functions of this system.
Table 11.1-1 Measuring Functions of this equipment (1/4)
Display
Category Type USE Meaning
Mode
Basic ALL Measuring distance between two points.
B
Measure- APPLICATION
ments
ALL Measuring depth difference between two
CALIP M
APPLICATION points, time, and velocity (slope).
ALL Measuring flow velocity at caliper cursor.

D
APPLICATION
ALL Measuring areas and circumferential lengths by

B
APPLICATION tracing.
ALL Measuring the area and circumferential length

TRACE M APPLICATION of a circle with the distance between two points
as its diameter.
ALL Measuring mean flow velocity by tracing

D
APPLICATION Doppler waveforms.
ALL Measuring areas and circumferential lengths by

Area-E B
APPLICATION means of ellipse approximation.
Measuring volumes by area-length method,

ALL
Volume B,M ellipse approximation method, and biplane
APPLICATION
method.
Only Measuring by adding microvolume sliced

SVolume B ABDOMINAL evenly.
AND OTHERS
Velocity Measuring flow velocity and pressure gradient.

D Only CARDIAC
(Velo.)
Acceleration ALL Measuring flow acceleration.

D
(Accel.) APPLICATION
Measuring the instantaneous mean flow

ALL velocity, %-WINDOW, etc. of a Doppler
D-Profile D
APPLICATION waveform at a user-selected point along the
time axis.
11-1 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.1-1 Continued (2/4)
Display
Mode
Basic ALL Calculating distance ratio.
Ratio-Dis B,M
Measure- APPLICATION
ments
ALL Calculating area ratio.
Ratio-Area B
APPLICATION
ALL Calculating time ratio.

Ratio-Time M,D
APPLICATION
ALL Calculating velocity ratio.

Ratio-Velo. D
APPLICATION
ALL Calculating average flow velocity.

V Ave. D
APPLICATION
CFM-B, ALL Measuring CFM Flow velocity.

CFM-Velo.
M APPLICATION
PHT D Only CARDIAC Measuring pressure half-time (PHT).
ALL Measuring heart rate.

HR M,D
APPLICATION
Only Histogram measurements.

Histogram B VASCULAR
Time M,D Only CARDIAC Time interval measurement
Decel. D Only CARDIAC Measurement of blood flow deceleration
Only CARDIAC Measurement of change of pressure difference

dP/dt D
over time
Cross-sect Only Calculating %STENOSIS from area ratio.

ional %Steno B VASCULAR
Image (Max – Min) / Max×100[%]
Measure- Cross-sectional Image Measurement
ments B(M)-LV/Ao B, M Only CARDIAC
M-Mode LV M Only CARDIAC Measuring left ventricle in M-mode.

Schemas
LV-Gibson *3 M Only CARDIAC Measuring left ventricle by GIBSON
LV-Pombo *3 M Only CARDIAC Measuring left ventricle by POMBO
MV M Only CARDIAC Measuring mitral valve in M-mode.
Ao M Only CARDIAC Measuring aortic valve in M-mode.
PV M Only CARDIAC Measuring pulmonary valve in M-mode.
TV M Only CARDIAC Measuring tricuspid valve in M-mode.
11-2 Q1E-EA0466
Display
Mode
Doppler Only CARDIAC Measuring Doppler of left ventricular outflow
LVOT D+B
Measure- tract.
ments
Only CARDIAC Measuring Doppler of left ventricular inflow
LV inflow D+B
tract.
Only CARDIAC Measuring Doppler of right ventricular outflow

RVOT D+B
tract.
Only CARDIAC Measuring Doppler of right ventricular inflow

RV inflow D+B
tract.
ALL Measuring vascular Doppler.

Vasc1 D+B
APPLICATION
ALL Measuring vascular Doppler.

Vasc2 D+B
APPLICATION
AV-Area D+B Only CARDIAC Measurement of area of aortic valve port
Qp/Qs D+B Only CARDIAC Pulmonary flow / Systemic flow
Left B(M)-EF B,M Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by TEICHHOLZ's rule.

Ventri-cula
r Cardiac B(M)-EF Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by GIBSON's rule.
B,M
Function Gibson *3
Measure-
B(M)-EF Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by POMBO's rule.
ments B,M
Pombo *3
Area-Length *3 B Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by area-length method.
Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by biplane ellipse

BI-Plane *3 B
approximation method.
Simpson *3 B Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by SIMPSON's rule.
Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by bullet approximation

Bullet *3 B
method.
Only CARDIAC Volume measurement by dual cross section

M.Simpson B
cylindrical approximation
MV Regurg D+ CFM-B Only CARDIAC Regurgitant volume of mitral valve
TV Regurg D+ CFM-B Only CARDIAC Regurgitant volume of tricuspid valve
Obstetric Only Obstetrical Measurement Package

Measure- OB-STD B,M,D ABDOMINAL (Standard)
ments AND OTHERS
Only Obstetrical Measurement Package

OB-Todai *3 B,M,D ABDOMINAL (Todai)
AND OTHERS

OB-OsakaU *3 B,M,D ABDOMINAL (OsakaU)
AND OTHERS

OB-JSUM B,M,D ABDOMINAL (Plan of Japan’s standard)
AND OTHERS
11-3 Q1E-EA0466
Display
Mode
OTHERS Only Angle measurements

Angle B ABDOMINAL
AND OTHERS
Only Volume measurement, etc. such as bladder

Urology B ABDOMINAL and prostate
AND OTHERS
Only Volume measuerment, etc. such as uterus or

Gynecology B,D ABDOMINAL ovary.
AND OTHERS
Only Volume measuerment, etc. such as follicular.

Follicular B,D ABDOMINAL
AND OTHERS
Only Measuring a level of blood vessel stenosis.

L(R)-Carotid B,D VASCULAR
Only Measuring the blood flow velocity.

L(R)-Leg A. D VASCULAR
Only Measuring the blood flow velocity.

L(R)-Arm A. D VASCULAR
NOTICE:1)All measurements, except CALIP measurement, can be conducted

only when the FREEZE function is switched on.
2)The items possible to calculate are limited in accordance
with inspection mode and application.
3)*3; this measurement can not be used in the factory shipment.
In case of need, by using [Additional Settings] of measurement
export/import function, import or replace the measurement.
Refer to item 11.6.6 Measurement Export/Import function.
11-4 Q1E-EA0466
11.2 Starting up Measurements
CALIP TRACE
〔1〕 , Key
(1) These keys are exclusively used for starting up the following
two basic measurements in the current display mode:
CALIP
: Starts up the CALIP measurement only.
TRACE
: Starts up the TRACE measurement only.
〔2〕 MEAS MENU

.
1 Key
This key is used to select the types of measurements other than
the above two, as follows:
MEAS MENU
.
(1) Press 1 , displaying the first page of the measurement menu
in the left-hand area of the screen.
Measurement
Menu
Cursor
Fig.11.2-1 Measurement Menu
The menu will show only the names of the measurements that
can be executed in the current image presentation mode.
Move the cursor to the name of the measurement you wish to
initiate.
If the current page of the menu does not show the name of the
desired measurement, select "OTHERS" by placing the cursor
on it and pressing. The next page (e.g. MEAS. (2/2)) of the
menu will show up with another list of measurement names.
(2) Press ENTER key, this will execute the measurement selected
at step (1).
11-5 Q1E-EA0466
11.3 Basic Procedures
11.3.1 Functions of Keys
(1)Operation Panel
The basic functions of the operating controls to be used in

measurement execution are as follows:
Track Ball: Moves the caliper cursors,
etc. on the image display.
UNDO ENTER ENTER Key: Determines the measuring

COLOR
POSI／SIZE points.
UNDO Key: Returns the measurement

status to the preceding
status.
Fig11.3.1-1 Trackball,Enter Key,and Undo Key
CLEAR
·························· Ends the current measurement and clears the
measurement display.
11-6 Q1E-EA0466
(2)Function Menu
Function Menu in Measurement mode
Menu for each Measurement：F2∼F3 Mesurement Function Keys：F5 ∼ F7
(1st Page)
(2nd page)
Fig11.3.1-2 Function Menu in Measurement mode
(1st Page)
F1 Scroll
Scroll the hiden Menu in Measurement
Result Frame up and down.
Text Lines
Not selectable if the whole of each
1
menu are displayed.
Measurement Result Frame
Fig. 11.3.1-3 Scroll
F2 ∼ F3 Menu for each Measurement

Some Measurements have EXTRA MENU (Others not).
F5 ∼ F7 Measurement Function Keys

Start the preset measurement function refer to 8.3.8 (2) in
Chapter8 Application.
11-7 Q1E-EA0466
(2nd page)
F1 Move Box
Move MRF(Measurement Result Frame)
to the other place in Monitor when
MRF is displayed above the
interesting area of US image.
MRF
(Measurment Result Frame) Pressing toggle switch, color
of MRF are changed yellow, and move
Fig.11.3.1-4 Move by trackball.
For every application it is possible
to move the position of MRF set just
after that application was selected.
NOTICE:
This function is effective in dual
displaying mode.
F2 Resize
Pressing toggle switch, color
of MRF are changed yellow, and moving
the bottom line up and down by
trackball.
For every application it is possible
to resize the size of MRF set just
after that application was selected.
NOTICE:
Fig.11.3.1-5 Resize
This function is effective in dual
displaying mode.
F3 User Default
This function is displayed only after selecting F1 Move Box or
F2 Resize.
Pressing toggle switch, this move MRF to the default

position and resize MRF to the default size
• At the starting time of Move: MRF is returned to the original
position which was registered for the current application.
• At the starting time of Resize: MRF is returned to the original
size which was registered for the current application.
This function is effective in dual displaying mode.
NOTICE: This function is effective in dual displaying mode.
11-8 Q1E-EA0466
F5 Hide Loci
Measured trace is not displayed. In this case MRF is displayed.
Pressing toggle switch once more、they are displayed again.
Fig.11.3.1-6 Hide Loci
F6 Meas. Save
Measurement result is saved in the external memory medium. (Refer
to Item 11.7.4.)
Not measurement result currently displayed on the screen but
the results which are preset to display on a report screen are
saved.
In case that storage capacity of drive for saving is insufficiency
or in case that media isn't inserted and so on, error message
will be shown.
In that case, please change media and press toggle switch,
6
again.
11-9 Q1E-EA0466
11.3.2 Measurement procedures
The measuring functions of this system consist of the following
combinations of basic measurements:
[1] Distance (B-mode method)

Distance (M-mode method)
[2] Area (Distance method)
Area (Trace method)
Area (Ellipse method)
Area (Rectangle method)
[3] Volume (Area-length method)

Volume (Ellipse method)
Volume (Biplane method)
[4] SVolume (SVolume method)
[5] Instantaneous Flow Velocity (Caliper method)
Instantaneous Flow Velocity (Bar method)
[6] Trace (MANUAL trace method)
Trace (AUTO trace method)
Trace (PLOT trace method)
11-10 Q1E-EA0466
[1] Distance
[1-1] B-Mode Method
To measure the distance (D) between two caliper cursor locations
on a B-mode image display, proceed as follows:
Fig. 11.3.2-1 Measuring Distance Using B-Mode Method
1 Using the track ball, move the caliper

cursor to the starting point of
measurement.
2 Press ENTER key. The first caliper

cursor will be fixed, and another Measured value is
shown also during
cursor (second caliper cursor) will cursor movement.
be displayed just on it. By turning
D
the track ball, move the second cursor
to the ending point of measurement.
Fixed
To correct the starting point, press Second caliper
UNDO key. This will allow you to cursor
return to step 1 . Fig. 11.3.2-2

Cursor Movememt
3 Press ENTER key. This will complete the distance measurement,

and display the measured value.
11-11 Q1E-EA0466
[1-2] M-Mode Method
The B-mode method described above can also be used to measure
the depth difference (D), time difference (T), and speed (S)
between two caliper cursor locations on an M-mode image.
Fig. 11.3.2-3 Measuring Distance Using M-Mode Method
[2] Area
[2-1] Distance Method

The distance method calculates the area (A) and circumference
(C) of a circularly-shaped region of interest by measuring
the diameter (distance) of the region. Fig. 11.3.2-4
illustrates this measurement concept.
A=π× D 2
2
A C = πD
D (Distance)
Fig. 11.3.2-4 Measuring Area Using Distance Method
11-12 Q1E-EA0466
To measure the diameter (distance), proceed as follows:
1 Using the track ball and ENTER
key, place the first caliper on the
starting point of measurement and the
second caliper on the ending point of
measurement, thereby determining the
diameter (distance) of the area.
Fig. 11.3.2-5
Calip Diameter
2 The diameter will be shown in a solid line, and the area

(A) and circumference (C) will be automatically calculated.
3 The values of "A" and "C" will be displayed, thus completing
the area measurement using the distance method.
[2-2] Trace Method

The trace method measures the area (A) and circumferential length
(C) of the region under examination in the following manner.
Fig. 11.3.2-6 Measuring Area Using Trace Method

measure-ment.
11-13 Q1E-EA0466
2 Press ENTER key. The cursor will be
fixed at the starting point. A second
cursor will appear just on it, which can
be moved by turning the track ball.
Trace the examination area by moving the
second cursor along its circumference.
To move " " backward, press UNDO key
repeated-ly.
3 Press ENTER key. This will form the
Trace
trace (locus) into a loop, thus
completing the area and circumferential
length measurements.
Fig. 11.3.2-7
Cursor Tracing
[2-3] Ellipse Method
The ellipse method will measure the area (A) and circumferential
length (C) of the region under examination by approximating
that region to an ellipse.
DS (short-axis diameter)
A= π 2 ×DL×DS
4
A C=π DL2+DS2
2
DL (long-axis diameter)
Fig. 11.3.2-8 Measuring Area Using Ellipse Method
1 Move the first cariper to starting point

of measurement by trackball.
2 Press the ENTER key to fix the first

cariper.
The second cariper and circle are

displayed.
And then ,move the second cariper
setting to the ellips.
Fig. 11.3.2-9 (1/2)
Pressing the UNDO key replace the Ellipse Method
11-14 Q1E-EA0466
first cariper.
3 In this method ,trackball has 3
functions such as (a),(b),and (c)
Every pressing the UNDO key,

the function of trackball rotate such
as (a)-(b)-(C)-(a).
(a) Moving the 1st cariper mark
By moving the 1st cariper
mark,operator can adjust the
ellips size. In this method,long
axis-short axis ratio is constant.
(b) Moving the 2nd cariper mark

By moving the 2nd cariper
mark,operator can adjust the
ellips size. In this method,long
axis-short axis ratio is constant.
(c) Changing the ellips size.
Rotating the track ball will cause

the circle to become elliptic,
expanding or contracting in the
short axis direction.
Fig. 11.3.2-9 (2/2)

Ellipse Method
4 Press 3
toggle switch or ENTER key. The ellipse will
be shown in a solid line. This completes the area and
circumferential measurements by the ellipse method.
[2-4] Rectangle Method

The rectangle method calculates the area (A) and circumference
11-15 Q1E-EA0466
(C) by approximating the area of interest to a rectangle.
D1
A D2 A=D1×D2
C=2× (D1+D2)
Fig. 11.3.2-10 Measuring Area Using Rectangle Method
11-16 Q1E-EA0466
To measure the area, proceed as follows:
1 Using the track ball, move the first
caliper to the starting point of
measurement.
2 Press ENTER key, fixing the caliper

there. A second caliper will then appear
on the first one. Turning the track
ball will move the second caliper,
forming a rectangle with the first
caliper position (fixed at step 1 ) and
second caliper position (currently
moving) as one pair of opposed corners.
Adjust the shape and size of the
rectangle so that it fits the area to
be measured.
If you wish to change the starting point, Fig. 11.3.2-11

press UNDO key, returning to step 1 . Rectangle Method
3 Press ENTER key. This will show the

rectangle in a solid line, and allow the
system to calculate the area (A) and
circumference (C). The values of "A" and
"C" will be displayed, thus completing
the area measurement using the rectangle
method.
11-17 Q1E-EA0466
[3] Volume
[3-1] Area-Length Method
The area-length method calculates an approximate volume (V)
of the region under examination by measuring the area (A) and
long axis (L) of that region.
8A2
V=
3πL
Axis of revolution
Fig. 11.3.2-12 Measuring Volume Using Area-Length Method
1 Using the track ball and ENTER key,

measure the area of the region as in the
trace measurement.
Upon completion of tracing, a caliper

cursor will be displayed at the starting
point of the trace (locus).
2 Measure the long axis (L: distance) of

the region traced. The volume will then
be calculated and displayed. This
completes the measurement.
Fig. 11.3.2-13
Area-Length
Method
11-18 Q1E-EA0466
[3-2] Ellipse Method
The ellipse method calculates an approximate volume of the region
under examination by measuring the area and long axis using
the formula described in "AREA-LENGTH Method," but the area
is to be measured by the ellipse method.
Follow the instructions given under "Ellipse Method" in "
〔2〕Area".
[3-3] Biplane Method
The biplane method calculates an approximate volume of the region
under examination by measuring the short and long axes (D1,
D2, and D3, crossing each other at right angles in Fig. 11-3-2-14)
of that region. This method will provide greater accuracy than
the area-length or ellipse method described earlier.
π
V= ×D1× D2 × D3
6
Fig. 11.3.2-14 Measuring Volume Using Biplane Method

1 Using the track ball and ENTER key, D2 being
measured
measure D1, D2, and D3 (in this
sequence) of the target region.
While performing the measurement,
you can tem-porarily switch the
FREEZE function off and show a more
suitable image. Fig. 11.3.2-15
2 Upon completion of the D3 measurement, Biplane Method
the volume will be calculated and
displayed. This completes the
measure-ment.
11-19 Q1E-EA0466
[4] SVolume Measurement
The SVolume method calculates an approximate volume (V) of
the region under examination by measuring the microvolume sliced
evenly. The microvolume is calculated using the sectional area
of the space sliced and slice width. The sectional area is
calculated using the same measuring procedure that is described
for the area measurement (trace method) in paragraph 11.3.2
N : Slice number (Max:15) (Max)

N = 1, 2, 3, 4, ･･････, 15
AREA (Slice section of N=4)

Target of
measurement
Slice section (N=4)

5 mm
Fig. 11.3.2-16 Measuring Volume using SVolume method
N-1
Volume = Σ (0.5 × ( (AREA k+1 ＋ AREA k) / 2) )

k=1
1) Measure the area of any slice section by using trackball and

ENTER key.
2) Changed the slice section by toggle switch .
2
3) Repeat 1) and 2) and measure the volume. Number of slice

section is Max. 15.
NOTICE: Add volume in every measurement for the slice section, if skipped
slice section, it become the same value before measured.
11-20 Q1E-EA0466
[5] Instantaneous Flow Velocity
Selecting Units of Flow Velocity Measurements
Flow velocity values (including instantaneous flow velocities)
measured can be expressed in both meters/ second (m/s) and
centimeters/second (cm/s). However, the flow velocity measured
under the following measurement categories can be expressed in
kHz as well as in m/s and cm/s.
• CALIP Measurement
The desired unit (m/s, cm/s, or kHz) can be selected on the DOP-MENU
or on CFM MENU, both accessible through the MAIN MENU. The unit
of the maximum detectable velocity value will also be changed
in accordance with the unit thus selected.
Table 11.3.2-1 lists the minimum increment (resolution) of each
unit that can be displayed.
Table 11.3.2-1
Minimum Display Increments for Units of

Values Measured in Flow Velocity
Measurements
Minimum Display
Unit Increment
Display in Terms m/s 0.01

of Velocity (V)
cm/s 0.1
Display in Terms kHz 0.01
of Frequency (F)
NOTICE: In CW mode, it can not be selected unit of kHz.
11-21 Q1E-EA0466
[5-1] Caliper Method
The caliper method measures flow velocity (V) and pressure
gradient (ΔP) on a Doppler-mode image by the use of the caliper
cursor.
(Pressure Gradient)
ΔP=4V2(mmHg)········ Modified Bernoulli Theorem
*1)
± *.**m/s
*1) : In SI Unit mmHg is expressed as kPa.

1kPa = 7.5mmHg.
Fig. 11.3.2-17 Measuring Instantaneous Flow Velocity

Using Caliper Method
1 By operating the track ball, place the

caliper cursor on the point to be
measured.
Fig. 11.3.2-18 Placing Caliper
2 Press ENTER key. The cursor will then be

fixed, and the measured results will be
displayed.
11-22 Q1E-EA0466
[6] Trace (Ratio-Area, Doppler measurement)
It can be selected 3 method Auto, Manual and Plot by toggle switch
in function menu F3.
NOTICE: It can not be used the function by measurement TRACE key.
[6-1] Manual Trace Method

The manual trace method measures mean flow velocities (Vm),
etc. by manually tracing a Doppler waveform with the track ball.

measurement.
2 Press ENTER key. A straight line will

be drawn perpendicularly to the 0 m/s
line from the cursor position.
3 Move the caliper cursor along the flow

waveform. The trace will be shown in
a solid line. To move the cursor
backward, repeatedly press UNDO key.
4 Press ENTER key when tracing is

completed. A straight line will be
drawn perpendicularly to the 0 m/s line
from the cursor position, and the
measured results will be displayed.
Fig. 11.3.2-19
Manual Trace Method
11-23 Q1E-EA0466
[6-2] Auto Trace Method
The AUTO TRACE Method automatically traces the Doppler waveform
between two points specified by the user. Using this method
will facilitate the measurement of mean flow velocity, pressure
gradient, acceleration time, etc.
Trace can be calculated in the following three methods.
1 PEAK method
This is a method to trace the

µ
PEAK point (PEAK) less by -18dB than
MODE the flow velocity point (MODE)
with the maximum power.
Brightness
2 MODE method

µ flow velocity point (MODE) with
MODE the maximum power.
Brightness
3 MEAN method

µ
peak mean flow velocity.
Peak mean flow velocity =
∫v (f)・P (f) d (f)

=
∫P(f) d(f)
Brightness
Fig. 11.3.2-20 Auto Trace Method
Select a trace calculation method on the measurement setup for

each measurement
11-24 Q1E-EA0466
1 By turning the track ball, move
the caliper to the desired
starting point of tracing, as in
the example at right.
2 Press ENTER key. This will cause

a dotted line to be displayed
vertically just above or below
the 0 m/s line. This line
indicates the point in time at
which you wish to start the
tracing.
3 By turning the track ball, move
the vertical line to the point
in time at which you wish to end
the tracing. If you wish to
change the starting point, press
UNDO key at this step.
Fig. 11.3.2-21
Auto Trace-1
4 Press ENTER key. This will fix
the ending point, and initiate
the AUTO TRACE function across
the distance from the starting
point to the ending point.
And this will display the
results of measurement based on
the tracing.
5 When the auto-trace measurement

is finished, a window as shown
in Fig. 11.3.2-23 is displayed.
Fig. 11.3.2-22
Auto Trace-2
11-25 Q1E-EA0466
The trace and measured value are
proper, select YES button.
Fig. 11.3.2-23
If the trace and measured value are improper, select Auto , Manual
or Plot button.
• With "Auto" selected : The trace result and each measured
value are cleared and Auto trace is started again.
• With "Manual" selected : The trace result and each measured
value are cleared and Manual trace is started again.
• With "Plot" selected : The trace result and each measured
value are cleared and Plot trace is started again.
NOTICE: Large noise amplitudes can cause the waveform to be
traced incorrectly. To avoid this problem, the
Doppler gain level (PW/CW) must beadjusted properly
before activating the AUTO TRACE Method.
[6-3] Plot trace method
Using the trackball and ENTER key, mean flow velocity (Vm) and
others are measured by applying linear approximation to the
Doppler waveform.
1 Operating the trackball, move the
caliper mark to the start point of
measurement.
2 Pressing ENTER key draw a vertical

line from the caliper mark to the 0
m/s line.
3 Turning the trackball, move the

caliper mark to the return point for
linear approximation to be applied
to the Doppler waveform. The
straight line to be approximated is
displayed with solid line.
Fig. 11.3.2-24
Plot Trace Method-(1/2)
11-26 Q1E-EA0466
4 Pressing ENTER key fixes the caliper
mark and the next straight line can
be displayed.
To cancel the fixed point, press UNDO
key.
5 When tracing is completed by

repeating the steps 3 and 4,
double click ENTER key, or press
toggle switch for End Trace.

3
A vertical line is drawn from the

caliper mark to the 0m/s line and the
measurement ends after display of the
measurement result.
Fig. 11.3.2-24
Plot Trace Method-(2/2)
11.4 Contents of Measuring Functions
11.4.1 Basic Measurements
[1] Calip Measurement
The following measurements will be performed in accordance with

the position of the calipers.
Table 11.4.1-1 CALIP Measurement
Caliper
Symbol Meaning Unit Method Comments
Position
On B-mode D Distance between 2 mm Distance Up to four distance

measurements can
image points (B-mode method) be performed
simultaneously (e.g.
D1 through D4)
On M-mode D Depth difference mm
image between 2 points Distance
T Time difference between s (M-mode method)
2 points
S Velocity (slope) between mm/s
2 points
11-27 Q1E-EA0466
On V Velocity of frequency at m/s Instantaneous Up to four distance
or measurements can
Doppler-mode caliper velocity be performed
cm/s
image or (Caliper method) simultaneously (e.g.
D1 through D4)
kHz
PG Pressure Gradient at mmHg Measurable only on

Cardiac Region
Caliper
Measurement Procedure
CALIP
Start up the measurement by Selecting key or other method
(refer to paragraph 11.2(1)), and perform the desired
measurement using the appropriate instructions described
earlier.
[2] Trace Measurement
The following measurements will be taken in accordance with

the position of the calipers.
Table 11.4.1-2 AREA Measurement
Caliper
Position
On B-mode C Circumference, and cm Area Up to four points

image A area of: cm2 (Trace method) can be measured
simultaneously.
traced region
On M-mode D Diameter, circumference, mm Distance

image C and area of: cm (M-mode)
A cm2
circle drawn with distance
between two points as
diameter
On Vm Mean velocity, time m/s Trace

Doppler-mode T difference,and integral of or (Manual Trace
image velocity of: cm/s Method)
traced Doppler image s

TV m
Measurement procedure
TRACE
Start up the measurement by Selecting key, and perform the
desired measurement using the appropriate instructions
described earlier.
11-28 Q1E-EA0466
[3] Area-E (Area-Ellipse)
Produce an ellipse by establishing the long and short axes,
and then measure the area and circumferential length. Use the
same measuring procedure that is described for the area
measurement (ellipse method) in paragraph 11.3.2. Start up
the desired measurement through the menus.
[4] Volume Measurement

Table 11-4-1-3 lists the measurements classified under the
"Volume Measurement" category which will be performed on a B-
mode image. Three volume calculation methods can be selected
as in the table, and can be registered by presetting the measuring
functions.
Table 11.4.1-3 VOLUME Measurement
Method Symb Meaning Unit Measuring Comment

ol Method s
Area-length L Area measurement by mm Volume

method A tracing method, cm2 (Area-length Method)
(B-mode only) V mL
Long-axis (revolution
axis) measurement
Ellipse method L Long-axis (revolution mm Volume

(B-mode only) A axis) measurement, cm2 (Ellipse Method)
V mL
Area measurement by
ellipse approximation
Biplane method D1 Measurement of 3 mm Volume

(B- and M-modes) D2 diameters in 2 planes mm (Biplane Method)
D3 crossing each other at mm
V 90゜ mL
11-29 Q1E-EA0466
Measuring procedure
Start up the desired measurement through the menus, and carry
out the various measurements using the applicable methods.
At the starting time of Volume measurement it is possible to
change over above mentioned three kinds of equation by operating
the function key, F2.
Abbreviated display corresponding to each measurement method on
the function menu is as mentioned below.
Area length method : Area-Len
Ellipse method : Ellipse
Biplane method : Bi-Plane
[5] SVolume Measurement
In the SVolume measurement the circumference length (C) and

sectional spare (A) are measured with a probe by shifting it
by every 5mm and tracing the contour of prostate in order to
calculate the volume at every measuring point.
Table 11.4.1-4 SVOLUME Measurement
Symbol Meaning Unit Comments
Step Slice width of prostate. mm

Volume Volume of prostate. mL
Area N N:Serial numbers of prostate slices. Max N = 15.
C Circumference length of sectional spare. mm
A Sectional spare sliced. cm2
11-30 Q1E-EA0466
[6] Velocity Measurement
The flow velocity (V) and pressure gradient (4V2) or frequency
(F) at user-specified points on a Doppler-mode image will be
measured using one of the following two methods. These methods
can be registered and recalled by means of the measurement
presetting function.
Table 11.4.1-5 Velocity Measurement
Method Meaning Measuring Method Comments

(paragraph 11.3.2)
Caliper method Using caliper, specify the desired measuring Instantaneous

points on a Doppler image. Velocity
(Caliper Method)
(UNIT="m/s")
+V1
+V1
Measuring procedure
Start up the desired measurement through the menus, and carry

out the various measurements using the applicable methods.
11-31 Q1E-EA0466
[7] Accel.(Acceleration) Measurement
The acceleration and deceleration of blood flow will be computed
by measuring velocities at three points on a Doppler image as
in Fig. 11.4.1-1.
Fig. 11.4.1-1 Measuring Points in Accel. Measurement
Table 11.4.1-6 Accel. Measurement
V1 Caliper-1 Velocity m/s or

cm/s
V2 Caliper-2 Velocity m/s or
cm/s
V3 Caliper-3 Velocity m/s or Displayed only when measuring V3
cm/s
AcT Time: 1 → 2 ms
Acc Acceleration: 1 → 2 m/s2 or
cm/s2
DcT Time: 2 → 3 ms Displayed only when measuring V2

Dcc Deceleration: 2 → 3 m/s2 or Displayed only when measuring V3
cm/s2
*1): In SI Unit cm/s2 is expressed as m/s2. 1m/s2 = 100cm/s2
11-32 Q1E-EA0466
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the Accel. measurement (via
the procedure described in see
paragraph 11.2.(2)). Using the
track ball, move the caliper cursor
to the point that you wish to specify
as "V1"

fixed on point "V1," and another
cursor (second cursor) will show up
just on it. By turning the track ball,
move the second cursor to the point
specified as "V2."

fixed on point "V2," and another
cursor (third cursor) will show up
just on it. If you do not wish to
measure the deceleration, press
UNDO key at this step, completing the
measure-ment. The measured result Fig. 11.4.1-2
(acceleration) will then be ACCELERATION
displayed.
If you wish to measure the
deceleration, establish another
point as "V3" by moving the third
cursor with the track ball.
4 Press ENTER key. The result

(decel-eration) will be displayed.
This completes the ACCELERATION
measurement.
11-33 Q1E-EA0466
[8] D-Profile
Table 11.4.1-7 lists the measurements to be performed under
the "D-Profile" category.
Table 11.4.1-7 D-PROFILE Measurement
MEAN Instantaneous mean velocity m/s or

cm/s
MODE Flow velocity at point of m/s or
maximum spectrum power cm/s
PEAK Instantaneous maximum flow m/s or Point 18 dB down from

velocity cm/s MODE
%WINDOW Index of flow pattern width % Width between points 12 dB

down from MODE
FL
%WINDOW= ×100
FU
Measure bar
Fig. 11.4.1-3 Concept of D-Profile Measurement
NOTICE: This measuring function is not available in VCR

playback mode.
11-34 Q1E-EA0466
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the D-Profile measurement in
the appropriate manner described in
paragraph 11.2.(2) A vertical measure
bar that represents the time axis will
show up on a Doppler image.
2 Using the track ball, move the measure

bar to the point where you wish to Fig. 11.4.1-4
calculate the above values. D-Profile
3 Press ENTER key. The measured results will

be displayed. This completes the
D-Profile measurement.
[9] Ratio-Dis, Ratio-Area, Ratio-Time, and Ratio-Velo Measurements

Table 11.4.1-7 lists the ratio calculations for distance, area,
time, and velocity.
Ratio calculation can be selected from the following three
methods.
1 First measurement result × 100 (%)
Second measurement result
2 Second measurement result
× 100 (%)
First measurement result
4 Smaller value in measurement result
× 100 (%)
Larger value in measurement result
Above mentioned three kinds of equation can be changed over with

a function key F2 during the measuring mode.
11-35 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.1-8 RATIO Measurements
Name Symbol Meaning Unit Method Comments
RATIO-DIS D1 Calculation of ratio of mm Distance

distance between one (B- or M-mode
D2 pair of points to distance method)
R between another pair of %
points on B-mode image,
or
Calculation of ratio of
depth between one pair of
points to depth between
another pair of points on
M-mode image.
R: D1/D2 or D2/D1 or
Min/Max
RATIO-AREA A1 Calculation of ratio of 2 cm2 Area (Trace or ellipse Presettable

areas on B-mode image method)
A2
R R: A1/A2 or A2/A1 or %
Min/Max
RATIO-TIME T1 Calculation of ratio of 2 s Distance (M-mode

time-differences on method)
T2
M-mode or D-mode image
R %
R: T1/T2 or T2/T1 or
Min/Max
RATIO-VELO V1 Calculation of ratio of m/s Instantaneous flow
V2 velocities or frequencies at velocity (Caliper
2 points on D-mode image cm/s method)
R R: V1/V2 or V2/V1 or %
Min/Max
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the desired measurement in the appropriate manner.

2 Measure two values for ratio calculation for the measurement
selected. It is possible to temporarily unfreeze the screen
and obtain a more suitable image for measurement.
3 When the two values have been measured, the ratio will be
calculated and displayed.
11-36 Q1E-EA0466
[10] HR Measurement
The heart rate per minute will be obtained by measuring the
R-wave-to-R-wave interval (R-R interval) on an M- or
Doppler-mode image. The number of heartbeats that are used
to calculate the average heart rate can be preset from a range
of 1 to 9 using the measurement setup menu.
(Refer to 11.6.3.3(b))
Table 11.4.1-9 HR Measurement
T Caliper-to-caliper time s bpm: beat per minutes
RR T/BEAT ms
HR 60×1000/RR bpm
(*BEAT) HR across R-to-R interval ---- Heart beats in HR

measurement set by the
measurement setup menu
are displayed.
*: 1 ∼ 9
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the measurement in the

appropriate manner.
cursor on an M-mode or Doppler-mode
image to the starting point of
measurement.
3 Press ENTER key. The cursor will
then be fixed at that point, with
another caliper shown just on it. By
turning the track ball further, bring
the second cursor to the ending point
of measurement.
4 Press ENTER key. The second cursor
will be fixed there, and the measured
results will be displayed. This
completes the HR measurement.
Fig. 11.4.1-5
HR Measurement
11-37 Q1E-EA0466
[11] V Ave.(Velocity Average) Measurement
Table 11.4.1-10 lists the items to be measured under this
measurement category.
The purpose of this measurement is to calculate the average

of velocity values (V) or frequency values (F) measured at up
to nine user-specified points on a Doppler-mode image.
Table 11.4.1-10 V Ave. Measurement
AV Average flow velocity or frequency m/s or

cm/s
N Number of V or F measurements −
performed
V1 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 1 m/s or Instantaneous V2 through
V2 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 2 cm/s flow velocity V9 will be
V3 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 3 measurement displayed only
V4 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 4 (caliper method) during
V5 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 5 measurement.
V6 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 6
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the measurement through the menus.
2 Using the track ball and ENTER key, place the calipers at
desired points on the Doppler image, and measure the velocity
at each of those points.
The average velocity (AV value) will be displayed each time
a point of measurement has been established.
If you wish to perform measurements on another Doppler image,

switch off the FREEZE function, and display the desired image.
CLEAR
3 Upon ending measurement on all the points, press Key.
This will complete the V Ave. measurement.
11-38 Q1E-EA0466
[12] CFM-Velo Measurement
CFM-Velo Measurement refers to the calculation the CFM flow
velocity (V) and CFM frequency (F) at up to eight user-specified
points on the B-mode or M-mode image of a CFM image.
Table 11.4.1-11 CFM-Velo Measurement
F CFM frequency kHz Can be measured at up to 8

user-specified points.
V CFM velocity m/s or
cm/s
Ang Amount of Incidence Angle ° Adjustable on B-mode image
Adjustment only.
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the measurement through

CFM-Velo
the menu.
2 Using the track ball, move the
caliper to a desired point of
measurement.
Fig. 11.4.1-6
CFM-Velo
11-39 Q1E-EA0466
3 Press ENTER key. CFM Velo
This will cause the system to:

• display the measured V and F values,
and enable the next run of
measurement to be made on another
point in the case of measurement Incidence
Angle
on the M-mode image, or Adjustment
Bar
• display an incidence angle
Fig. 11.4.1-7
adjustment bar on the caliper
CFM-Velo-2
position in the case of measurement
on the B-mode image. Turn the
ANGLE control so that the angle
adjustment bar aligns with the flow
direction at the caliper position,
and press ENTER key. The measured
V and F values will be displayed,
and next run of measure-ment can
then be made at another point.
4 The same measurement can be performed

at up to eight different points on
the same image by repeating steps 2
and 3 .
5 Upon completion of measurement on all

the desired points, press CLEAR Key,
thus completing the CFM-Velo
Measurement.
11-40 Q1E-EA0466
[13] PHT Measurement
PHT Measurement refers to the calculation of pressure half time
(PHT), mitral valvular orifice area (MVA), etc. by measuring,
on a Doppler waveform, the flow velocity at the caliper positions
Vp
(VP and ) shown in Fig. 11.4.1-8.
√2

Fig. 11.4.1-8 Specifying Measuring Points in PHT

Measurement PHT Measurement
Table 11.4.1-12 PHT Measurement
VP Peak flow velocity m/s or

cm/s
PGp Peak pressure gardient mmHg*1)
DT Deceleration Time ms
Dcc Deceleration m/s2 Vp/DT
PHT Pressure half time ms
MVA Mitral Valvular orifice area cm2 220/PHT
presettable.
*1): In SI Unit mmHg is expressed as kPa. 1kPa = 7.5mmHg.
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the measurement through the

menus (see paragraph 11.2.(2)).
11-41 Q1E-EA0466
2 Using the track ball, move the caliper PHT
to the point where the velocity

reaches its peak (i.e. the point that
corresponds to "Vp" in Fig.
11.4.1-8).
3 By pressing ENTER key, the caliper

PHT
marks on the Vp and Base line are
connected with a broken lines.
Operating the trackball, move the
broken line to set it along the the
falling Doppler waveform.
4 Press ENTER key. This will display

PHT
the measured results, and complete
the PHT measurement. The horizontal
line will be turned off but the two
calipers will remain on the Doppler
image.
5 Upon completion of measurement on all
CLEAR
Fig. 11.4.1-9
the desired points, press
PHT Measurement
key, thus completing the PHT
Measurement.
11-42 Q1E-EA0466
[14] Histogram Measurement
Starting up the Histogram Measurement will display a histogram
of brightness levels (graphical representation of frequency
distribution of echo intensity) within a user-specified region
of interest on a B-mode image, as in the example shown in Fig.
11-4-1-10. Table 11-4-1-13 lists the items to be measured or
calculated under this measurement category.
Frequency of
Occurrence
100 200
0
Brightness Level
Fig. 11.4.1-10 Histogram of Brightness Level

Distribution-Example
Table 11.4.1-13 Histogram Measurement
C Circumference of specified region mm Any of the following: Desired measurement method is

of interest • Trace Method presettable.
• Ellipse Method
A Area of specified region of interest cm2
• Rectangle Method
These values will be 255
N Total number of brightness level −
data
automatically N= ∑ ndi
calculated using the i=0
formulas listed in the
MD Mean brightness level − 255
"Comments" column
MD= ∑ di •ndi/N
when the area is i=0
specified by one of
SD Standard deviation − the above methods. 1 255
N ∑ ndi •di −MD
2 2
SD=
Σ
i=0
MODE Brightness level with highest − di (on condition ndi = max)
frequency of occurrence
%MODE=max (ndi)/N×100
%MODE ××. ×% Highest frequency % max (ndi)/N×100

of occurrence
Desired vertical axis scaling
mode (COMMON or
INDEPENDENCE) is presettable
(when displaying two histograms
0 100 200 from two runs of measurement).
Histogram
NOTICE: di:brightness level ndi:number of data at di brightness level
11-43 Q1E-EA0466
Selecting Vertical Axis Scaling Modes
When the HISTOGRAM Measurement is started up, two runs of area
(A) and circumference (C) measurement can be performed and the
results of both runs can be displayed at a time in two histograms.
When displaying those two histograms, you can select the
following two scaling modes (vertical axis calibration modes):
• INDEPENDENCE Scaling Mode
In this mode, the vertical scale calibration of one histogram

is independent of the vertical scale calibration of the other
histogram, as in example (a) in Fig. 11.4.1-11.
The INDEPENDENCE Scaling Mode is suitable for comparison of

the brightness distribution patterns in two different organs.
• COMMON Scaling Mode
In this mode, the common calibration is used for the vertical
scales of both histograms, as in example (b) in Fig. 11.4.1-11.
The COMMON Scaling Mode is suitable for comparison of the
brightness distribution patterns at two locations of an organ.
The scaling modes are selectable on a preset entry menu.
NOTICE: The scaling mode is factory-preset to the INDEPENDENCE

mode when the equipment is first delivered.
Meantime the change of scaling set is conducted by the

measurement setup menu. For further details refer to
[Generic of (c)Histogram tool] in [11.6.3.3(C) Link
property].
a b a a
(a) INDEPENDENCE Scaling Mode (b) COMMON Scaling Mode
Fig. 11.4.1-11 Vertical Axis Scaling Modes of Histograms
11-44 Q1E-EA0466
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the HISTOGRAM measurement HISTO
through the menus (see 11.2(2)).
2 Measure the area of a region of
interest by the method selected
(Manual Trace Method, Ellipse Method,
or Rectangle Method).
3 Upon completion of measurement, the
brightness level data will be
HISTO
automatically tallied up. The
results of the calculations listed
in Table 11.4.1-13 will then be
displayed together with a histogram.
4 If you wish to measure another area,

repeat step 2 .
HISTO
In addition, when you wish to
designate the same shape of area as
measured shape of area in step 2 ,
move the caliper mark to the begining
point of measurement at the state of
the mark not being fixed and select
"Copy Area" of HISTO
toggle switch.
3
Only when in dual B-mode presentation

operation, you can change over the
FREEZE function another image for Fig. 11.4.1-12
measurement. HISTOGRAM
Measurement
Notice : When it was canceled the image at the next measurement
by freeze off, it can not be copied the diagram.
5. When the last figure is traced, a message as shown below is
displayed.
If Yes button is selected, it is possible to confirm detailed

histogram data.
11-45 Q1E-EA0466
If No button is selected, the measurement is finished.
NOTICE: For the tracing conducted by histogram it is possible
to select one time or two times by the measurement setup
menu. For further details refer to [Generic of (c)
Histogram tool] in [11.6.3.3(C) Link property].
[15] Time measurement

Time intervals at up to 8 points on D-mode image can be measured.
Table 11.4.1.14 Time measurement
Code Description Unit Remarks
T1 Time interval of caliper 1 ms 9 points at maximum

T2 Time interval of caliper 2 ms can be measured.
T3 Time interval of caliper 3 ms
Measuring method
1. Start the measurement program by using
Time
the menu or other method (Refer to
11.2.).
2. Operating the trackball, move the

caliper mark displayed on M-mode or
Doppler-mode image to the start point
of measurement.
3. Pressing ENTER key defines the start

point of measurement and another caliper Time
mark is displayed on that point.
Operating the trackball, move the
caliper mark to the end point of
measurement.
4. Pressing ENTER key defines the end point

of measurement. If number of measuring Fig. 11.4.1-13
points is less than the maximum Time Measurement
allowable measuring points, the next
measurement caliper is displayed.
Pressing CLEAR key closes the
measurement program.
11-46 Q1E-EA0466
[16] Decel. (Deceleration) measurement
As shown in Fig. 11.4.1-14, by measuring flow velocities at
2 points on Doppler waveform, deceleration of blood flow is
measured.
Fig. 11.4.1-14 Measuring points in Decel. Measurement.
Table 11.4.1-15 Accel Measurement

V1 Flow velocity at caliper 1 m/s or cm/s
V2 Flow velocity at caliper 2 m/s or cm/s
DcT Time from 1 to 2 m/s or cm/s
Dcc Deceleration from 1 to 2 m/s2 *1)
or
cm/s2
*1) Because cm/s2 is not SI unit, convert value to the one in m/s2
1m/s2 = 100cm/s2
Measuring method
1. Start the “Decel”. measurement program by Decel.
using the menu or other method (Refer to
11.2.).
Operating the trackball, move the caliper
mark displayed on Doppler-mode image to the
point corresponding to "V1".
2. Pressing ENTER key defines the "V1" point
Decel.
and a next caliper mark is displayed on that
point. Operating the trackball, move the
caliper mark to the point corresponding to
"V2".
3. Pressing ENTER key defines "V2" point.

Fig. 11.4.1-15
4. Pressing ENTER key displays the measurement Decel. Measurement
result and closed the measurement program.
11-47 Q1E-EA0466
[17] dP/dt measurement
Amount of change in pressure of pressure gradient over time
between two points corresponding to the specified velocities
on Doppler image is measured.
PG 2 − PG1 (PG1=4V12 , PG2=4V22)

dP / dt =
t 2 − t1
t1 t2
0
V1
V2
Fig. 11.4.1-16 dP/dt Measurement

V1 Flow velocity at caliper 1 m/s or cm/s Default: V1=1.0m/s
V2 Flow velocity at caliper 2 m/s or cm/s Default: V2=3.0m/s
PG1 Pressure gradient at caliper 1 mmHg PG1 = 4*V1*V1
PG2 Pressure gradient at caliper 2 mmHg PG2 = 4*V2*V2
t1 Time phase at caliper 1
t2 Time phase at caliper 2
dt Time from 1 to 2 ms dt = t2-t1
dP/dt dP/dt value mmHg/s dP/dt = (PG2-PG1)/dt
Set values V1 andV2 in advance by Measurement setup. Using property

of dP/dt link tool in Measurement setup, set the values. For details,
refer to 11.6.3.3(f) Setting Link.
If the registered values V1 andV2 are not in the range of velocity
scale in the current Doppler mode, this measurement is not displayed
on Measurement menu.
11-48 Q1E-EA0466
Measuring method
dP/dt
1. Start dP/dt measurement program by using
the menu or other method (refer to
V
v11
11.2(2)).
Then, a horizontal line and caliper are
displayed at the point corresponding to
the velocity V1.
2. Operating the trackball and ENTER key,

move the caliper leftward or rightward,
and define the first point. Then, a
horizontal line is displayed at the
point corresponding to the velocity .
V2, and the caliper for the second point
can be operated.
3. Operating the trackball and ENTER key, dP/dt
move the caliper leftward or rightward.
V2
v2
4. Pressing ENTER key displays the dP/dt
measurement result and closes the

measurement program.
Fig. 11.4.1-17
dP/dt Measurement
11-49 Q1E-EA0466
11.4.2 Measuring Cross-Sectional Images
[1] %Steno (Percent Stenosis) Measurement
Refer to Fig. 11-4-2-1. The percent stenosis (%Steno) of a
blood vessel can be calculated by measuring the cross-sectional
area (A1) of a normal part and the cross-sectional area (A2)
of a stenosed part.
Max(A1,A2) – Min(A1,A2)
%Steno = ×100〔%〕
Max(A1,A2)
Flow
Fig. 11.4.2-1 Concept of %Steno Measurement
Three methods are available for measuring the cross-sectional

area:
• Distance method: Measures the diameter (D) of the vessel,
and computes the area from D.
• Trace method: Measures the area by tracing the vessel.
• Ellipse method: Measures the area by approximating the vessel

to an ellipse.
11-50 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.2-1 %STENO Measurement
Method Symbol Meaning Unit Method
Distance method D1 Diameter of vessel mm Distance (B- or

M-mode method)
D2 Diameter of stenosed part mm
%STENO Stenosis of vessel % Calculation will be

executed using the
above equation.
Trace or ellipse A1 Area of normal part of cm2 Area (Trace or ellipse

method vessel wall method)
A2 Area of stenosed part of cm2

vessel wall
%STENO Stenosis of vessel % Calculation will be

executed using the
above equation.
Measuring procedure
Start up the %Steno measurement in the appropriate manner
described in paragraph 11.2 and 11.3, and carry out the various
measurements using the applicable methods as per Table 11.4.2-1.
11-51 Q1E-EA0466
[2] LV/Ao Measurement(B-LV/Ao, M-LV/Ao)
In the captioned measurement there are two kinds according to
the mode of examination, viz. B-LV/Ao and M-LV/Ao.
Table 11-4-2-2 lists the measurements that will be carried out

by using a long axis cross-sectional image in both diastole
and systole.
Table 11.4.2-2 L.Axis Measurement
Symbol
Meaning Unit Method Comments
DIASTOLE SYSTOLE
Aod Aos Aortic diameter mm
IVSd IVSs Intraventricular septal mm

thickness
Distance
LVPWd LVPWs Left ventricle posterior wall mm Presettable
(B- or M-mode method)
thickness
LVEdD LVEsD Left ventricular diameter mm
LADd LADs Left atrial diameter mm
LVEdV LVEsV Left Ventricle Volume mL Pombo, Gibson, Presettable

Teichholz
Measuring procedure
Each of the LONG AXIS DIASTOLE and LONG AXIS SYSTOLE measurements
will be completed by measuring the above listed items. The
following procedure applies to the Systole measurement. The
Diastole measurement can also be performed in the same manner.
1 Start up the Long-Axis (Systole)
measurement in the appropriate
manner described in paragraph
11.2(2).
11-52 Q1E-EA0466
2 Measurement of every item is
Cursor L-AXIS(S)
conducted one by one.
By selecting UNDO key, move the cursor Aos
mm
to the name of the measurement you
IVSs
wish to perform on the currently mm
LVPWs
showing image.
mm
LVEsD
mm
LADs:
3 Using the track ball and ENTER key ,
mm
carry out the measurement selected
at step 2 . Fig. 11.4.2-2
SKIP
4 Select other measurement items and

perform their measurements in the same
way as at steps 2 and 3.
If you wish to remeasure a particular item, just bring
the cursor to the name of that item at step 2 .
The measurement can be repeated as many times as you wish.
It is also possible to unfreeze the screen temporarily
and show a more suitable image for measurement.
5 When you have finished the execution of all measurement items,
press UNDO key, thereby completing the LONG AXIS (SYSTOLE)
measurement.
For Diastole and Systole measurements in B-LV/Ao and M-LV/Ao

groups, the method for calculating Left Ventricle Volume can
be changed.
The selections are Pombo, Gibson and Teichholz. Please refer
to “11.4.3 (1) LV (Left Ventricular) Measurement” for the details
of how to set the calculating method.
Against the measurement item of “LVEdV” in Diastole measurement

or “LVEsV” in Systole measurement, please set any of the
followings for the equation.
“Pombo” ; Pombo method

“Gibson” ; Gibson method
“Teichholz” ; Teichholz method
11-53 Q1E-EA0466
In LV/Ao measurement, in addition to the above items, the following
items are also displayed in Measurement report.
Table 11.4.2-3
Code Description Unit Measurement method Remarks

SV Stroke Volume mL LVEdV-LVEsV
2
SI Stroke Index mL/m SV/BSA (NOTICE 1)
CO Cardiac Output L/min HR*SV
2
CI Cardiac Index L/(min･m ) CC/BSA (NOTICE 1)
EF Ejection Fraction % SV/LVEdV
FS Fractional Shortening % (LVEdD-LVEsD)/LVEdD
HR Heart Rate bpm Auto detection by ECG
NOTICE1:This is calculated only in the case body surface area has

been registered on ID Registration menu.
11.4.3 Schema-Guided M-Mode Measurement

The schema-guided M-mode measurement consists of the types of the
measurements that are to be performed by plotting caliper cursors
on an M-mode image as instructed by a schema to be shown on the
screen. The following five measurements are carried out in this
manner.
[1] LV (Left Ventricular) Measurement

For calculating the volume of LV (LVEdV or LVEsV) there are
three types of measurement, namely LV-Pombo, LV-Gibson and
LV-Teichholz. Each measurement has its own equation, viz.
Pombo’s equation, Gibson’s equation and Teichholz’s equation.
Select any of them for the calculation.
Table 11-4-3-1 lists the measurement items classified under

the "LV Measurement" category.
M-mode beam line

RVDd
Ao
Fig. 11.4.3-1 Schema for LV Measurement
11-54 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.3-1 LV Measurement

LVEdD Left ventricle end-diastole diameter mm
LVEsD Left ventricle end-systole diameter mm
LVPWd Left ventricle posterior wall end-diastole mm
diameter
LVPWs Left ventricle posterior wall end-systole mm Presettable
diameter HR can be set only
RVDd Right ventricle diastole diameter mm manually during VCR
playback.
IVSd Intraventricular septum end-systole mm
thickness
IVSs Intraventricular septum end-systole mm
thickness
HR Heat rate bpm
LVEdV Left ventricle end-diastole volume mL Presettable
LVEsV Left ventricle end-systole volume mL with
POMBO’s
SV Stroke volume mL LVEdV-LVEsV GISON’s, or
CO Cardiac output L/min HRxSV TEICHHOLZ’s
rule
EF Ejection fraction % SV/LVEdV
FS Fractional shortening % (LVEdD-LVEsD)
LVEdD
CI Cardiac Index L/(mL･m2) CO/BSA Be displayed on
Report when
SI Stroke Index mL/m2 SV/BSA height and
weight are
registered in
patient ID menu.
LVMass-d Left ventricular mass in diastole g 1.04*((LVEdD/10+IVSd/10+LVPWd/

10)^3-(LVEdD/10)^3)-13.6
NOTICE)
LVMass-s Left ventricular mass in systeole g 1.04*((LVEsD/10+IVSs/10+LVPWs/

10)^3-(LVEsD/10)^3)-13.6
NOTICE)
Notice: It is not displayed to measurement menu of factory setting. For
using, double click the item of measurement setup menu and selecting
on of the line of sub tab result and report. Refer to item 11.6.3.
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the measurement in the
appropriate manner as described in
paragraph 11.2. A schema, such as
the one at right, will appear.
11-55 Q1E-EA0466
2 By turning the track ball, move the
dotted line, shown in the center of
the M-mode image, to the position
that corresponds to line "A" on the
chema, and move the caliper on the
dotted line to the position that
corresponds to position "C" on the
schema.
3 Press ENTER key. The caliper cursor
will be fixed at that position, and
another plotting point "D" will
appear in the schema.
With the track ball, bring that
caliper to the position
corresponding to "D," and press
ENTER key. Similarly, continue
Fig. 11.4.3-2
potting by placing the calipers and
Schema for LV
dotted lines on the positions as
measurement
indicated in the schema.
4 When the final point, which corresponds to point "L" in the

schema, has been set, and the results of the LV measurement,
calculated using the equation preset, will be displayed.
5 To reset the point set just before during plotting, press
UNDO key.
To skip a point indicated by the schema, select "SKIP" by
pressing toggle switch.
3
NOTICE: Alphabetic characters such as C point and D point are

not displayed on the scheme, but they are displayed with
yellow point.
Selection of left ventricle volume and HR calculation method

Calculation method of left ventricle volume in LV measurement is available
in 3 methods of Pombo, Gibson and Teichholz. Also, calculation method
of HR (heat rate) is available in 2 methods of Manual mode to calculate
by plotting 2 time phases and Auto method to automatically obtain it by
ECG. Selection method of those modes is shown below.
11-56 Q1E-EA0466
Select Measure in Setup on Main Menu to start Measurement Setup menu.
Fig. 11.4.3-2-1 Measurement Setup Menu
(1)Changing left ventricle volume calculation method

LV-Gibson and LV-Pombo measurement can not be used in the factory
shipment. In case of need, by using [Additional Settings] of measurement
export/import function, import or replace the measurement. Refer to
item 11.6.6 Measurement Export/Import function.
(2)Selection of HR calculation method

The following 2 methods are available in calculation of HR.
Manual mode : By plotting any 2 time phases, Heart Rate is
calculated.
Auto mode : Heat Rate is automatically calculated from ECG

waveform.
11-57 Q1E-EA0466
To select either of them, select the measurement item "HR" in the
currently used LV Measurement (one of LV, LV-Gibson, LV-Pombo) in
Measurement Setup menu.
Fig. 11.4.3-2-2 Selection of HR Item
Pressing Edit button opens Edit menu of LV Measurement.
Fig. 11.4.3-2-3 Setting HR Calculation Method
Rewrite "Equation" box where calculation equation of the measurement

item HR is input with "ManualHR" for Manual mode or "AutoHR" for Auto
mode.
11-58 Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 11.4.3.2-4 Setting (HR) in Manual Mode
Fig. 11.4.3.2-5 Setting (HR) in Auto Mode
Upon rewriting Equation, press Register button to register the

change.
11-59 Q1E-EA0466
[2] MV (Mitral Valve) Measurement
M-mode beam line
Ao
Fig. 11-4-3-3 Schema for MV Measurement

the "MV Measurement" category.
Table 11.4.3-2
CE E-wave amplitude (E-Amp.) mm

DE DE difference mm
CA A-wave amplitude (A-Amp.) mm
DEslope MV DE slope (DE-SLOPE) mm/s Presettable
EFslope MV diastolic descent rate (DDR) mm/s
A/E Ratio of A-wave/E-wave amplitude ----
EPSS E-point ventricular septum mm
distance
Measuring procedure
Perform the measurement in the same way as in the LV measurement.
11-60 Q1E-EA0466
[3] Ao (Aortic Valve) Measurement
RVOTD M-mode beam line
AVSc
AOD Ao
AVSo
LAD
PEP ET
Fig. 11.4.3-4 Schema for Ao Measurement
Table 11.4.3-3 lists the measurement items classified under

the "Ao Measurement" category.
Table 11.4.3-3 Ao Measurement
AoD Aortic diameter in diastole mm

AVcusp Aortic valve systole (early phase) mm
open
Presettable
AVcusp Aortic valve systole (last phase) mm
close
LAD Left atrial diameter (systole) mm
RVOTD Right ventricular outflow tract diameter mm
(systole)
LA/Ao Ratio of LAD/Ao ----
PEP Pre-Ejection Period ms
ET Ejection Time ms
Measuring procedure
Perform the measurements in the same way as in the LV measurement.
11-61 Q1E-EA0466
[4] TV (Tricuspid Valve) Measurement
M-mode beam line
Fig. 11.4.3-5 Schema for TV Measurement

the "TV Measurement" category.
Table 11.4.3-4 TV Measurement
CE E-wave amplitude (E-Amp.) mm

DE DE difference mm
CA A-wave amplitude (A-Amp.) mm
Presettable
DEslope TV DE slope (DE-SLOPE) mm/s
EFslope TV diastolic descent rate (DDR) mm/s
A/E Ratio of A-wave/E-wave amplitude ----
Measuring procedure
11-62 Q1E-EA0466
[5] PV (Pulmonary Valve) Measurement
M-mode beam line
Fig. 11.4.3-6 Schema for PV Measurement
Table 11.4.3-5 lists the measurement items classified under

the "PV Measurement" category.
Table 11.4.3-5 PV Measurement
Awave A-wave amplitude mm

Presettable
EFslope EF slope mm/s
Measuring procedure
11-63 Q1E-EA0466
11.4.4 Doppler Measurement
The Doppler measurement for outflow and inflow can be carried out
by tracing the Doppler waveform at the left ventricle outflow tract
and measuring peak velocity at the specified region, R-R interval,
blood flow cross-sectional area, etc.
The following eight measurements are available for the Doppler
measurement.
(1) LVOT Measurement
The Doppler measurement at the left ventricle outflow tract is
carried out by tracing the Doppler waveform or measuring a peak
flow velocity at the left ventricle outflow tract, and tracing
the Doppler waveform or measuring a peak flow velocity at the aortic
valve, a diameter of the left ventricle outflow tract and R-R
interval.
11 - 64 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-1 LVOT Measurement (1/2)
Code Unit Measurement Method Remarks
Vp m/s or cm/s LVOT peak velocity Trace (TRACE) *1)
Any of manual trace, auto trace, plot
PGp mmHg *2) LVOT peak pressure difference *1’)
trace according to measurement
Vm m/s or cm/s LVOT mean velocity setup. *1)
PGm mmHg *2) LVOT mean pressure difference Auto trace calculation *1’)
Any of PEAK, MEAN and MODE
AT ms LVOT acceleration time
according to measurement setup.
ET ms LVOT ejection time
AT/ET − Ratio of AT to ET at LVOT
TVI m LVOT velocity integral *1’)
PEP ms Pre-Ejection Period
11 - 65
PEP/ET − PEP/ET Ratio

Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-1 LVOT Measurements (2/2)
Code Unit Measurement Method Remarks
CSA cm2 LVOT cross-sectional area Area
Any of DISTANCE, TRACE and
ELLIPSE method according to
measurement setup.
HR bpm Heart rate (See P.11-64)
SV mL STROKE VOLUME To be calculated from the measured TVI× CSA *1’)
result above.
CO L/min Cardiac Output SV × HR *1’)
*1) : Velocity value is corrected by the correction formula set for TRACE in the measurement setup.
*1’) : Calculated using the velocity value obtained by correction *1).
*2) : In SI unit, kPa is used instead of mmHg. 1kPa = 7.5mmHg.
11 - 66
NOTICE: 1)Refer to Item 11.6.2 for measurement setup.

2) To edit LVOT in the measurement setup, start the measurement setup menu and select “LVOT”, then
press “Edit” button to start the measurement edit menu. Pressing the “Link” button on this menu
starts the link setup menu to change tracing method (Auto, Manual, or Plot) and so on.
3) To set Doppler tracing method (Auto, Manual, or Plot), see Item 11.6.3.3 (a) Link setup. Select
“LV” in the Name field of Link Selection if setting for TRACE. Also, pressing the “Property” button
on this menu can change trace calculation method (Peak, Mean, or Mode) and so on.
Q1E-EA0466
The equipment shipped from the factory has been set for calculation
of aortic valve orifice area. If measurement is carried out for
calculation of cardiac output (such as SV and CO), perform
measurement setup referring to Table 11.4.4-2.
Table 11.4.4-2 Recommended LVOT Measurement Setup

Measurement Setup
For aortic orifice area calculation
Category Item For cardiac
Using mean Using peak output calculation
velocity velocity
Tracing TRACE AUTO AUTO AUTO
method
Auto trace TRACE PEAK PEAK PEAK
calculation
method
Velocity TRACE V’=1.00V+000.0cm/s V’=1.00V+000.0cm/s V’=1.00V+000.0cm/s
correction
formula
Measureme Vp ON ON ON
nt results PGp OFF OFF OFF
frame
display Vm ON OFF ON
PGm OFF OFF OFF
AT OFF OFF ON
ET OFF OFF ON
AT/ET OFF OFF ON
TVI OFF OFF ON
CSA ON ON ON
HR OFF OFF ON
SV OFF OFF ON
CO OFF OFF ON
NOTICE: 1) For measurement setup, see Item 11.6.2
2) For setting auto trace calculation method and velocity correction
equation, see 11.6.3.3 (a) Link Property]
3) For setting measurement result frame display, see [11.6.3.2 (2)
Sub tab].
11 - 67 Q1E-EA0466
ET
AT
LVOT Doppler waveform measurement
2
CSD
CSA measurement CSA= π
2
Fig. 11.4.4-1 Concept of LVOT Measurement
11 - 68 Q1E-EA0466
Velocity value correction function
This measurement allows the following corrective calculation to
be added to velocity obtained by tracing Doppler waveform (manual
trace, auto trace, plot trace) and displayed as measurement results.
V’ = C1 × V + C2
Where,
V :Velocity value obtained by tracing
C1 :Correction constant 1 (multiplication factor)
(Allowable range: 0 ~ 9.99)
C2 :Correction constant 2 (addition and subtraction factor)
[Unit: cm/s]
(Allowable range: –999.9 ~ 999.9)
V’ : Velocity value after correction
Use the measurement setup menu to set the correction calculation
formula (See [11.6.3.3 (a) Link Property].).
Excluding the case where the correction formula gives no correction
as shown below, the correction formula is displayed at the right
bottom of the Doppler wave display after measurement by Doppler
trace.
[Formula for no correction]
V’ = 1.00V + 0.0
LVOT
Correction formula
V'=0.57V+0
Fig. 11.4.4-2 Correction Formula
NOTICE: Sign of correction constant 2:C2 in the corrective formula is

automatically switched for addition or subtraction according to
the sign of the flow velocity V at tracing.
For example, when the correction formula is expressed as
V’ = 1.08 – 0.9, correction is calculated as follows:
For V 0, V’ = 1.08 – 0.9
For V < 0, V’ = 1.08V – (–0.9)
11 - 69 Q1E-EA0466
1. Use menu and so on to start Cursor ; YELLOW
measurement (See Item 11.2). LVOT
2. Press the UNDO key to move the TRACE:
cursor to any item that may be Vp: m/s
Vm: m/s
measured on the display screen. AT: ms
Press the ENTER key. The item Measure- ET: ms
ment AT/ET:
designated by the cursor is items TVI: m
selected. (If the UNDO key is CSA: cm2
not used, each item is HR: bpm
automatically executed in (Beat=1)
turn.) SV: mL
CO: L/min
3. Use the trackball and ENTER key
to carry out measurement on the Fig. 11.4.4-3 Selecting
item thus selected. Actually Items
follow measurement method
shown in Table 11.4.4-1. Also
refer to basic procedures in
Item 11.3.
4. Carry out measurements for each item as well as in Item 2 and
3 above. If there is any item to be retried, move the cursor
to the item in Item 2 above. Measurement may be retried any
times. (However, only up to five measurements can be verified
on the measurement report.)
In the mean time, freeze may be released to retry acquiring
an image for display.
5. When measurement of all items are completed, the measurement
ends. Press CLEAR to terminate the measurement.
In LVOT measurement, Vp, Vm and AT can be measured again. After

measurement is made once, manually select measurement item.
11 - 70 Q1E-EA0466
Traced line produced by trace
measurement
R-wave just before

traced line
ECG waveform
Fig. 11.4.4-4 Tracing and R-R Interval Measurement
Heart Rate (HR) Measurement Procedure

Selecting HR Measurement displays the caliper mark on the screen.
Use the trackball and ENTER key to plot the R-wave just before
the traced line with the caliper mark, and then plot the next
R-wave.
For the other measurements, follow the methods shown in Table
11.4.4-1. Also refer to basic operations in Item 11.3.
(2) LV inflow Measurement

The Doppler measurement at the left ventricle inflow tract carries
out tracing the Doppler waveform to determine a peak flow velocity,
LV inflow cross-sectional area, R-R interval and isovolumic
relaxation time.
11 - 71 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-3 LV inflow Measurement (1/2)
Code Unit Measurement Method (See Item 11.3) Remarks
VE m/s or cm/s Flow velocity at point E Instantaneous velocity (Caliper method)
PGE mmHg *2) Pressure gradient at point E
VA m/s or cm/s Flow velocity at point A Instantaneous velocity (Caliper method)
PGA mmHg *2) Pressure gradient at point A
A/E ― VA/VE ratio To be calculated from VE and VA VA/VE
E/A ― VE/VA ratio VE/VA
AT ms Acceleration time Time
ET ms Inflow time
AT/ET ― Acceleration//Ejection time ratio
2
11 - 72
Acc m/s Acceleration VE/AT

PHT ms Pressure half time PHT
Vp m/s Peak flow velocity
DT ms Deceleration time 3.41×PHT
2
Dcc m/s Deceleration Vp/DT
Vm m/s Mean velocity TRACE *1)
PGm mmHg Mean pressure difference To be made according to the mode *1')
selected in Measurement Setup menu
TVI m Velocity Integral *1')
from Manual trace mode, Auto trace
mode and Plot trace mode.
Auto Trace calculation mode
To be made according to the setting in
Measurement Setup menu from PEAK,
MEAN and MODE.
IVRT ms Isovolume relaxation time Time
Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-3 LV inflow Measurement (2/2)
2
MVA cm Mitral valve area To be calculated from the above result 220/PHT
*1) : Deceleration value is corrected by the correction equation set for TRACE in Measurement Setup.
*1’) : Calculation is made from the subtraction value obtained by *1).
*2) : mmHg is displayed in kpa in SI unit. 1kpa = 7.5mmHg
NOTICE: 1) For setting procedures of Measurement Setup, refer to 11.6.2

2) To edit LV Inflow measurement in Setup menu, start Measurement Setup menu, select "LV Inflow"
measurement, and press "Edit" button to open Measurement Edit menu. Pressing "Link" but ton on
this menu opens Link Setup menu to select Trace method (Auto, Manual or Plot).
3) To set Doppler Trace method (Auto, Manual or Plot), refer to "11.6.3.3 (a) Link Setup". To set
Doppler Trace on this Link Setup menu, select "DTR" in Name box of Link Selection, and then set
11 - 73
Doppler Trace. Pressing "Property" button on this menu allows Trace Calculation method (Peak, Mean
or Mode) to be changed.
Q1E-EA0466
Electrocardiogram LV inflow Doppler waveform measurement
CSA measurement
Fig. 11.4.4-5 Concept of LV inflow Measurement
Referring to the LVOT measurement procedure, carry out the
measurement.

This measurement allows corrective calculation to be applied
to velocity value obtained by tracing the Doppler waveform.
Refer to the velocity value correction function for the LVOT
measurement for details.
(3) RVOT Measurement

Doppler measurement of the right ventricle outflow tract includes
manual tracing of right ventricle outflow tract Doppler waveform,
and measurement of the pulmonary valve (PV) peak velocity, diameter
of right ventricle outflow tract and R-R interval.
11 - 74 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-4 RVOT Measurement
Code Unit Measurement Method (See Item 11.3.) Remarks
Vp m/s or cm/s RVOT peak velocity *1)
PGp mmHg *2) RVOT pressure difference Trace (TRACE) *1’)
Any of manual trace, auto trace or
Vm m/s or cm/s RVOT mean velocity *1)
plot trace method according to
PGm mmHg *2) RVOT mean pressure difference measurement setup. *1’)
AT ms Acceleration time Auto trace calculation method
Any of PEAK, MEAN, and MODE
ET ms Ejection time
according to measurement setup.
AT/ET – Ratio of AT to ET
PEP ms RVOT ejection time
11 - 75
PEP/ET – Ratio of PEP to ET

TVI m RVOT velocity integral *1’)
CSA cm2 RVOT cross-sectional area Area
Any of distance, trace, and ellipse
method according to measurement
setup.
HR bpm Heart rate Refer to (1) LVOT measurement. NOTICE 1)
SV mL Stroke Volume To be calculated from the TVI × CSA *1’)
CO L/min Cardiac Output measurement results above. SV × HR *1’)
*1) : Deceleration value is corrected by the correction formula set for TRACE in the measurement
setup.
*1’) : Calculation is carried out from the velocity value obtained by the correction *1).
Q1E-EA0466
NOTICE: 1) In the RVOT measurement, “PEP” and “HR” are not displayed in the results display frame when shipped
from the factory. However, if setting display ON in the measurement setup, R-R interval will be
measured as soon as Doppler trace is completed. Note that the order of R-R interval measurement
differs from the other Doppler measurement. If R-R interval only is to be measured again after measuring
R-R interval by Doppler trace when “HR” has been set to display ON, select “HR” in the results display
frame and perform measurement again.
2) For measurement setup, see Item 11.6.2
3) To edit RVOT in the measurement setup, start the measurement setup menu and select “RVOT”, and then
press the “Edit” button to start the measurement edit menu. Pressing the “Link” button on this menu
allows the link setup menu to start for changing tracing method (Auto, Manual, and Plot) and so on.
4) To set Doppler tracing method (Auto, Manual, or Plot) and so on, refer to [11.6.3.3 Link Setup].
When setting for TRACE in this link setup menu, do so after selecting “RV” in the Name field of Link
Selection. Also, pressing the “Property” button on this menu allows trace calculation method (Peak,
Mean, or Mode) and so on to be changed.
11 - 76
Q1E-EA0466
RVOT Doppler waveform measurement
Fig. 11.4.4-6 Concept of RVOT Measurement

RVOT measurement allows the correction calculation to be applied
For procedures of RVOT measurement in detail, refer to those
of LVOT measurement.
11 - 77 Q1E-EA0466
(4) RV inflow Measurement
Right ventricle inflow tract Doppler measurement includes tracing
of Doppler waveform, and measurement of peak velocity, right
ventricle inflow tract cross-sectional area and R-R interval.
11 - 78 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-6 RV inflow Measurement (1/2)
VE m/s or cm/s Flow velocity at point E Instantaneous velocity (Caliper method)
PGE mmHg *2) Pressure gradient at point E
VA m/s or cm/s Flow velocity at point A Instantaneous velocity (Caliper method)
PGA mmHg *2) Pressure gradient at point A
A/E ― VA/VE ratio To be calculated from VE and VA VA/VE
E/A ― VE/VA ratio VE/VA
AT ms Acceleration time Time
ET ms Inflow time
AT/ET ― Acceleration//Ejection time ratio
2
11 - 79
Acc m/s Acceleration VE/AT

PHT ms Pressure half time PHT
Vp m/s Peak flow velocity
DT ms Deceleration time 3.41×PHT
2
Dcc m/s Deceleration Vp/DT
Vm m/s or cm/s Mean velocity TRACE *1)
PGm mmHg *2) Mean pressure difference To be made according to the mode *1')
selected in Measurement Setup menu
TVI m Velocity Integral *1')
from Manual trace mode, Auto trace
mode and Plot trace mode.
To be made according to the setting in
Measurement Setup menu from PEAK,
MEAN and MODE.
Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-7 RV inflow Measurement (2/2)
2
TVA cm Tricuspid valve area To be calculated from the above result 220/PHT
*1) : Deceleration value is corrected by the correction equation set for TRACE in Measurement setup.
*1’) : Calculation is made from the subtraction value obtained by *1).
*2) : mmHg is displayed in kpa in SI unit. 1kpa = 7.5mmHg
NOTICE: 1) For setting procedures of Measurement Setup, refer to 11.6.2

2) To edit RV Inflow measurement in Setup menu, start Measurement Setup menu, select "RV Inflow"
measurement, and press "Edit" button to open Measurement Edit menu. Pressing "Link" but ton on
this menu opens Link Setup menu to select Trace method (Auto, Manual or Plot).
3) To set Doppler Trace method (Auto, Manual or Plot), refer to "11.6.3.3 Link Setup". To set Doppler
Trace on this Link Setup menu, select "DTR" in Name box of Link Selection, and then set Doppler
11 - 80
Trace. Pressing "Property" button on this menu allows Trace Calculation method (Peak, Mean or Mode)
to be changed.
Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 11.4.4-7 Concept of RV inflow Measurement

RV inflow measurement allows correction calculation to be applied
For procedure of RV inflow measurement in detail, refer to those
of LVOT measurement.
(5) VASC1 / VASC2 Measurement

The vascular Doppler measurement is carried out by tracing of the
vascular Doppler waveform, and measurement of vascular diameter
and R-R interval.
Two measurements of VASC1 and VASC2 are available. The VASC1 and
VASC2 are the same measurement to be used for examination of different
examination regions since presetting and report display can be
made independently for each measurement. Measurement code can be
preset as user-defined.
11 - 81 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-7 VASC1 and VASC2 Measurement (1/2)
Vp m/s or*2) Peak velocity TRACE method *1)
PGp m/s or cm/s Peak pressure difference Any of manual trace, auto *1’)
Vd m/s or cm/s Velocity in end diastole trace or plot trace according *1)
to measurement setup
Vm m/s or cm/s Mean velocity *1)
PGm mmHg *2) Mean pressure difference Auto trace calculation method
AT ms Acceleration time Any of PEAK, MEAN and *1’)
ET ms Ejection time MODE according to
AT/ET – Ratio of AT to ET measurement setup.
Acc m/s2 Acceleration *1’)
PI – PULSATILITY INDEX *1’)
RI – RESISTANCE INDEX *1’)
%W % %WINDOW at peak
11 - 82
SYSW % SYSTOLIC WINDOW at peak

TVI m VELOCITY INTEGRAL Vm•ET *1’)
2
CSA cm Cross-sectional area Area
Any of DISTANCE, TRACE
and ELLIPSE method
according to measurement
setup.
HR bpm Heart rate Refer to (1) LVOT
measurement.
Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-7 VASC1 and VASC2 Measurement (2/2)
SV mL STROKE VOLUME To be calculated from the TVI × CSA *1’)
measurement results above.
FV L/min FLOW VOLUME SV × HR *1’)
SV × 60/ET *1’)
*1) : Deceleration value is corrected by the correction formula set for TRACE in measurement setup.
*1’) : Calculation is carried out from the deceleration value obtained by the correction of *1).
NOTICE: 1) For measurement setup, see Item 11.6.2

2) To edit Vasc1 and Vasc2 in the measurement setup, start the measurement setup menu and select “Vasc1”
11 - 83
or “Vasc2” measurement, and then press the “Edit” button to start the measurement edit menu. Pressing
the “Link” button on this menu allows the link setup menu to start for changing tracing method (Auto,
Manual, or Plot).
3) To set Doppler tracing method (Auto, Manual, or Plot) and so on, refer to [11.6.3.3 Link Setup].
When setting for Doppler TRACE in this link setup menu, do so after selecting “DTR” in the Name
field of Link Selection. Also, pressing the “Property” button on this menu allows trace calculation
method (Peak, Mean, or Mode) and so on to be changed.
Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 11.4.4-8 Concept of Vasc Measurement
PULSATILITY INDEX (PI) and RESISTANCE INDEX (RI) are calculated

by the following equations:
VP − VD
PI = × 100
Vm
VP − VD
RI = × 100
Vp
Where,
VP : Peak velocity
VD : Velocity in end diastole (minimum velocity)
Vm : Mean velocity over traced distance
%-WINDOW is calculated from the following equation with brightness
pattern at VP phase:
VL
%W = × 100
VU
SYSTOLIC WINDOW is calculated by the

following equation with brightness
pattern in the range of 100ms from the
VP phase.
∑ VL
SYSW = × 100
∑ VU
NOTICE: When the measurement is carried out

on the playback image from the
VCR, %-WINDOW and SYSTOLIC WINDOW
cannot be calculated. Fig. 11.4.4-9 Concept of
%-WINDOW
11 - 84 Q1E-EA0466
Vasc measurement allows corrective calculation to be applied
1. Turn the angle control knob to
set the incident angle
measurement bar to the point
in the vessel to be measured.
2. Follow the same procedure as
Incident angle
that of the LVOT measurement measurement
to carry out the measurement. bar
Fig. 11.4.4-10 Incident Angle

Measurement Bar
Modification of Vd
If the value of Vd is not correct when Doppler wave is traced,
it can manually be re-measured by selecting ‘Vd’ measurement
item in Measurement Result Frame. (Vd; End-Diastole Velocity)
Notice: It can be changed calculation for Flow Volume by toggle

switch .
2
FV-HR[ON] : Calculated for using HR value.
SV x HR / 1000 (l/min)
FV-HR[OFF]: Calculated for not using HR value.
SV x (60 / ET) (l/min)
11 - 85 Q1E-EA0466
(6) AV-Area measurement
By tracing LVOT Doppler waveform and AV Doppler waveform, aortic
valve area is measured.
ET ETA
AT
Measurement of LVOT Doppler waveform Measurement of AV Doppler waveform

Vp by using
AVA= ×CSA peak
VpA
velocity
Vm
by using
2 AVA= ×CSA mean
VmA velocity
CSD
CSA= π
2 by using
TVI integral of
CSA measurement AVA= ×CSA
TVIA velocity･
time
Vm VmA
where, TVI= TVIA=
ET ETA
Fig. 11.4.4-11 Concept of AV-Area Measurement
Measurement method
Referring to the measurement method of LVOT, make the measurement.
Using the F2 function key, calculation method (by Peak, by Mean
or by TVI) of aortic valve area can be changed.
In this measurement, correction calculation can be applied to
the velocity value obtained by trace. For details, refer to
velocity value correction function.
11 - 86 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-8 AV-Area Measurement (1/2)
LVOT-V m/s or cm/s Left ventricle outflow tract peak velocity Left ventricle outflow tract trace *1)
p To be made according to the mode
LVOT-V m/s or cm/s Left ventricle outflow tract mean velocity selected in Measurement Setup *1)
m menu from Manual trace mode,
Auto trace mode and Plot trace
LVOT-E ms Left ventricle outflow tract acceleration mode. *1')
T ms time
― Left ventricle outflow tract ejection time To be made according to the
Left ventricle outflow tract setting in Measurement Setup
acceleration/ejection time ratio menu from PEAK, MEAN and
LVOT-T m Left ventricle outflow tract VELOCITY MODE. *1')
VI INTEGRAL
11 - 87
LVOT-C cm2 Left ventricle outflow tract cross section Area

SA area To be calculated according to the
setting in Measurement Setup
menu from Distance method,
Trace method and Ellipse
method.
AV-Vp m/s or cm/s Aortic valve peak velocity Aortic valve tract trace *2)
AV-Vm m/s or cm/s Aortic valve mean velocity To be made according to the *2)
mode selected in Measurement
AV-ET ms Aortic valve ejection time Setup menu from Manual trace *2')
AV-TVI m Aortic valve tract VELOCITY INTEGRAL mode, Auto trace mode and Plot *2')
trace mode.
To be made according to the
setting in Measurement Setup
Q1E-EA0466
menu from PEAK, MEAN and

MODE.
Table 11.4.4-8 AV-Area Measurement (2/2)
2
AV-Area cm Aortic value area *1') *2')
*1) Velocity value is corrected by the correction equation set for LVOT in Measurement Setup.
*1') Calculation is made from the velocity value obtained by *1).
*2) Velocity value is corrected by the correction equation set for AV in Measurement Setup.
*2') Calculation is made from the velocity value obtained by *2).
*3) mmHg is displayed in kpa in SI unit. 1kpa = 7.5mmHg
11 - 88
Q1E-EA0466
(7) Qp/Qs Measurement
It is possible to obtain the specific pulmonary flow/systemic flow
by measuring Doppler waveform of left ventricular outflow tract
and right ventricular outflow tract and also the cross sectional
areas of left ventricular outflow tract and right ventricular
outflow tract.
11 - 89 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.4-9 Qp/Qs Measurement
LVOT-CSA cm2 Cross Sectional Area of left Area Values at delivery time
ventricular outflow tract from our factory are by
RVOT-CSA cm2 Cross Sectional Area of right Measured either by Distance Distance method.
ventricular outflow tract or Trace or Ellipse method.
It depends on the setting at
Measurement Set-up.
LVOT-TVI m left ventricular outflow tract TIME TRACE Values at delivery time
VELOCITY INTEGRAL Measured either by Manual from our factory are by
RVOT-TVI m right ventricular outflow tract trace or Auto-trace or Plot manual trace method.
TIME VELOCITY INTEGRAL trace method. It depends
on the setting at
Measurement Set-up.
11 - 90
Auto-trace method
Measured either by PEAK or
MEAN or MODE depending
upon the setting at
Measurement Set-up.
LVOT-SV mL STROKE VOLUME Calculated based on results (LVOT-TVI×100)×
of above said LVOT-CSA
RVOT-SV mL STROKE VOLUME measurements. (RVOT-TVI×100)×
RVOT-CSA
Qp/Qs ---- pulmonary flow/systemic flow RVOT-SV／LVOT-SV
Q1E-EA0466
Lines traced by Trace
Measruement
LVOT-TIV
LVOT Doppler waveform measurement
2
CSD
LVOT-CSA= π
2
LVOT-CSA Measurement
Fig. 11.4.4-12 Pattern image of Qs Measurement
Lines traced by Trace

Measurement
RVOT-TIV
2
CSD
RVOT-CSA=π
2
RVOT Doppler waveform RVOT-CSA Measurement
Fig. 11.4.4-13 Pattern image of Qp Measurement
Referring to the LVOT measurement procedure, carry out the
measurement.

This measurement allows corrective calculation to be applied
11 - 91 Q1E-EA0466
11.4.5 Left Ventricle Cardiac Function Measurement
By measurement of length and area at end-systole and end-diastole,
volume of left ventricle is obtained and left ventricle function
is measured.
The following ten functions are available in the left ventricle
function measurements.
[1] Pombo, Gibson, and Teichholz Measurements
By measuring a inter diameter of left ventricle and using
one of Pombo, Gibson and Teichholz formulas. a volume of left
ventricle is obtained for left ventricle function
measurement.
For the measurement, there are six measurements depending on
the mode and method as follows:
B-EF ; Measurement by Teichholz on B mode

B-EF Gibson ; Measurement by Gibson on B mode
B-EF Pombo ; Measurement by Pombo on B mode
M-EF ; Measurement by Teichholz on M mode
M-EF Gibson ; Measurement by Gibson on M mode
M-EF Pombo ; Measurement by Pombo on M mode
Though B-EF and M-EF are displayed on measurement menu, the
others are not displayed as default. To use the other
measurements, the display setting for measurement property
needs to be set as On. Please refer to “11.4.3 [1] LV (Left
Ventricular) Measurement”
Table 11.4.5-1 Pombo, Gibson & Teichholz Measurements (1/2)

Measurement method
Abbr. Description Unit Remarks
(Refer to 11.3 )
Left ventricle diameter at Distance (B-mode or
LVEdD mm
end-diastole M-mode method)
Left ventricle diameter at
LVEsD mm
end-systole
Left ventricle volume at Calculated using
LVEdV mL
end-diastole equations
Left ventricle volume at
LVEsV mL
end-systole
SV Stroke Volume mL Calculated from above LVEdV - LVEsV
results
CO Cardiac output L/min HR × SV
EF Ejection fraction % SV / LVEdV
Left ventricle fraction of (LVEdD - LVEsD) /
FS systole %
LVEdD
11-92 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.5-1 Pombo, Gibson & Teichholz Measurements (2/2)
Measurement method
Abbr. Description Unit Remarks
(Refer to 11.3 )
HR Heart Rate bpm Heart Rate by ECG
Report when height
SI Stroke Index mL/m2 SV/BSA and weight are
registered in patient
ID menu.
Measurement method
<For routine examination>
1 Start up the measurement program by using the menu or other
method. (Refer to Paragraph 11.2.)
2 Using the trackball and ENTER keys, measure each distance

of LVEdD and LVEsD.
By turning off FREEZE mode, an image to be displayed can
be reacquired.
3 From the two measured values, the calculated result is
displayed and the measurement is completed.
<during Examination of VCR Playback Image>

1 Start up the measurement in the appropriate manner as
described in paragraph 11.2.
HR value displayed
2 The message "ENTER HEART RATE"
will appear in the screen B-Pombo HR: 60
center as the example at right.

If the HR value (heart rate
value) is displayed on the
upper right corner, enter that
value using numeric keys.
If the number of pulses is not
Fig.11.4.5-1 Entering
displayed on the playback
Hart Rate
image, carry out the step 3,
as it is.
3 Press ENTER key.

4 Carry out the same procedures as steps 2 and 3 in ordinary
inspection.
11-93 Q1E-EA0466
[2] Area-Length Measurement
Measure the cross-sectional area (A) and length (L) of the
left ventricle in the long axis plane, and then calculate
the left ventricular volume from "A" and "L" using the
following equation.
V=
8
×
A2
3π L
Fig. 11.4.5-2 Concept of Area-Length Measurement
Table 11.4.5-2 AREA-LENGTH Measurement
Measurement Method
(see paragraph 11.3)
Left ventricle end-diastole Area (Trace method)

LVAd cm2
cross-sectional area
Left ventricle end-diastole Distance (B- or M-mode

LVLd mm
length method)
Left ventricle end-systole Area (Trace method)

LVAs cm2
cross-sectional area
Left ventricle end-systole Distance (B- or M-mode

LVLs mm
length method)
Left ventricle end-diastole Calculated from above

LVEdV mL
volume results
Left ventricle end-systole

LVEsV mL
volume
SV Stroke volume mL LVEdV - LVEsV
CO Cardiac output L/min HR×SV
HR Heart rate bpm Heart rate by ECG

Report when
SI Stroke Index mL/m2 SV/BSA height and weight
are registered in
patient ID menu.
11-94 Q1E-EA0466
Measuring procedure
<during Examination of Normal Image>
1 Start up the Doppler measurement Cursor
in the appropriate manner
Measurement of every item is
conducted one by one.
2 Press UNDO key to select the item

measurement. Moving the cursor
to the name of the measurement you Fig. 11.4.5-3
wish to perform, and press ENTER Area Length menu
key to end the procedure 2.
Using the track ball and ENTER key ,
execute the selected measurement.
3 Similarly, perform the rest of the
measurement items as in steps 1 and
2. If you wish to remeasure a
particular item, return to step 2
and bring the cursor to the name of
that item.
You can repeat the same measurement as often as you wish.
4 Finishing the execution of all measurement items will

complete the area-length measurement.
Press ENTER key.
11-95 Q1E-EA0466
<during Examination of VCR Playback Image>
1 Start up the measurement in the appropriate manner as
HR value displayed
2 The message "ENTER HEART RATE"
will appear in the screen Area Length HR: 60
center as in the example at

right. If the HR value (heart
rate value) is displayed on the
upper right corner, enter that
value using numeric keys. In
case of the heart rate is not Fig. 11.4.5-4
displayed on the playback Entering Heart Rate
image, take the procedure 3 as
it is.
3 Press ENTER key.

4 Execute the measurement same as ordinary examination.
Notice: It can be changed method of area measurement by using

toggle switch . (Trace/Area-length/Elipse)
3
11-96 Q1E-EA0466
[3] BI-Plane Measurement
Measure the lengths of the three axes that cross each other
at right angles, and calculate the volume by approximating
the left ventricle to a revolving ellipse.
V= π × LVL × LVD1 × LVD2

6
Fig. 11.4.5-5 Concept of BI-Plane Measurement
Table 11.4.5-3 BI-Plane Measurement
Measurement Method
Left ventricle end-diastole Distance
LVLd mm
long axis length (B- or M--mode method)
Left ventricle end-diastole
LVD1d mm
diameter-1
Left ventricle end-diastole
LVD2d mm
diameter-2
Left ventricle end-systole long
LVLs mm
axis length
LVD1s mm
diameter-1
LVD2s mm
diameter-2
LVEdV mL
volume results
LVEsV mL
volume
HR Heart rate bpm Heart rate by ECG
Report when
are registered in
patient ID menu.
Measuring procedure
Perform the measurement in the same manner as in the
Area-Length Measurement.
11-97 Q1E-EA0466
[4] Simpson Measurement
Measure the left ventricle long axis length, mitral valve
short axis area, and papillary muscle short axis area, and
obtain the left ventricular volume by using the following
equation. L AM+AP
V=AM × + × L + 1 AP × L
3 2 3 3 3
where:
L : Long axis length
AM : Short axis area at mitral valve
AP : Short axis area at papillary
muscle
Fig. 11.4.5-6 Concept of Simpson Measurement
Table 11.4.5-4 Simpson Measurement
Measurement Method
Left ventricle end-diastole Distance (B- or M-mode
LVLd mm
long axis length method)
Short-axis left ventricle area Area (Trace method)
LVAMd at mitral valve level in cm2
end-diastole
LVAPd at papillary muscle level in cm2
end-diastole
Left ventricle end-systole long Distance (B- or M-mode
LVLs mm
axis length method)
LVAMs at mitral valve level in cm2
end-systole
LVAPs at papillary muscle level in cm2
end-systole
LVEdV mL
volume results
LVEsV mL
volume
HR Heart rate bpm Heart rate by ECG SV / LVEdV
Report when
are registered in
patient ID menu.
11-98 Q1E-EA0466
Measuring procedure
[5] M.Simpson Measurement

By measuring 2 channels of left ventricle long-axis area and
4 channels of left ventricle long-axis area, and by calculating
the left ventricle volume by using the following equation,
the left ventricle cardiac functions are measured.
π n
L
V
4 ∑ai . bi n
i=1
where,
a
bi
L: Left ventricle long-axis length
L
a, b:Short-axis length (slice diameter) of
each cross-section perpendicular to the

long-axis of the left ventricle contour
divided into n-planes
n: Number of slices perpendicular to the long

axis of the left ventricle
(n=20)
Fig. 11.4.5-7 Concept of M.Simpson Measurement
11-99 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.5-5 M.Simpson Measurement
Symbol Measurement Method

Meaning Unit (see paragraph 11.3) Comments
Left ventricle end-diastole Distance (B- or M-mode LVEdV is

LVLd mm
long-axis length method) calculated.
Left ventricle end-diastole 4-ch Refer to the next page.
LVAd 4ch cm2
display area
Left ventricle end-diastole 2-ch
LVAd 2ch cm2
display area
Left ventricle end-systole Distance (B-mode method) LVEsV is
LVLs mm
long-axis length (Refer to Clause 11.3.) calculated.
Left ventricle end-systole 4-ch Refer to the next page.
LVAs 4ch cm2
display area
Left ventricle end-systole 2-ch
LVAs 2ch cm2
display area
LVEdV mL
volume result
LVEsV mL
volume
SV Stroke Volume mL LVEdV - LVEsV
CO Cardiac output L/min HR x SV

Heart rate Heart rate from ECG
HR bpm
waveform
Number of slice Data registered by preset /
(SLICE:=*) slice
FunctionMenu is displayed.
Report when
are registered in
patient ID menu.
References : Schiller, N.B., et.al. :

Quantitation of LV by 2D echo.
Journal of the American Society of Echocardiography Volume 2
Number 5 September-October 1989
11-100 Q1E-EA0466
Measuring procedure
1 Start the measurement program on the
menu, etc.
(Refer to Clause 11.2.)
2 For playback image from the VCR, input
heart rate value by referring to the
procedure of Area-Length measure-
-ment.
3 Press UNDO key to select the item
measurement. Moving the cursor to
the item name to be measured you wish
to perform, and press ENTER key to
end the procedure 3.
The left ventricle long-axis length

(LVLd and LVLs) are automatically
calculated in the measurement of the
left ventricle area (LVAd 4ch, LVAd
Fig.11.4.5-8
2ch, LVAs 4ch and LVAs 2ch),
Select item in
accordingly select the measurement of
M.Simpson
the left ventricle length only when
the measurement is to be retried.
4 The measurement of the region selected by the cursor is
carried out.
Measurement procedure for left ventricle area (LVLd 4ch,
LVLd 2ch, LVLs 4ch and LVLs 2ch)
The left ventricle area is measured by tracing the left

ventricle cross-section with the trackball and ENTER key.
In case initial slice numbers are set by Measurement Setup,

refer to [11.6.3.3 Link Setup].
When the tracing is completed, the long-axis length is
automatically calculated from the trace.
Carry out the tracing in either of the following procedures.
11-101 Q1E-EA0466
[The method to approximate the mitral valve to a straight
line]
i) Move the caliper mark to the an

i)
edge of the mitral valve.
LVL
ii) Pressing ENTER key fixes the Mitral valve

start point where the start mark
"•" is displayed. ii)-1
iii) Move the caliper mark along the

cross-sectional left ventricle
contour up to another edge of the ii)-2
mitral valve.
•
iv) Press ENTER key, then
a) The caliper mark and the start iii)

mark "•" are connected with a
straight line.
b) The longest distance from the
center position of the straight
iv)-a
line to the point on the trace line
is considered as the long-axis
length and is displayed with a
broken line.
iv)-b,c
c) The trace line is divided equally

into n-slices perpendicularly to
the long-axis and the division Fig.11.4.5-9
lines are displayed with solid Auto –tracing for
line.(n:slice number) M. Simpson
11-102 Q1E-EA0466
vi) Confirm the slice
Bellow window is displayed.
Fig.11.4.5-10 Comfirm window
a) Click Yes button, when the long-axis line and the

slicing are appropriate. The monitor change to the
next step.
b) To refer to the data of slice diameters, click

Data Disp button. Clicking ”Data Disp” first time
displays the slice diameter data of the scross-section
in end-diastole and pressing the same key second time
displays the slice diameter data of the scross-section
in end-systole.
After closing the window, please confirm again.
11-103 Q1E-EA0466
c) To correct the long-axis obtained
automatically in the step iV),
click No button. Then, the caliper
EXAM:
mark at the apex cordis side (end Wrong case
point of distance measurement) can
be moved.-(1)
Pressing UNDO key makes the caliper
mark at the mitral valve side (start
point of distance measurement)
c)-(1)
movable. Following the procedure
for the ordinary distance measure-
-ment, reset the long-axis length
by using the trackball and ENTER
key.-(2)
c)-(2)
Thus, when measurements of the left

ventricle area, long-axis length, slice
Fig.11.4.5-11
diameter and left ventricle
Correcting
area at the same time phase are completed
Long-axis length
for both 4ch display and 2ch display,
the left ventricle volume is calculated.
NOTICE: For the long-axis length in calculation of the left

ventricle volume and shown in the the display area of
measurement result, either the larger value of the
long-axis obtained in the step iV (in the cross-section
trace at the same time phase) or the value measured by
selecting the left ventricle long-axis length (LVLd or
LVLs) with UNDO key and Trackball are obtained.
11-104 Q1E-EA0466
[Method to trace whole left ventricle]
LVL
i) Move the caliper mark to the tip

Tip of mitral valve
of the mitral valve.
ii) Pressing ENTER key fixes the start i)
point where the start mark "•" is
displayed.
iii) Move the caliper mark along the
cross-sectional contour of the
left ventricle. ii)
iv) When the caliper reaches the start

mark "•", the tracing is completed, •
and the longest distance from the
start mark "•" to the point on the
trace line is considered as the iii)
long-axis length and it is
displayed with a broken line.
Then, as done for [the method to

approximate the mitral valve to a
straight line], the trace line is iv)
sliced and the left ventricle volume
is calculated.
Correction of the long-axis length
Fig.11.4.5-12
which is automatically obtained in
Tracing whole left
step iv-c) can also carried.
ventricle
i) out in the same procedure as that
for [the method to approximate the
mitral valve to a straight line].
11-105 Q1E-EA0466
5 Carry out measurements of each item in the same procedures
as the steps iii) and iV).
To retry the measurement of any item, move the cursor to
the item to be retried in the step iii), thus measurement
can be retried any times.
6 When measurements of all the items are completed, the

measurement ends. Press CLEAR key.
11-106 Q1E-EA0466
[6] Bullet Measurement
Measure the left ventricle long axis length and mitral valve
short axis area, and calculate the volume (V) by approximating
the left ventricle to a bullet, as follows:
5
V= × AM × L
6
where:
L : Long axis length
AM : Short axis area at mitral
valve
Fig. 11.4.5-13 Concept of Bullet Measurement
Table 11.4.5-6 Bullet Measurement
Measurement Method
Left ventricle end-diastole Distance
LVLd mm
long axis length (B- or M-mode method)
LVAMd at mitral valve level in cm2
end-diastole
Left ventricle end-systole long Distance (B- or M-mode
LVLs mm
axis length method)
LVAMs at mitral valve level in cm2
end-systole
LVEdV mL
volume results
LVEsV mL
volume
CO Cardiac output L/min HR×SV
HR Heart rate bpm Heart rate by ECG SV / LVEdV
2
CI Cardiac Index L/(mL･m ) CO/BSA Be displayed on
SI Stroke Index mL/m 2
SV/BSA Report when
height and weight
are registered in
patient ID menu.
Measuring procedure
11-107 Q1E-EA0466
[7] MV Regurg. Measurement
Instantaneous regurgitating flow rate, effective regurgitant

orifice and regurgitant volume of mitral valve(MV) are
calculated based on Doppler waveform trace of mitral
regurgitation or its peak velocity and PISA measurement.
PISA（proximal isovelocity surface area）:
mitral regurgitation jet due to color Doppler goes flows to

mitral regurgitant orifice, by which convergent blood flow
is generated which is sucked into the orifice. In the case
of Fig. 11.4.5.14, Regurgitant signal in blue color is
accelerated as it approaches to the regurgitant orifice which
causes a folding phenomenon (Aliasing)nd the color turns to
red or yellow. A boundary of this hemispheric folding area
is called PISA.
Adjust the aliasing velocity so that the radius of PISA is

to be 5 ~ 10mm., then start the measurement after you can
observe clearly the reverse of color in color Doppler baseline.
Regarding the shift of base line refer to [5.7.7 Selection

of CFM]
LV
Lines traced
byTrace PISA-R
measurement
MR-TVI MR
PISA
LA
MR-Vp
Fig. 11.4.5-14 Pattern image of MV Regur. Measurement
11-108 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.5-7 MV Regurg Measurement
Symbol Meaning Unit Measurement Method Comments
PISA-R PISA radius mm Distance(B-mode method)
PISA PISA area cm2 Calculated based on the 2π×(PISA-R／10)2

above
Alias Vel. Aliasing velocity m/s *2)
Vp Peak velocity of mitral m/s TRACE Values at delivery time

regurgitation from our factory are by
Measured either by Manual
manual trace method. *1)
trace or Auto-trace or Plot
TVI TIME VEROCITY m trace method. It depends Values at delivery time
INTEGRAL on the setting at from our factory are by
Measurement Set-up. manual trace method *1')
Auto-trace method
Measured either by PEAK

or MEAN or MODE
depending upon the setting
at Measurement Set-up.
Flow Rate Instantaneous mL/s Calculated by the above. PISA×(Alias Vel.／100)

regurgitating flow rate ec
ERO Effective regurgitant cm2 Flow Rate／(Vp×100)

orifice
Regurg Vol. Regurgitating volume mL ERO×TVI
Notice *1') : Calculation is carried out from the velocity value obtained
by the correction *1).
Notice *2 ) : In case of the direction of regurgitation is going away from

probe, maximum detective velocity of reverse direction in CFM
is automatically set. In case of the direction of regurgitation
is near to probe, change aliasing velocity + from - by using
function menu No.3 "Aliasing V." which is showed during you
are measuring PISA-R.(This menu isn't showed when the absolute
value of maximum detective velocity of reverse/order direction
is equal.)
Measuring method
Perform the measurement referring to
[Routine examination] in Area-Length measurement
11-109 Q1E-EA0466
[8] TV Regurg. Measurement
Instantaneous regurgitating flow rate, effective regurgitant
orifice and regurgitant volume of tricuspid valve(TV) are
calculated based on Doppler waveform trace of tricuspid
regurgitation or its peak velocity and PISA measurement.
As for PISA measurement refer to「11.4.5 [7] MV Regurg．

Measurement」.
RV PISA-R
Lines traced by
Trace
Measurement
TR-TVI RA
TV
PISA
TR-Vp
Fig. 11.4.5-15 Pattern image of TV Regurg. Measurement
11-110 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.5-8 TV Regur. Measurement
Symbol Meaning Unit Measurement Method Comments
PISA-R PISA radius mm Length(B-mode method)

PISA PISA area cm2 Calculated by the above. 2π×(PISA-R／10)2
Alias Vel. Aliasing velocity m/s *2)
Vp Peak velocity of m/s TRACE

Values at delivery from our
tricuspid regurgitation Measured either by factory is by manual trace
Manual trace or
method. *1)
Auto-trace or Plot trace
TVI TIME VEROCITY m method. It depends on Values at delivery from our
INTEGRAL the setting at factory is by manual trace
Measurement Set-up. method. *1')
Auto-trace method
Measured either by
PEAK or MEAN or
MODE depending upon
the setting at
Measurement Set-up.
Flow Rate Instantaneous mL/se Calculated by the above. PISA×(Alias Vel.／100)
regurgitating flow rate c
ERO Effective regurgitant cm2 Flow Rate／(Vp×100)
orifice
Regurg Vol. Regurgitating volume mL ERO×TVI
Notice *1'): Calculation is carried out from the velocity value obtained
by the correction *1).
Notice *2 ) : In case of the direction of regurgitation is going away from

probe, maximum detective velocity of reverse direction in CFM
is automatically set. In case of the direction of regurgitation
is near to probe, change aliasing velocity + from - by using
function menu No.3 "Aliasing V." which is showed during you
are measuring PISA-R.(This menu isn't showed when the absolute
value of maximum detective velocity of reverse/order direction
is equal.)
Measuring method
Perform the measurement referring to [Routine
examination] in Area-Length measurement
11-111 Q1E-EA0466
11.4.6 Obstetric measurement
11.4.6.1 Outline of function
The obstetric measurement includes the following functions.
(1) Various measurement functions
(a) Measurement of fetal body dimensions such as BPD and FL
― Distance, circumference (trace and oval) and area (trace
and oval)
(b) Measurement of fetal heartbeat
(c) Measurement of blood flow
(d) Measurement and calculation of AFI (amniotic fluid index)
(2) Various calculation functions
(a) Calculation of fetal weight from measured body dimensions
(b) Calculation of ratio values such as BPD/FL from measured
body dimensions
(3) Gestational age estimation function
Gestational age can be estimated from various measurement values,
calculated values and estimation table.
(4) Fetal growth diagnostic function
Fetal growth condition can be evaluated from various measurement
values, calculated values and evaluation table. The evaluation
value can be quantitatively displayed with percentile or
standard deviation.
(5) Reporting function

Various measurement values and calculated values can be
displayed in a table report.
Alternative description of examination findings and comments
can also be entered.
(6) Graph display function
Gestational age estimation table, growth evaluation table and
calculation results can be displayed in graph.
(7) Twin measurement function
Measurement of twin can be simultaneously performed.
11-112 Q1E-EA0466
11.4.6.2 Outline of operation
Typical operation procedures in obstetric measurement are
shown below.
(1) Operation procedures of gestational age diagnosis

(a) Input patient data such as ID.
ID input (b) Start the Obstetric Measurement
program.
The Obstetric Measurement menu is
Starting obstetric displayed at the left side of the
measurement program screen.
(c) Displaying an acquired image,
select the measurements such as
Display of ultrasound image
BPD from the Obstetric Measure-
and measurement
-ment menu and make measurements.
(d) The gestational age and expected
Estimation of gestational age date of confinement are
and date of confinement automatically calculated from the
data of various measurements and
displayed. From these data,
Report display of obstetric perform comparative evaluation
measurement results and estimate gestational age.
(e) The measurement results can be
displayed as obstetric
measurement report.
11-113 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Operation procedures of fetal growth diagnosis
(a) Input patient data such as ID.
ID input and DGA input
Together with the patient data,
input the expected date of
confinement of fetus by using the
DGA Input function, thereby
gestational age DGA at examination
date is calculated.
In addition to expected date of
confinement, DGA can also be
calculated from the gestational
age by the past examination.
(b) Start the Obstetric Measurement
Starting obstetric
program.
measurement program
The Obstetric Measurement menu is
displayed at the left side of the
screen.
In the case DGA was not input at
the time of ID entry, DGA can also
be input after starting the
Obstetric Measurement program.
Display of ultrasound image
and measurement (c) Displaying an acquired image,
select the measurements such as BPD
from the Obstetric Measurement
menu and make measurements.
(d) SD (standard deviation) and % value
Estimation of gestational weeks by DGA for each measurement are
and date of confinement
automatically calculated and
displayed in the measurement
result display area, thereby
growth evaluation can be
periodically performed.
The results can also be displayed
in graph for visual check.
Report display of obstetric (e) The measurement results can be

measurement results displayed as obstetric
measurement report.
11-114 Q1E-EA0466
11.4.6.3 Preset measurement items and report display items
Three measurement groups have been registered in the
Obstetric Measurement function and any of them can be used
for the intended examination.
OB-STD (general)
Various measurement items are provided and the
AIUM-compliant report description items are also included.
Weight can also be displayed in lbs. It is necessary to
register evaluation tables, fetal weight estimation
equation, etc. prior to starting the program.
OB-Todai(Tokyo University method-compliant)
Measurement variables and evaluation tables based on the
report "Creation of standard values in ultrasound
measurement" by Norio Shinotsuka, et al, Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics; Vol 23; No. 12; 877-888; 1996 have been
registered, which can be used without modification.
OB-OsakaU (Osaka University method-compliant)
Measurement variables and evaluation tables based on the
report "Diagnosis of fetal growth" by Mineo Aoki, et al,
Obstetrics and Gynecology Therapy; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
have been registered, which can be used without
modification.
For details of settings in each group, refer to Table
11.4.6.3-1 ~ Table 11.4.6.3-6.
OB-STD measurement can be used only in the factory shipment.

In case of need OB-Todai or OB-Osaka U or OB-JSUM, by using
[Additional Settings] of measurement export/import
function, replace from OB-STD to OB-Todai or OB-Osaka U or
OB-JSUM. Refer to item 11.6.6 Measurement Export/Import
function.
Any of the settings in each measurement group can be changed
as required, and addition and deletion of measurement item,
modification of calculation equation, edition of evaluation
table are also possible. Furthermore a new measurement
group can be created. For operation procedures for
modification and group creation, refer to "11.6.2 Measure-
-ment Setup".
11-115 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.3-1 Measurement Items List (OB-STD) (1/2)
Measurement Measurement Measurement Calculation
Unit Remarks
name item mode equation
Fetal Para. GS Distance (B-mode) mm -
CRL Distance (B-mode) mm -
LV Distance (B-mode) mm -
BPD Distance (B-mode) mm -
OFD Distance (B-mode) mm -
HC Circumference mm - Ellipse
(B-mode
LVW Distance (B-mode) mm -
HW Distance (B-mode) mm -
TCD Distance (B-mode) mm -
BD Distance (B-mode) mm -
IOD Distance (B-mode) mm -
OD Distance (B-mode) mm -
APTD Distance (B-mode) mm -
TTD Distance (B-mode) mm -
AC Circumference mm - Ellipse
(B-mode)
FTA Area (B-mode) cm2 - Ellipse
HL Distance (B-mode) mm -
ULNA Distance (B-mode) mm -
RAD Distance (B-mode) mm -
FL Distance (B-mode) mm -
TIB Distance (B-mode) mm -
FIB Distance (B-mode) mm -
EFBW1 Calculation g No registration at factory
EFBW1_1 Calculation lbs No registration at factory lbs unit
bs
EFBW2 Calculation g No registration at factory
EFBW2_1 Calculation lbs No registration at factory lbs unit
bs
EFBWT Calculation g No registration at factory for twin
CI Calculation - BPD/OFD*100
HC/AC Calculation - HC/AC
FL/AC Calculation - FL/AC
FL/BPD Calculation - FL/BPD
LVW/HW Calculation - LVW/HW
APTD×TTD Calculation cm2 APTD * TTD * 0.01
11-116 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.3-1 Measurement Items List (OB-STD) (2/2)
Unit Remarks
AFFI Q1 Distance (B-mode) mm -
Q2 Distance (B-mode) mm -
AFI Calculation mm Q1+Q2+Q3+Q4
Umbil.A. Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
Vd Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
Vm Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or
manual
S/D Calculation - Vs/Vd waveform
RI Calculation - (Vs-Vd)/Vs trace
PI Calculation - (Vs-Vd)Vm
R-Uterine Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
L-Uterine Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
Desc A. Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
MCA Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
Card.Activ. T Time (D-mode) ms -
RR Time (D-mode) ms - T/BEAT
HR Calculation bpm - 60×1000/HR
11-117 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.3-2 Measurement Items List (OB-Todai)
Unit Remarks
Fetal Para. BPD Distance mm -
FL Distance mm -
AC Circumference mm - Ellipse
APTD Distance mm -
TTD Distance mm
APTD×TTD Calculation cm2 APTD * TTD *
0.01
EFBW Calculation g (1.07*BPD^3+
3.42*APTD*
TTD*FL)*0.001
manual
Uterine Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
manual
manual
Card.Activ. T Time (D-mode) ms -
RR Time (D-mode) ms - T/BEAT
11-118 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.3-3 Measurement Items List (OB-OsakaU)
Unit Remarks
Fetal Para. CRL Distance mm -
BPD Distance mm -
FL Distance mm -
HL Distance mm -
FTA B-Area cm2 Ellipse
EFBW Calculation g 6.3+1.25647*
(BPD/10)^3+
0.350665*FTA*F
L
manual
Uterine Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
manual
manual
Card.Activ. T Time (D-mode) S -
RR Time (D-mode) 1ms - T/BEAT
11-119 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.3-4 Measurement Items List for Report (OB-STD)
Measurement Entry
Item Content Remarks
name method
Card. Activ. Fetal Rhythm Fetal heartbeat Selection REG : Normal
rhythm IRR : Arrythmia
NONE : None
Biophysical Score Biophysical score Score selection Based on Manning method
dialog
Gest.Status Plac Loc[H] Placenta position Selection ANT : Anterior
(Horiz. direction) POST : Posterior
RIGHT : Right
LEFT : Left
Plac Loc[V] Placenta position Selection FUND : Fundus
(Vert. direction) MID : Middle
LOW : Lower
PREVIA: Placenta previa
(uterus opening)
Plac Grade Placenta glading Selection Evaluation of morphological
change in placenta in 4
levels from grade 0 to 3
NML : Normal
Amniotic Fl.V. Amniotic fluid Selection POLY : Polyhydramnios
volume OLIG : Oligoamnios
Fetus/Number of fetus in
Fetal Number Number of fetus Selection uterus (0: Stillbirth)
CEPH : Cephalad
BRC : Breech
TRV : Transverse
OBL : Oblique
VAR : ______(Normal)
Yes/No/NA
Fetal Ana. Head Fetal head Selection Yes/No/NA
Ventricles Vertebra Selection Yes/No/NA
Cerebellum Cerebellum Selection Yes/No/NA
Nuchal Fold NUCHAL FOLD Selection Yes/No/NA
Face Face Selection Yes/No/NA
Nostrils Nasal foramen Selection Yes/No/NA
Lips Lip Selection Yes/No/NA
Spine Spinal column Selection Yes/No/NA
4 Cham Heart 4 Cardiac chambers Selection Yes/No/NA
Chest Chest Selection Yes/No/NA
Stomach Stomach Selection Yes/No/NA
Cord Insertion Umbilical cord Selection Yes/No/NA
3 Vessel Cord 3 umbilical vessel Selection Yes/No/NA
depiction Selection Yes/No/NA
Bowel Intestinal tract Selection Yes/No/NA
Kidneys Kidney Selection Yes/No/NA
Bladder Fetal bladder Selection Yes/No/NA
Maternal Cervix Uterine cervix Selection Yes/No/NA
Fundus Uterine fundus Selection Yes/No/NA
Adnexal Ovary & others Selection
11-120 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.3-5 Measurement Items List for Report (OB-Todai)
Measurement Entry
name method
NONE : None
Table 11.4.6.3-6 Measurement Items List for Report (OB-OsakaU)

Measurement Entry
name method
NONE : None
11.4.6.4 Operation
Measurement operation is same as that of other measurement
functions. Pressing Meas. Menu button and others, display
the Measurement menu to start the Measurement program. For
Report and Graph Display functions, refer to "11.6
Measurement Report function".
11.4.6.5 Input to DGA
By manually inputting the known data such as expected date
of confinement (EDC) on DGA Input dialog, diagnosed
gestational age (DGA) of the fetus at examination date is
calculated.
(1) Pressing F2 key displays the following DGA Input dialog.
Fig. 11.4.6.5-1 DGA Input Dialog
11-121 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Select an item in Defined by area.
LMP : Last menstrual period
EDC : Expected date of confinement
First DGA : Gestational age diagnosed by physician at the
first or previous examination date
Today’s DGA : Today’s DGA
(3) Input Date and Week.
Table 11.4.6.5-1 Input Data and Week
Defined by Date Week DGA calculation equation
LMP Last menstrual --- Examination date - Date
period
EDC Expected date of --- Gestational age -
confinement (Date - Examination date)
FIRST DGA First or previous DGA at first or previous Examination date*1 -
examination date examination date Date + Week
Today’s DGA --- Today’s DGA Week
*1)Gestational age can be changed by property for OB measurement.

Refer to "11.6.2.2 Measurement type".
(4) Finally press OK button to define the input. To cancel the input,
press Cancel button.
11-122 Q1E-EA0466
11.4.6.6 Major abbreviations
Table 11.4.6.6 Major abbreviations
Abbreviation Full spelling
LMP Last Menstrual Period
DGA Diagnosed Gestational Age
EDC Expected Date of Confinement
GS Gestational Sac
CRL Crown Rum Length
LV Length of Vertebrae
BPD Biparietal Diameter
OFD Occipital Frontal Diameter
HC Head Circumference
LVW Lateral Ventricular Width
HW Hemispheric Width
TCD Transverse Cerebeller Diameter
BD Binocular Distance
IOD Inter Orbital Distance
OD Ocular Diameter
APTD Antero Posterior Diameter of fetal Trunk
TTD Transverse Diameter of fetal Trunk
AC Abdominal Circumference
FTA Fetal Trunk cross-sectional Area
HL Humerus Length
FL Femur Length
ULNA ULNA length
RAD RADius length
TIB TIBia length
FIB FIBula length
CI Cephalic Index (BPD/OFD)
EFBW Estimated Fetal Body Weight
AFI Amniotic Fluid Index
SD Standard Deviation
UMBIL A Umbilical Artery
UTERINE Uterine Artery
DESC.A Descending Artery
MCA Middle Cerebral Artery
S/D Systole/Diastole flow ratio
PI Pulsatility Index
RI Resistance Index
11-123 Q1E-EA0466
11.4.6.7 Setting obstetric measurement display items
Obstetric measurement display items can be set on the
property setting screen for obstetric measurement as shown
in "11.5.2.2 Measurement type". Each item shown below has
a different recommended value for each of "OB-Todai",
"OB-OsakaU",”OB-JSUM” and "OB-STD". Set each item
according to the obstetric measurement method to be used.
Table 11.4.6.7 Obstetric measurement display items

OB Measurement setting value (recommended)
Setting item
OB-Todai OB-OsakaU OB-JSUM OB-STD
GA and EDC by U/S ON OFF ON ON
GA and EDC by LMP ON ON ON ON
GA and EDC without AC ON OFF ON ON
GA and EDC by DGA ON ON ON ON
EDC based on each item ON ON ON ON
Ranking based on GA by U/S OFF OFF OFF ON
11-124 Q1E-EA0466
11.4.6.8 Stored table data and fetal weight calculation equation
The equipment stores estimated gestational age table data,
fetal growth evaluation table data, ratio range table data,
AFI table data, fetal weight table data and fetal weight
calculation equation. Before using any of these data, refer
to the reference documents.
11-125 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.8-1 Obstetric Table Data (1/8) for USA
1. BPD 2. BPD 3. BPD 4. HC
HAD84 ; Age table HAD84 ; Growth table SABB78 ; Age table HAD84 ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; circ.
Data unit ; mm Data unit ; mm Data unit ; mm Data unit ; mm
Variation ; +/- 2SD Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation ; +/- 2SD
(+/- 1.64SD)
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR
1: 16.0 12w2d 8d 1: 12w0d 14.0 17.0 20.0 1: 28.0 14w0d 7d 1: 60.0 12w2d 8d
2: 18.0 12w5d 8d 2: 13w0d 18.0 21.0 24.0 2: 32.0 15w0d 7d 2: 65.0 12w4d 8d
3: 20.0 13w1d 8d 3: 14w0d 22.0 25.0 28.0 3: 36.0 16w0d 7d 3: 70.0 12w5d 8d
4: 22.0 13w4d 8d 4: 15w0d 26.0 29.0 32.0 4: 39.0 17w0d 10d 4: 75.0 13w0d 8d
5: 24.0 14w0d 8d 5: 16w0d 29.0 32.0 35.0 5: 42.0 18w0d 10d 5: 80.0 13w2d 8d
6: 26.0 14w3d 8d 6: 17w0d 33.0 36.0 39.0 6: 45.0 19w0d 10d 6: 85.0 13w4d 8d
7: 28.0 15w0d 8d 7: 18w0d 36.0 39.0 42.0 7: 48.0 20w0d 10d 7: 90.0 14w0d 8d
8: 30.0 15w3d 8d 8: 19w0d 40.0 43.0 46.0 8: 51.0 21w0d 10d 8: 95.0 14w2d 8d
9: 32.0 16w0d 8d 9: 20w0d 43.0 46.0 49.0 9: 54.0 22w0d 10d 9: 100.0 14w4d 8d
10: 34.0 16w3d 8d 10: 21w0d 47.0 50.0 53.0 10: 58.0 23w0d 10d 10: 105.0 15w0d 8d
11: 36.0 17w0d 8d 11: 22w0d 50.0 53.0 56.0 11: 61.0 24w0d 10d 11: 110.0 15w2d 8d
12: 38.0 17w4d 8d 12: 23w0d 53.0 56.0 59.0 12: 64.0 25w0d 10d 12: 115.0 15w4d 8d
13: 40.0 18w0d 11d 13: 24w0d 56.0 59.0 62.0 13: 67.0 26w0d 10d 13: 120.0 16w0d 8d
14: 42.0 18w4d 11d 14: 25w0d 59.0 62.0 65.0 14: 70.0 27w0d 14d 14: 125.0 16w2d 8d
15: 44.0 19w2d 11d 15: 26w0d 62.0 65.0 68.0 15: 72.0 28w0d 14d 15: 130.0 16w4d 8d
16: 46.0 19w6d 11d 16: 27w0d 65.0 68.0 71.0 16: 75.0 29w0d 21d 16: 135.0 17w0d 8d
17: 48.0 20w3d 11d 17: 28w0d 68.0 71.0 74.0 17: 78.0 30w0d 21d 17: 140.0 17w2d 8d
18: 50.0 21w0d 11d 18: 29w0d 70.0 73.0 76.0 18: 80.0 31w0d 21d 18: 145.0 17w4d 8d
19: 52.0 21w5d 11d 19: 30w0d 73.0 76.0 79.0 19: 82.0 32w0d 21d 19: 150.0 18w0d 10d
20: 54.0 22w2d 11d 20: 31w0d 75.0 78.0 81.0 20: 85.0 33w0d 21d 20: 155.0 18w2d 10d
21: 56.0 23w0d 11d 21: 32w0d 78.0 81.0 84.0 21: 87.0 34w0d 21d 21: 160.0 18w5d 10d
22: 58.0 23w5d 11d 22: 33w0d 80.0 83.0 86.0 22: 88.0 35w0d 21d 22: 165.0 19w1d 10d
23: 60.0 24w3d 15d 23: 34w0d 82.0 85.0 88.0 23: 90.0 36w0d 21d 23: 170.0 19w4d 10d
24: 62.0 25w1d 15d 24: 35w0d 84.0 87.0 90.0 24: 92.0 37w0d 21d 24: 175.0 20w0d 10d
25: 64.0 25w6d 15d 25: 36w0d 86.0 89.0 92.0 25: 93.0 38w0d 21d 25: 180.0 20w2d 10d
26: 66.0 26w4d 15d 26: 37w0d 87.0 90.0 93.0 26: 94.0 39w0d 21d 26: 185.0 20w5d 10d
27: 68.0 27w2d 15d 27: 38w0d 89.0 92.0 95.0 27: 95.0 40w0d 21d 27: 190.0 21w2d 10d
28: 70.0 28w0d 15d 28: 39w0d 90.0 93.0 96.0 28: 0.0 0w0d 0d 28: 195.0 21w4d 10d
29: 72.0 28w6d 15d 29: 40w0d 91.0 94.0 97.0 29: 0.0 0w0d 0d 29: 200.0 22w1d 10d
30: 74.0 29w4d 15d 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0.0 0w0d 0d 30: 205.0 22w4d 10d
31: 76.0 30w3d 21d 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0.0 0w0d 0d 31: 210.0 23w0d 10d
32: 78.0 31w2d 21d 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0.0 0w0d 0d 32: 215.0 23w4d 10d
33: 80.0 32w0d 21d 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0.0 0w0d 0d 33: 220.0 24w0d 14d
34: 82.0 33w0d 21d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0.0 0w0d 0d 34: 225.0 24w3d 14d
35: 84.0 33w5d 21d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0.0 0w0d 0d 35: 230.0 25w0d 14d
36: 86.0 34w4d 21d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0.0 0w0d 0d 36: 235.0 25w3d 14d
37: 88.0 35w4d 21d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 240.0 26w0d 14d
38: 90.0 36w3d 22d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 245.0 26w4d 14d
39: 92.0 37w2d 22d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 250.0 27w0d 14d
40: 94.0 38w2d 22d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 255.0 27w4d 14d
41: 96.0 39w1d 22d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 260.0 28w2d 14d
42: 98.0 40w1d 22d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 265.0 28w6d 14d
43: 100.0 41w0d 22d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 270.0 29w2d 14d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 275.0 30w0d 21d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 280.0 30w4d 21d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 285.0 31w2d 21d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 290.0 31w6d 21d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 295.0 32w4d 21d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 300.0 33w2d 21d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 305.0 33w6d 21d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 310.0 34w4d 21d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 315.0 35w2d 21d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 320.0 36w0d 18d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 325.0 36w5d 18d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 330.0 37w4d 18d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 335.0 38w2d 18d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 340.0 39w0d 18d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 345.0 39w6d 18d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 350.0 40w4d 18d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 355.0 41w4d 18d
Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-4 No. 1 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-4 No. 2 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-4 No. 3 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-4 No. 4
11-126 Q1E-EA0466
5. HC 6. AC 7. AC 8. FL
HAD84 ; Growth table HAD84 ; Age table HAD84 ; Growth table HAD84 ; Growth table
Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; distance
Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; +/- 2SD Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table
No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX.
1: 12w0d 58.0 68.0 78.0 1: 60.0 12w5d 11d 1: 12w0d 32.6 46.0 59.4 1: 12w0d 4.0 7.0 10.0
2: 13w0d 72.0 82.0 92.0 2: 70.0 13w4d 11d 2: 13w0d 46.6 60.0 73.4 2: 13w0d 8.0 11.0 14.0
3: 14w0d 87.0 97.0 107.0 3: 80.0 14w2d 11d 3: 14w0d 59.6 73.0 86.4 3: 14w0d 11.0 14.0 17.0
4: 15w0d 100.0 110.0 120.0 4: 90.0 15w1d 11d 4: 15w0d 72.6 86.0 99.4 4: 15w0d 14.0 17.0 20.0
5: 16w0d 114.0 124.0 134.0 5: 100.0 16w0d 11d 5: 16w0d 85.6 99.0 112.4 5: 16w0d 17.0 20.0 23.0
6: 17w0d 128.0 138.0 148.0 6: 110.0 16w6d 11d 6: 17w0d 98.6 112.0 125.4 6: 17w0d 21.0 24.0 27.0
7: 18w0d 141.0 151.0 161.0 7: 120.0 17w4d 11d 7: 18w0d 111.6 125.0 138.4 7: 18w0d 24.0 27.0 30.0
8: 19w0d 154.0 164.0 174.0 8: 130.0 18w3d 14d 8: 19w0d 123.6 137.0 150.4 8: 19w0d 27.0 30.0 33.0
9: 20w0d 167.0 177.0 187.0 9: 140.0 19w2d 14d 9: 20w0d 136.6 150.0 163.4 9: 20w0d 30.0 33.0 36.0
10: 21w0d 179.0 189.0 199.0 10: 150.0 20w1d 14d 10: 21w0d 148.6 162.0 175.4 10: 21w0d 32.0 35.0 38.0
11: 22w0d 191.0 201.0 211.0 11: 160.0 21w0d 14d 11: 22w0d 160.6 174.0 187.4 11: 22w0d 35.0 38.0 41.0
12: 23w0d 203.0 213.0 223.0 12: 170.0 22w0d 14d 12: 23w0d 171.6 185.0 198.4 12: 23w0d 38.0 41.0 44.0
13: 24w0d 214.0 224.0 234.0 13: 180.0 22w6d 14d 13: 24w0d 183.6 197.0 210.4 13: 24w0d 41.0 44.0 47.0
14: 25w0d 225.0 235.0 245.0 14: 190.0 23w4d 14d 14: 25w0d 194.6 208.0 221.4 14: 25w0d 43.0 46.0 49.0
15: 26w0d 236.0 246.0 256.0 15: 200.0 24w4d 15d 15: 26w0d 205.6 219.0 232.4 15: 26w0d 46.0 49.0 52.0
16: 27w0d 246.0 256.0 266.0 16: 210.0 25w3d 15d 16: 27w0d 216.6 230.0 243.4 16: 27w0d 48.0 51.0 54.0
17: 28w0d 256.0 266.0 276.0 17: 220.0 26w2d 15d 17: 28w0d 226.6 240.0 253.4 17: 28w0d 51.0 54.0 57.0
18: 29w0d 265.0 275.0 285.0 18: 230.0 27w2d 15d 18: 29w0d 237.6 251.0 264.4 18: 29w0d 53.0 56.0 59.0
19: 30w0d 274.0 284.0 294.0 19: 240.0 28w2d 15d 19: 30w0d 247.6 261.0 274.4 19: 30w0d 55.0 58.0 61.0
20: 31w0d 283.0 293.0 303.0 20: 250.0 29w1d 15d 20: 31w0d 257.6 271.0 284.4 20: 31w0d 57.0 60.0 63.0
21: 32w0d 291.0 301.0 311.0 21: 260.0 30w1d 21d 21: 32w0d 267.6 281.0 294.4 21: 32w0d 59.0 62.0 65.0
22: 33w0d 298.0 308.0 318.0 22: 270.0 31w0d 21d 22: 33w0d 277.6 291.0 304.4 22: 33w0d 61.0 64.0 67.0
23: 34w0d 305.0 315.0 325.0 23: 280.0 32w0d 21d 23: 34w0d 286.6 300.0 313.4 23: 34w0d 63.0 66.0 69.0
24: 35w0d 312.0 322.0 332.0 24: 290.0 33w0d 21d 24: 35w0d 295.6 309.0 322.4 24: 35w0d 65.0 68.0 71.0
25: 36w0d 318.0 328.0 338.0 25: 300.0 34w0d 21d 25: 36w0d 304.6 318.0 331.4 25: 36w0d 67.0 70.0 73.0
26: 37w0d 323.0 333.0 343.0 26: 310.0 34w6d 21d 26: 37w0d 313.6 327.0 340.4 26: 37w0d 69.0 72.0 75.0
27: 38w0d 328.0 338.0 348.0 27: 320.0 35w6d 21d 27: 38w0d 322.6 336.0 349.4 27: 38w0d 71.0 74.0 77.0
28: 39w0d 332.0 342.0 352.0 28: 330.0 36w6d 21d 28: 39w0d 330.6 344.0 357.4 28: 39w0d 72.0 75.0 78.0
29: 40w0d 336.0 346.0 356.0 29: 340.0 37w6d 21d 29: 40w0d 339.6 353.0 366.4 29: 40w0d 74.0 77.0 80.0
30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 350.0 38w6d 21d 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 360.0 39w6d 21d 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 370.0 40w6d 21d 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 380.0 42w0d 21d 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0.0 0w0d 0d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0.0 0w0d 0d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0.0 0w0d 0d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
11-127 Q1E-EA0466
9. FL 10. FL 11. FL 12. CRL
HAD82 ; Age table JEAN84 ; Age table JEAN83 ; Growth table ROB75 ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance
Variation ; +/- 2SD Variation ; 90% confidence Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation;95% confidence
interval interval
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR
1: 10.0 12w6d 9d 1: 10.0 12w4d 16d 1: 12w0d 4.0 8.0 13.0 1: 5.5 6w2d 4d
2: 12.0 13w3d 9d 2: 12.0 13w2d 16d 2: 13w0d 6.0 11.0 16.0 2: 6.1 6w3d 4d
3: 14.0 13w6d 9d 3: 14.0 13w6d 15d 3: 14w0d 9.0 14.0 18.0 3: 6.8 6w4d 4d
4: 16.0 14w4d 9d 4: 16.0 14w4d 16d 4: 15w0d 12.0 17.0 21.0 4: 7.5 6w5d 4d
5: 18.0 15w1d 9d 5: 18.0 15w0d 16d 5: 16w0d 15.0 20.0 24.0 5: 8.1 6w6d 4d
6: 20.0 15w5d 9d 6: 20.0 15w6d 15d 6: 17w0d 18.0 23.0 27.0 6: 8.9 7w0d 4d
7: 22.0 16w2d 9d 7: 22.0 16w4d 16d 7: 18w0d 21.0 25.0 30.0 7: 9.6 7w1d 4d
8: 24.0 16w6d 9d 8: 24.0 17w2d 16d 8: 19w0d 24.0 28.0 33.0 8: 10.4 7w2d 4d
9: 26.0 17w4d 9d 9: 26.0 18w0d 14d 9: 20w0d 26.0 31.0 36.0 9: 11.2 7w3d 4d
10: 28.0 18w1d 9d 10: 28.0 18w4d 15d 10: 21w0d 29.0 34.0 38.0 10: 12.0 7w4d 4d
11: 30.0 18w6d 9d 11: 30.0 19w2d 15d 11: 22w0d 32.0 36.0 41.0 11: 12.9 7w5d 4d
12: 32.0 19w4d 9d 12: 32.0 20w0d 15d 12: 23w0d 35.0 39.0 44.0 12: 13.8 7w6d 4d
13: 34.0 20w2d 9d 13: 34.0 20w6d 15d 13: 24w0d 37.0 42.0 46.0 13: 14.7 8w0d 4d
14: 36.0 21w0d 9d 14: 36.0 21w4d 16d 14: 25w0d 40.0 44.0 49.0 14: 15.7 8w1d 4d
15: 38.0 21w6d 9d 15: 38.0 22w2d 15d 15: 26w0d 42.0 47.0 51.0 15: 16.6 8w2d 4d
16: 40.0 22w4d 9d 16: 40.0 23w0d 15d 16: 27w0d 45.0 49.0 54.0 16: 17.6 8w3d 4d
17: 42.0 23w2d 22d 17: 42.0 23w6d 15d 17: 28w0d 47.0 52.0 56.0 17: 18.7 8w4d 4d
18: 44.0 24w1d 22d 18: 44.0 24w4d 15d 18: 29w0d 50.0 54.0 59.0 18: 19.7 8w5d 4d
19: 46.0 24w6d 22d 19: 46.0 25w2d 15d 19: 30w0d 52.0 56.0 61.0 19: 20.8 8w6d 4d
20: 48.0 25w5d 22d 20: 48.0 26w0d 16d 20: 31w0d 54.0 59.0 63.0 20: 21.9 9w0d 4d
21: 50.0 26w4d 22d 21: 50.0 27w0d 14d 21: 32w0d 56.0 61.0 65.0 21: 23.1 9w1d 4d
22: 52.0 27w3d 22d 22: 52.0 27w6d 14d 22: 33w0d 58.0 63.0 67.0 22: 24.2 9w2d 4d
23: 54.0 28w1d 22d 23: 54.0 28w4d 16d 23: 34w0d 60.0 65.0 69.0 23: 25.4 9w3d 4d
24: 56.0 29w1d 22d 24: 56.0 29w4d 14d 24: 35w0d 62.0 67.0 71.0 24: 26.7 9w4d 4d
25: 58.0 30w0d 22d 25: 58.0 30w2d 16d 25: 36w0d 64.0 68.0 73.0 25: 27.9 9w5d 4d
26: 60.0 30w6d 22d 26: 60.0 31w0d 15d 26: 37w0d 65.0 70.0 74.0 26: 29.2 9w6d 4d
27: 62.0 31w6d 22d 27: 62.0 32w0d 14d 27: 38w0d 67.0 71.0 76.0 27: 30.5 10w0d 4d
28: 64.0 32w6d 22d 28: 64.0 32w6d 15d 28: 39w0d 68.0 73.0 77.0 28: 31.8 10w1d 4d
29: 66.0 33w6d 22d 29: 66.0 33w4d 15d 29: 40w0d 70.0 74.0 79.0 29: 33.2 10w2d 4d
30: 68.0 34w5d 22d 30: 68.0 34w4d 16d 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 34.6 10w3d 4d
31: 70.0 35w5d 22d 31: 70.0 35w4d 14d 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 36.0 10w4d 4d
32: 72.0 36w5d 22d 32: 72.0 36w2d 15d 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 37.4 10w5d 4d
33: 74.0 37w5d 22d 33: 74.0 37w2d 16d 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 38.9 10w6d 4d
34: 76.0 38w6d 22d 34: 76.0 38w0d 16d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 40.4 11w0d 4d
35: 78.0 39w6d 22d 35: 78.0 39w0d 15d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 41.9 11w1d 4d
36: 79.0 40w3d 22d 36: 80.0 40w0d 14d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 43.5 11w2d 4d
37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 45.1 11w3d 4d
38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 46.7 11w4d 4d
39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 48.3 11w5d 4d
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 50.0 11w6d 4d
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 51.7 12w0d 4d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 53.4 12w1d 4d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 55.2 12w2d 4d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 57.0 12w3d 4d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 58.8 12w4d 4d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 60.6 12w5d 4d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 62.5 12w6d 4d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 64.3 13w0d 4d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 66.3 13w1d 4d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 68.2 13w2d 4d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 70.2 13w3d 4d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 72.2 13w4d 4d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 74.2 13w5d 4d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 76.3 13w6d 4d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 78.3 14w0d 4d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-128 Q1E-EA0466
13. GS 14. HL 15. BD 16. FIB
HEL69 ; Age table JEAN84 ; Age table MAY82 ; Growth table JEAN83 ; Growth table
Variation ; None Variation; 90% confidence Variation ; 5%,50%,95% Variation ; 5%,50%,95%
interval
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX.
1: 10.0 5w0d 0d 1: 10.0 12w4d 18d 1: 12w0d 11.0 16.0 20.0 1: 14w0d 6.0 12.0 19.0
2: 11.0 5w1d 0d 2: 11.0 12w6d 18d 2: 13w0d 14.0 18.0 23.0 2: 15w0d 9.0 15.0 21.0
3: 12.0 5w2d 0d 3: 12.0 13w0d 19d 3: 14w0d 16.0 20.0 25.0 3: 16w0d 13.0 18.0 23.0
4: 13.0 5w3d 0d 4: 13.0 13w4d 17d 4: 15w0d 18.0 23.0 27.0 4: 17w0d 13.0 21.0 28.0
5: 14.0 5w4d 0d 5: 14.0 13w6d 18d 5: 16w0d 20.0 25.0 29.0 5: 18w0d 15.0 23.0 31.0
6: 15.0 5w5d 0d 6: 15.0 14w0d 19d 6: 17w0d 22.0 27.0 31.0 6: 19w0d 19.0 26.0 33.0
7: 16.0 5w6d 0d 7: 16.0 14w4d 18d 7: 18w0d 24.0 29.0 33.0 7: 20w0d 21.0 28.0 36.0
8: 17.0 6w0d 0d 8: 17.0 14w6d 18d 8: 20w0d 28.0 33.0 37.0 8: 21w0d 24.0 31.0 37.0
9: 18.0 6w1d 0d 9: 18.0 15w0d 20d 9: 21w0d 30.0 35.0 39.0 9: 22w0d 27.0 33.0 39.0
10: 19.0 6w2d 0d 10: 19.0 15w4d 18d 10: 22w0d 32.0 36.0 41.0 10: 23w0d 28.0 35.0 42.0
11: 20.0 6w3d 0d 11: 20.0 15w6d 19d 11: 23w0d 34.0 38.0 43.0 11: 24w0d 29.0 37.0 45.0
12: 21.0 6w4d 0d 12: 21.0 16w2d 19d 12: 24w0d 35.0 40.0 44.0 12: 25w0d 34.0 40.0 45.0
13: 22.0 6w5d 0d 13: 22.0 16w4d 18d 13: 25w0d 37.0 42.0 46.0 13: 26w0d 36.0 42.0 47.0
14: 23.0 6w6d 0d 14: 23.0 17w0d 19d 14: 26w0d 39.0 43.0 47.0 14: 27w0d 37.0 44.0 50.0
15: 24.0 7w0d 0d 15: 24.0 17w2d 18d 15: 27w0d 40.0 45.0 49.0 15: 28w0d 38.0 45.0 53.0
16: 25.0 7w1d 0d 16: 25.0 17w6d 18d 16: 28w0d 42.0 46.0 51.0 16: 29w0d 41.0 47.0 54.0
17: 26.0 7w2d 0d 17: 26.0 18w0d 20d 17: 29w0d 43.0 48.0 52.0 17: 30w0d 43.0 49.0 56.0
18: 27.0 7w3d 0d 18: 27.0 18w4d 19d 18: 30w0d 45.0 49.0 53.0 18: 31w0d 42.0 51.0 59.0
19: 28.0 7w4d 0d 19: 28.0 19w0d 20d 19: 31w0d 46.0 50.0 55.0 19: 32w0d 42.0 52.0 63.0
20: 29.0 7w5d 0d 20: 29.0 19w2d 18d 20: 32w0d 47.0 52.0 56.0 20: 33w0d 46.0 54.0 62.0
21: 30.0 7w6d 0d 21: 30.0 19w6d 18d 21: 33w0d 49.0 53.0 57.0 21: 34w0d 46.0 55.0 65.0
22: 31.0 8w0d 0d 22: 31.0 20w2d 18d 22: 34w0d 50.0 54.0 58.0 22: 35w0d 51.0 57.0 62.0
23: 32.0 8w1d 0d 23: 32.0 20w4d 20d 23: 35w0d 51.0 55.0 60.0 23: 36w0d 54.0 58.0 63.0
24: 33.0 8w2d 0d 24: 33.0 21w0d 19d 24: 36w0d 52.0 56.0 61.0 24: 37w0d 54.0 59.0 65.0
25: 34.0 8w3d 0d 25: 34.0 21w4d 18d 25: 37w0d 53.0 57.0 62.0 25: 38w0d 56.0 61.0 65.0
26: 35.0 8w4d 0d 26: 35.0 22w0d 20d 26: 38w0d 54.0 58.0 63.0 26: 39w0d 56.0 62.0 67.0
27: 36.0 8w5d 0d 27: 36.0 22w4d 17d 27: 39w0d 55.0 59.0 64.0 27: 40w0d 59.0 63.0 67.0
28: 37.0 8w6d 0d 28: 37.0 22w6d 19d 28: 40w0d 56.0 60.0 64.0 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
29: 38.0 9w0d 0d 29: 38.0 23w2d 18d 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
30: 39.0 9w1d 0d 30: 39.0 23w6d 18d 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
31: 40.0 9w2d 0d 31: 40.0 24w2d 19d 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
32: 41.0 9w3d 0d 32: 41.0 24w6d 18d 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
33: 42.0 9w4d 0d 33: 42.0 25w2d 18d 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
34: 43.0 9w5d 0d 34: 43.0 25w4d 20d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
35: 44.0 9w6d 0d 35: 44.0 26w0d 20d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
36: 45.0 10w0d 0d 36: 45.0 26w4d 20d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
37: 46.0 10w1d 0d 37: 46.0 27w0d 20d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
38: 47.0 10w2d 0d 38: 47.0 27w4d 20d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
39: 48.0 10w3d 0d 39: 48.0 28w0d 20d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
40: 49.0 10w4d 0d 40: 49.0 28w6d 18d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
41: 50.0 10w5d 0d 41: 50.0 29w2d 18d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
42: 51.0 10w6d 0d 42: 51.0 29w6d 18d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
43: 52.0 11w0d 0d 43: 52.0 30w2d 19d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
44: 53.0 11w1d 0d 44: 53.0 30w6d 18d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
45: 54.0 11w2d 0d 45: 54.0 31w2d 18d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
46: 55.0 11w3d 0d 46: 55.0 32w0d 18d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
47: 56.0 11w4d 0d 47: 56.0 32w4d 18d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
48: 57.0 11w5d 0d 48: 57.0 33w0d 19d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
49: 58.0 11w6d 0d 49: 58.0 33w4d 19d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
50: 59.0 12w0d 0d 50: 59.0 34w0d 19d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
51: 60.0 12w1d 0d 51: 60.0 34w6d 18d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 61.0 35w2d 19d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 62.0 35w6d 19d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 63.0 36w4d 18d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 64.0 37w0d 19d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 65.0 37w4d 20d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 66.0 38w2d 19d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 67.0 38w6d 19d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 68.0 39w4d 18d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 69.0 40w0d 19d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
11-129 Q1E-EA0466
17. HW 18. IOD 19. LVW 20. OD
PRE86 ; Growth table MAY82 ; Growth table PRE86 ; Growth table MAY82 ; Growth table
Variation ; +/- 2.00SD table Variation ; 5%,50%,95% Variation ; +/- 2.00SD table Variation ; 5%,50%,95%
No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX.
1: 15w0d 12.0 15.0 18.0 1: 12w0d 4.0 8.0 11.0 1: 15w0d 6.0 8.0 10.0 1: 12w0d 2.0 4.0 6.0
2: 16w0d 13.0 15.0 17.0 2: 13w0d 5.0 8.0 11.0 2: 16w0d 7.0 9.0 11.0 2: 13w0d 3.0 5.0 6.0
3: 17w0d 14.0 15.0 16.0 3: 14w0d 6.0 9.0 12.0 3: 17w0d 8.0 9.0 10.0 3: 14w0d 4.0 5.0 7.0
4: 18w0d 17.0 18.0 19.0 4: 15w0d 6.0 10.0 13.0 4: 18w0d 8.0 9.0 10.0 4: 15w0d 4.0 6.0 8.0
5: 19w0d 19.0 20.0 21.0 5: 16w0d 7.0 10.0 13.0 5: 19w0d 7.0 9.0 11.0 5: 16w0d 5.0 7.0 9.0
6: 20w0d 17.0 19.0 20.0 6: 17w0d 8.0 11.0 14.0 6: 20w0d 7.0 9.0 11.0 6: 17w0d 6.0 8.0 10.0
7: 21w0d 20.0 21.0 22.0 7: 18w0d 8.0 11.0 15.0 7: 21w0d 7.0 9.0 11.0 7: 18w0d 7.0 9.0 10.0
8: 22w0d 21.0 23.0 25.0 8: 19w0d 9.0 12.0 15.0 8: 22w0d 7.0 9.0 11.0 8: 19w0d 8.0 9.0 11.0
9: 23w0d 22.0 24.0 26.0 9: 20w0d 10.0 13.0 16.0 9: 23w0d 7.0 8.0 9.0 9: 20w0d 8.0 10.0 12.0
10: 24w0d 23.0 25.0 27.0 10: 21w0d 10.0 13.0 16.0 10: 24w0d 8.0 9.0 10.0 10: 21w0d 9.0 11.0 13.0
11: 25w0d 25.0 28.0 31.0 11: 22w0d 11.0 14.0 17.0 11: 25w0d 8.0 9.0 10.0 11: 22w0d 10.0 11.0 13.0
12: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 12: 23w0d 11.0 14.0 17.0 12: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 12: 23w0d 10.0 12.0 14.0
13: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 13: 24w0d 12.0 15.0 18.0 13: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 13: 24w0d 11.0 13.0 15.0
14: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 14: 25w0d 12.0 15.0 19.0 14: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 14: 25w0d 12.0 13.0 15.0
15: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 15: 26w0d 13.0 16.0 19.0 15: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 15: 26w0d 12.0 14.0 16.0
16: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 16: 27w0d 13.0 16.0 19.0 16: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 16: 27w0d 13.0 15.0 16.0
17: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 17: 28w0d 14.0 17.0 20.0 17: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 17: 28w0d 13.0 15.0 17.0
18: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 18: 29w0d 14.0 17.0 20.0 18: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 18: 29w0d 14.0 16.0 17.0
19: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 19: 30w0d 15.0 18.0 21.0 19: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 19: 30w0d 14.0 16.0 18.0
20: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 20: 31w0d 15.0 18.0 21.0 20: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 20: 31w0d 15.0 17.0 18.0
21: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 21: 32w0d 15.0 19.0 22.0 21: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 21: 32w0d 15.0 17.0 19.0
22: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 22: 33w0d 16.0 19.0 22.0 22: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 22: 33w0d 16.0 17.0 19.0
23: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 23: 34w0d 16.0 19.0 22.0 23: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 23: 34w0d 16.0 18.0 20.0
24: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 24: 35w0d 16.0 20.0 23.0 24: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 24: 35w0d 16.0 18.0 20.0
25: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 25: 36w0d 17.0 20.0 23.0 25: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 25: 36w0d 17.0 19.0 20.0
26: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 26: 37w0d 17.0 20.0 23.0 26: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 26: 37w0d 17.0 19.0 21.0
27: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 27: 38w0d 17.0 21.0 24.0 27: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 27: 38w0d 17.0 19.0 21.0
28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 39w0d 18.0 21.0 24.0 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 39w0d 18.0 20.0 21.0
29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 40w0d 18.0 21.0 24.0 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 40w0d 18.0 20.0 22.0
30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
11-130 Q1E-EA0466
21. RAD 22. TCD 23. TIB 24 ULNA
JEAN83 ; Growth table GOLD87 ; Growth table JEAN83 ; Growth table JEAN83 ; Growth table
Variation ; 5%,50%,95% Variation ; 10%,50%,90% Variation ; 5%,50%,95% Variation ; 5%,50%,95%
1: 13w0d 6.0 10.0 14.0 1: 15w0d 10.0 14.0 16.0 1: 14w0d 7.0 12.0 17.0 1: 13w0d 5.0 10.0 15.0
2: 14w0d 8.0 13.0 17.0 2: 16w0d 14.0 16.0 17.0 2: 15w0d 9.0 15.0 20.0 2: 14w0d 8.0 13.0 18.0
3: 15w0d 11.0 15.0 20.0 3: 17w0d 16.0 17.0 18.0 3: 16w0d 12.0 17.0 22.0 3: 15w0d 11.0 16.0 21.0
4: 16w0d 13.0 18.0 22.0 4: 18w0d 17.0 18.0 19.0 4: 17w0d 15.0 20.0 25.0 4: 16w0d 13.0 18.0 23.0
5: 17w0d 14.0 20.0 26.0 5: 19w0d 18.0 19.0 22.0 5: 18w0d 17.0 22.0 27.0 5: 17w0d 16.0 21.0 26.0
6: 18w0d 15.0 22.0 29.0 6: 20w0d 18.0 20.0 22.0 6: 19w0d 20.0 25.0 30.0 6: 18w0d 19.0 24.0 29.0
7: 19w0d 20.0 24.0 29.0 7: 21w0d 19.0 22.0 24.0 7: 20w0d 22.0 27.0 33.0 7: 19w0d 21.0 26.0 31.0
8: 20w0d 22.0 27.0 32.0 8: 22w0d 21.0 23.0 24.0 8: 21w0d 25.0 30.0 35.0 8: 20w0d 24.0 29.0 34.0
9: 21w0d 24.0 29.0 33.0 9: 23w0d 22.0 24.0 26.0 9: 22w0d 27.0 32.0 38.0 9: 21w0d 26.0 31.0 36.0
10: 22w0d 27.0 31.0 34.0 10: 24w0d 22.0 25.0 28.0 10: 23w0d 30.0 35.0 40.0 10: 22w0d 28.0 33.0 38.0
11: 23w0d 26.0 32.0 39.0 11: 25w0d 23.0 28.0 29.0 11: 24w0d 32.0 37.0 42.0 11: 23w0d 31.0 36.0 41.0
12: 24w0d 26.0 34.0 42.0 12: 26w0d 25.0 29.0 32.0 12: 25w0d 34.0 40.0 45.0 12: 24w0d 33.0 38.0 43.0
13: 25w0d 31.0 36.0 41.0 13: 27w0d 26.0 30.0 32.0 13: 26w0d 37.0 42.0 47.0 13: 25w0d 35.0 40.0 45.0
14: 26w0d 32.0 37.0 43.0 14: 28w0d 27.0 31.0 34.0 14: 27w0d 39.0 44.0 49.0 14: 26w0d 37.0 42.0 47.0
15: 27w0d 33.0 39.0 45.0 15: 29w0d 29.0 34.0 38.0 15: 28w0d 41.0 46.0 51.0 15: 27w0d 39.0 44.0 49.0
16: 28w0d 33.0 40.0 48.0 16: 30w0d 31.0 35.0 40.0 16: 29w0d 43.0 48.0 53.0 16: 28w0d 41.0 46.0 51.0
17: 29w0d 36.0 42.0 47.0 17: 31w0d 32.0 38.0 43.0 17: 30w0d 45.0 50.0 55.0 17: 29w0d 43.0 48.0 53.0
18: 30w0d 36.0 43.0 49.0 18: 32w0d 33.0 38.0 42.0 18: 31w0d 47.0 52.0 57.0 18: 30w0d 44.0 49.0 54.0
19: 31w0d 38.0 44.0 50.0 19: 33w0d 32.0 40.0 44.0 19: 32w0d 48.0 54.0 59.0 19: 31w0d 46.0 51.0 56.0
20: 32w0d 37.0 45.0 53.0 20: 34w0d 33.0 40.0 44.0 20: 33w0d 50.0 55.0 60.0 20: 32w0d 48.0 53.0 58.0
21: 33w0d 41.0 46.0 51.0 21: 35w0d 31.0 41.0 47.0 21: 34w0d 52.0 57.0 62.0 21: 33w0d 49.0 54.0 59.0
22: 34w0d 40.0 47.0 53.0 22: 36w0d 36.0 43.0 55.0 22: 35w0d 53.0 58.0 64.0 22: 34w0d 51.0 56.0 61.0
23: 35w0d 41.0 48.0 54.0 23: 37w0d 37.0 45.0 55.0 23: 36w0d 55.0 60.0 65.0 23: 35w0d 52.0 57.0 62.0
24: 36w0d 39.0 48.0 57.0 24: 38w0d 40.0 49.0 55.0 24: 37w0d 56.0 61.0 67.0 24: 36w0d 53.0 58.0 63.0
25: 37w0d 45.0 49.0 53.0 25: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 25: 38w0d 58.0 63.0 68.0 25: 37w0d 55.0 60.0 65.0
26: 38w0d 45.0 49.0 54.0 26: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 26: 39w0d 59.0 64.0 69.0 26: 38w0d 56.0 61.0 66.0
27: 39w0d 45.0 50.0 54.0 27: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 27: 40w0d 61.0 66.0 71.0 27: 39w0d 57.0 62.0 67.0
28: 40w0d 46.0 50.0 55.0 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 40w0d 58.0 63.0 68.0
29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
11-131 Q1E-EA0466
25. CI(BPD/OFD) 26. FL/AC 27. FL/BPD 28. HC/AC
HAD81 ; Ratio table HAD85 ; Ratio table HOHL81 ; Ratio table CAMP77 ; Ratio table
Calculation type ; ratio Calculation type ; ratio Calculation type ; ratio Calculation type ; ratio
Data unit ; None Data unit ; None Data unit ; None Data unit ; None
Variation ; +/- 2.00SD table Variation ; +/- 2.00SD table Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table
1: 14w0d 70.0 78.0 86.0 1: 21w0d 0.2 0.22 0.24 1: 23w0d 0.70 0.78 0.86 1: 13w0d 1.15 1.23 1.31
2: 40w0d 70.0 78.0 86.0 2: 42w0d 0.2 0.22 0.24 2: 40w0d 0.73 0.81 0.89 2: 14w0d 1.15 1.23 1.31
3: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 3: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 3: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 3: 16w0d 1.05 1.22 1.39
4: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 4: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 4: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 4: 18w0d 1.07 1.18 1.29
5: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 5: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 5: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 5: 20w0d 1.10 1.18 1.26
6: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 6: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 6: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 6: 22w0d 1.05 1.15 1.25
7: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 7: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 7: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 7: 24w0d 1.05 1.13 1.21
8: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 8: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 8: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 8: 26w0d 1.04 1.13 1.22
9: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 9: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 9: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 9: 28w0d 1.04 1.13 1.22
10: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 10: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 10: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 10: 30w0d 0.99 1.10 1.21
11: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 11: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 11: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 11: 32w0d 0.97 1.07 1.17
12: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 12: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 12: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 12: 34w0d 0.97 1.04 1.11
13: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 13: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 13: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 13: 36w0d 0.93 1.02 1.11
14: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 14: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 14: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 14: 38w0d 0.91 0.98 1.05
15: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 15: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 15: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 15: 40w0d 0.88 0.97 1.06
16: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 16: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 16: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 16: 42w0d 0.92 0.96 1.00
17: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 17: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 17: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 17: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
18: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 18: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 18: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 18: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
19: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 19: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 19: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 19: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
20: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 20: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 20: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 20: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
21: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 21: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 21: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 21: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
22: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 22: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 22: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 22: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
23: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 23: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 23: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 23: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
24: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 24: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 24: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 24: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
25: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 25: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 25: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 25: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
26: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 26: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 26: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 26: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
27: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 27: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 27: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 27: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 28: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 28: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 29: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 29: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 30: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 30: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 31: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 31: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 32: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 32: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 33: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 33: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 34: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 34: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 35: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 35: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 36: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 36: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 37: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 37: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 38: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 38: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 39: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 39: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 40: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 40: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 41: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 41: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 42: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 42: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 43: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 43: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 44: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 44: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 45: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 45: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 46: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 46: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 47: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 47: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
11-132 Q1E-EA0466
29. LVW/HW 30. Amniotic Fluid Index 31. Estimated Fetal Body Weight 32. Estimated Fetal Body Weight
PRE86 ; Ratio table MOORE90 ; AFI table BRE76 ; EFBW table YARK87 ; EFBW table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; weight Calculation type ; weight
Data unit ; None Data unit ; None Data unit ; g Data unit ; g
Variation ; +/- 2.00SD table Variation ; 5%,50%,95% Variation ; 10%,50%,90% Variation ; 10%,50%,90%
1: 15w0d 0.38 0.56 0.74 1: 16w0d 79.0 121.0 185.0 1: 23w0d 370 550 990 1: 16w0d 132 154 189
2: 16w0d 0.46 0.57 0.68 2: 17w0d 83.0 127.0 194.0 2: 24w0d 420 640 1080 2: 17w0d 173 215 239
3: 17w0d 0.49 0.58 0.67 3: 18w0d 87.0 133.0 202.0 3: 25w0d 490 740 1180 3: 18w0d 214 276 289
4: 18w0d 0.41 0.51 0.61 4: 19w0d 90.0 137.0 207.0 4: 26w0d 570 860 1320 4: 19w0d 223 300 333
5: 19w0d 0.41 0.49 0.57 5: 20w0d 93.0 141.0 212.0 5: 27w0d 660 990 1470 5: 20w0d 232 324 378
6: 20w0d 0.38 0.46 0.54 6: 21w0d 95.0 143.0 214.0 6: 28w0d 770 1150 1660 6: 21w0d 275 432 482
7: 21w0d 0.31 0.42 0.53 7: 22w0d 97.0 145.0 216.0 7: 29w0d 890 1310 1890 7: 22w0d 319 540 586
8: 22w0d 0.29 0.40 0.51 8: 23w0d 98.0 146.0 218.0 8: 30w0d 1030 1460 2100 8: 23w0d 347 598 684
9: 23w0d 0.26 0.34 0.42 9: 24w0d 98.0 147.0 219.0 9: 31w0d 1180 1630 2290 9: 24w0d 376 656 783
10: 24w0d 0.27 0.35 0.43 10: 25w0d 97.0 147.0 221.0 10: 32w0d 1310 1810 2500 10: 25w0d 549 793 916
11: 25w0d 0.29 0.33 0.37 11: 26w0d 97.0 147.0 223.0 11: 33w0d 1480 2010 2690 11: 26w0d 722 931 1049
12: 26w0d 0.24 0.30 0.36 12: 27w0d 95.0 146.0 226.0 12: 34w0d 1670 2220 2880 12: 27w0d 755 1087 1193
13: 27w0d 0.23 0.28 0.34 13: 28w0d 94.0 146.0 228.0 13: 35w0d 1870 2430 3090 13: 28w0d 789 1244 1337
14: 28w0d 0.18 0.31 0.45 14: 29w0d 92.0 145.0 231.0 14: 36w0d 2190 2650 3290 14: 29w0d 900 1395 1509
15: 29w0d 0.22 0.29 0.37 15: 30w0d 90.0 145.0 234.0 15: 37w0d 2310 2870 3470 15: 30w0d 1011 1546 1682
16: 30w0d 0.26 0.30 0.34 16: 31w0d 88.0 144.0 238.0 16: 38w0d 2510 3030 3610 16: 31w0d 1198 1693 1875
17: 31w0d 0.23 0.29 0.36 17: 32w0d 86.0 144.0 242.0 17: 39w0d 2680 3170 3750 17: 32w0d 1385 1840 2068
18: 32w0d 0.26 0.31 0.36 18: 33w0d 83.0 143.0 245.0 18: 40w0d 2750 3280 3870 18: 33w0d 1491 2032 2334
19: 33w0d 0.25 0.31 0.37 19: 34w0d 81.0 142.0 248.0 19: 41w0d 2800 3360 3980 19: 34w0d 1597 2224 2601
20: 34w0d 0.23 0.28 0.33 20: 35w0d 79.0 140.0 249.0 20: 42w0d 2830 3410 4060 20: 35w0d 1703 2472 2716
21: 35w0d 0.26 0.29 0.31 21: 36w0d 77.0 138.0 249.0 21: 43w0d 2840 3420 4100 21: 36w0d 1809 2631 2832
22: 36w0d 0.23 0.28 0.34 22: 37w0d 75.0 135.0 244.0 22: 44w0d 2790 3390 4110 22: 37w0d 2239 2824 3035
23: 37w0d 0.24 0.29 0.34 23: 38w0d 73.0 132.0 239.0 23: 0w0d 0 0 0 23: 38w0d 2669 3017 3239
24: 38w0d 0.22 0.28 0.33 24: 39w0d 72.0 127.0 226.0 24: 0w0d 0 0 0 24: 0w0d 0 0 0
25: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 25: 40w0d 71.0 123.0 214.0 25: 0w0d 0 0 0 25: 0w0d 0 0 0
26: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 26: 41w0d 70.0 116.0 194.0 26: 0w0d 0 0 0 26: 0w0d 0 0 0
27: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 27: 42w0d 69.0 110.0 175.0 27: 0w0d 0 0 0 27: 0w0d 0 0 0
28: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 0w0d 0 0 0 28: 0w0d 0 0 0
29: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0 0 0 29: 0w0d 0 0 0
30: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0 0 0 30: 0w0d 0 0 0
31: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0 0 0 31: 0w0d 0 0 0
32: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0 0 0 32: 0w0d 0 0 0
33: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0 0 0 33: 0w0d 0 0 0
34: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0 0 0 34: 0w0d 0 0 0
35: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0 0 0 35: 0w0d 0 0 0
36: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0 0 0 36: 0w0d 0 0 0
37: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0 0 0 37: 0w0d 0 0 0
38: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0 0 0 38: 0w0d 0 0 0
39: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0 0 0 39: 0w0d 0 0 0
40: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0 0 0 40: 0w0d 0 0 0
41: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0 0 0 41: 0w0d 0 0 0
42: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0 0 0 42: 0w0d 0 0 0
43: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0 0 0 43: 0w0d 0 0 0
44: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0 0 0 44: 0w0d 0 0 0
45: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0 0 0 45: 0w0d 0 0 0
46: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0 0 0 46: 0w0d 0 0 0
47: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0 0 0 47: 0w0d 0 0 0
48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0 0 0 48: 0w0d 0 0 0
49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0 0 0 49: 0w0d 0 0 0
50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0 0 0 50: 0w0d 0 0 0
51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0 0 0 51: 0w0d 0 0 0
52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0 0 0 52: 0w0d 0 0 0
53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0 0 0 53: 0w0d 0 0 0
54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0 0 0 54: 0w0d 0 0 0
55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0 0 0 55: 0w0d 0 0 0
56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0 0 0 56: 0w0d 0 0 0
57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0 0 0 57: 0w0d 0 0 0
58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0 0 0 58: 0w0d 0 0 0
59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0 0 0 59: 0w0d 0 0 0
60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0 0 0 60: 0w0d 0 0 0
11-133 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.8-2 Obstetric Table Data (1/2) for Europe
33. BPD 34. OFD 35. CRL 36. FL
HANS85 ; Age table HANS85 ; Age table HANS85 ; Age table HANS85 ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; circ.
Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation; 90% confidence interval
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR
1: 20.0 11w2d 5d 1: 34.0 13w4d 8d 1: 6.0 6w0d 6d 1: 11.0 13w3d 7d
2: 22.0 12w0d 6d 2: 36.0 14w0d 8d 2: 7.0 6w1d 7d 2: 12.0 13w6d 7d
3: 26.0 12w6d 6d 3: 38.0 14w3d 8d 3: 8.0 6w3d 6d 3: 15.0 14w3d 7d
4: 29.0 13w2d 7d 4: 40.0 15w0d 8d 4: 9.0 6w5d 7d 4: 16.0 14w6d 9d
5: 31.0 13w6d 8d 5: 42.0 15w4d 8d 5: 10.0 6w6d 7d 5: 18.0 15w3d 7d
6: 32.0 14w1d 8d 6: 44.0 16w0d 8d 6: 11.0 7w1d 6d 6: 20.0 15w6d 8d
7: 34.0 14w6d 9d 7: 46.0 16w4d 8d 7: 12.0 7w2d 7d 7: 21.0 16w3d 8d
8: 35.0 15w1d 8d 8: 48.0 17w0d 8d 8: 13.0 7w3d 7d 8: 23.0 16w6d 8d
9: 37.0 15w6d 8d 9: 50.0 17w4d 9d 9: 15.0 7w6d 7d 9: 25.0 17w3d 8d
10: 38.0 16w1d 9d 10: 52.0 18w2d 9d 10: 16.0 8w1d 7d 10: 26.0 17w6d 8d
11: 40.0 16w6d 8d 11: 54.0 18w4d 9d 11: 17.0 8w2d 7d 11: 27.0 18w3d 9d
12: 41.0 17w1d 9d 12: 56.0 19w2d 9d 12: 18.0 8w3d 7d 12: 28.0 18w6d 9d
13: 43.0 17w5d 9d 13: 58.0 19w6d 9d 13: 20.0 8w5d 7d 13: 30.0 19w3d 9d
14: 44.0 18w0d 9d 14: 60.0 20w0d 10d 14: 22.0 9w0d 8d 14: 31.0 19w6d 9d
15: 46.0 18w5d 9d 15: 62.0 20w4d 10d 15: 24.0 9w2d 8d 15: 33.0 20w3d 9d
16: 47.0 19w0d 10d 16: 64.0 21w0d 10d 16: 26.0 9w4d 8d 16: 34.0 20w6d 9d
17: 49.0 19w4d 10d 17: 66.0 21w3d 10d 17: 28.0 9w6d 8d 17: 36.0 21w3d 10d
18: 51.0 20w2d 10d 18: 68.0 21w6d 10d 18: 30.0 10w1d 8d 18: 38.0 21w6d 10d
19: 53.0 20w6d 11d 19: 70.0 22w3d 10d 19: 32.0 10w2d 8d 19: 39.0 22w3d 10d
20: 54.0 21w3d 10d 20: 72.0 22w6d 12d 20: 34.0 10w4d 8d 20: 40.0 22w6d 10d
21: 56.0 21w6d 9d 21: 74.0 23w2d 12d 21: 36.0 10w5d 8d 21: 42.0 23w3d 11d
22: 57.0 22w1d 9d 22: 76.0 23w6d 12d 22: 38.0 11w0d 8d 22: 43.0 23w6d 11d
23: 59.0 22w6d 10d 23: 78.0 24w0d 14d 23: 40.0 11w1d 8d 23: 44.0 24w3d 11d
24: 60.0 23w1d 9d 24: 80.0 24w4d 14d 24: 42.0 11w2d 8d 24: 45.0 24w6d 11d
25: 62.0 23w6d 10d 25: 82.0 25w0d 14d 25: 44.0 11w3d 8d 25: 47.0 25w3d 12d
26: 63.0 24w1d 9d 26: 84.0 25w4d 14d 26: 46.0 11w5d 8d 26: 48.0 25w6d 12d
27: 65.0 24w6d 10d 27: 86.0 26w0d 14d 27: 48.0 11w6d 9d 27: 49.0 26w3d 13d
28: 66.0 25w0d 11d 28: 88.0 26w6d 14d 28: 50.0 12w0d 9d 28: 50.0 26w6d 13d
29: 68.0 25w5d 10d 29: 90.0 27w2d 16d 29: 52.0 12w1d 9d 29: 51.0 27w3d 14d
30: 69.0 26w0d 10d 30: 92.0 27w6d 16d 30: 54.0 12w2d 9d 30: 52.0 27w6d 14d
31: 71.0 26w4d 12d 31: 94.0 28w4d 18d 31: 56.0 12w3d 9d 31: 53.0 28w3d 15d
32: 72.0 27w0d 11d 32: 96.0 29w2d 18d 32: 58.0 12w4d 9d 32: 54.0 28w6d 15d
33: 74.0 27w5d 12d 33: 98.0 29w6d 20d 33: 60.0 12w5d 9d 33: 56.0 29w3d 15d
34: 75.0 28w0d 12d 34: 100.0 30w4d 20d 34: 63.0 12w6d 10d 34: 57.0 29w6d 15d
35: 77.0 28w5d 13d 35: 102.0 31w2d 22d 35: 66.0 13w1d 10d 35: 58.0 30w3d 15d
36: 78.0 29w1d 15d 36: 104.0 32w0d 22d 36: 70.0 13w2d 10d 36: 59.0 30w6d 15d
37: 79.0 29w4d 16d 37: 106.0 33w0d 20d 37: 73.0 13w4d 10d 37: 60.0 31w3d 16d
38: 81.0 30w2d 15d 38: 108.0 34w0d 20d 38: 76.0 13w5d 10d 38: 61.0 31w6d 16d
39: 82.0 30w6d 15d 39: 110.0 35w0d 20d 39: 80.0 14w0d 11d 39: 62.0 32w3d 17d
40: 83.0 31w1d 17d 40: 112.0 36w3d 20d 40: 83.0 14w1d 11d 40: 63.0 32w6d 17d
41: 84.0 31w5d 17d 41: 114.0 38w0d 20d 41: 86.0 14w3d 12d 41: 65.0 33w3d 17d
42: 85.0 32w1d 16d 42: 115.0 39w0d 20d 42: 90.0 14w5d 12d 42: 66.0 33w6d 17d
43: 86.0 32w4d 17d 43: 116.0 40w0d 20d 43: 93.0 15w0d 12d 43: 67.0 34w3d 18d
44: 87.0 33w1d 20d 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 96.0 15w2d 12d 44: 68.0 34w6d 18d
45: 88.0 33w4d 19d 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 100.0 15w4d 12d 45: 69.0 35w3d 18d
46: 89.0 34w1d 19d 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 103.0 15w6d 13d 46: 70.0 35w6d 18d
47: 90.0 34w4d 19d 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 106.0 16w1d 13d 47: 71.0 36w3d 19d
48: 91.0 35w0d 23d 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 110.0 16w3d 14d 48: 72.0 37w6d 19d
49: 92.0 35w5d 24d 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 113.0 16w6d 14d 49: 73.0 38w3d 20d
50: 93.0 36w4d 21d 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 116.0 17w1d 14d 50: 74.0 38w6d 20d
51: 94.0 37w2d 19d 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 120.0 17w3d 14d 51: 75.0 39w2d 20d
52: 95.0 38w2d 18d 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 123.0 17w6d 14d 52: 76.0 39w6d 20d
53: 97.0 38w6d 20d 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 126.0 18w1d 15d 53: 77.0 40w3d 20d
54: 98.0 39w1d 19d 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 130.0 18w5d 15d 54: 78.0 40w6d 20d
55: 99.0 39w2d 18d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 133.0 19w0d 15d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 100.0 39w3d 19d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 136.0 19w3d 16d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 102.0 39w5d 19d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 140.0 19w6d 16d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 105.0 40w1d 14d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 143.0 20w2d 16d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 146.0 20w5d 16d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 150.0 21w2d 16d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-134 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.8-2 Obstetric Table Data (2/2) for Europe
37. HC 38. TTD
HANS85 ; Age table HANS85 ; Age table
Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; distance
Data unit ; mm Data unit ; mm
Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation; 90% confidence interval
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR
1: 110.0 14w0d 7d 1: 27.0 14w3d 8d
2: 120.0 15w0d 8d 2: 28.0 14w6d 8d
3: 130.0 15w6d 8d 3: 30.0 15w3d 8d
4: 140.0 16w6d 9d 4: 32.0 15w6d 8d
5: 150.0 17w3d 9d 5: 34.0 16w3d 9d
6: 160.0 18w3d 9d 6: 35.0 16w6d 9d
7: 170.0 19w3d 10d 7: 37.0 17w3d 9d
8: 180.0 20w0d 10d 8: 38.0 17w6d 9d
9: 190.0 20w6d 10d 9: 40.0 18w3d 10d
10: 200.0 21w3d 10d 10: 42.0 18w6d 10d
11: 210.0 22w3d 10d 11: 43.0 19w3d 10d
12: 220.0 23w0d 10d 12: 45.0 19w6d 10d
13: 230.0 23w6d 10d 13: 46.0 20w3d 11d
14: 240.0 24w6d 10d 14: 48.0 20w6d 11d
15: 250.0 25w6d 12d 15: 50.0 21w3d 11d
16: 260.0 26w3d 12d 16: 51.0 21w6d 11d
17: 270.0 27w3d 12d 17: 53.0 22w3d 12d
18: 280.0 28w3d 16d 18: 54.0 22w6d 12d
19: 290.0 29w3d 16d 19: 56.0 23w3d 13d
20: 300.0 30w3d 20d 20: 58.0 23w6d 13d
21: 310.0 31w4d 20d 21: 59.0 24w3d 14d
22: 320.0 32w6d 20d 22: 61.0 24w6d 14d
23: 330.0 33w3d 24d 23: 63.0 25w3d 14d
24: 340.0 36w3d 24d 24: 64.0 25w6d 14d
25: 350.0 40w0d 24d 25: 65.0 26w3d 15d
26: 0.0 0w0d 0d 26: 67.0 26w6d 15d
27: 0.0 0w0d 0d 27: 68.0 27w3d 17d
28: 0.0 0w0d 0d 28: 70.0 27w6d 17d
29: 0.0 0w0d 0d 29: 71.0 28w3d 18d
30: 0.0 0w0d 0d 30: 72.0 28w6d 18d
31: 0.0 0w0d 0d 31: 74.0 29w3d 19d
32: 0.0 0w0d 0d 32: 75.0 29w6d 19d
33: 0.0 0w0d 0d 33: 77.0 30w3d 20d
34: 0.0 0w0d 0d 34: 78.0 30w6d 20d
35: 0.0 0w0d 0d 35: 80.0 31w3d 22d
36: 0.0 0w0d 0d 36: 81.0 31w6d 22d
37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 83.0 32w3d 23d
38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 84.0 32w6d 23d
39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 86.0 33w3d 24d
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 87.0 33w6d 24d
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 88.0 34w3d 25d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 90.0 34w6d 25d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 91.0 35w3d 25d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 93.0 35w6d 25d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 94.0 36w3d 26d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 95.0 36w6d 26d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 97.0 37w3d 26d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 98.0 37w6d 26d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 99.0 38w3d 27d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 100.0 38w6d 27d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 101.0 39w2d 27d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 103.0 39w6d 27d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 104.0 40w3d 27d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 105.0 40w6d 27d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-5 No. 37 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-5 No. 38
11-135 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.8-3 Obstetric Table Data (1/7) for Japan
39. BPD 40. BPD 41. BPD 42. BPD
TODAI96 ; Age table TODAI96; Growth table OSAKA U. ; Age table OSAKA U. ; Growth table
Variation; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation ; None Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX.
1: 13.0 10w1d 4d 1: 10w3d 10.5 14.3 18.1 1: 13.3 10w0d 0d 1: 10w0d 11.4 13.3 15.2
2: 15.0 10w5d 4d 2: 11w3d 13.7 17.6 21.5 2: 15.5 10w4d 0d 2: 10w4d 13.6 15.5 17.4
3: 17.0 11w2d 4d 3: 12w3d 17.0 21.0 25.0 3: 17.7 11w1d 0d 3: 11w1d 15.7 17.7 19.7
4: 19.0 11w6d 4d 4: 13w3d 20.4 24.4 28.5 4: 19.9 11w5d 0d 4: 11w5d 17.8 19.9 22.0
5: 21.0 12w3d 4d 5: 14w3d 23.7 27.8 32.0 5: 22.0 12w2d 0d 5: 12w2d 19.9 22.0 24.1
6: 23.0 13w1d 5d 6: 15w3d 27.0 31.2 35.5 6: 24.1 12w6d 0d 6: 12w6d 21.9 24.1 26.3
7: 25.0 13w5d 5d 7: 16w3d 30.3 34.6 39.0 7: 26.2 13w3d 0d 7: 13w3d 24.0 26.2 28.4
8: 27.0 14w2d 5d 8: 17w3d 33.5 38.0 42.4 8: 28.2 14w0d 0d 8: 14w0d 25.9 28.2 30.5
9: 29.0 14w6d 5d 9: 18w3d 36.8 41.3 45.8 9: 30.3 14w4d 0d 9: 14w4d 27.9 30.3 32.7
10: 31.0 15w3d 5d 10: 19w3d 40.0 44.6 49.2 10: 32.3 15w1d 0d 10: 15w1d 29.9 32.3 34.7
11: 33.0 16w0d 5d 11: 20w3d 43.2 47.9 52.6 11: 34.2 15w5d 0d 11: 15w5d 31.7 34.2 36.7
12: 35.0 16w4d 5d 12: 21w3d 46.3 51.1 55.9 12: 36.2 16w2d 0d 12: 16w2d 33.7 36.2 38.7
13: 37.0 17w1d 6d 13: 22w3d 49.3 54.2 59.1 13: 38.1 16w6d 0d 13: 16w6d 35.5 38.1 40.7
14: 39.0 17w6d 6d 14: 23w3d 52.3 57.3 62.3 14: 40.1 17w3d 0d 14: 17w3d 37.5 40.1 42.7
15: 41.0 18w3d 6d 15: 24w3d 55.2 60.3 65.3 15: 42.0 18w0d 0d 15: 18w0d 39.3 42.0 44.7
16: 43.0 19w0d 6d 16: 25w3d 58.0 63.2 68.4 16: 43.9 18w4d 0d 16: 18w4d 41.2 43.9 46.6
17: 45.0 19w4d 6d 17: 26w3d 60.8 66.0 71.3 17: 45.7 19w1d 0d 17: 19w1d 42.9 45.7 48.5
18: 47.0 20w2d 7d 18: 27w3d 63.4 68.7 74.1 18: 47.6 19w5d 0d 18: 19w5d 44.8 47.6 50.4
19: 49.0 20w6d 7d 19: 28w3d 65.9 71.4 76.8 19: 49.4 20w2d 0d 19: 20w2d 46.5 49.4 52.3
20: 51.0 21w3d 7d 20: 29w3d 68.3 73.9 79.4 20: 51.2 20w6d 0d 20: 20w6d 48.3 51.2 54.1
21: 53.0 22w1d 8d 21: 30w3d 70.6 76.3 81.9 21: 53.0 21w3d 0d 21: 21w3d 50.0 53.0 56.0
22: 55.0 22w5d 8d 22: 31w3d 72.8 78.5 84.2 22: 54.8 22w0d 0d 22: 22w0d 51.8 54.8 57.8
23: 57.0 23w3d 8d 23: 32w3d 74.8 80.6 86.5 23: 56.6 22w4d 0d 23: 22w4d 53.5 56.6 59.7
24: 59.0 24w1d 8d 24: 33w3d 76.7 82.6 88.5 24: 58.3 23w1d 0d 24: 23w1d 55.2 58.3 61.4
25: 61.0 24w5d 9d 25: 34w3d 78.5 84.5 90.4 25: 60.0 23w5d 0d 25: 23w5d 56.9 60.0 63.1
26: 63.0 25w3d 9d 26: 35w3d 80.1 86.1 92.2 26: 61.7 24w2d 0d 26: 24w2d 58.5 61.7 64.9
27: 65.0 26w1d 9d 27: 36w3d 81.5 87.6 93.8 27: 63.4 24w6d 0d 27: 24w6d 60.2 63.4 66.6
28: 67.0 26w6d 10d 28: 37w3d 82.7 89.0 95.2 28: 65.1 25w3d 0d 28: 25w3d 61.8 65.1 68.4
29: 69.0 27w4d 10d 29: 38w3d 83.8 90.1 96.5 29: 66.7 26w0d 0d 29: 26w0d 63.4 66.7 70.0
30: 71.0 28w3d 10d 30: 39w3d 84.6 91.1 97.5 30: 68.4 26w4d 0d 30: 26w4d 65.1 68.4 71.7
31: 73.0 29w1d 11d 31: 40w3d 85.3 91.8 98.4 31: 69.9 27w1d 0d 31: 27w1d 66.5 69.9 73.3
32: 75.0 30w0d 11d 32: 41w3d 85.8 92.4 99.0 32: 71.5 27w5d 0d 32: 27w5d 68.1 71.5 74.9
33: 77.0 30w6d 12d 33: 42w3d 86.0 92.8 99.5 33: 73.0 28w2d 0d 33: 28w2d 69.6 73.0 76.4
34: 79.0 31w5d 12d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 74.5 28w6d 0d 34: 28w6d 71.0 74.5 78.0
35: 81.0 32w5d 12d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 76.0 29w3d 0d 35: 29w3d 72.5 76.0 79.5
36: 83.0 33w5d 13d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 77.4 30w0d 0d 36: 30w0d 73.9 77.4 80.9
37: 85.0 34w6d 13d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 78.8 30w4d 0d 37: 30w4d 75.2 78.8 82.4
38: 87.0 36w0d 14d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 80.2 31w1d 0d 38: 31w1d 76.6 80.2 83.8
39: 89.0 37w4d 14d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 81.5 31w5d 0d 39: 31w5d 77.9 81.5 85.1
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 82.7 32w2d 0d 40: 32w2d 79.1 82.7 86.3
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 84.0 32w6d 0d 41: 32w6d 80.3 84.0 87.7
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 85.1 33w3d 0d 42: 33w3d 81.4 85.1 88.8
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 86.2 34w0d 0d 43: 34w0d 82.5 86.2 89.9
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 87.3 34w4d 0d 44: 34w4d 83.6 87.3 91.0
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 88.3 35w1d 0d 45: 35w1d 84.5 88.3 92.1
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 89.2 35w5d 0d 46: 35w5d 85.4 89.2 93.0
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 90.0 36w2d 0d 47: 36w2d 86.2 90.0 93.8
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 90.8 36w6d 0d 48: 36w6d 87.0 90.8 94.6
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 91.5 37w3d 0d 49: 37w3d 87.7 91.5 95.3
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 92.1 38w0d 0d 50: 38w0d 88.3 92.1 95.9
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 92.7 38w4d 0d 51: 38w4d 88.8 92.7 96.6
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 93.1 39w1d 0d 52: 39w1d 89.2 93.1 97.0
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 93.5 39w5d 0d 53: 39w5d 89.6 93.5 97.4
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 93.6 40w0d 0d 54: 40w0d 89.7 93.6 97.5
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
11-136 Q1E-EA0466
43. BPD 44. AC 45. AC 46. FL
H1 ; Age table TODAI96; Growth table TODAI96; Age table TODAI96 ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; distance
Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation; +/- 1.00SD table Variation; +/- 1.00SD table
1: 20.0 11w4d 6d 1: 16w3d 93.0 109.0 125.0 1: 100.0 15w3d 8d 1: 20.0 16w1d 6d
2: 22.0 12w2d 6d 2: 17w3d 103.0 120.0 136.0 2: 105.0 16w0d 8d 2: 22.0 16w6d 6d
3: 24.0 13w0d 6d 3: 18w3d 112.0 130.0 147.0 3: 110.0 16w4d 8d 3: 24.0 17w3d 7d
4: 26.0 13w5d 7d 4: 19w3d 122.0 140.0 158.0 4: 115.0 17w0d 8d 4: 26.0 18w1d 7d
5: 28.0 14w3d 7d 5: 20w3d 131.0 151.0 169.0 5: 120.0 17w4d 9d 5: 28.0 18w6d 7d
6: 30.0 15w0d 7d 6: 21w3d 140.0 161.0 180.0 6: 125.0 18w0d 9d 6: 30.0 19w4d 8d
7: 32.0 15w5d 8d 7: 22w3d 150.0 171.0 191.0 7: 130.0 18w4d 9d 7: 32.0 20w2d 8d
8: 34.0 16w2d 8d 8: 23w3d 159.0 181.0 202.0 8: 135.0 19w0d 9d 8: 34.0 21w1d 8d
9: 36.0 16w6d 8d 9: 24w3d 168.0 191.0 212.0 9: 140.0 19w4d 9d 9: 36.0 21w6d 8d
10: 38.0 17w4d 9d 10: 25w3d 177.0 201.0 223.0 10: 145.0 20w0d 9d 10: 38.0 22w5d 9d
11: 40.0 18w1d 9d 11: 26w3d 186.0 210.0 233.0 11: 150.0 20w3d 10d 11: 40.0 23w3d 9d
12: 42.0 18w5d 10d 12: 27w3d 195.0 220.0 244.0 12: 155.0 21w0d 10d 12: 42.0 24w3d 9d
13: 44.0 19w2d 10d 13: 28w3d 203.0 229.0 254.0 13: 160.0 21w3d 10d 13: 44.0 25w3d 9d
14: 46.0 19w6d 10d 14: 29w3d 211.0 238.0 264.0 14: 165.0 22w0d 10d 14: 46.0 26w2d 10d
15: 48.0 20w3d 11d 15: 30w3d 220.0 247.0 273.0 15: 170.0 22w3d 10d 15: 48.0 27w2d 10d
16: 50.0 21w1d 11d 16: 31w3d 228.0 256.0 283.0 16: 175.0 22w6d 10d 16: 50.0 28w2d 10d
17: 52.0 21w5d 11d 17: 32w3d 235.0 265.0 292.0 17: 180.0 23w3d 11d 17: 52.0 29w2d 11d
18: 54.0 22w2d 12d 18: 33w3d 243.0 273.0 301.0 18: 185.0 23w6d 11d 18: 54.0 30w2d 11d
19: 56.0 22w6d 12d 19: 34w3d 250.0 281.0 310.0 19: 190.0 24w3d 11d 19: 56.0 31w2d 11d
20: 58.0 23w4d 12d 20: 35w3d 257.0 289.0 319.0 20: 195.0 24w6d 11d 20: 58.0 32w3d 11d
21: 60.0 24w1d 13d 21: 36w3d 264.0 297.0 327.0 21: 200.0 25w3d 11d 21: 60.0 33w3d 12d
22: 62.0 24w6d 13d 22: 37w3d 270.0 304.0 335.0 22: 205.0 25w6d 11d 22: 62.0 34w4d 12d
23: 64.0 25w4d 14d 23: 38w3d 276.0 311.0 343.0 23: 210.0 26w3d 12d 23: 64.0 35w5d 12d
24: 66.0 26w2d 14d 24: 39w3d 282.0 318.0 350.0 24: 215.0 27w0d 12d 24: 66.0 37w0d 12d
25: 68.0 27w0d 14d 25: 40w3d 288.0 324.0 357.0 25: 220.0 27w3d 12d 25: 68.0 38w1d 13d
26: 70.0 27w5d 15d 26: 41w3d 293.0 330.0 364.0 26: 225.0 28w0d 12d 26: 70.0 39w3d 13d
27: 72.0 28w4d 15d 27: 42w3d 297.0 336.0 370.0 27: 230.0 28w4d 12d 27: 0.0 0w0d 0d
28: 74.0 29w2d 15d 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 235.0 29w0d 12d 28: 0.0 0w0d 0d
29: 76.0 30w1d 16d 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 240.0 29w4d 13d 29: 0.0 0w0d 0d
30: 78.0 31w0d 16d 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 245.0 30w1d 13d 30: 0.0 0w0d 0d
31: 80.0 32w0d 16d 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 250.0 30w5d 13d 31: 0.0 0w0d 0d
32: 82.0 32w6d 17d 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 255.0 31w2d 13d 32: 0.0 0w0d 0d
33: 84.0 33w6d 17d 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 260.0 31w6d 13d 33: 0.0 0w0d 0d
34: 86.0 34w6d 17d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 265.0 32w3d 13d 34: 0.0 0w0d 0d
35: 88.0 36w0d 18d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 270.0 33w1d 13d 35: 0.0 0w0d 0d
36: 90.0 37w1d 18d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 275.0 33w5d 14d 36: 0.0 0w0d 0d
37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 280.0 34w2d 14d 37: 0.0 0w0d 0d
38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 285.0 35w0d 14d 38: 0.0 0w0d 0d
39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 290.0 35w4d 14d 39: 0.0 0w0d 0d
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 295.0 36w2d 14d 40: 0.0 0w0d 0d
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 300.0 36w6d 14d 41: 0.0 0w0d 0d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 305.0 37w5d 14d 42: 0.0 0w0d 0d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 310.0 38w2d 15d 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 315.0 39w0d 15d 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 320.0 39w6d 15d 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 325.0 40w4d 15d 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 330.0 41w2d 15d 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-137 Q1E-EA0466
47. FL 48. FL 49. FL 50. FL
TODAI96; Growth table OSAKA U. ; Age table OSAKA U.; Growth table H1 ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; distance
Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation ; None Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation; 90% confidence interval
No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR
1: 16w3d 17.1 21.4 25.8 1: 9.4 13w0d 0d 1: 13w0d 7.3 9.4 11.5 1: 20.0 16w6d 8d
2: 17w3d 19.6 24.0 28.4 2: 11.2 13w4d 0d 2: 13w4d 9.1 11.2 13.3 2: 21.0 17w1d 8d
3: 18w3d 22.1 26.5 31.0 3: 13.0 14w1d 0d 3: 14w1d 10.8 13.0 15.2 3: 22.0 17w3d 8d
4: 19w3d 24.6 29.1 33.6 4: 14.8 14w5d 0d 4: 14w5d 12.6 14.8 17.0 4: 23.0 17w5d 9d
5: 20w3d 27.1 31.6 36.2 5: 16.6 15w2d 0d 5: 15w2d 14.4 16.6 18.8 5: 24.0 18w0d 9d
6: 21w3d 29.5 34.1 38.8 6: 18.3 15w6d 0d 6: 15w6d 16.1 18.3 20.5 6: 25.0 18w3d 9d
7: 22w3d 31.9 36.6 41.3 7: 20.1 16w3d 0d 7: 16w3d 17.8 20.1 22.4 7: 26.0 18w5d 9d
8: 23w3d 34.3 39.1 43.8 8: 21.8 17w0d 0d 8: 17w0d 19.5 21.8 24.1 8: 27.0 19w0d 10d
9: 24w3d 36.7 41.5 46.3 9: 23.4 17w4d 0d 9: 17w4d 21.1 23.4 25.7 9: 28.0 19w3d 10d
10: 25w3d 39.0 43.9 48.7 10: 25.1 18w1d 0d 10: 18w1d 22.8 25.1 27.4 10: 29.0 19w5d 10d
11: 26w3d 41.3 46.2 51.1 11: 26.7 18w5d 0d 11: 18w5d 24.4 26.7 29.0 11: 30.0 20w0d 10d
12: 27w3d 43.5 48.4 53.4 12: 28.3 19w2d 0d 12: 19w2d 25.9 28.3 30.7 12: 31.0 20w3d 10d
13: 28w3d 45.6 50.6 55.7 13: 29.9 19w6d 0d 13: 19w6d 27.5 29.9 32.3 13: 32.0 20w5d 11d
14: 29w3d 47.7 52.8 57.9 14: 31.5 20w3d 0d 14: 20w3d 29.1 31.5 33.9 14: 33.0 21w1d 11d
15: 30w3d 49.7 54.8 60.0 15: 33.0 21w0d 0d 15: 21w0d 30.6 33.0 35.4 15: 34.0 21w3d 11d
16: 31w3d 51.6 56.8 62.0 16: 34.6 21w4d 0d 16: 21w4d 32.1 34.6 37.1 16: 35.0 21w6d 11d
17: 32w3d 53.5 58.7 64.0 17: 36.1 22w1d 0d 17: 22w1d 33.6 36.1 38.6 17: 36.0 22w2d 11d
18: 33w3d 55.2 60.5 65.8 18: 37.5 22w5d 0d 18: 22w5d 35.0 37.5 40.0 18: 37.0 22w4d 11d
19: 34w3d 56.9 62.2 67.6 19: 39.0 23w2d 0d 19: 23w2d 36.5 39.0 41.5 19: 38.0 23w0d 12d
20: 35w3d 58.4 63.8 69.2 20: 40.4 23w6d 0d 20: 23w6d 37.9 40.4 42.9 20: 39.0 23w3d 12d
21: 36w3d 59.9 65.3 70.8 21: 41.8 24w3d 0d 21: 24w3d 39.2 41.8 44.4 21: 40.0 23w6d 12d
22: 37w3d 61.2 66.7 72.2 22: 43.2 25w0d 0d 22: 25w0d 40.6 43.2 45.8 22: 41.0 24w2d 12d
23: 38w3d 62.4 68.0 73.6 23: 44.5 25w4d 0d 23: 25w4d 41.9 44.5 47.1 23: 42.0 24w5d 13d
24: 39w3d 63.5 69.1 74.7 24: 45.9 26w1d 0d 24: 26w1d 43.3 45.9 48.5 24: 43.0 25w0d 13d
25: 40w3d 64.4 70.1 75.8 25: 47.2 26w5d 0d 25: 26w5d 44.5 47.2 49.9 25: 44.0 25w3d 13d
26: 41w3d 65.3 71.0 76.7 26: 48.5 27w2d 0d 26: 27w2d 45.8 48.5 51.2 26: 45.0 25w6d 13d
27: 42w3d 65.9 71.7 77.5 27: 49.7 27w6d 0d 27: 27w6d 47.0 49.7 52.4 27: 46.0 26w3d 14d
28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 51.0 28w3d 0d 28: 28w3d 48.3 51.0 53.7 28: 47.0 26w6d 14d
29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 52.2 29w0d 0d 29: 29w0d 49.5 52.2 54.9 29: 48.0 27w2d 14d
30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 53.4 29w4d 0d 30: 29w4d 50.6 53.4 56.2 30: 49.0 27w5d 14d
31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 54.6 30w1d 0d 31: 30w1d 51.8 54.6 57.4 31: 50.0 28w1d 14d
32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 55.7 30w5d 0d 32: 30w5d 52.9 55.7 58.5 32: 51.0 28w5d 15d
33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 56.9 31w2d 0d 33: 31w2d 54.1 56.9 59.7 33: 52.0 29w1d 15d
34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 58.0 31w6d 0d 34: 31w6d 55.1 58.0 60.9 34: 53.0 29w4d 15d
35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 59.0 32w3d 0d 35: 32w3d 56.1 59.0 61.9 35: 54.0 30w1d 15d
36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 60.1 33w0d 0d 36: 33w0d 57.2 60.1 63.0 36: 55.0 30w4d 16d
37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 61.1 33w4d 0d 37: 33w4d 58.2 61.1 64.0 37: 56.0 31w1d 16d
38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 62.1 34w1d 0d 38: 34w1d 59.2 62.1 65.0 38: 57.0 31w4d 16d
39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 63.1 34w5d 0d 39: 34w5d 60.1 63.1 66.1 39: 58.0 32w1d 16d
40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 64.1 35w2d 0d 40: 35w2d 61.1 64.1 67.1 40: 59.0 32w4d 16d
41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 65.0 35w6d 0d 41: 35w6d 62.0 65.0 68.0 41: 60.0 33w1d 17d
42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 66.0 36w3d 0d 42: 36w3d 63.0 66.0 69.0 42: 61.0 33w4d 17d
43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 66.9 37w0d 0d 43: 37w0d 63.8 66.9 70.0 43: 62.0 34w1d 17d
44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 67.7 37w4d 0d 44: 37w4d 64.6 67.7 70.8 44: 63.0 34w5d 17d
45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 68.6 38w1d 0d 45: 38w1d 65.5 68.6 71.7 45: 64.0 35w2d 17d
46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 69.4 38w5d 0d 46: 38w5d 66.3 69.4 72.5 46: 65.0 35w5d 17d
47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 70.2 39w2d 0d 47: 39w2d 67.1 70.2 73.3 47: 66.0 36w2d 18d
48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 71.0 39w6d 0d 48: 39w6d 67.8 71.0 74.2 48: 67.0 36w6d 18d
49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 71.2 40w0d 0d 49: 40w0d 68.0 71.2 74.4 49: 68.0 37w3d 18d
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 69.0 38w0d 18d
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 70.0 38w4d 18d
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-138 Q1E-EA0466
51. CRL 52. CRL 53. CRL 54. GS
TODAI ; Age table OSAKA U. ; Age table OSAKA U.; Growth table TODAI ; Age table
Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation ; None Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation; 90% confidence interval
1: 15.0 8w0d 7d 1: 8.7 7w0d 0d 1: 7w0d 7.1 8.7 10.3 1: 10.0 4w0d 7d
2: 19.0 9w0d 7d 2: 9.1 7w1d 0d 2: 7w1d 7.4 9.1 10.8 2: 16.0 5w0d 8d
3: 27.0 10w0d 7d 3: 9.6 7w2d 0d 3: 7w2d 7.7 9.6 11.5 3: 22.0 6w0d 11d
4: 36.0 11w0d 7d 4: 10.2 7w3d 0d 4: 7w3d 8.2 10.2 12.2 4: 27.0 7w0d 12d
5: 46.0 12w0d 7d 5: 10.8 7w4d 0d 5: 7w4d 8.6 10.8 13.0 5: 34.0 8w0d 13d
6: 57.0 13w0d 7d 6: 11.5 7w5d 0d 6: 7w5d 9.2 11.5 13.8 6: 41.0 9w0d 14d
7: 72.0 14w0d 8d 7: 12.2 7w6d 0d 7: 7w6d 9.7 12.2 14.7 7: 48.0 10w0d 15d
8: 0.0 0w0d 0d 8: 13.0 8w0d 0d 8: 8w0d 10.4 13.0 15.6 8: 57.0 11w0d 16d
9: 0.0 0w0d 0d 9: 13.9 8w1d 0d 9: 8w1d 11.1 13.9 16.7 9: 0.0 0w0d 0d
10: 0.0 0w0d 0d 10: 14.9 8w2d 0d 10: 8w2d 12.0 14.9 17.8 10: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11: 0.0 0w0d 0d 11: 15.9 8w3d 0d 11: 8w3d 12.8 15.9 19.0 11: 0.0 0w0d 0d
12: 0.0 0w0d 0d 12: 16.9 8w4d 0d 12: 8w4d 13.7 16.9 20.1 12: 0.0 0w0d 0d
13: 0.0 0w0d 0d 13: 18.0 8w5d 0d 13: 8w5d 14.6 18.0 21.4 13: 0.0 0w0d 0d
14: 0.0 0w0d 0d 14: 19.2 8w6d 0d 14: 8w6d 15.7 19.2 22.7 14: 0.0 0w0d 0d
15: 0.0 0w0d 0d 15: 20.4 9w0d 0d 15: 9w0d 16.7 20.4 24.1 15: 0.0 0w0d 0d
16: 0.0 0w0d 0d 16: 21.6 9w1d 0d 16: 9w1d 17.8 21.6 25.4 16: 0.0 0w0d 0d
17: 0.0 0w0d 0d 17: 22.9 9w2d 0d 17: 9w2d 18.9 22.9 26.9 17: 0.0 0w0d 0d
18: 0.0 0w0d 0d 18: 24.3 9w3d 0d 18: 9w3d 20.2 24.3 28.4 18: 0.0 0w0d 0d
19: 0.0 0w0d 0d 19: 25.7 9w4d 0d 19: 9w4d 21.4 25.7 30.0 19: 0.0 0w0d 0d
20: 0.0 0w0d 0d 20: 27.1 9w5d 0d 20: 9w5d 22.6 27.1 31.6 20: 0.0 0w0d 0d
21: 0.0 0w0d 0d 21: 28.5 9w6d 0d 21: 9w6d 23.9 28.5 33.1 21: 0.0 0w0d 0d
22: 0.0 0w0d 0d 22: 30.0 10w0d 0d 22: 10w0d 25.2 30.0 34.8 22: 0.0 0w0d 0d
23: 0.0 0w0d 0d 23: 31.5 10w1d 0d 23: 10w1d 26.6 31.5 36.4 23: 0.0 0w0d 0d
24: 0.0 0w0d 0d 24: 33.1 10w2d 0d 24: 10w2d 28.0 33.1 38.2 24: 0.0 0w0d 0d
25: 0.0 0w0d 0d 25: 34.7 10w3d 0d 25: 10w3d 29.5 34.7 39.9 25: 0.0 0w0d 0d
26: 0.0 0w0d 0d 26: 36.3 10w4d 0d 26: 10w4d 30.9 36.3 41.7 26: 0.0 0w0d 0d
27: 0.0 0w0d 0d 27: 37.9 10w5d 0d 27: 10w5d 32.4 37.9 43.4 27: 0.0 0w0d 0d
28: 0.0 0w0d 0d 28: 39.5 10w6d 0d 28: 10w6d 33.8 39.5 45.2 28: 0.0 0w0d 0d
29: 0.0 0w0d 0d 29: 41.2 11w0d 0d 29: 11w0d 35.4 41.2 47.0 29: 0.0 0w0d 0d
30: 0.0 0w0d 0d 30: 42.8 11w1d 0d 30: 11w1d 36.8 42.8 48.8 30: 0.0 0w0d 0d
31: 0.0 0w0d 0d 31: 44.5 11w2d 0d 31: 11w2d 38.4 44.5 50.6 31: 0.0 0w0d 0d
32: 0.0 0w0d 0d 32: 46.2 11w3d 0d 32: 11w3d 39.9 46.2 52.5 32: 0.0 0w0d 0d
33: 0.0 0w0d 0d 33: 47.9 11w4d 0d 33: 11w4d 41.5 47.9 54.3 33: 0.0 0w0d 0d
34: 0.0 0w0d 0d 34: 49.6 11w5d 0d 34: 11w5d 43.0 49.6 56.2 34: 0.0 0w0d 0d
35: 0.0 0w0d 0d 35: 51.3 11w6d 0d 35: 11w6d 44.6 51.3 58.0 35: 0.0 0w0d 0d
36: 0.0 0w0d 0d 36: 53.0 12w0d 0d 36: 12w0d 46.1 53.0 59.9 36: 0.0 0w0d 0d
37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 54.8 12w1d 0d 37: 12w1d 47.8 54.8 61.8 37: 0.0 0w0d 0d
38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 56.5 12w2d 0d 38: 12w2d 49.3 56.5 63.7 38: 0.0 0w0d 0d
39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 58.2 12w3d 0d 39: 12w3d 50.9 58.2 65.5 39: 0.0 0w0d 0d
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 59.9 12w4d 0d 40: 12w4d 52.4 59.9 67.4 40: 0.0 0w0d 0d
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 61.6 12w5d 0d 41: 12w5d 54.0 61.6 69.2 41: 0.0 0w0d 0d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 63.2 12w6d 0d 42: 12w6d 55.4 63.2 71.0 42: 0.0 0w0d 0d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-139 Q1E-EA0466
55. LV 56. FTA 57. FTA 58. HL
TODAI ; Age table OSAKA U. ; Age table OSAKA U.; Growth table OSAKA U. ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; area Calculation type ; area Calculation type ; distance
Data unit ; mm Data unit ; cm2 Data unit ; cm2 Data unit ; mm
Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation ; None Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; None
1: 37.0 21w0d 7d 1: 5.60 14w0d 0d 1: 14w0d 4.40 5.60 6.80 1: 10.1 13w0d 0d
2: 40.0 22w0d 9d 2: 6.50 14w4d 0d 2: 14w4d 5.20 6.50 7.80 2: 11.8 13w4d 0d
3: 44.0 23w0d 11d 3: 7.60 15w1d 0d 3: 15w1d 6.20 7.60 9.00 3: 13.5 14w1d 0d
4: 47.0 24w0d 12d 4: 8.70 15w5d 0d 4: 15w5d 7.20 8.70 10.20 4: 15.1 14w5d 0d
5: 50.0 25w0d 14d 5: 9.80 16w2d 0d 5: 16w2d 8.20 9.80 11.40 5: 16.7 15w2d 0d
6: 54.0 26w0d 17d 6: 11.00 16w6d 0d 6: 16w6d 9.20 11.00 12.80 6: 18.3 15w6d 0d
7: 57.0 27w0d 19d 7: 12.20 17w3d 0d 7: 17w3d 10.30 12.20 14.10 7: 19.9 16w3d 0d
8: 59.0 28w0d 21d 8: 13.50 18w0d 0d 8: 18w0d 11.50 13.50 15.50 8: 21.5 17w0d 0d
9: 62.0 29w0d 24d 9: 14.80 18w4d 0d 9: 18w4d 12.60 14.80 17.00 9: 23.0 17w4d 0d
10: 64.0 30w0d 25d 10: 16.20 19w1d 0d 10: 19w1d 13.90 16.20 18.50 10: 24.5 18w1d 0d
11: 67.0 31w0d 28d 11: 17.60 19w5d 0d 11: 19w5d 15.10 17.60 20.10 11: 25.9 18w5d 0d
12: 69.0 32w0d 31d 12: 19.10 20w2d 0d 12: 20w2d 16.50 19.10 21.70 12: 27.4 19w2d 0d
13: 71.0 33w0d 34d 13: 20.60 20w6d 0d 13: 20w6d 17.80 20.60 23.40 13: 28.8 19w6d 0d
14: 73.0 34w0d 35d 14: 22.20 21w3d 0d 14: 21w3d 19.30 22.20 25.10 14: 30.2 20w3d 0d
15: 75.0 35w0d 38d 15: 23.80 22w0d 0d 15: 22w0d 20.70 23.80 26.90 15: 31.5 21w0d 0d
16: 77.0 36w0d 40d 16: 25.50 22w4d 0d 16: 22w4d 22.20 25.50 28.80 16: 32.9 21w4d 0d
17: 78.0 37w0d 42d 17: 27.20 23w1d 0d 17: 23w1d 23.80 27.20 30.60 17: 34.2 22w1d 0d
18: 79.0 38w0d 44d 18: 29.00 23w5d 0d 18: 23w5d 25.40 29.00 32.60 18: 35.4 22w5d 0d
19: 80.0 39w0d 46d 19: 30.80 24w2d 0d 19: 24w2d 27.00 30.80 34.60 19: 36.7 23w2d 0d
20: 81.0 40w0d 48d 20: 32.60 24w6d 0d 20: 24w6d 28.60 32.60 36.60 20: 37.9 23w6d 0d
21: 0.0 0w0d 0d 21: 34.50 25w3d 0d 21: 25w3d 30.30 34.50 38.70 21: 39.1 24w3d 0d
22: 0.0 0w0d 0d 22: 36.50 26w0d 0d 22: 26w0d 32.10 36.50 40.90 22: 40.3 25w0d 0d
23: 0.0 0w0d 0d 23: 38.40 26w4d 0d 23: 26w4d 33.80 38.40 43.00 23: 41.4 25w4d 0d
24: 0.0 0w0d 0d 24: 40.40 27w1d 0d 24: 27w1d 35.60 40.40 45.20 24: 42.6 26w1d 0d
25: 0.0 0w0d 0d 25: 42.40 27w5d 0d 25: 27w5d 37.40 42.40 47.40 25: 43.7 26w5d 0d
26: 0.0 0w0d 0d 26: 44.50 28w2d 0d 26: 28w2d 39.30 44.50 49.70 26: 44.7 27w2d 0d
27: 0.0 0w0d 0d 27: 46.60 28w6d 0d 27: 28w6d 41.20 46.60 52.00 27: 45.8 27w6d 0d
28: 0.0 0w0d 0d 28: 48.70 29w3d 0d 28: 29w3d 43.10 48.70 54.30 28: 46.8 28w3d 0d
29: 0.0 0w0d 0d 29: 50.80 30w0d 0d 29: 30w0d 45.00 50.80 56.60 29: 47.8 29w0d 0d
30: 0.0 0w0d 0d 30: 52.90 30w4d 0d 30: 30w4d 46.80 52.90 59.00 30: 48.7 29w4d 0d
31: 0.0 0w0d 0d 31: 55.00 31w1d 0d 31: 31w1d 48.70 55.00 61.30 31: 49.7 30w1d 0d
32: 0.0 0w0d 0d 32: 57.20 31w5d 0d 32: 31w5d 50.70 57.20 63.70 32: 50.6 30w5d 0d
33: 0.0 0w0d 0d 33: 59.40 32w2d 0d 33: 32w2d 52.60 59.40 66.20 33: 51.5 31w2d 0d
34: 0.0 0w0d 0d 34: 61.50 32w6d 0d 34: 32w6d 54.50 61.50 68.50 34: 52.3 31w6d 0d
35: 0.0 0w0d 0d 35: 63.70 33w3d 0d 35: 33w3d 56.40 63.70 71.00 35: 53.1 32w3d 0d
36: 0.0 0w0d 0d 36: 65.80 34w0d 0d 36: 34w0d 58.30 65.80 73.30 36: 53.9 33w0d 0d
37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 67.90 34w4d 0d 37: 34w4d 60.10 67.90 75.70 37: 54.7 33w4d 0d
38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 70.10 35w1d 0d 38: 35w1d 62.10 70.10 78.10 38: 55.5 34w1d 0d
39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 72.20 35w5d 0d 39: 35w5d 63.90 72.20 80.50 39: 56.2 34w5d 0d
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 74.20 36w2d 0d 40: 36w2d 65.60 74.20 82.80 40: 56.9 35w2d 0d
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 76.20 36w6d 0d 41: 36w6d 67.40 76.20 85.00 41: 57.6 35w6d 0d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 78.20 37w3d 0d 42: 37w3d 69.10 78.20 87.30 42: 58.2 36w3d 0d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 80.20 38w0d 0d 43: 38w0d 70.80 80.20 89.60 43: 58.8 37w0d 0d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 82.10 38w4d 0d 44: 38w4d 72.40 82.10 91.80 44: 59.4 37w4d 0d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 83.90 39w1d 0d 45: 39w1d 73.90 83.90 93.90 45: 60.0 38w1d 0d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 85.70 39w5d 0d 46: 39w5d 75.40 85.70 96.00 46: 60.5 38w5d 0d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 86.60 40w0d 0d 47: 40w0d 76.20 86.60 97.00 47: 61.0 39w2d 0d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0.00 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 48: 61.5 39w6d 0d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0.00 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 49: 61.6 40w0d 0d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0.00 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0.00 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0.00 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0.00 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0.00 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0.00 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0.00 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0.00 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.00 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.00 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.00 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-140 Q1E-EA0466
59. HL 60. Estimated Fetal Body Weight 61. Estimated Fetal Body Weight
OSAKA U.; Growth table TODAI96 ; EFBW table OSAKA U. ; EFBW table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; weight Calculation type ; weight
Data unit ; mm Data unit ;g Data unit ; g
Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table
No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX.
1: 13w0d 8.1 10.1 12.1 1: 18w3d 158 216 274 1: 16w0d 108 137 166
2: 13w4d 9.8 11.8 13.8 2: 19w3d 204 279 355 2: 16w3d 124 153 182
3: 14w1d 11.4 13.5 15.6 3: 20w3d 256 349 442 3: 16w6d 140 170 200
4: 14w5d 13.0 15.1 17.2 4: 21w3d 314 427 539 4: 17w2d 156 188 220
5: 15w2d 14.6 16.7 18.8 5: 22w3d 381 513 645 5: 17w5d 175 209 243
6: 15w6d 16.2 18.3 20.4 6: 23w3d 456 609 761 6: 18w1d 195 231 267
7: 16w3d 17.8 19.9 22.0 7: 24w3d 541 714 888 7: 18w4d 215 254 293
8: 17w0d 19.3 21.5 23.7 8: 25w3d 634 830 1026 8: 19w0d 238 280 322
9: 17w4d 20.8 23.0 25.2 9: 26w3d 737 956 1175 9: 19w3d 263 308 353
10: 18w1d 22.3 24.5 26.7 10: 27w3d 849 1092 1334 10: 19w6d 288 337 386
11: 18w5d 23.7 25.9 28.1 11: 28w3d 970 1237 1504 11: 20w2d 315 368 421
12: 19w2d 25.2 27.4 29.6 12: 29w3d 1099 1391 1683 12: 20w5d 344 401 458
13: 19w6d 26.5 28.8 31.1 13: 30w3d 1234 1552 1870 13: 21w1d 375 436 497
14: 20w3d 27.9 30.2 32.5 14: 31w3d 1375 1720 2064 14: 21w4d 408 474 540
15: 21w0d 29.2 31.5 33.8 15: 32w3d 1520 1892 2265 15: 22w0d 442 513 584
16: 21w4d 30.6 32.9 35.2 16: 33w3d 1667 2068 2469 16: 22w3d 477 553 629
17: 22w1d 31.9 34.2 36.5 17: 34w3d 1814 2244 2675 17: 22w6d 515 596 677
18: 22w5d 33.1 35.4 37.7 18: 35w3d 1960 2420 2880 18: 23w2d 554 641 728
19: 23w2d 34.3 36.7 39.1 19: 36w3d 2102 2592 3083 19: 23w5d 596 688 780
20: 23w6d 35.5 37.9 40.3 20: 37w3d 2236 2758 3280 20: 24w1d 638 736 834
21: 24w3d 36.7 39.1 41.5 21: 38w3d 2360 2915 3469 21: 24w4d 683 787 891
22: 25w0d 37.9 40.3 42.7 22: 39w3d 2471 3059 3647 22: 25w0d 729 839 949
23: 25w4d 39.0 41.4 43.8 23: 40w3d 2565 3187 3809 23: 25w3d 777 893 1009
24: 26w1d 40.1 42.6 45.1 24: 41w3d 2639 3296 3952 24: 25w6d 826 949 1072
25: 26w5d 41.2 43.7 46.2 25: 0w0d 0 0 0 25: 26w2d 878 1007 1136
26: 27w2d 42.2 44.7 47.0 26: 0w0d 0 0 0 26: 26w5d 931 1066 1201
27: 27w6d 43.3 45.8 48.3 27: 0w0d 0 0 0 27: 27w1d 985 1127 1269
28: 28w3d 44.3 46.8 49.3 28: 0w0d 0 0 0 28: 27w4d 1040 1189 1338
29: 29w0d 45.2 47.8 50.4 29: 0w0d 0 0 0 29: 28w0d 1098 1253 1408
30: 29w4d 46.1 48.7 51.3 30: 0w0d 0 0 0 30: 28w3d 1156 1318 1480
31: 30w1d 47.1 49.7 52.3 31: 0w0d 0 0 0 31: 28w6d 1216 1385 1554
32: 30w5d 48.0 50.6 53.2 32: 0w0d 0 0 0 32: 29w2d 1277 1453 1629
33: 31w2d 48.9 51.5 54.1 33: 0w0d 0 0 0 33: 29w5d 1339 1522 1705
34: 31w6d 49.7 52.3 54.9 34: 0w0d 0 0 0 34: 30w1d 1402 1592 1782
35: 32w3d 50.4 53.1 55.8 35: 0w0d 0 0 0 35: 30w4d 1466 1663 1860
36: 33w0d 51.2 53.9 56.6 36: 0w0d 0 0 0 36: 31w0d 1531 1735 1939
37: 33w4d 52.0 54.7 57.4 37: 0w0d 0 0 0 37: 31w3d 1596 1808 2020
38: 34w1d 52.8 55.5 58.2 38: 0w0d 0 0 0 38: 31w6d 1662 1881 2100
39: 34w5d 53.5 56.2 58.9 39: 0w0d 0 0 0 39: 32w2d 1728 1955 2182
40: 35w2d 54.1 56.9 59.7 40: 0w0d 0 0 0 40: 32w5d 1795 2029 2263
41: 35w6d 54.8 57.6 60.4 41: 0w0d 0 0 0 41: 33w1d 1862 2104 2346
42: 36w3d 55.4 58.2 61.0 42: 0w0d 0 0 0 42: 33w4d 1929 2179 2429
43: 37w0d 56.0 58.8 61.6 43: 0w0d 0 0 0 43: 34w0d 1997 2254 2511
44: 37w4d 56.6 59.4 62.2 44: 0w0d 0 0 0 44: 34w3d 2064 2329 2594
45: 38w1d 57.1 60.0 62.9 45: 0w0d 0 0 0 45: 34w6d 2129 2403 2677
46: 38w5d 57.6 60.5 63.4 46: 0w0d 0 0 0 46: 35w2d 2196 2478 2760
47: 39w2d 58.1 61.0 63.9 47: 0w0d 0 0 0 47: 35w5d 2261 2551 2841
48: 39w6d 58.6 61.5 64.4 48: 0w0d 0 0 0 48: 36w1d 2325 2624 2923
49: 40w0d 58.7 61.6 64.5 49: 0w0d 0 0 0 49: 36w4d 2388 2696 3004
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0 0 0 50: 37w0d 2450 2767 3084
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0 0 0 51: 37w3d 2511 2837 3163
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0 0 0 52: 37w6d 2571 2906 3241
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0 0 0 53: 38w2d 2628 2973 3318
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0 0 0 54: 38w5d 2683 3038 3393
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0 0 0 55: 39w1d 2736 3101 3466
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0 0 0 56: 39w4d 2786 3162 3538
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0 0 0 57: 40w0d 2833 3220 3607
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0 0 0 58: 0w0d 0 0 0
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0 0 0 59: 0w0d 0 0 0
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0 0 0 60: 0w0d 0 0 0
Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-6 No. 59 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-6 No. 62 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-6 No. 63
11-141 Q1E-EA0466
62. APTDxTTD 63. APTDxTTD 64. EFBW 65. EFBW
TODAI96 ; Age table TODAI96. ; Growth table TODAI96 ; Age table OSAKA U.; Age table
Calculation type ; area Calculation type ; area Calculation type ; Weight Calculation type ; Weight
Data unit ; cm2 Data unit ; cm2 Data unit ; g Data unit ; g
Variation; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; none
1: 10 16w1d 8d 1: 16w3d 7.0 11.2 15.5 1: 250 19w3d 7d 1: 137 16w0d 0d
2: 12 17w0d 8d 2: 17w3d 8.7 13.3 18.0 2: 300 19w6d 7d 2: 153 16w3d 0d
3: 14 17w6d 8d 3: 18w3d 10.5 15.6 20.7 3: 350 20w4d 7d 3: 170 16w6d 0d
4: 16 18w4d 8d 4: 19w3d 12.5 18.1 23.6 4: 400 21w2d 7d 4: 188 17w2d 0d
5: 18 19w3d 8d 5: 20w3d 14.7 20.8 26.8 5: 450 21w5d 7d 5: 209 17w5d 0d
6: 20 20w1d 8d 6: 21w3d 17.1 23.6 30.2 6: 500 22w2d 7d 6: 231 18w1d 0d
7: 22 20w6d 9d 7: 22w3d 19.6 26.7 33.8 7: 550 22w6d 7d 7: 254 18w4d 0d
8: 24 21w4d 9d 8: 23w3d 22.2 29.9 37.5 8: 600 23w2d 7d 8: 280 19w0d 0d
9: 26 22w2d 9d 9: 24w3d 25.0 33.2 41.5 9: 650 23w6d 7d 9: 308 19w3d 0d
10: 28 22w6d 9d 10: 25w3d 27.9 36.7 45.6 10: 700 24w2d 7d 10: 337 19w6d 0d
11: 30 23w4d 9d 11: 26w3d 30.9 40.3 49.8 11: 750 24w5d 7d 11: 368 20w2d 0d
12: 32 24w1d 10d 12: 27w3d 33.9 44.1 54.2 12: 800 25w2d 8d 12: 401 20w5d 0d
13: 34 24w5d 10d 13: 28w3d 37.1 47.9 58.7 13: 850 25w5d 8d 13: 436 21w1d 0d
14: 36 25w3d 10d 14: 29w3d 40.3 51.8 63.3 14: 900 26w1d 8d 14: 474 21w4d 0d
15: 38 25w6d 10d 15: 30w3d 43.5 55.7 68.0 15: 950 26w4d 8d 15: 513 22w0d 0d
16: 40 26w3d 11d 16: 31w3d 46.8 59.7 72.7 16: 1000 26w6d 8d 16: 553 22w3d 0d
17: 42 27w0d 11d 17: 32w3d 50.0 63.8 77.6 17: 1050 27w2d 8d 17: 596 22w6d 0d
18: 44 27w3d 11d 18: 33w3d 53.3 67.8 82.4 18: 1100 27w5d 8d 18: 641 23w2d 0d
19: 46 28w0d 12d 19: 34w3d 56.6 71.9 87.3 19: 1150 27w6d 9d 19: 688 23w5d 0d
20: 48 28w4d 12d 20: 35w3d 59.7 75.9 92.2 20: 1200 28w3d 9d 20: 736 24w1d 0d
21: 50 29w0d 12d 21: 36w3d 62.8 79.9 97.0 21: 1250 28w5d 9d 21: 787 24w4d 0d
22: 52 29w3d 13d 22: 37w3d 65.9 83.9 101.9 22: 1300 29w1d 9d 22: 839 25w0d 0d
23: 54 30w0d 13d 23: 38w3d 68.8 87.7 106.7 23: 1350 29w3d 9d 23: 893 25w3d 0d
24: 56 30w3d 13d 24: 39w3d 71.6 91.5 111.4 24: 1400 29w5d 9d 24: 949 25w6d 0d
25: 58 31w0d 14d 25: 40w3d 74.3 95.1 116.0 25: 1450 29w6d 10d 25: 1007 26w2d 0d
26: 60 31w3d 14d 26: 41w3d 76.8 98.6 120.5 26: 1500 30w2d 10d 26: 1066 26w5d 0d
27: 62 31w6d 14d 27: 42w3d 79.1 102.0 124.8 27: 1550 30w5d 10d 27: 1127 27w1d 0d
28: 64 32w3d 15d 28: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 28: 1600 31w0d 10d 28: 1189 27w4d 0d
29: 66 32w6d 15d 29: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 29: 1650 31w2d 10d 29: 1253 28w0d 0d
30: 68 33w3d 15d 30: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 30: 1700 31w4d 11d 30: 1318 28w3d 0d
31: 70 33w6d 16d 31: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 31: 1750 31w6d 11d 31: 1385 28w6d 0d
32: 72 34w2d 16d 32: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 32: 1800 32w1d 11d 32: 1453 29w2d 0d
33: 74 34w6d 17d 33: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 33: 1850 32w3d 11d 33: 1522 29w5d 0d
34: 76 35w3d 17d 34: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 34: 1900 32w5d 12d 34: 1592 30w1d 0d
35: 78 35w6d 17d 35: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 35: 1950 33w0d 12d 35: 1663 30w4d 0d
36: 80 36w3d 18d 36: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 36: 2000 33w1d 12d 36: 1735 31w0d 0d
37: 82 37w0d 18d 37: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 37: 2050 33w3d 12d 37: 1808 31w3d 0d
38: 84 37w4d 18d 38: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 38: 2100 33w5d 13d 38: 1881 31w6d 0d
39: 86 38w1d 18d 39: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 39: 2150 34w0d 13d 39: 1955 32w2d 0d
40: 88 38w5d 19d 40: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 40: 2200 34w2d 13d 40: 2029 32w5d 0d
41: 90 39w2d 19d 41: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 41: 2250 34w4d 13d 41: 2104 33w1d 0d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 42: 2300 34w6d 14d 42: 2179 33w4d 0d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 43: 2350 35w1d 14d 43: 2254 34w0d 0d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 44: 2400 35w3d 14d 44: 2329 34w3d 0d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 45: 2450 35w5d 14d 45: 2403 34w6d 0d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 46: 2500 36w0d 15d 46: 2478 35w2d 0d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 47: 2550 36w2d 15d 47: 2551 35w5d 0d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 48: 2600 36w4d 15d 48: 2624 36w1d 0d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 49: 2650 36w6d 16d 49: 2696 36w4d 0d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 50: 2700 37w2d 16d 50: 2767 37w0d 0d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 51: 2750 37w4d 16d 51: 2837 37w3d 0d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 52: 2800 37w6d 17d 52: 2906 37w6d 0d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 53: 2850 38w1d 17d 53: 2973 38w2d 0d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 54: 2900 38w4d 17d 54: 3038 38w5d 0d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 55: 2950 38w6d 18d 55: 3101 39w1d 0d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 56: 3000 39w2d 18d 56: 3162 39w4d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 3220 40w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-142 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.8-4 List of References related to Obstetric Table Data (1/2) for USA
Measurement Table Valid Range Reference
1. BPD HAD84 12w2d to 41w0d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al.: Estimating Fetal Age: Computer
Age table - Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth Parameters.
Radiology. 152:499,1984
2. BPD HAD84 12w0d to 40w0d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Estimating Fetal Age:
Growth table Computer-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth
Parameters. Radiology.152:499,1984
3. BPD SABB78 14w0d to 40w0d Sabbagha, R E., et.al. : Standardization of Sonar
Age table Cephalometry and Gestational Age. Obstet. Gynecol. 52 :
402, 1978.
4. HC HAD84 12w2d to 41w4d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Estimating Fetal
Age table Age:Computer-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth
5. HC HAD84 12w0d to 40w0d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Estimating Fetal
Growth table Age:Computer-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth
6. AC HAD84 12w5d to 42w0d Hadlock,F.P,et.al. : Estimating Fetal
Age table Age:Computer-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth
7. AC HAD84 12w0d to 40w0d Hadlock,F.P,et.al. : Estimating Fetal
8. FL HAD84 12w0d to 40w0d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Estimating Fetal
9. FL HAD82 12w6d to 40w3d Hadlock,F.P,et.al. : Fetal Femur length as a predictor of
Age table Menstrual Age. Sonographically Measured.
Am. J. Roentgenology 138 : 875, May 1982.
10. FL JEAN84 12w4d to 40w0d Jeantry,P.,et.al. : Estimation of gestational age from
Age table measurements of fetal long bones. J Ultrasound
Med.3:75-79,1984
11. FL JEAN83 12w0d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
Growth table McGraw-Hill,1983
12. CRL ROB75 6w2d to 14w0d Robinson,H.P.,et.al. : A Critical Evaluation of Sonar
Age table "Crown-Rump Length" Measurements.
Br.J.Obstet.Gynecol.82:702,1975
13. GS HEL69 5w6d to 12w1d Hellman,LM,et.al. : Growth and development of the human
Age table fetus prior to the 20th week of gestation.
Am J Obstet Gynecol.103:784-800,1969
14. HL JEAN84 12w4d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
Age table McGraw-Hill,1983
15. BD MAY82 12w0d to 40w0d Mayden,K.L.,et.al. : Orbital diameters:A new parameter for
Growth table prenatal diagnosis and dating.
16. FIB JEAN83 14w0d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
17. HW PRE86 15w0d to 25w0d Pretorius,DH,et.al. : Fetal lteral ventricular ratio determind
Growth table during the second trimester.
J Ultrasound Med.5:121-124,1986#
18. IOD MAY82 12w0d to 40w0d Mayden,K.L.,et.al. : Orbital diameters:A new parameter for
Growth table prenatal diagnosis and dating.
19. LVW PRE86 15w0d to 25w0d Pretorius,DH,et.al. : Fetal lteral ventricular ratio determind
Growth table during the second trimester.
J Ultrasound Med.5:121-124,1986
11-143 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.8-4 List of References related to Obstetric Table Data (2/2) for USA
20. OOD MAY82 12w0d to 40w0d Mayden,K.L.,et.al. : Orbital diameters:A new parameter for
Growth table prenatal diagnosis and dating. Am J
Obstet Gynecol.144:289-297,1982
21. RAD JEAN83 13w0d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
22. TCD GOLD87 15w0d to 38w0d Goldstein et al. : Am J of Obstet Gynecol, May, 1987.
Growth table
23. TIB JEAN83 14w0d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
24. ULNA JEAN83 13w0d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
Growth Table McGraw-Hill,1983
25. CI HAD81 14w0d to 40w0d Brenner,WE,et.al. : A standard of fetal growth for the
(BPD / OFD) United States of America.
Ratio table Am J Obstet Gynecol.126:555,1976
26. FL / AC HAD85 21w0d to 42w0d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Use of the Femer Length / Abdominal
Ratio table Circumference Ratio in Detectiong the Macrosomic Fetus.
Radiology 154:503-505,1985
27. FL / BPD HOHL81 23w0d to 40w0d Hohler,C.W,et.al. : Comparison of Fetal Femur Length and
Ratio table Biparietal Diameter in Late Pregnancy.
Am J Obstet Gynecol.141:759,1981
28. HC / AC CAMP77 13w0d to 42w0d Campbell,S. : Ultrasound Measurement of the Fetal Head
Ratio table to Abdomen Circumference Ratio in the Assessment of
Growth Retardation.
Br.J.Obstet.Gynecol.84:165,1977
29. LVW/HW PRE86 15w0d to 38w0d -Pretorius,DH,et.al. : Fetal lteral ventricular ratio determind
Ratio table during the second trimester.J Ultrasound
Med.5:121-124,1986
-Johnson ML, et al. Evaluation of fetal intracranical
anatomy by static and realtime ultrasound. J Clin
Ultrasound. 1980;8:311-318
30. AFI table MOORE 16w0d to 42w0d Moore : Am J Obstet Gynecol.May,1990
90
31. EFBW table BRE76 23w0d to 44w0d Brenner,WE,et.al. : A standard of fetal growth for the
United States of America.
Am J Obstet Gynecol.126:555,1976
32. EFBW table YARK87 16w0d to 38w0d Yarkoni,S. : Obstet Gynecol.69:636-639,1987
Table 11.4.6.8-5 List of References related to Obstetric Table Data for Europe
33. BPD HANS85 11w2d to 40w1d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
Age table and Gynecology Springer-Verlag 1985
34. OFD HANS85 13w4d to 40w0d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
35. CRL HANS85 6w0d to 21w2d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
36. FL HANS85 13w3d to 40w6d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
37. HC HANS85 14w0d to 40w0d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
38. TTD HANS85 14w3d to 40w6d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
11-144 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.8-6 List of References related to Obstetric table data
for Japan(1/2)
39. BPD TODAI96 10w1d to 37w4d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
Age table ultrasound measurement, Jpn J Med Ultrasonics Vol. 23
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
40. BPD TODAI96 10w0d to 42w0d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
Growth table ultrasound measurement, Jpn J Med Ultrasonics Vol. 23
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
41. BPD OSAKA U. 10w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics and
Age table Gynecology Treatment; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
42. BPD OSAKA U. 10w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics and
Growth table Gynecology Treatment; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
43. BPD H1 11w4d to 37w1d Committee for ME Problems, Japan OB/GY Society, 1989
Age table
44. AC TODAI96 16w0d to 42w0d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
45. AC TODAI96 15w3d to 41w2d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
46. FL TODAI96 16w1d to 39w3d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
47. FL TODAI96 16w0d to 42w0d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
48. FL OSAKA U. 13w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics and
49. FL OSAKA U. 13w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics and
50. FL H1 16w6d to 38w4d Committee for ME Problems, Japan OB/GY Society, 1989
Age table
51. CRL TODAI 8w0d to 14w0d Takashi Okai, et al: Approach to new perinatal control by
Age table comprehensive analysis of fetal data; Journal of Japan
OB/GY Society, Vol. 38, No. 8, 1209 - 1217, 1986
52. CRL OSAKA U. 7w0d to 12w6d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics and
53. CRL OSAKA U. 7w0d to 12w6d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics and
54. GS TODAI 4w0d to 11w0d Takashi Okai, et al: Approach to new perinatal control by
55. LV TODAI 21w0d to 40w0d Takashi Okai, et al: Approach to new perinatal control by
56. FTA OSAKA U. 14w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics and
57. FTA OSAKA U. 14w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
Growth table and Gynecology Treatment; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
58. HL OSAKA U. 13w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
Age table and Gynecology Treatment; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
11-145 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.8-6 List of References related to Obstetric table data
for Japan(1/2)
59. HL OSAKA U. 13w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
Growth table and Gynecology Treatment; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
60. APTD None Reserve Takashi Okai, et al: Approach to new perinatal control
Age table by comprehensive analysis of fetal data; Journal of
Japan OB/GY Society, Vol. 38, No. 8, 1209 - 1217, 1986
61. TTD None Reserve Takashi Okai, et al: Approach to new perinatal control
Age table by comprehensive analysis of fetal data; Journal of
Japan OB/GY Society, Vol. 38, No. 8, 1209 - 1217, 1986
62.EFBW table TODAI96 18w0d to 41w0d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
ultrasound measurement, Jpn J Med Ultrasonics Vol. 23
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
63. EFBW table OSAKA U. 16w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
and Gynecology Treatment; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
64. APTDxTTD TODAI96 16w1d to 39w2d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
65. APTDxTTD TODAI96 16w3d to 42w3d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
66. EFBW TODAI96 19w3d to 39w2d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
67. EFBW OSAKA U. 16w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
Age table and Gynecology Treatment; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
11-146 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.4.6.8-7 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (HAD85)
Equation Name HAD85
Equation
WT = 10^(1.335+(0.316*BPD+0.457*AC+1.623*FL-0.0034*AC*FL)/100)
Reference Hadlock F.P.,et.al.: Estimation of Fetal Weight with the Use of Head, Body, and Femur
Measurements-A Prospective Study: Am. J. Obstet. Gynecol. 151:333-337, 1985.
Table 11.4.6.8-8 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (SHEP82)

Equation Name SHEP82
Equation
WT = 10^(1.2508+0.0166*BPD+0.0046*AC-0.02646*AC*BPD/1000
Reference Shepard M.J.,et.al.:

An Evaluation of Two Equations for Predicting Fetal Weight by Ultrasound. Am. J.
Obstet.Gynecol. 142:47,1982.
Table 11.4.6.8-9 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (HANS76)

Equation Name HANS76
Equation
WT = -105.775*BPD+64.914*TTD+0.930707*BPD^2-0.20562*TTD^2+515.263
Reference Hansmann,M.et.al.:Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics and gynecology.
Springer-Verlag,1987.
Table 11.4.6.8-10 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (MERZ88)

Equation Name MERZ88
Equation WT = -3200.405+15.7072*AC+0.159039*BPD^2
Reference Merz,E. et. al:Intrauterine Gewichtsschatzung miitels Ultrachall. Ultrachall 9, 15-24, 1988
NOTICE This equation cannot be used for the gestational age up to 25 weeks
because of out of application range.
Table 11.4.6.8-11 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (TODAI)

Equation Name TODAI
Equation WT = (1.07*BPD^3+3.42*APTD*TTD*FL)*0.001
Reference Norio Shinozuka, et. al.:
Tokyo University, Japan :Chouonpa taiji keisoku ni okeru kijyun-chi no sakusei Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics Vol.23 No.12 (1996)
Table 11.4.6.8-12 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (OSAKA U.)

Equation Name OSAKA U.
Equation WT = 6.3+1.25647*(BPD/10)^3+0.350665*FTA*FL
Reference Mineo Aoki, et. al. :
Osaka University, Japan :Taiji hatuiku-no shindan, Sanfujin-ka chiryou, Vol.47, No.5,1983 /
11
11-147 Q1E-EA0466
11.4.7 Other Measurement
[1] Angle Measurement
As an indication for diagnosis of neonatal hip joint dislocations,
measure bony roof angle (α) and cartilage roof angle (β). ‘α’,
‘β’ is displayed as ‘Alpha’, ‘Beta’ in MRF (Measurement Result
Frame).
Table 11.4.7-1 Quantities Measured in Angle Measurement
Symbol Meaning Unit Comment
Alpha (AB, CD)

(α) Bony roof angle ° α = 180°−COS−1
I AB I・I CD I
Beta
Cartilage roof angle ° (AB, EF)
(β) β = COS−1
I AB I・I EF I
A
1 Line sequment 1: Basic line (vector AB)
E Line sequment 2: Acetabular roof line (vector CD)

D
3
Line sequment 3: Inclination line (vector EF)
β α 2 C [Reference]
F Dr.R.Graf
*1: Classification of hip joint dysplasia by means of
sonography
Arch Orthop Trauma Surg (1984) 102: 248-255
*2: The diagnosis of congenital hip-point dislocation
B by the ultrasonic compound treatment
Arch Orthop Trauma Surg 97: 117-133
Fig. 11.4.7-1 Concept of Angle Measurement
11-148 Q1E-EA0466
(1) Display a cross-sectional image of the hip joint in B-mode,
and switch the FREEZE function on.
(2) Start up the measurement as per the procedure described in
paragraph 11.2.
(3) Move the caliper to starting point
ANGLE
"A", and press ENTER key.
This will fix the position of "A".
(4) By rotating the trackball, move the
+ mark to the end point "B" of line
segment 1.
If UNDO key is pressed at this time,
ANGLE
the end point "B" is fixed and the other
end point "A" can be moved to finely
adjust the angle of line segment.
Afer completion of line segment
1
setting, press ENTER key to fix the
line segment.
Near the beginning point (end point ANGLE
"A"), 1 is displayed.
(5) Set the line segment 2 (end points "C"
and "D") by the same procedures of (3)
1 2
and (4). By the line segments 1 and
2 a bony roof (α) is calculated and
displayed. ANGLE
(6) Set the line segment 3 (end points "E"

and "F") by the same procedures of (3)
3
and (4). By the line segments 1 and
1 2
3, a cartilage roof angle is
calculated and displayed. The
Fig. 11.4.7-2
measurement is terminated.
Procedure of Angle
Measurement
11-149 Q1E-EA0466
NOTICE: The Angle Measurement function is designed to be used primarily
for the diagnosis of neonatal hip-joint dislocations.
1) Angles α and β are defined according to the sequence in which

the line segments are established, and also on the basis of
the directions of vectors AB, CD, and EF, as in the examples
below. Great care must, therefore, be taken to ensure that the
line segments are established in the correct sequence.
Bony roof angle α: 180°-angle of intersection of vectors AB and CD
D C
2
A
1
B A
1 α B
2 α
C D
Cartilage roof angle β: angle of intersection of vectors AB and EF
F E 3
1 1 β
A B A B
β 3
E F
Fig.11.4.7-3 Examples:directions of vectors
2) It is displayed the line number 1 to 3 near the line of start

(small + mark), but alphabet A to F are not displayed in the
figure.
3) It can be changed moving side of vector start/end before fixed
both side of line by using UNDO key.
4) After measured and start angle measurement, it was cleared before

has measured result of value.
11-150 Q1E-EA0466
[2] Urology measurement
This is the measurement function to estimate amount of
hypertrophy, antigen density, etc. from measurement of volume
of bladder, prostate, etc. Any calculation equation can be freely
created according to its purpose and application.
Table 11.4.7-2 Measurement Items for Urology

Application Abbreviation Unit Measurement method and Calculation equation
Predicted bladder BD1 mm Volume predicted by measurement of 3 diameters
volume BD2 mm (biplane method) from orthogonally crossing two
BD3 mm images.
Bladder vol. cc BD1
BD2
Urinary bladder
BD3
BLVOL = BD1× BD2× BD2 × 0.000523

Predicted whole grand D1 mm Volume predicted by measurement of 3 diameters
prostate D2 mm (biplane method) from median sagittal image and
D3 mm median transverse image of prostate
WG Vol. cc
IS FS
D1
(Top-bott
U om
VM CZ
ED PZ
SV D2
(Anterior-posterior
Median sagittal image (sagittal view)
FS
U TZ
IS
ED CZ
PZ
D3 (Transverse diameter)
Median transverse image (transverse view)
WGVOL = D1×D2×D3×0.000523
IS Interureteric Space
U Urethra
VM Verumontanum
ED Ejaculatory Duct
SV Seminal Vesicle
FS Fibromuscular Stroma
TZ Prostate (Transitional Zone)
CZ Prostate (Central Zone)
PZ Prostate (Peripheral Zone)
11-151 Q1E-EA0466
Application Abbreviation Unit Measurement method and Calculation equation
Predicted Transitional DA mm Volume predicted by measurement of 3 diameters
Zone Prostate Volume DB mm (biplane method) from median sagittal image and
DC mm median transverse image of transitional zone of
TZ Vol. cc prostate
DA FS
TZ
SV
PZ
DB (Top-bottom diameter)
Median sagittal view (sagittal view)
FS
U
IS TZ
VM
ED CZ
PZ
Median transverse view (transverse view)

TZVOL = DA×DB×DC×0.000523
Predicted PSA level by D1 mm Predicted PSA level obtained from prostate whole
whole grand volume D2 mm volume
PSA: Prostate D3 mm
Specific Antigen Pred. PSA ng PREDPSA = D1×D2×D3×0.000523×0.12
Prostate whole Gradient coefficient by
Ng: nomogram
gland volume clinical experiences
NOTICE: Gradient coefficient 0.12 by clinical

experiences is taken from the references
on the next page.
Predicted PSA level by DA mm Predicted PSA level obtained from prostate gland
transitional zone DB mm transition zone volume
volume DC mm
TZ PSA ng TZPSA = DA×DB×DC×0.000084
Gradient coefficient by
transitional zone prostate volume
and clinical experiences
Predicted prostate SPSA ng/ml Predicted antigen density for prostate volume by
specific antigen density D1 mm input of prostate specific antigen value
D2 mm (SPSA: Serium PSA)
D3 mm PSADENS = SPSA/(D1×D2×D3×0.000523)
PSA Dens. − Prostate whole
gland volume
Input the variable SPSA (Serium PSA) in report.
11-152 Q1E-EA0466
References for urology measurements
1. Griffiths, et al., Measuring Bladder Volume and Residual Urine; The
Journal of UROLOGY, Vol. 136, 808-812, 1986
2. Fred Lee, M.D., et al., Predicted Prostate Specific Antigen Results
Using Transrectal Ultrasound Gland Volume; CANCER Supplement, Vol.
70, No. 1, July 1992.
3. Peter J, Littrup, M.D., et al., Determination of Prostate Volume

with Transrectal US for Cancer Screening; Radiology, Vol. 179, 49-53,
1991.
4. Mitchell C. Benson, et al., Prostate Specific Antigen Density: A
means of Distinguishing Benign Prostatic Hypertrophy and Prostate
Cancer; The Journal of UROLOGY, Vol. 147, 815-816, March 1992.
Mitchell C. Benson, et al., The Use of Prostate Specific Antigen Density
to Enhance the Predictive Value of Intermediate Levels of Serum Prostate
Specific Antigen;
The Journal of UROLOGY, Vol. 147, 817-821, March 1992.
11-153 Q1E-EA0466
[3] Gynecology measurements
Measurements of uterus and ovary are made. Volume of the
interested region can also be calculated from the measurement
results of 3 diameters of Length, A-P length and Width.
Furthermore, blood flow measurement function is provided.
Table 11.4.7.3-1 Gynecology Measurement Items

Measurement Measurement Measurement Unit Calculation equation Remarks
name item mode
Uterus Uterus L Distance mm
Uterus AP Distance mm
Uterus W Distance mm
Endomet. T Distance mm Endometrium
thickness
Cervic L Distance mm Cervix length
L-Ovary L Distance mm
AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
V Calculation ml (SPI/6)*(L*0.1)*(AP*0.1)*(W*0.1)
R-Ovary L Distance mm
AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
Uterine Vs Velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or manual
Vd Velocity (D-mode) cm/s waveform trace
Vm Velocity (D-mode) cm/s
S/D Calculation ― Vs/Vd
RI Calculation ― (Vs-Vd)/Vs
PI Calculation ― (Vs-Vd)/Vm
L-Ovary-D Vs Velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or manual
R-Ovary-D Vs Velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or manual
Table 11.4.7.3-2 Gynecology Report Items

Measurement Item Description Writing mode Remarks
name
Cul-de-sac Fluid Cul-de-sac Fluid Selection Yes/No/NA
Amount Cul-de-sac Amount Selection NA/MILDMODE/SEVERE
11-154 Q1E-EA0466
[4] Follicular Measurement
Measurements of follicle are mainly made. A volume (V) of the
interested region can be calculated from the measurement results
of Length, A-P length and Width. It is also provided with blood
flow measurement function.
Table 11.4.7-4 Follicular Measurement Items

Measurement Measurement Measurement Unit Calculation equation Remarks
name item mode
L-Ovary L Distance mm
AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
R-Ovary L Distance mm
AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
L-Follicul. L Distance mm
(1 ~ 5) AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
R-Follicul. L Distance mm
(1 ~ 5) AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
Uterus Vs Distance mm
Vd Distance mm
Vm Distance mm
S/D Distance mm
RI Distance mm
PI Distance mm
Uterine AP Distance mm Auto or manual
W Distance mm waveform trace
L-Ovary-D Vs Velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or manual
R-Ovary-D Vs Velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or manual
11-155 Q1E-EA0466
[5] CAROTID Measurement
In the carotid measurement a level of blood vessel stenosis
(%D-STENO or %A-STENO) is measured from the diameters (D1, D2)
or the sectional space (A1, A2) of the blood vessel seemed normal
or abnormal at every part of measurement, and also the blood
flow velocity (Vs, Vd) using measuring caliper and the mean blood
flow velocity (Vm) in a tracing period using Doppler wave tracing
method are measured at every part of measurement. As a Doppler
wave tracing method one of three methods, AUTO, PLOT or MANUAL,
is selectable.
Table 11.4.7-5 Carotid Measurement
Parts to measure Items to measure Unit Measuring method Comments

CCA D1 mm Distance(B-mode)
BIF. D2 mm Distance(B-mode)
ICA PROX %D-STENO % Calculation1
ICA MID
ICA DIST A1 cm2 Trace
ICA(RATIO) A2 cm2 Trace
ECA %A-STENO % Calculation2
VERT.
Vs cm/s Velocity
Vd cm/s Velocity
Vm cm/s Velocity
RI (Vs - Vd) / Vs
PI (Vs - Vd) / Vm
NOTICE:
Calculation1:((Max(D1,D2)-Min(D1,D2))/Max(D1,D2))×100[%]
Calculation2:((Max(A1,A2)-Min(A1,A2))/Max(A1,A2))×100[%]
Abbreviation
CCA:Common Carotid Artery
BIF.:Bifurcation
ICA PROX:Internal Carotid Artery(Proximal)
ICA MID:Internal Carotid Artery(Middle)
ICA DIST:Internal Carotid Artery(Distal)
ICA(RATIO):Internal Carotid Artery(For ratio)
ECA:External Carotid Artery
VERT.:Vertebral Artery
11-156 Q1E-EA0466
[6] LEG A. Measurement
In the leg artery measurement, as same with the case of carotid
measurement, the blood flow velocity (Vs, Vd) and the mean blood
flow velocity (Vm) in the tracing period of Doppler wave at every
part of measurement are measured.
Table 11.4.7-6 Leg Artery Measurement

A.AORTA Vs cm/s Velocity
CIA Vd cm/s Velocity
CFA Vm cm/s Velocity
PFA RI (Vs-Vd) / Vs
SFA PI (Vs-Vd) / Vm
POP.A.
PTA
PERON.A.
ATA
DPA
Abbreviation
A.AORTA:Abdominal Aorta CIA:Common Iliac Artery
CFA:Common Femoral Artery PFA:Profunda femoral Artery
SFA:Superficial Femoral Artery POP.A.:Popliteal Artery
PTA:Posterior Tibial Artery PERON.A.:Peroneal Artery
ATA:Anterior Tibial Artery DPA:Dorsalis Pedis Artery
[7] ARM A. Measurement

In the arm artery measurement, as same with the case of carotid
measurement, the blood flow velocity (Vs, Vd) and the mean blood
flow velocity (Vm) in tracing period of Doppler wave at every
part of measurement are measured.
Table 11.4.7-7 Arm Artery Measurement

SUBCL.A. Vs cm/s Velocity
AX.A. Vd cm/s Velocity
BRACH.A. Vm cm/s Velocity
RAD.A. RI (Vs-Vd) / Vs
UL.A. PI (Vs-Vd) / Vm
Abbreviation
SUBCL.A.:Subclavian Artery AX.A.:Axillay Artery
BRACH.A.:Brachial Artery RAD.A.:Radial Artery
UL.A.:Ulnar Artery
11-157 Q1E-EA0466
11.5 Real-time Doppler measurement
11.5.1 Real-time Doppler measurement start

A measurement menu is displayed
as shown in Fig.11.5.1.1 by
MEAS MENU
pressing when the freeze is
turned off in B/PW, B/CW, B/M/PW,
CFM-B/PW, CFM-B/CM, CFM-B/M/PW,
or single CW mode. Real-time
Doppler measurement is started
by selecting Measurement in this
measurement menu.
When Real-time Doppler
measurement is started, the
Doppler waveform is traced
automatically. Also, preset
measuring items are displayed
and updated automatically.
Fig.11.5.1-1
Measurement selection menu
･ The measurement being displayed in the measurement

menu can be set every application (For measurement
setting, refer to [11.6.2 Measurement setup])
･ The measuring items to be displayed can be set every
measurement
(For measuring items setting, refer to
[11.6.2 Measurement setup])
･ Real-time Doppler measurement is restricted as
described below.
(1) A Doppler waveform is traced, but it is not
measured in the interval mode and ECG sync. mode.
For displaying measured values, select B freeze.
(2) Measurement cannot be done in cine reproduction
mode.
(3) In case of ECG function is activate.
(4) In case of R-TRIG is not detected.
5−158 Q1E-EA0466
11.5.2 Real-time Doppler measurement function menu
The function menu at the lower part of the screen
becomes the function menu for Real-time Doppler
measurement when setting the track ball priority display
to at the upper right of the screen by pressing
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
PRIORITY TRACKBALL during Real-time Doppler measurement
Page 1
Page 2
Fig.11.5.2.1 Function menu in Real-time Doppler measurement
− Page 1 −
F2 Peak trace display

Turns on or off the peak trace display
Display ON
Display OFF
Fig.11.5.2.2 Peak trace display
F3 Mean trace display

Turns on or off the mean trace display
Display ON
Display OFF
Fig.11.5.2.3 Mean trace display
5−159 Q1E-EA0466
F4 Trace direction selection
Selects the trace direction and the direction of
Doppler image to be measured.
Both trace Trace and measurement are done
to the Doppler images on both
sides of the base line
Down trace Trace and measurement are done
4
to the Doppler image on the
lower side of the base line
Up trace Trace and measurement are done
to the Doppler image on the
upper side of the base line
Fig.11.5.2-4 Trace directions
− Page 2 −
F1 Measuring display frame move

The measuring display frame can be moved to an
optional position by the track ball
Its operation method is the same as in normal
measurement
(For details, refer to [11.3.1 (2) Function menu])
F2 Measuring display frame size change

The measuring display frame size can be changed by
the track ball
Its operation method is the same as in normal
measurement
(For details, refer to [11.3.1 (2) Function menu])
F4 Average heart rate setting

The heart rate to be measured and displayed on an
average is set.
Max.15 heart rates can be averaged.
5−160 Q1E-EA0466
4
Fig.11.5.2.5 Average heart rate
F6 Peak trace display color selection

A peak trace display color can be selected out of 4
colors (green, white, blue, and purple)
Fig.11.5.2.6 Peak display colors
F7 Mean trace display color selection

A mean trace display color can be selected out of 4
colors (black, blue, purple, green )
Fig.11.5.2.7 Mean display colors
5−161 Q1E-EA0466
11.5.3 Freeze on operation in Real-time Doppler measurement
By turning on Freeze during Real-time Doppler
measurement, a window shown in Fig.11.5.3.1 is displayed
Fig.11.5.3.1 Confirmation window
5−162 Q1E-EA0466
Press Yes button when the trace and measuring value are
proper.
Measurement is started in normal mode while keeping the
trace and measuring results when the freeze is turned on.
Select “No” and press ENTER key when the trace and
measuring value are not proper. Measurement is started
in normal mode after clearing the trace and measuring
results when the freeze is turned on.
Real-time Doppler measurement is started again by

pressing ENTER key after setting the track ball to
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
and then, moving the cursor to “TRACE” in the

measurement display frame shown in Fig. 11.5.3.2
Fig.11.5.3.2 Measurement display frame
11.5.4 End of Real-time Doppler measurement

Real-time Doppler measurement is completed by pressing
CLEAR
key.
5−163 Q1E-EA0466
11.5.5 Cautions to be observed during the use of Real-time
Doppler measurement
(1) Real-time Doppler measurement adopts a system of
detecting the maximum flow rate point in one heart
rate of the Doppler image being scrolled before
starting various measurement operations. The time
from the end of operations to the display of
measuring value fluctuates more or less according
to the operating loads during the measurement of
equipment. Accordingly, you are requested to
understand that the measuring results show the
measuring values of the Doppler image before
several heart rates
(2) Since the measurement operation program is executed
based on HR, other operation values may become
error if the HR value is deviated noticeably. If
accurate operation is necessary, display an ECG
waveform and HR. The maximum flow rate point during
one heart rate is detected based on an R wave in
the ECG waveform during ECG waveform display.
Perform measurement based on the ECG waveform and
Doppler waveform under a stable condition
(3) Stabilize the Doppler waveform and set the Doppler
gain properly before starting Real-time Doppler
measurement. Clear the measuring values if the
continuity of Doppler waveform has been disturbed
to a certain extent due to the move of the probe or
Doppler gate when the Doppler waveform is stable.
Clear the measuring values too, if the next peak
cannot be detected for a certain time.
(4) Since Real-time Doppler measurement is done by
detecting the maximum flow rate point, etc. from a
Doppler waveform, measuring results fluctuate more
or less due to Doppler gain and other factors. Use
measured values as a reference for diagnosis only.
5−164 Q1E-EA0466
11.6 Measurement Setup
Measurement method and measurement items can be set for execution
of measurement. Because this function does not requires
complicated setting procedures, measurement method optimum for
each measurement can be set according to the shape of the interested
region and physician's preference. Furthermore, complicated
operations such as setting of sampling points in spite of the item
that does not require measurement result can be eliminated.
11.6.1 Configuration of Measurement Setup

The Measurement Setup function includes the following 3 menus.
(1) Measurement Setup menu (Refer to 11.6.2.)
This is the menu to be started first in the Measurement Setup
program. The hierarchy of all the measurements is shown in tree
structure. Using this menu, creation of new measurement, copy
and deletion can be executed.
(2) Measurement Edition menu (Refer to 11.6.3.1 and 11.6.3.2.)
Details of measurement items included in the desired measurement
are set.
(3) Link Setup menu (Refer to 11.6.3.3.)
The Link Tool is set up.
The terms necessary to explain the hierarchy in the Measurement
Setup menu are shown on the next page.
11 - 165 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.6.1-1 Setting Items on Measurement Setup Menu
Symbol displayed on Item
Description
Setup Menu name
Region This represents a diagnostic region for measurement.
Three kinds of regions, "Abdo&Others", "Cardiac" and "Vascular"
are incorporated in the scanner system shipped from the factory.
Kinds of executable measurements are different for each
diagnostic region. Designate one measurement region for each
application (refer to 8.3.8).
After starting the measurement program, the measurement for
the region designated by the application being used is displayed
on the menu.
Group This is a folder in which multiple measurements or groups can
be kept. The group in the group is called sub-group.
Sub-group can hold only measurements in it. Group is
displayed on the Measurement menu. Display of measurement
report is altered by group unit shown just under the
Measurement menu.
Measurement This represents Measurement, and corresponds to "Ratio-Dis",
"LVOT", etc. Measurement can hold Item Group or
Measurement Item in it. Measurement is displayed in the title
area of the Measurement menu and measurement result display
area.
Item Group This is a folder in which multiple measurement items can be
held. This can be created only for Hierarchy measurement type
(refer to 11.6.2.2). When the Measurement program is started,
measurement items in the measurement result display area can
be changed at one time by the function key within the range
included in this Item Group. This is used when the ratio
calculation equation for "Ratio-Dis" measurement is changed by
the function key.
Measurement This is an item to be actually measured. It corresponds to "D1"
Item and "D2" in the "Ratio-Dis" measurement.
A measurement value for the measurement item can be
obtained by using the Measurement Tool (refer to 11.8), and it is
displayed in the measurement result display area.
The relation between setting procedures on Setup menu, Measurement menu

and measurement result display area is shown on the next page.
11 - 166 Q1E-EA0466
Group name "OB-STD" Measurement name "Fetal Para."
Measurement
Setup menu
Selection Selection Measurement
Item name
“GS”,
“CRL”,
：
：
：
Measurement name
Group name Measurement name "Fetal Para."
"OB-STD" "Fetal Para."
11 - 167
Measurement
Measurement menu Item name
Selection Selection “GS”,
and Measurement
Result display area “CRL”,
：
：
：
Measurement Result
Measurement menu display area
Measurement Submenu
Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 11.6.1-1 Setting on Measurement Setup Menu and Operation after Program Start
11.6.2 Measurement Setup menu
11.6.2.1 Starting Measurement Setup menu
After opening the Main menu by pressing key, select
[Setup] menu. Then, selecting [Measure] displays
[Measurement Setup] menu shown in Fig. 11.6.2.1-1.
Fig. 11.6.2.1-1 Starting Measurement Setup Menu
In the area at the left of the Measurement Setup menu where the hierarchy
is shown, by double clicking Region, Group, Measurement iron or name,
or clicking Node ("+" or "-" mark), its item can be opened or closed.
(Because nothing is included in Measurement item, it is neither opened
nor closed.)
Clicking node
Double clicking icon
Double clicking name
Fig. 11.6.2.1-2 Open and Close Operation of Menu
11 - 168 Q1E-EA0466
Selecting Region, Group or Measurement in the area at the left of the
Measurement Setup menu where a hierarchy is shown displays its contents
in the right area.
Regions
Measurements
Regions
Items
Measurements
Fig. 11.6.2.1-3 Measurement Setup Menu Display
11 - 169 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.2.2 Measurement Type
The group just under the Region is called Root Group. The
measurement just under the Region is also called Root
Measurement. Root Group and Root Measurement are unit to
alter display on Measurement report. In Measurement report
display, the following 3 formats are available. (For
details, refer to [11.7 Measurement Report function].)
• Standard format
This is the most simple format to display measurement
name, measurement item names and its measurement results.
• Obstetric Measurement format
This displays various data such as gestational age and
estimated date of confinement necessary for obstetric
measurement report.
• LR Display format
This displays measurement results of the same regions
as compared in the left and right sides such as peripheral
vessel measurement (carotid).
Accordingly, when newly creating Root Group and Root

Measurement, it is necessary to designate which format is
used.
Adding the format in which items to be displayed in the
measurement result display area can be changed to the above
3 formats, these 4 formats are called [Measurement Type].
The Measurement Types are defined with the following 4 types.
< Measurement Types >

• Standard
Measurement report is displayed in the standard format.
• Obstetric
Measurement report is displayed in the obstetric
measurement format.
11 - 170 Q1E-EA0466
• LR-Meas.
Measurement report is displayed in the LR display format.
The Measurement created in LR-Meas. type is automatically
affixed with "L-" or "R-" to the top of the Measurement
name and each of them is executed as separate measurement.
• Hierarchy
This type allows measurement items displayed in the
Measurement Result Display area to be changed by using
a function key. For this purpose, "Item Group" must be
created. "Item Group" can be created only for measurement
in the Hierarchy Measurement type.
Measurement type is designated on the following dialog menu

when Root Group or Root Measurement is newly created.
Selection of
Measurement
Type
Fig. 11.6.2.2-1 Selection of Measurement Type
Note that Measurement Type cannot be changed after it is

once set up. If it is erroneously set up, delete it and
then create it again. "Property" shown at the right to
Measurement Type shown in Fig. 11.6.2.2-1 is called Root
property, with which settings special to the selected
measurement type can be made. The following settings are
included in Root Property.
11 - 171 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.6.2.2-1 Setting of Root Property
Kind of item Measurement Settings of Root Property
type
Root Group Standard “Display” and “Open In Menu”
(Refer to Fig. 11.6.2.2-2.)
Obstetric Settings for Obstetric Measurement
(Refer to Fig. 11.6.2.2-4.)
LR-Meas. “Display” and “Open In Menu”
(Refer to Fig. 11.6.2.2-2.)
Root Measurement Standard Same as Measurement Property
(Refer to Fig. 11.6.2.2-5.)
Obstetric Settings for Obstetric Measurement
(Refer to Fig. 11.6.2.2-4.)
LR-Meas. Same as Measurement Property
(Refer to Fig. 11.6.2.2-5.)
Hierarchy Same as Measurement Property
(Refer to Fig. 11.6.2.2-5.)
"Open In Menu" shown in the above table is set up on the following dialog.
Fig. 11.6.2.2-2 Setting Display and Open In Menu
By setting "Display" in OFF position, the selected group or measurement

will not be displayed in Measurement menu.
"Open In Menu" is set to OFF in default. Setting "Open In Menu" to ON
does not display the group name in the Measurement Result Display area,
instead the contents of that group are displayed in the area where the
group is to be displayed.
11 - 172 Q1E-EA0466
Display in Measurement Menu
Region called "Example"
Root Group (just under Region)

Contents of
Group are
displayed.
Open In Menu setting in
"Group"
Setting Measurement
Setup
Set to OFF Set to ON
Fig. 11.6.2.2-3 Open In Menu Setting and Measurement Menu Display
11 - 173 Q1E-EA0466
Property for Obstetric Measurement is set on the following dialog menu.
Fig. 11.6.2.2-4 Property for Obstetric Measurement
Details of setting items are shown on the next page.
11 - 174 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.6.2.2-2 Property Setting Items for Obstetric Measurement
Category Setting item Description
Menu Display Display Setting Settings for display on Measurement menu
are made. (Refer to Fig. 11.6.2.2-2.)
By setting this in Off position, the selected
group or measurement will not be displayed
in Measurement menu.
Open In Menu Open In Menu is set.
(Refer to Fig. 11.6.2.2-1.)
Note: This cannot be set in Root
Measurement.
Settings Gestational Period Gestational period is set. It is set to 40
weeks in default.
Deviation In Graph In growth evaluation by standard deviation
(SD), how many times of the standard
deviation the safety region to be displayed in
graph is set is designated.
Display GA and EDC by U/S Whether gestational age (GA) and estimated
date of confinement (EDC) based on U/S are
displayed or not in the Measurement Result
Display area or report is set.
GA and EDC by LMP Whether gestational age (GA) and estimated
date of confinement (EDC) based on LMP
are displayed or not in the Measurement
Result Display area or report is set.
GA and EDC w/o AC Whether gestational age (GA) and estimated
date of confinement (EDC) based on U/S are
calculated from the data excluding the
measurement variable "AC" (abdominal
circumference) and are displayed or not in
the Measurement Result Display area or
report is set.
GA and EDC by DGA Whether gestational age (GA) and estimated
date of confinement (EDC) based on DGA
are displayed or not in the Measurement
Result Display area or report is set.
EDC based on each parameters Whether estimated date of confinement is
calculated from the measurement result for
each of fetal measurement variables such as
BPD (Biparietal diameter) and FL (Femur
length) and is displayed or not in the
Measurement Result Display area or report is
set.
Ranking based on GA by U/S Whether Rank value is displayed or not with
DGA set by [GA by U/S] is set.
11 - 175 Q1E-EA0466
Property can be set not only to Root Measurement but also to [Measurement].
Fig. 11.6.2.2-5 Measurement Property
Display Options: on/off

[on] : Settings are displayed on Measurement menu. (In
case the window mode allowing execution of its
measurement is different from the current window
mode, it is not displayed.)
[off] : Settings are not displayed on Measurement menu.
Real-time Doppler measurement Options: on/off
[on] : Enable to use real-time Doppler measurement.
[off] : This operation is disabled.
Measurement Max Times Options: 1/2/3/4/5
How many times each measurement item included in
Measurement can be made is set. With "1" set,
"Measurement No. Display" is automatically set to
"Off" and its operation is disabled.
Measured No. Display Options: on/off
[on] : Number of measurements is displayed at the left of
the measurement item in the Measurement Result
Display area.
Number of measurements means how many times its
measurement item was measured.
[off] : Number of measurements is not displayed.
11 - 176 Q1E-EA0466
Measurement continues in freeze off Options: on/off
[on] : Measurement is not stopped even if FREEZE OFF is
selected.
[off] : Measurement is stopped if FREEZE OFF is selected.
In this case, Auto RF Hide is disabled.
Auto RF Hide Options: on/off
[on] : By selecting FREEZE OFF during measurement in dual
screen mode, the measurement result display frame
is automatically hidden.
By selecting FREEZE ON, it is displayed again.
[off] : Even if FREEZE OFF is selected during measurement
in dual screen mode, the measurement result display
frame is not hidden.
Report Display Options: on/off
[on] : Whether measurement result is displayed or not in
report. Number of measurements for the measurement
result depends on the setting for "Measurement Max
Times".
[off] : Measurement result is not displayed in report. In
this case, setting of "Measured No. Display" is
disabled in the Measurement Edit menu.
Number of Measurements is also automatically set
to "1" and operation of "Measurement Max Times" is
disabled.
Automatic Execution Options: on/off
[on] : When measurement is invoked, the measurement item
is executed in automatic mode.
[off] : When measurement is executed, the measurement item
is manually selected by user.
Mode Restriction Options: on/off
[on] : Settings are displayed on Measurement menu with
restriction to the specified window mode. Setting
this in "on" enables the "Mode" button located next
to the check box. Pressing this button opens the
menu to set the window mode allowing execution of
that measurement. There are 3 check boxes of B,
M and D. Place a check mark in the box to allow
the desired measurement (set it in on). For
11 - 177 Q1E-EA0466
example, placing a check mark only in M displays
the measurement on Measurement menu only when M-mode
appears on the window.
[off] : The setting to display only the specified window
mode on Measurement menu is not used.
In the case of Hierarchy type measurement, in addition to the above

items, following 3 items, "Change Group Function Label", "Open In Menu"
and "Default Selection of Item Group" are added.
Fig. 11.6.2.2-5-1 Measurement Property
Change Group Function Label

Label to be displayed on function key is input by
A/N keys.
(Display of measurement items in the item group can
be simultaneously changed by the function key.)
Open In Menu Options: on/off
[on] : When item group is displayed in the measurement
result display area, both the name of the item group
and measurement item names in it are displayed.
11 - 178 Q1E-EA0466
[off] : When item group is displayed in the measurement
result display area, only the measurement items in
the item group are displayed.
Default Selection of Item Group
Item group that is to be first selected when starting
the measurement program is selected.
11.6.2.3 Functions of [Measurement Setup] menu

Copy Group, Measurement, etc. clicked on menu are copied.
Paste Copied item is pasted on menu. However, if the
Measurement Types of the copy source and copy
destination are different each other (refer to
11.6.2.2), the item cannot be pasted. In the case
the item is the one cut from the copy source in this
case, paste it again to the original place.
Cut Measurement and any of others on menu are cut.

Rename Name of Measurement and any of others are renamed.
Delete Measurement and any of others are deleted from menu.
Edit Contents of Measurement and Measurement Item are

edited. (Refer to 11.6.3.)
New Region A Region is newly created.

New Group A Group is newly created.
New Meas. A Measurement is newly created.
New Item A Measurement Item is newly created.
New Item Grp. An Item Group is newly created.

Separator This is used when a separation line is inserted
between Measurement Names in Measurement Menu
display and a space is put in between Measurement
Items to be displayed in the Measurement Result
Display area.
Property Data special to the selected Group and Measurement
are set.
11 - 179 Q1E-EA0466
Special OB table data is input and output, and setting of
measurement data output is made.
Export/Import Measurement items are exported to and imported from

the external memory medium.
OK After all settings are correctly completed, this
"OK" button is clicked.
Cancel Pressing this button cancels all the changes made

to Measurement and Items and closed the window.
11 - 180 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.3 Measurement Edit Menu
Selecting Measurement or Measurement Item on the Measurement
Setup menu described before and pressing Edit button start the
Measurement Edit menu.
Measurement name (Measurement name under edition is displayed.)
Measurement
Item Edition
area
Measurement
Items list
Fig. 11.6.3-1 Appearance of Measurement Edit Menu
[Measurement Item Edit area] shown in the above Fig. is grouped into
4 tabs of "Main", "Sub", "Tool" and "Tool2".
11 - 181 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.3.1 Basic operation
The basic operation procedures (new addition, deletion and
edition) to be done on the Measurement Edit menu are shown
below.
< Procedures for new addition >
Press NEW button.
Various settings of measurement items are made.

• Selection of Measurement Tool (Main tab)
• Setting display unit (Main tab)
• Setting parameters related to display (Sub tab)
• Setting Tool property (Tool and Tool2 tabs)
Press Register button.

(Completion of registration of
one measurement item)
Fig. 11.6.3.1-1 Procedures for New Addition of Measurement Item
NOTICE The contents to be set in [Various settings of measurement items]

depend on the selected Measurement Tool. For details refer to
[11.8 Measurement Tool].
11 - 182 Q1E-EA0466
< Procedures for deletion >
Measurement item can be deleted on the Measurement Setup menu, but
the deletion procedures on the Measurement Edition menu are shown
below.
Select the Measurement Item to be deleted from Measurement Items list.
Press Delete button.
Fig. 11.6.3.1-2 Procedures for Deletion of Measurement Item
Pressing Delete button displays the deletion confirmation dialog.

Selecting "Yes" completes the deletion. Selecting "No" cancels the
deletion.
< Procedures for edition >
Select the measurement item to be edited in the Measurement Items list.
Settings of Measurement Item are changed.

• Selection of Measurement Tool (Main tab)
• Setting display unit (Main tab)
• Setting parameters related to display (Sub tab)
• Setting Tool property (Tool and Tool2 tabs)
Press Register button.

(Completion of registration of
one measurement item)
Fig. 11.6.3.1-3 Procedures for Edition of Measurement Item
11 - 183 Q1E-EA0466
If any operation other than deletion was executed for the measurement
item, be sure to press Register button to compete the registration.
Trying selection of other measurement item in the Measurement Items
list without doing this operation will display the following dialog.
Fig. 11.6.3.1-4 Confirmation Dialog for Change of Measurement Item
Pressing OK button cancels all the editions made for the measurement
item before change and a new measurement item is selected. Pressing
Cancel button discontinues the change of the measurement item and returns
to the Edition window again.
11 - 184 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.3.2 Measurement Item Edition area
The Measurement Item Edition area is composed of 4 tabs
of "Main", "Sub", "Tool" and "Tool2". Functions of the tabs
are described below.
"Main" tab : Basic parameters necessary for executing the
measurement item are set. Measurement tools
and display unit are set.
"Sub" tab : Parameters related to display (such as
whether the settings are to be displayed in
Measurement Result Display area and report)
are set.
"Tool" tab : This is a measurement tool (single tool), and
it is set when setting the parameters special
to that tool is required.
"Tool2" tab : The function is same as that of "Tool" tab.
Details of each tab are described below.

(1) Main tab
Setting items on the Main tab differ depending on its Measurement
Type of the measurement being edited (refer to 11.6.2.2). Setting
items of Standard type and Hierarchy type are same, but Obstetric
type and LR-Meas. type include more setting items in addition to
those of Standard type. The appearance of the tab for each
measurement type is shown below.
Fig. 11.6.3.2-1 Main Tab (Standard Type and Hierarchy Type)
11 - 185 Q1E-EA0466
The area different from that of
Standard type
Fig. 11.6.3.2-2 Main Tab (Obstetric Type)
The area different from

that of Standard type
Fig. 11.6.3.2-3 Main Tab (LR-Meas. Type)
11 - 186 Q1E-EA0466
Details of setting items are described below.
< Setting items common to all measurement types >
Name Name of measurement item is edited. Selecting a measurement
item from Measurement Items list displays its name and
characters can now be input from the alphanumeric keyboard.
Input a name that is different from others in the measurement.
If name of this item is changed and the measurement item
is used in the calculation equation, the name in the equation
is automatically changed, thereby it is not necessary to
change the name in the calculation equation.
Tool A measurement tool is selected. By executing the selected
measurement tool, measurement result for the measurement
item can be obtained.
For details of measurement tool, refer to [11.9 Measurement
Tool].
Unit This is a display unit of measured value. Since flow
velocity value of Doppler image varies according to display
unit of Doppler scale, the velocity unit set here is effective
for the calculation equation.
Method A method usable in the specified measurement tool (single
tool) is selected. When the selected measurement tool does
not require setting of method, the operation is disabled.
Equation This can be set when "Calculation" tool is selected as

measurement tool.
It is also possible to use variables in calculation equation
that are not registered. However, the name of the
measurement item corresponding to that calculation equation
is displayed as "<Invalid Calc>" in the measurement items
list until registration of all the variables to be used
in the calculation equation is completed. In this status,
any item in the calculation equation is not displayed in
either of the Measurement Result Display area and report.
After all the variables to be used in the calculation equation
are registered, select the items in the equation again and
press "Register"
11 - 187 Q1E-EA0466
button, and verify that the measurement item in the equation
has been changed from "<Invalid Calc>" to the original name
of the measurement.
The Equation should be registered according to the followings.

Table 11.6.3.2-1 The specification of equation
Item Contents
equation User can enter up to about 200 letters for an equation (Since the maximum
length of equation is defined with the fixed width and the width of each letter is
different depending on the character, the length is not exactly 200.
operator Four rules of arithmetic (+ - * /）, Power ( ^ ), bracket ()
constant a numerical value (should directly be input),
“SPI” : the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter
variable Measurement Item, “BSA” : Body Surface Area
function max()、min()、abs()、ChkNonNeg()
The details of function are shown below.

Table 11.6.3.2-2 The details of function
function example Contents
max() max(a, b, c) This function returns the maximum value of all
variables in the brackets. In the brackets, the total
number of variables and constants must be at least
2. For the left example, the function returns the
maximum value of all measurement items (variables)
a, b and c.
min () min(d1, d2) This function returns the minimum value of all
variables in the brackets. In the brackets, the total
number of variables and constants must be at least
2. For the left example, the function returns the
minimum value of all measurement items(variables)
d1 and d2.
abs() abs(Velo) This function returns the absolute value of the a
variable in brackets. In the brackets, only one
variable should be entered. For the left example, this
function returns the absolute value of the
measurement item “Velo”.
ChkNonNeg() ChkNonNeg(d) This function returns the value by the following rule;
-If the value in the brackets is 0 or larger, the function
returns the value directly.
-If the value in the brackets is negative, the function
returns “Error”.
11 - 188 Q1E-EA0466
The initial value item can be set against a measurement by using a “(=X)” next
to the measurement item(variable). Note that the ‘X’ here means a numerical value.
Example : D(=0)
In this case, the measurement item ‘D’ is initialized by 0 before the value is
actually measured. Therefore, a calculation of “A+D” gets the calculated value
normally after the both value of ‘A’ and ‘D’ are measured, but in the case above,
since the ‘D’ is initialized by 0, the value “A+D” is calculated right after the
value ‘A’ is measured.
Input Functions and constants usable in calculation equation can

be selected and input. With this function, the operator
can input any of the usable functions and constants without
remembering them.
Select Any of the calculations equations provided in the scanner
system can be selected and input. In the calculation
equations are included those such as fetal weight estimation
equation in the obstetric measurement.
According to the name of the measurement item, whether it

can be selected or not is defined. The input calculation
equation can be edited even if it is the equation preset
in the system.
Check Pressing this button allow the registered calculation

equation to be checked if it is correct or not. If it is
correct, the message "Equation is Valid" is displayed. If
it is not correct, the dialog indicating the incorrect point
is displayed. Pressing "Register" button in this status
displays the item of the equation as "<Invalid Calc>" in
the Measurement Items list.
Use When Measurement Tool is used by substitution method, input
the item to substitute. For example, in the case the item
of B-Distance tool is used as substitution method, input
the name of measurement item for the 2 points to be measured
by Point tool. To input it, set the Check box at the left
of "Use" to On to make the input area at the right side
ready for operation, and then set it.
Register The measurement item being edited is registered.
11 - 189 Q1E-EA0466
< Setting items only for Obstetric type >
Twin Mode Any one from the following 4 options is selected for
measurement item for Obstetric Measurement being edited.
• Only Single Measurement is enabled only in Single mode.
Measurement cannot be made with Twin mode
selected.
• Only Twins Measurement is enabled only in Twin mode.
Measurement cannot be made with Single mode
selected.
• Dual Measurement is enabled both in Single mode
and Twin mode.
• Common This is set as measurement item for mother.
Accordingly, the same results are
maintained in either of Twin-A and Twin-B
modes even if it is used in Twin mode.
OB Tables
FA A table to estimate gestational age can be selected. The
contents to be selected differ according to parameters and
item unit of Obstetric Measurement being edited. In the
case a variable in Obstetric Measurement is BPD (Biparietal
Diameter), "HAD84", "TODAI96" or "OSAKA U." can be selected
as gestational age table. With "(No Table)" selected, the
table for estimation of gestational age is considered not
to be used and gestational age is not displayed even if
the selected fetal parameter is measured. By pressing
"Edit" button with "New Table" selected, a new table with
a specific name can be created.
User-defined tables up to 5 tables can be created for each
measurement item. If any measurement item name or
measurement tool is changed after a gestational age table
is selected by the user, the gestational age table is
automatically changed to "(No Table)".
Edit Pressing this button displays the Table Edit dialog for
the selected gestational age table. If "Edit" is pressed
with "New Table" selected, a table for estimation of
gestational age is set ready for new creation.
11 - 190 Q1E-EA0466
FG A table for evaluation of fetal growth is selected. Contents
to be selected differ according to obstetric measurement
parameters and items being selected. In the case a variable
in Obstetric Measurement is BPD (Biparietal Diameter),
"HAD84", "TODAI96" or "OSAKA U." can be selected as fetal
growth table. Each table has unit. The table with the same
unit as that of the currently selected item is displayed
as option.
When "(No Table)" is selected, fetal growth data is not
displayed with the selected fetal parameters. Pressing
"Edit" button with "New Table" selected allows a new table
with a specific name to be created.
User-defined tables up to 5 tables can be created for each
measurement item. If any measurement item name or
measurement tool is changed after a fetal growth table is
selected by the user, the fetal growth table is automatically
changed to "(No Table)".
Edit Pressing this button displays the Table Edit dialog for
the selected fetal growth table. If "Edit" is pressed with
"New Table" selected, a table for fetal growth evaluation
is set ready for new creation.
Delete Tables
The user-created table for Obstetric Measurement is deleted.
Pressing this button opens the Deletion dialog.
< Setting items only for LR-Mea. type >

L/R With L/R Check box set to ON, measurement items are displayed
in the measurement result display area at both the L-side
and R-side. In this case, left item and right item have
different measurement value respectively. With L/R Check
box set to OFF, this measurement is handled as common item,
and the same value is displayed in both the left and right
display areas. To declare the measurement as L/R
measurement, usually set this Check box to ON.
11 - 191 Q1E-EA0466
(Common key and display in Edit window)
List of Measurement Items
Measurement items included in the measurement being edited
are displayed.
New A measurement item is newly created. The measurement item
edit area is initialized and set ready for editing. Pressing
this button while "Sub tab" or "Tool tab" being displayed
automatically selects "Main tab" to be displayed.
Delete Pressing this button deletes the item selected in the

Measurement Items list.
Link The Link Setting dialog is opened.
OK Pressing this "OK" button registers all the contents edited
for the measurement item and closed the dialog.
Cancel Pressing this "Cancel" button closes the dialog without

registering all the contents edited for the measurement
item.
(2) Sub tab
Fig. 11.6.3.2-4 Sub Tab
11 - 192 Q1E-EA0466
Report name This is a name of the measurement item to be displayed on
Measurement report. A name longer than the one displayed
in the Measurement Result Display area can be set.
Result Frame
On Selecting "On" displays the measurement item on the
Measurement Result Display area.
Off Selecting "Off" does not display the measurement item on
the Measurement Result Display area.
Appear The measurement item is displayed on the measurement frame
when the item is measured. Until that time, it is not
displayed in the Measurement Result Display area.
Report This sets whether measurement result is to be displayed

or not on the Measurement report.
Item Name This sets whether the measurement item name is to be displayed
near the delineated trace immediately after the measurement
is made.
Short Cut This sets whether the short cut function to start the
measurement item by one touch operation is to be used or
not. Setting this to On sets the alphanumeric keys to
measurement items for short cut key of measurement and
displays them in the Measurement Result Display area.
Alphabet for short cut is automatically set.
By executing a measurement, an alphabet for the short cut
is displayed in ( ) after the measurement item name.
Pressing an alphabet during measurement executes the
measurement item. This is mainly used for obstetric
measurement.
11 - 193 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Tool tab
A property of the measurement item depending on measurement tool
(single tool) is set. This can be set if the selected measurement
tool is the one that can set property.
A/N Input
Default for Check A/N

Max No. of characters
(Number)
Free Format
Delete
No. of Decimals
Default Sign
Fig. 11.6.3.2-5 Tool Tab
Selection Only when "Selection" is selected as measurement tool on

Main tab, this is enabled. In the case other than this,
this is disabled.
Default for check

Only when "Selection" is selected as measurement tool on
Main tab and Method is set to "Check", this is enabled.
Setting this to On displays this with a check mark when
the measurement report is first opened.
Selection items
Only when "Selection" is selected as measurement tool on
Main tab and Method is set to "List", this is enabled. This
displays options.
Item Only when "Selection" is selected as measurement tool on
Main tab and Method is set to "List", this is enabled. Items
to be displayed as options in report are input.
Enter Only when "Selection" is selected as measurement tool on

Main tab and Method is set to "List", this is enabled. To
register the character string input by "Item" in "Selection
11 - 194 Q1E-EA0466
Items", press this Enter button.
Delete By selecting the item displayed in "Selection Items" and
pressing "Delete" button, the selected character string
is deleted.
Default This is pressed to set the any desired options as selected
in default when Measurement Report is opened. By selecting
any desired character string in "Selection Items" and
pressing Default button, the selected character string is
set as default selection.
A/N input Format of character string to be input by A/N Input tool
is set.
Max number of characters

Only when "A/N Input" tool is selected as measurement too
in Main tab and Method is set to "character", this is enabled.
Maximum number of characters in a string to be input can
be set.
Number Format of figure to be input by A/N Input tool is set.
Free format
Only when "A/N Input" tool is selected as measurement tool
in Main tab and Method is set to "Number", this is enabled.
When this check box is set to ON, format of figure that
can be input is not particularly set.
Sign With this check box set to ON, figure with sign can be input.
No. of Decimal
Number of decimal places of figure is set. Any of 1, 1 and
2 is selected. The value set by user is displayed with the
set decimal places. For example, when a value "2" is input
by user and 1 is set as number of decimal place, the input
value is displayed as "2.0".
11 - 195 Q1E-EA0466
(4) Tool2 tab
A property of the measurement item depending on measurement tool
(single tool) is set. This can be set if the selected measurement
tool is the one that can set property.
Extended Measurement
Fig. 11.6.3.2-6 Tool2 Tab

Calculation
When "Calculation" tool is selected in Main tab as
measurement tool, this can be set. Number of decimal places
(any one of 0, 1, 2 and 3) of calculated result is set.
End of Title
When "Title" tool is selected in Main tab as measurement
tool, this can be set. Setting this to On causes the cursor
not to move from that item in Measurement Result Display
area. This is used to close measurement of all the
measurement items by the item in Title tool.
Extended Measurement
When "Title" tool is selected in Main tab as measurement
tool and the measurement tool of the execution designated
by Title tool corresponds to the specific application, this
can be set. This is a very special setting. It can be set
currently only in the case the measurement to be executed
is in "D-Trace" Link tool andmeasurement items corresponds
to "HR" attribute. Title Tool "R-R" is an example of this
case. In this case, the first measurement simultaneously
11 - 196 Q1E-EA0466
provides a result by measurement of the item "RV-TRACE"
of other Title tool, but "R-R" can be manually selected
and only the measurement between R-R can be made again.
Register
Registered contents of setting.
11.6.3.3 Link Setup

To obtain a result by executing calculation or measurement,
one measurement item uses one measurement tool.
(Example)
To use the measurement item "D1" as distance measurement,
"Distance" is selected as a measurement tool. However, in
case of LVOT measurement (left ventricle outlet tract
Doppler measurement), values of multiple measurement items
included in LVOT measurement can be simultaneously obtained
usually through one Doppler waveform trace. To
simultaneously obtain such multiple results by one
measurement, [Link Tool] is used. For details of Link Tool,
refer to [11.8 Measurement Tool. Setup procedures of Link
Tool are described below.
Pressing "Link" button in Measurement Edit menu opens the
following Link Setup menu
Fig. 11.6.3.3-1 Link Setup Menu
11 - 197 Q1E-EA0466
Setup items in the menu are described below.
Measurement Name of measurement being edited is displayed.
Link Selection
Name Link name is selected and set.
Tool Link tool is selected.
Method Method of the selected link tool is set. In the case any
link that does not require any method is selected, this
cannot be set.
Link Name Display
This sets whether the link name is displayed near the measured
trace or not when a measurement is executed by the link
tool.
Property Settings specific to the link tool are made.
Linked Items
The measurement items linked to the link object being
selected are displayed.
Change Attribute
Attribute of the item selected in "Linked Items" box is
changed.
Link The measurement item selected in "Unlinked Items" box is
linked to the link object being selected in "Name" box.
Unlink The measurement item displayed in "Linked Items" box is
unlinked and moved to "Unlinked Items" box.
Unlinked items
Measurement items available to be linked to the link object
being selected are displayed.
New Link A link is newly created.
Delete Link
The existing link is deleted and linkage to all the
measurement items linked to that link is unlinked.
11 - 198 Q1E-EA0466
By pressing Link button and by pressing Change Attribute button, the
following Ling Attribute Setting menu is displayed.
Fig. 11.6.3.3-2 Link Attribute Setting Menu
Attribute Attribute of Link tool is set.

Figure Options: on/off
[on] : With Point tool used, the figure is displayed
together when that point is displayed on the window.
(It is used with Schema in M-mode.)
[off] : With Point tool used, the figure is not displayed
when that point is displayed on the window.
In the option box are displayed the selectable figure names.
It can be operated only with "Display" set in on.
Unit Unit of measurement item is set. Options vary depending
on the attribute of the currently selected Link tool.
Label To display label next to each plot point in measurement,
its label is input by A/N keys.
11 - 199 Q1E-EA0466
Link Property of Link Tool is described below.
This is a property to be set when Link Tool is used. This has data to
be set specially depending on Link Tool. This menu can be set for the
selected link. This menu is opened by pressing Property button on Link
Setup menu.
By pressing OK button for all properties enable, the property enables
the set contents and close the menu. Pressing Cancel button disables
the settings and close the menu.
(a) Property for D-Trace Tool
Fig. 11.6.3.3-3 D-Trace Tool Property
Auto Trace With Method set to Auto, this can be set. In other cases,
this is disabled. Any one of "Peak", "Mean" and "Mode" is
selected.
Velocity Correction
A coefficient of flow velocity correction equation is set.
C1 This is composed of an integer part with one digit and decimal
part with two digits. Default value is "1.00". If the
decimal part is "00", input of decimal point and the decimal
part can be omitted.
11 - 200 Q1E-EA0466
C2 This is composed of an integer part with 3 digits and decimal
part of one digit. If the decimal part is "0", input of
decimal point and the decimal part can be omitted. In the
case any sign is not set, it is regarded as "+".
dP/dt The parameters should be set for calculating dP/dt value.
V1 Set the first Velocity
V2 Set the second Velocity

Unit Set the unit of velocity for V1 and V2 above. m/s or cm/s
can be selected.
Real Time Doppler
Set detail menu of Real Time Doppler setting.
(b) Property for HR Tool
Fig. 11.6.3.3-4 HR Tool Property
Beat Number of beats for heart rate measurement is set. It means

number of heartbeats during the specified time interval.
A value from 1 to 9 can be input.
11 - 201 Q1E-EA0466
(c) Property for Histograph Tool
Fig. 11.6.3.3-5 Histogram Tool Property
Number of Area
Number of area to be measured by Histogram tool is set.
Number of area is 1 or 2.
Scaling of Graph
This is enabled only when "2" is selected for the above
[Number of Area]. With Number of Area set to 2, two
histograms can be displayed together on the same screen
after measurement, and scale of the ordinate of histogram
in this case can be selected. Selecting [Independent]
select the independent scaling, while selecting [Common]
selects the common scaling.
For the independent scaling and common scaling, refer to
[11.4.1 (14) Histogram measurement].
11 - 202 Q1E-EA0466
(d) Property for Biplane Simpson Tool
Fig. 11.6.3.3-6 Biplane Simpson Tool Property
Slice Number of slices to be measured by Biplane Simpson tool

is set.
A value in a range from 1 to 99 can be input.
(e) Property for Angle Tool
Fig. 11.6.3.3-7 Angle Tool Property
Line Number
With this check box checked, a line number is displayed
during execution of Angle tool. If this is not checked,
line number is not displayed.
11 - 203 Q1E-EA0466
(f) Property for dP/dt Tool
Fig. 11.6.3.3-8 dP/dt Tool Property
V1 Velocity at the first point in dP/dt measurement is set.
V2 Velocity at the second point in dP/dt measurement is set.

Unit Unit of velocity at the first and second points in dP/dt
measurement is set.
(g) Property for PISA Tool
Fig. 11.6.3.3-9 Property for PISA Tool
Alias.Velo Direction
Option : Negative/Positive
[Negative] : Alias denotes the maximum velocity in the
backward direction.
[Positive] : Alias denotes the maximum velocity in the
forward direction.
11 - 204 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.3.4 Edition of Obstetric table
Edition procedures of the table for estimation of gestational age (FA
table) and the table for fetal growth evaluation (FG table) that are
used in Obstetric measurements are described below. To make edition
of Obstetric table, measurement item (BPD, AC, etc.) for obstetric
measurement that is to be edited on Measurement Edition menu must first
be selected. For edition of Obstetric table for Todai method BPD, start
the Setup Menu in the following procedures.
Fig. 11.6.3.4-1 Selection of Item for Obstetric Measurement
Select OB-Today/Fetal Para/BPD in Abdo&Others region on Measurement

Setup menu, and pressing Edit button opens the Edit menu for Fetal Para
measurement.
Fig. 11.6.3.4-2 Measurement Edition Menu
11 - 205 Q1E-EA0466
(1) Creation of new Obstetric table
To create a new Obstetric table, for the selected measurement item,
select "New Table" in the table selection box of FA or FG table
to be newly created in OB table box of Measurement Edition menu,
and then press Edit button.
Fig. 11.6.3.4-3 Edition of Obstetric Table
Then, Obstetric Table Edition menu is opened. Two kinds of Edition

menu are available according to the type of FA table (for estimation
of gestational age) and FG table (for evaluation of fetal growth).
11 - 206 Q1E-EA0466
Box to input Obstetric table name
Area to input data
Fig. 11.6.3.4-4 Edition Menu of Obstetric Table for Gestational

Age Estimation
Procedures to input table data are described below.
• Input name of Obstetric table in "Table Name" box.
• Input a measurement value in "Value" area and also input number of

weeks corresponding to the input value.
• Upon completing input of a data, pressing Register button registers

the input data and it is displayed in the data display area on the
menu.
• After inputting all data and by pressing Save button, the table is
stored in the memory.
Pressing Cancel button clears the edited data and closes the Table
Edit menu.
• Selecting any data to be deleted and pressing Delete button deletes

the selected data.
11 - 207 Q1E-EA0466
Box to input Obstetric table name
Area to input data
Fig. 11.6.3.4-5 Edition Menu of Obstetric Table for Fetal Growth

Evaluation
Procedures to input table data are described below.
• Input name of Obstetric table in "Table Name" box.

• Select either SD or % in Rank box. In the case SD is selected, input
±SD value of Table data. In the case % is selected, input the maximum %
value and the minimum % value of Table data.
• Input a measurement value in "Value" area and also input number of

weeks corresponding to the input value.
• Input gestational weeks and days in Data Input box.

• Input the minimum, average and maximum values of measurement results
corresponding to the input gestational weeks and days.
• Upon completing input of a data, press Register button. The input

data is registered and it is displayed in the data display area on
the menu.
• After inputting all data and by pressing Save button, the table is
stored in the memory. Pressing Cancel button clears the edited data
and closes the Table Edit menu.
• Selecting any data to be deleted and pressing Delete button deletes

the selected data.
• Pressing Next Page button moves to the next page.
11 - 208 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Edit of Obstetric table
The procedures to edit the current Obstetric table are described
below.
In the same procedures as those for creation of new table, select
the table to be edited on FA or FG table in OB Table list in Measurement
Edit menu, and press Edit button to start Table Edit menu.
Fig. 11.6.3.4-6 Edition of Current Obstetric Table

By selecting the table data to be edited, the selected table data
is displayed in Data Input area.
Selected table data are displayed.
Selected
table data
Fig. 11.6.3.4-7 Selection of Desired Data
11 - 209 Q1E-EA0466
By changing the value in Data Input box for the selected data and pressing
Register button, data is replaced with the new data.
Other operation procedures are shown below.
• To input a data, select the box where no data is input, and then input
data in Data Input box and press Register button. Pressing Register
button inserts the data in the appropriate position in table data.
• Pressing "Save" button stores the table data, but if it is not the
table created by user, table data must be input under different name.
In such case, the following message is displayed.
Fig. 11.6.3.4-8 Message requesting Change of Obstetric Table Name
Input a name in EDIT box in this message and press OK button. Then,
the name is registered as user-defined Obstetric table. To change and
register a part of the tables incorporated in the system at the factor
before shipment, follow the above procedures.
Edition of Obstetric table for fetal growth evaluation can also be made
in the same procedures as those for gestational age estimation table.
11 - 210 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Deletion of Obstetric table
The procedures to delete Obstetric table are described below. The
Obstetric tables incorporated in the system at the factor before
shipment cannot be deleted. Only the Obstetric table created by
the user can be deleted. Pressing Delete button in OB Table region
on Measurement Edit menu lists up all the user-defined Obstetric
tables registered in the currently selected Obstetric Measurement
item.
Fig. 11.6.3.4-9 Obstetric Table Deletion Menu
Select the table to be deleted on this menu, and press Delete Table
button. The selected table is deleted. Then, pressing OK button
completes deletion, while pressing Cancel button cancels deletion
of the table.
11 - 211 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.4 Special menu
Pressing Special button on the Measurement Setup menu displays
Special menu.
11.6.4.1 Import and Export of OB table
Selecting OB Table tag on Special menu display the following
menu.
On this menu, OB table can be exported to and imported from
the external memory medium.
Fig. 11.6.4.1-1 Import and Export Menu of OB Table
Import : Import menu of OB table is displayed.
Export : Export menu of OB table is displayed.

Gestation Period : Setting 40w0d in default.
11 - 212 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.4.2 Import menu of OB table
OB table can be imported from the external memory medium
on this menu.
Fig. 11.6.4.2-1 Import Menu of OB Table
Meas. Item List of measurement items on the OB table saved in

the external memory media is displayed.
Fetal Age Table List of Fetal Age Table corresponding to the item
selected by Meas. Item. is displayed.
Fetal Growth Table
List of Fetal Growth Table corresponding to the item
Import from The memory medium from which OB table is imported
is selected.
Import The selected OB table is imported.

Close The menu is closed.
11 - 213 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.4.3 Export menu of OB table
OB table can be exported to the external memory medium on
this menu.
Fig. 11.6.4.3-1 Export Menu of OB Table
Meas. Item List of measurement items on the OB table saved in

the scanner unit is displayed.
Fetal Age Table List of Fetal Age Table corresponding to the item
Fetal Growth Table
List of Fetal Growth Table corresponding to the item
Export to The memory medium to which OB table is exported is
selected.
Export The selected OB table is exported.

Close The menu is closed.
11 - 214 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.4.4 Measurement result filing setup
The memory medium in which the default of measurement result
is saved can be set on this menu.
Fig. 11.6.4.4-1 Measurement Result Filing Setup Menu
Drive The memory drive to which measurement result is filed

is selected.
Browse on Net Network drive is designated as the memory drive.
File Format It specify a form that saves file.
You can select Unicode or ASCII.

In reading both the forms can be read in the same
way.
Show guidelines in M and D modes
Selecting check box, guidelines display is possible
in M and D modes measurement.
11 - 215 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.4.5 Unique ID menu
Although the measured result can be saved to a memory medium, unique

ID can be named and managed so that it can take out the result for
other purpose easily.
Fig 11.6.4.5-1 Unique ID menu
Item Name : A measurement name is specified(For example : BPD and

so on). Besides, regulation registered is that unique
ID of fixation is set. Output data of Measurement is that
following unique ID is attached. Out put of measurement
data is refer to “11.7.4 Input and output of measurement
result”.
11 - 216 Q1E-EA0466
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ID
Region SubGroup GroupItem Attribute

Group Measurement Item
Resion Possible range 00 – 99
: System reserved 00 – 49
User defined possible range 50 – 99
Groupe Possible range 001 – 999
: System reserved 001 –499
(Besides, 000 is unusable as using root)
Sub Group Possible range 00 – 99
: System reserved 00 –49
Measurement Possible range 00 – 99
Group Item Possible range 00 – 99
Item Possible range 00 – 99
Attribute Possible range 00 – 99
: 00 – 19 1 screen measurement or 2 screen L side.
20 – 39 Twins' embryo A side or 2 screen R side.
40 – 59 Twins' embryo B side
Perform ID Swap : Checking “ON”, following item is
displayed ID can be exchange or change.
List of all child ID’s : Selecting same class measurement, unique
ID can be exchange.
Swap ID’s : Pressing this botton, unique ID selected
above can be exchange.
Catalogue : Output text file including unique ID.
11 - 217 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.5 Examples of measurement edition
11.6.5.1 Display or non-display of measurement item
The procedures to set either display or non-display of
measurement item that is most frequently used in Measurement
Setup is shown below.
(Example)
Setting is made so that a measurement item "Acc"
(Acceleration) in Vasc Measurement is not displayed in
Measurement Result Display area.
• Select "Vasc1" measurement from "Vasc" region in Measurement Setup
menu and press Edit button.
(1) Select Vasc1.
(2) Press "Edit" button.
Then, Measurement Edit menu is displayed.
11 - 218 Q1E-EA0466
• Select "Sub" tab in Measurement Edit menu.
Select "Sub" tab.
Then, Measurement Edition menu turns to display of "Sub" tab.
• Select "Acc" in Measurement Items list.
The selected measurement item is highlighted with blue and white.
11 - 219 Q1E-EA0466
• Set "Result Frame" in "Display" group in "Sub" table to "Off".
• Press Register button.
Pressing Register button registers all the settings made for the
measurement item "Acc".
11 - 220 Q1E-EA0466
• Press OK button.
Pressing OK button makes the settings made for "Vasc1" measurement

effective and closes Measurement Edit menu.
• Press OK button again in Measurement Setup menu.
Pressing OK button makes all the settings effective and closes

Even if "Vasc1" measurement is executed thereafter, "Acc" measurement

items are not displayed in Measurement Result Display area.
11 - 221 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.5.2 Change of display order in Measurement menu and Result
Display area
Display order of measurement and measurement items can be
changed on Measurement menu and Measurement Result Display
area.
As an example, the procedures to move "OB-STD" shown in
"Abdo&Others" region to the top in the menu are shown below.
• Select "Abdo&Others" region in Measurement Setup menu. Then,

measurements and measurement groups registered in "Abdo&Others"
region are displayed in the detailed display area at the right side.
Measurements and
measurement groups
registered in
Abdo&Others region.
• Select "OB-STD" in the detailed display area at the right side.
OB-STD Group Obstetric
11 - 222 Q1E-EA0466
• Pressing and holding down ENTER key, move the cursor upward by operating
the trackball.
OB-STD Group Obstetric Move the cursor

upward by the
trackball.
• After moving the cursor to the top position and release ENTER key.
Operating the trackball,
move the cursor to the
top position and release
ENTER button.
11 - 223 Q1E-EA0466
• Upon completion of the relocation, display order in the left display
area is also automatically changed.
"OB-STD" has
Tree display position moved to the top
is also changed.
Since this setting is completed, "OB-STD" is displayed at the top in

Measurement Menu when an application to use "Abdo&Others" measurement
region is selected. To change display order of measurement item, select
the desired measurement in the left display area, and change the display
order in the detailed display area in the same procedure.
11 - 224 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.5.3 New creation of measurement (by using Single Tool)
The procedures to newly create a measurement by using Single
Tool (for Single Tool, refer to [11.9 Measurement Tool]).
As an example, two distances are measured and "Ratio-Dis"
measurement to calculate a ratio between them is created
in "Abdo&Others" region.
• Select "Abdo&Others" region in Measurement Setup menu and press
New Meas button.
"Abdo&Others" region being selected
• The dialog to set measurement name is displayed. Give "Ratio-Dis"

as measurement name, and select "Standard" as measurement type.
After setting them, press OK button to close the dialog.
11 - 225 Q1E-EA0466
• With the measurement just selected on Measurement Setup menu, press
Edit button.
Measurement
"Ratio-Dist"
immediately after
l t d
• Measurement Edit menu is opened and items are now ready to be setup.
11 - 226 Q1E-EA0466
• Set Measurement Name to "D1", Tool to "B-Distance" and Unit to no
selection, and then press Register button.
Set items for Measurement Item "D1".
• The set items for Measurement Item "D1" have now been completed. Press
New button.
Registration of Measurement Item "D1" has now been completed.
11 - 227 Q1E-EA0466
• The window is now ready to register a new measurement item.
• Make registration for Measurement Item "D2" in the same procedures

as that for "D1", and press New button.
11 - 228 Q1E-EA0466
• The window is now ready to register a new measurement item.
• Set the measurement item "D1/D2" as follows (unit is not set), and
press Register button.
11 - 229 Q1E-EA0466
• Registration of the measurement item "D1/D2" has now been completed.
Press OK button to close Measurement Edit menu.
• Press OK button to close Measurement Setup menu.
The procedures to create a new measurement have now been completed.

Executing this "Radio-Dis" measurement results in as shown below.
11 - 230 Q1E-EA0466
Created
Measurement
Measurement Result Display area

(after Measurement executed)
Measurement menu
(with Measurement selected)
11 - 231 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.5.4 New creation of measurement (by using Link Tool)
The procedures to newly create a measurement by using Link
Tool as measurement tool are shown below. As an example,
a measurement "Doppler" to measure only Vpeak (max. flow
velocity value), Vmean (mean flow velocity value) and PGp
(pressure range for Vpeak) by applying Doppler Auto Trace
by (MODE method) is newly created.
• Select "Cardiac" region in Measurement Setup menu, and press New Meas
button.
• The dialog to set measurement name is displayed. Set "Doppler" in

Measurement Name and "Standard" in Measurement Type, and then press
OK button to close the dialog.
11 - 232 Q1E-EA0466
• With "Doppler" measurement selected, press EDIT button.
• Measurement Edit menu is opened and measurement items are ready to

be set.
11 - 233 Q1E-EA0466
• Set "Vpeak" in Measurement Name and "<Link Only>" in Single Tool,
and then press New button.
• Set "Vmean" in Measurement name and "<Link Only>" in Single Tool,

and then press Link button.
11 - 234 Q1E-EA0466
• Link Setup dialog is opened.
• Set "DTR" in Link Name. (Any name can be input for link name if it
is unique in the measurement.)
11 - 235 Q1E-EA0466
• Select "D-Trace" for Link Tool.
Select "D-Trace" tool.
• Select "Auto" as trace method.

Select "Auto" as Link Method.
11 - 236 Q1E-EA0466
• Select the measurement item "Vpeak" in "Unlinked Items" box, and press
Link button.
• The dialog to set link attribute is displayed.
11 - 237 Q1E-EA0466
• The measurement item "Vpeak" is set as the attribute "Peak Velo."
(max. flow velocity) of Doppler trace. Set "m/s" for Unit. Upon
completion of the setting procedures, press OK button to close this
dialog.
Because the measurement item "Vmean"

is used as name of mean velocity over
time, the attribute "Mean Velo." Of
D-Trace Link tool is designated.
Set "m/s" as unit of velocity value.
m/s
• The attribute of the measurement item "Vpeak" has now been set, and
it has moved to "Linked Items" box.
Measurement item "Vpeak" has

been set to the attribute "Peak
Velo." for max. flow velocity
value in D-Trace Link Tool.
11 - 238 Q1E-EA0466
• Select the measurement item "Vmean" in "Unlinked Items" box, and press
"Link" button.
• The dialog to set link of the measurement item "Vmean".
11 - 239 Q1E-EA0466
• Set the measurement item "Vmean" as the attribute "Mean Velo." (time
average flow velocity) in Doppler Trace Link Tool.
Because the measurement item

"Vmean" is used as name of mean
velocity over time, the attribute "Mean
Velo." Of D-Trace Link tool is
designated.
Set "m/s" as unit of velocity value.
• The Link Setup dialog is opened again, and press "Property" button.
All the settings specific to D-Trace tool are made on this dialog.
The measurement item "Vmean" has

been set to the attribute "Mean Velo."
for time average flow velocity value in
D-Trace Link Tool.
11 - 240 Q1E-EA0466
• Select PEAK method for Doppler Auto Trace, and set a velocity correction
value to make V' = 1.2*V. After setting, press OK button.
Select "Mode".
Set a velocity correction

coefficient to make V' = 1.2*V.
• Press OK button on Link Setup dialog.
11 - 241 Q1E-EA0466
• Measurement Edit menu is opened again. Press New button to newly
add the measurement item.
• Register the measurement item "PGp" (peak flow velocity pressure range)
in Single Tool "Calculation". After registration, press OK button
to close Measurement Edit menu.
Set items as shown below and press
"Register" button.
11 - 242 Q1E-EA0466
• Press OK button to close Measurement Setup menu.
Through the above procedures, the measurement "Doppler" to use "D-Trace"

link tool has been newly created.
By executing this measurement, Doppler Auto Trace is performed by PEAK

method, and after velocity correction the measurement results are stored
in "Vpeak", "Vmean" and "PGp" respectively.
11 - 243 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.6 Measurement Export/Import function
By using Measurement Export/Import function, measurement item
can be saved in the external memory medium or read from the external
memory medium.
11.6.6.1 Opening Measurement Import/Export window
Pressing Import/Export button at the bottom of the
Measurement Setup menu displays the Measurement
Import/Export window.
11.6.6.2 Details of window
Fig. 11.6.6.2-1 Measurement Setup Window
System Measurement items set in the system are displayed.

Media The memory medium for Import/Export is selected. The
following three media can be selected.
Addition Settings
･ Factory default
･ MO disk
Read Measurement items are read from the memory medium.
(Reading the measurement items may take some time.)
In case that reading isn't carried out though pressing
the Read button , press its button again.
11 - 244 Q1E-EA0466
Replace To storage media of right side replace from selecting
item of the equipment in left side.
Read From The name of the memory media from whom data are read and
the read measurement items are displayed.
Export The items selected by the scanner unit (left side) are
exported to the memory medium (right side).
Import The items selected by the memory medium (right side) are
imported to the scanner unit (left side).
New Region A new Region is created in the selected side.
Rename The name of the selected item is renamed.

Delete The selected item is deleted.
Save to Media
The edited result is saved in the memory medium. Until
this button is pressed, the edited result is not saved
in the memory medium.
Close This dialog is closed.
11.6.6.3 Export of measurement

By selecting the items to be saved in the memory medium
from System in the left side of the window and pressing
Export button, the items are exported to the memory medium.
If Region is selected in this case, the whole Region is
exported.
If Measurement Group is selected, the whole Group is exported.
If a single Measurement is selected, the single measurement
is exported.
The data to be exported, if it is a large data volume, may
not be storable in the floppy disk. It is, therefore,
recommended to save the data in the MO disk.
And if expected data becomes bigger size, then it often
takes time for processing of exporting.
We recommend that its process to be carry out after that
you select only necessary item.
< CAUTION >

The exported data are not saved in the memory medium until the Save to Media button
is pressed. To save the data, be sure to press the Save to Media button.
11 - 245 Q1E-EA0466
11.6.6.4 Import of measurement
By selecting the items to be imported to the scanner unit
from Read From in the right side of the window and pressing
Import button, the items are imported to the scanner unit.
If Region is selected in this case, the whole Region is
imported.
If Measurement Group is selected, the whole Group is imported.
If a single Measurement is selected, the single measurement
is imported.
< CAUTION >

The exported data are not saved in the scanner unit until the OK button is pressed on
the Measurement Setup window. To save the data in the scanner unit, be sure to
press the OK button on the Measurement Setup window.
11.6.6.4 Replacement of measurement

By selecting the items to the scanner unit and pushed
[Replace], it can be replaced the items of the scanner. For
example, selecting OB-STD in the left side and selecting
OB-Todai of [Additional Settings], and pushed [Replace],
it can be replaced from OB-STD to OB-Today.
< CAUTION >
1) Replace data is not stored until pushed OK button of Measurement Setup. In case
of stored result of replaced, it is necessary to push OK button of Measurement
Setup.
2) It can not be stored filing data of report and measurement value on VCR mode and
Wide View mode.
11 - 246 Q1E-EA0466
11.7 Measurement Report Function
Measurement report function allows the measurement results and
related comments to be displayed on the screen and to be output
to the black and white video printer. The contents of the report
can also be stored in the external memory device.
11.7.1 Measurement selection window

REPORT
Pressing key after measurement is made displays
"Measurement report" window.

(1) Measurement selection window
Measurement name
Fig. 11.7.1-1 Measurement Report
Print all report to

PC Printer : Report of all measurements is output to the
printer of the personal computer.
B/W Printer : Report of all measurements is output to the
black-white video printer.
(NOTICE) PC-Printer means the printer which is connected to the

parallel port of the computer. Therefore, It is different from
SCSI-Printer. When “PC Printer” button is pressed, the following
menu appears that enables user to select PC-Printer.
11 - 247 Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 11.7.1-2 PC Printer Select Dialog
By selecting PC-Printer in “Printer Name” combo box and pressing

OK button, the printing process is performed. If CANCEL button
is pressed, the printing process is cancelled.
Data Saving Save : The measurement results are stored

in the external memory device (FD or
MO). (Refer to 11.7.4.)
Filing : The various operations of “read”,
“copy”, “move” and “delete” can be
done for the saved measurement
results. (Refer to 11.7.4.)
Display The display window of the selected measurement
results is displayed.(Refer to
11.7.2.)
11.7.2 Measurement results display window

Three different window layouts are available according to the
measurement mode of the selected measurement (refer to 11.5.2.2).
The Hierarchy format report display is same as that of the Standard
format.
11 - 248 Q1E-EA0466
(1) Standard format
The measurement items and resultant data for general measurement
are displayed.
Fig. 11.7.2-1 Measurement Items and Resultant Data
The items displayed on the report window are shown below.
Table 11.7.2-1 Display Items in Report for General Measurement

Display item Description Remarks
Patient ID Patient ID
Patient Name Patient name
Birth date Birth date of patient
Sex Sex M or F
Age Patient age Age of patient
Weight Weight
Height Height
BSA Body surface area
Item Measurement item
Value Measurement result
(NOTICE) Date and time are displayed at the upper right of the report window.
The functions of the controls are described below.

Comment
Comments are input fully in the entry box from the alphanumeric
keyboard.
11 - 249 Q1E-EA0466
Prev. page/Next page
This function can be operated when measurement results cannot
be covered by one page. Pressing "Next Page" goes to a next
page. Pressing "Prev. Page" goes back to a previous page.
Print to
PC Printer The measurement results are output to PC
printer.
B/W Printer The measurement results are output to black and
white printer.
Close
The measurement result display window is closed.
(NOTICE) For the details of PC-Printer, please refer to “11.7.1(1)

Measurement Window”.
(2) For LR-Meas

The following is the report format for comparative study of
left and right measurement results such as carotid measurement.
Fig. 11.7.2-2 Report Format for LR-Meas
The display items on the report window are described below.
11 - 250 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.7.2-1 Display Items on LR-Meas Format Report
Sex Sex M or F
Age Patient age Age of patient
Weight Weight
Height Height
BSA Body surface area
Item Measurement item
Left Measurement result in left side
Right Measurement result in right side
Common Measurement result of item common
to right and left sides
(NOTICE) Date and time are displayed at the upper right of the report window.
The functions of the controls are described below.

Comment
Comments are input fully in the entry box from the alphanumeric
keyboard.
Prev. page/Next page
This function can be operated when measurement results cannot
be covered by one page. Pressing "Next Page" goes to a next
page. Pressing "Prev. Page" goes back to a previous page.
Print to
PC Printer The measurement results are output to PC
printer.
B/W Printer The measurement results are output to black and
white printer.
Close
The measurement result display window is closed.
(NOTICE)For the details of PC-Printer, please refer to “11.7.1(1)

11 - 251 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Obstetric format
Obstetric measurement results are displayed in this report
format. In addition to measurement values, data such as
gestational age and estimated date of confinement are also
displayed.
Fig. 11.7.2-3 Obstetric Measurement Report Window
11 - 252 Q1E-EA0466
The display items on the report window are described below.
Table 11.7.2-2 Display Items on Obstetric Measurement Format Report

Age Patient age Age of patient (pregnant woman)
GA by U/S Gestational age by ultrasound Average value of all the estimated
values of gestational age obtained
by US examination
GA by LMP Gestational age by LMP Gestational age obtained by LMP
(=Date of examination - LMP)
DGA Gestational age diagnosed by
physician
GA w/o A/C Gestational age by ultrasound
without A/C
LMP Last menstrual period
Clinical Hx Clinical history
Purpose of U/S Purpose of examination
G Gravidity Max. 2 characters
P Number of parturition Max. 2 characters
AB Number of abortion Max. 2 characters
Item column Measurement item name
Value column Display of measurement value
GA column Gestational age by selected Gestational age calculated by
measurement items average value of measured values
of each measurement item such as
BPD and FL.
EDC column Estimated date of confinement by Estimated date of confinement
selected measurement items calculated by gestational age
obtained by "GA column" of
selected measurement items
FA Table Table name for estimation of
gestational age
Rank Rank value
FG Table Table name for evaluation of fetal
growth
Physician Physician's name
Sonographer Sonographer's name
11 - 253 Q1E-EA0466
Functions of the controls are described below.
Age Graph
By selecting the measurement item for which table for
gestational age is set and pressing this button, gestational
age table and measured values in graph are displayed. (Refer
to 11.7.3.1.)
Growth Graph
By selecting the measurement item for which table for growth
evaluation is set and pressing this button, fetal growth table
and measurement values in graph are displayed. (Refer to
11.7.3.2.)
Comment, Prev. Page, Next Page, PC Printer, B/W Printer, Close

Functions of these controls are same as those of Standard format.
In the case obstetric measurement is made in Twins mode, "Twins"
controls shown below are displayed on Report display window.
Selection of
Twins Mode
Fig. 11.7.2-4 Selection of Twins Mode
Selecting "A" on this control displays the measurement result

of Twin-A, while selecting "B" displays the measurement result
of Twin-B.
11 - 254 Q1E-EA0466
Other controls in the area to display measurement results are
shown below.
Icon for Biophysical Score
Selection control
Fig. 11.7.2-5 Special Control
Details of the above 2 controls are described below.
Icon for Biophysical Score:

Clicking the icon for Biophysical Score in Obstetric
Measurement Report shown in Fig. 11.7.2-5 displays the dialog
box to calculate Biophysical Score.
Fig. 11.7.2-6 Calculation of Biophysical Score
By selecting an evaluation value of each item in the dialog

from 2, 0 and NA and clicking on Close, Biophysical Score is
calculated. Each evaluation item takes 2 points or 0 point,
accordingly if all the evaluation items take 2 points, the
11 - 255 Q1E-EA0466
maximum Score will be 10 points. NA is calculated as 0 point.
In display of Score results, in case one item at lease is NA,
the result is displayed in ( ).
Selection control:
Moving the cursor by operating the trackball up and down, select
a chart item to be input and click on "▼" to display Selection
control and to select it.
11.7.3 Graphic display of obstetric measurement

Clicking on "Age Graph" or "Growth Graph" on the report window
for obstetric measurement shown in 11.7.2 displays a graph
corresponding to the clicked button.
11.7.3.1 Estimated Fetal Age graph
Fig. 11.7.3.1-1 Age Graph and Growth Graph
Display items on graph display window for estimated fetal

age are displayed.
The items shown below are same as those of the Report display
window for obstetric measurement. Refer to Table 11.7.2-2.
Patient ID, Patient Name, Birth Date, Age, G, P, AB, LMP,
GA by LMP, DGA
11 - 256 Q1E-EA0466
The items other than the above are shown in the next table.
Table 11.7.3.1-1 Display Items on Graph for Estimation of

Gestational Age
Item Item of measurement variable Name of measurement variable as object of
graph to be displayed
Table Table for estimation of
gestational age
Ave. Average value of Average value for the same measurement item
measurement data
GA Estimated gestational age Gestational age estimated from average value
of measurement data
EDC Estimated date of Estimated date of confinement calculated from
confinement by estimated estimated gestational age
gestational age
GA by U/S Gestational age by U/S Average value of all the estimated gestational
age values obtained by U/S examinations
made this time.
GA w/o AC Gestational age by U/S Average value of all the estimated gestational
without AC age values obtained by U/S examinations
made this time excluding AC.

Print
All : When outputting the contents of the graph display
to PC printer, all the variables for obstetric
measurement from which gestational age is
estimated are printed.
Selected : When outputting the contents of the graph display
to PC printer, only the currently displayed graphs
of the variables for obstetric measurement are
printed.
To
PC-Printer : Displayed 1 or 8 data in graph are printed
through PC printer
B/W Printer : Displayed data in graph are printed through B/W
video printer.
11 - 257 Q1E-EA0466
Close
Gestational age estimation graph is closed.
(NOTICE) For the details of PC-Printer, please refer to

“11.7.1(1) Measurement Window”.
In Twins mode, the selection control "Twins" is displayed on window.
Twins selection control
Fig. 11.7.3.1-2 Selection of Twins (in Twin-A mode)
Twins
A Twin-A graph is displayed.
B Twin-B graph is displayed.
A+B Both Twin-A and Twin-B graphs are displayed.
11 - 258 Q1E-EA0466
Display of the mode other than Twin-A is shown below.
Fig. 11.7.3.1-3 Graph Display of Twins Mode (Twin-B)
Fig. 11.7.3.1-4 Graph Display of Twins Mode (Twin-A and Twin-B)
11 - 259 Q1E-EA0466
Next, graph display for estimation of gestational age is described below.
③
④
①
Fig. 11.7.3.2-5 Graph Display for Estimation of Gestational Age
Table 11.7.3.2-2 Description of Fig. 11.7.3.2-5

No. Description Remarks
① Fetal growth curve Deviation data of registered gestational age data are
(Deviation) plotted in graph.
② Fetal growth curve Standard value data of registered gestational age
(Standard value) data are plotted in graph.
③ Gestational age bar by U/S Vertical line positioned at the coordinate of
gestational age estimated by U/S.
④ Plotted measurement data Plotted data (DGA and average value of
measurement data) put on graph that are obtained
on examination dates.
Single mode is represented with '+'. In Twins
mode, '+' represents Twin-A and '×' represents
Twin-B.
11 - 260 Q1E-EA0466
11.7.3.2 Fetal Growth evaluation graph
Fig. 11.7.3.2-1 Fetal Growth Evaluation Graph
Display items of fetal growth graph are displayed.

The items shown below are same as those of Report Display
window for obstetric measurement. Refer to Table 11.7.2-2.
Patient ID, Patient Name, Birth Date, Age, G, P, AB, LMP,
GA by LMP and DGA
The items other than the above are shown in the following
table.
11 - 261 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.7.3.2-1 Display Items on Fetal Growth Evaluation Graph
Item Item of measurement variable Name of measurement variable as object of
graph to be displayed
The item for which measurement has already
made is displayed. It can be selected from
options.
Table Table for estimation of
gestational age
Ave. Average value of Average value for the same measurement item
measurement data
Rank Rank value
GA Estimated gestational age Gestational age estimated from average value
of measurement data
EDC Estimated date of Estimated date of confinement calculated from
confinement by estimated estimated gestational age
gestational age
GA by U/S Gestational age by U/S Average value of all the estimated gestational
age values obtained by U/S examinations
made this time.
GA w/o AC Gestational age by U/S Average value of all the estimated gestational
without AC age values obtained by U/S examinations
made this time excluding AC.

Print
All : When outputting the contents of the graph display
to PC printer, all the variables for obstetric
measurement from which gestational age is
estimated are printed.
Selected : When outputting the contents of the graph display
to PC printer, only the currently displayed graphs
of the variables for obstetric measurement are
printed.
To
PC-Printer : Displayed data in graph are printed through PC
printer.
B/W Printer : Displayed data in graph are printed through B/W
video printer.
11 - 262 Q1E-EA0466
Close : Gestational age estimation graph is closed.
(NOTICE)For the details of PC-Printer, please refer to “11.7.1(1)

In Twins-mode, the selection control "Twins" is displayed on the

window.
Twins selection control
Fig. 11.7.3.2-2 Selection of Twins (in Twin-A mode)
Twins
A Twin-A graph is displayed.
B Twin-B graph is displayed.
A+B Both Twin-A and Twin-B graphs are displayed.
11 - 263 Q1E-EA0466
The window to be displayed when modes other than Twin-A are selected
is shown below.
Fig. 11.7.3.2-3 Twins mode (Twin-B) Graph Display
Fig. 11.7.3.2-4 Twins mode (Twin-A and Twin-B) Graph Display
11 - 264 Q1E-EA0466
Next, graph display for estimation of gestational age is described below.
① ③
②
④
Fig. 11.7.3.1-5 Graph Display for Estimation of Gestational Age
Table 11.7.3.1-2 Description of Fig. 11.7.3.1-5

No. Description Remarks
① Fetal growth curve Deviation data of registered gestational age data are
(Deviation) plotted in graph.
② Fetal growth curve Standard value data of registered gestational age
(Standard value) data are plotted in graph.
③ Plotted measured value Plotted data (DGA and average value of
measurement data) put on graph that are obtained
on examination dates.
Single mode is represented with '+'. In Twins
mode, '+' represents Twin-A and '×' represents
Twin-B.
④ Deviation of fetal growth Deviation in fetal growth graph is displayed.
curve It is displayed in SD or % depending on table
setting.
11 - 265 Q1E-EA0466
11.7.3.3 Plotting past measurement results
If any past measurement results are stored in the memory medium,
those past measurement data which is memorized to media selected
by the saving function of measurement result can be displayed
in graph by setting the History check box at the lower right to
ON.
By placing the mouse cursor on a plot, the data of that plot is
displayed.
This process isn't active, in case that DGA isn't inputted.
When this process is active, only graph which is selected can
be printed.
Fig. 11.7.3.3-1 Example of Plotted Past Measurement Data
< CAUTION >

The past measurement data are plotted as per the current patient ID. If the patient ID is
not correct, the data for the other patient might be plotted.
Be sure that the patient ID is certainly entered and is correct.
11 - 266 Q1E-EA0466
11.7.4 Input and output of measurement result (Refer to Fig. 11.7.1-1)
11.7.4.1 Saving measurement result
By clicking on "Save" button on Measurement Selection window,
the measurement result can be saved in the external memory device.
Save Data is saved in external memory device (FD or MO).
The following Confirmation dialog is displayed. Upon
confirmation of the content in the dialog, press OK button.
Pressing Cancel button does not save the data.
By changing the drive in which the data is saved, the memory
media can be designated.
Fig. 11.7.4.1-1 Confirmation Dialog
When patient ID or patient name has not been input, the

following message is displayed.
Fig. 11.7.4.1-2 Save Unable Message
Clicking on OK button closes the message dialog. Input

patient name or patient ID and then try to save the measurement
result.
The memory media in which the default is saved can be set.
Refer to "11.6.4.4 Measurement Result Filing Setup".
It is also possible to set the system so that the automatic
saving operation is made by pressing New Patient key. Refer
to "Save Measurement Result Automatically" in "8.3.10 Other
menu".
11 - 267 Q1E-EA0466
<CAUTION>
1) Because Patient ID or Patient Name is essential to retrieve data,
be sure to input them.
2) Result of stored measurement for using the scanner, it can not
be read for using EUB-6000. Do not read other scanner data as
occurred serious error of system
11.7.4.2 Measurement Result Filing function

Pressing Filing button displays the Measurement Result Filing
window. On this window, filing of the measurement result can be
operated. Through this operation, the measurement data can be
transferred to other memory medium and the measurement results
distributed to more than one memory medium can be merged into
one memory medium. The past measurement result can also read onto
the Report window.
11.7.4.2.1 Details of window
Fig. 11.7.4.2.1-1 Measurement Result Filing Window
Drive The memory medium to be operated for the measurement

results is selected. The following options are
available.
･ Floppy disk
･ MO
･ Hard disk
･ Merged Folder (This folder is a temporary memory
medium to do the merging operation of the large
volume of the measurement results.)
11 - 268 Q1E-EA0466
Browse on Net
Network folder is designated as the media for
operation.
List of Patient
List of patients is displayed.
Patient name Patient name
Date List of date of saved data
Search Patient list is retrieved. By inputting patient ID

or patient name, the corresponding patient is
highlighted on the list.
Select all All items are selected.

Select clear All the selected items are deselected.
Read The measurement result is read. The result can be

displayed on the Report window.
Copy The measurement result is copied on the other memory
medium.
Move The measurement result is transferred to the other

memory medium.
Delete The measurement result is deleted.
11 - 269 Q1E-EA0466
11.7.4.2.2 Selection of Network folder
To select the network drive as operation file, press Browse
on Net button.
The Network Folder Selection dialog is displayed. Select a
folder on the network.
Fig. 11.7.4.2.2-1 Network Folder Selection Window
OK The selected folder is set as operation folder.
Clear Network The selected network folder is deselected.

Cancel The operation is canceled.
11.7.4.2.3 Copy/Move operation

Selecting the patient name or date of the measurement for
operation and pressing Copy or Move button display the dialog
to select the medium to which the data is copied or moved. Select
the medium to which the data is copied or moved and press OK
button. The copy or move operation is executed.
Pressing Cancel button cancels the operation.
11 - 270 Q1E-EA0466
Fig. 11.7.4.2.3-1 Designated Dialog to copy
< CAUTION >

1) The operation of "Copy" and "Move" is carried out for the all measurement data of the
patient. Even if the each measurement data is selected, all data of its patient are
copied or moved.
2) It can not be use the data to different other equipment for example EUB-6000. The
data is not compatible both other equipment.
11 - 271 Q1E-EA0466
11.7.5 Correction of measurement result
By selecting a measurement item and clicking on ENTER key, the
measurement value is changed.
Fig. 11.7.5-1 Selection of Measurement Item
Selecting the measurement item to be corrected on Measurement

Result Display window and clicking on the item display the dialog
to correct measurement data at the center of the window. The
item shaded in black represents the selected item.
Moving the cursor, input a space or erase the data and input
a new data. Then, click on OK button to register the new data.
Fig. 11.7.5-2 Edit Result Set Dialog
11 - 272 Q1E-EA0466
11.8 Measurement on review image from image memory
While measurement being executed, images stored in the cine memory
or multi-memory can be reviewed.
This function enables to carry out measurement on plural reviewed
images, allowing routine examinations to be performed efficiently.
By selecting at the upper right of the screen by TRACKBALL
, review
PRIORITY
operation of images from the image memory is set to be ready. By

selecting , measurements can be performed.
selection
Measurement
(measurement suspension) Image memory
operation
review / operation
such as distance, area
image scrolling
cardiac function
Measurement selection forward and backward
measurements
(Measurement restart)
Fig.11.8-1 Measurement on review image

NOTICE:Measurement cannot be restarted while images are
continuously being reviewed.
Regarding the measurement with images replayed from VCR,
refer to [10.2 Measurement on review image].
11 - 273 Q1E-EA0466
11.9 Measurement Tool
11.9.1 Outline of measurement tool
The measurement method described in 11.3.2 is Measurement Edit
menu (refer to 11.6.3), and it is set specifically with the item
named Measurement Tool.
The Measurement Tool includes, in addition to "B-Distance" tool
to measure distance and "B-Area" tool to measure area, the ones
that are used only in measurement report such as "Selection"
tool that allows selection of one out of available options.
Measurement Tool includes the following two tools.
(1) Single Tool

This is a tool to obtain only one result from measurement.
(e.g. Tool to measure distance or area.)
Tools exclusive to report such as Selection tool are also included

in Single Tool.
(2) Link Tool

This is a tool to obtain two or more results simultaneously
from measurement.
(e.g. Tool to obtain multiple results such as max. flow velocity
and mean velocity.)
List of measurement tools are shown on the next page.
11 - 274 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.9.1-1 Single Tool (1/2)
No. Tool name Description Unit Remarks
1 B-Distance A distance between 2 points on B-image is mm, cm
measured.
2 M-Distance A depth difference between 2 points on mm, cm
M-image is measured.
3 Circumference A circumference of a shape traced on mm, cm
B-image is obtained.
Either Manual or Ellipse is selected as
Method. Manual represents manual tracing
and Ellipse represents tracing by ellipse
method.
4 B-Area An area of a shape traced on B-image. cm2
Any one of Manual, Ellipse and Diameter is
selected as Method. Manual and Ellipse are
same as those of "Circumference" tool.
Diameter is the method to obtain an area of
the circle with a diameter of distance between
two points.
5 M-Area A distance is measured on M-image and an cm2
area of the circle with a diameter of that
distance is obtained.
6 Velocity A velocity at the point selected on D-image is cm/s, m/s, Display unit in
obtained. kHz measurement result
is displayed
corresponding to
the unit of D-image.
7 Time Interval A time difference between two points selected ms, s
on D-image or M-image is obtained.
8 M-Slope A slope (velocity) between two points on mm/s,
M-image is obtained. cm/s
9 D-Slope A slope (acceleration) between two points on cm/s2,
D-image is obtained. m/s2
10 A/N Input Alphanumeric characters can be input in None
measurement report. Either A/N or Number
is selected as Method.
With A/N selected, alphanumeric characters
can be input, while with Number selected,
only numeric characters can be input. In
case of Number, input format can be set in
"A/N Input" box in "Tool" tab on Measurement
Edit menu.
11 - 275 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.9.1-1 Continued (2/2)
No. Tool name Description Unit Remarks
11 Selection This allows options to be used in None
measurement report.
Either Check or List can be selected as
Method. "Check" allows ON/OFF to be
selected with check mark for that item, which
"List" allows one of options to be selected.
12 Number Number of already measured items is set in None
the designated measurement items.
13 <Link Only> Item is defined as specific to Link Tool. None
14 <Title> This is Measurement Result Display area and None
Title is used.
15 Calculation Calculation is performed by using Any unit
measurement results. A calculation equation
is input in "Substitution" area.
16 BPScore Biophysical Score is input in Obstetric None
Measurement report.
17 BPSlongAxis A long axis is set in Biplane Simpson mm, cm
measurement.
18 BPSVolume Left ventricle volume is obtained in Biplane ml
Simpson measurement.
19 3DVolume A volume is calculated in SVolume ml
measurement.
Notice: Unit is the one that can be set for the corresponding tool in
11 - 276 Q1E-EA0466
Link tools are shown below. Link attribute of the link tool and
selectable unit for each link tool are also shown below.
Table 11.9.1-2 Link Tools (1/2)

No. Tool name Description Remarks
1 B-Trace By tracing an object on B-mode image, the followings are Select either
measured. Manual or Ellipse
(1) "Long Dist." : Elliptic long axis length (in mm or cm) as Method.
(2) "Short Dist.": Elliptic short axis length (in mm or cm)
(3) "Circ.": Circumference (in mm or cm)
(4) "Area" : Area (in cm2)
(Notice) "Long Dist." And "Short Dist." can be measured only
when "Ellipse" method is selected.
2 D-Trace By tracing waveform on D-mode image, the followings are
measured.
(1) "Peak Velo.": Peak flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(2) "Mean Velo.": Mean flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(3) "Min. Velo.": Min. flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(4) "End-Dias. Velo.": Min. flow velocity at end-diastole
(in cm/s or m/s)
(5) "Accel.Time": Acceleration time (in ms or s)
(6) "Ejection Time": Ejection time (ms or s)
(7) "Decel. Time": Deceleration time (in ms or s)
(8) "Acceleration": Acceleration (in cm/s2 or m/s2)
(9) "PHT": Pressure half-time (in ms or s)
(10) "%WINDOW": %Window value (in %)
(11) "SYS-W": Systolic Window value (in %)
(12) "dP/dt": dP/dt value (in mmHg/s)
(13) "TVI": Time Velocity Integral (in m)
(14) "HR": Hear rate (in bpm)
3 HR By setting two points on M-mode image or D-mode image,
the followings are measured.
(1) Time: Measurement time (in ms or s)
(2) R-R: One heartbeat period (in ms or s)
(3) Heat Rate: Heart rate (in bpm)
4 PHT The followings are measured from Doppler waveform on
D-mode image.
(1) "Peak Velo.": Peak flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(2) "PHT": Pressure half-time (in ms or s)
5 CFM-Velocity The followings are measured when color is displayed on
B-mode image or M-mode image.
(1) "Freq.": Frequency (in kHz)
(2) "Velo.": Flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(3) "Angle": Incident angle correction value (in º)
11 - 277 Q1E-EA0466
Table 11.9.1-2 Continued (2/2)
No. Tool name Description Remarks

6 D-Profile The followings are measured by setting any desired time
phase on Doppler waveform on D-mode image.
(1) "MEAN": Instantaneous mean flow velocity
(in cm/s or m/s)
(2) "MIDE": Most powerful flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(3) "PEAK": Instantaneous max. flow velocity
(in cm/s or m/s)
(4) "%WINDOW": %Window value (in %)
7 Histogram By setting a region on B-mode image, histogram of the region Either one or 2
is measured. regions can be
(1) "Circ": Circumference of the set region (in mm or cm) selected.
(2) "Area": Area of the set region (in cm2) Two link attributes
such as "Circ1"
(3) "Number": Total number of data
and "Circ2" are
(4) "Mean": Mean brightness
also available.
(5) "SD": Standard deviation
(6) "MODE": Max. frequency brightness
(7) "%MODE": Max. frequency (in %)
8 Angle By delineating 3 line segments on B-mode image, two angles
formed by one line segment and other two line segments are
measured.
(1) "Alpha": Acetabular angle (in degree)
(2) "Beta": Caltilagnous acetabular angle (in degree)
9 Biplane Axis length and area of left ventricle volume section traced on
Simpson B-mode image are measured.
(1) "LVA": Left ventricle area (in cm2)
(2) "LVL": Left ventricle long axis length (in mm or cm)
10 dP/dt Flow velocity and time necessary to measure dP/dt on
D-mode image are measured.
(1) "V1": 1st flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(2) "V2": 2nd flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(3) "T1": Time phase of V1
(4) "T2": Time phase of V2
11 PISA PISA radius and alias. velocity necessary to make PISA
measurement on CFM image are measured.
(1) "Radius" : PISA radius (cm or mm)
(2) "Alias. Velo" : Aliasing velocity (cm/s or m/s)
11 - 278 Q1E-EA0466
11.9.2 Setting Measurement tool
11.9.2.1 Setting Single tool
Single tool is set on Measurement Edit tool. For details
of Measurement Edit menu, refer to 11.6.3.
(1) Selection of Single tool
Single tool can be selected in "Tool" box in Measurement Edit
menu.
For the case where Link tool is used, select "<Linl Only>" here.
(2) Selection of Method
As shown in Table 11.9.1-1, there are cases where Method can
be set depending on the selected tool.
(Example: As delineating method with B-Area Tool selected, any
one of Manual, Ellipse and Diameter is set.)
Set Method in "Method" box at the right side of "Tool" box.
In the case of tool where setting of Method is not necessary,
this "Method" box is disabled.
Enabled operation Disabled operation
(3) Setting Calculation tool

With "Calculation" selected as Measurement Tool, "Equation"
box in Measurement Edit menu is enabled. Input an equation in
the character input box just under the title "Equation".
Input an equation.
11 - 279 Q1E-EA0466
Display unit for measurement result can be not only selected
but also directly input in Calculation tool.
Any desired unit can be input.
Number of decimal places can also be set for the calculation

result obtained by the equation. Any one of 0, 1, 2 and 3 can
be selected for number of decimal places.
To set this, select "Tool2" tab in Measurement Edit menu.
Select Tool2 tab.
Select number of decimal places.
(4) Setting Selection tool

Selection tool is the one to allow check mark and options to
be used in Measurement report.
Method : “List”
Options
An example to allow setting of Yes/No/NA options for the

item "Ventricles" in Measurement report.
Method : “Check”
Check mark
An example to allow check mark to be set for the

item"Tia" in Measurement report.
11 - 280 Q1E-EA0466
To set Selection tool, first select either "Check" or "List"
in Method menu, and then open "Tool" tab in Measurement Edit
menu to set Selection tool.
Tool tab
With "List" selected as Method, input an option in "Item" and

press "Enter" button to register it in "Selection Items". To
set any item to be selected as default when Measurement report
is opened, click on the option in "Selection Items" box and
then press "Default" button at the right side. To delete it
from "Selection Items", press "Delete" button.
With "Check" selected as Method, the check box "Default for
Check" is enabled. By checking this, the Check mark is displayed
as opened when Measurement report is first opened.
(5) Setting A/N Input tool
By using A/N Input tool, alphanumeric or numeric characters
can be input in any item in Measurement report.
Alphanumeric or numeric
characters can be input.
An example to allow comments to be input in the item

"Reason for Exam".
11 - 281 Q1E-EA0466
To set A/N Input tool, select "A/N" (Alphanumeric) or "Number"
in Manual mode, and then select "Tool" tab to set format of
input character.
Set max. allowable number

of characters.
With A/N selected as Method With Number selected as Method
With A/N selected as Method, set max. allowable number of

characters.
With Number selected as Method, set either "Free Format" or
"Sign" and number of decimal places (0, 1 or 2).
(6) Setting Title tool

Title tool functions as short cut to execute an measurement
item. It is used in Doppler measurement, and by putting multiple
items together it can also be opened as an item with one name
(usable for one measurement item).
As an example in Doppler measurement, by defining an
easy-to-understand name such as "LV-TRACE" or "AV-TRACE" in
LVOT measurement by Title tool, and by selecting that item,
D-Trace Link tool for each Doppler waveform is opened.
In setting Title tool, the object to be actually executed is
set when that item is selected. The following two items can
be set as object to be executed.
(a) Link name in Link tool
(b) Measurement Item name in Single tool
11 - 282 Q1E-EA0466
With Link name set, its Link tool is opened. With Measurement
Item name set, the Single tool set for that measurement item
is opened.
The object to be executed for Title tool is set in "Substitution"
box in Measurement Edit menu.
An example to set Link name
The above is an example in actual LVOT measurement. Measurement

Item name is "LV-TRACE" and this is Title tool, therefore "LV"
that is a name of link to trace LV waveform is set here. By
setting in such way, selecting "LV-TRACE" as Title tool when
measurement is executed opens Link tool to perform Doppler
tracing.
(a)End of Title
This is used to set the cursor not to move downward from the
title for which measurement is automatically executed. In
the case there are multiple measurement items to use Title
tool and all the measurement items can be executed with items
of their Titles, it is not necessary to move the cursor to
any items other than the Title. In such case, by setting
"End of Title" item located at the bottom of multiple Title
tools to ON, the cursor does not move downward from the set
item.
11 - 283 Q1E-EA0466
11.9.2.2 Setting Link tool
To set Link tool, it is necessary to define the measurement
item to be linked as "<Link only>" in Single tool.
(1) New creation of link
Link tool is set in Link Setup dialog to be opened by pressing
"Link" button in Measurement Edit menu (refer to 11.6.3). In
the case any link is not defined at all for the measurement
being edited, this Link Setup dialog is ready to newly create
a link when it is opened. In the case some links have been already
defined by the measurement, any of the existing links is displayed
as selected. In such case, press "New Link" button to reset
the dialog to the one for new setup.
Fig. 11.9.2.2-1 Link Setup Dialog
① To set Link tool, input Name (Link name). Input the Name from
the alphanumeric keyboard. In the case any other link has
been set in the same measurement, do not input the same name.
② Setting a Link name allows Tool box to be operated. Set a
link tool from options in this box. If the selected link tool
has Method (refer to Table 11.9.1-2), the selection box of
Method is also enabled for operation.
11 - 284 Q1E-EA0466
③ To display the link name nearby the trace made for the object
by using Link tool, set "Link Name Display" check box to ON.
④ Some of the selected link tools can be set for Property. To
set Property, press "Property" button. For details of
Property in Link tool, refer to [11.5.3.3 Setting Link].
⑤ Link a measurement item to the newly created link. The
measurement item defined as <Link Only> in Single tool is
displayed as follows in "Unlinked Items! Box.
⑥ Select any desired measurement item in "Unlinked Items" and
press "Link" button.
⑦ Then, Link Attribute Setup dialog is opened.
⑧ Select link attribute in Attribute box. Link attribute

indicates what variable the selected measurement item is
corresponded to in Link tool. (e.g..:"Peak Velo." is the
attribute representing max. flow velocity in D-Trace tool.)
Accordingly, options displayed in Attribute box in Link
Attribute Setup dialog vary according to the link tool being
edited.
11 - 285 Q1E-EA0466
⑨ Only in the case the link tool being edited is Point tool,
the check box and figure options in Figure box are enabled
for operation. Whether the figure is displayed or not at the
lower left of the screen during measurement is set in Display
Check box, and select a figure displayed in the options box
thereunder. The figure that can be selected here is for M-mode
schema measurement, and those schemas are incorporated at
the factory before shipment, therefore user cannot create
new schema additionally.
⑩ Display unit of the item of which link attribute was set is

set in Unit box. Selectable units are defined according to
the tool being edited and its link attribute.
⑪ Only when the link tool being edited is Point tool and Link
Name Display in Link Setup dialog is set to ON, Label box
is enabled for operation. To display characters at the desired
point where measurement is executed by Point tool, input the
name to be displayed in this Edit box.
⑫ Press OK button to close Link Attribute Setup dialog.

Then, the link setting of one measurement item has been completed,
and the measurement item is moved to Linked Items box.
Measurement item for

which link setting has
Link attribute name
been completed.
The above procedures are a series of operation to link a

measurement item to any desired link object. For concrete
example, refer to [11.6.5.3 New creation of measurement].
11 - 286 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Change in link setting
To change any of registered link settings, follow the next
procedures.
① Select the link name in Link Setup dialog of which setting

is to be changed.
Registered link name
② Change setting of the selected link. Change any tool and set
property as required.
Link can be removed by selecting the measurement item in Linked
Items box and pressing Unlink button.
11 - 287 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 12 Precaution in Combination with Peripheral Devices
This section describes recording equipment and their connection method
with the ultrasound scanner system.
12.1 Peripheral equipment
To use this equipment more effectively, use of the peripheral
devices listed in the Table 12.1.1 are recommended. Of the device
listed in the Table 12.1.1, one each of the black-and-white printer,
color printer, and S-VHS VCR can be connected to the scanner system.
Furhter, contact Hitachi or our authorized dealer about latest
recommendable perpheral devices list.
Manufacturer’s model, type
Peripheral device Manufacturer
NTSC (EIA)* PAL (CCIR)**
UP-890MD UP-890CE
SONY
Black & white UP-895MD UP-895CE
printer P90U P90E
MITSUBISHI
- P91E
UP-1800MD UP-1800EPM
- UP-2800P/UP-2850P
SONY
- UP-2900MD/UP-2950MD
UP-D2600S(SCSI IF)
Color printer
CP700U CP700E
MITSUBISHI - CP900E
CP770DW with SB770(SCSI IF)
Polaroid (UK) Ltd. - TX1300SE
SONY SVO-9500MD SVO-9500MDP
S-VHS VCR
PANASONIC AG-MD830 AG-MD830E
* for the scaner unit of NTSC (EIA) TV display system
** for the scaner unit of PAL (CCIR) TV display system
＜NOTICE＞
-These devices meet IEC60601-1 compliance.
-To use UP-D2600S and CP-770DW, EZU-PI1 is required.
＜WARNING＞
1) Other than the devices listed in Table 12.1-1 are not Allowed
to use.
2) Use peripheral devices as fixed with the scanner unit.Using
the peripheral devices without fixing with the scanner unit
may cause dropping the peripheral device due to vibration or
inclination of the mobile cart during carrying around the
system.
For fixing method of the peripheral device, contact Hitachi
12 - 1 Q1E-EA0466
12.2 Precautions in connection of peripheral devices
To supply the power to each peripheral device, use the 4 power supply
outlets in the secondary side located on the lower front of the mobile
cart for safety of the composition system and centralization of the
power ON/OFF.
The power capacity of the power supply outlets in the secondary side
of this equipment excluding the power supply outlet for the TV monitor
is 4OOVA. (About connectable peripheral devices, see 12.1.)
<CAUTION>
If peripheral devices of which total power requirements is more
than 4OOVA are connected, the fuse in the primary side of the
scanner unit may be blown out, the breaker in the power supply
unit may be actuated or it may cause equipment trouble.
12.3 Peripheral devices possible to use on outside commercial power supply

outlet
Peripheral devices listed in Table 12.3-1 are possible to use in
combination with the ultrasound diagnostic apparatus by connecting with
commercial power supply outlet. These devices have been certified with
IEC60601-1 requirements.
Table 12.3-1 Peripheral devices to use on outside commercial power

supply
Peripheral devices Manufacturer Manufacturer’s model, type
Computer Acer Computer GmbH AcerPower 8000MD
Computer Acer Computer GmbH AcerPower 4100MD
NOTICE:Hitachi will not have any responsibility for their application

software and adverse incidence which would be caused by using
them.
＜WARNING＞
Other than the devices listed in Table 12.3-1 are not allowed
to use.
12 - 2 Q1E-EA0466
12.4 Operation of peripheral devices
For detailed operation of each peripheral device, refer to the
instruction manual of the device supplied from its manufacturer.
12.5 Connection of Peripheral devices

Peripheral devices are connected to the terminal as shown below. Cable
connections must be made while the power switch is turned off. For
connection of the peripheral device, contact Hitachi or Our authorized
dealer.
Fig. 12.5-1 Option Connector Panel
NOTICE: Only connect IEC 60601-1 Complied units or specified units

by Hitachi here.
Option connector panel:
1 Printer Out
VIDEO signal output terminal for VIDEO Printer
2 B/W Printer Remote
Remote terminal for B/W VIDEO Printer
3 Color Printer Remote
Remote terminal for color VIDEO Printer
4 FOOT SW
Foot switch terminal
5 Fujinon probe interface unit
12 - 3 Q1E-EA0466
Terminal for fujinon probe interface unit
6 VCR CONT
Control signal terminal for VCR
The control cable for operation of VCR on the operation
Panel is connected.
7 C-VIDEO IN
Composite video signal input terminal for VHS VCR
8 C-VIDEO OUT
Composite video signal output terminal for VHS VCR
9 Y/C IN
Video signal input terminal for S-VHS VCR
10 Y/C OUT
Video signal output terminal for S-VHS VCR
11 DOP OUT R
Audio signal output terminal for VCR(Reverse Side)
12 DOP OUT F
Audio signal output terminal for VCR(Forward Side)
13 DOP IN R
Audio signal input terminal for VCR(Reverse Side)
14 DOP IN F
Audio signal input terminal for VCR(Forward Side)
12 - 4 Q1E-EA0466
12.6 Connection of PC printer and the HUB for Network function
(1) Setting place of PC printer and the HUB
When connecting PC printer or the HUB with EUB-6500, these
equipments must be placed out side of the Patient Environment
to avoid an electrical shock. Regarding the Patient Environment,
IEC 60601-1-1 Safety requirements for medical electrical systems
describes for the area which is shown in Fig. 12.6-1.
2.5m
1.5m
Fig. 12.6-1 Patient Environment
Peripheral device Manufacturer Manufacturer’s model, type
PC Printer EPSON Stylus Color / Photo series
12 - 5 Q1E-EA0466
＜CAUTION＞
Make sure to use PC printer and the HUB which complies with
IEC Publication 60950 Standard (Safety of information
processing equipment including the equipment for office use)
or IEC Publication 60601-1 Standard (Safety of medical
electrical equipment).
＜WARNING＞
To avoid a danger of electrical shock, never place PC printer
and the HUB to be connected with EUB-6500 within the area of
the Patient Environment.
12 - 6 549 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 13 Movement
13.1 Movement of equipment

To safely transport the equipment, observe the following
precautions.
13.1.1 Preparation before movement

Disconnect all the cables of the peripheral devices which
are not built in the scanner unit.
(1) Make sure that any obstacle is not in the pathway for
movement. If any obstacle is present, remove it before
movement. Dismount the peripheral devices connected to
but not fixed on the scanner unit, and transport it
separately from the scanner unit.
(2) Turn off the power switch of the scanner unit and wind
up the power cable on the cable holder located on the
rear panel of the scanner unit.
(3) Hang the probe cable on the probe hanger so that the cable
cannot be ridden over or caught with the casters. Put
the probe not connected to the probe connector in the
probe case and carry it separately from the ultrasound
scanner unit.
13.1.2 Precautions in movement

(1) Before moving the equipment, make sure that all stoppers
of the casters are unlocked. Step on“Lock off pedal”
of each caster, the wheel lock is Released. If “STOP”
pedal (right side) is licked up, the wheel lock is Released.
Smooth movement is impossible even if any of the casters
is locked.
If “Green pedal” (left side) is stepped down, “Swivel Lock”
is locked. The direction of the caster become straight,
the caster is fixed to straight forward for smooth
transportation. The figure of Fig13.1.2-1 shows “Swivel
lock is On”. For “Swivel Lock”,lock the caster of
“right-back” only.
13−1 Q1E-EA0466
Fig 13.1.2-1 Lock Caster off
(2) When moving the equipment, be sure to hold the handle

attached to the rear part of the scanner unit. Moving
the equipment by holding the other part of the equipment
may apply an abnormal force to the equipment, resulting
in damage of parts.
Handle Bar
Fig 13.1.2-2 Handle Bar
13−2 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Do not bump the equipment against hard object or do not
give it any excessive vibration.
(4) Do not incline the equipment more than 10 degree from the
horizontal level.
(5) When transporting the equipment on the slope, move it by
more than two persons. When moving it on the slope, a
larger force than the actual weight of the equipment is
required as compared with movement on the flat floor.
Be careful not have your foot be caught by the caster
when transporting the equipment by more than two persons.
(6) When moving over uneven floor such as elevator door guide
or the place where a fire door is installed, great care
should be exercised not to subject the equipment to shock
or vibrations.
(7) Be sure to securely lock the wheel locks of the casters
after the equipment has been positioned at the desired
place.
13−3 Q1E-EA0466
13.2 Transportation of equipment
When moving the equipment on truck, special attention must be given
to the transportation in addition to the precautions described in
Paragraph 13.1 Movement of equipment. Be sure to contact Hitachi
or our authorized dealer before transportation. Please note that
responsibility for transportation shall rest on the party who carries
out the transportation.
13−4 00 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Checkup
When using this equipment, carry out the checkup before use,
maintenance after use, periodical checkup arid cleaning as follows.
14.1 Check before use
Daily Weekly Monthly Other
Check up the following before turning on the power switch.

(1) Check to see if the power cable covet is damaged or worn out.
If the cable is used as been damaged, an electric shock may
happen.
(2) Check to see if the probe cable cover is damaged or worn out,
and also if the contact surface of the probe is scratched or
damaged. If it is used as been damaged, an electric shock may
happen.
(3) Make sure that cable connections of peripheral devices such

as VCR and printer are correctly made as follows.
- If any device other than the one specified by Hitachi is
connected or not.
- If the power supply to the peripheral device is connected
from the auxiliary power output from the scanner unit or not.
- If the total power requirements of all the connected peripheral
devices are within the allowable power capacity of the
auxiliary power output from the scanner unit or not.
- If any abnormality is found, contact Hitachi Service Dept.
(4) Check to see if the ECG cable cover is damaged or worn off,
if the cable is used as been damaged, an electric shockmay happen.
14−1 Q1E-EA0466
14.2 Checkup while using the scanner unit
Check up the following after turning on the power switch.

(1) Check to see if any abnormal sound or smell is generated or
not. If any abnormality is found, immediately turn off the power
and disconnect the power cable from the power outlet. Then,
contact Hitachi Service Dept. or our authorized dealer.
(2) Make sure that date and time are correctly displayed on the
upper right of the monitor. If date and time are not correct,
the backup battery for time display in the scanner unit may
have been expired. In such case, contact Hitachi Service Dept.
or our authorized dealer. The replaced old battery should be
disposed according to the local government rule.
14−2 Q1E-EA0466
14.3 Periodical checkup
Carry out the following checkup every month.

- If any abnormality is found on the probe connector and connector
or not.
- If any abnormality is found on the power cable and other cables
or not.
- If any abnormality is found on the control panel and keyboard
or not.
- If the stopper for the cart caster functions normally or not.
If any abnormality is found or it malfunctions, stop operation of

the equipment, turn off the power and disconnect the power cable
from the power outlet, then contact Hitachi Service Dept. or our
authorized dealer.
For the detail periodical checkup, consult with Hitachi service Dept.
14.4 Backup of system setting data

Should the hard disk incorporated on this system be damaged, the

registered application data will be lost. Backing up the system
setting data at least once a month is suggested.
[Refer to 7.10 (15) Backup data.]
14.5 Periodical test of system safety

The system shall be subjected to the periodical inspection for safety

of the system at least once a year. The details of the required
inspection will be provided as requested. Contact Hitachi Technical
Service office or our authorized representative.
14−3 Q1E-EA0466
14.6 Periodical inspection of system performance
The system should be subjected to the periodical inspection with

regard to its performance at least once a year. The details of the
required inspection will be provided as requested. Contact Hitachi
Technical Service office or our authorized representative.
14.7 Checkup after storage for a long time

When the scanner unit which have not been used for a long time is
going to be used, make sure that the equipment can be operated
normally and safely.
14.8 Cleaning of equipment
(1) Cleaning of probe

- After use of the equipment, completely wipe off jelly on the

probe with tissue paper or soft cloth. If the probe would
be left with jelly on it, it will cause color change or
deterioration of the probe function.
- Do not use hard paper or cloth to wipe the probe, otherwise
the acoustic lens on the surface of the probe may be scraped,
causing electric shock.
- Keep probe in the probe holder or case for careful storage.
Be careful not to give any shock to the probe or drop it.
- After use of the probe, it must be disinfected. For disinfection
and sterilization of the probe, read the instructions supplied
with each probe.
(2) Cleaning of operation panel

- After use of the equipment, turn off the power switch and
completely wipe off jelly stuck on the surface of the operation
panel. If it is left as stuck, it will cause color change
or deterioration of the panel.
14−4 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Cleaning of system cabinet
- Before cleaning the system cabinet, turn off the power switch
and disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
- Clean the cabinet with the cloth moistened with neutral
detergent and then wipe it with dry cloth.
NOTICE: Never use organic solvent such as thinner.
Take care not to dispose the equipment directly to liquid
such as detergent. When cleaning the equipment, be
careful not to slop liquid inside the equipment, over
the probe connector or the operation panel.
(4) Cleaning of monitor

- Clean the monitor after turning off the power switch.

- Clean the surface of the monitor with the supplied cloth.
Wipe off the sticky dirt with glass cleaner and soft cloth.
Clean the top and side covers of the monitor with cloth
moistened with neutral detergent and then wipe them with dry
cloth.
NOTICE: Never use organic solvent such as thinner.
Take care not to dispose the equipment directly to liquid
such as detergent.
Do not use glass cleaner of hydrocarbon compound. If
this kind of the cleaner is used for a long period,
the reflection preventive shield on the monitor surface
will be damaged.
(5) Cleaning of VCR

- Clean the VCR after turning off the power switch.

- Clean the surface of the VCR with dry, soft cloth. Do not
use wet cloth or detergent, otherwise water or detergent may
leak into the VCR, causing trouble.
- Clean the record and playback heads using the specified cleaning
kit according to the instruction manual of the manufacturer.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the VCR.
14−5 Q1E-EA0466
(6) Cleaning of video printer
- Clean the video printer after turning off the power switch.
- Clean the surface of the video printer with dry, soft cloth.
- Clean the printer head by flowing the cleaning sheet specified
by the printer manufacturer on the printer head. For details,
refer to the instruction manual of the video printer.
(7) Cleaning of filter in power supply unit

- Clean the air cleaning filter at the air inlet window of the
power supply unit located at the bottom of the scanner unit
once a month. If the air filter gets clogged, the circuit
breaker may be actuated or the power supply unit may be damaged.
- Use the vacuum cleaner to suck the dust on the filter or wash
neutral detergent or water. In case of washing the filter,
dry it sufficiently before attachment.
Be sure to detach or attach the filter or to clean the filter

after turning off the power switch.
Do not turn on the power switch without mounting the filter,

otherwise dust in the room or cotton dust may cone in the power
supply unit, causing fire trouble.
14−6 Q1E-EA0466
When washing the filter, do not use acid or alkaline detergent
and thinner which may damage the filter material.
Never attach the filter as far as moisture being left on the

filter.
The damp filter may possibly cause the damage of the system.
Also, do not being the filter close to fire or heat source
for drying.
Filters in the Power Suply Unit
Fig.14.5 Location of Filters
14−7 Q1E-EA0466
14.9 Functional Checkup
The table below shows basic function check list. Carry out the check
as occasion requires. If the function is incorrect, the apparatus
may possibly be defective. In such case, contact Hitachi Service
Dept. or our authorized dealer.
Table.14.6-1 Functional Checkup-1

No. Item Content Remark
By using FREEZE key Image
1 FREEZE check freezing and its release are
possible.
When applying Acoustic Jerry
onto the probe and contacting
with tissue mimicking thing
2 Image check
such as a phantom, tomographic
image can be displayed on the
monitor.
Gain adjustment of B mode image Refer to
Gain control 5.2.2 for
3 is possible by using B gain
check detailed
controller (knob). operation.
Depth gain adjustment of B mode Refer to
Depth Gain image is possible by using Depth 5.2.2 for
4
controlcheck Gain controller (slide type detailed
volume controller). operation.
Changeover of image depth is Refer to
Depth
5 possible by using DEPTH/MAG 5.2.2 for
changeovercheck
key. details.
By using M mode key, the mode Refer to
6 M mode check becomes M mode and scroll image 5.3.1 for
can be displayed. details.
Beam line can be moved with by Refer to

7 M mode check 5.3.1 for
using the track ball. details.
Gain adjustment of M mode image Refer to
M Gain control
8 is possible by using M gain 5.3.2 for
check details.
controller (knob).
By using PW key, PW mode is Refer to
9 PW mode check established and scroll image 5.4.1 for
can be displayed. details.
Beam line and Doppler sampling Refer to
10 PW mode check gate can be moved by using the 5.4.1 for
track ball. details.
14−8 Q1E-EA0466
Table.14.6-2 Functional Checkup-2
No. Item Content Remark
Gain adjustment of PW mode image Refer to
11 PW Gain control
is possible by using PW gain 5.4.2 for
check
controller (knob). details.
By using Color key, Color Refer to
12 Color Doppler Doppler mode can be established 5.7.1 and
modecheck and gain adjustment is possible 5.7.3 for
by gain controller (knob). detailed.
Display region and display size Refer to

13 Color Doppler
can be changed by using the track 5.7.2 for
modecheck
ball. details.
Refer to
Connected Color Printer, B/W each
14 Peripherals
Printer, VCR etc. correctly Instruction
devices check
function. Manual for
the device.
14.10 Waste Products
Risks associated with the disposal of waste products,residuals,etc:

In case plastic case or cover become obsolete and unless,it can
beprocessed and wasted as a general plastic material,for that you
are requested to strictly observe local regulations and laws.
14−9 00 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 15 Repair, readjustment and disposal
(1) Whenever repair or adjustment is required, contact Hitachi or
our authorized dealer.
NOTICE : that the responsibility for repair and adjustment

shall rest on the party who carried out the repair
or readjustment.
(2) Service call

If any abnormality occurs on the equipment, immediately turn
off the power switch, and contact Hitachi or our authorized
dealer for assistance, giving him information on the trouble
as much as you can. Our service engineer will call on you for
the soonest troubleshooting.
(3) Disposal
About the disposal of the equipment and accessories at the end
of their useful lives, contact Hitachi or our authorized dealer.
15−1 00 Q1E-EA0466
Chapter 16 Specifications
16.1 Ultrasound Transmitter/Receiver
16.1.1 Type of Probes
(1) Convex Type Probes: 2.0 ~ 7.5 MHz
(2) Linear Type Probes: 3.0 ~ 13 MHz
(3) Sector Type Probe: 2.0 ~ 7.5 MHz
16.1.2 Image Examination Modes

(1) Standard Configuration: B, B/B, B/M, M
B/PW, B/M/PW, PW, M/PW,
CW
CFM-B,CFM-B/CFM-B,
CFM-B/CFM-M,
CFM-M, CFM-B/PW,
CFM-B/CFM-M/PW,
CFM-M/PW, CW, B/CW,
CFM-B/CW
(2) With Biplane Probe: Realtime B/B
(realtime biplane)
16.1.3 Probe connection

(1) The number of Porbes is simultaneously possible to
connect: 3
(2) The switching method of Probes:
Probe Oriented
Application Menu
(Change with menu)
16.1.4 Dynamic Range: Selectable from 45 to

80dB range in 5 dB step
16−1 Q1E-EA0466
16.1.5 Gain Adjustment
(1) Depth Gain Controls: 8 points, 0 ~ 30dB
(2) B-Mode Gain Adjustment: 60dB
(3) M-Mode Gain Adjustment: 60dB
(4) CFM Gain Adjustment: 60dB
(5) PW Gain Adjustment: 60dB
(6) AGC (Auto Gain Control) Function:
3 steps and off are
selectable for B-mode
and M-mode images.
16.1.6 Focusing
(1) Transmitting Focus: 8-step electronic
focusing
(2) Receiving Focus: Continuous dynamic
focusing with variable
aperture control
16.1.7 Acoustic Power Level Control: 3 levels are slectable
16−2 Q1E-EA0466
16.2 Digital Scan Converter
16.2.1 Image Memory Storage Capacity: 512 × 512 × 8bits (256
gray shades)
Dual images
16.2.2 B-mode Image Display: Single image and dual

images
TV synchronized
display method
16.2.3 Field of View

(1) Image Dipth Range: 2 ~ 24cm (Depend on
Probes)
(2) View Angle or Width: 6 values are selectable
Maximum 200° in
EUP-V53W
(3) Steering of View Angle: Adjustable
(4) Pan/Zoom Function: Up to 8 times
16.2.4 Image Orientation/Rotation

(1) Orientation: Up/down inversion In
B-mode and
Forward/reverse
inversion in PW mode
Right/left inversion
in B-mode
(2) Rotation: 90º step in B-mode image
16.2.5 M-mode Image Display

(1) Display Method: Scrolling
(2) Sweep Speed: 1.25, 2.5, 5, and 10
s/screen
16−3 Q1E-EA0466
16.2.6 Image Processing
(1) Digital Axial Enhancement: 4 levels are selectable
(2) Digital lateral Enhancement: 4 levels are selectable
(3) Scan Correlation: 8 steps are selectable
(4) Post-Processing for Gray shades:
γ-correction,
rejection, and
saturation
(5) Black/White lnversion: Possible
16.2.7 Measurement Functions

(1) Measurements in B-mode: Distance, Area,
Circumference
(Distance method,
Trace method, Ellipse
method, and Rectangle
method), Volume
(Area-length method,
Ellipse method, and
Biplane method), Area
ratio, Distance ratio,
Histogram, Cardiac
Function (SV: Stroke
Volume, CO:Cardiac
Output, EF:Ejection
Fraction),
BPD(Biparietal
Diameter) FA(Fetal
Age), EFBW(Estimated
Fetal Body Weight),
Obstetric Report,
Angle
16−4 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Measurement in M-mode: Distance, Time,
Velocity, Distance
ratio, Time ratio,
HR(Heart Rate),
Schema-Guided(LV:Left
Ventricular,
MV:Mitral Valve,
AO(Aortic Valve,
PV:Pulmonary Valve,
TV:Tricuspid Valve),
Cardiac Function
16.2.8 Character Display

(1) Comments: 45 characters × 24 lines
Quadruple size
characters can be
displayed.
Characters Style
(Regular/Bold/Italic/
Bold-italic)
(2) ID Name: Regular 15 characters
(3) Patient Name: Regular 28 characters
(4) Hospital Name: Regular 29 characters
(5) Automatically Displayed Items: Data and time (year,
month, day, hour,
minute, and second),
Operating frequency of
the probes, Gain
settings, Acoustic
power level,
Post-processing,
Dynamic range(DYN),
Enhancement (ENH),
Delay times from R-wave,
Heart rate, Values of
each measuremnts,
Doppler function
display, Transmitting
focus point
indications, View of
depths display
16−5 Q1E-EA0466
(6) Annotation: 232 annotations
(abreviated medical
terms) are
preregistered.
Up to 20 user-defined
terms can be registered
in each application
16.2.9 Body Marks

(1) Cardiac Region: 10 types
(2) Abdominal Region: 10 types
(3) Vacular Region: 7 types
(4) Obstetric/Gynecology Region: 22 types
(5) Urology Region: 10 types
(6) Thyroid/Breast Region: 6 types
(7) Other regions: 8 types
16.2.10 Application
Function: Up to 32 sets of
operating parameters
can be registered
16.2.11 VCR Control: VCR operations can be

remote-controlled
from control panel of
scanner with
recommended VCR.
(Control cable is
optionally available)
16−6 Q1E-EA0466
16.2.12 Storage to Hard Disk:
(1) Frame Storage Capacity: 300
(2) Multi display: 1, 4, 9, 16
16.2.13 Storage Devices

(1) Floppy Disk: 3.5in 1.44 MB
(2) MO: 3.5in 640 MB
16.3 Doppler
(1) Display Modes: B/D, B/M/D, D, M/D
(2) FFT Analysis Mode: Fast Fourier Transform
(FFT)
Selectable from
followings
- High-response mode
- High-resolution mode
(3) Pulse Repetition Frequencies (PRF):
1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,
4, 4.5, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12,
16, and 20 kHz
(4) Reference Frequencies (REF): Depend on the probes
(5) Wall filter: 50, 100, 150, 200, 300,
400, 500, 600, 800, 1000,
1200, and 1600 Hz
(6) Baseline Shifting: Available
(7) Depth Range: 1 ~ 24 cm
(8) Sampling Gate Lengths: Selectable in 0.5 mm
steps from 0.5 to 5.0 mm
range and in 1 mm steps
from 5.0 mm to 15.0 mm
range
16−7 Q1E-EA0466
(9) Measuring Functions:
(a) Real Time Measurement Instantaneous maximum
flow velocity
(b) Measurements in Freeze Velocity
Acceleration
Systolic window
%-window
Pressure gradient
Flow volume
Time-mean velocity
Ratio of time
Ratio of velocity
Mean velocity
Pressure half-time
Heart rate
Velocity integral
Pulsatility
index/Resistance
index
(10) Acoustic Input and Output: 2 channel speakers
built-in
(Forward/backward
Doppler sound can be
separated);
VCR input/output
terminals
(Forward/backward
Doppler sound can be
separated)
(11) Maximum Detectable Velocity: ±3.0 m/s (5 MHz 20 kHz)
(12) B/D Simultaneous realtime display mode: Maximum
PRF 12 kHz
(14) Sweep Speed: 1.25, 2.5, 5, and 10
s/screen
(15) Angle adjustment: Possible
(16) FFT-γ Values: 8 steps are selectable
16−8 Q1E-EA0466
16.4 Color Flow Mapping
(1) Display Mode: CFM-B, CFM-M,
CFM-B/CFM-M, CFM-M/D,
CFM-B/D,
CFM-B/CFM-M/D
(B-freeze)
(2) CFM-Ｂ Mode
(a) Image Depth Range: Display depth of CFM
image can shift
continuously in the B/W
image field
(b) Color View Angle or Width: Display Angle or width
of CFM image can shift
continuously in the B/W
image field
(c) CFM ROI Settings: Color Box/Sector modes
selectable
(d) Oblique scan: Probe frequency 7.5 and
10MHz, linear probe 0,
±10, ±15, ±20
(3) CFM-M Mode
(a) Display Method: Scrolling
(b) Sweep Speed: 1.25, 2.5, 5, and 10
s/screen
(4) Color Presentation Modes
(a) Velocity/Velocity Variance Mode:
Velocity is displayed
at different levels
of red and blue
brightness, while
velocity variance is
emphasized by adding
different levels of
green brightness.
(b) Velocity Mode: Direction and velocity
of flow are displayed in
red and blue families
with shades of colors.
16−9 Q1E-EA0466
(c) Intensity Mode: Toward-flow is
displayed in red, while
the away-flow in blue,
and reflection
intensity is displayed
with different levels
of brightness.
(d) Color Flow Angiography (CFM) Mode:
Reflection intensity
is displayed with
different levels of
brightness.
CFA mode has no velocity
information.
(e) Directional CFA Mode: Indicate the direction
of flow with CFA
(f) Velocity Variance Mode: Extent of velocity
variance is
displayed with
different levels of
yellow brightness.
(g) Color Map: Color display is
silectable after
frozen
(5) Pulse Repetition Frequencies (PRF): 120, 250, 350, 400, 500,
650, 800, 1K, 2K, 2.5K,
3K, 3.5K, 4K, 4.5K, 5K,
6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 16K,
and 20 kHz
(6) Persistence: 8 steps are selectable
(7) Motion Artifacr Suppressing Function: 3 steps and off are
selectable
(8) Density: 4 steps are selectable
(9) Priority: 17 steps are selectable
16−10 Q1E-EA0466
(10) Color Hold Mode: Overlapped display of
any plural CFM images
Overlapped image data
can be selected in a
cine memory after
frozen
(11) Peak Hold Mode: CFM images are over
lapped real-timely for
selected refresh time.
Refresh time; 4 steps
and infinite are
selectable
(12) Enhanced Velocity (Velocity tagging) Display:
Available
(13) CFM Filter: 3 steps are selectable
(14) Packet Size: 3 steps are selectable
16.5 Image Filling Software

(1) Image Transfer Method: Digital
(2) Transferring Image: Live/Freeze Image
(3) Live Image Transfer Method: Frame to Frame
(F-F)/R-R/All
(4) Image Format: BMP, TIF, Jpeg*, AVI,
AVI(Compression) *
(5) TIFF Compress: None, Pack Bits (LZW
method is not supported
because need Unisys Ltd
License)
(6) AVI Compress: Microsoft Video 1
Note : Jpeg and AVI compressed files can not be Previewed by

other equipment for Ex. EUB-6000
16−11 Q1E-EA0466
16.6 Option
16.6.1 BIO Unit EZU-EK23
(1) Signal Display: ECG
(3) ECG Synchronization: 2 points of timing can
be set independently.
Timing for
synchronization is
displayed in the from of
a vertical line
superimposed on an ECG
waveform.
(4) M-mode Image Partial Blanking: 3 steps and off are
selectable
(5) Accessories ECG cord (CP-50G)1pcs
ECG clamps
(TE-43A,43B) 3pcs
16.6.2 Cine Memory Unit EZU-MM16

(1) Frame Storage Capacity: Maximin 1259 frames
(10R,14°,Black/White)
(2) Recording mode: Continuous recording
mode
(Cine memory, Long
M-mode, B/M ・ D split
record mode, B/B split
record mode)
(3) Play-Back Mode: Continuous/Single
play-back Image frame
searching by trackball
forward/backward
frame scrolling
variable play back
speed
(4) Long M-Mode: Standard: 110 s (in 2.5
s/screen mode)
Maximum 590 s (in 10
s/screen mode)
Continuous play-back
16−12 Q1E-EA0466
Forward/backward
searching with
trackball
(5) Play-back Cine mode ±1/1, ±1/2,
±1/4, ±1/8, 0, Long
M-mode 1.25, 2.5 s
16.6.3 Omni-Directional M mode display unit EZU-MM17
(1) Probe Components (Displaying enable):
Phased Array probe
EUP-C321T
EUP-C511
(2) Display Mode
Real-time ODM mode: B(Real)/ODM
B(Real)/ODM/ODM
Cine ODM mode: B(Cine)/ODM
B(Cine)/ODM/ODM
Real time display time:
Approximately 3.5s
(ANGLE1, Density1,
FR:349)
Preview speed is 1:1
only
Long ODM mode: Record time: Max. 590s
(Record mode 0:1)
(4) Setting
Number of ODM Beam Line 1 beam line/2 beam lines
ODM Beam Line Center Control Common center mode
Independent center mode
Angle Rotation: 0∼359° : 1° Step
Center Position Moving: Step 1 pixcel
Sweep Method: Scroll
Sweep Speed: 4 steps
(1.25,2.5,5,10s/screen)
Scan Density 1(fixed)
View Angle 6 steps
(5) Image process
ODM-γ 5 steps
16−13 Q1E-EA0466
ODM Enhance 4 steps
(6) Measurement Enable M mode
(7) Other
Not use DOP and CFM mode at the same time.
And use not ECG SYNC mode.
16.6.4 SCSI Card Interface unit EZU-Pi1

(1) General
This unit print the image to SCSI printer.
(2) Specification
･Fast SCSI-2
・Transfer Speed 10MB/s
16.6.5 Net Card Interface unit EZU-Pi2

(1) General
This unit make connecting the Ultrasound Scanner
to Network.
(2) Specification
･LAN interface 10Base-T/
100Base-Tx(IEEE802.3)
･Communication Speed 10Mbps/100Mbps
･PCI Bus Ver2.2
･Microsoft Certification PC99
16.6.6 Digital Capture card EZU-Pi3
(1) General
This unit is image capture board for EZU-WS2,
EZU-SE1 and EZU-3D2/3D2S
(2) Specification
･Data width 32 bit wide
(4X8it,2X16bit,1X32bit)
･Buffer memory 4MB
16−14 Q1E-EA0466
16.6.7 Steerable CW doppler unit
(including the pencil CW function) EZU-ST4
・Display mode CW, B/CW (In Steerable CW mode only ),

CFM-B/CW (In Steerable CW mode only)
・Analisys method FFT method
・PRF 4k,4.5k,5k,6k,8k,10k,
12k,16k,20k,25k,35k,50kHz 12 Steps
・Reference frequency Depend on probe
・Wall filter 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600,
800, 1000,1200, 1600Hz 12 steps
・Base line shift Available
・Display method Scrolling
・Sweep speed 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10s/screen
・Angle correction Possible
・FFT-γ 8 steps
16.6.8 CW unit EZU-CW2 (for pencil CW probe)
・Display mode CW
・Analysys method FFT method
・PRF 4k,4.5k,5k,6k,8k,10k,12k,
16k,20k,25k,35k,50kHz 12 steps
・Reference frequency 2.5MHz
・Wall filter 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600,
800, 1000, 1200, 1600Hz 12 steps
・Base line shift Possible
・Display method Scrolling
・Sweep speed 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10s/screen
・Angle correction Possible
・FFT-γ 8 steps
16.7 Other
16.7.1 Auxiliary AC Outlet 120 VA (For monitor
EZU-MT24-S1 )
400 VA (including
monitor and Fan)
16.7.2 Power Requirements

(1) Voltage: 230 VAC ± 10%
(2) Frequency: 50/60 Hz
(3) Consumption: 1.2kVA or less (include
400 VA for AC outlet)
16−15 Q1E-EA0466
16.7.3 Operationg Environment
(1) Temperature: 10 to 35℃
(2) Relative humidity: 30 to 85% RH (No dew
condensation)
(3) Atmospheric Pressur: 700 to 1060hPa
16.7.4 Extenal Dimensions (W) 500 × (D) 800 × (H)

1400 mm
16.7.5 Weight Approx. 130kg (in

standard
configuration)
16−16 Q1E-EA0466
500
1400
800
Unit : mm
Fig. 16.1 Body dimension
16−17 00 Q1E-EA0466
Appendix A: Message list
(1) Messages in normal operation

Failure occurred: A case where system ID
(Hard serial number)
can not be recognized
correctly.
Remedy: Possible failure in
hardware. Call our
service engineer.
Failure occurred: A case where a

selected probe is not
connected to the
scanner.
Remedy: Reconnect the
selected probe firmly
and click OK button.
Failure occurred: A case where the probe

displayed as real time
biplane is removed.
Remedy: Reconnect the probe
firmly and click OK
button.
Failure occurred: When a probe of wide

field of view is used,
there is a case that
current display field
exceeds beyond the
image display are due
to switch over to
right-left reverse of
display
A−1 Q1E-EA0466
Remedy: If there is a
difficulty in image
observation,
readjust the display
position. Meantime,
the dialogue is
automatically
erased.
Failure occurred: A case where a set

rejection speed
exceeds the maximum
detection speed.
Remedy: In case there is a
difficulty in image
observation,
readjust the
rejection speed.
Meantime, the
dialogue is
automatically
erased.
Failure occurred: A case where the

application name you
want to give with
Application Menu
exists already.
Remedy: It is impossible to
give the name in
duplication. Click
OK button and give a
different name.
Failure occurred: A case where it is
urged to adjust
baseline for
measurement in play
back mode.
Remedy: Adjust the baseline.
A−2 Q1E-EA0466
(2) Messages when ECG function is used.
Failure occurred: When double
synchronization is
being performed in ECG
synchronous mode,
there is a case that
this message is
displayed, if the
delay time interval is
shorter than a scan
time for one frame.
Remedy: Readjust the delay
time of SYNC 1 and SYNC
2.
(3) The message used by the Back up function

Failure occurred: When media are not
inserted in the drive
Remedy: Please insert in a
drive the media which
can back up.
Failure occurred: A case where there is

no space in media.
Remedy: Please insert in a
drive the media which
can back up.
A−3 Q1E-EA0466
Failure occurred: A case where back up
data is to be
installed.
Remedy: In case the current
set up data can be lost,
select Yes. If No is
selected, the
installing work is
suspended.
Failure occurred: In case back up data

for installation and
the version of scanner
is different. And the
installation work is
suspended.
Remedy: Click OK button and
prepare back up data
which match with the
same version of
scanner.
Failure occurred: In case back up data

for installation are
not found in selected
drive.
Remedy: OK button and prepare
media in which back up
data are stored.
A−4 Q1E-EA0466
(4) The message used by the Image filing function
Failure occurred: A case where a value
except from 1 to 233
is input.
input an integral
value from 1 to 233.
Failure occurred: A case where a value

except from 0 to 255
is not input.
input an integral
value from 0 to 255.
Failure occurred: Even though Log

Information check box
is set ON in Image
Filing set up menu,
Log File is not
created by Set up of
Log File.
create Log File by Set
of Log File.

no Log File in Merge
Folder.
Remedy: Request to create Log
File. If Yes not
clicked, Log File is
created. If No is
clicked, merging
process is suspended.
A−5 Q1E-EA0466
no space in media for
merging in the merging
process.
Remedy: Insert new media and
click OK. When
Cancel is clicked, the
merging process is
suspended.
Failure occurred: A case where Log

Information in HDD is
full and the merging
process of Log
Information is
automatically
started, but the
process is suspended
on a way.
Remedy: Click OK button.

no Log File in Merge
File in merge
processing of Log
Information.
terminate the merging
process of Log
Information.
Failure occurred: A case of failure in

connecting to
Network.
Remedy: Confirm the status of
connection to
Network.
A−6 Q1E-EA0466
Failure occurred: A case where you want
to delete Image File
and Log File.
Remedy: If YES is click, the
deletion is executed.
If NO is clicked, the
deletion is
suspended.
Failure occurred: A case where the size

of transferred file
exceeds an empty space
in media when images
are transferred to
media (like MO, FD,
etc.)
Remedy: After click OK button
exchange media or
delete the file in
media.
Failure occurred: A case where media is

not in the drive or it
is in Read out only
mode when images are
transferred to media
(like MO, FD, etc.)
confirm whether media
is in the drive or it
is in Read out only
mode or not.
A−7 Q1E-EA0466
a failure except above
said two failures in
image transferring
time.
confirm found out
failure. If the
message is again
displayed although
there is no failure,
call our service
engineer.
Failure occurred: When you try to

transfer Live images,
under some cases a
message which shows
that Live images can
not be transferred is
displayed. Such
cases are mentioned
below.
･ Condition is not in
B-mode Cine memory.
･ Condition is not in
ECG mode although
the transferring
mode is set to
R-Rout.
･ Condition is for a
single image display
of M-mode and D-mode
image.
･ In display condition
of B-mode image +
M.D-mode image, M.D
side is selected.
Remedy: If Yes is clicked, a
single image can be
A−8 Q1E-EA0466
transferred.
If No is clicked, the
transfer is
suspended.
Failure occurred: A case where matching

ID and Name can not be
found although ID and
Name are searched in
Image File operating
menu.
input again ID and
Name in order to start
the research.
Failure occurred: When number of images

stored in the Hard
Disk reaches 100.
Remedy: Since Save cannot do
an image file at the
time of the next Save,
it is warning.
Delete files in the
Hard Disk or transfer
them to any medium.
Failure occurred: When images more than

100 are stored in the
Hard Disk
Remedy: The images can not be
stored in the Hard
Disk. Delete files
in the Hard Disk or
transfer them to any
medium.
A−9 Q1E-EA0466
an Image File
including images of
invalid size is in
selected drive in
replaying time of
Image File.
confirm the Image
File.
Failure occurred: In Retrieve mode,

there is a case where
Live image transfer.
Remedy: If Yes is clicked,
single image file is
transferred. If No is
clicked, the transfer
is suspended.
Failure occurred: A case where a drive

selection is not ready
in reading time of
Image File.
Remedy: Insert media into the
drive to be selected
and click Yes.
If No is clicked, the
reading in process
from the drive is
suspended.
A−10 Q1E-EA0466
Failure occurred: A case where empty
space in Merge Folder
is smaller than the
size of Image File to
be transferred to
Merge Folder.
delete or transfer
files in Merge Folder.
Failure occurred: When ending a Filing

dialog and the image
remains in Merge
Folder.
Remedy: If Yes is clicked,
Image File in Merge
Folder is deleted.
If No is clicked, it
is left as it is in
Merge Folder.
Failure occurred: A case where it is

impossible to
transfer as the size
of transfer file is
too big.
confirm the transfer
file size.
For your reference:
NTSC, B/W: Able to transfer
up to 1659 frames
NTSC, Color: Able to transfer
up to 568 frames
PAL, B/W: Able to transfer
up to 1089 frames
PAL, Color: Able to transfer
up to 363 frames
A−11 Q1E-EA0466
Failure occurred: A case where Log
Information stored
temporally in HDD is
to be merged.
Remedy: Click Yes button. If
No is clicked, Log
Information in HDD is
not merged.
Failure occurred: After freeze off, a

case where you press
Freeze key at once to
execute multi image
transfer.
Remedy: Please click OK
button.When
condition is not
freezing, you press
Freeze key after a few
minutes. And you
execute multi image
transfer.
A−12 Q1E-EA0466
Appendix B Start of ultrasound scanner system by system MO
When the ultrasound scanner becomes unable to start because of the

reason that a hard disk incorporated in the scanner can not be run
by deterioration, crash and so on, it is possible to restart it
using System MO attached to the scanner. A procedure for restarting
the scanner by the said MO is mentioned below.
NOTICE:1)In case the hard disk is replaced with new one which has
been supplied from the factory, its user settable
information are set to factory set information. So, we
recommend you to back up user settable information
routinely using “Backup data” from “Main Menu”. You can
protect user settable information by re-install the backup
information after replacing the hard disk.
2)It should be setting to store hard-disk in starting system

MO when stored image data. If setting MO, it can not be
stored image.
<CAUTION>
When the scanner is started with System MO, do not use under
mentioned functions.
- Transferring live images to MO (Refer to Section 9.2.3)

- MO formatting (Ref. to Appendix C)
- Ejection of MO
Start of the scanner by System MO

1. Prepare following media attached to the scanner.
This is required for starting Recovery Medium. Hereinafter
referred as Disk 1.
This is required for initialize HDD starting information.
Hereinafter referred as Disk 2.
This is required in case charged options are attached to the
scanner and it is used to release the protection of functions
of charged options.
Hereinafter referred as A-Disk .
B−1 Q1E-EA0466
HDD restoring tools are included in it. Also in combination
with Disk 1 this can be used to run the scanner as a substitution
for HDD.
<CAUTION>
A set of above said media is attached to one scanner and
the set is Inherent property to that scanner. If media
of other scanners are used, that media can not be used
normally due to irregular copy protection function.
2. Insert Disk 1 into the scanner.

3. Insert System MO into the scanner.
4. Put ON the power of the scanner.
5. Starting image is displayed and the scanner is started.
When the System MO is start up, there is a case that the dialog
of update for system configuration (fig.B-1) is displayed.
Push OK button to update system configuration.
System is rebooted automatically when OK button is pushed.
Fig. B-1 Dialog of update for system configuration
When the scanner is started first time using System MO, the protection
of charged option functions is still effective. For releasing the
protection observe following procedure.
After starting the scanner;
B−2 Q1E-EA0466
6. Remove Disk 1 from the scanner.
7. Insert A-Disk into the scanner.
8. Select “Main Menu” → “Setup” → “Entry Opt”.
9. Remove A-Disk from the scanner and insert Disk 1 into it.
Now, the protection of charged option functions is released and

the function can be used until HDD is replaced with new one.
There are not using option in out of the protection. Refer to the
several optional Instruction Manual in detailed.
B−3 00 Q1E-EA0466
Appendix C Recommended MO
Be sure to use the MO of under-mentioned maker and the standard.
1. Recommended MO brand:
Fujitsu
Hitachi Maxell
Mitsubishi Chemistry
SONY
2. Recommended MO:
Capacity 128MB ................ Conforming to ISO/IEC 10090
Capacity 230MB ................ Conforming to ISO/IED 13963
Capacity 540, 640MB ........... Conforming to ISO/IEC 15041
C−1 Q1E-EA0466
Appendix D How to use MO Formatter
[1] Start of MO Formatter

Put Main Menu button ON and select Main Menu → Disk → MO format.
A display for MO format (see Fig. 1 MO Disk Formatter) is shown.
Fig. 1 MO Disk Formatter
[2] Format procedure

In performing the format observe under mentioned procedure.
1. Press a button indicating Adapter No. # and Target ID # in the

MO Disk Formatter.
D−1 Q1E-EA0466
2. Either by selecting Format → Disk Format or by pressing
button Disk Format as shown in Fig. 2 is displayed.
Enter Volume Label of MO

Select Low level format
Select Floppy Type
Fig. 2 Disk Format
3. Select Floppy Type by Format type and enter MO name into Volume
Lavel (Note 1), then select Low level format (Note 2) and press
OK button.
Note 1: (1) For inputting the name of Volume label, use

alphabetic letters, figures and under bar (_) only.
Do not use a space in the name.
(2) When formatting is continued with using some

symbols (!, ?, ; etc.) or with leaving a space in
the name of Volume label, an error message [Amend
the name of Volume label.] is displayed. In this
case, also input the name of Volume label by using
alphabetic letters, figures and under bar (_) only,
not using a space.
Note 2: In consideration of safety we recommend you to use

Low level format. For Low level formatting, however,
it needs about 11 minutes with MO of 640MB.
D−2 Q1E-EA0466
4. When returned to Disk Formatter, contents of Disk are changed
to the display in yellow color as shown in Fig. 3. Select Format
→ Commit Changes Now....or press button.
Fig. 3 MO Disk Formatter just after Disk Format is closed.
5. A Message for confirmation as shown in Fig. 4 is displayed. After

confirming its contents select Yes , then formatting is started.
Start of formatting
Fig.4 Message for confirmation
D−3 Q1E-EA0466
[3] Change of Volume Label
It is possible to change a formatted Disk Label by under mentioned
procedure.
1. Press the button indicating Adapter No. # and Target ID # the

MO Disk Formatter.
Either by selecting Format → Change Volume Label or by pressing
button Label for Volume D: as shown in Fig. 5 is displayed.
Change Label and press OK button.
Fig. 5 Label for Volume
2. When returned to Disk Formatter, contents of Disk are changed

to the display in yellow color as shown in Fig. 6. Select Format
→ Commit Changes Now....or press button.
Fig. 6 MO Disk Formatter just after Label for Volume is closed.
D−4 Q1E-EA0466
3. A message for confirmation as shown in Fig. 7 is displayed.
After confirming its contents select Yes , then the change
of Volume name is started.
Fig. 7 Message for confirmation
[4] Ejecting function
Select Tool → Eject in MO Disk Formatter or press button.
[5] End of MO Formatter

Select Exit MO Disk Formatter in MO Disk Formatter or press button
at upper right corner.
(NOTICE 1)
If MO Disk Formatter is moved with a trackball, the screen painted
out white will be displayed. However, if MO Disk Formatter is closed,
it will be re-drawn normally.
D−5 Q1E-EA0466
Appendix E: SCSI Printer
If the SCSI printer and SCSI interface function (available as option

EZU-PI1) that are recommended by Hitachi are connected to the
ultrasound scanner, ultrasound image can be printed out by using
the SCSI printer. Image can be simply printed out by operating
Print key similarly to the operation for the conventional video
printer.
1. Connectable SCSI printer

To utilize this function, the following SCSI printers shown in Table
F1-1 are recommended.
Table F1-1 Recommended SCSI Printers

Manufacturer Model Print time
Mitsubishi CP770D About 30sec.
(Printing Mode : Standard)
Sony UP-D2600S About 60sec.
2. Precautions in connection
(1)SCSI Interface function (option model EZU-PI1) is required.
(2)To connect the printer , SCSI ID of the printer must be set.
1) With the CP770D connected, set SCSI ID to "5".
2) With the UP-D2600S connected, set SCSI ID to "1".
In the case any other SCSI device has already been connected,
make sure that the SCSI ID is not duplicated. In case it
is duplicated, change the ID of the SCSI device to different
ID not in use.
NOTICE: Turn the power OFF before connecting the SCSI printer with
the ultrasound scanner.
3. Setting SCSI printer

By connecting the SCSI Interface function (option EZU-PI1),the SCSI
printer can be designated to the output destination of Printer Key,
thereby the SCSI printer to be used for output can be selected and
image quality can be adjusted.
E−1 Q1E-EA0466
3.1 Setting Print Key
Set the output destination of Print Key to the SCSI printer. By
this setting, image can be printed out through the SCSI printer.
(1)Press Main Menu key.
(2)Select [Setup] → [Print Key] on the displayed Main Menu to display
Print Key menu.
(3)Select Printer (SCSI) on Print Key menu.
These are displayed

by installing EZU-PI1.
Fig. F3.1-1 Setting Print Key
E−2 Q1E-EA0466
3.2 Selection of SCSI printer and adjustment of image quality
It is necessary to select the SCSI printer and designate the printer
for image output.
(1)Press Main Menu key.
(2)Select [Setup] → [Peripherals] → [Printer(SCSI)] on the
displayed Main Menu.
This can be selected

by installing EZU-PI1.
Fig. F3.2-1 Selection of Printer (SCSI)
(3)Printer (SCSI) dialog is displayed. (This is displayed by

installing the EZU-PI1.)
(4)Press List box of Select Printer.
(5)Connectable SCSI printers are displayed. Select the connected
SCSI printer from the list.
E−3 Q1E-EA0466
(6)After selection, press "OK" button.
Fig. F3.2-2 Selection of Connected SCSI Printer
E−4 Q1E-EA0466
3.3 Adjustment of image quality
By selecting TAB on Printer (SCSI) dialog, image quality can be
adjusted for each printer.
3.3.1 Image quality adjustment for CP770D

(1) Select TAB [MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)] displayed on Printer
(SCSI) dialog. Image adjustment parameters for CP770D
are displayed.
(2) Selecting each of these parameters, its value can be
changed by operating numeric keys or the spin control
button displayed at the right of the displayed parameter.
Selection of TAB
Fig. F3.3.1-1 Image Quality Adjustment for CP770D
1) Red, Green, Blue

Each level of RGB can be adjusted in a range from +128
to -128.
2) Contrast
Contrast level can be adjusted in a range from +128
to -128.
E−5 Q1E-EA0466
3) Brightness
Brightness level can be adjusted in a range from +128
to -128.
4) Printing Mode:
Image quality of printed image can be selected from
the following three modes.
Standard : Default setting. Image can be printed
at high speed.
Fine : Better quality image can be printed as
compared with Standard.
Super Fine : Better quality image can be printed as
compared with Fine.
Selecting higher image quality mode requires longer
printing time. Select a printing mode according to
the required application.
(3) Pressing Reset button resets the settings to those set
at the factory before shipment.
(4) Pressing Cancel button cancels the change before pressing
"OK" button.
(5) After all the changes are completed, press "OK" button
to save the changed values.
E−6 Q1E-EA0466
3.3.2 Image quality adjustment for UP-D2600S
(1) Select TAB [Sony UP-D2600S] displayed on Printer (SCSI)
dialog. Image adjustment parameters for UP-D2600S are
displayed.
(2) Selecting each of these parameters, its value can be
changed by operating numeric keys or the spin control
button displayed at the right of the displayed parameter.
Selection of TAB
Fig. F3.3.1-2 Image Quality Adjustment for UP-D2600S
1) Red, Green, Blue

Each level of RGB can be adjusted in a range from +32
to -32.
2) Dark and Light
Gray scale for dark area and light area can be adjusted
in a range from +32 to -32 respectively.
3) Gamma
Color in intermediate color range can be set in a range
from +32 to -32. With a larger value set, density
of intermediate color becomes darker.
E−7 Q1E-EA0466
4) Sharp
Image edge can be enhanced in a range from 0 to 7.
With a larger value set, image edge is enhanced more
sharply.
(3) Pressing Reset button resets the settings to those set
at the factory before shipment.
(4) Pressing Cancel button cancels the change before pressing
"OK" button.
(5) After all the changes are completed, press "OK" button
to save the changed values.
E−8 Q1E-EA0466
Appendix F: How to use a log file
The internal hard disk can temporarily store up to 10,000 file

transfer information logs (log information).
However, the user cannot refer directly to log information stored
on the hard disk (NOTICE 1).
For this reason, log information should be stored as a log file
on an external medium, such as a magneto-optical disk (MO).
The Log Search screen receives log information from a log file and
displays search results.
Log information and image data must be stored on separate MO’s.
(NOTICE 1)To prevent loss of log files due to the breakage or

failure of the internal hard disk, log files are not
stored on the internal hard disk.
1. Log file setup procedure

A log file cannot be used until the user sets it up.
Use this procedure to create a log file.
2. Procedure for using a log file

To display a log file on the screen, the log information temporarily
stored on the hard disk must be merged into a log file.
Use this procedure to merge log information into a log file.
3. Automatic log file merging procedure
When a specific number of logs are stored on the hard disk, they
must be merged into a log file.
A message appears prompting the user to merge the log information,
and the user performs the merging. Use this procedure to merge
log information into a log file.
(NOTICE 2)To enable the disk search function using a log file,
a volume label must be assigned to each MO and FD storing
the image data.
The Log Search screen displays the volume label of the

medium (FD or MO) that stores the intended image data.
The following pages describe the above-mentioned

operation procedures in detail.
F−1 Q1E-EA0466
1. Log file setup procedure
(1) Select Main Menu → Set Up → Image filing. The dialog box shown
in Figure 1 appears.
(2) Check “Log Information” in the lower right section, and click
on the Log File “Set Up” button.
(The screen shown in Fig. 2 appears.)
To set a log file.
To create a log file.
To the screen shown

in Fig. 2
Fig. 1 Set Up Filing menu
F−2 Q1E-EA0466
(3) In “Storage Drive and Make Log file,” select the drive where
you want to create the log file.(NOTICE 1)
(4) Click on the “Make” button. (The screen shown in Fig. 3
appears.)
(NOTICE1)The hard disk cannot be selected. The hard disk is used

only to store log information temporarily.
To the screen shown

in Fig. 3
Fig. 2 Set up Log file screen
F−3 Q1E-EA0466
(5) Create a log file according to the messages shown below. When
creating the log file, do not use the same medium (FD, MO,
etc.) used to store the image data.
(6) When you see the message “Succeeded!!!”, the log file has been
created.
Cancels log file creation. (NOTICE 1)
When the drive is Cancels log file creation. (NOTICE 1)

not ready (NOTICE 2)
Automatic log file creation
This message stays on screen for several seconds.
Cancels log file creation. (NOTICE 1)
End (The display returns the screen shown in Fig. 2.)
Fig. 3 Log file creation procedure
F−4 Q1E-EA0466
(NOTICE 1) Even though log file creation procedure has been
cancelled, the message “Log file is not created”
appears when the user exits the Set Up Filing menu
if the Set up Log file check box is checked.
(NOTICE 2) ･When no storage medium is inserted in the drive.
･When the storage medium is read-only.
F−5 Q1E-EA0466
2. Procedure for using a log file
(1) Click on the “Read” key.
(2) Click on the “Log Info.” button on the image file operation
menu.
(3) Select “Yes” in the message box shown in Fig. 4.(Notice 1)
(The screen shown in Fig. 5 appears.)
(4) The Log Search screen appears once the procedure described
in Fig. 5 has been completed.
(Notice 1) Selecting “Yes” merges the log information temporarily

stored on the hard disk into the log file created by the
user (see 1. Log file setup procedure), enabling the user
to search log information.
When “No” is selected, log information can be searched

without merging.
To the screen shown in Fig. 5
Fig. 4 Log file merge confirmation message
F−6 Q1E-EA0466
(5) Merge the log information stored on the hard disk according
to the messages shown below.
(6) When you see the message “Succeeded!!!”, the log file has been
merged.
- The Log Search screen appears when “Log Info.” is selected
on the image file operation menu.
- After automatic merging (see Fig. 6), the display returns
to the screen before automatic merging.
When the drive is

not ready (Notice 1) Normal When there is no log file
Automatic log file creation

End
Normal
Merging
When the storage media has no

more available memory
This message stays on screen for several seconds.
Automatic log file creation End
Fig. 5 Log file merging procedure
F−7 Q1E-EA0466
(Notice 1) ･ When no storage medium is inserted in the drive.
･ When the storage medium is read-only.
3. Automatic log file merging procedure

(1) When the number of logs temporarily stored on the hard disk
reaches 9,000, the display goes to the screen shown in Fig.
5.
(2) The automatic merging procedure is completed after the merging
procedure shown in Fig. 5.
Number of logs on hard disk: 10,000
Hard disk
Log 1
(NOTICE) If the number of logs exceeds 10,000,

they will be deleted from log 1.
Log 9,000
When the “Write” key is clicked on or “OK” is selected in the Transfer dialog box after the number of logs
stored on the hard disk has reached 9,000.
To the screen shown in Fig. 5
Fig. 6 Automatic log file merging procedure
F−8 00 Q1E-EA0466
Appendix G: Precautions to display on Mac OS
1. Formatting MO disk
Even to display image file on Mac OS, use either of the following
MO disks.
· Commercially available MO disk (formatted for Windows95/98/NT)
· MO disk formatted with the Ultrasound scanner (Main menu → Disk
→ MO Format)
(NOTICE 1)The MO disk formatted on Mac OS cannot be used for the

Ultrasound scanner.
2. Necessary software
To display images in MO disk, a mount software is necessary.
2.1 Mac OS standard mount software

Possibility of displaying the mount software incorporated in Mac
OS as standard is described in the following table. Any mount
software is not incorporated in versions older than Mac OS7.5.1.
as standard.
Software Possibility of display

Applicable OS version
name 128MB 230MB 540MB 640MB
PC MacOS7.5.1 and later ○ ×
⃝ ⃝
Exchange version untilMacOS8.5 (Note 1) (Note 2)
File MacOS8.5 and later ○ ×
⃝ ⃝
Exchange version (Note 1) (Note 2)
(NOTICE 1)The MO drive usable for 540MB is necessary.

Although it could be seen displaying images in 540MB
MO disk at the factory, it might not be possible according
to the information of the MO disk manufacturer. It is,
therefore, recommended to use the 230 MO disk when using
this mount software.
(NOTICE 2)The mount software cannot be displayed even with the 640 MB MO drive.
G−1 Q1E-EA0466
2.2 Other mount software
Display by using the following mount software has been confirmed.
Software Applicable OS Possibility of display

name version 128MB 230MB 540MB 640MB
B' s ○ ×
MacOS8.5.1 ⃝ ⃝
screw3.1.5 (Note 1) (Note 2)
B' s ○ ×
MacOS7.5.5 ⃝ ⃝
control1.3 (Note 1) (Note 2)
(NOTICE 1)The MO drive usable for 540BM is necessary.
(NOTICE 2)The mount software cannot be displayed even with the

640 MB MO drive
3. Image display software

Any image, if it is created on the display software compatible with
the formats such as BMP, TIF (without compression), TIF (Pack Biz),
JPEG and AVI, can be displayed.
Example:
· PhotoShop (BMP, TIF, TIF(Pack Biz), JPEG)
· Graphic Converter ((BMP, TIF, TIF(Pack Biz), JPEG)
4. Precautions
- There may be cases where display is not possible depending on
combination of MacOS version, MO format, MO drive and mount
software.
Be sure to display the test image from the Ultrasound scanner
to the MO disk and make sure that the MO disk can display it
on Mac OS.
- In the case that the MO is unprotected and the images are displayed
into the MO disk on MacOS, several files are automatically created
on the MO disk. (Even if images are thereafter written by the
Ultrasound scanner, any problem will occur.)
G−2 Q1E-EA0466
Appendix AA: Using the PC Printer
1. Preparatory Work
Connect the PC printer with the system and install the driver of
printer to be connected into the system.
Ask our service personnel for installing the driver.
2. Setting the PC Printer

(1) Select Main Menu → Setup → Image Print to display the Set
Up Image Print dialog (see Fig. 1).
(2) Select PC Printer from (a).
(3) Follow Table 1 to select values for ① through ⑤.
(4) Please click a (b)[properties] button, when a detailed setup
is required. The setting dialog according to the printer driver
is displayed.
(5) After selection, check values selected and click the OK
button.
<CAUTION>
A property setup of (b) cannot do PC printer on a network at

the time of selection.
(a)
① (b)
② ③
③ ④
Fig. 1 Set Up Image Print Dialog
AA−1 Q1E-EA0466
Table 1 Printer Settings
No. Title Description
① Select Printer Select the name of target printer.
② Film Size Select paper size.
③ Image Display Format Select the layout of images.
④ Number of Copies Select number of copies.
⑤ Paper Source Select paper source.
NOTICE: If nothing can be selected, the printer driver may not

be normally installed.
Ask out service personnel for installation.
AA−2 Q1E-EA0466
3. Print
3.1 Print by the Print key
It is possible to print images to PC printer by the PRINT key.
(1) Allocating the PRINT key
To print images by using the PRINT key, select Image Printer
from the dialog shown in Fig. 2 to be displayed by selecting
Main Menu → Setup → Print/REC.
Select Image Printer.
Fig. 2 Setting Print Key
(2) Print
(a) When Freeze Off, display any image to be printed and press
the FREEZE key. Or, after pressing the FREEZE key, reproduce
any image to be printed in the cine mode for selection.
(b) Press the PRINT key. This saves the image temporarily in
the hard disk.
(c) Repeat Step (a) and (b) for images to be printed out onto
a sheet of paper.
(d) Print will start automatically when number of saved images
reaches a specified value.
AA−3 Q1E-EA0466
(3) Forced output
If any of the following operations takes place, saved images
are outputted to the printer.
· [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu.
· Pressing the End Exam key
· Starting the ultrasound system (Any of images saved when
previously using the system remain not printed).
(i) [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu.
When using the Print key to output images to the printer,
data of the same patient only is outputted to the same
paper. Therefore, if clicking the [New Patient] button
when the patient is changed, a message shown in Fig. 3
appears. Click the [Yes] button. If print is to be canceled,
select the [No] button for the message.
NOTICE:If selecting the [No] button, saved images are deleted

and they cannot be outputted to the printer any more.
Fig. 3 Forced Output Message
(ii) Pressing the End Exam key

To force saved images to be printed, press the End Exam
key
A message shown in Fig. 3 appears. Click the [Yes] button.

If print is to be canceled, select the [No] button for
the message.

AA−4 Q1E-EA0466
(iii)Starting the system
If turning off the system power when any of saved images
remain, a message shown in Fig. 3 appears when starting
the system. Click the [Yes] button. If print is to be
canceled, select the [No] button for the message.

AA−5 Q1E-EA0466
3.2 Print from the Filing dialog
(1) Press the Read key to display the Filing dialog (see Fig. 4).
(2) Select any images to be printed.
(3) Click the [Image Print] button (Fig. 4 (a)).
(4) Image Print dialog(Fig.5) is displayed.
(5) When you change the contents of a setting, refer to " Section
2 Setting the PC Printer".
(6) Check the contents of a setting and click the [OK] button.
(4) The images printed in order of the selected images is arranged,
print starts.
(a)
Fig. 4 Filing dialog
Fig. 5 Image Print dialog
AA−6 Q1E-EA0466
NOTICE 1:Images in AVI format and DICOM format cannot be printed.
When any images in AVI format or DICOM format have been
selected, a message appears as shown in Fig. 6.
Click the [OK] button to continue output to the printer,
or the [Cancel] button to stop output to the printer.
Fig. 6 Print Confirmation Message
NOTICE 2:If the Image Print button is used to output images to

the printer when there are images saved with the PRINT
key, a message appears as shown in Fig. 3. Select the
[Yes] button to output images saved with the PRINT key
as well or the [No] button to delete them.
If selecting the [No] button, however, saved images are
deleted and they cannot be outputted to the printer any
more.
4. Cautions
(1) When no paper remains or no ink remains, refer to the instruction
manual of printer.
(2) According to the printer connected a dialog box indicating
“Printing” may appear on the ultrasound screen. If it disturbs
image viewing, press the Tab key while pressing the Alt key.
The dialog box indicating “Printing” is canceled.
(3) Setting place of the printer
When connecting the printer with Ultrasound scanner, the
printer must be placed out side of the Patient Environment
to avoid an electrical shock. Regarding the Patient Environment,
IEC 60601-1-1 Safety requirements for a medical electrical
system describes for the area which is shown in Fig. 6.
AA−7 Q1E-EA0466
2.5m
1.5m
Fig. 6 Patient Environment
Make sure to use the printer which complies with IEC Publication
60950 Standard (Safety of information processing equipment
including the equipment for office use) or IEC Publication
60601-1 Standard (Safety of medical electrical equipment).
To avoid a danger of electrical shock, never place the printer

to be connected with EUB-6500 within the area of the Patient
Environment.
AA−8 Q1E-EA0466
3D Display Software
Model EZU-3D2, EZU-3D2S
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Tokyo, Japan
Q1E-EZ0475-4

Preface
Thank you for purchasing 3D Display Software EZU-3D2, EZU-3D2S.

This software will allow you to use the system more effectively for ultrasonography.
To use the 3D Display Software properly, it is important to fully understand it. Therefore,
carefully read this Instruction Manual before use.
Then, to use this software, EZU-Pi3 is needed.
The followings are the meanings of type of precautionary notice in the text.
Type of
precautionary Meaning (Definition)
notice
DANGER This note indicates any condition or action which, if not strictly
observed, could result in direct danger such as serious personal
injury or possible death, or serious property damage such as
total loss of equipment or fire.
WARNING This note indicates any condition or action which, if not strictly
observed, could result in indirect danger such as possible death,
serious personal injury or light or medium-degree personal
injury, or serious property damage such as total loss of
equipment or fire.
CAUTION This note indicates any condition or action which, if not strictly
observed, could result in possible danger such as partial
equipment damage or data loss of computer.
NOTICE This note indicates important precautions which are not related
to danger but are to be taken against operation, installation and
maintenance.
(1) Q1E-EZ0475
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Purpose of use ....................................................................................................................1-1

1.2 Introduction to 3D ultrasound..........................................................................................1-1
1.2.1 Scan of probe ...........................................................................................................1-1
1.2.2 Reconstruction of 3D image ...................................................................................1-1
1.2.3 Technical terms .......................................................................................................1-1
1.3 Cautions .............................................................................................................................1-2
1.4 Warning ..............................................................................................................................1-3
1.5 Maintenance and checkup ................................................................................................1-3
1.5.1 Check before use .....................................................................................................1-3
1.5.2 Checkup while using ..............................................................................................1-4
1.5.3 Periodical checkup ..................................................................................................1-4
1.6 Features..............................................................................................................................1-4
Chapter 2 System configuration and installation.........................................................................2-1
2.1 Standard components........................................................................................................2-1

2.2 Installation.........................................................................................................................2-1
2.3 Preliminary work for magnetic sensor unit.....................................................................2-1
Chapter 3 Base software .................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Starting 3D mode...............................................................................................................3-1

3.2 3D mode..............................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Capture execution requirements ......................................................................................3-5
3.4 Patient information ...........................................................................................................3-7
3.4.1 Necessity to enter ID of patient information........................................................3-7
3.4.2 Entering patient name properly (3D specific cautions) .......................................3-9
3.4.3 Restriction of characters for patient ID ..............................................................3-10
3.4.4 Limits on the number of characters ....................................................................3-10
3.5 Starting capture............................................................................................................... 3-11
3.6 During capture.................................................................................................................3-14
3.7 Stopping capture..............................................................................................................3-17
3.8 Saving 3D image file........................................................................................................3-18
3.9 Exiting from 3D mode .....................................................................................................3-19
3.10 Setting up 3D functions ..................................................................................................3-19
3.10.1 Capture settings ...................................................................................................3-19
3.10.2 Settings for 3D image file.....................................................................................3-22
(2) Q1E-EZ0475
3.10.3 Settings of ROI for 3D image capture .................................................................3-23
3.11 3D function setting menu................................................................................................3-24
3.11.1 Capture settings ...................................................................................................3-25
3.11.2 Settings for 3D image file.....................................................................................3-26
3.12 Messages on 3D software ................................................................................................3-28
3.12.1 In case of 3D software error .................................................................................3-28
3.12.2 In case of 3D software lockup ..............................................................................3-29
Chapter 4 3D software ....................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Screen layout......................................................................................................................4-1

4.2 Free section display screen ...............................................................................................4-1
4.2.1 Changing image display.........................................................................................4-2
4.2.2 Moving position of 3D image..................................................................................4-2
4.2.3 Icon function............................................................................................................4-3
4.2.4 3D image controller ................................................................................................4-9
4.3 Rendering screen .............................................................................................................4-10
4.3.1 Rendering image ...................................................................................................4-10
4.3.2 Rendering technique.............................................................................................4-10
4.3.3 Icon function.......................................................................................................... 4-11
4.4 Multi-view screen ............................................................................................................4-14
4.5 Database screen...............................................................................................................4-15
4.5.1 Screen layout.........................................................................................................4-15
4.5.2 Screen function .....................................................................................................4-16
Chapter 5 Specification ...................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Base software .....................................................................................................................5-1

5.2 3D software ........................................................................................................................5-1
5.3 Image files ..........................................................................................................................5-2
5.4 Condition for using magnetic sensor unit (EZU-3D2S) ..................................................5-2
Index ............................................................................................................................................. Index-1
(3) Q1E-EZ0475
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of use

Combining EZU-3D2 or EZU-3D2S with the ultrasound diagnostic scanner allows you to
display 3D images by acquiring continuous 2D image data. Use base software to acquire 2D
image data. Use 3D software to reconstruct and display a 3D image.
In EZU-3D2, you can use the “Untracked” capture with which you move a probe in a constant
speed by yourself as a data acquisition method (tracking mode). The “Untracked” capture can
be used with all probes except EUP-TC3.
In EZU-3D2S, you can use “Magnetic tracked” capture with which you acquire data by sensing
the position of probe by means of the magnetic sensor unit as a tracking mode. The
“Magnetic tracked” capture can be used with seven types of probes; EUP-C314G, EUP-C318T,
EUP-C514, EUP-C524, EUP-L53, EUP-L53S and EUP-V53W. When using these probes, an
adapter is necessary to attach the receiver to the probe.
1.2 Introduction to 3D ultrasound

1.2.1 Scan of probe
The way to obtain image data is done by the linear scan of probe.
1.2.2 Reconstruction of 3D image
The reconstruction of 3D image is the process in which 2D images are transformed into a
single 3D volume. To get a good 3D image, pay attention to the following:
• Apply enough jelly to the interested region of a subject. Move the probe smoothly to the
appropriate direction. Do not push the probe hard against the anatomy. Keep moving the
probe with slow and constant speed along the interested region. In case of pushing the
probe hard, skew scan or rotation scan, the 3D image may deforms.
• Respiration or cardiac motion may result in motion artifacts. Respiration artifacts can
be avoided by having the patient hold his/her breath during the scan.
1.2.3 Technical terms
Render display:
3D display for the transmission process or maximum intensity projection process
Volume rendering (Rendering):
Treatment for render display
MIP (Maximum Intensity Projection) mode:
It displays a 3D image that maximum value of intensity is emphasized
Opacity mode:
It displays a transparent 3D image
Transparency mode
It displays a 3D image that both monochrome image and color image are made
transparent
1-1 4 Q1E-EZ0475
1.3 Cautions
EZU-3D2
• The 3D functions cannot be used in the emergency start of SYSTEM MO.

• When turning the power OFF, the screen of 3D software may be displayed for a while.
Wait as it is.
• In the 3D software display, when main software is appeared by some operation, press
the Tab key while pressing the Alt key to return to the previous state.
• While the 3D software is displayed, the screen saver does not work.
• When using FD, follow [7.10 Disk Menu, (3) FD Format] in the Instruction Manual of
the main system to format it before use.
• When using a commercially available MO for image recording, be sure to use any MO
compatible with WindowsNT. If using a MO not compatible with WindowsNT, follow
[Appendix D] in the Instruction Manual of the main system to format it before use.
• It is recommended to periodically archive 3D image files to MO.
• If any part of the system or cable is broken, have a contact with our service personnel.
• According to the version of main software, specifications of the function is different.
Regarding a way to confirm the main software version, refer to the Instruction Manual
of the main system, [7.9 Setup menu (2-9) Software option.]
EZU-3D2S
• If you suspect that 3D calibration is not correct, e.g. measured results differ from those
expected, have a contact with our service personnel.
• When mechanical shock has applied to the receiver, transmitter and so on, or the
adapter for fixing the receiver is broken or loosened, have a contact with our service
personnel.
• After using the magnetic sensor unit, use wet and clean towel to wipe the ultrasound
jelly off the adapter and receiver, and then use any solution required by FDA (Ex.:
Johnson & Johnson R CydexTM, Johnson & Johnson R CydexPLUSTM) to clean it.
• Do not soak the magnetic sensor unit in any liquid. However, wiping it with general
disinfectant available in the hospital is acceptable. Also the adapter can be soaked in
the hospital level disinfectant.
• The performance of the magnetic sensor unit may be affected in the conditions that
there are some apparatus emitting electromagnetism around the unit or there are some
large structures made of steel within a meter, etc.
• The table 1.3.1 shows the systems which have possibilities of being affected with the
magnetism which is generated by the transmitter of magnetic sensor unit. With respect
to magnetic field strength, refer to Fig. 1.3.1.
1-2 Q1E-EZ0475
Table 1.3.1 Maximum magnetic field strength and the systems which is affected
Maximum magnetic Systems which is affected
field strength
2 mT Motor, Camera
1.5 mT Monochrome monitor
1 mT Mechanical clock, Credit card, Magnetic tape, Magnetic disk for
computer
0.5 mT Pacemaker, CT scanner
0.3 mT Ultrasound diagnostic scanner
0.1 mT Color monitor, Image Intensifier, Microscope, Scintillation camera,
CT scanner(with I.I.)
0.05 mT Emission CT
Distance from the transmitter [cm]
Fig. 1.3.1 Distance from the transmitter and Magnetic field strength
1.4 Warning
Do not use the magnetic sensor unit for the patient using any apparatus such as a
pacemaker that could be affected by magnetism.
1.5 Maintenance and checkup

1.5.1 Check before use
Before turning on the power switch, see if the power cable cover is damaged or worn out. A
damaged cable may result in electric shocks.
1-3 Q1E-EZ0475
1.5.2 Checkup while using

After turning on the power switch, see if any abnormal sound or smell is generated or not.
1.5.3 Periodical checkup
Carry out the following checkup every month.
• See if any abnormalities are found on the probe cables and connectors.
• See if any abnormalities are found on the power cable and other cables.
If any abnormality is found or it malfunctions, stop operation of the equipment, turn off the
power and disconnect the power cable from the power outlet, then contact Hitachi Service Dept.
or our authorized dealer. For the detail periodical checkup, consult with Hitachi Service Dept.
1.6 Features
(1) 3D display of black/while image and color image: A 3D image of black/while image and color
image can be reconstructed. However, some color maps cannot display a 3D image. For
details, refer to "3.3 Capture execution requirements".
(2) Opacity mode: Allows a see-through 3D image to be displayed.
(3) Transparency mode: A black/white image and color image can be displayed at the same time
as a see-through 3D image.
(4) MIP (Maximum Intensity Projection) mode: Maximum values of brightness can be
displayed as a 3D image.
(5) Multi-view: Two types of multi-views are available, i.e. 4-image view and further displaying
view including orthogonal three planes and 6-image view added with free section view and
rendering view.
(6) Cutting: Displays an image in the depths by cutting any portion of the 3D image.
(7) Patient data management: Manages 3D image files by the patient ID.
(8) Archive: Archives 3D image files in MO.
(9) Snapshot: Saves 3D images in FD or MO in the BMP, JPEG or TIFF file format.
(10) Rendering parameters per application: Display parameters which is needed to the
rendering of 3D image is prepared per application.
(11) Display-plane designating line of 3D image: In case of main software version V04 and over,
it is possible to designate a frontal plane position in displaying 3D image before capturing
the image.
1-4 Q1E-EZ0475
Chapter 2 System configuration and installation
2.1 Standard components

EZU-3D2
(1) 3D software installation MO 1 piece
(2) Instruction Manual (Japanese/English) 1 set each
EZU-3D2S
(1) Magnetic sensor unit 1 piece
(2) Adapter 1 piece
(3) Transmitter Support Stand 1 set
2.2 Installation
Use this option by installing it in the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.
It has been installed in the equipment at the factory or is added to existing equipment by our
service personnel or our authorized service personnel.
WARNING
Never disassemble or modify the equipment.
2.3 Preliminary work for magnetic sensor unit

When using the Magnetic tracked capture, the magnetic sensor unit needs to be prepared.
Prepare the receiver of magnetic sensor unit (Fig. 2.3.1) and the adapter for probe used (Fig.
2.3.2), and put the adapter onto the probe to fix the receiver as shown in Fig. 2.3.3. At this
time, put the adapter onto the probe so that the hole of the adapter fits to the orientation mark
of probe.
Fig. 2.3.1 Receiver Fig. 2.3.2 Adapter
2-1 8 Q1E-EZ0475
Receiver
Orientation mark
Before mounting the receiver After mounting the receiver
Fig. 2.3.3 Mounting the Receiver to the Probe
The transmitter of magnetic sensor unit is mounted on the transmitter support stand as
shown in Fig. 2.3.4. And, locate it so that distance between the receiver and transmitter is
15~55cm.
Transmitter
Transmitter support stand
Fig. 2.3.4 Transmitter and Transmitter Support Stand
CAUTION
If the distance between the receiver and the transmitter is not 15~55cm, there is a
possibility to diagnose mistakenly.
2-2 Q1E-EZ0475
Chapter 3 Base software
Base software is the software of main system (ultrasound scanner). There is a possibility that
the figure is different by the main software version. In this section, if the figure is different,
the figures per main software version are shown.
3.1 Starting 3D mode

To run 3D functions, it is necessary to start other two applications, the base software and 3D
software. First start the base software, and then start the 3D mode on the base software.
The 3D software is started when the 3D mode is started for the first time after a start-up of
the base software. To switch from the base software to the 3D mode, select F6:”To 3D” from
the 3D Function menu, as shown in Fig. 3.1.1. To switch the other way, use the ”To 2D” icon.
When you switch from the 3D software to the base software, the latter enters the mode it was
in before it was switched to the 3D software.
Application switching
Base software 3D software
Function menu
F6: “To 3D”
3D mode
“To 2D” icon
Fig. 3.1.1 Relationship between Applications
There are two ways to start the 3D mode, depending on the function menu’s setting of
application. To change the function menu’s setting of application, use the Application Setup
menu. For details, refer to “8.3.10 Others Menu” in Chapter 8 "Application" of the
Instruction Manual of the main system.
(1) If the function menu’s setting of application is except 3D:
When the 3D mode is started for the first time, pressing the key displays a message
appears indicating that the 3D software is being initialized. Then, the image becomes black.
While this message is displayed, the keyboard is disabled. When the 3D software has been
started, the message disappears and the 3D mode is activated. When you start the 3D mode
subsequently, the message is not appeared and it is activated immediately. But, when
EZU-WS2 is executed, 3D software is shut down. Therefore, 3D software need to be
executed again.
Fig. 3.1.2 Message

Message displayed while the 3D Software is being initialized
3-1 10 Q1E-EZ0475
(2) If the function menu’s setting of application is 3D:
When the 3D mode is started for the first time, while the application is started, the
message indicating that the 3D software is being initialized is appeared. Then, the image
becomes black. While this message is displayed, the keyboard is disabled. When the 3D
software has been started, the message disappears and the 3D mode is activated. When you
start the 3D mode subsequently, the message is not appeared and it is activated
immediately. But, when EZU-WS2 is executed, 3D software is shut down. Therefore, 3D
software need to be executed again.
If the main software version is V01 and EZU-3D2 has been purchased, after you confirm
that the switch of magnetic sensor unit is STBY, please turn on the ultrasound diagnostic
scanner. If 3D software is executed, the message shown in Fig. 3.1.3 is displayed.
Fig. 3.1.3 Message Telling Connection Failure of Magnetic Sensor Unit

(In case of main software version V01)
After the switch of magnetic sensor unit is set to FLY, please press the OK button. If the
same message is displayed again due to any abnormality, the magnetic sensor is suspected
to have a trouble. In such case, press the Cancel button to enable the Untracked capture
only.
If the main software version is V02 and over and EZU-3D2S has been purchased, a
following message is displayed at a starting time of 3D software.
Fig. 3.1.4 Message for connecting to a magnetic sensor unit

unit
(In case of main software version V02 and over)
Please set the switch of magnetic sensor unit to STBY once and switch it to FLY. Then,
press OK button. If the same message is displayed again due to any abnormality, the
magnetic sensor is suspected to have a trouble. In such case, press the Cancel button to
enable the Untracked capture only.
3-2 Q1E-EZ0475
3.2 3D mode
When the 3D mode is started, the following function menu switches to the 3D Function menu.
Then, ROI for 3D image capture and trackball priority are displayed. In addition, if main
software version is V04 and over, dialog to show the time till the completion of 3D image
capture, display-plane designation line of 3D image and trackball priority are displayed.
Fig. 3.2.1 Dialog to show the time till the completion of image capture
Fig. 3.2.2 Display-

Display-plane designating line
First page
Second page
Fig. 3.2.3
3.2.3 3D Function Menu(In case of main software version V01)
First page
Second page
Fig. 3.2.4
3.2.4 3D function menu(In case of main software version V02 or V03)
V03)
First page
Second page
Fig. 3.2.5 3D function menu( In case of main software version V04 and over)
First page
F1: Capture
Starts capture (image data acquisition) for 3D image reconstruction.
F2: Tracking Mode Selection Track; Mag./Off
Switches the tracking mode (Method for acquiring image data). If you select “Mag.”,
the capture with magnetic sensor is available. Then, if you select “Off”, the capture
without magnetic sensor is available. However, if you have purchased EZU-3D2 only,
3-3 Q1E-EZ0475
only “Off” is available. In case of main software version V01, together with tracking
mode switching, parameter display of F4 and F5 is changed to defaulted values
according to the tracking mode.
F3: Capture Rate (In case of main software version V01)

Cut; On1/On2/Off (In case of main software version V04 and over)
When main software version is V01, capture rate is displayed, but it cannot be
changed. Therefore, it is displayed in gray.
When main software version is V02 or V03, it is not displayed.
When main software version is V04 and over, it is possible to change over the
arrow mark for deciding the viewing direction of display-plane designating line of
3D image and also to change over the execution/no-execution to designate
display-plane. In case of On1 and On2 the display-plane designation is executed.
By changing over On1 and On2 the arrow mark is changed over so that the
viewing direction is selected. In case of Off, the display-plane designating line is
cancelled, resulting in no designation of display-plane.
F4: Capture Extent (In case of main software version V01)

Shallow part image (In case of main software version V04 and over)
When main software version is V01, it is possible to set the extent to move the
probe in case of Untracked. The unit is mm. it is possible to set number of frames
to be captured in case of Magnetic tracked. The unit is frame. Shifting the toggle
upward, increments the value by 1. Shifting it downward, decrements the
value by 1.
When main software version is V02 or V03, this item is not displayed.
When main software version is V04 and over, it is possible not to display the
shallow part image up to the depth designated by a function menu. The range of
settable depth for this purpose is from 0 to the value set by F5. When the toggle
switch is pushed upward, the value is changed by +5mm, while it is pushed
downward, it is changed by –5mm. Initial value is 0. When 3D image mode is
finished, the set value is not stored and it returns to the initial value.
F5: Step Size (In case of main software version V01)

Deep part image (In case of main software version V04 and over)
When main software version is V01, it is possible to set the interval between the
image frame to be acquired and the next frame in case of Untracked. The unit is
mm. It is possible to set fineness of image in the direction to move the probe by the
magnification factor in case of Magnetic tracked. When using it, defaulted value 1
is recommended. 0.1~1.0 are changed in 0.05 step, 1.0~2.0 in 0.25 step and 2.0~5.0
3-4 Q1E-EZ0475
in 0.5 step. Shifting the toggle upward, increments the value. Shifting it
downward, decrements the value.
When main software version is V02 or V03, it is not displayed.
When main software version is V04 and over, it is possible not to display the deep
part image up to the depth designated by the function menu. The range of settable
depth for this purpose is from the value set by F4 to the displayed depth value.
When the toggle switch is pushed upward, the value is changed by +5mm, while it
is pushed downward, it is changed by –5mm. Initial value is 0. When 3D image
mode is finished, the set value is not stored and it returns to the initial value.
F6: To3D
Switches to the 3D software.
F7: Exit
Exits the 3D mode.
Second page
F6: Parameter
Displays the Settings menu for 3D functions. (For details, refer to 3.11 "3D Function
Setting Menu.")
NOTICE
In 3D mode, if you press key, key, key or keys which is related to the
measurement or the measurement is started, the 3D mode ends automatically. Then, in
3D mode, if EZU-WS2 is executed, 3D software is shut down.
CAUTION
In case that Tracking Mode is “Mag.”, defaulted value is recommended for Step Size. If
making Step Size larger, reconstruction time may be shorter, but 3D image may be
rough. If making Step Size smaller, 3D image may be finer, but restriction of probe scan
speed will be severer. Also reconstruction time may be longer or image capture may end
halfway.
3.3 Capture execution requirements

Capture is not available unless all of the requirements (1)~(4) shown below are satisfied. Then,
ROI for 3D image capture and trackball priority are not displayed. In addition, if main
software version is V04 and over, dialog to show the time till the completion of 3D image
capture, display-plane designation line of 3D image and trackball priority are not
displayed also.
However, switching to the 3D software is executable.
(1) Freeze is OFF.
(2) Single image display
(3) In CFI mode, in case that the application is not Cardiac, the selected color map is any map
in 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. In case that the application is Cardiac, the selected color map is any
map in 5, 6 and 7. In CFA mode, the selected color map is any map in 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6.
3-5 Q1E-EZ0475
When changing from a color map with which capture is available to that with which
capture is not available, or when capture is not available with the color map at the start of
CFM mode, a caution message (Fig. 3.3.1) appears to prompt for changing the color map.
Fig. 3.3.1 Message to Prompt for Changing

Changing Color Map
(4) 2D image is not horizontal

When the 2D image is switched to horizontal, a message is displayed to prompt for
changing probe orientation.
Fig. 3.3.2 Message to Prompt for Changing Probe Orientation
First page
Second page
Fig. 3.3.3 Function Menu with Capture Disabled(In case of main software version V01)
First page
Second page
Fig. 3.3.4 Function Menu with Capture Disabled(In case of main software version
V02 or V03)
3-6 Q1E-EZ0475
First page
Second page
Fig. 3.3.5 Function Menu with

with Capture Disabled (In case of main software version
V04 and over)
3.4 Patient information

The 3D software manages patient information and 3D image files by linking them. Therefore,
information about the ID, name, sex, date of birth of patients is transferred from the base
software to the 3D software. Since there are some differences in specifications between the
base software and 3D software, observe the following precautions when using the 3D
functions.
NOTICE
When using the 3D functions, be sure to enter patient information. For entering patient
information, refer to “4.5 Entering ID” of “Section 4 Operation” in the Instruction Manual
of the main system.
3.4.1 Necessity to enter ID of patient information
The 3D software manages 3D files using patient ID; therefore, any patient ID cannot be
changed once a 3D-image capture file is saved using the patient ID. Also, if the patient ID
changed in the base software has been already registered to the 3D software, the patient ID
cannot be changed. Table 3.4.1.1 shows summary of the above:
Table 3.4.1.1 Operation when Changing Patient ID
Does ID after Does a 3D image

change exist in managed by ID ID Operation
3D software? before change exist?
New Registers the new ID to 3D
Not exist. Not exist.
registration software.
Not (1) Displays a message to
Exists. Not exist.
changeable. confirm patient.
Not exist. Exists.
changeable. confirm selecting existing ID.
Exists. Exists.
changeable. confirm selecting existing ID.
In case of (1) in “Operation” of Table 3.4.1.1, the message listing the Patient ID, First Name,
Last Name that have already exist is displayed to confirm that this patient is to be selected.
3-7 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 3.4.1.1 Patient Confirmation Message
If pressing “Yes”, the 3D software selects this patient. If pressing “No”, a message appears
to prompt entry of new patient information. After pressing the OK button, enter new
patient information.
Fig. 3.4.1.2 Message to Prompt Entry of New Patient Information
In case of (2) in “Operation” of Table 3.4.1.1, a message appears to inform you not to be able
to modify the patient data.
Fig. 3.4.1.3 Message to Prompt You to Create New Patient Information
If image capture is performed without creating new patient information, the 3D image
captured will be managed as an image of patient ID of Date and Time (“yymmdd-hhmmss”)
automatically attached by the 3D software.
CAUTION
If entering patient information in small letters, the 3D software displays it in large
letters. If entering ID having difference only in capital letters and lower case letters,
the 3D software may display plural same ID’s expressed in large letters on the database
screen; however, image data is managed as the same ID. (After rebooting the system,
display returns to one.)
If the patient information could not be set by any factor, a message is displayed as shown in
Fig. 3.4.1.4.
3-8 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 3.4.1.4 A Message to Prompt Patient ID Selection
Also, if the 3D image file is not entered in the location of Patient ID, though both Patient
ID and Patient name are the same as those in the 3D software, or if the message shown in
Fig. 3.4.1.4 continues to appear, select Patient ID from the patient list on the database
screen of 3D software ((1) of Fig. 3.4.1.5), and return to the base software ((2) of Fig. 3.4.1.5)
to save the 3D image file in the location of Patient ID selected.
(1)
(2)
Fig. 3.4.1.5 Specifying Patient ID in 3D Software
3.4.2 Entering patient name properly (3D specific cautions)
When main software version is V03 and previous, although the base software manages only
a patient's Name, the 3D software manages the patient name by dividing it into Last Name
and First Name. Therefore, when entering a patient Name, follow (1) or (2) below to enter
the patient name.
(1) Enter a space between the first name and last name.
Enter the first name and last name in this order.
Example) Base software: JOE SMITH → 3D software Last Name: SMITH First Name:
JOE
3-9 Q1E-EZ0475
(2) Enter a comma between the first name and last name.
Enter the last name and first name in this order.
Example) Base software: SMITH, JOE → 3D software Last Name: SMITH First Name:
JOE
If no space or comma is placed between the first and last names by the base software,
the 3D software displays both the first and last names in the First Name field.
3.4.3 Restriction of characters for patient ID
In the 3D software, ¥, /, “, *, ?, <, >, |, and space cannot be used for the patient ID.
Therefore, if using any of these characters when entering the patient ID in the main
software, the 3D software transforms them to ‘-‘ to display. At this time, a message is
displayed to inform that the entered characters has been transformed when starting the
3D mode or newly creating the patient ID in the 3D mode.
Fig. 3.4.3.1 Message Informing Characters Transformed
3.4.4 Limits on the number of characters
The 3D software places limits on the number of characters that can be displayed in patient
information fields (see Table 3.4.4.1). Consequently, if the number of characters used for
patient information on the base software exceeds the upper limits placed on the number of
characters by the 3D software, the excessive characters are truncated on the 3D software.
In such case, a message is displayed informing that the 3D software can only display up to
its upper limit on the number of characters used for patient information on 3D software.
Table 3.4.4.1 Upper Limits on Number of Characters used for Patient Information on 3D
Software
Patient Name
Patient information on 3D software ID
First Name Last Name
Upper limit on number of characters 15 40 40
Fig. 3.4.4.1 Message Stating that Excessive Characters in Patient Information are Truncated
3-10 Q1E-EZ0475
3.5 Starting capture
After the 3D mode is started, ROI for 3D image capture and trackball priority are
displayed. In addition, if main software version is V04 and over, dialog to show the time till
the completion of 3D image capture, display-plane designation line of 3D image and
trackball priority are displayed. Use this ROI to define an image capture area. To start
image capture, select F1:Capture from the 3D Function menu (First page), press the USER
pedal of the foot switch (EZU-FS2), key or key in the case that setting for
capture is done. With respect to the setting foot switch, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (2-7) Foot
Switch” of “Chapter 7 Main Menu” in the Instruction Manual of the main system. With
respect to the setting key and key, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (5) Print/REC” of
“Chapter 7 Main Menu” in the Instruction Manual of the main system. When starting
capture, it beeps twice. The functions related to the ROI for 3D image capture will be
described below.
! The ROI-related functions include Resize and Move. To switch between the functions,
use the ENTER key.
! To resize or move an ROI, use the trackball.
! You can resize an ROI when a "!" mark is displayed in the lower right corner of the ROI.
Move the "!" mark to resize the ROI symmetrically in the vertical and horizontal
directions with respect to the center of the ROI.
! The capture area is inside the line. Therefore, the image on the lines are not captured.
! Two points making a line is movable on 3D ROI (including no line part) by manipulating
the trackball.
! One of two points making the line is movable. Changing over the movable point can be
done by Enter key .
! Changing over Display/No-display of line for designating the display-plane and as well
changing over display direction can be done by F3 in page 1 of 3D function menu. The
image on a line directed by arrow is displayed.
! When the position of ROI is changed, the point and line follow accordingly that change.
! When the size of ROI is changed, the position of point is changed according to the length of
edge of ROI.
3-11 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 3.5.1 ROI for capturing 3D image (In case of softwar
software
e version V03 and
previous)
Fig. 3.5.2 ROI for capturing 3D image and display-

display-plane designating line of 3D
image (In case of software version V04 and over)
In case of main software version V01: If there is any abnormality in connection with the
magnetic sensor unit when performing the Magnetic tracked capture, a message appears as
shown in Fig. 3.5.3. Check if the switch of magnetic sensor is set to FLY and the cables
are correctly connected then press the OK button.
3-12 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 3.5.3
3.5.3 Caution
Caution Message for Failed Connection with Magnetic Sensor Unit
In case of main software version V02 and over: If there is any abnormality in the magnetic
sensor unit at a time of image capture using the magnetic sensor unit, a following message
is displayed. Once set the switch of magnetic sensor unit to STBY and switch over to FLY,
then press OK button.
Fig. 3.5.4 Caution Message for Failed Connection with Magnetic Sensor Unit
(In case of main software version V
V02
02 and over)
If distance between the transmitter and receiver is out of the range (15-55cm) before
starting capture in the Magnetic tracked capture, a message appears informing that
position information is not available (Fig. 3.5.5), and starting capture is canceled.
Fig. 3.5.5 Caution Message for Magnetic Sensor to be Out of Range
You can store up to 900 MB of 3D image files in the equipment. (For the size of one file,
refer to "5.3 Image files".) If the total size of the 3D image files exceeds 900 MB after you
save 3D images, you are prompted to archive the image files to MO disks or delete them
(Fig. 3.5.6) and the 3D image capture is canceled.
Fig. 3.5.6 Message Cautioning You of Insufficient Storage Capacity before Capture
3-13 Q1E-EZ0475
CAUTION
After switching the mode, do not start image capture right away. If doing so, a correct
image may not be acquired.
NOTICE
• If the size of ROI for 3D image capture is too big, capture distance is too big, or
distance between the transmitter and receiver is out of useful range, reconstruction
time can be longer.
• Image data can be acquired also in the B-color mode; however, the reconstructed 3D
image will be black/white. If any colored 3D image is to be created, use the coloring
function in the 3D software. (Refer to [4.2.4 3D image controller, (4) Color scale].)
• Keep ECG and PCG waveform out of ROI for 3D image capture.
• If the capture become invalid during key is ON, please turn off key.
Then, please turn on the key again.
3.6 During capture
Only the toggle, toggle, key, two pedals of the foot switch (EZU-FS2),
AAA key and key are enabled in the case that setting for capture is done. With respect
to the setting foot switch, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (2-7) Foot Switch” of “Chapter 7 Main
Menu” in the Instruction Manual of the main system. With respect to the setting of key
and key, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (5) Print/REC” of “Chapter 7 Main Menu” in the
Instruction Manual of the main system. The other controls are disabled.
In case of main software version is V03 and previous, during image capture, the
remaining time is indicated in seconds until the capture completes automatically.
Fig. 3.6.1 Indication of remaining seconds
In case of main software version is V04 and over, as the image capturing progresses, the
progress bar and remaining seconds are displayed on the dialog.
Fig. 3.6.2 Progress bar and remaining seconds display
First page
Fig. 3.6.3
3.6.3 Function Menu during 3D Image Capture
3-14 Q1E-EZ0475
First page
Fig. 3.6.4 Function Menu during 3D Image Capture

(In case of main software version V02 or V03)
First page
Fig. 3.6.5 Function Menu during 3D Image Capture

(In case of main software version V04 and over)
F1: Capture (reverse video)

Finishes image capture
F7: Capture stops. If canceled after performing capture long, it may take time until
returning to the original 3D mode.
If distance between the transmitter and receiver of the magnetic sensor unit becomes out of
the range (15~55cm) during the Magnetic tracked capture, a message appears telling out of
the range (Fig. 3.6.6) and capture continues. After completing capture, a caution message
(Fig.3.6.7) appears relating to accuracy of 3D image. Press the OK button to display a
message (Fig. 3.6.8) confirming whether the image is to be saved or not regardless of the
setting.
Fig. 3.6.6 Message Telling Out of Range
Fig. 3.6.7 Caution Message for Accuracy of 3D Image
Fig. 3.6.8 Message Confirming Saving a 3D Image
If speed of moving the probe is too fast in the Magnetic tracked capture as well, a beep tone
sounds. If the beep tone sounds, slow down moving the probe.
3-15 Q1E-EZ0475
CAUTION
• When the probe runs out of the useful range of Magnetic tracked capture, correct 3D
image cannot be acquired.
• If too fast scan speed of the probe continues, the image capture can automatically
stop.
In case of main software version V01: If the magnetic sensor unit can not recognize a
position of data at a time of image capture using the magnetic sensor unit, a message
urging to make a step size larger or to make scan speed of probe slower.
Fig. 3.6.9
3.6.9 Caution message when the magnetic sensor unit can not recognize
the position of data. (In case of main software version V01)
In case of main software version V02 and over: If the magnetic sensor unit can not
recognize a position of data at a time of image capture using the magnetic sensor unit, a
message urging to make scan speed of probe slower is displayed.
Fig. 3.6.
3.6.10
10 Caution message when the magnetic sensor unit can not recognize
the position of data. (In ccase
ase of main software version V02 and over)
3-16 Q1E-EZ0475
Similarly in case of main software version V01: When 3D image data capacity is too much
so that memory capacity for reconstructing image is not enough, a message urging to make
capturing frame numbers small, or to make the step size larger or to make ROI size smaller
is displayed.
Fig. 3.6.11
3.6.11 Caution message when the memory capacity is not enough for
image reconstruction. (In case of main software version V01)
In case of main software version V01: When 3D image data capacity is too much so that
memory capacity for reconstructing image is not enough, a message urging to make ROI
size smaller is displayed.
Fig. 3.6.12
3.6.12 Caution message when the memory capacity is not enough for
image reconstruction. (In case of main software version V02 and over)
3.7 Stopping capture

There are three methods for stopping capture.
(1) If you want to complete a given capture:
The capture finishes automatically.
(2) If you want to finish a given capture when it is still in progress:
Use the toggle of the function menu (Fig. 3.6.3, Fig. 3.6.4 or Fig. 3.6.5) , key,
two pedals of the foot switch (EZU-FS2), key or in the case that setting for
capture is done. With respect to the setting foot switch, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (2-7) Foot
Switch” of “Chapter 7 Main Menu” in the Instruction Manual of the main system. With
respect to the setting key and key, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (5) Print/REC” of
“Chapter 7 Main Menu” in the Instruction Manual of the main system.
(3) If you want to cancel the current image capture:

Use the toggle of the function menu during capture.
When a capture is canceled, the captured data is deleted.
3-17 Q1E-EZ0475
CAUTION
If number of 2D image frames to reconstruct a 3D image is less than the minimum
value 20 of Capture Extent in the Magnetic tracked capture, displayed image is the
same as that by the Untracked capture. In this case, measured value obtained by the
measurement function is not correct.
3.8 Saving 3D image file

There are two methods for saving 3D image file after capture.
(1) To save data automatically after capture.
(2) To select Save/Delete on the message of Fig. 3.8.1.
Fig. 3.8.1 Message Confirming Saving a 3D Image
For details of this method, refer to 3.10 "Setting Up 3D Functions" and 3.11 "3D Function
Setting Menu."
To confirm that images have been saved, open the Database screen by 3D software and
select the patient from the patient list ((1) of Fig. 3.8.2), select the 3D image file from the
image list ((2) of Fig. 3.8.2) and push the Display icon ((3) of Fig. 3.8.2) to check if there is
the image saved in the image list. For details, refer to 4.5 “Database Screen”.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Fig. 3.8.2 Message to Check Remaining Capacity after Saving Image
You can store up to 900 MB of 3D image files in the equipment. If the total size of the 3D
image files exceeds 900 MB after you save 3D images, you are prompted to archive the
image files to MO disks or delete them (Fig. 3.8.3). To archive the image file to MO, refer to
4.5 “Database Screen”.
3-18 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 3.8.3 Message Cautioning You of Insufficient Storage Capacity after You Save Images
3.9 Exiting from 3D mode
Select the toggle (F7:Exit) from the 3D Function menu (First page) (Fig. 3.2.3, Fig 3.2.4
or Fig. 3.2.5) to return to the ordinary diagnostic screen.
3.10 Setting up 3D functions

To set up 3D functions, use the 3D Setup menu, which you can display by selecting Main Menu
→ Setup → 3D. The 3D Setup menu contains three tabs: Capture, Save, and ROI. They are
used to make settings for image capture, settings for saving 3D image file, and settings of ROI
for 3D image capture.
3.10.1 Capture settings
Fig. 3.10.1.1 Capture Parameter Setting Menu
3-19 Q1E-EZ0475
In case of main software version V01, V04 and over: An initial condition setting relating to
the image capture can be done with capture tab of 3D set up menu. The setting is
registered for every probe.
NOTICE
If the main software version is V02 or V03, the tab is not displayed.
(1) Probe
Selects a probe. Clicking the "▼" button opens a sub-window listing the probes
available for capture.
Fig. 3.10.1.2 Probe List
(2) Tracking Mode

Select the tracking mode. The tracking mode available differs according to the probe.
If you have purchased EZU-3D2 only, only Untracked is available.
(3) Capture Extent
Set the extent to move the probe in the Untracked mode. In the Magnetic tracked
mode, set number of frames to be captured.
(4) Step Size
In Untracked mode, set the interval between the image frame and the next frame to be
acquired. In the Magnetic tracked mode, set fineness of image in the direction of moving
the probe. In using, the defaulted value of 1 is recommended.
(5) Capture Direction
Specifies the direction in which the probe is moved. This indicates the direction of
probe movement in case that the user sets the orientation mark of probe to the right
side.
(6) Register
Registers the items (3) to (5) above for the combination of the currently selected probe
and tracking mode. Clicking this button displays the currently selected probe name
and tracking mode in the list of item (7) below.
3-20 Q1E-EZ0475
(7) Preset List
Displays the combinations of a registered probe name and tracking mode. If you select
a registered item from the list, you can make new settings for the selected probe and
tracking mode.
If you click the OK button after making changes to parameters, the changes are saved.
Clicking the Cancel button restores the original parameter settings.
CAUTION
In case that Tracking Mode is “Mag.”, defaulted value is recommended for Step Size. If
making Step Size larger, reconstruction time may be shorter, but 3D image may be
rough. If making Step Size smaller, 3D image may be finer, but restriction of probe scan
speed will be severer. Also reconstruction time may be longer or image capture may end
halfway.
3-21 Q1E-EZ0475
3.10.2 Settings for 3D image file
Fig. 3.10.2.1 3D Image File Save Option Setting Menu

(In case of main software version V01,
V01, V04 and over)
over)
Fig. 3.10.2.2 3D Ima

Image
ge File Save Option Setting Menu
To make settings for saving 3D image file, use the Save tab of the 3D Setup menu.
(1) Automatically save capture file and go to 3D
After completion of capture, this option saves the 3D image file and switches to the 3D
software automatically.
3-22 Q1E-EZ0475
(2) Display dialog to save capture file
After completion of image capture, this option displays a message asking you if you want
to save the 3D image file.
Fig. 3.10.2.3 Message Confirming

Confirming Saving a 3D Image
If you click the OK button after changing the setting, the change is saved. Clicking the
Cancel button restores the original setting.
3.10.3 Settings of ROI for 3D image capture
Fig. 3.10.3.1 ROI Size Setting Menu (In case of main software version V01
V01,, V04 and over)
over)
3-23 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 3.10.3.2 ROI Size Setting Menu (In case of main software version V02 or V03)
V03)
To make settings of ROI for 3D image capture, use the ROI tab of the 3D Setup menu.
(1) Width (Step 1-6)

Selects the horizontal width of the ROI from 6 steps: 1 (small) to 6 (large).
(2) Height (Step 1-6)
Selects the vertical width of the ROI from 6 steps: 1 (small) to 6 (large).
If you click the OK button after changing settings, the changes are applied. Clicking the
Cancel button restores the original settings.
3.11 3D function setting menu

The 3D setting menu, which is accessed from the Parameter function on the second page of the
3D Function menu (Fig. 3.2.3, Fig. 3.2.4 or Fig. 3.2.5), contains two tabs: Capture and Save.
They are used to change parameters temporarily. The changes in this menu are retained
until they are changed from the function menu or the 3D mode is turned off. The tabs are
used to make settings for capture and settings for saving 3D image file respectively.
3-24 Q1E-EZ0475
3.11.1 Capture settings
Fig. 3.11.1.1 Capture Parameter Setting Menu
In case of main software version V01,V04 and over: For capturing images it is necessary to
set a tracking mode, capture extent, step size and probe scanning direction. In menu of
this setting set values are maintained until the function menu is changed or the end of 3D
mode.
NOTICE
If the main software version is V02 or V03, the tab is not displayed.
(1) Probe
Displays the currently selected probe in gray.
(2) Tracking Mode

Select the tracking mode. The tracking mode available differs according to the probe.
If you have purchased EZU-3D2 only, only Untracked is available.
(3) Capture Extent
Set the extent to move the probe in the Untracked mode. In the Magnetic tracked
mode, set number of frames to be captured.
(4) Step Size
In Untracked mode, set the interval between the image frame and the next frame to be
acquired. In the Magnetic tracked mode, set fineness of image in the direction of
moving the probe. In using, the defaulted value of 1 is recommended.
(5) Capture Direction
Specifies the direction in which the probe is moved. This indicates the direction of
3-25 Q1E-EZ0475
probe movement in case that the user sets the orientation mark of probe to the right
side.
If you click the OK button after changing settings, the settings are updated. Clicking the
Cancel button restores the original settings.
3.11.2 Settings for 3D image file
Fig. 3.11.2.1 Image Data Save Option Setting Menu

(In case of main software version V01,V04
V01,V04 and over)
over)
3-26 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 3.11.2.2 Image Data Save Option Setting Menu
V03)
Use this menu to make settings for saving 3D image file.
(1) Automatically save capture file and go to 3D

After completion of capture, this option saves the 3D image file and switches to the 3D
software automatically.
(2) Display dialog to save capture file
After completion of capture, this option displays a message asking you if you want to
save the 3D image file.
Fig. 3.11.2.3 Message Confirming Saving a 3D Image
If you click the OK button after changing the setting, the change is saved. Clicking the
Cancel button restores the original setting. The new setting is applied starting from
the next image capture and is retained thereafter.
3-27 Q1E-EZ0475
3.12 Messages on 3D software
3.12.1 In case of 3D software error
If an error occurs in the 3D software while the base software screen is active, the system
displays a 3D error message together with the appropriate error number (e.g., #1), as
shown in Figure 3.12.1.1
Error number
Fig. 3.12.1.1 3D Error Message

If this happens, check the error number after # mark of the message of dialog and click the
OK button to close the dialog. Refer to Table 3.12.1.1 to perform the process after
pressing the OK button. When the system does not work normally even if performing the
process, reboot the system. If the same message appears after rebooting the system,
contact our service personnel.
Table 3.12.1.1 Processes Related to Error Number

Error # Status Process after pressing the OK button
1 ~ 13 Failed to initialize After shutting down the system, reboot the system.
21 ~ 39 Error related to patient Press the Patient key to open the Patient Menu.
information After pressing Edit button, press OK button.
41 ~ 59 Failed to start capturing After shutting down the system, reboot the system.
61 ~ 66 Failed to save image data Have a contact with the service personnel.
81 Failed to shut down Wait for completion since the 3D software is running
and the system cannot be shut down right away.
101 ~ 103 Failed to receive probe Switch to the other probe and switch to the original
data probe again.
121 Failed to switch over 3D After shutting down the system, reboot the system.
software to/from base
software
141 ~ 145 Failed to receive display Change the display depth and return to the original
depth data display depth.
161, 162 Failed to receive frame Switch over the mode and return it to the original
rate mode again.
185 ~ 188 Failed to assign to the After shutting down the system, reboot the system.
digital capture board
201 Failed to transfer image Execute the operation once performed again.
parameter
3-28 Q1E-EZ0475
3.12.2 In case of 3D software lockup
If the 3D software locks up or terminates unexpectedly. The base software displays a

message indicating that there is no response from the 3D software. If you restart the
equipment, 3D functions can be used.
Fig. 3.12.2.1 Message Indicating No Response from the 3D Software
3-29 Q1E-EZ0475
Chapter 4 3D software
4.1 Screen layout

Use icons to switch the screen. There are database screen, 2D screen, free section display
screen, rendering screen and multi-view screen in the icons for switching the screen.
Database screen Free section display screen Multi-view screen (4-view, 6-view)
2D screen Rendering screen
Fig. 4.1.1 Screen View Icons
Over the screen view icons, patient name and ID are displayed as shown in Fig. 4.1.2.
Fig. 4.1.2 Patient Name and ID
The System button is displayed at the bottom right of database screen, free section display
screen, rendering screen and multi-view screen. Press this button to display a dialog as
shown in Fig. 4.1.3.
Fig. 4.1.3 System Dialog
This system dialog allows you to confirm the version of 3D software. Press the L3Di button
to close the dialog.
4.2 Free section display screen

Press the free section display screen icon to display a screen as shown in Fig. 4.2.1. This
screen allows you to control the size, orientation and view of images and also slice a 3D image.
4-1 39 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 4.2.1 Free Section Display Screen
4.2.1 Changing image display
Press the UNDO key on 3D screen to display the menu. Press “Align Face” to display any
plane selected as a plane view. Press “Delete Face” to restore the plane selected to its
original image.
<Rotating image>
Moving the cursor to the outside of 3D image changes the shape of cursor to
allowing you to rotate the 3D image. Then operate the trackball while pressing the
ENTER key to rotate the 3D image to any desired direction.
<Displaying slice plane of image>

Moving the cursor to a plane within the 3D image changes the shape of cursor to
allowing you to move the slice plane in parallel. Then operate the trackball while
pressing the ENTER key to move the slice plane selected in parallel. To return to its
original shape, operate the trackball in the reverse direction while pressing the ENTER
key.
<Free section display>

Moving the cursor to any corner of 3D image changes the cursor to allowing you to
slice in any direction. Move the trackball while pressing the ENTER key to slice in any
direction. Then move the cursor to the center of new section, and operate the trackball
while pressing the ENTER key to move the slice having been created in parallel.
4.2.2 Moving position of 3D image
Pressing Shift key on 3D image, the cursor is changed to . In such status, moving the
trackball while pressing ENTER key allows you to move the position of 3D image. At this
time, releasing either of the Shift or ENTER key releases this function.
4-2 Q1E-EZ0475
4.2.3 Icon function
(1) View
Press this icon to display the view save dialog shown in Fig. 4.2.3.1 allowing you to
reset the view, add and delete a new view.
Resets to original view.
Displays images divided in two in parallel with the plane.
Displays images divided in two perpendicularly to the plane.
Saves the current view. Deletes the view saved.
Fig. 4.2.3.1 View Save Dialog
<Saving view>
Press the “+” (Plus) button shown in Fig. 4.2.3.1 to display the view name
registration dialog shown in Fig. 4.2.3.2. Enter the name and press the Add button
to save the current view.
Fig. 4.2.3.2 View Name Registration Dialog
<Deleting view>
Select any view to be deleted from the list and press the “-“ (Minus) button shown in
Fig. 4.2.3.1 to delete the view selected.
(2) Annotation
Pressing this icon displays the annotation menu shown in Fig. 4.2.3.3 allowing you
to display annotation.
Adds an annotation onto the 3D image (Text icon)
Adds an arrow onto the 3D image (Arrow icon)
Fig. 4.2.3.3 Annotation Menu
4-3 Q1E-EZ0475
<Adding annotation>
1. Pressing the text icon shown in Fig. 4.2.3.3 changes the cursor to that for entering
an annotation.
2. Move the cursor to any location to which an annotation is to be added and enter
any characters.
3. Press the ENTER key to determine the location.
Note that the backspace key may be used for editing, but it cannot be modified if
determining the annotation once.
<Adding an arrow>
1. Pressing the arrow icon shown in Fig. 4.2.3.3 changes the cursor to that for
entering an arrow.
2. Every time pressing the UNDO key, the direction of arrow changes clockwise.
3. Press the ENTER key to determine the location.
<Editing>
When using the annotation, measurement or cutting function, edit icons are
displayed at the right side of screen allowing you to edit any annotation,
measurement or cutting.
Clear All: Deletes all operations.
UNDO: Deletes the last operation.
REDO: Restores the last UNDO operation (Except cutting function)
Fig. 4.2.3.4
4.2.3.4 Edit Icons
(3) Measurement
This icon appears only when performing the Magnetic tracked capture. Pressing
this icon displays the measurement menu shown in Fig. 4.2.3.5 allowing you to
measure distance, angle, area and volume.
Distance measurement
Angle measurement
Area measurement
Volume measurement
Fig. 4.2.3.5 Measurement

Measurement Menu
<Measuring distance>
Press the icon and press the ENTER key at the start and end points on the image to
measure distance.
4-4 Q1E-EZ0475
<Measuring angle>
Press the icon and ENTER key at three points on the image to measure angle.
<Measuring area>
Press the icon and ENTER key on multiple points on the image to measure area.
Selected points are automatically connected to make a polygon. Double click the last
point to set it and complete measurement.
<Measuring volume>
Pressing the icon displays the volume measurement menu shown in Fig. 4.2.3.6
allowing you to measure volume.
Step in
Step out
Step size
End of volume measurement
Fig. 4.2.3.6 Volume Measurement Menu
1. Select the step size to adjust slice interval.

2. As well as area measurement, press the ENTER key around the area to be
measured.
3. Press the step in and step out to move the slice plane in the step interval being
set.
4. Repeat Step 2 and 3 to select the area to be measured and move the slice plane.
5. Continue this measurement until completing through the region you require to
measure.
6. Press the end of volume measurement icon to complete the volume measurement.
After completing measurement, press located at the upper right of screen.
4-5 Q1E-EZ0475
CAUTION
Following shows errors when performing measurement using the phantom:

• Distance measurement : less than 10%
• Angle measurement : less than 20%
• Area measurement : less than 20%
• Volume measurement : less than 30%
As for angle measurement, the error is that at 90º. If angle is smaller, error can be
bigger.
In addition, the sensitivity/accuracy available for pointing/outlining small features on
screen may vary by +/- 2 pixels, whichever is greater.
In the following cases, however, measurement error might be further bigger.
(1) If performing linear scan on the XY plane of transmitter support stand.
X
Y
(2) If performing fan scan with the probe
Depending on conditions you are using, operation method and patient body shape,
measurement error above might be bigger. Therefore, it is strongly recommended not
to use only this measurement result for diagnosis.
(4) Automatic pendulum display function

Allows you to automatically rotate the image with its axis as a center. Pressing
this icon displays the automatic pendulum display menu shown in Fig. 4.2.3.7.
Either of two icons at the left side of menu starts rotation. If pressing any part
other than this menu, the image stops rotation.
4-6 Q1E-EZ0475
Starts or ends rotation of the lateral
Starts or ends rotation of the vertical
Adjusts speed or span of rotation.
Changes speed of rotation.
Changes span of rotation.
Fig. 4.2.3.7 Automatic Pendulum Display Menu
(5) Layout
Pressing this icon displays the layout menu shown in Fig. 4.2.3.8 allowing you to
switch display/non display of orientation information, wire frame, measurement,
patient information. All layouts are displayed by default. If any image by the
Untracked capture is displayed, Measurement doesn’t appear in the menu.
Fig. 4.2.3.8 Layout Menu
(6) Memo
Pressing this icon displays the memo dialog shown in Fig. 4.2.3.9 allowing you to
enter a memo for the current 3D image. In each memo, date when entering this
dialog is recorded. Once pressing the Done button, contents will be unchangeable.
4-7 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 4.2.3.9 Memo Dialog
(7) Snapshot
Pressing this icon displays the snapshot dialog shown in Fig. 4.2.3.10 allowing you
to save the snapshot (JPEG format, TIFF format or BMP format) into FD or MO.
At this time, all annotations are saved as well. Also, if any file with the same
name exists in FD or MO, it is saved as a file with the name of “Set file
name_figure.extension”. For example, if a file with the name of Snapshot.bmp
has existed in MO, setting the file format to “BMP”, destination to “MO” and name
to “Snapshot”, creates a file with the name of Snapshot_1.bmp.
Fig. 4.2.3.10 Snapshot Dialog
(8) Change of size

Only in the image by a free hand capturing this icon is displayed. When the icon is
pressed, a following menu is displayed. By moving a slider of the menu it is
possible to change a length along scanning direction of probe in the image. A
enlarging or shortening ratio is ranging from 20% to 500%. The change of length is
performed when the slider is stopped.
4-8 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 4.2.3.11 Size changing menu
CAUTION
At a time of rendering display it may take a long time to change the length.
(9) Rotation of XYZ axis

When this icon is pressed, XYZ axis rotation menu is displayed and it is possible to
rotate the image by moving sliders. Each of sliders can rotate the image to the
direction shown by a figure at left side of the slider. The range of rotation is –180°
~ 180°and every time the arrow is pressed, the image rotates by 10°.
Fig. 4.2.3.12 XYZ axis rotation menu
4.2.4 3D image controller
The 3D image controller located at the right side of screen can be operated on the free
section display screen, rendering screen and multi-view screen.
(1) Brightness
Operating this slider changes brightness of 3D image. Move the cursor to this
icon and use the trackball to move the slider while pressing the ENTER key for
desired brightness.
(2) Contrast
Operating this slider changes contrast of image. Move the cursor to this icon and
use the trackball to move the slider while pressing the ENTER key for desired
contrast.
(3) Zoom
Use this icon to magnify or contract an image in 1.4-times intervals. Press the
“+” button to magnify the image or the “−” button to contract the image.
4-9 Q1E-EZ0475
(4) Color scale
Displays a 3D image in color. However, if rendering a color image, this function is
not effected. Press any color on this color scale to display the 3D image in the
color. Also, press the center black part of color scale to display the color bar. If
pressing any color on the color bar, the 3D image is displayed in the color. If
pressing the center black part once again, the color bar is closed.
4.3 Rendering screen

The rendering screen allows you to view an image in the 3D mode
4.3.1 Rendering image
Pressing the rendering screen icon displays the rendered image. Press the rendering
screen icon to display an image shown in Fig. 4.3.1.1. At this time, cutting function and
rendering function are become effective. However, measurement is not available.
Fig. 4.3.1.1 3D Rendering Screen
4.3.2 Rendering technique
The rendering screen does not express ultrasound image data superficially, but express it
with its feature enhanced. The following three rendering techniques are available:
• MIP (Maximum Intensity Projection)
• Opacity mode
• Transparency mode
<MIP mode>
The MIP mode assigns the maximum intensity of boxel in the projection direction to
each corresponding point of the display screen. This function is effective to visualize
maximum flow, skeletal structure and blood vessel structure.
4-10 Q1E-EZ0475
<Opacity mode>
The opacity mode displays a see-through image with soft tissue, bones and so on
enhanced. However, it cannot be used for a color image. This function is especially
effective to visualize soft tissue (such as face of fetus).
<Transparency mode>
Transparency mode displays both black/white image and color image in a see-through
manner when displaying the color image three-dimensionally.
4.3.3 Icon function
(1) Rendering function

The rendering function displays an image three-dimensionally. Until acquainted,
use defaulted settings.
1. Press this icon to display the rendering menu shown in Fig. 4.3.3.1.
MIP switch Opacity Filter Photo-realism
Default setting Common slider Thickness Luminance

(a) Opacity mode
(b) MIP mode
Transparency switch
(c) Color image rendering mode
Transparency of color
Transparency of black/white
(d) Color image transparency mode
Fig. 4.3.3.1 Rendering Menu
4-11 Q1E-EZ0475
2. Use the common parameter change slider to adjust the parameter selected.
Default setting : Save settings for rendering.
Opacity : Use the slider to determine opacity of the structure.
Thickness : Determine thickness of the volume to be rendered.
Filter : Determine threshold to transmit only brightness below some
level.
Luminance : Determine brightness of the image.
Photo-realism : Determine how to apply shades to the image.
Transparency of color : Determine transparency of color image.
Transparency of black/white : Determine transparency of black/white image.
<MIP switch>
Pressing this icon selects the MIP mode.
<Transparency switch>
Pressing this icon selects the Transparency mode.
<Default setting>
Rendering parameters can be saved from the rendering parameter save dialog
shown in Fig. 4.3.3.2. Pressing this icon displays the rendering parameter
save dialog.
Fig. 4.3.3.2 Rendering Parameter Save Dialog
<Saving setting of parameters>

Press [+] button shown in Fig. 4.3.3.2 to display the registration dialog for setting of
parameters. Enter the name and press the Add button to save the current setting.
Fig. 4.3.3.3 Registration Dialog for setting of parameters
4-12 Q1E-EZ0475
<Deleting setting of parameters>
Select any setting to be deleted from the list and press the [−] button shown in Fig.
4.3.3.2 to delete the selected setting.
(2) Cutting function

The cutting function engraves any unnecessary area from the 3D image rendered.
Cutting the inside or outside of the area can be designated from the cutting menu shown
in Fig. 4.3.3.3.
ON/OFF Removing outside Slider to set removing depth

Removing inside
Fig. 4.3.3.3 Cutting Menu
This icon switches display/non display of cutting menu. To close the cutting
menu, select this icon again.
ON/OFF: This icon switches display/non display of the part to be engraved.
Removing inside: Pressing this icon changes the shape of cursor to the
scalpel on the 3D image. Drawing any contour on the surface of image
while pressing the ENTER key removes the part inside it.
Removing outside: Pressing this icon changes the shape of cursor to the
scalpel on the 3D image. Drawing any contour on the surface of image
while pressing the ENTER key removes the part outside it.
Slider to set removing depth: Use this slider to set removing depth when
removing the inside. For the part contoured, 100 remove full depth and 50
removes half depth.
4-13 Q1E-EZ0475
4.4 Multi-view screen
Press the multi-view icon to display a screen as shown in Fig. 4.4.1 or Fig. 4.4.2. This
allows you to review a 3D image in 4 or 6 types of views.
Combined orthogonal views
Free section view
Orthogonal views
Rendering view
Fig. 4.4.1 Multi-view Screen (6-view)
Combined orthogonal views
Orthogonal views
Fig. 4.4.2 Multi-view Screen (4-view)
<Restrictions on multi-view>
On the multi-view screen, annotation, rendering of orthogonal planes and parameters
of rendering menu cannot be changed.
4-14 Q1E-EZ0475
4.5 Database screen
Press the database icon to display a screen as shown in Fig. 4.5.1. Use this screen to manage
patient information and 3D images.
Fig. 4.5.1 Database Screen
4.5.1 Screen layout
(1) Patient list

Lists all patients by ID and Name entered.
Fig. 4.5.1.1 Patient List

(2) Image list
Lists all images of the patient selected. The following shows contents:
• Scan Date & Scan Time: Shows the date and time when the image was captured.
• Archive: Shows the status of archive. For details of archive, refer to "4.5.2 Screen
function, (4) File operation". “NA” indicates that no image archived, “A” indicates
that the image file has been archived in MO.
• Local: Shows the status of storage on HD. “Y” for existence on HD, “N” for not on
HD.
4-15 Q1E-EZ0475
Fig. 4.5.1.2 Image List
(3) Patient memo

Lists all information related to the patient. The patient
information cannot be entered, edited or deleted.
Fig. 4.5.1.3 Patient Memo
(4) Images in detail and memo

Lists details on the image and memo added to it in either of
the free section display screen or multi-view screen. The
patient information cannot be entered, edited or deleted on
this screen.
Fig. 4.5.1.4 Details and Memo
(5) Free HD space

This display in image indicates an empty capacity allowing
to save 3D images in HD. Blue space indicates the used
capacity and gray space does the usable capacity. The
capacity of HD is controlled by the main software to keep
any empty one always.
4.5.2 Screen function
(1) Changing memo

Select any patient of which memo is to be referred and press this icon to display
the patient information dialog.
(2) Delete
Select any patient to be deleted and press this icon to delete the patient from the
database and patient list. It is also possible to select plural patients with
selecting while pressing Ctrl key. However, if there is any image related to the
patient selected, the patient cannot be deleted. If there is any image related to
the patient, delete the image first. For the detail of the deletion of images, refer
to "4.5.2 Screen function, (4) File operation".
4-16 Q1E-EZ0475
(3) Patient archive
Select this icon to archive all 3D images of the patient. For details of archive,
refer to "4.5.2 Screen function, (4) File operation".
(4) File operation
Press this icon to archive, delete, import and copy images. The file operation
menu is displayed as shown in Fig. 4.5.2.1.
Fig. 4.5.2.1 File Operation Menu

<Archive>
Archive copies 3D image files into MO. Select a 3D image file to be archived and press
Archive. At this time, if MO has no label, a dialog shown in Fig. 4.5.2.2 appears.
Fig. 4.5.2.2 Label Name Entry Dialog

Enter a label name and press the OK button. After confirming that MO is mounted on
the drive, a message is displayed telling how long Archive takes (Fig. 4.5.2.3).
Fig. 4.5.2.3 Archive Confirmation Message
Press the OK button to start archiving. No other operation is available during Archive.
During Archive, a message including patient ID, file name and MO name tells that
archiving is in progress. After completing archive, a confirmation message appears
and the state of Archived of image list is changed to “A”. It is also possible to select
plural files with selecting while pressing Ctrl key.
When archived into MO, the 3D image file is not automatically deleted from HD.
Before the capacity of 3D image files is over, delete them saved in HD at times.
4-17 Q1E-EZ0475
CAUTION
If performing system shutdown during the writing to MO, data may be lost.
<Delete>
Select a 3D image file to be deleted from HD and press Delete. A message shown in
Fig. 4.5.2.4 (a) appears. When you press the Yes button, in case that the selected
image has not been archived, a message shown in Fig. 4.5.2.4 (b) is displayed. Press
the Yes button to delete the images. It is also possible to select plural files with
selecting while pressing Ctrl key.
(a) Confirming Delete 1 (b) Confirming Delete 2

Fig. 4.5.2.4 Delete Confirmation Message
If the selected image has been archived, its file name remains on the database screen,
but the 3D image file has been deleted from HD.
<Import>
If pressing Import to import images from MO to HD, or to view the image, a screen
appears in which 3D image files are listed.
Fig. 4.5.2.5 Import Screen
4-18 Q1E-EZ0475
Select a 3D image file to be imported and press the Import button. Selected 3D image
file is copied to the directory for import in HD. It is also possible to select plural files
with selecting while pressing Ctrl key.
Also select a 3D image file to be viewed and press the View button. Free section
display image of the 3D image file selected is displayed.
The imported images are not recorded in the database as well as not displayed in the
image list.
<Import List>
If pressing Import List to display the list of all 3D image files in the import directory,
images listed are displayed by the file name, date and time, patient name and ID.
Fig. 4.5.2.6 Import List Screen

3D image file in this directory can be displayed by the View button, deleted by the
Delete button and copied to MO by the Copy button. Also, pressing the title column
allows you to sort entries in the ascending or descending order.
<Copy>
Copy means to record any copy of image to MO without change to the database. Select
any 3D image file to be copied and select “Copy”. A message appears to tell how long
the copy process takes. It is also possible to select plural files with selecting while
pressing Ctrl key.
Fig. 4.5.2.7 Copy Confirmation Message

Press the OK button to start copy.
4-19 Q1E-EZ0475
CAUTION
Archive copies an image from HD to MO, and the database is changed. Therefore, if the
MO used for archive is mounted on the drive when no archived image exists in HD, you
may use the display button on the database screen to retrieve it directly from MO.
Copy takes a copy of image in MO, but no patient database is changed. Therefore, you
cannot read it directly from MO.
(5) Display icon

Select any image to be displayed and press the display icon. The free
section display screen is displayed.
(6) Search text box

Automatically searches patient information
corresponding to the characters entered into the search
text box and displays it on the patient list box. Select
any desired one from the patient list box.
4-20 Q1E-EZ0475
Chapter 5 Specification
5.1 Base software

(1) Acquisition of 3D image data
(a) Black and white image Available only for one B mode screen
(b) Color image Available only for a part of color map of color mode
(c) Initial setting of image Can be set for each probe and tracking mode
acquisition parameters
5.2 3D software
(1) Rendering
(a) Black and white image Opacity mode, MIP mode
(b) Color image MIP mode, Transparency mode
(c) Registration of rendering Available
parameters
(2) Others
(a) Multi-view 4-image, 6-image view including orthogonal three
planes
(b) Free section display Image rotation, slice, optional orthogonal plane
(c) Zoom function 21 steps
(d) Automatic pendulum Up/down and left/right directions, change of speed
display function and width of rotation
(e) Image management Management by patient ID
(f) Measurement function Available in case of the image which is captured with
Magnetic tracked
(g) Annotation function Characters and arrows allowed
(h) Sculpture function Available in only black and white image
(i) Size changing function With this function it is possible to change the length
of image captured in the free hand mode along the
probe scanning direction.
(j) Display-plane designation of It is possible to designate the frontal position of 3D
3D image image before capturing the image.
5-1 59 Q1E-EZ0475
5.3 Image files
(1) 3D image file
(a) Medium for archiving HD, MO
(b) Size of one 3D image file In case of untracked capture:
NTSC: About 10.0 MB under conditions of total
capturing time and default set pixel numbers 240pix
× 180pix
PAL: About 13.1 MB under conditions of total
× 212pix
In case of the magnetic sensor capture:
NTSC: About 7.8 MB under conditions of total
capturing time, probe scanning distance 20cm and
pixel numbers 240pix × 180pix
PAL: About 10.5 MB under conditions of total
× 212pix
However, the figures may vary in accordance with
brightness or pixel number.
(c) Total 3D images that can be 900MB
archived in HD
(d) DICOM transfer Not available
(2) File by Snapshot
(a) Medium for archiving MO, FD
(b) Size of bitmap file JPEG format: NTSC: about 50KB, PAL: about 100KB
TIFF format: NTSC: 678kB, PAL: 1071kB
BMP format: NTSC: 679kB, PAL: 1072kB
(c) DICOM transfer Not available
(d) Output to PC printer Not available
5.4 Condition for using magnetic sensor unit (EZU-3D2S)

(1) Range of temperature +10 ~ +35
(2) Probe EUP-C314G, EUP-C318T, EUP-C514,
EUP-C524, EUP-L53, EUP-L53S, EUP-V53W
5-2 Q1E-EZ0475
Index
Exit................................................................ 3-5
3
Exiting from 3D mode................................ 3-19
3D function setting menu.......................... 3-24
3D image controller ..................................... 4-9 F
3D mode ........................................................ 3-3 Features........................................................ 1-4
3D software............................................4-1, 5-1 Free section display screen.......................... 4-1
B I
Base software ........................................3-1, 5-1 Icon function........................................ 4-3, 4-11
Image files .................................................... 5-2

C
In case of 3D software error ...................... 3-28
Capture ......................................................... 3-3
In case of 3D software lockup.................... 3-29
Capture (reverse video) ............................. 3-15
Installation ................................................... 2-1
Capture execution requirements ................ 3-5
Introduction.................................................. 1-1
Capture settings................................3-19, 3-25
Introduction to 3D ultrasound .................... 1-1
Capture stops ............................................. 3-15
Cautions........................................................ 1-2 L
Changing image display .............................. 4-2 Limits on the number of characters ......... 3-10
Check before use .......................................... 1-3

M
Checkup while using.................................... 1-4
Maintenance and checkup........................... 1-3
Condition for using magnetic sensor unit
Messages on 3D software .......................... 3-28
(EZU-3D2S)............................................... 5-2
Moving position of 3D image....................... 4-2
D
Multi-view screen....................................... 4-14
Database screen ......................................... 4-15
N
During capture ........................................... 3-14
Necessity to enter ID of patient information
E ................................................................... 3-7
Entering patient name properly (3D specific

cautions).................................................... 3-9
Index-1 61 Q1E-EZ0475
P Screen layout.......................................4-1, 4-15
Parameter..................................................... 3-5 Setting up 3D functions............................. 3-19
Patient information ..................................... 3-7 Settings for 3D image file.................3-22, 3-26
Periodical checkup ....................................... 1-4 Settings of ROI for 3D image capture ...... 3-23
Preliminary work for magnetic sensor unit2-1 Specification ................................................. 5-1
Purpose of use .............................................. 1-1 Standard components .................................. 2-1
Starting 3D mode ......................................... 3-1

R
Starting capture ......................................... 3-11
Reconstruction of 3D image ........................ 1-1
Stopping capture ........................................ 3-17
Rendering image ........................................ 4-10
System configuration and installation ....... 2-1
Rendering screen ....................................... 4-10
Rendering technique.................................. 4-10 T
Restriction of characters for patient ID ... 3-10 Technical terms ............................................ 1-1
To3D .............................................................. 3-5

S
Tracking Mode Selection ............................. 3-3
Saving 3D image file.................................. 3-18
Scan of probe ................................................ 1-1 W
Screen function........................................... 4-16 Warning ........................................................ 1-3
Software Specified for Contrast Agents
Model EZU-CH3
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Tokyo, Japan
Q1E-EZ0468-4
Copyright  Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2001, 2003. All rights reserved.

-- NOTES TO USERS --
In combination with this EZU-CH3 - “Software Specified for Contrast Agents”, the ultrasound
system can be used more effectively in ultrasound examinations.
For correct use of this software, it is essential to thoroughly understand the functions and
operations of this equipment.
Prior to using this software, carefully read this instruction manual of the equipment.
The followings are the meanings of type of precautionary notice in the text.
Type of
precautionary Meaning (Definition)
notice
DANGER This note indicates any condition or action which, if not strictly
observed, could result in direct danger such as serious personal
injury or possible death, or serious property damage such as
total loss of equipment or fire.
WARNING This note indicates any condition or action which, if not strictly
observed, could result in indirect danger such as possible death,
serious personal injury or light or medium-degree personal
injury, or serious property damage such as total loss of
equipment or fire.
CAUTION This note indicates any condition or action which, if not strictly
observed, could result in possible danger such as partial
equipment damage or data loss of computer.
NOTICE This note indicates important precautions which are not related
to danger but are to be taken against operation, installation and
maintenance.
(1) Q1E-EZ0468
< WARNING >
1. Be sure to read and observe "Precautions in handling" stated in the instruction manual of
the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.
2. Handle a contrast agent in the way of its instruction manual. HITACHI MEDICAL
CORPORATION does not have any responsibilities for injuries caused by the misuses and
the using breaches of contrast agents.
3. Regarding the side effects by a contrast agent, inquire to its manufacturer.
4. If a subject seems unusual conditions after injecting a contrast agent, stop diagnosis and
treat appropriately as soon as possible.
5. It is likely that interaction between ultrasound acoustic pressure and contrast agents
generate cavitation. Observe within the limit of acoustic pressure not to generate
cavitation. You can control acoustic pressure by "US POWER" toggle on the main
keyboard.
(2) Q1E-EZ0468
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction......................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Purpose of Use .........................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1-1
Chapter 2 Software Components and Installation..........................................................................2-1

2.1 Standard Components.............................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Installation...............................................................................................................................2-1
2.3 Options .....................................................................................................................................2-1
Chapter 3 Keyboard Layout and Functions of Keys .......................................................................3-1

3.1 Keyboard Panel........................................................................................................................3-1
Chapter 4 Startup and Settings of System ......................................................................................4-1

4.1 Probe Connection and System Startup ..................................................................................4-1
4.2 Settings of Software.................................................................................................................4-1
Chapter 5 Operation Procedures(for High Acoustic Pressure Transmission Mode).....................5-1

5.1 General .....................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Starting contrast imaging mode......................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 Display of contrast imaging mode...................................................................................5-2
5.2 Contrast Imaging.....................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.1 Wideband Pulse Inversion and Harmonic B ..................................................................5-3
5.2.2 Power Harmonic ...............................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Transmission Mode..................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.1 Real mode..........................................................................................................................5-5
5.3.2 Monitor mode....................................................................................................................5-6
5.3.3 Multi-Shot mode ...............................................................................................................5-7
5.4 Trigger Timing .........................................................................................................................5-8
5.4.1 System clock trigger timing.............................................................................................5-8
5.4.2 ECG trigger timing (optional BIO unit EZU-EK23 is required.) .................................5-9
5.5 Cine Memory Mode................................................................................................................5-10
5.5.1 Stop at full mode ............................................................................................................5-10
5.5.2 Loop mode .......................................................................................................................5-12
5.6 Acoustic Pressure Control.....................................................................................................5-13
5.6.1 Level selection ................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.2 Level display ...................................................................................................................5-13
5.7 Stopwatch Function...............................................................................................................5-14
5.7.1 Start.................................................................................................................................5-14
5.7.2 Stop and clear .................................................................................................................5-14
5.7.3 Operation of stopwatch in a state of character entry ..................................................5-14
5.8 Multi-Step Trigger Function (MST: Multi-Step Trigger)....................................................5-15
5.8.1 Executing way of MST protocol.....................................................................................5-15
5.8.2 Display in executing MST protocol ...............................................................................5-16
(3) Q1E-EZ0468
5.8.3 Replay of cine memory ...................................................................................................5-17
5.8.4 Method to make a new MST protocol ...........................................................................5-18
5.9 Uniform Contrast Imaging Function ...................................................................................5-23
5.9.1 Start.................................................................................................................................5-23
5.9.2 Display ............................................................................................................................5-23
5.10 Application Parameter Setup ...............................................................................................5-24
5.10.1 Application parameter setup menu ........................................................................5-24
5.10.2 Menus for contrast imaging.....................................................................................5-24
Chapter 6 Operation Procedures(for Low Acoustic Pressure Transmission Mode) ......................6-1

6.1 General .....................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Starting contrast imaging mode......................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Display of contrast imaging mode...................................................................................6-1
6.2 Contrast Imaging.....................................................................................................................6-2
6.3.1 Real mode..........................................................................................................................6-2
6.3.2 Alternate mode .................................................................................................................6-3
6.3.3 Intermittent flash mode...................................................................................................6-3
6.4 Trigger Timing .........................................................................................................................6-3
6.4.1 System clock trigger timing.............................................................................................6-3
6.4.2 ECG trigger timing (optional BIO unit EZU-EK23 is required.) .................................6-4
6.5 Cine Memory Mode..................................................................................................................6-5
6.6 Acoustic Pressure Control.......................................................................................................6-5
6.7 Stopwatch Function.................................................................................................................6-5
6.8 Uniform Contrast Imaging Function .....................................................................................6-5
6.9 Application Parameter Setup .................................................................................................6-5
6.9.1 Application parameter setup menu ................................................................................6-5
6.9.2 Menus for contrast imaging.............................................................................................6-6
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................7-1
Chapter 8 EZU-CH3 Specifications..................................................................................................8-1

8.1 Available Probes.......................................................................................................................8-1
8.2 Display Mode............................................................................................................................8-1
8.4 Trigger Timing .........................................................................................................................8-2
8.5 Selection of Acoustic Pressure ................................................................................................8-2
8.6 Stopwatch.................................................................................................................................8-2
8.7 Multi-Step Trigger Mode.........................................................................................................8-2
8.8 Uniform Contrast Imaging .....................................................................................................8-2
8.9 Application ...............................................................................................................................8-3
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1
(4) Q1E-EZ0468
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of Use

By combining this software with the main ultrasound scanner unit, contrast enhanced image
is indicated more visually and the below functions specified for contrast agents - the dCHI
functions (dCHI: dynamic Contrast Harmonic Imaging) - are available. This software
corresponds to high and low acoustic transmission mode.
1.2 Features
(1) Harmonic B (HB) Mode
You can use the B mode specified for contrast agents. The images consist of harmonic
signal from contrast agent.
(2) Wideband Pulse Inversion (WPI) Mode
In contrast imaging mode, the signals from ultrasound contrast agent are received in a
wide band and are displayed with high sensitivity in B mode.
(3) Power Harmonic (PH) Mode
You can use the CFA (Color Flow Angio) mode specified for contrast agents. The images
consist of harmonic signal from contrast agent.
(4) Transmission Mode
High acoustic pressure transmission mode;
You can select monitor mode and multi-shot mode.
Low acoustic pressure transmission mode;
You can select alternate mode and intermittent flash mode.
(5) Trigger Timing Control
This function controls transmission timing of different acoustic pressure. System clock
trigger timing and ECG trigger timing (optional) are selectable.
(6) Acoustic Pressure Control
This function controls acoustic pressure.
(7) Stopwatch
This function measures the time from injection of contrast agent.
(8) Multi-Step Trigger (MST) Mode
You can make a desirable protocol for contrast imaging by combining freely an
intermittent transmission intervals and execute it.
(9) Uniform Contrast Imaging (UCI) Mode
This function uses the technology of a different aspheric focussing from the conventional
focal technique, it can generate uniform acoustic field in the body.
1-1 5 Q1E-EZ0468
(10) Application
This is a function to set various application parameters for contrast imaging mode.
Contrast-Abd-High: Abdominal application for high acoustic pressure transmission
Contrast-Abd-Low: Abdominal application for low acoustic pressure transmission
Contrast-Crd-Low: Cardiac application for low acoustic pressure transmission
1-2 Q1E-EZ0468
Chapter 2 Software Components and Installation
2.1 Standard Components

(1) EZU-CH3 (Software Specified for Contrast Agents) software ･････････････････ 1 set
(2) Instruction manual ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1 set
2.2 Installation
This software is used as built in the ultrasound scanner unit.
There are two cases to supply this unit. One is the case that this software is installed in the
ultrasound scanner unit at the factory before shipment and the other is the case that service
engineer of Hitachi or our authorized dealer installs the software in the ultrasound scanner
unit being used at user site.
<DANGER>
Do not disassemble and remodel the equipment except the service engineer trained in
the Hitachi’s specific training course.
2.3 Options
In order to use ECG trigger timing, the EZU-EK23 is required.
2-1 7 Q1E-EZ0468
Chapter 3 Keyboard Layout and Functions of Keys
3.1 Keyboard Panel
(2) (14) (13) (11) (10) (8) (9) (12) (4) (3)
(5) (7) (6) (1)
(1) FREEZE key

A displayed image is frozen.
(2) PROBE key
This key is used to change connected probes and an application. Select an available
probe for contrast imaging mode.
3-1 8 Q1E-EZ0468
(3) B mode selection key
B mode is selected.
(4) CFM mode selection key
CFM mode is turned ON / OFF.
Power Harmonic mode (specified CFA mode for contrast agents) is turned ON / OFF in
contrast imaging mode.
(5) Trackball
This is used for two-dimensional operations etc.
(6) TRACKBALL PRIORITY toggle switch
This is used to select a desired function from plural active trackball functions.
(7) ENTER key
This key works as setting or entry in measurement, main menu, etc.
This key moves the position of CFM-ROI and changes its magnification.
(8) IMAGE PROCESS key
This key is used for image processing.
(9) MODE DEPENDED key
This key displays frequently using operations in function menu.
(10) CONTRAST key
This key displays the contrast functions.
(11) US POWER toggle switch
This is used to change acoustic pressure level.
(12) FUNCTION toggle switches 1~7
(13) PREV/NEXT toggle switch
This is used to turn over a function menu.
(14) PHYSIO key
This key displays the physio functions.
3-2 Q1E-EZ0468
Chapter 4 Startup and Settings of System
4.1 Probe Connection and System Startup

For connecting probe, starting up the ultrasound scanner unit and other general procedures,
refer to the instruction manual of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.
4.2 Settings of Software

In order to operate contrast imaging mode, it is necessary to satisfy the conditions as follows.
(1) Installing EZU-CH3 software
The EZU-CH3 software is installed in the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.
(2) Selection of probe
It is selected the probe which is available to the ultrasound diagnostic scanner and
contrast imaging mode.
If the other probe is selected, it is necessary to select the appropriate probe.
(3) Selection of Application
It is selected Application which is available to contrast imaging mode.
If the other Application is selected, it is necessary to select the appropriate Application.
4-1 10 Q1E-EZ0468
Chapter 5 Operation Procedures(for High Acoustic Pressure Transmission Mode)
5.1 General
5.1.1 Starting contrast imaging mode
Contrast imaging mode can be started by the following procedure.
(1) Press key and select the Application for high acoustic pressure transmission
mode. (For details of application function, refer to section 8 in the instruction manual of
the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.)
< NOTICE >

The Application for high acoustic pressure transmission mode means the
following Application or the Application which is created by being copied and
pasted it.
•Contrast-Abd-High
(2) Press key to display the function menu related to contrast imaging mode as
follows.
Page1:
Page2:
(3) And then setting the toggle switch F1 in the function menu (Page 1) to ON (highlighted
display) starts contrast imaging mode, and the function menu changed as follows.
OFF
ON
Page1:
Page2:
5-1 11 Q1E-EZ0468
5.1.2 Display of contrast imaging mode
Window display changes in contrast imaging mode as follows.
Acoustic pressure MI Stopwatch

display in %
Mode display
Mode display Transmission frequency display of in fundamental mode or "dTHI"

display in dTHI mode changes as follows.
"dCHI-H" is displayed in Harmonic B (HB) and Power Harmonic (PH)
mode.
"dCHI-W" is displayed in Wideband Pulse Inversion (WPI) mode.
"FI" is displayed in Fundamental Image mode.
Acoustic pressure : Acoustic pressure level to the maximum value is displayed in %.
display in %
MI : Value of MI (Mechanical Index) is displayed.
Stopwatch : Measuring time is displayed.
5-2 Q1E-EZ0468
5.2 Contrast Imaging
B mode and CFA mode specified for contrast agents can be used. Contrast enhancement
method can be selected from three modes of Harmonic B, Wideband Pulse Inversion and
Power Harmonic.
5.2.1 Wideband Pulse Inversion and Harmonic B
Harmonic B
Operating the toggle switch F2 in the function menu
(Page 2), Wideband Pulse Inversion mode and
Harmonic B mode can be switched over.
2
Wideband PI
5.2.2 Power Harmonic

The following two procedures are available to start up Power Harmonic mode.
(1) Press CFM mode selection key from Harmonic B or Wideband Pulse Inversion mode to
start Power Harmonic mode.
(2) Press the toggle switch F1 on the function menu (Page 1) from CFM mode to start
Power Harmonic mode.
< NOTICE >

Only Power Harmonic mode can be used in contrast imaging as CFA.
(CFA mode displaying fundamental component cannot be used.)
5-3 Q1E-EZ0468
5.3 Transmission Mode
Real mode, Monitor mode and Multi-Shot mode are selectable.
< Real mode >
As image can be displayed in real time, this mode is suitable to observe a whole region of
pathology by moving the probe.
< Monitor mode >

The monitor image (the real-time image acquired by transmitting ultrasound with low
acoustic pressure to minimize destruction of the contrast agent) and the trigger image (the
contrast enhanced images acquired by transmitting intermittent ultrasound with high
acoustic pressure) can be observed on dual display screen.
Intermittent transmission at any desired time phase can also be observed by using manual
shot.
< Multi-Shot mode >
The image acquired with the first trigger is displayed on the left screen and multiple frames
(corresponding to the number of multi-shot) acquired after the first triggered image are
displayed as continuous images on the right screen.
The contrast enhanced and high brightness images of the first frame acquired by trigger is
displayed on the left screen, and less contrast enhanced images of the following frames are
displayed on the right screen, therefore it can objectively evaluate the contrast enhancement
images.
Real Mode
4 5
Monitor Mode Multi-Shot Mode

4
When F4 and F5 in function menu are OFF, real mode is selected, when F4 is ON
(highlighted display), monitor mode is selected and when F5 is ON (highlighted display),
multi-shot mode is selected as shown in the above figure.
5-4 Q1E-EZ0468
< NOTICE >
These transmission mode can be changed in only contrast imaging mode.
5.3.1 Real mode
By setting both F4 and F5 in the function menu (Page 1) to OFF,

OFF OFF real mode is selected as shown in the left figure.
Frame Rate High By operating the toggle switch F6 in the function menu
(Page 2), a frame rate of B images can be changed.
Frame Rate Low
Contrast Image By operating the toggle switch F7 in the function menu (Page 1),
is selected. MI level can be changed in the preset two states.
After injection of a contrast agent, decide the position of a probe

7 to observe desired image with a fundamental image. Then the
image enhanced by a contrast agent can be acquired just by
Fundamental Image changing to a contrast image.
is selected.
It is possible to preset MI levels of a fundamental image and a

contrast image in application menu (Refer to para. 5.10.2 (1))
< CAUTION >

In selecting fundamental image, B image and CFA image remains as fundamental
image and Harmonic image respectively.
5-5 Q1E-EZ0468
5.3.2 Monitor mode
The trigger image and monitor image is
displayed on the left screen and right
screen respectively.
It is possible to preset the default
Trigger Image
Trigger Image Monitor Image
Monitor Image settings of display screen single or dual,
MI levels of trigger image and monitor
image, etc. in application menu. (Refer
to para.5.10.2(2).)
OFF
By setting the toggle switch F4 in the function menu (Page 1)
to ON, monitor mode is selected. (Refer to subsection 5.3.)
4
ON
< Manual Shot >

It is possible to generate a trigger and transmit ultrasound with high acoustic pressure
at the desired time by manually operating.
Auto
By operating the toggle switch F7 in the function menu (Page 1),
manual shot mode is selected.
Manual
5-6 Q1E-EZ0468
With the manual shot mode selecting, every time the toggle
switch F6 in the function menu (Page 1) is pressed, ultrasound

6
with high acoustic pressure is transmitted once.
5.3.3 Multi-Shot mode

By setting multi-shot mode, dual image display
1 1 screen is automatically selected. The image of the
2
·· N first frame acquired by a trigger is displayed on the
left screen, while images of multiple frames
acquired by multi-shot from the first trigger are
displayed as continuous images on the right screen.
Trigger Image Trigger Image MI in multi-shot mode is same as that of monitor
mode.
By setting the toggle switch F5 in the function menu (Page 1) to

OFF
ON, multi-shot mode is selected.
ON
By operating the toggle switch F7 in the function menu

(Page 1), number of multi shots can be changed.
Number of multi shots can be selected from 15 steps of 2 to 16.
7
< CAUTION >

When the trigger error message (refer to [Chapter 7 (9)Confirmation message is
displayed]) is displayed at multi-shot mode, the images recorded in cine memory are
cleared.
5-7 Q1E-EZ0468
5.4 Trigger Timing
Imaging timing with high acoustic pressure is controlled.
Transmission timing with high acoustic pressure can be changed in system clock trigger
timing without biosignal waveform and ECG trigger timing with biosignal waveform.
5.4.1 System clock trigger timing

System clock trigger timing can be controlled in following procedures.
(1) Select intermittent transmission mode (monitor mode or multi-shot mode).
(Refer to para.5.3.2 and 5.3.3.)
PHYSIO
(2) Press key to display the physio function menu and then press the toggle switch
F5 not to display physiological signal waveform.
(3) Press CONTRAST

key to display the contrast function menu and select intermittent
transmission interval.
Intermittent transmission interval can be selected from the

following 32 steps.
Intermittent interval [sec] Selectable steps

6
0.1 ~ 1.0 (in 0.1 steps) 10
1.5 ~ 10.0 (in 0.5 steps) 18
11.0 ~ 14.0 (in 1.0 steps) 4
5-8 Q1E-EZ0468
5.4.2 ECG trigger timing (optional BIO unit EZU-EK23 is required.)
ECG trigger timing can be controlled in following procedures.
(1) Select intermittent transmission mode (monitor mode or multi-shot mode).

PHYSIO
F5 to display physiological signal waveform.
(3) Press CONTRAST

key to display the contrast function menu and select ECG trigger
interval.
ECG trigger interval can be selected from 32 steps of 1 to 32

heartbeats.
6
PHYSIO
Press key to display the physio function menu, operate
the toggle switch F2 in the physio function menu and then,
R-wave delay time can be changed (in a range from 0.00 to 2.55
2
sec.).
R-wave delay time is displayed at the upper right of the image
as follows.
R-wave delay time
< CAUTION >

R-wave delay time control for ECG trigger timing is commonly operated from the
function for ECG SYNC. (Refer to para.5.8.3 ECG synchronization in the instruction
manual of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.)
5-9 Q1E-EZ0468
5.5 Cine Memory Mode
There are two types of cine recording which are stop at full mode and loop mode in
intermittent transmission mode, and it is possible to preset in application menu. (Refer to
para.5.10.2 (2).)
< Stop at Full mode >
This mode stops image recording when the cine memory is fully used. It is effective in the
case of studying images near the timing of freeze off.
< Loop mode >

This mode continues image recording after the end of the cine memory space by returning to
the top of the cine memory.
This mode is useful to study images just before freezing.
5.5.1 Stop at full mode

The screen during cine recording in the stop at full mode is shown as follows.
Remaining time available

for cine recording
As the above figure, remaining time (or number of frames) available for cine recording is
displayed at the right bottom of the screen.
In the system clock trigger timing mode, remaining time is displayed.
In ECG trigger timing, number of remaining frames available for cine recording is
displayed.
In manual shot mode, number of remaining frames available for cine recording is
displayed.
For example,
Last: 2min. (indicates 2 min. remaining time available for cine recording.)
Last: 100 (indicates 100 remaining frames available for cine recording.)
5-10 Q1E-EZ0468
< CAUTION >
When images are recorded up to the end of the cine memory, the following message is
displayed in the area where the remaining time or frames was displayed.
CINE FULL
Any more images cannot be stored.
To record images again, perform an operation such as FREEZE ON/OFF.
The screen of cine review of the stop at full mode is shown as follows.
Cine replay No.
As the above figure, cine review No. is displayed at the right bottom of the image.
For example,
T-245; indicates the 245th trigger image from the start.
T-30; S-2 indicates the 2nd image of multi-shot acquired in the 30th trigger from
the start.
< CAUTION >

When you switch over the intermittent transmission interval and freeze an image and
replay the cine memory, the intermittent transmission interval just before freezing is
displayed on the screen.
5-11 Q1E-EZ0468
5.5.2 Loop mode
Image recording and review operation work in the same way of that for the normal cine
memory. (Refer to subsection 9.3 of the instruction manual of the ultrasound diagnostic
scanner.)
< CAUTION >

R-R out function of the image filing cannot be used in ECG trigger timing mode.
5-12 Q1E-EZ0468
5.6 Acoustic Pressure Control
This is the function to control acoustic pressure and to display MI (Mechanical Index).
Change the acoustic pressure refering to the MI value displayed on the monitor.
Use that value only as the reference of the change of acoustic pressure because the value
includes errors in the second decimal place.
5.6.1 Level selection

By using this toggle switch, acoustic pressure level can be changed.
It can be changed in 21 steps including MI = 0.00. Acoustic pressure can also be
changed in freezing state, and transmission is started with the changed acoustic
pressure immediately after freezing off.
5.6.2 Level display

MI is displayed at the upper of the screen. (Refer to 5.1.2 Display of contrast imaging
mode.)
The ratio to the maximum acoustic pressure is displayed in percentage in the area
where acoustic pressure was displayed in the fundamental mode or dTHI mode.
In the case acoustic pressure is changed after freezing, the MI display color changes to
gray indicating that the MI has been changed.
< CAUTION >

Selection of MI in 21 steps and its display on the screen is available only in contrast
imaging mode.
< CAUTION >

MI is an index of mechanical effect (such as cavitation) of ultrasound to living body.
The larger value indicates higher possibility of mechanical effect. Especially, in the
case of using ultrasound contrast agent for examination, there may be a possibility of
increasing mechanical effect due to interaction with the ultrasound contrast agent.
Therefore, operate the system with the minimum acoustic pressure.
5-13 Q1E-EZ0468
5.7 Stopwatch Function
This is the function to measure the time from injection of contrast agents.
5.7.1 Start
Pressing the toggle switch F3 in the function menu (Page 1) starts time
counting, and the display in the function menu changes to "T.Clear."
The counted time is displayed at the upper right of the screen. (Refer to
3
5.1.2 Display of contrast imaging mode.)
5.7.2 Stop and clear

In the state that "T.Clear" is displayed, press the toggle switch F3 in the
function menu to stop and initialize the timer.
At that time the display of function menu changes to "T.Start".
It is possible to preset initializing time in "Timer Start Offset" of
application parameter setup menu. (Refer to 5.10.2 Menu for contrast
imaging (1) Contrast Menu1)
< NOTICE >

If you set "Timer Start Offset" as minus, it will be easy for
you to carry out an injection of contrast media
simultaneously with a timer 00:00.
< CAUTION >

When an image is stored by the filing image function, the
counted time displayed at that time is recorded.
5.7.3 Operation of stopwatch in a state of character entry
In a state of character entry by pressing key, it is possible to start and stop

and clear the stopwatch with the toggle switch F7 in the function menu.
5-14 Q1E-EZ0468
5.8 Multi-Step Trigger Function (MST: Multi-Step Trigger)
Multi-step trigger (hereafter called MST) function is a function to make a desirable protocol
for contrast imaging by combining freely an intermittent transmission intervals and as well
to execute it. It is possible to register 8 MST protocols at the maximum and also it is possible
to combine 8 steps of intermittent transmission interval for each protocol at the maximum.
5.8.1 Executing way of MST protocol

It is possible to execute MST protocol by observing under mentioned procedures.
(1) Release a freeze by pressing .

FREEZE
(2) Put ON (highlighted display) a toggle switch F2 in the function menu to set the mode to
MST mode.
OFF
ON
(3) Click the toggle switch F7 in the function menu to start MST protocol.
5-15 Q1E-EZ0468
5.8.2 Display in executing MST protocol
In executing MST protocol a monitor display turns to a figure as shown below.
Step No. Timer

Interval Time
Upper line indicates contents of current step (in white) and lower line indicates contents
of next step (in gray).
Step No.: It indicates which step of MST protocol is being executed.

Meantime, "End" indicates the end of MST protocol.
Interval Time: It indicates an intermittent transmission interval.
Timer:
Upper line: It indicates the time passed.
Lower line: It indicates the starting time of next step.
In the step of above figure,
Upper Line:
"Step1" indicates the current step is step 1.
"0.3s" indicates the intermittent transmission interval of step 1 is a 0.3-second
interval.
"00:18" indicates 18 second has passed after injecting the contrast agents.
Lower Line:
"Step2" indicates the next step is step 2.
interval.
"00:30" indicates step 2 is started at 00:30.
5-16 Q1E-EZ0468
< CAUTION >
When an operation which involves a change of scan condition like scanning line
density, field of view angle, etc. is performed, MST protocol is interrupted and the
scan is changed to a similar one as monitor mode.
When you want to execute MST protocol again, click the toggle switch F7 in the
function menu after putting OFF (ON->OFF ).
5.8.3 Replay of cine memory

After the freeze it is possible to replay images in the cine memory. (Regarding the cine
replay refer to the instruction manual of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner[9.3 Cine
memory mode].)
Following figure shows an image in the cine replay when "a stop-at- full-mode" is
selected.
Interval Time
Step No. Cine replay No.
Timer
Step No. : It indicates that the image being displayed now is at which step of MST
protocol.
Interval Time: It indicates the intermittent transmission interval.
Cine replay No.: It indicates that the image being displayed now stands on which
number of trigger in the displayed step.
Timer: It indicates how many minutes have passed after injecting the contrast
agents.
5-17 Q1E-EZ0468
In the step of above figure,
"Step2" indicates this image is a image of step 2.
interval.
"T-245" indicates this image is the 245th trigger image of step 2.
"02:32" indicates this image has been recorded when one minute has passed after
injecting the contrast agents.
< CAUTION >

There may be an error of about 1-3 images concerning the number of images and an
error of about one second concerning time for the accuracy of a timer.
< NOTICE >

The replaying performance in loop mode is as similar with that of cine memory mode.
5.8.4 Method to make a new MST protocol

It is possible to make a new MST protocol using MST setting menu as shown in below
figure.
5-18 Q1E-EZ0468
[Displaying method of MST setting menu]
(1) Put ON (highlighted display) the toggle switch F2 in the function menu to change the
mode to MST mode.
(2) Freeze the image by pressing .

FREEZE
(3) Click the toggle switch F7 in the function menu to display MST setting menu.
[Procedures for making new MST protocol]

New MST protocol can be made by a below mentioned method.
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[5] [6]
(1) Move the cursor to unregistered portion of Protocol list [1] (just below the registered
Protocol) and press ENTER .
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
(2) Move the cursor to Protocol name [2] and press ENTER ,then enter the protocol name.
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
(3) Move the cursor to step 1 registration column [3] and press ENTER .
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
5-19 Q1E-EZ0468
(4) Move the cursor to Start time of Parameter [4] to set the start time.
Similarly move the cursor to Interval time [5] to set the interval time. (Meantime,
when "Flash" is selected in the interval time, set also image numbers. Image numbers
set here becomes flashing numbers.)
Repeat the operation described in (3) and (4) above for each step.
(5) When the setting for all steps is finished, click the End time of protocol [5] to set the
end time.
(6) Confirm set contents and click OK button [6].
< NOTICE >

It is possible to set an initial setting to intending protocol using Application
parameter setting menu.
Meantime, "Sample" is set as an initial setting in the factory shipment.
(Refer to 5.10.2 Menu for Contrast imaging.)
[Detail of MST setting menu]
(1) Protocol list
Protocol list: Registered MST protocols are displayed in a list.

You can registered 8 protocols at the maximum.
5-20 Q1E-EZ0468
Duplicate: It is possible to duplicate MST protocols.
Delete: It is possible to delete MST protocols.
(2) Items for registration
Protocol name: It is possible to enter/change the MST protocol name.

Start time: It is possible to set the start time of selected step.
Interval time: It is possible to set the intermittent transmission interval of selected
step.
Image numbers: When "Flash" is selected in the interval time, it is possible to set
flashing numbers.
(3) Contents for registration
Protocol: It displays the time, interval time and image numbers for each step.
Insert: It is possible to insert contents of one step previous into selected step.
Delete: It is possible to delete selected step.
(4) Guide to Modification
Guide to Modification: It displays the modification information.
(5) End time of protocol
End time of protocol: When End time button is clicked, it is possible to set the end
time of protocol.
(6) OK/Cancel
OK : Set contents are saved and MST setting menu is finished.

Cancel: Set contents are canceled and MST setting menu is finished.
[Modification method of MST protocol error]
In case there is an error in MST protocol, "*" mark is displayed in the protocol. Move the
cursor to the step in which "*" mark is displayed and press ENTER
, then modification
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
guide information are displayed in "Guide to Modification" window.
5-21 Q1E-EZ0468
Example
Guide to Modification Meaning

Time > 01:00 Make the time of selected step longer than one minute.
Interval time > 0.15s Set the intermittent transmission interval to more than
0.15s.
Meantime, it is not the error in the protocol, but if you intend to save more images than
recordable image numbers, "Recordable Images" are displayed with minus (-) mark.
Example
Guide to Modification Meaning

Recordable Images -68 It means that in the selected MST protocol recordable
image numbers exceed by 68.
< CAUTION >

In case "Recordable Images" are minus (-), it is impossible to record all the images
into the cine memory, even though you try to execute MST protocol.
5-22 Q1E-EZ0468
5.9 Uniform Contrast Imaging Function
Uniform contrast imaging (UCI) function uses the technology of a different aspheric
focussing from the conventional focal technique, it can generate uniform acoustic field in the
body.
5.9.1 Start
OFF By setting the toggle F6 in the function menu to ON, UCI function
is selected.
ON
5.9.2 Display
By setting UCI function, focus mark is automatically changed. Generating the almost
uniform acoustic field between arrows is shown.
The focus operation is a two-step change in UCI function.
< CAUTION >

UCI function doesn't work when you use EUP-C314G or phased array probe.
5-23 Q1E-EZ0468
5.10 Application Parameter Setup
This is to set various application parameters for contrast imaging mode.
5.10.1 Application parameter setup menu

To set parameters for contrast imaging mode, press MAINMENU key, point "Setup",
"Application", select a desired application to edit and press "Edit Data" button
sequentially. Then "Edit Application" window appers, and select "Contrast" in "Item
View." (For details of application function, refer to section 8 in the instruction manual of
5.10.2 Menus for contrast imaging

(1) Contrast Menu1
Contrast Mode Execute WPI (Harmonic B when there is no check.)

MST Mode Selection of MST mode
Select Protocol Selection of MST protocol
Observational Mode Setting of transmission mode
(Real / Monitor / Multi-Shot)
Timer Start Offset Setting of start time (-30[s]-0[s])
Real Mode
Frame Rate Setting frame rate (High / Middle / Low)
US Power Setting acoustic pressure in real mode
Contrast Image Setting acoustic pressure for contrast image
Fundamental Image Setting acoustic pressure for fundamental image
5-24 Q1E-EZ0468
(2) Contrast Menu2
Trigger Mode
Interval Time Setting intermittent transmission interval
ECG Off Setting intermittent transmission interval in ECG off
ECG On Setting intermittent transmission interval in ECG on
Monitor Mode
US Power Setting acoustic pressure in monitor mode
Trigger Image Setting acoustic pressure for trigger image
Monitor Image Setting acoustic pressure for monitor image
Initial Display Number of initial display screens in monitor mode
Trigger Timing Selection of trigger timing
Multi-Shot Setting number of multi shots
Cine
Record Mode Cine recording mode
Stop at full Mode to stop image recording when the cine memory is full
(effective in studying images near the timing of freeze off)
Loop Mode to continue image recording by returning to the top of the
cine memory when its space is full
(effective in studying images just before freezing)
Review Speed Setting cine review speed ratio in trigger mode
(Replay speed varies depending on frame rate and transmission
interval.)
5-25 Q1E-EZ0468
(3) B Menu1
Focus
Position Method to control focus setting of B mode image
Step Number of steps for focus region
High acoustic pressure transmission: 1 Step
Low acoustic pressure transmission: 1 or 2 Steps
Execute UCI Selection of UCI mode
Execute Stand Off Designates focus depth correction with the observation
coupler mounted to linear probes
Initial Focal Zone Initial focus region for each probe (F1 ~ F8)
Scan Line Density Initial setting of scan line density of B mode
Initial Gain Initial gain offset for contrast B mode
5-26 Q1E-EZ0468
(4) B Menu2
Image Status
Dynamic Range Dynamic range for B mode image (45dB ~ 80dB)
Gray Map Adjusts image quality by switching the gray map
(1 ~ 8)
Enhance Axial Setting of image enhancement in axial direction for
B mode
Enhance Lateral Setting of image enhancement in lateral direction
for B mode
AGC(Auto Gain Control) Level of reducing high brightness echo level
SCC (Scan Correlation) Level of frame interpolation in B mode image
Receiving Flitter Selection of image quality control function
Patient Depended Compensation Function to adjust parameters according to
difference by patients (1 ~ 7)
5-27 Q1E-EZ0468
(5) CFA Menu1
Color Map
Region Designates color map combination by diagnostic
region (Cardiac/Others) in CFA mode image
Cardiac Starting color map in cardiac mode (when "Cardiac"
is selected in "Region")
Others Starting color map setting for modes except cardiac
(when "Others" is selected in "Region")
PRF Repetitive frequency of doppler pulse in CFA mode
image
Priority
Frame Rate Priority is given to CFA frame rate
Sensitivity Priority is given to CFA sensitivity
Restricts PRF of CFA not to exceed the PRF set in
"Max. Operating PRF" of CFA image. Therefore CFA
sensitivity can be kept even if the position of ROI is
moved.
Scan Line Density Scan line density of CFA mode image
Initial Gain Initial gain of CFA mode
Dual CFM A function to display two CFA images
simultaneously in dual screen
Allows color map to be designated separately for
each L/R screen
5-28 Q1E-EZ0468
(6) CFA Menu2
Image Status Allows image details to be adjusted separately for CFA

mode (High / Middle / Low)
CFM Filter Level of low cut filter for removing unnecessary frequency
components to observe CFA image
(Large / Medium / Small)
Packet Size Minimum unit size to detect color information of CFA
image
A. Suppress. Level of suppressing body motion in CFA mode
Smoothing Designates smoothing level in CFA mode
Persistence Designates persistence (Color SCC) level in CFA mode
Dynamic Range Dynamic Range of CFA image (1 ~ 8)
Preference
Mode Designates method of preference of CFM or B mode image
Level Brightness level of B mode image as a referential
threshold in case of CFM image preference by executing
priority function in CFA mode
5-29 Q1E-EZ0468
Chapter 6 Operation Procedures(for Low Acoustic Pressure Transmission Mode)
6.1 General
6.1.1 Starting contrast imaging mode
Contrast imaging mode can be started by the following procedure.
(1) Press key and select the Application for low acoustic pressure transmission
mode. (For details of application function, refer to section 8 in the instruction manual of
< NOTICE >
The Application for low acoustic pressure transmission mode means the
following Applications or the Application which is created by being copied and
pasted them.
•Contrast-Adb-Low
•Contrast-Crd-Low
(2) Press key to display the function menu related to contrast imaging mode as
follows.
Page1:
Page2:
(3) And then setting the toggle switch F1 in the function menu (Page 1) to ON (highlighted
display) starts contrast imaging mode, and the function menu changed as follows.
OFF
ON
Page1:
Page2:
6.1.2 Display of contrast imaging mode

It is the same as high acoustic pressure transmission mode. (Refer to 5.1.2).
6-1 40 Q1E-EZ0468
6.2 Contrast Imaging
It is the same as high acoustic pressure transmission mode. (Refer to 5.2).

Real mode, Alternate mode and intermittent flash mode are selectable.
< Real mode >
As image can be displayed in real time, this mode is suitable to observe a whole region of
pathology by moving the probe.
< Alternate mode >

Ultrasound contrast agents and anatomy can be observed on real time.
< Intermittent flash mode >

By transmitting high acoustic pressure at a fixed interval, and destroying ultrasound
contrast agents - flash, re-plenishment can be observable.
Real Mode
2 4
Alternate Mode Intermittent Flash Mode

Real mode and alternate mode can be changed by toggle switch F2. Real mode and
intermittent flash mode can be changed by toggle switch F4.
6.3.1 Real mode

High transmission (flash) can be performed by toggle switch F5.
The number of flash can be set in the application setup menu.
(Refer to 6.9.2)
5
6-2 Q1E-EZ0468
Contrast Image Fundamental image and contrast image can be changed by
is selected. toggle switch F7. (Refer to 5.3.1)
Fundamental Image
is selected.
6.3.2 Alternate mode

Alternate mode ON and OFF can be changed by toggle switch F2.
6.3.3 Intermittent flash mode

Intermittent flash mode can be changed by toggle switch F4.
Intermittent flash timing can be changed by toggle switch F6. (Refer to 6.4, the timing of
intermittent).
6.4 Trigger Timing

Intermittent flash timing can be controlled in intermittent flash mode.
Intermittent flash timing can be selectable between system clock trigger timing (ECG OFF)
and ECG trigger timing (ECG ON).
6.4.1 System clock trigger timing

System clock trigger timing can be controlled in following procedures.
(1) Select intermittent flash mode (Refer to 6.3.3).
PHYSIO
F5 not to display physiological signal waveform.
(3) Press CONTRAST

key to display the contrast function menu and select system clock trigger
timing with toggle switch F6.
6-3 Q1E-EZ0468
System clock trigger timing can be selected among 5, 10, 15, 20
and 25 sec.
6.4.2 ECG trigger timing (optional BIO unit EZU-EK23 is required.)

ECG trigger timing can be controlled in following procedures.
(1) Select intermittent flash mode (Refer to 6.3.3).
PHYSIO
F5 to display physiological signal waveform.
(3) Press CONTRAST

key to display the contrast function menu and select ECG trigger timing
with toggle switch F6.
ECG trigger timing can be selected from 32 steps of 1 to 32

heartbeats.
6
PHYSIO
Press key to display the physio function menu, operate

the toggle switch F2 in the physio function menu and then,
R-wave delay time can be changed (in a range from 0.00 to 2.55
2
sec.).
R-wave delay time is displayed at the upper right of the image
as follows.
R-wave delay time
6-4 Q1E-EZ0468
6.5 Cine Memory Mode
Image recording and review operation work in the same way of that for the normal cine
memory. (Refer to subsection 9.3 of the instruction manual of the ultrasound diagnostic
scanner.)
< CAUTION >
-Stop at full mode can not be used in low acoustic pressure transmission mode.
-R-R out function for image filing can not be used in ECG trigger timing mode.
6.6 Acoustic Pressure Control

6.7 Stopwatch Function

6.8 Uniform Contrast Imaging Function

6.9 Application Parameter Setup

This is to set various application parameters for contrast imaging mode.
6.9.1 Application parameter setup menu

To set parameters for contrast imaging mode, press MAINMENU key, point "Setup",
"Application", select a desired application to edit and press "Edit Data" button
sequentially. Then "Edit Application" window appers, and select "Contrast" in "Item
View." (For details of application function, refer to section 8 in the instruction manual of
6-5 Q1E-EZ0468
6.9.2 Menus for contrast imaging
(1) Contrast Menu1
Contrast Mode Execute WPI (Harmonic B when there is no check.)

Observational Mode Setting of transmission mode
(Real / I. Flash / Alternate)
Timer Start Offset Setting of start time (-30[s] ~ 0[s])
Real Mode
Frame Rate Setting of frame rate (High / Middle / Low)
US Power
Contrast Image Acoustic pressure setting for contrast image
Fundamental Image Acoustic pressure setting for fundamental image
Number of Flash Number of flash setting for high acoustic pressure
6-6 Q1E-EZ0468
(2) Contrast Menu2
I. Flash Mode
ECG Off Setting for system clock trigger timing in intermittent flash
mode
ECG On Setting for ECG trigger timing in intermittent flash mode
(3) B Menu1
(4) B Menu2
(5) CFA Menu1

(6) CFA Menu2

6-7 Q1E-EZ0468
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
(1) Contrast imaging mode cannot be started.

• Make sure that the available probe to contrast imaging mode is selected.
Contrast imaging mode works only with the probes available to contrast imaging mode.
Connect and select the appropriate probe.
• Make sure that Application for contrast imaging mode is selected.
Contrast imaging mode works only with Application for contrast imaging.
(2) B/* mode (B/M, B/PW, etc.) cannot be selected.

• Make sure that contrast imaging mode is not selected.
B/* mode (B/M, B/PW, etc.) cannot be used in contrast imaging mode.
(3) Multi focussing cannot be set.

• Make sure that contrast imaging mode is not selected.
Single or dual focussing is available in contrast imaging mode.
High acoustic pressure transmission mode: 1 Step
Low acoustic pressure transmission mode: 1 or 2 Steps
(4) System clock trigger timing cannot be set.

• Make sure that monitor mode, multi-shot mode or intermittent flash mode is selected.
System clock trigger timing works only when monitor mode, multi-shot mode or
intermittent flash mode is selected in contrast imaging mode.
• Make sure that ECG display is turned off.
It is necessary to turn off ECG display to use system clock trigger timing.
(5) ECG trigger timing cannot be set.

• Make sure that monitor mode, multi-shot mode or intermittent flash mode is selected.
ECG trigger timing works only when monitor mode, multi-shot mode or intermittent
flash mode is selected in contrast imaging mode.
• Make sure that EZU-EK23 is installed in the ultrasound scanner unit.
ECG trigger timing does not work without EZU-EK23.
• Make sure that ECG display is turned on.
It is necessary to turn on ECG display to use ECG trigger timing.
7-1 47 Q1E-EZ0468
(6) Contrast imaging mode is canceled.
• Executing an application cancels contrast imaging mode.
• Changing to another probe cancels contrast imaging mode.
(7) MST mode cannot be started.

• Make sure that ECG display is turned off.
• It is necessary to turn off ECG display to start MST mode.
• Make sure that Application for contrast imaging mode is selected.
Contrast imaging mode works only with Application for contrast imaging.
• Make sure that high acoustic pressure transmission mode is selected.
MST mode doesn't work when low acoustic pressure transmission mode is selected.
(8) UCI mode cannot be started.

• Make sure that a convex type probe (except EUP-C314G) is selected.
UCI mode doesn't work when a convex type probe (except EUP-C314G) isn't selected.
(9) Confirmation message is displayed.
Cause : Scanning time for making one
ultrasound image is longer than the
intermittent transmission interval.
Remedy : Make the interval longer.
Cause : Scanning time for getting multi-shot

images is longer than the intermittent
transmission interval.
Remedy : Decrease the number of multi-shot or
make the interval longer.
Cause : The protocol error is found when MST

protocol is executed.
Remedy : If you click OK button, MST protocol is
stopped and MST setting menu is
displayed.
Modify the MST protocol in that menu.
If you click Cancel button, MST protocol
is stopped.
7-2 Q1E-EZ0468
Cause : The number of images that you want to
record is larger than the number of
recordable images.
Remedy : If you click Yes button, MST protocol is
started.
If you click No button, MST protocol is
stopped and MST setting menu is
displayed.
Cause : The protocol name isn’t set.

Remedy : Click OK button and insert the protocol
name.
Cause : There is a protocol of same name.

Remedy : Click OK button and change the protocol
name.
Cause : The end time of protocol is not set.

Remedy : Click OK and set the end time of
protocol.
Cause : "Flash" button is pressed during flash.

Remedy : Don't press "Flash" button during flash.
7-3 Q1E-EZ0468
Cause : Flash scan timing is longer than the
intermittent flash timing.
Remedy : Make the intermittent flash timing

longer.
7-4 Q1E-EZ0468
Chapter 8 EZU-CH3 Specifications
8.1 Available Probes

(1) Convex type probe 3.5MHz 40R EUP-C314G
(2) Convex type probe Wideband (5-2 MHz) 40R EUP-C514
(3) Convex type probe Wideband (5-2 MHz) 60R EUP-C516
(4) Convex type probe (for biopsy) Wideband (5-2 MHz) 40R EUP-B514
(5) Phased array probe Wideband (4-2 MHz) EUP-S50
8.2 Display Mode

(1) Harmonic B Harmonic signal from contrast agent is displayed in B
mode.
(2) Wideband Pulse Inversion Signal from contrast agent is received with wide band and
displayed in B mode.
(3) Power Harmonic Harmonic signal from contrast agent is displayed in CFA
mode.

< High acoustic pressure transmission mode >
(1) Continuous Transmission
! Real mode
(2) Intermittent Transmission
! Monitor mode Manual intermittent transmission (manual shot) is
available.
! Multi-Shot mode Number of multi-shot is selectable in 15 steps (2 ~ 16)
< Low acoustic pressure transmission mode >

(1) Continuous Transmission
! Real mode Manual high acoustic pressure transmission (flash) is
available.
(2) Intermittent Transmission
! Alternate mode
! Intermittent flash mode Intermittent high acoustic pressure transmission
(flash) is available.
8-1 51 Q1E-EZ0468
8.4 Trigger Timing
< High acoustic pressure transmission mode >
(1) System clock trigger timing 32 steps
(In monitor mode or multi-shot mode) 0.1 ~ 1.0[s] ( 0.1[s] steps)
1.5 ~ 10.0[s] ( 0.5[s] steps)
11.0 ~ 14.0[s] ( 1.0[s] steps)
(2) ECG trigger timing 32 steps (1 ~ 32 heartbeats)
(In ECG display mode)
< Low acoustic pressure transmission mode >

(1) System clock trigger timing 5 steps
(In intermittent flash mode) 5, 10, 15, 20, 25[s]
(2) ECG trigger timing 32 steps(1～32heartbeats)
(In ECG display mode)
8.5 Selection of Acoustic Pressure

21 steps (including MI: 0.0)
Possible to change MI after freezing.
8.6 Stopwatch
-00’30” ~ 59’59”
8.7 Multi-Step Trigger Mode
Possible to make a desirable protocol for contrast
imaging by combining freely an intermittent
transmission intervals and execute it.
Number of registerable protocol : Max. 8 protocols
Number of steps for each protocol : Max. 8 steps
8.8 Uniform Contrast Imaging

Focus position 2 steps
8-2 Q1E-EZ0468
8.9 Application
Parameter of various applications for contrast imaging
mode can be set.
Contrast-Abd-High:
Abdominal application for high acoustic
pressure transmission.
Contrast-Abd-Low:
Abdominal application for low acoustic
pressure transmission.
Contrast-Crd-Low:
Cardiac application for low acoustic pressure
transmission.
Please note that the specifications are subject to change without prior notice due to
improvement in function and performance of the product.
8-3 Q1E-EZ0468
Index
A I
Acoustic Pressure Control ..................5-13, 6-5 Installation ................................................... 2-1
Alternate mode............................................. 6-3 Intermittent flash mode .............................. 6-3
Application ................................................... 8-3 Introduction.................................................. 1-1
Application Parameter Setup.............5-24, 6-5
Application parameter setup menu ...5-24, 6-5 K
Available Probes........................................... 8-1 Keyboard Layout and Functions of Keys ... 3-1
Keyboard Panel ............................................ 3-1
B
B/* mode (B/M, B/PW, etc.) cannot be selected. L
................................................................... 7-1 Level display............................................... 5-13
Level selection ............................................ 5-13
C
Loop mode................................................... 5-12
Cine Memory Mode.............................5-10, 6-5
Confirmation message is displayed. ........... 7-2 M
Contrast Imaging..................................5-3, 6-2 Menus for contrast imaging ...............5-24, 6-6
Contrast imaging mode cannot be started. 7-1 Method to make a new MST protocol ....... 5-18
Contrast imaging mode is canceled. ........... 7-2 Monitor mode ............................................... 5-6
MST mode cannot be started. ..................... 7-2
D
Multi focussing cannot be set...................... 7-1
Display in executing MST protocol........... 5-16
Multi-Shot mode........................................... 5-7
Display Mode................................................ 8-1
Multi-Step Trigger Function (MST:
Display of contrast imaging mode .......5-2, 6-1 Multi-Step Trigger)................................. 5-15
Multi-Step Trigger Mode ............................. 8-2
E
ECG trigger timing ...............................5-9, 6-4 O
ECG trigger timing cannot be set............... 7-1 Operation of stopwatch in a state of character
entry ........................................................ 5-14
Executing way of MST protocol ................ 5-15
Operation Procedures(for High Acoustic
EZU-CH3 Specifications.............................. 8-1
Pressure Transmission Mode) ................. 5-1
Operation Procedures(for Low Acoustic
F Pressure Transmission Mode) ................. 6-1
Features........................................................ 1-1
Options.......................................................... 2-1
G P
General ..................................................5-1, 6-1
Power Harmonic........................................... 5-3
Probe Connection and System Startup ...... 4-1
Purpose of Use.............................................. 1-1 Stopwatch Function ............................5-14, 6-5
System clock trigger timing .................5-8, 6-3
R System clock trigger timing cannot be set. 7-1
Real mode ..............................................5-5, 6-2
Replay of cine memory............................... 5-17 T
Transmission Mode ....................... 5-4, 6-2, 8-1
S Trigger Timing............................... 5-8, 6-3, 8-2
Selection of Acoustic Pressure..................... 8-2 Troubleshooting............................................ 7-1
Settings of Software..................................... 4-1
Software Components and Installation...... 2-1 U
Standard Components ................................. 2-1 UCI mode cannot be started........................ 7-2
Start ............................................................ 5-14 Uniform Contrast Imaging.......................... 8-2
Starting contrast imaging mode ..........5-1, 6-1 Uniform Contrast Imaging Function.5-23, 6-5
Startup and Settings of System.................. 4-1
Stop and clear............................................. 5-14 W
Stop at full mode ........................................ 5-10 Wideband Pulse Inversion and Harmonic B
................................................................... 5-3
Stopwatch ..................................................... 8-2
E
DICOM Software
Model EZU-FC5, EZU-FC5P, EZU-FC5W
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Tokyo, Japan
Q1E-EZ0473-3

Preface
Thank you for purchasing the optional "DICOM Software (EZU-FC5, EZU-FC5P, EZU-FC5W) ".
By building-in this software to the DICOM Software available separately, Ultrasound Diagnostic
Scanner can be used more advantageously in ultrasound study.
In order to use this DICOM Software correctly, the most important point is to have an adequate
understanding of the contents of this Instruction Manual. Please read the Manual before using the
device.
A screen display may change with versions of ultrasound equipment.
[Term explanation]
American College of Radiology-National Electrical Manufactures Association (ACR-NEMA) Digital
Imaging and Communications v2.0, 1988.
ACR-NEMA Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM) v3.0, Final Draft, Aug,
1993.
Term:
ACR American College of Radiology
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine
FSC File-set Creator
FSU File-set Updater
MPPS Modality Performed Procedure Step
NEMA National Electrical Manufactures Association
PDU Protocol Data Unit
SCP Service Class Provider
SCU Service Class User
SOP Service Object Pair
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
UID Unique Identifier
-1- Q1E-EZ0473
Contents
Section 1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................1-1

1.1 Purpose of Use ....................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Components ........................................................................................................................1-1
1.3 Features ..............................................................................................................................1-1
Section 2 Functional explanation...................................................................................................2-1
Section 3 Method of Use .................................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Preparation .........................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Setting for DICOM communication ....................................................................................3-1
3.3 Transferring to DICOM Server...........................................................................................3-4
3.3.1 Transferring by S-WRITE key .....................................................................................3-4
3.3.2 Transferring by M-WRITE key ....................................................................................3-4
3.3.3 Transferring of saving image .......................................................................................3-6
3.3.4 Transferring from Image Filing dialog ........................................................................3-7
3.3.5 Batch transferring for every patient ...........................................................................3-7
3.4 Transferring to FD or MO...................................................................................................3-9
3.5 Printing to the DICOM Printer(Option EZU-FC5P) ..........................................................3-9
3.5.1 Setting for Print Format..............................................................................................3-9
3.5.2 Printing ...................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.6 DICOM Modality WorkList function(Option EZU-FC5W)...............................................3-16
3.6.1 Setting for Modality WorkList ...................................................................................3-16
3.6.2 Using Modality WorkList...........................................................................................3-17
3.6.3 Mobile function ..........................................................................................................3-21
3.7 Temporary save at the time of a transferring / printing error .........................................3-23
3.8 Detailed setup of DICOM communication........................................................................3-24
Section 4 Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................4-1
Section 5 Specifications ..................................................................................................................5-1
Appendix A: DICOM Conformance Statement ................................................................................ A-1
Index ......................................................................................................................................... Index-1
-2- Q1E-EZ0473
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of Use

The DICOM transferring Software EZU-FC5 transfers the freeze-frame images appearing on
the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner to a DICOM-compatible server using the DICOM 3.0
standard.
The DICOM Image Printing Software EZU-FC5P transfers the freeze-frame images
appearing on the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner to a DICOM-compatible printer using the
DICOM 3.0 standard.
The DICOM WorkList Software EZU-FC5W has the functions to get patient data from the
DICOM WorkList Server (HIS, RIS, etc.) with DICOM3.0 Standard and to send the
examination start and end notifications to the DICOM MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure
Step) server.
1.2 Components
(1) DICOM FILES ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1
(2) INSTRUCTION MANUAL ････････････････････････････････････････････････････1
Note: This option needs EZU-Pi2 network card.
1.3 Features
[1] EZU-
EZU-FC5
- Recording is digital so no deterioration of image quality.
- Transfer to a DICOM server using DICOM 3.0 standard possible.
- Transfer to the MO and FD using DICOM 3.0 standard possible.
- Transfer to the DICOM server is possible at DICOM JPEG Baseline (Lossy).
[2] EZU-
EZU-FC5P
- Print to a DICOM printer using DICOM 3.0 standard possible.
- Selectable Printing formats.
- Print to a DICOM printer by using the Print Key possible.
- Simultaneous output to a DICOM printer and server when outputting using the Print Key
possible.
- By converting Bitmap (BMP) files saved on Hard Disk or MO to DICOM format, they can
be print to the DICOM printer.
[3] EZU-
EZU-FC5W
- This software allows getting of patient data with DICOM3.0 Standard from the DICOM
WorkList Server.
- Examination start and end notifications with DICOM3.0 Standard can also be sent to the
DICOM MPPS Server.
- Patient data can be gotten with the date of examination or date within before-and-after 3
days including the examination date.
- The patient retrieve by patient ID is also possible.
1-1 3 Q1E-EZ0473
Section 2 Functional explanation
The DICOM function is explained in Table 2.1 and Fig. 2.1.
Table 2.1 The DICOM function

Function Name Contents Required option
The transfer function to a Storage The function to transfer the EZU-FC5,
DICOM server images to a DICOM server EZU-Pi2
The transfer function to a Media Storage The function to transfer a EZU-FC5
floppy disk and MO DICOM images at MO and FD
DICOM printer printing Print Management The function which prints a EZU-FC5,
function images to a DICOM printer EZU-FC5P,
EZU-Pi2
Modality WorkList function Modality WorkList The function which requires the EZU-FC5,
patient who is going to examine EZU-FC5W,
today of WorkList servers EZU-Pi2
(HIS/RIS etc.), and gets the
patient data
MPPS function MPPS The function which notifies a EZU-FC5,
examination start and end to a EZU-FC5W,
server EZU-Pi2
US device
Media MO
Storage
Modality
WorkL
WorkList MPPS Print management
TCP/IP
Ether net
Storage
HIS/RIS DICOM Server DICOM Printer
Fig. 2.1 the DICOM function
2-1 4 Q1E-EZ0473
Section 3 Method of Use
3.1 Preparation
To utilize the DICOM Software, it is necessary to set up the network on the ultrasound
scanner. A host name, an IP address, a port number, AE name, etc. should come to hand
from a network administrator first. Moreover, please request Hitachi or our authorized
service representative to set up the network.
3.2 Setting for DICOM communication

If the DICOM Server [Set Up] button in the dialog displayed by selecting Main Menu →
Setup → Image Filing is clicked, the DICOM Set up dialog is displayed as shown in Fig. 3.2-1
Input the DICOM-related setup values following the procedure given below.
Note: Even if WorkList Server and MPPS Server are same, set it respectively.
1 Setup the data of (1) ~ (11) in Fig. 3.2-1 using the information given in Table 3.2-1.
2 Having checked that there are no errors in the values setup in (1) ~ (11), click [Register]
Button "A".
3 Having checked that DICOM server AE name you have just setup (the name you input in (8))
is displayed in the AE List "B", click the (12)[OK] button.
(1) (3)
(2) (4)
(5) B
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9) <1>
(10)
(11) <2>
A
<3>
(12)
Fig. 3.2-
3.2-1 DICOM Set up dialog
3-1 5 Q1E-EZ0473
Table 3.2-
3.2-1 Setup Data
No. Information Data To Be Setup
(1) Ultrasound Device Name Setup unnecessary(Note)
(2) Ultrasound Device IP Address Setup unnecessary(Note)
(3) Ultrasound Device Sub-network Setup unnecessary(Note)
Mask
(4) SCU (Service Class User) Name Use just as it is the value input when you use DICOM
(DICOM transfer client's name ) Software. Note however that if this field is left blank,
DICOM transfer is not possible.
(5) Transfer Destination Device Input the device name of the transfer destination
Name device.
(6) Transfer Destination Device IP Input the IP address of the transfer destination device.
Address
(7) Transfer Destination Device Input the port no. of the transfer destination device.
Port No.
(8) Transfer Destination Device AE Input the AE name of the transfer destination device.
(Application Entity Title) Name
(9) Selection SOP Class UID Select either [New] or [Retire] according to the support
condition of SOP Class UID at the server side. Check
the Conformance Statement of the server and select it
referring to the Table 3.2-2.
Please set up this item, only when a DICOM server is
chosen at (10) Service List.
(10) Selection of DICOM Service Please choose a Destination Device host's service.
Information The services that can be chosen are decided by
composition of an option. For details, please look at
Table 3.2-3.
(11) Selection of Printer Setup File Having checked the name of the DICOM Printer, select
printer name from the list.
Please set up this item, only when DICOM
Printer(Grayscale) and DICOM Printer(Color) are
chosen at (10) Service List.
Note: When editing setup values, edit from the menu displayed by selecting Main Menu → Setup
→ Peripherals → Network.
Table 3.2-
3.2-2 SOP Class UID
SOP Class SOP Class UID Selection item
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage(Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3 Retire
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage(New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1 New
Ultrasound Image Storage(Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6 Retire
Ultrasound Image Storage(New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1 New
Table 3.2-
3.2-3 Service of DICOM
Destination Device Selection Service
The case of DICOM Storage Server DICOM Server
The case of DICOM Printer(Grayscale) DICOM Printer(Grayscale)
The case of DICOM Printer(Color) DICOM Printer(Color)
The case of DICOM WorkList Server Modality WorkList
The case of DICOM MPPS Server MPPS
The following table explains functions other than table 3.2-1.
3-2 Q1E-EZ0473
Table 3.2-
3.2-4 Functional explanation
No. Information The contents of operation
<1> Deletion of a registration It is used when deleting the item registered into AE list.
item Please choose an item to delete from "B" and click <1>
[delete] button.
<2> Import of a Printer Setup It is used when importing the setup file of a printer.
File
<3> [Cancel] button When you cancel all the contents of a setting, please click
not (12)[OK] but <3>[Cancel].
3-3 Q1E-EZ0473
3.3 Transferring to DICOM Server
DICOM Server requires taking the procedures of DICOM communication set up.
Please set up DICOM communication according to Section 3.2.
3.3.1 Transferring by S-
S-WRITE key
It transfers image by the S-WRITE key on a panel.
[ I ] Set up
When Main Menu → Setup → Image Filing is selected, Set Up Filing dialog is displayed. Fig.
3.3-1 is the S-WRITE assignment portion of Set Up Filing dialog. Following procedures as
mentioned below assign S-WRITE key the function to transfer image to DICOM
Server.
1 Select (1) External Device.
2 Select “DICOM” or “DICOM JPEG (Lossy)” from (2) File Format.
Note: Even if “DICOM JPEG (Lossy)” is selected, image are transferred in “DICOM” format
unless the transferring server supports “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)”.
Select either one after confirming the Conformance Statement of DICOM server.
3 As a (3) address select AE name of DICOM server set in Section 3.2.
4 Confirm contents set and click [OK] button.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Fig. 3.3-
3.3-1 Assignment to the S-
S-WRITE key
[II] Transfer
For DICOM transfer Patient ID is needed. Before starting the transfer it should be entered
without fail.
Press S-WRITE key on the panel.
Still images are transferred to DICOM server.
3.3.2 Transferring
Transferring by M-
M-WRITE key
It transfers image by the M-WRITE key on a panel.
[ I ] Set up
When Main Menu → Setup → Image Filing is selected, Set Up Filing dialog is displayed.
Fig. 3.3-2 is the M-WRITE assignment portion of Set Up Filing dialog. Following procedures
as mentioned below assign M-WRITE key the function to transfers image to DICOM
Server.
3-4 Q1E-EZ0473
1 Referring to Table 3.3-1 select proper items in (1) Mode (2) Tool (3) Number suited for the
transferring method.
2 Select either “DICOM” or “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)” from (4) File Format.
Note: Even if “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)” is selected, (data)are transferred in “DICOM” format
unless the transferring server supports “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)”.
Select either one after confirming the Conformance Statement of DICOM server.
3 (5) As a transferring destination select AE name of DICOM server set in Section 3.2.
4 Confirm contents set and click [OK] button.
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
Fig. 3.3-
3.3-2 Assignment to the M-WRITE key
Table
Table 3.3-
3.3-1 Transferring method of live image
(1)Mode (2)Tool (3)Number Transferring method
F-F out Auto Frame Number selection As same numbers of live images as selected in
(3)Number are automatically produced and
transferred.
Manual ---- You can select the starting frame and ending frame
for producing live images. After M-WRITE key is
pressed, live images are produced following to
messages.
R-R out Auto Heart rate selection From R-wave frame close to freeze frame live
images as same heart rate as selected in (3)Number
are automatically produced and transferred.
Manual ---- You can select the starting R-wave frame and
ending R-wave frame for producing live images.
After M-WRITE key is pressed, live images are
produced following to message.
ALL ---- ---- From all images stored in Cine Memory live images
are automatically produced and transferred.
[II] Transfer
without fail.
Press M-WRITE key on the panel.
Following to the transferring method described in Table 3.3-1 live images are produced are
transferred to DICOM server.
3-5 Q1E-EZ0473
3.3.3 Transferring of saving image
In case Images once saved in Hard Disk, MO and so on are in BMP format or AVI format, it
is possible to transfer them after converted into DICOM.
[ I ] Starting method of Transfer dialog

For starting transfer dialog screen there are two methods.
1 Press READ key on the panel, then Filing dialog is displayed. Select images you want
to transfer, and then click [Transfer] button.
2 Select images from Filing dialog displayed by 1. Click [Retrieve] button (Fig. 3.3-3 "A"), then
the status turns to image replay. In case of multi-display replay, select F7Transfer of the
function menu. In case of a single display replay, select F7Transfer, in second page of the
function menu.
Fig. 3.3-
3.3-3 Filing dialog
3-6 Q1E-EZ0473
[II] Transferring method
Display Transfer dialog following to the procedure described in [I] Starting method of
Transfer dialog.
Transfer images by under mentioned procedure.
1 Select DICOM server at (1) Drive.
Also it is possible to select Floppy disk and MO.
2 Select (2) File Convert and put Check mark.
3 When images in BMP format have been selected, select “DICOM” or “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)”
at (3) From BMP. If images in AVI format have been selected, select “DICOM” or “DICOM
JPEG(Lossy)” at (4) From AVI.
Note: Even if “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)” is selected, (data)are transferred in “DICOM” format
unless the transferring server supports DICOM JPEG(Lossy)”. Select either one after
confirming the Conformance Statement of DICOM server.
4 Confirm contents set and click [OK] button. Transfer images in DICOM to the designated
transferring destination.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Fig. 3.3-
3.3-4 Transfer dialog
3.3.4 Transferring from Image Filing dialog

If Main Menu → Image Filing is selected, Image Filing dialog is displayed. Here, it is
possible to change temporarily the transferring destination and file format. This address is
held until it turn off system or Setup Filing menu performs a re-setup. As a matter of
course, you can select “DICOM” and “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)”. Select the transferring
method referring to Sections 3.3.1 and 3.3.2.
It is reflected in operation of the S-WRITE key , and the M-WRITE key by
clicking the [OK] button.
3.3.5 Batch transferring for every patient

Images can be transferred for every patient. It transfers image by the End Exam key
on a panel.
The function is compatible with the ultrasound of version V04 and on.
[I] Set up
Image Filing in Main Menu / Set up is chosen and “Set up Filing” dialog is started. Please
click the [Details of filing] button of this dialog. Set Up details of filing dialog starts.
3-7 Q1E-EZ0473
Fig.3.3-5 is the Timing of Transfer portion of Set Up details of filing. Please choose "every
patient".
Fig.3.3-
Fig.3.3-5 Set Up details of filing
Please assign S-WRITE key and M-WRITE key to transferring to a DICOM

server.
Refer to “3.3.1 Transferring by S-WRITE key” and “3.3.2 Transferring by M-WRITE key” for
the assignment method.
[II] Transferring
without fail.
If S-WRITE key and M-WRITE key is pressed during Examination, the
image is temporarily saved in a hard disk.
When saving the image temporarily in a hard disk, mark is displayed on the screen
upper right.
When there is an image temporarily saved in the hard disk, an mark is displayed on
the screen upper right. When either of the following is operated, the image saved in the
hard disk temporarily is transferred.
- Pressing the End Exam key.
- [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu.
- Starting the ultrasound system

Note: When the [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu, Since a CPU power is
used for transferring, even if it inputs a character on ID information screen, it may
not be reflected immediately.
After an Examination end should press End Exam key , and should transfer an
image.
If turning off the system power when any of saved images remain, a message shown in
Fig.3.3-6 appears when starting the system. Click the [Yes] button. If transfer is to be
Fig. 3.3-
3.3-6 Forced Output Message
3-8 Q1E-EZ0473
Note1: If selecting the [No] button, saved images are deleted and they cannot be transferred.
Note2: The message of Fig. 3.3-6 is displayed when the [OK] button is clicked by Set Up Filing
dialog, with temporary image saved.
When [Yes] is chosen here, even if it changes the contents of a setting, it is transferred
on the setting conditions before change.
3.4 Transferring to FD or MO
Images in DICOM format can be saved in Floppy disc and MO. Select either FD or MO as
the transferring destination. However, it is necessary to set SCU name by DICOM Set up
dialog. (Refer to Fig. 3.2-1).
3.5 Printing to the DICOM Printer(O

Printer(Option
ption EZU-
EZU-FC5P)
DICOM Printer requires to take the procedures of Setting for DICOM communication (refer
to 3.2) and Setting for Print Format (refer to 3.5.1).
Please be sure to set up an output format on a Set Up Image Print dialog (to refer to Fig.
3.5-1) after Setting for DICOM communication (refer to Section 3.2) of DICOM. When it does
not set up, transferring to a DICOM server cannot be performed.
3.5.1 Setting for Print

Print Format
The values for the Setup Image Print dialog (refer to Fig. 3.5-1) displayed by selecting Main
Menu → Setup → Image Print must also be setup in accordance with the setup information
given below.
1 Select "DICOM printer" in "A".

2 Setup (1) (Color select printing image) following Table 3.5-1.
3 Input (2) ~ (7) following Table 3.5-2. Select B/W Printer Setup for output format for a B/W
printer and Color Printer Values for output format for a color printer.
4 Having completed setup, check the setup information then click the [OK] button.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-1 Set Up Image Print dialog
3-9 Q1E-EZ0473
Table 3.5-
3.5-1 Printer Selection for Different Color Images
Setup Values
Image Transfer Destination
B/W Image Setup Color Image Setup
When printing B/W images to a Set "Send to B/W Printer" Set "Send to Color Printer"
B/W printer and color images to
a color printer
When printing B/W images and Set "Send to B/W Printer" Set "Send to B/W Printer"
color images to a B/W printer
When printing B/W images and Set "Send to Color Printer" Set "Send to Color Printer"
color images to a color printer
Table 3.5-
3.5-2 Format Setup
No. Name Information Setup Value
Select printer Printer Selection Select only the AE name registered
(2)
in The DICOM Setup menu
(3) Film Size Film Size Selection Select film size.
(4) Image Display Format Format Selection Select output format
(5) Orientation Selection of film orientation Select film orientation.
(6) Destination Film Destination Selection Select film destination.
Time out Setup of DICOM Printer The response waiting time from a
response DICOM printer is setup after
(7) association establishment.
It can setup, when the software
version of ultrasound is after V04.
Detail Other Detail Selection By pressing this button, the set
value of magnification rate and
smoothing method can be checked.
(8) Here, do not change the text
information displayed by pressing
the button. Printing out may
possibly become impossible.
3-10 Q1E-EZ0473
3.5.2 Printing
3.5.2.1 Printing by the PRINT key
It is possible to print the images to a DICOM printer by the PRINT key .
[ I ] PRINT key
In order to print by using the PRINT Key , select Image Printer in (1) B/W Mode and
(2) Color Mode. The Print/REC key Assignment dialog(see Fig. 3.5-2) displayed by selecting
Main Menu → Setup → Print/REC.
(1)
(2)
Fig.
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-2 Print/REC
[II] Printing
1 With device in Freeze Off State, display the image you want to print on the screen and press
the Freeze Key. Alternatively, after pressing the Freeze Key, select the image you want to
print by cine replay.
2 Press the PRINT Key . By this operation, the images are temporarily saved to the hard
disk.
3 Repeat operations 1 and 2 as many times as the number of images you wish to print on one
sheet of paper. The number of images is determined by the setting value of Image Display
Format in the Setup Image Print menu of the printer.
4 When the number of accumulated images reaches the set number of sheets, printing begins
automatically.
Note 1: When printing B/W images to a B/W printer and color images to a color printer, the B/W
image and the color image are saved independently to the hard disk. It is for this reason
that printing starts automatically as described above when the number of images to be
printed on one sheet of paper is reached.
Note 2: With Report Screen etc. dialog box displays also, if the PRINT Key is pressed, the
ultrasound screen is printed.
3-11 Q1E-EZ0473
[III] Forced Printing
If any of the operations listed below is performed, the image temporarily saved to the hard
disk is printing to the printer.
- Click the [New Patient] button on the Patient Menu dialog.
End
- Press the End Exam key Exam .
- Start-up of the ultrasound device (when all images accumulated have not been printed).
1 Click the [New Patient] button on the Patient Menu dialog.
When using the Print key to output images to the printer, data of the same patient only is
outputted to the same paper. Therefore, if clicking the [New Patient] button when the
patient is changed, image print.
2 Press the End Exam key .

End
Exam
When you wish to carry out forced printing of the image temporarily saved to the hard disk,
press the End Exam key End
Exam .
3 Start-up of the ultrasound device.
If the device's power supply is turned off with the image temporarily saved to the hard disk
still remaining there, the message shown in Fig. 3.5-3 is displayed. Click [Yes] button. If
printing is to be canceled, click the [No] button of this message.
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-3 Forced Output Message
Note1: If the [No] button is selected, the accumulated images file is deleted and cannot later
be printing to the printer.
Note2: The message of Fig. 3.5-3 is displayed when the [OK] button is clicked by Set Up
Image Print dialog, with temporary image saved.
When [Yes] is chosen here, even if it changes the contents of a setting, it is printed
3-12 Q1E-EZ0473
3.5.2.2 Printing from Filing dialog
1 If the READ key is pressed, the Image Filing dialog (refer to Fig. 3.5-4) is displayed.
2 Select the number of images that you wish to print.
3 Click the [Image Print] button (refer to Fig. 3.5-4 "A").
4 The images to be printed will be positioned in the order in which you selected them and
printing will begin automatically.
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-4 Filing dialog
Note 1: If there are images accumulated by the use of the PRINT Key when you print
other images to the printer by the [Image Print] button, the message shown in Fig.
3.5-3 is displayed. If you wish to printing to the printer the images accumulated by
the PRINT key also, press the [Yes] button. If you wish to delete the images
accumulated by the PRINT Key , press the [No] button.
Note that if the [No] button is selected; the images cannot be later being printing to
the printer.
Note 2: Images in formats other than BMP format cannot be printed. If you have selected
images in formats other than BMP, the message shown in Fig. 3.5-5 is displayed.
Press the [OK] button to continue with printing processing to the printer and the
[Cancel] button to cancel printing processing to the printer. When [OK] button is
clicked, the image of other format than BMP format cannot be printed.
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-5 Printing Limitation Message
3-13 Q1E-EZ0473
3.5.2.3 Simultaneous
Simultaneous Transfer DICOM Server and Printer
When pressing the PRINT Key to printing to the printer, it is possible to printing to
the DICOM Server and DICOM printer simultaneously.
[ I ] DICOM Printer Setup
1 Carry out DICOM printer-related setup following Sub-sections 3.2, 3.5.1.
2 Allocate PRINT Key to Image Printer following Sub-section 3.5.2.1[ I ].
[II] DICOM Server Setup
1 Carry out DICOM server-related setup following Sub-sections 3.2.
2 Turn the "Simultaneous Transfer DICOM Server and Printer by Pressing Print Key" in Fig.
3.5-6 "C" check-box on.
3 Click the [OK] button. You will be returned to Set Up Filing dialog in Fig. 3.5-6.
4 Assignment S-WRITE key to transferring DICOM server following sub-section 3.3.1.
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-6 DICOM Set up dialog
[III] Transferring
Press the PRINT key
When images print to DICOM printer, simultaneous transfer DICOM server.
Note: Even when an error occurs during printing to a DICOM printer and a image is
transferred only to a DICOM server, since a simultaneous output is carried out again
to a DICOM server and a DICOM printer, the same image is sent to a DICOM server
after an error dissolution.
3.5.2.4 Batch printing for every patient

Images can be printed for every patient. It prints image by the End Exam key on a
panel.
[I] Set up
click the [Details of filing] button of this dialog. Set Up details of filing dialog starts.
Fig.3.3-7 is the Timing of Transfer portion of Set Up details of filing. Please choose "every
patient".
3-14 Q1E-EZ0473
Fig.3.5-
Fig.3.5-7 Set Up details of filing
Please assign PRINT key to Image printer.

Refer to “3.5.1 Setting for Print Format“ and “3.5.2.1[1] PRINT key” for the assignment
method
[II] Printing
If PRINT key is pressed during Examination, the image is temporarily saved in a hard
disk.
At that time, the number of present image which is saved is displayed. When saved images
are 2 and image numbers to be printed out in one paper is 6, a dialog is
displayed.
Since it can save at a hard disk exceeding the number of sheets of one paper, when saved
images are 10 and image numbers to be printed out in one paper is 6, a dialog is
displayed.
When saving the image temporarily in a hard disk, mark is displayed on the screen
upper right.
When there is an image temporarily saved in the hard disk, an mark is displayed on
the screen upper right. When either of the following is operated, the image saved in the
hard disk temporarily is printed.
- Pressing the End Exam key.
- [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu.
- Starting the ultrasound system
Note: When the [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu, since a CPU power is
used for printing, even if it inputs a character on ID information screen, it may not be
reflected immediately.
After an Examination end should press End Exam key, and should print an image.
If turning off the system power when any of saved images remain, a message shown in
Fig.3.5-8 appears when starting the system. Click the [Yes] button. If printing is to be
Fig.3.5
Fig.3.5-
.5-8 Forced Output Message
3-15 Q1E-EZ0473
Note1: If selecting the [No] button, saved images are deleted and they cannot be outputted
to the printer any more.
Note2: The message of Fig. 3.5-8 is displayed when the [OK] button is clicked by Set Up
Image Print dialog, with temporary image saved.
When [Yes] is chosen here, even if it changes the contents of a setting, it is printed
3.6 DICOM Modality WorkList function(Option EZU-

EZU-FC5W)
DICOM WorkList function requires to take the procedures of Setting for DICOM
communication (refer to 3.2) and Setting for Modality WorkList (refer to 3.6.1).
Please be sure to set up transferring server on a Set up Modality WorkList dialog (to refer to
Fig. 3.6-1) after Setting for DICOM communication (refer to Section 3.2) of DICOM. When it
does not set up, Modality WorkList function cannot be performed.
Note: Please do not edit the Patient information got from the WorkList server.
Incompatibility may happen by the server side.
Patient name has forbidden the input of a commna. When the comma is contained in
the name got from the WorkList server, a comma is eliminated at the time of edit.
3.6.1 Setting for Modality WorkList

Select Main Menu → Setup → Image Filing and click on Modality WorkList [Set Up] button
on the displayed dialog. Set Up Modality WorkList dialog show in Fig. 3.6-1 is displayed.
Referring to Table 3.6-1, Set values on this dialog. After this setting, make sure of the set
data and click on [OK] button.
(1) (3)
(4)
(2)
(5) (8)
(6)
(7)
(9)
Fig. 3.6-
3.6-1 Set up Modality WorkList dialog
3-16 Q1E-EZ0473
Table 3.6-
3.6-1 Setting Contents
No. Item Setting
(1) WorkList function ON/OFF To use WorkList function, click on the box to put a check
mark.
(2) MPPS function ON/OFF To use MPPS function, click on the box to put a check mark.
To use MMPS function, set (1) WorkList function to ON, too.
(3) Selection of WorkList Server Select the WorkList Server to be used.
(4) Selection of MPPS Server Select the MPPS server to be used.
(5) Using date as searching key To use date as searching key, click on the box to put on a
check mark.
(6) Using modality information To use modality information as searching key, click on the
as searching key box to put on a check mark.
(7) Using patient ID as retrieve To use patient ID as searching key, click on the box to put on
key a check mark.
Only the data of patient ID which is completely in
agreement with the inputted character sequence is acquired.
If "*" is inputted, reference by patient ID will not be carried
out.
(8) Setting date to get patient Today: Select this only when the patient data for today's
data examination is gotten.
Yesterday, Today and Tomorrow:
Select this when the patient data within before-and-after 3
days including today is gotten.
(9) Using AE title as searching To use AE Title as searching key, click on the box to put on a
key check mark.
It can setup, when the software version of ultrasound is
after V04.
3.6.2 Using Modality WorkList

3.6.2.1 WorkList function
Please click the [New Patient] button in Patient Menu.
Patient List dialog of Fig. 3.6-2 is displayed.
(3) (4)
(1)
(2)
(5) (6) (7)

Fig. 3.6-
3.6-2 Patient List dialog
3-17 Q1E-EZ0473
[ I ] Getting of patient d
data
ata
1 Select the desired patient on the Patient List dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-2, and click on [OK]
button (5).
The getting information on selected patient is displayed on Patient Menu.
Note: Name is displayed on Last Name box.
2 With MPPS function set to ON, the examination start notification is sent to the MPPS
server.
3 Not to select any patient data, click on [Close] button (7).
[II] Searching of patient data

1 Input the keyword in (2) on the Patient List dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-2. The range of search
changes according to the contents chosen in the item of (1).
One of the items shown below can be chosen.
All : Search by ID, Name, Accession# and Exam.typ
ID : Search by ID
Name : Search by Name
Accession# : Search by Accession#
Exam.typ : Search by Exam.typ
2 Either press Enter key on the keyboard or click on [Search] button (3). A list of only the
patient data corresponding to the keyword is displayed.
3 To display all the patient data again, click on [Show all] button (4).
When the software version of ultrasound is before V03, a reference result displays all the
images in which a keyword is contained.
(The example 2 of search)

Keyword Result of search
OKA OKADA, OKAYAMA, YAMAOKA
When the software version of ultrasound is after V04, Result of the search displays only the
image the character sequence of a keyword and whose character sequence for reference
correspond from a head. When you search the character sequence in the middle of for
reference, please put "*" into a keyword.
(The example 1 of search)

Keyword Result
Result of search
OKA OKADA, OKAYAMA
*OKA* OKADA, OKAYAMA, YAMAOKA
This search narrows down. When you research from the beginning, click the Show all
button.
3-18 Q1E-EZ0473
[III] Display of detailed patient data
To display detailed patient data gotten from WorkList Server, follow the next steps to display
the Detail Information dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-3. For contents of the items, refer to
"Appendix A: DICOM Conformance Statement".
1 Select Patient Data on Patient List Dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-2.
2 Click on [Detail Info.] button (6) shown in Fig. 3.6-2.
Detail Information dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-3 is displayed.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6-3 Detail Information dialog
By selecting Patient Detail Info. [View] (1) on Set Up Modality WorkList dialog shown in Fig.
3.6-4, the detailed information of the current patient data can also be displayed.
(2)
(1)
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6-4 Set Up Modality WorkL
WorkList dialog
3-19 Q1E-EZ0473
[IV] Display of Patient List
To display Patients List gotten from WorkList server, please select Patient List [View] (2) on
Set Up Modality WorkList dialog show in Fig. 3.6-4.
Note: When a Work List function and the printing function to PC printer are used
simultaneously, it waits for a while after clicking a [New Patient] button until it
displays Patient List.
3.6.2.2 MPPS
MPPS function
[ I ] Examination start notification
As the patient data is gotten in the procedure for Getting of patient data in 3.6.2.1, the
examination start notification for selected patient is simultaneously sent to the MPPS
Server.
[II] Examination end notification

By following the next steps when an examination is completed, the examination end
notification for examined patient is sent to the MPPS Server.
・ When gets the next patient
・ When press End Exam key
End
Exam
[A] When gets the next patient

1 Click [New Patient] button in Patient Menu. The Patient List dialog shown in Fig.
3.6-5 is displayed.
2 Select the desired patient on this dialog and click on [OK] button (1). The examination
end notification is sent to the MPPS Server.
(Simultaneously when the examination start signal described in [ I ] is sent.)
[B] When press End Exam key End

Exam
When press End Exam key End

Exam , the examination end notification for current patient is
also sent.
(1) (2)
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3-20 Q1E-EZ0473
[III]
[III] Examination discontinuation notification
1 Click [New Patient] button in Patient Menu. The Patient List dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-5 is
displayed.
2 Click on [DISCONTINUE] button (2). The examination discontinuation notification is sent
to the MPPS Server.
3.6.3 Mobile function

This function is to save a patient list obtained from a WorkList server in a hard disk and
utilize the WorkList function in offline.
3.6.3.1 Set
Set up
Press Patient key . Fig. 3.6-6 Patient Menu dialog is displayed.
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6-6 Patient Menu dialog
Click [Mobile] button in Patient Menu dialog. Fig. 3.6-7 Mobile dialog is displayed. When
you want to utilize the WorkList function in offline after saving the list in the hard disk,
make a set up following the procedure described in "[I] When a WorkList function is used
offline".
(1) (3)
(2)
(4) (5)
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6-7 Mobile dialog
3-21 Q1E-EZ0473
[ I ] When a WorkL
orkList function is used offline
1 Select [Offline] noted as (1) in the above figure.
2 Confirm that LAN cable is connected and click (3)[Update List] button. Fig. 3.6-8
Patient List dialog is displayed.
3 After confirming got data, click (6)[Close] button.
4 Click (4)[OK] button.
[II] When a WorkL

orkList function is used online
1 Confirm that LAN cable is connected and select (2)[Online].
[III] When Patient list in a hard disk is updated

1 Confirm that LAN cable is connected and click (3)[Update List] button. Fig. 3.6-8
Patient List dialog is displayed.
2 After confirming got data, click (6)[Close] button in Patient List dialog.
(6)
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6.3.2 How to use

Refer to the Instruction Manual for "3.6.2 Using Modality WorkList".
Caution: A MPPS function cannot be used offline. When accessing a MPPS function after
use offline at a MPPS server, the error of #0601~#0713 may occur. At this time,
Patient List saved at the hard disk is deleted.
Note: In case the WorkList function is used in offline, Searching key in Fig. 3.6-1 Set up
Modality WorkList dialog is effective when the list is updated. Even if the set up
of Searching key is changed, it is not effective when [New Patient] button is
clicked.
3-22 Q1E-EZ0473
3.7 Temporary
Temporary save at the time of a transferring / printing error
When an error occurs at the time of transferring or printing, a image is saved temporarily at
a hard disk.
When an error occurs at the time of transferring and printing, the message of Fig.3.7-1 is
displayed and an image is saved temporarily to a hard disk.
Fig.3.7-
Fig.3.7-1 Saved temporarily message
An image is temporarily saved at a hard disk until it clicks the [New Patient] button by
Patient Menu, or it presses END Exam key, even when "Every image (film)" is chosen by
Timing of Transfer of Set Up details of filing dialog.
Since it can save at a hard disk exceeding the number of sheets of one paper, when saved
images are 7 and image numbers to be printed out in one paper is 6, a dialog is
displayed.
Please press an END Exam key after solving the problem of transferring / printing.
Note: There is a limit in the domain saved temporarily in a hard disk. If the message of
Fig.3.7-1 is displayed, please interrupt transferring/printing and solve the problem of
an error of transferring/printing. In the case of transferring/printing without solving
the problem of an error of transferring/printing, when the domain saved temporarily
in a hard disk remains and it is set to 500MB, the message of Fig.3.7-2 is displayed.
Moreover, when the domain saved temporarily in a hard disk is lost, the message of
Fig.3.7-3 is displayed and transmission/printing becomes impossible.
Fig.3.7-
Fig.3.7-2 Limit capacity of Hard disk message
Fig.3.7-
Fig.3.7-3 No availability of a hard disk message
3-23 Q1E-EZ0473
3.8 Detailed setup of DICOM communication
A setup of the timeout at the time of DICOM communication, PDU size, etc. is possible.
click the [Details of DICOM] button of this dialog. Set Up details of DICOM dialog starts.
Please change a setup of [1] - [6] to change according to Table 3.8-1.
Having completed setup, check the setup information then click the [OK] button.
Please check the contents of a setting and click the [OK] button, after setting up.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Fig.3.8-
Fig.3.8-1 Set up details of DICOM dialog
Table 3.8-
3.8-1 Setup Data
No. Item Setting
(1) Setup of response of an The timeout of the association at the time of a
association DICOM communication start is set up. This setting
value is applied at the time of an association with
all servers, such as a DICOM server and a DICOM
printer.
(2) Setup of DICOM Server response The response waiting time from a DICOM server is
set up after association establishment.
(3) Setup of WorkList Server The response waiting time from a WorkList server
response is set up after association establishment.
(4) Setup of MPPS Server response The response waiting time from a MPPS server is
set up after association establishment.
(5) Setup of max size of 4k, 8k, 16k, and 28kB can be chosen. Transmission
PDU(Protocol Data Units) speed may improve by setting up the same value as
the maximum PDU size by the side of a server.
(6) Setup of work buffer size 4k, 8k, 16k, and 28kB can be chosen. Transmission
speed may improve by setting up the same value as
the work buffer size by the side of a server.
3-24 Q1E-EZ0473
Section 4 Troubleshooting
This section describes the solution to be taken for any trouble occurred while the DICOM Software
is used.
(1) When communicating with the DICOM Server, the error message shown in Fig. 4.1 is
displayed.
Error code
Fig. 4.1 Error Message
Cause:
Cause Any of the following cases is found.
1 The network connection is not correctly made.
2 A setting for the DICOM Server is not correctly made.
3 Settings for the ultrasound device are not correctly made.
4 SCU name is not correct.
5 The server is not powered up.
6 No spare capacity in DICOM server is reserved.
Corrective action
action: Click on OK button and follow the next corrective operation.
・ Connect the network correctly.

・ Correctly set the DICOM setup data on the DICOM Server.
・ Correctly set DICOM setup data (AE name, IP address and port No.) on the ultrasound
device
・ Correctly set SCU name.
In the case of error codes #0001 ~ #0103

・ Turn on the power to the DICOM Server.
・ Make a spare capacity in DICOM server.

・ Turn on the power to the DICOM Printer.
・ When the Setup File is modified, check again if the modified content is correct.

・ Turn on the power to the DICOM WorkList Server.

・ Turn on the power to the DICOM MPPS Server.
In the case of error codes #0014

・ Restart-up the device.
If the cause of the trouble does not correspond to any of the above cases, contact Hitachi or our
authorized service representative with the displayed error code.
4-1 29 Q1E-EZ0473
(2) When communicating with the DICOM Server, the message shown in Fig. 4.2 is displayed.
Error Code
[#0104 ~ #0106]
Fig. 4.2 Warning Message
Cause: In the case DICOM text information discords with the server at DICOM Transfer start-up.
Corrective action:
action Click the [OK] button. Inform the error code to the service person of Hitachi
Medical Corporation or its agent.
(3) Image Transfer to the DICOM printer has been carried out but printing does not take place.
Cause: The transfer destination of the B/W images and the color images may be incorrect.
Corrective action:
action Check that the transfer destination is correct and then transfer again.
(4) When acquiring the patient information from DICOM WorkList server,
server, it requires time more
than 40 seconds.
Cause: The network setting of ultrasound device does not match with the network environment
(for example, setting of DNS or WINS Server) which is currently used.
Corrective action
action: Contact with Hitachi’s service staff.
(5) The following message was displayed in DICOM Set up dialog.
Fig. 4.3 message
Cause: A case where AE name of item to be registered by DICOM Set up dialog is the same AE
name existing.
Corrective action:
action Click [OK] button and change the name of AE and push again [Register] button.
(6) The following message was displayed

displayed at the time of transferring start.
start.
Fig. 4.4 message
Cause: It was going to carry out DICOM communication, without registering a SCU name.
Corrective action:
action SCU name is required. After clicking [OK] button set the SCU name in
DICOM set up dialog and transfer again.
4-2 Q1E-EZ0473
(7) The following message was displayed at the time of transferring start.
start.
Fig. 4.5 message
Cause: It was going to carry out DICOM communication, without inputting Patient ID.
Corrective action:
action Patient ID is required. After clicking [OK] button press Patient key and input
Patient ID.
(8) The following message was displayed at the time of click [Image Print] button.
Fig. 4.6 message
Cause: Select images are BMP format and no BMP formats, and it was going to print to the
DICOM printer.
Corrective action
action: Please click the [OK] button, if only the image of a BMP format may be printed.
Please click [Cancel] button, when you cancel printing.
(9) The following message was displayed at the time of click [Image Print] button.
Fig. 4.7 message
Cause: Select images are no BMP formats, and it was going to print to the DICOM printer.
Corrective action
action: Please click [OK] button. A selection images are not printed.
(10) The following error message was displayed at the time of DICOM Work
orkList server
communication.
Fig. 4.8 Error message for get patient data
Cause: When Patient data that is in agreement with Search key is 1,000 or more.
Corrective action:
action Please click [Cancel] button. Patient Data to 1,000 is got.
In addition, it takes about 30 seconds to get Patient Data of 1,000.
4-3 Q1E-EZ0473
(11) At
At the time of searching in Patient List dialog,
dialog, tthe
he following error message was displayed.
displayed.
Fig. 4.9 The error message at the time of searching
Cause: When there is no Patient Data that is in match with a keyword.
Corrective action:
action Please click [OK] button. Please input a keyword again and start searching.
(12) The following message was displayed at the time of transferring or printing.
Fig.4-
Fig.4-10 Saved temporarily message
Cause: When an error occurs during transferring or printing.
Corrective action: A transferring image or a printing image is temporarily saved in a hard disk.
Please solve the problem of an error of transferring/printing, and press the END Exam key,
or click the [New Patient] button by Patient Menu.
Fig.4-
Fig.4-11 Limit capacity of Hard disk message
Cause: When the empty domain in the hard disk saved temporarily is set to 500MB.
Corrective
Corrective action: Please once interrupt transferring/printing, solve the problem of an error of
transferring/printing, and transferring /print the image saved temporarily in a hard disk.
4-4 Q1E-EZ0473
printing.
Fig.4-
Fig.4-12 No availability of a hard disk message
Cause: When the empty domain saved temporarily in a hard disk is lost.
Corrective action: Please once interrupt transferring/printing, solve the problem of an error of
transferring/printing, and transferring /print the image saved temporarily in a hard disk.
(15) It changed into the state where the screen of ultrasound equipment stopped during option
starting.
Cause: When a transferring error occurs during option starting, an error message is not displayed
on the front.
Corrective action: please carry out the following operations according to an option, and escape from
an error message with the [OK] button.
3D Display Software (EZU-3D2, EZU-3D2S)
:Press ENTER key.
Press the Enter key of an alpha-numeric keyboard.
WideView Software (EZU-WS2)
:Press Alt key.
Press the Enter key of an alpha-numeric keyboard.
Stress Echo Software(EZU-SE1)
:Click the [Exit] button.
4-5 Q1E-EZ0473
Section 5 Specifications
(1) Functions
[EZU-
[EZU-FC5]
Transfer to a DICOM server using DICOM 3.0 standard possible.
Transfer to the MO and FD using DICOM 3.0 standard possible.
Transfer to the DICOM server is possible at DICOM JPEG (Baseline).
[EZU-
[EZU-FC5P]
Print Service Class
Print of multiple images on one sheet of film
Simultaneous Output to DICOM printer and DICOM Server
Print to DICOM printer of Hard Disk images as well as of images transferred to MO.
Any number of Print of the same image
Printout of B/W images to a B/W printer and color images to a color printer
[EZU-
[EZU-FC5W]
Patient data can be gotten from the DICOM WorkList server.
The examination start and end notifications can be sent to the DICOM MPPS Server.
Patient data can be gotten with the examination date or date within before-and-after 3 days
including the examination date.
Patient data can be also gotten with the patient ID.
(2) Setting application title (AE name)

- Server is to be designated by the service class user.
- Any DICOM port No. can be set (default 104).
(3) DICOM image transfer format

- B/W : MONOCHROME2
- Color: RGB, YBR_FULL_422
(4) DICOM 3.0 compatibility

For compatibility with DICOM3.0, refer to "Appendix A: DICOM Conformance Statement".
5-1 34 Q1E-EZ0473
Appendix A: DICOM Conformance Statement
A1 Introduction
A1.1 Purpose of This Document
This document is DICOM Conformance Statement for software EZU-FC5, EZU-FC5P and
EZU-FC5W.
EZU-FC5 software is a service class user (SCU) for the transferring of DICOM images to a
remote DICOM Service class provider (SCP). EZU-FC5 software can store image on the
magneto-optical disk (MO disk) and Floppy Disk (FD).
EZU-FC5P software can be a service class user (SCU) for the printing of DICOM Images to a
remote DICOM SCP.
EZU-FC5W software can be a service class user (SCU) for the Modality WorkList and
Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS).
A-1 35 Q1E-EZ0473
A2 Implementation Model
The EZU-FC5 software can store the images to the DICOM server (SCP). EZU-FC5 software
can store image on the magneto-optical disk (MO disk) and Floppy Disk (FD).
EZU-FC5P software can print the image on the DICOM printer (PRINT SCP).
The EZU-FC5W software can query Modality WorkList Server and Modality Performed
Procedure Step (MPPS) Server.
A2.1 Application Data Flow Diagram

DICOM 3.0 standard format Application Entity (AE) flow is following.
EZU-FC5
Images
DICOM Images stored
store
Storage SCU on Remote
System
Image EZU-FC5P
Remote
print DICOM
basic print
Print SCU
EZU-FC5W
User Remote
Modality
Query Modality
WorkList SCU
WorkList
EZU-FC5W
Remote
User Modality Performed
Modality Performed
Query Procedure Step
Procedure Step
SCU
DICOM Standard Interface

SCP
Images
store to
media EZU-FC5 FSC
DICOM media
FSU MO or FD
Storage FSC, FSU
Images
delete in
media
Fig. A2.1-
A2.1-1 Application Data Flow Diagram
A-2 Q1E-EZ0473
A3 Application Entity Title (AE) Specifications
A3.1 Storage AE specification

The EZU-FC5 software provides the standard conformance for the following DICOM3.0
Storage SOP classes as an SCU.
Table A3.1-
A3.1-1 Storage SOP Class
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage (Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage (New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1
Ultrasound Image storage (Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6
Ultrasound Image storage (New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1
A3.1.1 Association Establishment Policies

Policies
A3.1.1.1 General
Maximum PDU size offered : Initial value 16,384 bytes (The change to 4KB, 8KB,
16KB and 28KB is possible at a set up.)
Note: Must be 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K or 16K or > 16K bytes.
A3.1.1.2 Number of associations

A3.1.1.3 Asynchronous Nature

Storage AE will not use asynchronous operations.
A3.1.1.4 Implementation Identifying Information
The EZU-FC5 software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.
obtain the right to use it. For detail, refer to the Internet address:
http://www.merge.com.
A-3 Q1E-EZ0473
A3.1.2 Association initiation by Real-
Real-World Activity
Storage AE will open an association at the time of a transferring start in Real-World
Activity.
A3.1.2.1 Real-
Real-World Activity
A3.1.2.1.1 Associated Real-

Real-World Activity

A3.1.2.1.2 Proposed Presentation Contexts

Table A3.1-
3.1-2 Presentation Context
Abstract Syntax Transfer Syntax
Syntax Role Extended
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
Storage (Retired)
Storage (New)
Ultrasound Image storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
(Retired)
(New)
Table A3.1-
A3.1-3 Transfer Syntax
Name List UID List
A-4 Q1E-EZ0473
A3.1.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files
Table A3.1-
A3.1-4 Image Tag Elements
Field Name Tag Group Length Contents
Group Length 0002 0000 4
File Meta Information Version 0002 0001 2 0001
Media Storage SOP Class UID 0002 0002 28 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1 for single
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1 for multi
Media Storage SOP Instance 0002 0003 64 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.12.1106715.19961
UID 209.233045.1
Transfer Syntax UID 0002 0010 18 1.2.840.10008.1.2 for VR Little Endian Syntax
1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.50 for JPEG Baseline
Implementation Class UID 0002 0012 24 2.16.840.1.113669.2.931128
Implementation Version Name 0002 0013 16 MergeCOM3_232
Source Application Entity Title 0002 0016 ex. US1
0008 Group length 0008 0000 4
Specific Character Set 0008 0005 ex. ISO IR100
Instance Creation Date 0008 0012 8 yyyymmdd
Instance Creation Time 0008 0013 6 hhmmss
Instance Creation Date 0008 0014 26 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14
SOP Class UID 0008 0016 26 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1 for single new
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6 for single retired
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1 for multi new
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3 for multi retired
SOP Instance UID 0008 0018 64 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.
yyyymmdd.1hhmmss.i
Study Date 0008 0020 8 yyyymmdd
Series Date 0008 0021 8 yyyymmdd
Image Date 0008 0023 8 yyyymmdd
Study Time 0008 0030 6 hhmmss
Series Time 0008 0031 6 hhmmss
Image Time 0008 0033 6 hhmmss
Accession Number 0008 0050 0 ex. #1111111
Modality 0008 0060 2 US
Manufacture 0008 0070 28 US MANUFACTURE
Institution Name 0008 0080 30 ex. US HP.
Referring Physician's Name 0008 0090 0 None
Study Discription 0008 1030 0 none
Operator's Name 0008 1070
Admitting Diagnoses Description 0008 1080 0 none
Manufacture's Model Name 0008 1090 64 MODEL1
0010 Group length 0010 0000 4
Patient's Name 0010 0010 30
Patient ID 0010 0020 30
Patient's Birth date 0010 0030 8 or 0 yyyymmdd
Patient's Sex 0010 0040 2 M/F/O
Other patient IDs 0010 1000
Patient's Age 0010 1010 4 or 0 ex. 026Y
A-5 Q1E-EZ0473
Field Name Tag Group Length Contents
Patient's Size 0010 1020 6 or 0
Patient's Weight 0010 1030 8 or 0
Ethnic Group 0010 2160
Additional Patient History 0010 21B0
Pregnancy Status 0010 21C0
Last Menstrual Date 0010 21D0
Patient Comments 0010 4000
0018 Group length 0018 0000 4
Software version(s) 0018 1020 4 ex. V02-01
Frame time 0018 1063
Heart rate 0018 1088 8 or 0
Depth of Scan Field 0018 5050 4
0020 Group length 0020 0000 4
Study Instance UID 0020 000D 64 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.
yyyymmdd.1hhmmss
Series Instance UID 0020 000E 64 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.
yyyymmdd.1hhmmss.n
Study ID 0020 0010 0 yyyymmddn
Series number 0020 0011 2 1
Image Number 0020 0013 2 n
0028 Group length 0028 0000 4
Sample Per Pixel 0028 0002 2 1 for MONOCHROME2 3 for RGB,
YBR_FULL_422
Photometric Interpretation 0028 0004 12 or 4 MONOCHROME2/RGB / YBR_FULL_422
Planner Configuration 0028 0006 2 0
Number of Frames 0028 0008 2
Frame Increment Pointer 0028 0009 4 0002 C347
Rows 0028 0010 2 NTSC : 480, PAL : 574
Columns 0028 0011 2 NTSC : 640, PAL : 760
Bits Allocated 0028 0100 2 8
Bits Stored 0028 0101 2 8
High Bit 0028 0102 2 7
Pixel Representation 0028 0103 2 0
Windows Center 0028 1050 4 128
Windows Width 0028 1051 4 256
Lossy Image Compression 0028 2110 2 00 for No compression
01 for Compression
0040 Group length 0040 0000 4
Request Attributes Sequence 0040 0275
Scheduled Procedure Step 0040 0007
Description
Scheduled Procedure Step ID 0040 0009
Requested Procedure ID 0040 1001
7fe0 Group length 7fe0 0000 4
Pixel Data 7fe0 0010 0
A-6 Q1E-EZ0473
A3.2 Media Storage AE specification
The EZU-FC5 software provides the standard conformance for the following DICOM3.0
Modality WorkList SOP classes as an SCU.
Table A3.2-
A3.2-1 Media Storage SOP Class
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1
Ultrasound Image storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1
DICOM Media Storage Directory 1.2.840.10008.1.3.10
A3.2.1.1 General


Media Storage AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The EZU-FC5 software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.
A-7 Q1E-EZ0473
Real-World Activity
A3.2.2.1 Real-
Real-World Activity
Media Storage AE will open an association at the time of a transferring start in

Real-World Activity.
A3.2.2.1.1
Real-World Activity


Table A3.2-
Role
Storage (New)
(New)
Table A3.2-
A3.2-3 Transfer Syntax
Name List UID List
A3.2.3 DICOM
DICOM fields in the DICOM image files
Please refer to Table A3.1-4.
A-8 Q1E-EZ0473
A3.3 Printing AE specification
The EZU-FC5P software provides the standard conformance for the following DICOM3.0
Printing SOP classes as an SCU.
Table A3
A3.3
.3-
.3-1 Printing SOP Class
Basic Grayscale Print Management Meta SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9
Basic Color Print Management Meta SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18
A3.3.1 Association Establishment

Establishment Policies
A3.3.1.1 General


Printing AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The EZU-FC5P software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.
A-9 Q1E-EZ0473
Real-World Activity
Printing AE will open an association at the time of a printing start in Real-World Activity.
A3.3.2.1 Real-
Real-World Activity

Real-World Activity

- At the time of press PRINT key
- At the time of click [Image Print] button in Filing dialog

Table A3.3-
A3.3-2 Presentation Context
Role
Basic Gray Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
SOP Class
Basic Color Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
SOP Class
This implies standard conformance for the following SOP Classes:

- Basic Film Session SOP Class
- Basic Film Box SOP Class
- Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class
- Basic Color Image Box SOP Class
- Printer SOP Class
Each of there SOP classes is described in the paragraphs to follow.
A3.3.3 Basic Film Session SOP Class
Table A3.3-
A3.3-3 Basic Film Session Presentation Module
Number of Copies (2000, 0010) 1 to many
Print Priority (2000, 0020) HIGH
MED
LOW
Medium Type (2000, 0030) PAPER
CLEAR FILM
BLUE FILM
Film Destination (2000, 0040) MAGAZINE
PROCESSOR
BIN_i : 'i' is number.
Film Session Label (2000, 0050) Used
Memory Allocation (2000, 0060) ---- Not used
A-10 Q1E-EZ0473
A3.3.4 Basic Film Box SOP Class
Table A3.3-
A3.3-4 Basic Film Box Presentation Module
Image Display Format (2010, 0010) STANDARD\1,1
STANDARD\1,2
STANDARD\2,1
STANDARD\2,2
STANDARD\2,3
STANDARD\3,2
STANDARD\3,3
STANDARD\3,4
STANDARD\4,3
STANDARD\4,4
Annotation Display Format ID (2010, 0030) ---- Not used
Film Orientation (2010, 0040) PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Film Size ID (2010, 0050) 8INX10IN
10INX12IN
10INX14IN
11INX14IN
14INX14IN
14INX17IN
24CMX24CM
24CMX30CM
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) REPLICATE Configurable
BILINEAR
CUBIC
NONE
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) CUBIC
Border Density (2010, 0100) BLACK
WHITE
i : 'i' is number.
Empty Image Density (2010, 0110) ---- Not used
Min Density (2010, 0120) Limited by printer
Max Density (2010, 0130) Limited by printer
Trim (2010, 0140) YES
NO
Configuration Information (2010, 0150) used
A-11 Q1E-EZ0473
A3.3.5 Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class
Table A3.3-
A3.3-5 Basic Grayscale Image Box Pixel Presentation Modules
Preformatted Grayscale Image (2020, 0110) used
Sequence
>Photometric Interpretation (0028, 0004) MONOCHROME2
>Rows (0028, 0010) NTSC:480, PAL:574
>Columns (0028, 0011) NTSC:640, PAL:760
>Bits Stored (0028, 0101) 8
>High Bit (0028, 0102) 7
Polarity (2020, 0020) ---- Not used
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) ---- Not used
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) ---- Not used
Requested Image Size (2020, 0030) ---- Not used
A3.3.6 Basic Color Image Box SOP Class
Table A3.3-
A3.3-6 Basic Color Image Box Pixel Presentation Modules
Preformatted Color Image (2020, 0111) used
Sequence
>Photometric Interpretation (0028, 0004) RGB
>Planar Configuration (0028, 0006) 0
>Rows (0028, 0010) NTSC:480, PAL:574
>Columns (0028, 0011) NTSC:640, PAL:760
>Bits Stored (0028, 0101) 8
>High Bit (0028, 0102) 7
Polarity (2020, 0020) ---- not used
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) ---- not used
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) ---- not used
Requested Image Size (2020, 0030) ---- not used
A-12 Q1E-EZ0473
A3.3.7 Printer SOP Class
Table A3.3-
A3.3-7 Printer Modules
Printer Status (2110, 0010) ---- not used
Printer Status Info (2110, 0020) ---- not used
Printer Name (2110, 0030) ---- not used
Manufacturer (0008, 0070) ---- not used
Manufacturer Model Name (0008, 1090) ---- not used
Device Serial Number (0018, 1000) ---- not used
Software Versions (0018, 1020) ---- not used
Calibration Date (0018, 1200) ---- not used
Calibration Time (0018, 1201) ---- not used
A-13 Q1E-EZ0473
A3.4 Modality WorkList AE specification
The EZU-FC5W software provides the standard conformance for the following DICOM3.0
Modality WorkList SOP classes as an SCU.
Table A3.4-
A3.4-1 Modality WorkList SOP Class
Modality WorkList Information Model-FIND 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.31
A3.4.1.1 General
The Modality WorkList will not use asynchronous operations.
The EZU-FC5W software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.


the right to use it. For detail, refer to the Internet address:

Real-world Activity
Modality WorkList AE will open an association at the time of New Patient execution start
in Real-World Activity.
A3.4.2.1 Real-
Real-World Activity

Real-World Activity
- At the time of click [New Patient] button in Patient Menu
A-14 Q1E-EZ0473
Table A3.4-
Modality WorkList 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4. DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Information Model-FIND 31 Little Endian Syntax
A3.4.3 AE Attributes
The EZU-FC5W software queries Modality WorkList Server to use following Matching
keys.
Table A3.4-
A3.4-3 Inquiry Corresponding Keys
Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0100 R
Sequence
Modality 0008, 0060 R "US"
>Scheduled Station AE Title 0040, 0001 R AE title of Ultrasound scanner
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0002 R YYYYMMDD (today) or
Start Date YYYYMMDD-YYYYMMDD
(yesterday, today and tomorrow)
Patient ID 0010, 0020 R
The EZU-FC5W software can be accepted following tags except for tags that specifies
Remark "Not used".
Table A3.4-
A3.4-4 Response Attribute
SOP Common
Specific Character Set 0008,0005 1C
Scheduled Procedure Step
Scheduled Procedure Step 0040,0100 1
Sequence
>Scheduled Station AE Title 0040,0001 1
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040,0002 1
Start Date
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040,0003 1
Time
Modality 0008, 0060 1 "US"
>Scheduled Performing 0040, 0006 2 Set to "Sonographer" on Patient
Physician's Name menu.
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0007 1C Set to "Exam.typ" on Patient menu.
Description
>Scheduled Station Name 0040, 0010 2
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0011 2
Location
A-15 Q1E-EZ0473
>Scheduled Action Item 0040, 0008 1C Not used
Code Sequence
>>Code Value 0008, 0100 1C Not used
>>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 3 Not used
>>Coding Scheme 0008, 0102 1C Not used
Designator
>>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 3 Not used
>Pre-Medication 0040, 0012 2C Not used
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0009 1
ID
>Requested Contrast Agent 0032, 1070 2C
>Scheduled Procedure step 0040, 0020 3 Not used
Status
Requested Procedure
Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001 1
Requested Procedure 0032, 1060 1C
Description
Requested Procedure Code 0032, 1064 1C Not used
Sequence
>Code Value 0008, 0100 1C Not used
>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 1C Not used
>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 3 Not used
Study Instance UID 0020, 000D 1
Referenced Study Sequence 0008, 1110 2 Not used
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 1C Not used
>Referenced SOP Instance 0008, 1155 1C Not used
UID
Requested Procedure 0040, 1003 2 Not used
Priority
Patient Transport 0040, 1004 2 Not used
Arrangements
Name of Intended 0040, 1010 3
Recipients of Results
Accession Number 0008, 0050 2 Set to "Accession#" on Patient menu
Requesting Physician 0032, 1032 2 Set to "Ordering Physician" on
Patient menu.
Referring Physician's Name 0008, 0090 2
Visit Identification
Admission ID 0038, 0010 2 Not used
Visit Status
Current Patient Location 0038, 0300 2 Not used
Referenced Patient 0008, 1120 2 Not used
Sequence
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 2 Not used
>Referenced SOP Instance 0008, 1155 2 Not used
UID
Visit Admission
Admitting Diagnosis 0008, 1080 3
Description
A-16 Q1E-EZ0473
Patient Identification
Patient's Name 0010, 0010 1 Set to "Name" on Patient menu.
Patient ID 0010, 0020 1 Set to "ID" on Patient menu.
Other Patient IDs 0010, 1000 3
Patient Demographic
Patients Birth Date 0010, 0030 2 Set to "Birth Date" on Patient menu.
Patient's Sex 0010, 0040 2 Set to "Sex" on Patient menu.
Patient's Weight 0010, 1030 2 Set to "Weight" on Patient menu.
Confidentiality constraint 0040, 3001 2 Not used
on patient data
Patient's Size 0010, 1020 3 Set to "Height" on Patient menu.
Ethnic Group 0010, 2160 3
Patient Comments 0010, 4000 3
Patient Medical
Patient State 0038, 0500 2 Not used
Pregnancy Status 0010, 21C0 2
Medical Alerts 0010, 2000 2 Not used
Contrast Allergies 0010, 2110 2 Not used
Special Needs 0038, 0050 2 Not used
Additional Patient History 0010, 21B0 3
Last Menstrual Date 0010, 21D0 3
The following tags are added to the image header while Modality WorkList function is used.
Table A3.4-
A3.4-5 WorkList Attributes to the Standard DICOM Image Header
Description/Module Tag Remarks
Specific Character Set 0008, 0005
Scheduled Procedure Step ID 0040, 0009
Scheduled Procedure Step Description 0040, 0007
Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001
Admitting Diagnosis Description 0008, 1080
Other Patient Ids 0010, 1000
Ethnic Group 0010, 2160
Patient Comments 0010, 4000
Pregnancy Status 0010, 21C0
Additional Patient History 0010, 21B0
Last Menstrual Date 0010, 21D0
A-17 Q1E-EZ0473
A3.5 Modality Performed Procedure Step AE specification
The EZU-FC5W software provides the standard conformance for the following DICOM3.0
Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP classes as an SCU.
Table A3.5-
3.5-1 Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class
Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.3.1.2.3.3
A3.5.1.1 General
Modality Performed Procedure Step AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The EZU-FC5W software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.

the right to use it. For detail, refer to the Internet address:

Real-World
World Activity
Modality Performed Procedure Step AE will open an association at the time of selecting of
patient or End Exam execution in Real-World Activity.
A3.5.2.1 Real-
Real-World Activity

Real-World Activity0

- At the time of select patient in Patient List
- At the time of press End Exam key
A-18 Q1E-EZ0473
Table A3.5-
Role
Modality Performed 1.2.840.10008.3.1.2.3.3 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Procedure Step SOP Little Endian Syntax
Class
A3.5.3 AE Attributes
The EUB-FC5W software supports the following tags except for tags that specifies Remark
"Not used".
Table A3.5-
A3.5-3 SOP Class N-N-Create and Final State Attribute
of Modality Performed Procedure Step
Description/Module Tag Type N-
N-Create Type Final Remarks
(Type) State (Type)
Specific Character Set 0008,0005 (1C) (1C)
Performed Procedure Step Relationship
Scheduled Step Attributes 0040, 0270 (1) (1)
Sequence
>Study Instance UID 0020, 000D Set data of (1)
Modality
WorkList.
(1)
>Referenced Study Sequence 0008, 1110 (2) (2) Not used
UID
UID
>Accession Number 0008, 0050 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
>Placer Order Number 0040, 2016 NULL (3)
/Imaging Service Request (3)
>Filler Order Number 0040, 2017 NULL (3)
/Imaging Service Request (3)
>Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
>Requested Procedure 0032, 1060 Set data of (2)
WorkList.(2)
A-19 Q1E-EZ0473
Description/Module Tag Type N-N-Create Type Final Remarks
(Type) State (Type)
ID Modality
WorkList.
(2)
WorkList.
(2)
>Scheduled Action Item Code 0040, 0008 (2) (2) Not used
Sequence
>>Code Value 0008, 0100 (1C) (1C) Not used
>>Coding Scheme 0008, 0102 (1C) (1C) Not used
Designator
>>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 (3) (3) Not used
>>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 (3) (3) Not used
Patient's Name 0010, 0010 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient ID 0010, 0020 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient's Birth Date 0010, 0030 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient's Sex 0010, 0040 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Referenced Patient Sequence 0008, 1120 (2) (2) Not used
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 (1C) (1C) Not used
>Referenced Instance UID 0008, 1155 (1C) (1C) Not used
Performed Procedure Step Information
Performed Procedure Step ID 0040, 0253 (1) (1)
Performed Station AE Title 0040, 0241 Set AE title of (1)
Ultrasound
scanner (1)
Performed Station Name 0040, 0242 NULL (2)
(2)
Performed Location 0040, 0243 NULL (2)
(2)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0244 Set Start date. (1)
Start Date (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0245 Set Start time. (1)
Start Time (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0252 "In "COMPLETED"
Status PROGRESS"(1) (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0254 NULL (2)
Description (2)
A-20 Q1E-EZ0473
Description/Module Tag Type N-
N-Create Type Final Remarks
(Type)
(Type) State (Type)
Performed Procedure Type 0040, 0255 NULL (2)
Description (2)
Procedure Code Sequence 0008, 1032 (2) (2) Not used
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0250 (2) Set End date.
End Date (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0251 (2) Set End time.
End Time (1)
Image Acquisiti
Acquisition
on Results
Modality 0008, 0060 "US" (1)
(1)
Study ID 0020, 0010 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Performed Action Item Code 0040, 0260 (2) (2) Not used
Sequence
Performed Series Sequence 0040, 0340 (2) (1)
>Performing Physician's 0008, 1050 (2C) (2)
Name
>Protocol Name 0018, 1030 (1C) (1)
>Operator's Name 0008, 1070 (2C) (2)
>Series Instance UID 0020, 000E (1C) (1)
>Series Description 0008, 103E (2C) (2)
>Retrieve AE Title 0008, 0054 (2C) (2C)
>Referenced Image Sequence 0008, 1140 (2C) (2C)
>>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 (1C) (1C)
>>Referenced SOP Instance 0008, 1155 (1C) (1C)
UID
>Referenced Standalone SOP 0040, 0220 (2C) (2C)
Instance Sequence
>>Referenced SOP Class 0008, 1150 (1C) (1C)
UID
>>Referenced SOP Instance 0008, 1155 (1C) (1C)
UID
The requirement for the final state is that which applies at the time that the performed Procedure
Step Status (0040, 0252) is N-SET to a value of COMPLETED or DISCONTINUED. It is only
described if it is different from the SCP requirement for the N-CREATE.
A-21 Q1E-EZ0473
A4 Communication Profile
Profile
A4.1 TCP/IP Stack
This software interfaces TCP/IP stack of the computer system to be executed.
A5 Extensions/Specializations/Privatizations
A5.1 Standard
Standard Extended/Specialized/Private SOPs
Not applicable
A5.2 Private Transfer Syntaxes
Not applicable
A6 Configuration
EZU-FC5, EZU-FC5P, EZU-FC5W software obtains configuration information from the
followings.
- AE name
- Host name
- Port No.
A7 Support of extended character sets

An extended character set is not supported.
A-22 Q1E-EZ0473
Index
Introduction ................................ 1-1, A-1

A
Application Data Flow Diagram .......A-2 M
Application Entity Title (AE) Media Storage AE specification ........ A-7
Specifications..................................A-3 Method of Use.................................... 3-1
Mobile function................................ 3-21
B
Modality Performed Procedure Step AE
Batch transferring for every patient 3-7 specification.................................. A-18
Modality WorkList AE specificationA-14
C
MPPS function................................. 3-20
Communication Profile ...................A-22
Components ....................................... 1-1 P
Configuration...................................A-22 Preparation........................................ 3-1
Printing.............................................3-11
D
Printing AE specification .................. A-9
Detailed setup of DICOM
Printing by the PRINT key ..............3-11
communication ............................. 3-24
Printing from Filing dialog ............. 3-13
DICOM Conformance Statement......A-1
Printing to the DICOM Printer(Option
DICOM Modality WorkList
EZU-FC5P) ..................................... 3-9
function(Option EZU-FC5W) ....... 3-16
Private Transfer Syntaxes .............. A-22
E Purpose of This Document ................ A-1
Extensions/Specializations/Privatizatio Purpose of Use................................... 1-1
ns...................................................A-22
S
EZU-Pi2 ............................................. 1-1
Set up ........................................ 3-4, 3-21
F Setting for DICOM communication.. 3-1
Features ............................................. 1-1 Setting for Modality WorkList ........ 3-16
Functional explanation ..................... 2-1 Setting for Print Format ................... 3-9
Simultaneous Transfer DICOM Server
H and Printer ................................... 3-14
How to use ....................................... 3-22 Specifications..................................... 5-1
Standard Extended/Specialized/Private
I
SOPs ............................................. A-22
Implementation Model ......................A-2 Starting method of Transfer dialog .. 3-6
Index-1 57 Q1J-EZ0473
Storage AE specification ...................A-3 Transferring of saving image ............ 3-6
Support of extended character sets A-22 Transferring to DICOM Server......... 3-4
Transferring to FD or MO................. 3-9
T
Troubleshooting ................................. 4-1
TCP/IP Stack ...................................A-22
Temporary save at the time of a U
transferring / printing error ........ 3-23 Using Modality WorkList................ 3-17
Transferring by M-WRITE key ......... 3-4
Transferring by S-WRITE key .......... 3-4 W
Transferring from Image Filing dialog WorkList function............................ 3-17

......................................................... 3-7
E
Index-2 58 Q1J-EZ0473
Stress Echo Software
Model EZU-SE1
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Tokyo, Japan
Q1E-EZ0474-2
Copyright  Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2002. All rights reserved.

Table of Contents
1 General Info 1-1
1.1 How to use this manual 1-1
1.1.1 Text Features 1-1

1.1.2 Precautionary Notices 1-1
1.2 Safety Precautions 1-2
1.3 System Description 1-3
1.4 Intended Use 1-3
1.5 Philosophy of GUI 1-4
1.6 Protection of Examination Data 1-5
1.6.1 Backup of Examination data management files 1-5

1.6.2 Load of Examination data management files 1-6
2 Introduction 2-2
2.1 Starting the Stress Echo Application 2-2
2.2 Settings and Configurations 2-3
2.2.1 The User Interface-folder 2-3

2.2.2 The Image-folder 2-4
2.2.3 The Report-folder 2-5
2.2.4 The QT-Time Table-folder 2-6
2.3 Protocol Editor 2-7
2.3.1 Introduction 2-7

2.3.2 Starting the Protocol Editor 2-7
2.3.3 Creating a protocol 2-8
2.3.4 Editing a protocol 2-9
2.3.5 Deleting a protocol 2-9
3 Reference Guide 3-1
3.1 Workflow 3-1
3.2 The Database Display 3-2
3.2.1 New Examination 3-2

3.2.2 Load Examination 3-4
3.2.3 Archive Module 3-8
3.2.4 About 3-8
3.2.5 Exit 3-8
(1) Q1E-EZ0474
3.3 Data Acquisition 3-9
3.3.1 Select Protocol 3-9

3.3.2 Region of Interest 3-10
3.3.3 Scanning 3-10
3.3.4 Accepting Views 3-11
3.3.5 End of acquisition 3-13
3.3.6 User intervention 3-13
3.4 Data Review 3-14
3.4.1 Introduction 3-14

3.4.2 Review Modes 3-14
3.4.3 Select Mode 3-15
3.4.4 Videobar 3-16
3.4.5 Customizing the upper toolbar 3-17
3.4.6 Review Mode 3-20
3.4.7 Wall Motion Scoring Mode 3-27
3.4.8 LV Volume Measurements 3-33
3.4.9 Save & Export 3-36
3.5 Print to PC-Priner 3-37
3.5.1 Printer Setup 3-38

3.6 Indication 3-40
3.7 Archive Module 3-41
3.7.1 Transferring data into the buffer archive 3-42

3.7.2 Transferring data into the long term archive 3-44
3.7.3 Recall data out of the long term archive 3-45
3.8 MO Archive 3-46
3.8.1 Preparation 3-46

3.8.2 Initial Registration of MO 3-47
3.8.3 Transfer to MO 3-49
3.8.4 When not enough space left in MO 3-55
3.8.5 Load Data from MO 3-61
3.9 Foot Switch 3-63
4 Index 4-1
(2) Q1E-EZ0474
1 General Info
1.1 How to use this manual
This manual is designed with the goal to help you maximizing the performance of your system through
product knowledge and readily available information. We have included features to help you locate the
information you need quickly and ideas to help you obtain the most from your system.
Use this manual for both training and reference, regardless whether you are a new customer, or a
user who is already familiar with the system.
You will find it convenient to look up information regarding a "task" by using the table of contents which
is organized by job function. So if you want to know the protocol selection for new examination, just
look under "Select Protocol" in the table of contents.
The index also gives you information by keyword, for example, Scanning, so you will not waste
valuable time by looking in both the table of contents and index for the information you need.
Symbols, called Notice marks, show up throughout the manual to assist you in quickly finding cautions,
suggestions, urgent information, reminders, and custom settings. You will find an explanation of these
notice marks in this chapter.
1.1.1 Text Features

You will find the page number and chapter title at the bottom of the page. The page number consists
of three characters. The chapter number prints first, followed by a dash, and then the overall page
number. For example, a page numbered 2-3 indicates the third page and the second chapter.
We have included examples, suggestions and warnings to help you get started and to caution you
about important setups and results. These appear in the text with an notice mark to draw your
attention.
1.1.2 Precautionary Notices

You will see notice marks (symbols representing certain types of text) in various places in this manual.
Here are the explanations for those icons:
This note indicates any condition or action which, if not strictly observed, could result in
possible danger such as partial equipment damage or data loss of computer.
This note indicates important precautions which are not related to danger but are to be
taken against operation, installation and maintenance.
This note shows the additional explanation.
1-1 Q1E-EZ0474
1.2 Safety Precautions
Please review the information in this section before starting Stress Echo software. This section
contains important information on operating safety, cleaning and disinfecting the system components,
storing and handling of the system as well as information on service and repair
- Maintenance, Service, Changes of the device, Installation, Upgrades, Setups may

only be performed by trained and authorized personal of our company. Warranty
might be void.
- Technical documentation is only together with adequate training available. Please

contact service division of our company for further information.
- This device (or software package) should not be used without prior training and a
thorough understanding of the operating instructions.
- When the ultrasound system software starts up by the system MO in an emergency,

the stress-echo software can not be used. Please confirm the instruction manual of
the system for the system MO.
- DO NOT INSTALL OTHER SOFTWARE than with our company products compliant
and for the system released software. Contact your local representative of our
company if you want to install software
- This device (or software package) is restricted to sale by or on the order of a

licensed medical practitioner.
- Do not acquire image data if the host ultrasound image is frozen. Acquiring data while
the host ultrasound image is frozen will result in acquiring repeated images of the
frozen image. Always verify the host ultrasound image is not frozen before and after
the image data acquisition.
- The information contained in this manual is intended only for the operation of the
system and software. It does not include information such as how to perform an
Echocardiogram or other ultrasound procedures. Be sure to follow the operating
instructions provided by the manufacturer of your ultrasound equipment.
- Do not remove disks from the disk drive during disk read and write operations (when
the disk drive light is on). Removing a disk during read and write operations can
cause incomplete storage of data files, resulting in data loss.
- Before saving or reviewing a patient study file, always double check the patient name.
This provides additional assurance that the stored images correspond with the
correct patient name.
- Do not change disks during a given patient's study. If you do, a message appears
that tells you to put the original disk back in the disk drive. This prevents storage of
images with the incorrect patient name.
- When a patient study is deleted, the file is permanently lost. Copy the patient study to
another storage media for archival before deleting it.
- Operate all equipment within its environmental specifications. Otherwise, equipment

damage may result.
1-2 Q1E-EZ0474
- Our company is not responsible for problems attributable to unauthorized changes,
additions or deletions to software or hardware of our company, or unauthorized
installation of third party software.
- If system power is lost (either to the Stress Echo system or the host ultrasound
system) during a patient study, the study may have to be repeated or resumed from
the point at which power was lost. After power is restored, review the content of the
stored patient file. It may be incomplete.
- Close the patient study immediately when it is completed. If a patient study is left
open it is possible to acquire the next patient’s images under the previous patient’s
name.
- When lossy compression is selected from the menu, some image data will be lost.
The higher the selected compression ratio, the greater the data loss.
- Before changing the patient name during a study, make sure the patient name and
the image data correspond.
- If digital data is lost during or after an exam, the exam may need to be repeated. As
an alternative to a repeat of an exam for high-risk patients, it should be
recommended that you back up your digital study with video tape.
1.3 System Description

The Stress Echo software is a universal software package to acquire, reconstruct and analyze general
imaging ultrasound data.
The Stress Echo integration is a software solution for the ultrasound system. It is based on Windows
NT and will be loaded on the PC of the ultrasound system. An archiving module will handle the Stress
Echo data and a protocol editor will allow to design Stress Echo protocols. The images are transferred
to the Stress Echo software by digital frame grabbing.
1.4 Intended Use

The Stress Echo Software is dedicated to acquisition, evaluation and digital archiving of exercise and
pharmacological Stress Echo examinations.
An easy to follow workflow, acquisition of multiple phases and views, focused on the systolic portion of
the heart beat, without the need to store prior to completion of the examination, synchronized side-by-
side comparison, Wall Motion Scoring according to ASE(American Society of Echocardiography)
standards and LV Measurements are particularly suited to routine use.
This is achieved through an easy to follow toolbar workflow and the ability to perform Stress Echo as
an integrated solution for the ultrasound system.
1-3 Q1E-EZ0474
1.5 Philosophy of GUI
This software sets a high value on a clearly arranged Graphical User Interface. The button on Tool Bar
are arranged so that it should easily be selected. So the use of GUI increases the speed of any
examination with the Stress Echo Software. The following picture shows the division of the GUI in:
Tool Bar
Work Space
Tool Space
Tool Bar
Toolbar It provides easy access to the functions which are most often used at the
respective screen.
Toolspace It offers any special functions, which are available by clicking one of the
buttons on the left side of the screen.
Workspace It displays the contents of the respective screen.
1-4 Q1E-EZ0474
1.6 Protection of Examination Data
To read and write the stress-echo examination data, the database files called as “Examination data
management file” are used. The database files keep the list of all patients and all examination data. It
is different from the actual examination data (Image Data), but if the database files are broken in any
reason, it will be not possible to read and write the Examination data.
Therefore, the Examination data management file should periodically be backed up. The backup and
load of the database files can be done with MO (Optical Disk) in the following procedures.
1.6.1 Backup of Examination data management files
Please insert MO to the drive and invoke main menu, then select Setup/Stress/Backup List in the main
menu.
The backup is completed when the following message is displayed.
1-5 Q1E-EZ0474
1.6.2 Load of Examination data management files
When Examination data management files are broken, the backup data stored in MO can be load in
the following procedures.
Even if the examination data can not be loaded, it may be based on the mistake of simple
operation. Ex.) The MO media is not inserted in Drive.Please ask the service division of
our company to know if the database files are surely broken.
Before loading the database files, the current database on the system should be backed
up to the MO which has no database file in it. (The MO should be different from the one
which will be loaded).
Please insert the MO which has the backup data into the drive and invoke main menu, then select
“Setup/Stress/Load List” in the main menu.
The load is completed when the following message is displayed.
1-6 Q1E-EZ0474
2 Introduction
2.1 Starting the Stress Echo Application
When the OPTION key on the ultrasound system is pressed, the following Function keys become
available:
Pull the F2 toggle switch to start the Stress Echo Application. The following screen will appear:
F1 Base Menu : Go back to the base menu of Option key.

F2 New Exam : New stress-echo examination is started against the current patient.
F3 Load Exam : The previously registered examination is loaded.
If the function menu is switched to the backside, the following menu appears.
F1 Protocol : Protocol Editor is invoked (Refer to 2.3)

F2 Archive : Archive module is invoked (Refer to 3.7)
F5 ECG : ECG on/off is switched.
F6 ECG Gain : ECG gain is adjusted.
F7 ECG Pos : The display position of ECG wave is changed.
2-2 Q1E-EZ0474
2.2 Settings and Configurations
During examination or reviewing image, the Options/System menu from the pulldown menu or the
System Properties button from the toolbar offers the possibility to adjust the software settings such
as User Interface or Image settings to your system.
Click on the System Properties button in the toolbar. A window pops up with 4 folders available:
User Interface, Image, Report and QT-Time Table.
2.2.1 The User Interface-folder
The User Interface Folder allows you to change the properties of the user interface such as:
• Show Menu: displays the menu-bar

(pulldown menu appears. The pulldown menu is set to Off as default)
• Show Statusbar: displays the statusbar in the bottom of the user interface. The
statusbar shows patient name and patient id.
• Large Toolbar Icons: The toolbars (main and review) will be displayed in large size.
2-3 Q1E-EZ0474
2.2.2 The Image-folder
In “Storing” region, the following item can be set.
• Quality Factor: The image quality for storing is set. The value of 0 to 100 can
be set. If the value is larger, the image quality is higher,
but the amount of image data also becomes large.
In “Overlay” region, to define the overlay in the displayed images use the checkboxes in the overlay
window. Click into the checkbox with the ENTER key to enable the function:
• Name of level: displays the phase of the examination

• Name of view: displays the view of the scan
• Heartrate: displays the heartrate at which the loops was acquired
• Timestamp acquisition: displays the time when the acquisition was performed
• Timespan since start of level: displays the time elapsed when a phase level was
entered. This is particularly useful in an exercise
Stress Echo study to display the time since end of
exercise.
2-4 Q1E-EZ0474
2.2.3 The Report-folder
Use the drop down list to select the segment model for the WMS Report. In this version only the ASE
16 standard is available.
Enable the checkbox Print colored if the report should be printed in color to PC-Printer.
For easy evaluation of WMS, Color printer is recommended.
2-5 Q1E-EZ0474
2.2.4 The QT-Time Table-folder
This table is used to be able to display synchronized loops at different heart rate with different systolic
durations. If you want to use your own research information this table can be edited.
• Enter a heart rate and the referring systolic duration and then click on the Update button to add
the new values to the table.
• To delete a value select the appropriate heart rate from the list and click on the Delete button.
• To set the all values default, click on the Set Default Values button.
• To activate the changes click on OK button. To cancel without changing the table click on
Cancel button.
If there is no corresponding heart rate in the table during examination, the rounded-off
value is used to refer the table. (Ex.) The actual heart rate is 72, the table is referred with
heart rate 70 in the case of above table.
2-6 Q1E-EZ0474
2.3 Protocol Editor
2.3.1 Introduction
The Protocol Editor provides you the possibility to design your own protocol for the Stress Echo
examination.
2.3.2 Starting the Protocol Editor
Click on the Protocol Editor button on your desktop to start the protocol editor.
The program comes up with the following start screen:
2-7 Q1E-EZ0474
2.3.3 Creating a protocol
1.) Click on the New button to create the new protocol.

2.) Click into the protocol name field and enter a name for your protocol.
If the entered protocol name is longer than the width of text box, the part of the protocol
name may not be visible in the protocol selection menu. In the case, please invoke the
protocol editor again and modify the protocol name.
3.) Select the number of loops that should be acquired per view.
The acquisition mode is retrospective which means that the system is acquiring loops
continuously. When pressing the F5:Accept key the chosen amount of loops that could
be seen on the screen last are stored.
4.) Click on <new> in the level window and then enter a name in the description window for the first
level (phase) of the protocol. To apply the phase hit Enter key.
5.) Redo 4 to enter the next levels.
To activate the timing clock during the acquisition for a selected level click into the
checkbox of the appropriate level. The timing clock is displayed when the stored image is
reviewed.
6.) Click on <new> in the view window and then select a view from the drop down list in the
Standard Views text field. To display the list click on the arrow next to the text field.
7.) Redo 6 to add more views. The views are applied for all levels.
8.) Click on the Save button to save the protocol. It will then be available in the Stress Echo
Application software.
9.) Click on Exit button to exit the protocol editor.
2-8 Q1E-EZ0474
2.3.4 Editing a protocol
1.) Click on the Load button and select the protocol to load the protocol that should be edited.
2.) Select the level or view by clicking on the name, then delete it by pressing the Del key on the
keyboard.
3.) To add a new level click on <new> in the level window and then enter a name in the description
window. To apply the phase hit Enter key.
4.) To add a new view click on <new> in the view window and then select a view from the drop
down list in the Standard Views text field. To display the list click on the arrow next to the text
field.
5.) Click on Save button to save the protocol under the same name or modify the protocol name in
the Protocol Name window and then click on Save button to save the protocol under a new
name.
6.) Click on Exit button to exit the protocol editor.
- The Delete button deletes the protocol. Please be careful when delete the protocol.
- When a level or a view is selected and press Del key on the keyboard panel, the
selected level or view is removed at once. Please be careful not to delete by mistake.
If it is deleted by mistake, please close the protocol editor without saving.
If entered level name or view name is too long, the label of name may not be completely displayed on
the review screen.
2.3.5 Deleting a protocol
In the following steps, the currently selected protocol is removed.
1.) Click on the Load button to load the protocol that should be deleted.
2.) Click on the Delete button to delete the currently selected protocol.
Once a protocol is removed with the Delete button, it is unable to come back. Please be
careful so that it should not be removed by mistake.
2-9 Q1E-EZ0474
3 Reference Guide
3.1 Workflow
The desktop of Stress Echo software consists of four main screens:
The Database Display
After having started the Stress Echo Application the examiner has the choice to create a New
Examination by pulling F2 key or to edit patient data by pulling F3 key.
The Acquisition Display
Within this screen you can acquire the ultrasound data for your examination.
The Review Display
The Review Display offers you several modes of displaying of acquired ultrasound Data.
The Indication Display
Here you can enter your comment and add the physician’s name. The report will contain the patient
demographics and images.
All functions can easily be accessed by toolbar buttons.
3-1 Q1E-EZ0474
3.2 The Database Display
3.2.1 New Examination

When F2:New Exam key is selected on the system, at first, it checks if there are patient name and
Patient ID entered by user. If at least one of it is missing, The following message is displayed:
When OK button is pressed, the confirmation dialog disappears and the stress echo examination is
cancelled.
Before starting new examination, be sure to enter patient name and ID on the system. If
they are not set, new examination can not be executed.
If there is a patient name and ID available, the following dialog appears:
Select patient in the menu. If it is the first time to examine the patient, register the patient by pressing
New button. If the patient has ever been examined, select the patient from the listed patients and
press OK button. In the list, the all patients whose name is the same as the current patient are
displayed. When Cancel button is pressed, the dialog disappears and the examination is cancelled.
The new examination will start against the patient selected in the menu.
3-2 Q1E-EZ0474
To select the patient, list of patients can be displayed by using filter function. By entering
the patient name in “Filter” edit box and press Activate button, the patients of the same
name are all listed. If Activate button is pressed with no name in the “Filter” edit box, the
all patients in the database will be listed.
When New button is pressed, if the same ID already exist in the previous registered data but the
patient name are different, the following error message appears.
In this case, after closing the error message, select the proper patient in the list and press OK button
instead of pressing New button. If the ID is not correct, modify the ID in Patient menu and try again the
new examination.
If Patient Name is set as the maximum size in patient menu, not all strings can be seen in
the “Filter” box, but the name can be scrolled by the caret in Filter box.
If the patient name set in patient menu includes a space, the first half of the name is
regarded as the first name and the second half is the last name. But if the patient name
includes a comma (,) , the first half of the name is regarded as last name and the second
half of the name is first name.
3-3 Q1E-EZ0474
3.2.2 Load Examination
When F3:Load Exam key is selected on the system, the status goes to Echo-Com mode, or in Echo-
Com mode the Load Examination button is clicked,
the following dialog appears:
In the above menu, the stored examination data can be loaded. Select the patient and the examination.
When the menu is invoked, the patients of the same name (last name) as the one set in Patient menu
are listed. If no name is set in Patient menu, the patients stored before are all listed.
The procedure to load examination is as follows:
(1) Select the patient in the upper region of the menu. The all examinations previously done against
the selected patient will be displayed.
(2) Select the examination from the lower region of the menu.
(3) Press OK button.
By the above procedure, the registered examination data will be loaded.
3-4 Q1E-EZ0474
- To select the patient, list of patients can be displayed by using filter function. By
entering the patient name in “Filter” edit box and press Activate button, the patients
of the same name are all listed. If Activate button is pressed with no name in the
“Filter” edit box, the all patients in the database will be listed.
- When load examination dialog appears, the last name of patient is displayed in the
“Filter” text box. For the name, if the patient name set in patient menu includes a
space, the first half of the name is regarded as first name and the second half is last
name. but if the patient name includes a comma (,) , the first half of the name is
regarded as last name and the second half is first name.
If Patient Name is set as the maximum size in patient menu, not all strings can be seen in
the “Filter” box, but the name can be scrolled by the caret in Filter box.
The other operable functions in load examination dialog are mentioned below.
3.2.2.1 Deleting a patient or examination
Press F3:LoadExam key or click on the Load Examination button . Select the patient or
examination with the ENTER key and then click on the appropriate delete button. A patient can only
be deleted after all his examinations have been deleted. After deletion, the dialog can be closed by
pressing Cancel button.
Deleting a patient or examination refers to the Echo-Com database only. The data other
than stress-echo examination like measurement results and filing images are not deleted.
3.2.2.2 Editing patient information
Press F3:LoadExam key or click on the Load Examination button . Select a patient with the
ENTER key and then click on the Edit button. The patient information window pops up and allows you
to edit the information.
When Edit button is pressed, the Edit patient data dialog appears.
3-5 Q1E-EZ0474
In the dialog, the patient data can be changed. The changed results are always updated when OK
button is pressed.
- For the first time when New examination is created for the new patient, the patient
data is created based on the data set in “Patient Menu” dialog which is invoked when
“Patient” key is pressed, but once examination is stored to the patient, the patient
data can only be changed in the above dialog.
- If entered patient name or patient ID is too long, the name or ID may not completely
be displayed Reviewing screen and Report preview.
When “Address” tab is selected, the menu to enter address appears.
In the edit box above, in the “PO Box” and “City”, the longer string than the frame can be entered. If
the string is longer than frame, it can be confirmed by moving caret in the edit box.
Confirm by clicking on the OK button, press Cancel button to exit without saving changes.
3-6 Q1E-EZ0474
When “Telephone” tab is clicked, the telephone entry menu appears. The two telephone numbers and
a fax number can be registered.
When “User” tab is clicked, the user information is displayed. Since this menu is read only, no
comment is allowed to enter.
3-7 Q1E-EZ0474
3.2.3 Archive Module
Click the Archive Module button for the handling of Stress Echo data storage. There will be 3
archives: a work archive on the harddisk, a buffer archive and a long term archive for long term
archiving. The long term archive media should an MO-disk. Please refer to 3.7 for the details of the
archive module.
3.2.4 About
Clicking , you get version information about the product for maintenance.
3.2.5 Exit
You can exit the Stress Echo Application.
Click on in the toolbar. The Stress Echo Application is ended.
3-8 Q1E-EZ0474
3.3 Data Acquisition
- Do not acquire image data if the ultrasound image is frozen. Acquiring data while the
ultrasound image is frozen will result in acquiring repeated images of the frozen
image. Always verify the ultrasound image is not frozen before and after the image
data acquisition.
- If digital data is lost during or after an exam, the exam may need to be repeated. As
an alternative to a repeat of an exam for high-risk patients, it is recommended that
you back up your digital study with video tape.
- Even if image is captured in B-color mode, the acquired image data can only be
reviewed in gray scale (not color).
- During data acquisition, the ultrasound power can not be changed. Before starting
stress-echo examination, change the ultrasound power if necessary.
3.3.1 Select Protocol

The dialog for selecting protocol appears:
The user can select the protocol for the new examination. If user presses Cancel button here, the
above dialog disappears and the examination is ended. When the protocol is selected and the OK
button is pressed, the protocol examination starts.
3-9 Q1E-EZ0474
3.3.2 Region of Interest
At this screen you can resize and reposition the region of interest:
Resize: Move the trackball-cursor to one of the corners of the yellow frame. Press the Enter key and
change the size of the region of interest, which is now displayed as a turquoise colored frame.
Reposition: Move the cursor in the center of the region of interest and press the Enter key. Now move
the region in the desired position.
Press the Enter key again to disable the tool of resize or reposition.
3.3.3 Scanning
The examination will be started by clicking the Acquire Mode button in the Toolbar.
3-10 Q1E-EZ0474
In the left section of the screen the protocol is shown. The red arrow indicates the current view. A
number of loops is already being acquired and gets continuously overwritten by new loops
(retrospective capture). The next images will be acquired as soon as the F5:Accept key is pressed
and stored to this view.
At the moment of starting the protocol, the first view of the first level should be selected for capturing
as shown above.
By pressing F7:ChgMode key in capturing, the screen can be switched to the original ultrasound
image. If the screen is changed to the original ultrasound image, the character information can be
confirmed on the screen, but measurement function can not be used. To use measurement function, it
is necessary to end the stress-echo software. If F7:ChgMode key is pressed again, the screen goes
back to stress-echo examination.
- Please make sure that the correct patient is selected before clicking the Acquire
Mode button.
- Before data acquisition, please confirm that ECG wave is displayed and R-trigger
mark is blinking on top right of the screen. Refer to 2.1 to display ECG wave on the
screen.
3.3.4 Accepting Views

Press the F5:Accept key to Accept the acquired images for the current view and to automatically
proceed to the next view. If you have an optional foot switch (EZU-FS2), it is also used to accept the
acquired images as well as F5:Accept key. Please refer to 3.8 for the details of foot switch.
The heart indicates, if the triggering is working fine (must blink according to the patient’s heart
rate). Inside the heart, a number will be displayed during the acquisition. This number indicates the
number of captured loops. Before Accepting views with the F5:Accept key make sure that at least
one loop has been captured by the system.
The yellow check mark indicates the already acquired loops in the previous view.
3-11 Q1E-EZ0474
Redo the accepting operation until all views of the first phase (REST) are marked with a yellow check
mark.
If you want to skip a certain view use your trackball and double-click with ENTER key on the next view
you want to acquire. The views which are skipped will be displayed without a checkmark next to this
views.
If you want to redo a view use your trackball and double-click with ENTER key on the appropriate view.
You have the option to go back in the protocol.
If a clock is displayed next to a phase, the image acquisition is not started automatically
but has to be started by pressing the F5:Accept key once. In this case the elapsed time
is measured and can be displayed, e.g. the time since end of exercise. (See chapter
Protocol Editor)
After the Rest-phase is completed, you will enter the Post-phase. During the Post-phase (2 phase
treadmill protocol) you will see the following screen:
The red arrow is pointing to the third view of the second phase. If configured accordingly in the system
settings now a reference image(4Ch) of the first phase (REST) is displayed in the left upper section of
the screen to find an identical view for the same view in the second phase.
3-12 Q1E-EZ0474
3.3.5 End of acquisition
When all phases of all views have been acquired, the red arrow is pointing to Stop acquisition. After
pressing F5:Accept key, the protocol is finished and go to select mode. then you will not have the
possibility to go back in protocol any more.
3.3.6 User intervention

In capturing mode, if user tries to load examination, new examination or exit, the following message
appears.
When Yes button is pressed, the examination data is registered and the status goes to the next step.
When No button is pressed, the status goes to the next step without saving the examination data. If
Cancel button is pressed, the operation is cancelled.
3-13 Q1E-EZ0474
3.4 Data Review
3.4.1 Introduction
Data Review allows the visualization and analysis of ultrasound data from exercise and
pharmacological Stress Echo examinations. This chapter introduces you to the multiple Review
Display windows and is a guide through the Wall Motion Scoring (WMS) and LV-volume
Measurements provided by the system.
3.4.2 Review Modes

Following Review Modes are available in the Reviewing images:
• Select Mode
This Mode is used for the selection of the best loops of the examination.
• Review Mode
This Mode is used for displaying the selected loops for side by side comparisons.
• Wall Motion Scoring Mode

The Wall Motion Score (WMS) measurement is an application prepared for assisting in Stress-
Echo measurements and permits subjective semi-quantitative evaluations of abnormalities with
left ventricular wall motion or changes in wall thickness.
• LV Mode
The LV Volume Measurement Tool is designed to measure the Left Ventricular Volume of the
acquired Stress levels in 2 Chamber and 4 Chamber view.
3-14 Q1E-EZ0474
3.4.3 Select Mode
Click on the Select Mode button to make a selection of all the acquired images. The select
mode is also available when capturing image is finished. The selected images are used in the review
mode, in the wall motion scoring and in the LV-volume measurements. The following window appears.
All loops of the first view in the first phase (REST) are displayed. In this case 4 loops for every view
have been acquired. All loops are displayed synchronously.
1.) To select the best loop for reviewing click into the image with the ENTER key. The image is
marked by a green frame. The next view is automatically displayed.
2.) Redo this selection for every view in every phase
If more than 4 loops per view have been acquired, the navigate-buttons on the left-hand-side of the
screen will be active and can be used to toggle through all loops:
3-15 Q1E-EZ0474
If no loops are selected manually, the default-loops will be displayed in the review-part
(marked red when entering the select-page).
3.4.4 Videobar
The toolbar provides several functions for controlling of displayed loops. This Videobar controls every
displayed loop at Select, Review or WMS Display.
3.4.4.1 Toggle Play
Clicking starts and stops the loops in the screen.
For decreasing the speed of the loop click on .
For increasing the speed of the loop click on .
Clicking offers a different kind of loop animation to the user. It is called the Forward/Backward
play mode. The loop sequence is continuously displayed from the start of sequence to the end of
sequence and reverse.
3.4.4.2 Start of sequence
Click on for showing the first frame of the loops.
3.4.4.3 Step backward
Click on for decrement of the frame.
3.4.4.4 Step forward
Click on for increment of the frame.
3-16 Q1E-EZ0474
3.4.4.5 End of sequence
Click on for going to the last frame.
The last four buttons, described above, allow a frame by frame view of the study.
3.4.4.6 Labels on/off
Click on to display the information of an image as an overlay on it. Available information are view,
phase, heart rate and time.
If the capturing frame set in examination is small, the labels may overlap each other on
the screen. In the case, the labels can be invisible by clicking button again.
3.4.5 Customizing the upper toolbar

Click into the toolbar with the Undo key, following button appears:
After clicking this button a dialog for customizing the toolbar will be opened. Now the appearance of
the toolbar can be fitted to the user’s purpose:
The left list displays available buttons that can be added to the toolbar. The toolbar buttons are listed
in the right window.
3-17 Q1E-EZ0474
Addition of Button
The button can be added to tool bar as follows:
(1) Select a button in “Available toolbar buttons”
(2) Press Add button.
Then the selected button appears in “Current toolbar button”.
The display order of the added button can be changed by moving the button in the “Current toolbar
button” region with it pushed.
3-18 Q1E-EZ0474
Removal of Button
The button can be removed from toolbar as follows:
(1) Select a button in “Current toolbar buttons” which should be removed.
(2) Press Remove button.
Then the selected button is removed from “Current toolbar buttons” and appears in “Available toolbar
buttons”.
3-19 Q1E-EZ0474
3.4.6 Review Mode
3.4.6.1 Display of Image
By pressing button, the image data can be reviewed.
There are three types of image display method as follows:
Display method Contents
Direct Display Image is selected by directly selecting a view or a level.
Extract Display Image is selected by designating the desirable combination of view and
level.
Shuffle Display The images of all views and all levels can be reviewed in the size of fixed
4-divided image.
The details are as follows:
(1) Direct Display
The images are displayed by directly clicking the name of a view or a level. When a view is
clicked, the all levels of the view are displayed. When a level is clicked, the all views of the level
are displayed.
(Example) When a level “Post” is clicked
LAx Post SAx Post
4Ch Post 2Ch Post
The loop images of all views (Lax, SAx, 4Ch, 2Ch) of the selected level “Post” are displayed.
3-20 Q1E-EZ0474
(2) Extract Display
Images are displayed by designating the desirable levels and views.
After checking the check box next to level or view, press button.
Then the selected levels and views are displayed on the screen.
(Example) Extract Display
SAx Rest SAx Post
4Ch Rest 4Ch Post
2Ch Rest 2Ch Post
Check on “Rest” and “Post” for level, and “SAx”, “4Ch” and “2Ch” for View.
By pressing button, the six loop images are displayed as the combination of selected levels
and views are displayed.
3-21 Q1E-EZ0474
(3) Shuffle Display
The shuffle display is used to look at the images of all levels and all views. The number of images on
the screen is fixed to four. All images can be confirmed on the screen by changing the combination of
the four images.
The procedure is as follows:
(1) Press button
(2) Select the initial images by Direct Display.
(3) Confirm the images by changing with upper/lower button.
(Example) Shuffle Display
(1) Press button
(2) Display the initial images by selecting directly the “Rest”.
(Up to 4 images are displayed at the same time).
LAx Rest SAx Rest
4Ch Rest 2Ch Rest
3-22 Q1E-EZ0474
(iii) By pressing button, the images are changed.
If lower button is continuously pressed, the images are actually changed as shown below. When all
images are displayed, the screen displays the initial images.
The has also upper button. The images can be changed in both upper and lower direction.
When shuffle button is pressed, the button can not be operable.
3-23 Q1E-EZ0474
3.4.6.2 Other operations
(1) Disable Image
By clicking button which is next to level or view, the selected image becomes not visible.
(Example) Disable Image
In Treadmill protocol, if the views “LAx” and “SAx” are captured against the level “Post” but “4Ch” and
“2Ch” are not captured, the displayed images are as follows when “Post” is directly clicked.
LAx Post SAx Post
Since 4Ch and 2Ch are not stored, there are regions for the views but no image is displayed on the
screen. To make the Images and regions of 4Ch and 2Ch invisible, click the image display mark
next to the views. The pressed mark is changed to .
3-24 Q1E-EZ0474
By pressing the “Post” again, images are displayed as follows:
LAx Post
SAx Post
When the images are displayed by Extract method, this setting is not effective
3-25 Q1E-EZ0474
(2) Expand Image
The image is enlarged by double-clicking.
(Exapmle)
LAx Post SAx Post
4Ch Post 2Ch Post
On the screen, if a view “LAx” of the level “Post” is double-clicked, the selected image is enlarged.
LAx Post
By double-clicking the image, it is changed again to the original size.
3-26 Q1E-EZ0474
3.4.7 Wall Motion Scoring Mode
3.4.7.1 Outline of WMS

The Wall Motion Score (WMS) measurement is an application prepared for assisting in Stress-Echo
measurements and permits subjective semi-quantitative evaluations of abnormalities with left
ventricular wall motion or changes in wall thickness. The left ventricle is divided into segments to score
each segment to evaluate the degree of abnormality using the motion of the walls of the
anterior/posterior and entire left ventricle from the sum of scores in each segment. Evaluation is also
possible using percentages that account for a normal myocardium.
3.4.7.2 Segmenting the Left Ventricle

As recommended by American Society of Echocardiography, ASE, the left ventricle is divided into 16
segments for evaluation based on the following four cross sections:
(1) parasternal long axis, LAx
(2) parasternal short axis, SAx
(3) apical four chamber, 4Ch
(4) apical two chamber, 2Ch
3.4.7.3 Scoring Wall Motion

The degree of abnormality of the wall motion is evaluated subjectively for each segment of the left
ventricle with scores. The definition of scoring employed by the system in the standard configuration is
based on the ASE standards and the colors corresponding to scores are shown in the table below:
Score Degree of abnormality of wall motion Color
x Cannot evaluate
Grey
1 Normal
Green
2 Hypokinetic
Yellow
3 Akinetic
Blue
4 Dyskinetic
Red
3-27 Q1E-EZ0474
Click on button on the tool bar to score the images. The following screen appears:
Tool Bar
Tool Space
The following buttons are displayed in the tool space. These buttons allow the following functionality:
3-28 Q1E-EZ0474
All Visible Loops Toggle Display WMS Comment
Normal button button button
All visible loops Toggles between Type a comment
will be scored with loops and WMS- that will appear in
Score"1" graphics in the the final report
review-monitor
Shuffle button Display Selected

Explained in Image is changed Loops
chapter in Shuffle mode Explained in
chapter
For better orientation you can enable the overlay signal such as the patient name, phase,
view for example. Refer to 3.4.4.6, Labels on/off.
Click into an image to set it active (a red frame is displayed around it). The corresponding WMS-
graphic is displayed in the upper left window as depicted in the following image:
3-29 Q1E-EZ0474
1.) To score the image click on the appropriate colored button below the upper left window and
then into the segment of the WMS-graphic to be scored.
means that all segments will be set to color green (score 1).
(Grey) means that the segment can't be scored (no value).
(Green) means that the segment is normal (score 1).
(Yellow) means that the segment is hypokinetic (score 2).
(Blue) means that the segment is akinetic (score 3).
(Red) means that the segment is dyskinetic (score 4).
2.) Redo 1. for all segments of the chosen view.

3.) Redo 1. and 2. for all views. To change the views click on their names in the lower left window.
4.) Redo the scoring for all phases of the Stress-Echo examination
Click on the printer icon of each phase to enable/disable the printer to print out the WMS report.
The default value is disabled which means that the appropriate scoring of phase is not printed on the
report. To be enable, please click on the printer icon.
3-30 Q1E-EZ0474
Clicking on the All Visible Loops Normal button sets all displayed images to normal.
Clicking on the Edit Comment button during WMS allows you to enter a comment which will be
printed out at the end of the report. The patient data and the WMS are automatically transferred to the
report.
3-31 Q1E-EZ0474
Clicking on the Toggle Display button in tool space results in the following screen:
The WMS-graphics are displayed according to the selection of phases and views. The acquired loop
corresponding to the active WMS-graphic is displayed in the upper left window.
To change the active WMS-graphic click into the interesting WMS-graphic. The corresponding loop is
displayed in the upper left window automatically.
3-32 Q1E-EZ0474
Example:
With button clicked on, if you select all phases and views clicking into their check boxes and
then on the Display Selected Loops button the following screen results. (In order to
display all selected, all checkboxes can be left empty)
3.4.8 LV Volume Measurements
Description
The LV Volume Measurement Tool is designed to measure the Left Ventricular Volume of the
acquired Stress levels in 2 Chamber and 4 Chamber view.
The measurements are based on the calibration-information provided with the stored
Examination data. If no calibration-information is provided. The LV-mode button remains
inactive.
3-33 Q1E-EZ0474
1.) Click on the LV Mode button to measure the volumes. The following screen appears:
2.) Select the Stress level you want to measure the volume in.
3.) Select the enddiastolic volume in the left image with the videotoolbar.
4.) Start tracing the endocardium at the basal inferior segment (as shown in the picture above).
Trace by setting support points with the ENTER key.
5.) Finish tracing at basal anterior segment by clicking the UNDO key.
3-34 Q1E-EZ0474
6.) The midaxis appears. When arrow cursor is on the midaxis, the mark is displayed. With the
mark displayed, corrections of the midaxis can be performed by clicking and holding the ENTER
key on the midaxis.
7.) Repeat 3 to 6 in the right window to mark the endsystolic volume. The results of the monoplane
calculation are shown:
8.) In order to get biplane results click on 4 Ch and repeat 3 to 7.
9.) After completing the 4-Chamber measurements, the results of the biplane calculation are shown.
- Delete supporting points by clicking them with the UNDO key.
- Biplane volume measurement is displayed when the length of LV does not differ more
than 20% in 2 chamber and 4 chamber view. The slice number for Biplane volume is
20. (Fixed. Cannot be changed)
In order to get the Indizes-Values (EDVI, ESVI, SVI, COI), the height and weight of the patient have to
be entered as shown in the following image: (BSA is automatically calculated)
The values of EF, SV, CO, EDVI, ESVI, SVI and COI are calculated from measured Volume. Since
there are three ways to get Volume, the method to calculate the Volume is displayed with
“Calculations ()”. The rule to decide the one of three ways to calculate Volume is as follows:
- If “Vol.Bipl” is displayed, the calculation method is “Biplane”.
- If “Vol.Bipl” is not displayed and Length of “Diast” in 2ch is longer than that in 4ch, the calculation
method is “2ch”.
- If “Vol.Bipl” is not displayed and Length of “Diast” in 2ch is shorter than that in 4ch, the calculation
method is “4ch”.
3-35 Q1E-EZ0474
3.4.9 Save & Export
- Before saving or reviewing a patient study file, always double check the patient name.
This provides additional assurance that the stored images correspond with the
correct patient name.
- Do not change disks during a given patient's study. If you do, a message appears
that tells you to put the original disk back in the disk drive. This prevents storage of
images with the incorrect patient name.
- Do not remove diskettes from the disk drive during disk read and write operations
(when the disk drive light is on). Removing the diskette during read and write
operations can cause incomplete storage of data files, resulting in data loss.
3.4.9.1 Save Examination
Click on in order to save the examination to the database. Saving an examination will save the
patient-information, the loops, the WMS-Scoring and the LV-Volume measurements.
3.4.9.2 Save Examination (only selected loops)
Click on the Save Examination (only selected loops) button to only save the selected images
during the selection of the best loops described in the section Select Mode.
If you do not save the examination using one of the buttons described above, all data will
be lost when closing the patient or exiting the software.
3.4.9.3 Export Examination
Click on the Export Examination button in order to export a Stress Echo study in Echo-Com
format. The following window appears:
Select a directory, where you wish to save the study to.
The default file-name is: Lastname, firstname, date of birth. The file name can be changed.
3-36 Q1E-EZ0474
Current Version of stress echo software does not support Importing Examination.
3.4.9.4 Exporting Images

Click on in order to export BMP- or AVI-files of selected loops, e.g. a quad-screen or split-screen.
BMP- or AVI-files can then be imported in presentations, posters, papers etc.
The Export-function is available in the Review- or WMS-mode.
3.4.9.5 Export AVI-files

Select a constellation of images/loops in the Review- or WMS-mode. Click on when images are
playing (Play-button in the review-toolbar must be active) in order to export an AVI-file. Select a folder
to export the file and confirm with Save button.
3.4.9.6 Export BMP-files

Select a constellation of images/loops in the Review- or WMS-mode. Click on when images are
not playing (Toggle Play button in the review-toolbar must not be active) in order to export a BMP-file.
Select a folder to export the file and confirm with Save button.
3.5 Print to PC-Priner

Reports for WMS and LV can be printed:
Click on the PRINT button , if available in the toolbar or select FILE/PRINT from the pulldown
menu in WMS mode or in LV mode to print out a report.
- To see a print preview on the screen before printing click on the Report Preview
button if available in the toolbar.
- If the preview image is displayed in the maximum magnification, the scroll operation
of the preview screen works a little slowly.
3-37 Q1E-EZ0474
Printing and Print Preview is operable only when PC-Printer is connected to the system.
Please ask the service devision of our company for the installation of PC-Printer
- The printer setup is described in the following chapter.
- Scores of a particular phase are only printed out if the printing icon of the phase
during the WMS is active. See chapter Wall Motion Scoring Mode.
- To print out an indication, click Indication button on the toolbar and enter the text.
The indication will be printed out as a headline in the report.
- The comment that can be entered with the Edit Comment button during WMS will be
printed out at the end of the report as well
- When LV-Report is printed out, the two figures of Left Ventricle (Systole and Diastole)
are overlapped based on the trace-end point. Therefore, according to the position of
end point, there is the case that the two figures go over the frame.
The patient data and the WMS are automatically transferred to the report.
3.5.1 Printer Setup

In order to access the Printer Setup, you have to be in either the WMS-mode or in the LV-mode.
Select CTRL+Shift+P on your keyboard or File/Printer Setup from the pulldown menu. The following
window pops up.
In the printer section you can select the printer that is used for printing. Select a printer by clicking on
the down arrow next to the text field. The drop down list now displays the available printers. Click on a
printer name with the ENTER key.
This print function does not support the SCSI-Printer. Please refer to the instruction
manual for the system.
3-38 Q1E-EZ0474
In the lower left section you can choose the paper size. Select the desired format from the drop down
list. The second drop down list allows you to select the paper source of your printer.
In the lower right section you can select the orientation of the sheet. Click into the appropriate radio
button to select portrait or landscape.
3-39 Q1E-EZ0474
3.6 Indication
Clicking the Indication button opens following window:
Here you can write down your indication and the name of the interpreter. Both statements will be
printed out as a headline in the report.
3-40 Q1E-EZ0474
3.7 Archive Module
In this section, the Archive Module for data saving is generally explained. For easy use, it is
strongly recommended not to use long term archive. To transfer the stored data to MO,
please follow section 3.8.
The concept of the Archive Module is as follows:
Captured Image Data
Work Archive Buffer Archive Long Term

Transfer stored data Convert to Long Archive
(Hard Disk) to MO by User (MO) Term Archive
(MO)
The archive module is splitted in three groups: working-, buffer- and longterm archive.
In the work archive, the actual data will be stored. By default, the work archive is located on
the harddisk. Please copy the work archive to buffer archive; depenting on the quantity once
a day, a week or a month etc. This buffer archive should be located on another media, eg. an
MO-disk.
In the buffer archive the data will be collected, until a specified capacity in MegaByte (MB)
has been reached. Then the archive will be finished and transferred into the long term
archive.
The long term archive is for the final archiving of the data. The media has reached its
specified capacity, can be removed from the diskdrive and finally stored in a different place.
Once the data has been moved to the buffer- or long term archive, it is not possible to
move them back again. This procedure is irreversible!
3-41 Q1E-EZ0474
3.7.1 Transferring data into the buffer archive
1. Open the archive module, by doubleclicking the symbol with the ENTER key.
2. Mark the studies you want to move from the work archive by checking the box in front of them.
The studies are sorted by date. Be sure that the total size of the marked studies doesn’t
overmatch the size of the buffer archive.
3. If there’s no buffer archive available or the present archives are full, create a new buffer archive:
(1) Insert a formatted MO-Disk into the MO-drive.
(2) Move the mouse-cursor in the buffer archive window.
(3) Press UNDO key and choose “New“. The following window appears:
3-42 Q1E-EZ0474
(4) Insert a name of the archive in the “Label“-field, e.g. MO3
(5) It is possible to type in additional information in the “Info“-field.

(6) In the “Path“-field type: “D:” . The letter ‘D’ indicates the destination drive.
(7) In the field “size” pretend the final size of the archive in MB. For your information: it is
recommended to keep 30 to 40 MB free.
(8) Confirm with OK button.
4. Mark the destination archive. The active destination archive is indicated by a yellow cylinder.
5. Press Transfer selected files button.
The checked studies will be moved into the buffer archive (MO-disk) and deleted in the working
archive (harddisk). This process may take a few minutes, depending on the quantity of data.
During the copy-process no new events are allowed to be acquired or stored!
Please enter only drive letter in “Pass” edit box for buffer archive.
3-43 Q1E-EZ0474
3.7.2 Transferring data into the long term archive
When the pretended maximum quantity of data has been reached, the data can be transferred into the
long term archive.
1. Mark the archive to be transferred active by clicking on it once with the ENTER key.
2. Then press the UNDO key once and click in the appearing menu “convert to” the window “long
term archive” with the UNDO key.
3. The following window appears:
4. Delete the entry in the field “Path:” and confirm with OK button.
5. The archive appears in the window “long term archive”.
6. Click with the UNDO key on the archive and choose the option “Accessability”.
7. Deactivate the field “Direct Access” (has to be unchecked) and confirm with OK button.
Now the MO-disk can be removed from the drive and stored in a different place.
3-44 Q1E-EZ0474
3.7.3 Recall data out of the long term archive
When you open a study which data is stored in the long term archive, a browsing window will appear.
You will be requested for the media where the data has been stored at. Type in the source path (e.g.
D: ) and insert the requested media (e.g. MO3).
After this has been done, press the Start Temporary Storage button. The data will be copied to the
temporary archive on the harddisk. Now the data is load.
3-45 Q1E-EZ0474
3.8 MO Archive
The system saves the stress-echo examination data to hard disk. The examination data stored in hard
disk should periodically be transferred to MO because the capacity of the hard disk has limitation.
To transfer the examination data to MO or to load the examination data from MO, please follow the
procedures below.
3.8.1 Preparation
（1）Prepare the empty MO disk (640MB)
（2）Format the MO disk
（Please refer to the instruction manual of the system for the way of format）
For the database management, do not save the data other than stress-echo examination
to MO. Since the examination data stored to MO are managed in order of the date,
please use the same MO after starting record until the stored size of the MO becomes full
and it becomes impossible to save.
3-46 Q1E-EZ0474
3.8.2 Initial Registration of MO
Please do the followings only when the first MO is used to save data.
Invoke Archive module, select “MO” in buffer archive and press UNDO key, then select “Edit” in the
menu list as shown below.
The following dialog box appears when the “Edit” is selected.
In the “Edit Archive Info” dialog, please modify the following contents.
3-47 Q1E-EZ0474
Items Before Modification After Modification
Info Buffer Archive for The date of the first examination data stored to the MO
Examination Data “M/D/Y”（M:Month, D:Day, Y:Year）
(Ex.) 5/5/2001
Size 0 600
(The size should be 30 to 40 MB smaller than MO
capacity)
If the date of the first examination data stored to MO is May 5, 2001, the settings after modification are
as follows:
When the modification is finished, please press OK button to close the menu.
For the date of the first examination data, please confirm the data on Work Archive.
Next, paste the label as follows in order to clarify that the MO is for stress-echo examination only.
MO
640
The examination data are saved

Stress-Echo Examination Data from May 5, 2001 on this MO
5/5/2001 ∼
Then the new MO is prepared for use.
3-48 Q1E-EZ0474
3.8.3 Transfer to MO
The examination data can be transferred from hard disk to MO in the following way.
(1) Invoke Archive Module
The work archive shows the contents of hard disk.
（2）Select the data which should be transferred to MO in Work Archive
To select the data, open the work archive tree by clicking the node on the work archive.
Node
3-49 Q1E-EZ0474
Then the tree is opened as follows.
The examination data transferred to MO can be selected by setting the check box to On. It can be
selected in the types shown below.
Selectable node Selected Data Select method
All data All examination data in the hard Check on the “Exam Data”
disk
Year Examination data for the year Check on the year.
Month Examination data of a month Check on the month
Day Examination data in a day Check on the day
Examination One Examination data Check on the examination data
3-50 Q1E-EZ0474
(Example) Data transfer in a month
The following procedure shows the case when the examination data in July are transferred to MO.
594
589
Check this
（1）Check on “July” on work archive
Then the all examinations stored in July are selected.
（2）Select the destination in Buffer Archive. (Be sure to select “MO”)
594
589
3-51 Q1E-EZ0474
The label “MO” means that the buffer archive is currently used to save the Examination
data. If the other buffer archive is selected, the transferred data will not be read and write
correctly.
（3）Press Transfer selected Files button
594
589
The examination data are transferred when the button is pressed. If the free space of MO is not
enough to transfer the data, the following message appears.
When the above message appears, press OK button and follow “3.8.4 When not enough space left in
MO”, then try again to transfer data to MO.
3-52 Q1E-EZ0474
If the data other than stress-echo examination are already stored to MO, the size of the
other data is not added to the buffer archive amount. In the case, the size of buffer
archive is smaller than the actual stored size in MO. If buffer archive has enough space to
transfer examination data but the actual MO is full, the message “No space left in
selected Archive” does not appear and no data are transferred to MO as a result. In this
case, please move the other data in MO to the other MO or prepare new MO and try
again to transfer data.
3-53 Q1E-EZ0474
When the examination data are properly transferred to MO, the examination data in hard disk are
removed.
594
589
Please open the buffer archive “MO”, then the transferred data of July exist in it.
594
589
The examination data has been successfully transferred to MO.
3-54 Q1E-EZ0474
3.8.4 When not enough space left in MO
When examination data are transferred to MO but not enough space is left in MO, please eject the MO
and insert the new MO into the drive.
To make the new MO enable, do smoothly the following procedures.
（1） Select the current buffer archive “MO” and press UNDO key, then select “Edit” in the list.
594
589
3-55 Q1E-EZ0474
Then the following MO setting menu appears.
The date displayed in “Info” edit box shows the date of first examination stored to the MO.
（2）Modify the following settings.
Item Settings
Label The “MO” should be changed to the date of the last examination data
stored to the MO.The format should be “M/D/Y”. (M:Month, D:Day,
Y:Year)
Info The date of the last examination data stored to MO should be added
with “TO”. The format should be “TO M/D/Y”.(M:Month, D:Day,
Y:Year)
Please confirm Buffer Archive on Archive module for the date of last examination data
stored to MO.
After the modification, the settings are changed as follows:
Please close the menu by pressing OK button.
The above settings mean the MO has examination data from July 7, 2001 to July 28, 2001.
3-56 Q1E-EZ0474
（3）Add the date of last examination data stored to MO on the label.
If the date of last examination is July 28, 2001, please add “7/28/2001” to the MO label.
MO MO
640 Add the date of last
640
Examination
Stress-Echo Examination Data Stress-Echo Examination Data
7/7/2001 ∼ 7/7/2001 ∼ 7/28/2001
While MO is used When MO becomes full
Please keep the labeled MO in the safe place.
Next, the new MO needs to be registered so that it can be used.
3-57 Q1E-EZ0474
（4）Prepare new MO and register it to buffer archive
Prepare the formatted 640MB MO disk and register it to buffer archive.
Invoke Archive module and press UNDO key on the white region in buffer archive.
Then the following menu appears.
594
589
597
3-58 Q1E-EZ0474
By selecting “New”, the following dialog box appears.
Please enter the following contents in the above “Create New Archive” dialog.
Item Entry Remarks
Label MO Label “MO” for buffer archive
Info M/D/Y The date of the first examination data

stored to the MO. (Ex.) 8/4/2001
Path D: Drive letter for MO
Size 600 Size of MO
(The size should be 30 to 40 MB smaller

than MO capacity)
In the above table, the items except “Info” should be the same contents as the ones in “Entry” column.
If the date of first examination data stored to MO is August 4, 2001, the dialog should be as follows:
3-59 Q1E-EZ0474
Please confirm work archive for the date of the first examination data stored to MO.
By pressing OK button, the registration of new MO has been completed.
In addition, to use the new MO for stress-echo examination only, please paste the label on it. The date
written in bottom left shows the date of the first examination data stored to MO.
MO
640
Stress-Echo Examination Data
8/4/2001 ∼
By the all above procedures, the old MO is ejected from drive and new MO is ready for use. The
updated buffer archive is as follows:
594
589
597
Ejected MO
New MO
3-60 Q1E-EZ0474
3.8.5 Load Data from MO
The examination data can be loaded from MO in the normal way.
As shown above, the examination data can be loaded by selecting patient and examination and
pressing OK button.
If the following message appears right after pressing OK button, the MO may be not inserted to drive
or wrong MO may be inserted.
After closing the message by pressing OK button, please confirm the date of the required examination
data and insert the right MO into drive, then try to load again.
3-61 Q1E-EZ0474
For example, if load examination fails to load the data stored on July 14, 2001, find the MO which has
the examination data by referring to the label on MO and insert the MO to drive.
MO
640
Examination data on July 14, 2001

Stress-Echo Examination Data are kept in this MO.
7/7/2001 ∼ 7/28/2001
3-62 Q1E-EZ0474
3.9 Foot Switch
The optional foot switch (EZU-FS2) can be used for accepting the acquired images as well
as F5 Accept key.
To use the Foot Switch for stress echo software, please do the following steps:
Select “Main Menu”, “Setup”, “System” then “Foot SW” as follows:
Then the dialog for foot switch setting appears.
In the above dialog, select any of the followings and press OK button.
- Print/Capture Start Stop
- Probe Select/Capture Start Stop
- Only “Capture Start Stop”
The first two selections mean that the foot switch can be used for “Print” or “Probe Select”
when the system is not capturing images.
With the setting, the Foot Switch works as Accept function for Stress Echo Examination.
Please use the left pedal (USER) of the foot switch to accept the acquired images.
3-63 Q1E-EZ0474
4 Index
Acquisition Display, 3-1 New Examination, 3-2
Adding an indication, 3-38 Print Preview, 3-38
Archive Module, 3-8, 3-41 Printing a report, 3-38
Configuration Protocol Editor, 2-6
Options, 2-2 Review Display, 3-1
Printer, 3-38 Review Mode, 3-20
Configuring Echo-Com, 2-2 Safety Precautions, 1-2
Data Acquisition, 3-9 Select Mode, 3-15
Data Review, 3-14 Selecting images, 3-15
Deleting a patient or examination, 3-5 System Description, 1-3
Editing patient information, 3-5 Text Features, 1-1
GUI, 1-4 Toolbar, 1-4
Intended Use, 1-3 Toolspace, 1-4
Load Examination, 3-4 Wall Motion Scoring, 3-28, 3-34
LV Volume Measurement, 3-33 Workspace, 1-4
MO Archive, 3-46
4-1 Q1E-EZ0474
WideView Software
Model EZU-WS2
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
To k y o , J a p a n
Q1E-EZ0472-2
Dec. 2001
Copyright  Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2001. All rights reserved.

Preface
We thank you for your procurement of Hitachi’s EZU-WS2 [Wide View Image Display Software].
In order to use the software safely and properly and as well to keep its function normally for long
time it is most important for you to understand the function, operation and maintenance fully.
We ask you, therefore, to read carefully this manual before starting the use of it.
(1) Q1E-EZ0472
Contents
Page
Chapter 1 General ...................................................................................................1 - 1
1.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................1 - 1
1.2 Feature .........................................................................................................................1 - 1
Chapter 2 Configration............................................................................................2 - 1
2.1 Components..................................................................................................................2 - 1
2.2 Installation ...................................................................................................................2 - 1
Chapter 3 Use key function .....................................................................................3 - 1

3.1 Use key for WideView ..................................................................................................3 - 1
Chapter 4 Starting...................................................................................................4 - 1
4.1 Preparation...................................................................................................................4 - 1
4.2 Starting method ...........................................................................................................4 - 1
Chapter 5 Operation ................................................................................................5 - 1

5.1 General .........................................................................................................................5 - 1
5.2 Select WideView option................................................................................................5 - 1
5.3 Displaying WideView function.....................................................................................5 - 1
5.4 Capture image ..............................................................................................................5 - 3
5.5 Wide View function ......................................................................................................5 - 3
5.6 Save image....................................................................................................................5 - 4
5.7 Entry comment.............................................................................................................5 - 4
5.8 Measurement................................................................................................................5 - 5
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................6 - 1
Chapter 7 Specification ...........................................................................................7 - 1

7.1 Specification of softwarel .............................................................................................7 - 1
(2) Q1E-EZ0472
Chapter 1 General
1.1 Outline
EZU-WS2 [Wide View Image Display Software] enables you to display the ultrasound image
of wide range regardless of the display width of probe by utilizing B-mode image captured
with the scanner.
1.2 Features
(1) Wide view image display of B-mode image:
By displaying the wide view image it is possible to observe a long and large organ
exceeding the display width of probe.
(2) Use of Probe:

It is possible to display the wide view image just using a general linear or convex probe.
(3) Real time display:

As the wide view image is produced and displayed real time by moving the probe, no
waiting time is needed. So, it is easy to obtain images of full diagnostic information.
(4) Image filing function:

It is possible to record displayed images in BMP, TIFF or JPEG type.
1-1 Q1E-EZ0472
Chapter 2 Configuration
2.1 Components
(1) Instruction manual…………………………………………1 set
2.2 Installation
There are two cases in installing.
(1) The installation has been done when the scanner is delivered from our factory.
(2) For existing system the installation should be done by engineer(s) of HMC or of our
authorized agent in your area.
< Notice >

Dismantle or modification of the system should not be conducted except field
engineer(s) trained by our specified procedures.
2-1 Q1E-EZ0472
Chapter 3 Use key function
3.1 Use key for WideView
[7] [8] [9] [2] [3] [4]
Esc ∼ ! @ # $ % ＾ & * ( ) ￣
_
+ Back
Space Del MAIN VCR
[1]
｀ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MENU ORIG
↑
｛
UP
｛
↑
Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P Enter Ins DEPTH GAIN
[6]
[
[
↑
GS :
--
HC
Caps Lock
AC
S D
FL
F G H J K L ”
A ; ＼
´
CRL ← → BPD
〈〉
B↑ N↓
?
Shift Z X C V M , . Shift
/
Ctrl Alt Patient Space Anno− Character Character Ctrl

[12]
tation Clear
End
Exam
FUNCTION
PREV
GUIDE
NEXT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OBLIQUE SWEEP
SPEED
[20]
[5] PROBE PHYSIO
OPTION
3D
CONTRAST
IMAGE
PROCESS
MODE
DEPENDED
USER
1
USER
2
SAMPLE BASELINE
[14]
LENGTH
ZOOM
[10] [15]
M - WRITE READ S - WRITE REF FREQ V-SCALE F-STEPS
M
dTHI
CW PW
SOUND VOL US POWER FOCUS DEPTH/MAG

CFI CFA
IMAGE SELECT
[13]
DUAL
SINGLE
REPORT MEAS MENU
.
1 B
[16] L（U） R（D）
TRACKBALL
CLEAR TRACE POINTER PRIORITY
[11] PRINT
REC CALIP
[17]
FREEZE
2 UNDO ENTER REC
1
COLOR
Full Digital POSI／SIZE
Architecture
[22]
[18]
[26] [23] [19] [21]
[24] [25]
[1] DEPTH GAIN slide volume

It is to switch over the gain of every depth(8 steps) of B-mode image.
[2] Annotation key
It is to select abbreviations related to the diagnosis from the list and to display it.
[3] CHARACTER key
It is to switch over the mode to character entry mode in which characters can be entered
from character entry keyboard.
3-1 Q1E-EZ0472
[4] CHARACTER CLEAR key
All characters entered are cleared off.
[5] PROBE key
It is to select the probe which can be used with EZU-WS2.
[6] OPTION key
It is to select the function.
[7] IMAGE PROCESS key
It is to select the image processing function.
[8] MODE DEPENDED key
It is to select the function used very frequently among various kinds of function in MAIN
MENU.
[9] USER 1 key and USER 2 key
These are to select the function set in each key respectively.
[10] S-WRITE key
It is to record the wide view image on the screen into the storage of selecting destination.
[11] REPORT, MEASUREMENT, CLEAR, TRACE and CALIP keys
These are to start each measurement.
[12] REF FREQ toggle
It is to switch over the probe frequency and reference frequency respectively.
[13] US POWER toggle
It is to switch over the ultrasound output power from probe.
[14] ZOOM key
It is to put ON/OFF the image enlarging or reducing function of wide view image.
[15] DEPTH/MAG key
It is to switch over the magnifying ratio during the image enlarging or reducing function is
being used.
[16] ANGLE toggle
It is to switch over the target to be rotated by ANGLE encoder.
[17] ANGLE encoder
It is to rotate the wide view image and probe mark.
[18] POINTER key
It is to put on or off the display of pointer.
[19] B mode selection key and encoder
When a switch at the center of knob is pressed, the B-mode is selected. When an outside of
the knob is rotated, gain compensating values of B image are switched over.
3-2 Q1E-EZ0472
[20] CFM mode selecting key and encoder knob
When a switch at the center of knob is pressed, the CFM-mode is selected. When an
outside of the knob is rotated, gain compensating values of CFM image are switched over.
[21] Freeze key
It is to finish producing the wide view image.
[22] REC1 and REC2 keys
These are to execute the function registered.
[23] TRACKBALL
It is used for various kinds of functions in which two-dimensional manipulation is done.
[24] TRACKBALL PRIORITY toggle
It is to switch over manually the using priority of trackball under a status where multiple
functions in which the trackball is used are operated.
[25] ENTER key
It works as [Setting or Entering] to such functions as measurement and dialogue.
[26] UNDO key
It works as [Cancellation] to the function like measurement and so on. Also it terminates
the screen saver.
3-3 Q1E-EZ0472
Chapter 4 Start of scanner
4.1 Preparation
Regarding the start of scanner, probe connection, switching over the probe and other general
operation refer to the instruction manual for the scanner.
4.2 Starting method

Be noted that the WideView function does not work if 5 points as mentioned below are not
fulfilled.
(1) It is necessary that the probe compatible to the option is connected to the scanner and that
probe is selected.
(2) Release the freeze mode.
(3) Set to B-mode single image and do not upside-down the image.
(4) Finish the pan-zoom function.
In case other optional functions (3D, Stress echo and so on) are being operated, finish them.
＜Caution＞
1) EZU-WS2 can not be started at the urgent starting.
2) Before shutting down the equipment, EZU-WS2 function shuld be finished.
4-1 Q1E-EZ0472
Chapter 5 Operation
5.1 Outline
When EZU-WS2 software is combined with the scanner it becomes possible to display a wide view
image regardless of the display width of probe. It is realized by utilizing B-mode image captured
with the ultrasound scanner.
5.2 Select WideView image option
When OPTION key is pressed, selectable optional functions (base menu) are displayed. (Fig. 5.2-1)
Fig. 5.2-1 Optional functions base menus
When is selected, a function menu related to WideView is displayed. (Fig. 5.2-2)

1
Fig. 5.2-2 Function menus (At WideView pause)

Meantime, it is possible to return to Base menu by pressing F1 BaseMenu.
Also, it is possible to do an initial setting by Application menu so that the function menu (Fig.
5.2-2) is directly displayed when OPTION key is pressed. (Refer to the Instruction Manual,
Item 8.3.10 (3))
OFF
When 7 of the function menu is set to stop, the status turns to WideView
7 Rec, and the function menu shown in Fig. 5.2-2 changes to the one as shown in
Fig. 5.2-3.
ON
Fig. 5.2-3 Function menus (At WideView Rec)

Note1: It becomes SCC:0, Density:1 and Focus:Single into the Wide View mode.
Note2: When EZU-WS2 is started from 3D mode, only 1 time of the beginning takes about 20
seconds by starting.
5.3 Display WideView function

In this software there are three image display modes to be used according to the work
situation. In each mode the selectable function is differen. Switching over of the mode is done
by in the function menu and by Freeze key.
7
Also, depending on the set condition REC

1 or REC
2 keys and the stop switch can be used.
(Refer to the equipment Instruction Manual.)
5-1 Q1E-EZ0472
a) PAUSE: Image capture waiting mode
･ In this mode an original image captured by
the scanner is displayed.
･ At the starting time the mode is always in
the waiting mode. Also, in case Freeze is
released in the image display mode (STOP)
the mode turns to the waiting mode.
･ In order to get a proper wide view image the
image should be depicted clearly up to deep
region within the display width as shown in
Fig.5.3-1.
・In this mode besides the function menu it is
possible to select keys (1), (5), (12), (13), (15),
(18), (19), (20) and (21).
Fig. 5.3-1 Image in PAUSE
b) REC: Image capturing mode
･ In this mode the wide view image is produced
by moving the probe.
･ Image capturing is started by pressing 7
of the function menu in the image capture
waiting mode(PAUSE).
･ In case the image producing accuracy can not
be kept while producing the wide view image,
a status “REV” is displayed.
･ In this mode besides the function menu it is
possible to select keys (5), (18), and (21).
Fig. 5.3-2 REC image
c) STOP image display mode

･ In this mode the produced wide view image is
manipulated.
･ Rotating display, image saving, captured an
original image display and so on are done.
･ When below mentioned operations are perform
-ed, the status turns to this mode.
- Freeze ON
- During the image capturing mode (REC) of
function menu is operated. 7
･ In this mode besides the function menu it is

possible to select keys (11), (14), (15), (16), (17),
(18), (21), (23) and (24).
Fig. 5.3-3 STOP image
5-2 Q1E-EZ0472
＜Caution＞
･ When the probe switch over key (5) is selected, WideView function is
enforcedly terminated in all modes.
REC REC
･ 1 and 2 keys (22) can be selected in all modes depending upon
the set conditions. (Refer to the equipment Instruction Manual, Item 7.9.)
5.4 Image capture

(1) Set the mode to the image capture waiting mode (PAUSE).
(2) Put the probe on the target part for examination and display the capture starting position.
(3) Start the capture with of function menu, etc.
7
(4) Move the probe slowly on the region you intend to display.
＜Caution＞
1. At first the moving direction of probe is automatically recognized. So, if
you start to produce the wide view image after you start to move the
probe, it is possible to display the wide view image smoothly.
2. If it becomes difficult to keep the producing accuracy of wide view image,
a warning display “REV” blinks at lower right part of image. To avoid
this move the probe slowly.
3. When you move the probe, be careful not to shift it to short axis
direction.
(5) Wide view image production is finished when either of function menu is pressed or
the status turns to FreezeON. 7
＜Caution＞
If the probe is put away from the target region during the wide view image
production, the display will be rumpled. The probe, therefore, should be put
away from the target after the image production is finished.
(6) By releasing Freeze the wide view image display is cleared, and the mode returns to above said
PAUSE mode.
5.5 Wide View function

In STOP mode it is possible to change the display status of wide view image obtained by [5.4 Image
capture].
(1) Rotating display
It is possible to rotate the wide view image by utilizing Angle encoder.
If priority order of probe is given to the probe mark, switch over it by Angle toggle. (Refer to
the equipment Instruction Manual.)
(2) Image enlarging/reducing display

It is possible to display the wide view image in enlarged or reduced manner.
5-3 Q1E-EZ0472
ZOOM
When key is pressed, the mode turns to Enlarging/Reducing mode and the display
magnification ratio can be changed by toggle switch. (Refer to the equipment Instruction
DEPTH/MAG
Manual, Item 5.2.6.)
Also, it is possible to move the image up and down or right to left by the trackball.
When key is pressed again, this mode is finished.
ZOOM
(3) Cine memory display

It is possible to display the wide view image and original image simultaneously.
1) By pressing the function menu (toggle 3) the mode can be changed to the cine memory
mode so that the wide view image is displayed at left side and the original image is
displayed at right side on the monitor.
2) Yellow frame displayed on the wide view image indicates the position of the original image
within the wide view image.
By under mentioned operation it is possible to move the position of displayed image.
･ When the trackball is used, the position can be moved freely.
･ When the function menu (toggle 4) is pressed, the yellow frame moves automatically
from present position to the last position.
3) When the function menu (toggle 3) is pressed again, the mode returns to normal image
display mode.
(4) Change of body mark display position

In case the body mark is displayed overlapped with the wide image display, it is possible to
change its position by the function menu (toggle 2). (Refer to the scanner manual.)
5.6 Image saving

Wide view images can be saved in BMP,TIFF or JPEG type by using (S-WRITE) key. (Ref.
to the equipment Instruction Manual, Section 9)
5.7 Comment entry

On the wide view image it is possible to display characters by entering them from keyboard by
using Character key. (Refer to the equipment Instruction Manual, Item 6.1)
Also, by using Anno−
tation key it is possible to enter characters as annotation on the wide view
image. (Refer to the equipment Instruction Manual, Item 6.2)
5-4 Q1E-EZ0472
5.8 Measurement
It is possible to perform Caliper measurement and Trace measurement of the wide view image by
using Caliper key and Trace key.
CALIP TRACE
All measurements except the histogram in B-mode among menus displayed by Meas key
MEAS MENU
.
1
can be applied to the wide view image. (Refer to the Instruction Manual, Section 11.)
＜Caution＞
- If the manipulation in reversed direction is during the wide view image
production, “REV” mark is displayed. When this mark is appeared, it is
impossible to keep the image producing accuracy and imposible to perform
the measurement.
- Measurement precision within error
1) Distance: 10%
2) Area: 20%
3) Volume: 30%
But upon error is increased to the lotate image and the position scrolled
image. There are possible to have large upon error for usage of condition,
operation and body of subject. As it has the reason, do not have to exam
for using only result of the measurement.
5-5 Q1E-EZ0472
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
In this chapter counter measures for the trouble occurred when the wide view image display
software is used are described.
- An error message is displayed when the WideView is started so that it is impossible

to start it normally.
Cause 1: Display setting on the work station is set to 256 colors or to High Color (16 bits).
Counter measure: Set the display setting to True Color.
Cause 2: There is a possibility that the installation of graphic board has been done incorrectly.
Counter measure: Need to install the graphic-board software again.
- A message for confirmation is displayed.
Cause 1: This message is displayed when the memory area for wide view image or original
image is full.
Counter measure: Adjust the moving scope of probe.
6-1 Q1E-EZ0472
Chapter 7 Specifications
7.1 Specifications of software

7.1.1 Compatible probe:
Linear and convex types
7.1.2 Operating conditions of scanner:

B-mode single image
Pan-zooming
Other optional functions should be disabled.
FreezeOFF
7.1.3 Specifications of display
(1) Display mode:
Real time display of wide view image
(2) Display function:
Variable size (1 to 3 times, Auto-scaling)
Rotation of display
Cine memory display
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice for improving the equipment
performance.
7-1 Q1E-EZ0472
E
SM-0425 P /
PARTS LIST
EUB-6500
HMSA July 2003

SM-0425 P /
CONFIDENTIALITY : This material contains Proprietary information of Hitachi Medical

Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or reproduced without the prior
written permission of the Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright c Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2002. All right reserved.
SM-0425 P /
1. CART1
3 / 22
SM-0425 P /
1. CART1
KEY No. PARTS NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS
1 7215979A CART/6500 1
2 7312175B CASTER/6500 4
3 7415673A HANDLE/6500 2
4 7416593A MINI CATCH/6500 1
5 7416590A CASE DOOR/6500 1
6 7319012A VCR BASE/6500 1
7 7319011A OP-PLATE/6500 1
8 7319019A TRAY/6500 1
9 7416594A CN-COVER/6500 1
10 7415783A F-SPONGE A/6500 1
11 7415784A F-SPONGE B/6500 1
12 1434754A ADJUSTING KNOB 1
13 1427110A SLIDING PLATE B 1
14 144095XA KNOB WASHER 1
15 1416371A SLIDING PLATE A 2
16 1469374A HANGER BASE/6500 1
17 7416607A F-BLIND PLT/6500 1
18 7416605A BLIND PLT A/6500 1
19 7416606A BLIND PLT B/6500 1
20 7416610A CW PANEL/6500 1
21 7416611A CW SHIELD/6500 1
22 7417170A CW UNIT/6500 1
23 7416614A ECG PANEL/EK23 1 EZU-EK23
24 7416615A ECG SHIELD/EK23 1 EZU-EK23
25 7417171A ECG UNIT/EK23 1 EZU-EK23
26 7416609A ECG BLIND/6500 1
27 7416595A FD PLATE/6500 1
28 7312002A MOD UNIT 1
29 7315074A FD UNIT 1
30 J8310501 OUTLET NC-183C 4 220-240V
31 7416600A OUT-PNL(E)/6500 1 220-240V
32 7416601A OUT-PNL SLD/6500 1
33 7319732A OUTLET(E)/6500 1 AC230V
34 J8310801 OUTLET 8200-I 2 100-120V
35 7416599A OUT-PNL(N)/6500 1 100-120V
4 / 22
SM-0425 P /
36 7319731A OUTLET(N)/6500 1 AC100V

37 7319731B OUTLET(U)/6500 1 AC120V
38 7319018A CN-PANEL/6500 1
39 7510159A CN-PCB/6500 1
40 7416603A CN-SHIELD/6500 1
41 7417168A CN-PNL UNIT/6500 1
42 7216682A P.S. HM-071C 1 AC100V
43 7216682B P.S. HM-071CE 1 AC230V
44 7319377B P.S. HM-071C 1 AC120V
45 7320729A AIR FILTER/6500 2
46 7320729B FUSE 6.3A/250V 1 100-120V
47 7320729C FUSE 3.15A/250V 1 220-240V
48 7320729D FUSE 1.6A/250V 1
49 K214A116 BRKER 100V/6500 1 100-120V
50 K214A117 BRKER 230V/6500 1 220-240V
51 7317898A SW-CABLE/6500 1
52 7415755A SP-CABLE/6500 2
53 7217204A CART USA/6500 1 USA
54 7417919A CN-COVER/6500USA 1 USA
5 / 22
SM-0425 P /
2. CART2
6 / 22
2. CART2 SM-0425 P /
1 7319017A TOP SHEILED/6500 1

2 J839A106 FG CLAMP/6500 1
3 7319215E CORE/6500 1
4 7510155A MB PCB/6500 1
5 7319013A TOP SHASSIS/6500 1
6 7319014A BTM SHASSIS/6500 1
7 1481564B GUIDE 3.5MM 4 DBF
8 J8991105 GUIDE 50-6030 22
9 7416598A SLD PLATE/6500 2
10 7319015A PCB COVER/6500 1
11 7416827A PCB FAN SET/6500 1
12 1475231A FAN NET/6500 1
13 7415787A PCB RUBBER/6500 1
14 7319016A BTM FAN PLT/6500 1
15 7416828A BTM FAN SET/6500 1
16 7416604A PS COVER/6500 1
17 J836A048 GND TERMINAL 1
18 7416602A MT PANEL/6500 1
19 J8320206 OUTLET 8210-I 1
21 7215984A REAR COVER/6500 1
22 7416608A REAR PLATE/6500 1
23 7415785A REAR SPONGE/6500 1
24 2455033A CORD HOLDER 1
25 7415786A AIR FILTER/6500 1
26 7317754A PRB TOP SPT/6500 1
27 7415963A PRB BTM SPT/6500 1
28 7217207A R-COVER/6500USA 1 USA
29 7418211A R-PLATE/6500USA 1 USA
7 / 22
SM-0425 P /
3. KEYBOARD
8 / 22
SM-0425 P /
3. KEYBOARD
1 7319385B KEYBOARD UNIT(E) 1 English
2 7319385C KEYBOARD UNIT(F) 1 French

3 7320775B KB COVER(E) 1 English
4 7320775C KB COVER(F) 1 French
5 7320775D KNOB SET 1
6 7320775F VOL KNOB SET 1
7 7320775J RUBBER KEY SET-E 1 English
8 7320775K RUBBER KEY SET-F 1 French
9 7320775L PADDLE SET 1
10 7320775M ENCORDER 5
11 7320775N PDL RUBBER SET 1
12 7320775P KB PCB 1
13 7320775Q KBIF PCB 1
14 7320775R TB PLATE 1
15 7320775S TRACK BALL 1
9 / 22
SM-0425 P /
4. PC UNIT
10 / 22
SM-0425 P /
4. PC UNIT
1 7216694A PC UNIT1/6500 1
2 7215983A PC RACK/6500 1
3 7416847A PC RAIL/6500 2
4 7416597A HD PLATE/6500 1
5 7312326A HD UNIT 1
6 7319729A PCMB1/6500 1
7 7319181A MEMORY PCB 1
8 K641A005 PCMB BATTERY 1
9 7312619A CPU SET1/6500 1
10 7412385A VIDEO PCB 1
11 7415080B PCI-VME2 PCB 1
12 7416829A PC FAN /6500 1
13 7416596A PC FAN PLT/6500 1
14 1475231A FAN NET/6500 2
15 7315726A SCSI BRD/PI1 1 EZU-PI1
16 7315728A NETWORK BRD/PI2 1 EZU-PI2
17 7416781A CAPTURE BRD /PI3 1 EZU-PI3
11 / 22
SM-0425 P /
5. COVER
12 / 22
SM-0425 P /
5. COVER
1 7112095A S-COVER L/6500 1

2 7112096A S-COVER R/6500 1
3 7112097A B-COVER L/6500 1
4 7112098A B-COVER R/6500 1
5 7112099A OPTION BASE/6500 1
6 7112100A BUMPER/6500 1
7 7111880A PRB HOLDER/6500 1
8 L931A049 HOLDER KNOB/6500 2
9 7215817A F-COVER/6500 1
10 7215818A TOP COVER/6500 1
11 7415788A SW LABEL/6500 1
12 7417225A UREA SCREW L=6 4
13 7417225C UREA SCREW L=10 8
13 / 22
SM-0425 P /
6. PCB
14 / 22
SM-0425 P /
6. PCB
KEY NO. PARTS NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS
1 7319166A PRB-SW UNIT/6500 1

2 7510942A PRB PCB/6500 1
3 7510943A AWP PCB/6500 1
4 7412403A PRB PLATE/6500 2
5 7319020A PRB SHLD F/6500 1
6 7319021A PRB SHLD R/6500 1
7 7510592B CWBUF PCB/ST4 1 EZU-ST4
8 7510590C CWREC PCB/ST4 1 EZU-ST4
9 UoF181 CWREC PCB/CW2 1 EZU-CW2
10 7510948A DBF1 PCB/6500 1
11 7510498B DBF2 PCB/6500 1
12 7510835A CONT PCB(N)/6500 1 NTSC
13 7510835C CONT PCB(P)/6500 1 PAL,USA
14 7510957A DVP PCB/6500 1
15 7510961A DCSP PCB/6500 1
16 7510143C BWDSC PCB/6500 1
17 7510167B CFMDSC PCB/6500 1
18 UoF233 CINE PCB/MM16 1 EZU-MM16
19 UoF234 CINE PCB/MM17 1 EZU-MM17
20 7510946A BIO PCB/EK23 1 EZU-EK23
21 7319339A POWER PCB/6500 1
15 / 22
SM-0425 P /
7. ACCESSORIES
16 / 22
7. ACCESSORIES SM-0425 P /
PARTS NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS
1 7416612A VCR CASE/6500 1

2 7416613A CASE PLATE/6500 1
3 1384039B PRB HANGER/6500 1
4 F9701301 FIXING RUBBER/6500 4
5 J8611101 ECG CLIP 1 EZU-EK23
6 S290A007 BELT/6500 6
7 M6450316 M3 SCREW 4
8 7417225A UREA SCREW L=6 4
10 1469554B MO DISK (230MB) 1
11 13777XXF DUST COVER 1
12 7313483U CLOTH FOR CRT 1
13 S2909001 ULTRASOUND JELLY 2
14 J8329001 2P-3P ADAPTER 1
15 N3100406 SOCKET SCREW(M6) 1
16 N3100404 SOCKET SCREW(M4) 1
17 J8390813 COAD BAND 5
18 J8390755 CABLE TIE 10
19 7313516A CU EXTIN.BOARD2 1
20 Uof197 PROBE HANGER/TH4 1 EZU-TH4
21 E910A037 POWER CORD 1 100/120v
22 E910A038 POWER CORD 1 230v
23 1477344A EARTH CORD 1
24 UoF907 EZU-RO1 1 EZU-RO1
25 E9101601 ECG CABLE 1 EZU-EK23
26 7315798A CABLE/Pi1 1 EZU-Pi1
29 UoF582 EZU-FS1 1 EZU-FS1
30 UoF230 EZU-FS2 1 EZU-FS2
31 7412783A MO DISK (640MB) 1
32 7313516B CU EXTIN.BOARD3 1 PRB,AWP
17 / 22
SM-0425 P /
18 / 22
SM-0425 P /
8. MONITOR
19 / 22
SM-0425 P /
8. MONITOR
1 7313483N FILTER/MT24 1
2 7313483B B-CVR/MT24 1
3 7313483C TILT/MT24 1
4 7313483D CRT/MT24 1
5 7313483E BASE/MT24 1
6 7313483F SIDE/MT24 1
7 7313483G FTG/MT24 1
8 7313483H MAIN BOARD/MT24 1
9 7321445A VIDEO BRD/MT24-1 1
10 7313483K CONT BRD/MT24 1
11 7321445B VR BOARD/MT24-1 1
12 7313483M LED BOARD/MT24 1
13 7313483V BEZEL/MT24 1
14 7313483P KNOB/MT24 1
15 7313483Q AC FILTER/MT24 1
16 7313483R AC CABLE/MT24 1
17 7313483S SIGNAL/MT24 1
18 7313483T FUSE/MT24 1
20 / 22
SM-0425 P /
9. POWER SUPPLY
⑨ ⑩ ⑲
⑱
⑰
⑫ ⑭
⑮⑯
⑪
②③
⑬
① ④
①
⑤
⑦⑧
21 / 22
SM-0425 P /
9. POWER SUPPLY
1 7320729A FILTER /071C 1

2 7320729B FUSE 6.3A/250V 1 100-120V
3 7320729C FUSE 3.15A/250V 1 200-240V
4 7320729D FUSE 1.6A/250V 1
5 7320729E BONNET/071C 1
6 7320729F SHIELD PLT/071C 1
7 7320729G TRANSFOMER/07C 1 100~120V
8 7320729H TRANSFOMER/07C 1 220~240V
9 7320729J A-LV PCB/071C 1
10 7320729K A-HV PCB/071C 1
11 7320729L SUB-PS BD/071C 1
12 7320729M MC-DC PCB/071C 1
13 7320729N MC-AC PCB/071C 1
14 7320729P SHASSIS/071C 1
15 7320729Q FAN L ASSY/071C 1
16 7320729R FAN R ASSY/071C 1
17 7320729S FILTER PCB/071C 1
18 7320729T CN-CASE/071C 1
19 7320729U CN-COVER/071C 1
22 / 22
8500 / 6500 / 5500 FUNCTION MATRIX
FUNCTIONS 8500 6500 5500

HI COMPOUND X
HI RES (Adaptive Imaging) X
Auto endocardial tracing X X
TDI (Tissue Doppler Imaging) X
STANDARD
Raw Data Freeze X

dTHI (Tissue Harmonic Imaging) X X X*
WPI (Wideband Pulse Inversion) X X
Doppler realtime measurement X X
Doppler baseline shift in freeze X X X
Directional CFA X X X
User programmable keys X X X
Cine Standard MM16 Standard
Cine + ODM Standard MM17 N/A
ODM only N/A N/A OD2
STCW unit ST3 ST4 ST5
Pencil CW unit CW2 CW2 CW4
ECG unit EK24 EK24 EK25
Digital capture Pi5 Pi3 not needed
Wide View (HI SPAN) WS3 WS2 WS4
Stress echo SE3 SE1 N/A
OPTIONS
3D Freehand 3D3 3D2 3D4

3D Magnetic Tracking 3D2S 3D2S 3D2S
SCSI I/F Pi1 Pi1 Pi1
Network Standard Pi2 Pi6
DICOM Transfer FC6 FC5 FC7
DICOM Print FC6P FC5P FC7P
DICOM Worklist FC6W FC5W FC7W
Fujinon I/F unit MS6 MS6 MS6
Contrast CH4 CH3 N/A
Windows XP X X X
DVDRW, CDRW, MO DVD, MO option DVD, MO option CD, MO option
* dTHI has three steps3
CONFIDENTIAL
HIVISION MATRIX 111003 HITACHI MEDICAL SYSTEM AMERICA

Hi Vision 6500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hi Vision 6500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

HITACHI MEDICAL CORPORATION

CONFIDENTIALITY This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi

1.1 Product Overview ......................................................................................................... l- 1

Section 2 Safety .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. ... 2 - 1

Section 3 Operation .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . ... . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. 3 - 1

Section 4 Principle of Operation.. ............................................................................................. .4 . 1

4.3 BIO Unit EZU-EK23 ................................................................................................. 4 . 23

4.6 Cine Memory unit EZU-MM16, MM17.. .................................................................... .4 . 30

Section 5 Power Unit.. ................................................................................................................ 5. 1

5.1 General and Circuit Description ................................................................................. 5. 1

Section 6 Monitor Unit.. ............................................................................................................ .6 . 1

6.1 Composition .................................................................................................................. 6. 1

6.4 Description of Operation.. ........................................................................................... .6 . 5

6.5 Adjustment.. .................................................................................................................. 6 . 10

6.6 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... .6 . 16

Section 7 Connector Arrangement.. .......................................................................................... 7. 1

7.1 Connector Arrangement.. ............................................................................................. 7. 1

Section 9 Maintenance ............................................................................................... . .............. .9 . 1

Section 10 Parts List . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . lo- 1

1.1 Product Overview

0) True Digital Architecture

(2) Improved resolution

(3) Improved color frame rate and image quality

(4) Applicable to multiple uses

(5) Non-interlaced monitor as a standard

(6) WindowsNT is adopted as an OS.

(7) Easy-to-use keyboard

(1) Convex type : 2.0- 7.5MHz

2. Image examination mode

(1) Standard configuration : B, B/B, B/M, M

NOTE: Refer to Instruction Manual for details

1.3 Environmental conditions

(1) Environmental conditions in operation

* Ambient temperature : +lO”C- +35”c

(2) Daily storage conditions

* Ambient temperature : -lO”C- +40°c

(3) Environmental conditions for transportation (in packing)

* Ambient temperature : -lO”C- +6O”C

2) Secure the peripheral devices to the equipment. If using the equipment

* For the scanner unit of NTSC(EUA) W display system

These devices meet IEC60601-1 compliance.

2.1 Classification of the Equipment

2.2 Cautions in Operating the Equipment

2.3 Cautions in Maintaining the Equipment

Table 2.3- 1 Fuses of Equipment

Monitor 1 FlOO 3.OA I AC250V I

Protective earth (ground)

Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS

Off (power disconnection from the mains)

On (power connection to the mains)

TYPE B APPLIED PART

TYPE BF APPLIED PART

Defibrillator-roof TYPE BF APPLIED PART

3.1 General Operation

3.2 Special Operation for Service Personnel

3.2.1 Initialization of system environment

(8) Image Filing

(101 Auto Freeze

(12) Image Print

(15) Hosp. Name

(16) Char. Clear

(18) Logo Mark

(2) Select “Copy” in “Backup data”.